
Class_ 

,04 

Book 



By bequest of 

William Lukens Shoemaker 



^>\H 



^ 



^V\N 



^ s 



\ 3 



\; 










■*V 



Xj V ^ 




OLLENDORFF'S 

SEf METHOD 



OF LEARNING TO 



READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK 



GEEMAN LANGUAGE 



TO WHICH IS ADDED 



A SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 



GERMAN GRAMMAR, 



G. J. ABLER, A.M., 


PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSIT1 
OF THE CITY OF NEW -YORK. 



NEW-YORK: 
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY. 

1853. 







Ekteree according £o Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by 

D. APPLETON & CO., 

a tiaa Clerk's Office of tba £ ? 3teict Court for the Southern District of New-"*** 

Gift. 
W. L. Shoemaker 
7 S f 06 



NOTICE 
A Key to the exercises of this Grammar is published in a separate lotarae 



PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION. 



In presenting to the American Public a new and improved edu 
tion of Ollendorff's New Method, it would seem to be only 
necessary to state what alterations or additions have been 
made. To say anything in commendation of the book itself 
appears almost gratuitous ; for the extensive circulation which 
it now enjoys in England, and the increasing demand for it in 
this country, its costliness notwithstanding, constitute the strong 
est evidence in its favour. The fact that Ollendorff has been 
sought after with avidity, whilst many other Grammars of high 
merit have met with but a slow and cold reception, justifies the 
inference that, as a book of instruction, it presents facilities 
which in similar works were either entirely wanting or but 
imperfectly afforded. 

Even the excellent and highly scientific Grammar, written 
for the use of Englishmen by the genial Becker himself, who 
by his ©rgam'Sm, his Seutfcfye 2Bortbtlburtg, and subsequently 
by his Seutfcfye ©rammattf, has made such valuable contribu- 
tions to the Philosophy of Language, and has almost revolu- 
tionized the terminology of Grammar in his own country, has, 
in the space of fifteen years, not even undergone a second edi- 
tion, and is now entirely out of print. Surely, Becker has de- 
served a better fate among scholars at least ! 



IV 

The success of Ollendorff is unquestionably due to his 
method, by which he has made the German? heretofore noto- 
riously difficult to foreigners, accessible to the capacity of all, 
young or old, learned or unlearned. Instead of pre -supposing 
a familiarity with English Grammar in the pupil, and then 
presenting a synthetic view of the principles of the language, 
as is commonly done, he begins apparently without any system, 
with the simplest phrases, from which he deduces the rules, 
until gradually and almost imperceptibly he makes the pupil 
master of the etymology and syntax of every part of speech. 
The rules are, as it were, concealed amid the multitude of 
exercises which are added to each lesson, and which serve to 
fortify the learner in the princip es he has already acquired. 
Another characteristic feature of the book, and one in which 
its practical merit chiefly consists is, that the examples on 
which the rules are based, and those which are intended to 
illustrate the rules, are not derived from the German Classics ; 
they are neither the ideal language of Poetry, nor the rigorous 
language of Science, but of Zife, — short sentences, such as one 
would be most likely to use in conversing in a circle of friends, 
or in writing a letter. 

Special prominence is given from the beginning to the end 
of the book to the idioms of the language, as it were the Ger- 
man side of the German— a most important element in the 
acquisition of any language. In the beginning of the book 
the exercises are of necessity very brief and simple, and the 
Author, according to his own confession (page 351), has of- 
ten sacrificed logical accuracy to his eagerness for thoroughly 
grounding the pupil in the principles of inflection* and construe- 
tion previously laid down. As the pupil advances the exer- 



cises become longer and more complicated. The same phrases 
are often repeated and thrown into new combinations, and 
constant reference is made to previous parts of the work. It 
is thus that Ollendorff gradually introduces at once the ety- 
mology and syntax of German Grammar. His method is so 
lucid, that no one can go through with the exerc'ses — provided 
he be guided by a competent master — without acquiring such 
a familiarity with the principles of the language, and such a 
stock of words and idioms as will enable him to speak and to 
write it with considerable facility. 

The book, as it is now presented to the public, is from the 
Frankfort edition, which, in accuracy of expression, as far as 
the English is concerned, in the wording of the rules as well 
as in typographical arrangement, is so far superior to the Lon- 
don edition, that it seems to be the work of a different author. 
So striking was found to be the difference between the two edi- 
tions that the Editor, who at first was not in possession of a 
German copy, and had already put into the hands of the printer 
a considerable portion of the London copy revised, deemed it 
afterwards his duty to recommence the stereotyping of the book 
on the basis of the German. 

The Editor has ventured to make such alterations as he 
thought would give additional value to the book. Instead of 
devoting two lessons to a mere mechanical explanation of Ger- 
man writing, as was done in the other editions, he simply pre* 
fixed to the book, on one page, an improved form of the 
alphabet, and a specimen of German current hand, from which 
the learner can at once perceive how the different letters are 
made and united into words. The orthography of the German, 
which in some cases was antiquated, has been conformed to 



the most recent and best authorities, chiefly to Heyse, whose 
grammars are at present, perhaps, more extensively used in 
many than any others, in some instances, where perspi- 
; i y would otherwise have suffered, the phfaseology of rules 
ijeen amended. Wherever the English was crabbed 
Bet hi the exercises h has been revised and a 
has been taken to present an edition free iV 
srrurs, which often, in works of this kind, are the 
[less and most discouraging perplexity to begin n 
this connection the Editor would make special mention of 
ftlr. Edw r . Stohlmann, corrector of the press, whose fidelity is 
worthy of ail confidence and commendation. 

By the addition of the Systematic Outline, the Editoi 
lias had a twofold object in view. In a work like Ollendorff's., 
in which each lesson contains a variety of exercises, which 
have no necessary connection with each other, and in which 
the different parts of speech are not systematically classified, 
but scattered in every part of the book, a comprehensive index 
Would have been indispensable. Without it, the book would 
have been useless for the purposes of reference, and a complete 
and connected view of the law r s which govern the inflection 
of any tne pail of speech would have been equally impossible. 
It seemed to him, that an attempt at a complete index to the mat- 
ter contained in the book would be a difficult task, and unsatis- 
factory in the end. He has therefore subjoined, as a substitute, 
an outline of Grammar, in which the inflection of words is 
treated briefly, but yet with completeness, and where the learner 
may find in different language perhaps, and in rigorously sys- 
eematic connection, the principles which he met with in the 



Vll 
#revious part cf the work, besides much that will be new t& 



second and princ f making such large addi 

To the book was to adapt it to the use of those who aim, 
a practical knowledge of* the language, but desire i. 

tine or literary purposes cnly. As persons of this descrip. 

are commonly men of liberal culture, habituated U 

uyof Grammar, and the study of language, they are 

rally impatient of beginning at once the reading of some 
favourite author, and they are aware too, that for them the 
shortest road to reach the goal is to master at once the elements 
of Grammar. As the Author himself has had considerable 
experience in guiding such to a knowledge of the German, he 
has endeavoured to meet their wants by bringing within the 
compass of about one hundred and thirty pages a concise ana- 
lysis of the different parts of speech, with copious paradigms to 
the declensions and conjugations. Though the Outline is brief! 
it will be found that the inflection of the declinable parts. oi 
speech, as well as the gender of substantives, is unfolded 
more fully than in Grammars of much larger size. The 
materials are from the best sources, chiefly from the works 01 
Becker and Heyse. Since it was impossible to add a separate 
Syntax without greatly increasing the bulk of the book, the use 
and government of each part of speech has been briefly point- 
ed out in connection with its etymology. 

The " Table of Classification of the Irregular Verbs," and 
also the " Government of Verbs," have, after a thorough revi- 
sion and some additions to the list, been adopted from the Lon- 
don edition. The Author regrets that the limits of the work 
would not admit of a more extended treatment of the Parti. 



Vlll 

cles. A clear and thorough analysis of the Adverbs, the Pre* 
positions, and Conjunctions, in which the Greek-like power of 
the German chiefly resides, with a sufficient number of exam 
pies to make it intelligible, has never yet been given to the 
English student. It is believed, however, that no one will 
suffer any practical inconvenience from this deficiency, as par- 
ticular attention is paid to the use of the particles in other 
parts of the book. 

With respect to his " Systematic Outline," the Editor would 
in conclusion say, that he feels confident that it possesses every 
desirable condition of a complete introduction to the reading of 
the German. May it contribute to spread the study of a Ian- 
guage, which in richness and flexibility is the acknowledged 
superior of all its modern sisters — which in creations of Art 
and in works of Science yields precedence to none — of a 
language which contains in itself the germs of its own repro- 
duction, and of an endless development — which still is, as ft 
#7er has been, r^efontert, ungemt'fcfyt unb mtr ftcfy fett>ergletc§l" 



G.J. A. 

September, 1845. 



yew-York University,! 



CONTENTS 



OF THE 



SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 



Par 

Parts of Speech, $ 1 . . 377 

Cases, §2 377 

ARTICLES. 

Declension of the articles, § 3. 378 

The article, before proper names, § 5 379 

" before abstract substantives and names of materials, § 6. 379 

" before common nouns, § 7. 380 

" " idiomatic use of, $ 8. 380 

" in sentences, § 9. . ^ 381 

" contracted with prepositions, § 10 381 

SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 

Classification of nouns, § 11. . . 382 

I. Their Gender, determined by their signification, $ 13 and § 14. . 383 
determined by their termination, § 15— § 20. . 383 

Gender of compound substantives, § 20 386 

" of foreign substantives, § 21 " . 387 

II. Number. Rules for the formation of the plural, § 22, § 23 and § 24. 383 

Nouns employed in the plural only, § 27 390 

Nouns with two forms of the plural, § 28. . . . . . 390 

III. Inflection. Declension of common and abstract nouns, § 30. . 391 

Earlier Declension, % 31-$ 38 . 391 

Later Declension, § 38-§ 42 .397 

Declension of foreign substantives, § 42. ■'.■■'. . . ,400 

Declension of proper names of persons, § 43-§ (8. . 401 

" " « of places, § 48. . 404 

IV. Government of substantives, § 49-§ 52. . . 405. 

ADJECTIVES. 
Classification of ad]£c f ive % § 5£-§ 55- . . 406 



X 

Tagi 

I. Inflection, $ 55. First declension, § 56 4LS 

Second declension, § 57 and § 58. . 410 

Third declension, $ 59. . . 411 

Observations on the three declensions, § 60 and § 61. . 412 

II. Comparison, terminational and compound, § 62-§ 66. . . 414 

irregular and defective, § 66 and § 67. . . . 415 

of adverbs, § 68 416 

III. Use and Government of Adjectives, § 70. . , 417 

Adjectives with the infinitive, § 72 ; with the genitive, § 73 ; with 
the dative, § 74 ; with the accusative, § 74. iii. . . . 418 

NUMERALS. 

Classification of numerals, § 75. 419 

List of Cardinals and Ordinals, § 76. 420 

Observations on their inflection and use, § 77-§ 80. . . . 421 
Compound Numerals: Distributives, Iteratives, &c, Dimidiatives, 

&c, $ 80 and §81 .423 

Indefinite Numerals, § 82; implying number, §83; quantity, § 84 ; 

number and quantity both, § 85 424 

The use of numerals, § 86 and § 87. ... 426 

PRONOUNS. 

Classification of pronouns, § 88. 427 

I. Personal Pronouns, § 89 ; including reflexive, § 90, Obs. 3, and 

reciprocal pronouns, § 90, Obs. 4. 427 

Indefinite personal pronouns, § 92. 429 

II. Possessive Pronouns, § 93; conjunctive, § 94. . . . 430 
Absolute possessive pronouns, § 95 *' >'. 431 

III. DexMonstrative Pronouns, their inflection and use, § 97-§ 99. 433 

IV. Determinative Pronouns, § 100-§ 103. .... 434 
V. Relative Pronouns, § 103-§ 106. . . 435 

VI. Interrogative Pronouns, § 106-§ 109. . . . 437 

VERBS. 

Classification of Verbs — Transitive, § 109; Intransitive, § 110; 

Reflexive, § 113; Impersonal, § 114; Auxiliary, § 115. . . 439 

Personal terminations, § 117; moods, § 118; tenses, § 119. . . . 442 
The infinitives, § 120 ; participles, their formation and signification, § 121. 442 
The omission of the prefix <j <" in the perfect participle, § 122. . 443 

Auxiliary Verbs of Tenses, their use in the formation of compound 

tenses, § 123 .... 443 

Rules for the formation of compound tenses, § 124 444 



xi 



Conditionals, § 125. . 

Conjugation of the auxiliary \erbs: I)a£en, 
129 



! 127 ; fem, § 128 ; tterben, 



§ 129 



of 



conju- 



155. 



Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary tya&ett, § 131. 
Intransitive verbs which assume the auxiliary fetn, § 132. 
Conjugation of Verbs, §134; regular and irregular mode 

gation, § 132. 

Table of terminations, § 140. 

Formation of the tenses of the passive voice, § 142. 
Conjugation of Transitive Verbs, § 143. 
" Reflexive Verbs, § 144. 
" Intransitive Verbs, § 145. 
" Impersonal Verbs, § 146. 
Compound Verbs — separable and inseparable, § 148— § 
. Conjugation of compound verbs, .... 
Syntax of the Verb — agreement, § 155— § 159. . 
Use of the tenses and moods, § 159— § 165. 
The infinitive without £tt, § 167 and § 168. . 
The infinitive with \ u, § 169-§ 172. 
Use of the participles, § 172-§ 178. 

ADVERBS. 

Definition and. classification of adverbs, § 178. 477 

Adverbs of Place and of Time, §179 477 

" Modality, of Quantity, of Quality or Manner, 

of Intensity, . 478 

Signification of the adverbs f) in and *} er, § 180 478 

The pronominal adverbs b a and ro 0, anci their compounds, . . .479 
Comparison of adverbs, see § 68. 



Pagt 

444 

445 
454 
454 

455 
457 
458 
459 
463 
464 
466 
467 
469 
470 
471 
472 
473 
475 



PREPOSITIONS. 

Definition, § 181 ; list of German prepositions, 
Prepositions whic^i govern the genitive, § 184. 

" " " the dative, § 185. . 

" " " the accusative, § 186. 



. 480 
. 480 
. 481 
. 481 

Prepositions governing both the dative and accusative, § 187. . . 482 

Three prepositions which govern the genitive and dative both, § 188. . 482 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

Classification of conjunctions — copulative, disjunctive, adversative, con- 
ditional, concessive, &c., § 191 483 



xli 

INTERJECTIONS. 

Pag« 

A. list of German interjections, § 193 . 484 

Observations on their use, .... . 485 



Classification of the Irregular Verbs, . . 486 

A Table of the Sixteen Verbs which are Irregcla? only in 

part, . 48^ . 

Table of Irregular Verbs,, . ... 490-506 I 

The government of verbs, , 506-510 





OLLENDORFF'S 

GERMAN GRAMMAR. 



FIRST lesson.— fete toion. 

OF READING. 

In German every letter is pronounced. Hence it fol* 
lows, that foreigners are able to read the language 
with greater facility : reading may be acquired in one 
lesson. 

PRINTED LETTERS OF THE GERMAN ALPHABET. 

There are in German, as in English, twenty-six let- 
ters, of which we give : 



The Figures, 


T/2e Pronunciation, 


The Power. 




A 










r 






~s 




CAPITALS. 


SMALL LETTERS. 






% 




«/ 




ah, 


a, 


53, 




\ 




bay, 


b, 


% 




<7 




tsay, 


c, 


2>, 




», 




day, 


d, 


€ 




C/ 




a, 


e, 


8/ 




f, 




ef, 


I 


© 




P' 




gay, 


gf 


S, 




9/ 




hah, 


h, 


% 




»/ 




e, 


U 


%* 




i, 




yot, 


3> 


K 




f, 




kah, 


k, 


?, 




i, 




el, 


I, 


Wl, 




m, 




em, 


m, 


% 




n, 




en, 


n, 


©/ 




0/ 




o, 


o, 



* I» print, the Germans have but one capital letter for the vowel i and th* 
■■mao nant j. 



The Figures, The Pronunciation, 


The Powet 




,J\ 








r 




A 




CAPITALS. 


SMALL LETTERS. 






% 




P, 


pay, 


P» 


Q, 




q/ 


koo, 


q> 


% 




f/ 


err, 


r, 


© 




(09/ 


ess, 


s, 


K 




t, 


tay, 


t, 


it, 




«/ 


oo, 


u, 


% 




»/ 


fow, 


v, 


SOB, 




*»/ 


vay, 


w, 


%K>f 




r, 


iks, 


X. 


% 




h 


ypsilon, 


y» 


3, 




h 


tset, 


z. 



Most of the German letters being pronounced as in 
English, we shall only present those that follow a dif- 
ferent pronunciation. 



TABLE OF THOSE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, THE PRONUNCIATION 
OF WHICH IS NOT THE SAME AS IN ENGLISH. 



Figures 

a, 
o 

% 

te,t 

<&, 

an, 
eu, 



Are 



In 




pronounced the English 
as : words : 

made, 
bird,* 

field, 
I, 

boy,|| 



German Examples. 

Setter, fathers, 
£6tt>e, lion. 
©Iiirf,happiness 
28iefe, meadow. 
SBeife, manner. 
fe*)rt, to be. 
^atfer, emperor. 
Sdunte, trees. 
%mte, people. 



* The English word bird does not quite answer to the sound of this vowel , 
it has rather the sound of eu in the French words : feu, coeur, fleur, jeunc, 
peu. 

t There is no sound corresponding to this vowel in English, and, in order to 
learn it well, the pupils must hear it pronounced; it answers to the sound of u 
in the French words: but, nil, vertu. 

4 The method which we have adopted, of placing analogous sounds to- 
gether, will facilitate to learners the study of the pronunciation. There are 
even some provinces in Germany, where & and # are both pronounced a : i\ 
and te, e; et or ety, eu and ait, J. 

U We have only been able to indicate the sound* of the two diphthongs at! 



Figures. Name Are pronounced In the English German Example* 

as : words : 

cm, ah--oo, ou, house, ijcm3, house. 

U, oo, oo, boot, gut, good. 

Of the simple and compound consonants the follow 
ing differ in their pronunciation from the English con* 
sonants : 

& 

g, before a, 0, U, before a consonant, or at the end 
of a syllable, has the sound of k. Ex. Sate, Cato ; 
Sourob, Conrad ; @ur, cure ; Srelut, credit ; ©pectafel, 
noise. Before the other vowels, the letter c is pro- 
nounced like ts. Ex. gafar, Csesar ; ©cere, Cicero ; 
@ere$, Ceres. 

&!, which is called tsay-hah, is pronounced like k : 
1. when at the beginning of a word. Ex. &)0V, choir ; 
(Sfyrontf, chronicle ; (Sfyrifl:, christian ; 2. when followed 
by f or g. Ex. SBucfyfe, box; 90Badf)3, wax. In words 
derived from the French, it preserves the French 
sound. Ex. Sfyarlafan, quack. This consonant, when 
preceded by a, 0, U, is pronounced from the throat. 
Ex. Sad), rivulet ; ?ed), hole ; S3ud), book ; ©pracfye, 
language. Placed any where else, it is articulated 
with a less guttural sound. Ex. SSiicfyer, books ; 33fe(f), 
iron plate ; tdf), I ; ©effect, face. 

#♦ 

©, at the beginning of a syllable, has a hard sound, 
as in the English word go. Ex. ©afce, gift ; ©ott, God ; 
gut, good ; ©{ft, poison. When at the end of a syl- 
lable, it has a medium sound between those of the gut- 
tural df) and f. Ex. £ag, day ; mogltd), possible ; ffug, 
prudent ; (Sfltg, vinegar ; ett)tg, eternal. In words bor- 
rowed from the French, g is pronounced as in French. 
Ex. ?oge, box (in a theatre) , ©eme, genius. 

and eu approximative^ ; their pronunciation is not quite the same, and in o? 
der to become familiar with them, the pupils must hear their master pr* 
lounce them . 




The pronunciation of g cannot be properly acquired, 
unless from the instructor's own lips ; he must there- 
fore make his pupils pronounce the following words : 

©age, tradition. SO^uftgganget, idler. 

Salg, tallow. Soiling, pupil. 

SSerg, mountain. linofi, anguish. 

3nx'tg, dwarf. 2ange, length. 

Caugnen, to deny. Sfftenge, quantity 

(Stcg, victory. (Skfcmg, singing. 

•gafytgfett, capacity. £lang, sound. 

97?6gtid)Mt, possibility. SKtrtg, ring. 

20?agb, maid- servant. Sungftau, virgin. 

Stflagbe, maid-servants. Sunggcfetl, bachelor. 

The letter if is aspirated at the beginning of a sylla- 
ble. Ex. §attb, hand ; jjelb, hero ; $)Ut, hat. It. is 
mute in the middle ' and at the end of a syllable, and 
then it lengthens the vowel that precedes or follows it. 
Ex. S3af)n, road ; J^ofytt, mockery ; gofytt, reward ; lefyrett, 
to teach ; Scaler, crown (coin) ; Mui), cow ; £l)rdne, 
tear ; tfyiUt, to do. 

3 (yot) has the sound of y in the English word you 
Ex. 3<*$V chase ; S&ger. hunter ; jeber, each ; jegt, at 
present. 

EL 
D is always followed by it, and in combination with 
that letter pronounced like kv in English. Ex. Q.uat, 
torment ; Duelte, source. 

©♦ 
@, when initial, has the pronunciation of z in Eng- 
lish. Ex. ©ante, seed ; ©eefe, soul. 

@df) is pronounced like sh in English. Ex. ©djaf, 
sheep ; ©cfyttb, shield. 

$ is pronounced like ss in English Ex. jja#, hatred ; 



■ 



ft)et$, white. This double consonant is compounded of 
f and J, and is called ess-tset. 

§ is compounded of t and J, and has the sound of 
these two consonants combined. Ex. ©d)af3/ treasure ; 
spug, finery. 

S3* 

S3 is sounded like /. Ex. SSater, father ; SSormttltb, 
tutor ; SSotf, people. 

3B is pronounced like an English v and not like w. 
Ex. SSMb, forest ; SOBtefe, meadow. 

3- 

3 has the pronunciation of ts. Ex. 3 a ^/ tooth ; %dt, 
tent. 

EXPLANATION OF SOME SIGNS USED IN THIS BOOK. 

Expressions which vary either in their construction 
Br idiom from the English are marked thus : f. 
A hand (B^**) denotes a rule of syntax or construction. 



SECOND LESSOIS 


\— Zwtiti lection 


* 








Masculine. 


Neuter 


Nominative, 


the. 


Nom. 


ber* 


ba#. 


Genitive, 


of the. 


Gen. 


be& 


beg. 


Dative, 


to the. 


Dat. 


bem* 


bem. 


Accusative, 


the. 


Ace. 


ben. 


bag. 






* To Instructors. — Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils, whi 
should pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The instructor should also 
exercise his pupils by putting the questions to them in various ways. Each 
lesson, except the second, includes three operations : the teacher, in the first 
place, looks over the exercises of the most attentive of his pupils, putting to 
them the questions contained in the printed exercises ; he then dictates 
to them the next lesson ; and lastly puts fresh questions to them on all the 
preceding lessons. The teacher may divide one lesson into two, or two into 
three, or even make two into one, according to the degree of intelligence of 
his pur>ils. 



Have yoi 


il 


Yes, Sir, 


I have. 


Have yoi 


i the hat ? 


Yes, Sir, 


I have the hat. 




The ribbon, 




the salt, 




the table, 




the sugar, 




the paper, 


Obs. 


The Germans 


capital 


letter. 


Nom. 


my. 


Gen. 


of my. 


Dat. 


to my. 


Ace. 


my. 



£oben @te ? 

So, twin £err, tdj fjak. 

£oben <Sie ben |>ut? 

So, mctn £err, let) fjabe ten £ut 

tog 23ont ; 

tog ©0(3 ; 

ten sifd) ; 

ten Sucfet ; 

tog papier. 

begin all substantives with a 



Masculine. Neuter 

Nom. tneuu tnettu 

Gen. memeg* meine$. 

Dat. nteinem* metnem. 

Ace. meutetu mem.. 



^f)V f your 9 is declined like mem* Example : 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



your, 
of your, 
to your. 

your. 

Have you my hat ! 
Yes, Sir, I have your hat. 
Have you my ribbon ! 
I have your ribbon. 



Masculine. 

Sfyrem. 
Sfyren* 

£oben ©te nietnen £ut ? 

So, metn .pert, id) fafce Sfeten #ut. 

£oben (&k mein 23ont ? 

3d) f)ot)C 3t)t 23ont. 



Nom. 
Gen. 

Dat. 

Acq. 



Neuter. 

3f>re*. 
3f)v. 



EXERCISE 1. 

Have you the salt] — Yes, Sir, I have the salt. — Have you your 
salt"? — I have my salt. — Have you the table?— I have the table.— 
Have you my table ! — I have your table. — Have you the sugar!-— 
I have the sugar. — Have you your sugar ! — I have my sugar.—- 
Have you the paper] — I have the paper. — Have you my paper!— 
I have your paper. f 



* 3fyt with a small lettei signifies their, and has the same declension as 
3l;r, your. 

f Pupils desirous of making rapid progress, may compose a great many 
phrases in addition to those we have given them in the exercises ; but they 
must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make 
separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns and verbs, as they 
meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words 
aaore easily, whenthey have occasion to refer to them in writing their lessons. 



THIRD LESSON.— SDritte Uttion. 



SBeldjer, which, has the same declension as bet* 



Masc. 



Neut. 



WJiich. 



Nom. 
Ace. 



ttelcfjer. tt>etd)eg* 
n>eld)en. tt)eld)e£. 



DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE 
ARTICLE, OR A WORD WHICH HAS THE SAME TERMINATION.* 



Nom. the good. 

Gen. of the good. 

Dat. to the good. 

Ace. the good. 



Masc. 

Nom. ber gate* 
Gen. be3 guten. 
Dat. bem guten. 
Ace. ben guten. 



Neut. 

ba$ gate. 
be3 guten* 
bem guten. 
ba$ Qixte* 



Observation. Adjectives vary in their declensior 
when preceded by : mem, my ; Sfyr, your ; or by one of 
the following words : em, a ; fem, no, none ; beut, thy 
fern, his ; tfyr, her ; unfer, our ; @uer, your. Example : 



Masc. 



Neut. 



Nom. my good. 

Gen. of my good. 

Dat. to my good. 

Ace. my good. 



N. mem gutet\ mem gtttes* 

G. meine3 guten, meine3 guten* 

D. meutern guten. metnem guten. 

A. memen guten. mein gute& 



Good, 

bad, 

beautiful or fine, 

ugly, 

great, big or large, 
Have you tbe good sugar? 
Yes, Sir, I have the good sugar 

Have you the fine ribbon] 
I have the fine ribbon. 
Which hat have you ? 
I have my ugrly hat. 
Which ribDon have you? 
I have your fine ribbon. 



fcbtccr>t ; 

fd)ciu 
fja^tkt) ; 
§tcp. 

$aUn @ie ten guten Sucfet ? 

3a, mem £ert, id) \)aU ten guten 

Sudfer. 
£afren (Sic t>a$ fcficne £5anb ? 
3d) Fiabe ta$ fchonc 5*anb. 
SBelftcn £ut tjaben Uu ? 
3d) baOc mctnen fjaf'ltcbcn #ut 
S5McIk$ SBanb Men €ie ? 
3d) l)aU 36* fdtfncS 2Banfc>. 



4s btefer, this ; jener, that, &c 



EXERCISE 2. 

Have you the fine hat ? — Yes, Sir, I have the fine hat.— Have 
you my bad hat] — I have your bad hat. — Have you the bad salt'?— < 
I have the bad salt. — Have you your good salt] — I have my good 
salt. — -Which salt have you ] — I have your good salt. — Which su- 
gar have you] — I have my good sugar. — Have you my good su- 
gar] — I have your good sugar. — W T hich table have you] — I have 
the fine table. — Have you my fine table] — I have your fine table. — 
Which paper have you] — I have the bad paper. — Have you my 
ugly* paper ] — I have your ugly paper. — Which bad hat have you ] 
— I have my bad hat. — Which fine ribbon have you] — I have your 
fine ribbon. 



FOURTH LESSON.— bierte faction. 



It. 





Masc. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


er* 


eg. 


Ace. 


tfym 


e$. 



Not. 
I have not. 
No, Sir. 

Have you the table 1 
No, Sir, I have it not. 
Have you the paper] 
No, Sir, I have it not. 



The stone, 
the cloth, 
the wood, 
the leather, 
the lead, 
the gold, 



SHifrV. 

3d) §aU n t d) t . 
Sftetn, mcin £etr. 
£afren @tc ben Stfd) ? 
9?etrt, mein ^ert, id) !)afce U)tt n i d) t 
$atwn <&u bag papier ? 
9Mn, mem £etr, id) fja&e el 
nid)t. 

bet ^tetn ; 
t>a$ Sud) ; 
t>a$ £o($ ; 
t>a$ Sebet ; 
t>a$ 23(ei ; 
bog (Mb. 



Obs. The terminations en and em are used to form 
adjectives and denote the materials of anything. 



Qf, 

golden or of gold, 
leaden — of lead, 
stone — of stone, 
pretty, 

tJave you the paper hat ] 
I have it not. 



Don; 
gotben ; 
Metctn ; 
(tetnetn ; 
f)ubfd) (arttg). 

$c<bm <5te ben paptetenen £ut? 
3ci)f;afte tfyn nidjt. 



The wooden table, 
the horse of stone, 
the coat, 
the horse, 
the dog, 
the shoe, 
the thread, 
the stocking, 
the candlestick, 
the golden ribbon, 



9 

ben f)b'($ctnen Stfcb ; 
tag ftetnerne $)ferb ; 
ten $ocf (tag JUeit) ; 
tag g)fcrt ; 
ten £nmb ; 
ten <Scbuf) ; 
ten gaten ; 
ten ©trumpf ; 
ten 8cud)ter ; 
tag gcttene Sant. 



EXERCISE 3. 

Have you the wooden table 1 — No, Sir, I have it not.— -W jiich 
iable have you'?— I have the stone table. — Have you my golden 
candlestick 1 — I have it not. — Which stocking have you ] — -I have 
the thread (fatcn) stocking. — Have you my thread stocking ] — 1 
nave not your thread stocking. — Which coat have you 1 — I have 
my cloth (tucben) coat. — Which horse have you ] — I have the wood- 
en horse. — Have you my leathern shoe'Jjh-I have it not. — Have 
you the leaden horse] — I have it not. — Have you your good 
wooden horse ] — I have it not. — Wliich wood have you 1 — I have 
your good wood. — Have you my good gold 1 — I have it not. — 
Which gold have you 1 — I have the good gold. — W T hich stone have 
you 1 — I have your fine stone. — W^hich ribbon have you 1 — I have 
your golden ribbon. — Have you my fine dog]— I have it. — Have 
you my ugly horse 1 — I have it not. 



FIFTH LESSON.— iTunfte Action. 



The chest, the trunk, 
the button, 
the money, 

Anything, something, 
Not anything, nothing, 

Have you anything ? 

I have nothing. 
The cheese, 
the old bread, 
the pretty dog, 
the silver (metal), 
the silver ribbon, 



ire you hungry ] 



ten Coffer ; 
ten &ncpf ; 
tag ®elt. 

(&twa g. 
Sitftt*. 

£aben ©te etnxig ] 

3d) babe ntd)tg. 

ten £afe ; 

tag a(te $tot ; 

ten artt^en (bubfeben) ."punt ; 

tag ©ttber ; 

tag fttberne 23ant. 

C ©inb ©e bunatta, ? 
tt £aben @ie hunger?* 



• As in French : 
i* 



avez-vous faim ? 



10 



f am hungry. 
Are you thirsty 1 

I am thirsty. 

Are you sleepy 1 
I am sleepy. 
Are you tired 1 
I am not tired. 

Of the (genitive). 



C 3d) inn f)ungttg. 
t f 3d) fcabc £ungcr. 
("(Stub @te burjrtq? 
1 1 £abcn @te 2)ur[t ?* 
J Set) bin burftig- 
i t 3* tjabe jDurjfc 
<Stnb ®'te fcblafcrig ? 
3* bin fd)(afettc> 
©inb @te miibe ? 
3d) bin ntct)t mute. 






beS- 



05^. Nouns of the masculine and neuter gender 
take $ or e£ in the genitive case singular. 



The tailor's, or of the tailor, 
the dog's, or of the dog, 
the baker's, or of the baker, 
the neighbour's, or of the neigh- 
bour, 
of the salt, 

The baker's dog. 
The tailor's coat. 



be£ 6crmeibetg ; 
bes £unbeg ; 
be6 JBacfers ; 
beg 9?ad)bar$ ; 

bes Bat^t. 

C bet £unb beg SBcCcfcr^/" 
C beg 2wfetg £unb. 
C ber 9?ocf beg ^cfynetberg, 
t beg (£d)netbetg ftccl.t 



EXERCISE 4. 

Have you the leathern trunk ?— I have not the leathern trunk. — 
Have you my pretty trunk 1 — I have not your pretty trunk. — 
Which trunk have you ] — I have the wooden trunk.— Have you 
my old button 1 — 1 have it not. — Which money have you? — I have 
the good money. — W T hich cheese have you 1 — I have the old cheese. 
— Have you anything ]— I have something. — Have you my large 
dog 1 — I have it not. — Have you your good gold ? — I have it.— 
Which dog have you ! — I have the tailor's dog. — Have you the 
neighbour's large dog 1 — I have it not. — Have you the dog's golden 
ribbon ] — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which coat have you 1 — I have 
the tailor's good coat. — Have you the neighbour's good bread 1 — 
I have it not. — Have you my tailor's golden ribbon 1 — I have it. — 
Have you my pretty dog's ribbon 1 — I have it not. — Have you the 
good baker's good horse % — I have it. — Have you the good tailor's 

* As in French: avez-vous serif? 

t The first of these two expressions is more usual, the latter is preferred 
in poetry 



1! 

horse! — I have it not. — Are you hungry'? — I am hungry. — Are 
you sleepy ! — I am not sleepy. — Which candlestick have yon ! — I 
have the golden candlestick of my good baker. 



SIXTH LESSON.— Qu\)BU Uttiott. 

Anything or something good. (Stroag ®uteg« 
Nothing or not anything bad. £ftici)tg Sd)(ed)teg. 

Have you anything good ! Sbabm (Ste etmag $uteg? 

I have nothing bad. 3d) fyafce md)tg ©cf)lcd)teg. 

What ? *& a g ? 

What have you ! %£a$ fyaben @te ? 

What have you good ! $£a£ fyaben <gte (guteg ? 

I have the good bread. 3d) l)a&e tag aute 23tob. 

r™ . .j { Masc. ben* 

That or the one. j ^^ ^ 

The neighbour's, or that of the ben beg 3?ad)6arg. 

neighbour. 
The tailor's, or that of the tailor. l>a$ beg ©djnetbetg. 

Or. Dber, 

The book, ta^ S3udk 

Have you my book or that of the £a6en @ie mem Suet) cbet bag beS 

neighbour! SRacfybatg? 

£ have that of the neighbour. 3d) fyabe bag beg 9?acf)batg. 
IJive you your hat or the £aben @te Sfyren £ut ebet ben beg 

baker's ! SSacferg ? 

EXERCISE 5. 

Have you my book ! — I have it not. — Which book have you ?— 
[ have my good book. — Have you anything ugly! — I have nothing 
ugly. — I have something pretty.- — Which table have you ! — I have 
the baker's. — Have you the baker's dog or the neighbour's! — I 
have the neighbour's. — W T hat have you ! — I have nothing. — Have 
you the good or bad sugar! — I have the good. — Have you the 
neighbour's good or bad horse! — I have the good (one*). — Have 
you the golden or the silver candlestick ! — I have the silver can- 
dlestick. — Have you my neighbour's paper or that of my tailor ! — 
S have that of your tailor. — Are you hungry or thirsty ! — I am 
hungry. — Are you sleepy or tired! — I am tired. — What have you 

* Words in the exercises between parentheses, are not to be translated 



12 

pretty 1 — I have nothing pretty. — Have you the leatheT shoe !— I 
have it not. 



SEVENTH LESSON.— Biebente fiction. 

Have you my coat or the tailor's 1 £akn @tc mctnen $Kecf obet ben t)ii 

©cbnetber* ? 
I have yours. 3d) fyafce ten 3r)rigcn» 

Masculine. Neuter. 

^-. ( N. ber metnige. bag metnige, 

* ( A. ben meimgem bag metnige* 

y- N. ber Sbrtge. bag Sbrige* 

*™ r5, | A. ben Sfyrtgem bag Styrtge, 

Absolute possessive pronouns, as : ber metmge, mine ; 
ber Sfyrige, yours ; ber fetntge, his, &c, are declined like 
adjectives preceded by the definite article. (See Les- 
son in.) 

Obs. When the conjunctive possessive pronouns : 
mem, my ; 3fy*V your ; f^tn, his, &c, are used for the 
absolute possessive pronouns : ber metnige, mine ; ber 
Styrige, yours, &c, they terminate in the masculine in 
er and in the neuter in eg* — Ex. : 

Is this your hat 1 3(! t>a$ 3f)t £ut ? 

No, Sir, it is not mine, but yours. 9Mn, metn £ert, eS tft ntcf)t metnet, 

fenbetn Sfiret. 
Is this my book ] 3ft bag metn S3ud) ? 

No, it is not yours, but mine. Sftein, e$ tft ntcfyt SfyteS, fenbetn 

metne& 



T^bp ltlflTI. 


C ber SOfrmn (vir) ; 

1 ber 9)?enfd) (gen. en, homo) ; 


X ilO Ai.JLU-J.lj 


the stick, 


ber (Stccf ; 


my brother, 


metn 3?ruber ; 


the shoemaker, 


ber @d)ur)mad)ct ; 


the merchant, 


ber itaufmann ; 


the friend, 


bet greunb. 


Have you th« merchant's stick 


£atxn ©te ten @tccf be$ $auf* 


or yours ] 


mann$ cber ben Sljngcn ? 


Neither. 


SBebet 


Nor. 


Slid). 



I have neither tue merchant's 3d) fink rcebet ben ©tctf bc$$auf* 
stick nor mine. mcmn$ nod) ben metntgen. 



13 

Kre von hunorv or thirstv 3 5" ^ at)en ® ie ^ un ^ cr ober ~ urft ? 

Are you Hungry or tnirsty . ^ @int) @ie 6unQriQ ot)cr t)urrtif) ? 

i . +u i w- +Tr C Set) ^abc roeter .jbunqer nccb £)urft 

l am neither hungry nor thirsty. £ £g ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ 

EXERCISE 6. 

Have you your cloth or mine 1 — I have neither }^ours nor mine. 
— T have neither my bread nor the tailor's. — Have you my stick or 
yours] — I have mine. — Have you the shoemaker's shoe or the 
merchant's 1 — I have neither the shoemaker's nor the merchant's 
^-Have you my brother's coat ] — I have it not. — Which paper 
have you 1 — I have your friend's. — Have you my dog or my 
friend's ] — I have your friend's. — Have you my thread stocking or 
my brother's ] — I have neither yours nor your brother's. — Have 
you my good baker's good bread or that of my friend 1 — I have 
neither your good baker's nor that of your friend. — Winch bread 
have you 1 — I have mine. — Which ribbon have you 1 — I have 
yours. — Have you the good or the bad cheese ] — 1 have neither 
the good nor the bad. — Have you anything] — I have nothing. — 
Have you my pretty or my ugly dog ] — I have neither your pretty 
nor your ugly dog. — Have you my friend's stick ] — I have it not. 
— Are you sleepy or hungry ! — I am neither sleepy nor hungry. — ■ 
Have you the good or the bad salt ] — I have neither the good nor 
the bad. — Have you my horse or the man's 1—1 have neither yours 
nor the man's. — W T hat have you 1 — 1 have nothing fine. — Are you 
tired ] — I am not tired. 



EIGHTH LESSON.— Qtcljte tectum. 

The cork, tct §)fropf (g)frcpfcn) ; 

the corkscrew, t>et 3)ftopf$td)et (sprcpfengtc^et) j 

the umbrella, t>ct &c$enfd)ttm ; 

the boy, tec Rriabi (gen. n). 

Obs. Masculine substantives ending in e, take it 
in the genitive case singular, and keep this termina- 
tion in all the cases of the singular and plural. 

The Frenchman, tct $rart$efe (gen. n) ; 

the carpenter, tct 3tmmcrmann ; 

the hammer, ter jammer ; 

the iron, tag (Stfcn ; 

iron or of iron, etfetn (adjective) ; 

the nail, ter 9?agel ; 

the pencil, tct: SBtctjnft ; 



14 



the thimble 
the coffee, 
the honey, 
the biscuit, 

Havel? 

You have. 
What have 1 1 
xou have the carpenter's ham- 
mer. 

Have I the nail ] 
You have it. 
Have I the bread 1 
You have it. 
I am right. 
' I am wrong". 
Am I right ] 



bet Jtngetfyut % 
bet jtoflvc ; 
bet £ent$ ; 
bet 3roiebacf. 

$aU tcfj ? 

(Sie E>a6cn. 

mat ()abe id) ? 

®tc habm ben jammer be$ 3immet* 

mannS. 
£a&e id) ben 0?agcl ? 
jpte (jaben if)n. 
£abe id) bag 25rcb ? 
©ic fyaben tf. 
t 3* babe jRcdbt 
t 3* feabe Untccfyt. 
t .g)abe tcf) fficc&t? 



EXERCISE 7. 

I have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. — Are you 
sleepy ] — I am not sleepy. — I am hungry.— You are not hungry. — 
Have I the cork ] — No, Sir, you have it not.-— Have I the carpen- 
ter's wood ] — You have it not. — Have 1 the Frenchman's good um- 
brella ] — You have it. — Have I the carpenter's iron nail or yours ] 
— You have mine. — You have neither the carpenter's nor mine. — 
Which pencil have 1 1 — You have that of the Frenchman. — Have 
I your thimble or that of the tailor] — You have neither mine nor 
that of the tailor. — Which umbrella have 1 1 — You have my good 
umbrella.-— Have I the Frenchman's good honey] — You have it 
not.— Which biscuit have I] — You have that of my good neigh- 
bour.— ^Have you my coffee or that of my boy ] — I have that of 
your good boy. — Have you your cork or mine ] — I have neither 
yours nor mine. — What have you ] — I have my good brother's good 
pencil. — Am I right] — You are right. — Am I wrong] — You are 
not wtong. — Am I right or wrong] — You are neither right nor 
wrong. — You are hungry. — You are not sleepy. — You are neither 
hungry nor thirsty. — You have neither the good coffee nor the good 
sugar. — What have I ] — You have nothing. 



NINTH LESSON.— Jfomte Uttiotl. 



Have 1 the iron or the golden 

nail] 
You have neither the iron nor 

the golden nail 



£abe id) ben eifctnen cbet ben golbe* 

nen 9iagel? 
(Sic fyaben tx>ebet ben dfernen nod) 

ben Cjolbenen Stoc^f. 



15 



The sheep, 

the ram, 

the chicken (the hen), 

the ship, 

the bag (the sack), 

the young" man, 

the youth, 

Who 1 
Who has ? 

Who has the trunk 1 
The man has the trunk. 
The man has not the trunk. 
Who has it 1 
The young man has it. 
The young man has it not. 

He has. 
He has the knife. 
He has not the knife. 
He has it. 
Has the man 1 
Has the painter 1 
Has the friend 1 
Has the boy the carpenter's 

hammer 1 
He has it. 
Has the youth it? 
Is he thirsty 1 
He is thirsty. 
Is he tired 1 
He is not tired. 



$>a$ ©djaf ; 

bet £ammc( (ber ^cfy&'ps) ; 

t>a$ 6ufjn ; 

ba$ @d)iff; 

bet (Sac!; 

bet jurtge SRcnfcr) (gen. en) ; 

bet Sunning. 

SBetl 

SBct &at? 

2Ber fiat ben jt offer? 

£)er SHann hat ben £ offer. 

&cv 9}?ann ijat ben Coffer n t d) t 

SOUer bat tr)n ? 

£)et juncje 9Eenfcr) f»at tFm. 

£>et jungc SOZenfcl) I)at tfyn n t dj t 

(St r)at. 

(St tat bag £fteffet. 

(St fiat bat Suffer ntdjt. 

(St feat efc 

£at bet 93?ann ? 

£at bet 9Mer ? 

|>at bet greunb ? 

£at bet jtnabe ben jammer be* 

3tmnuTmann£ ? 
(St bat tbn. 

&atibn bet StincjUncj? 
3ft et burfttg? (£at ct ©urft?) 
(St iff burfttcj. (<St &at 3)ur|t.) 
3ft et mftbe ? 
(St tft n i d) t nuibe. 



exercises. 8. 

Is he thirsty or hungry ?— He is neither thirsty nor hungry.-— 
Has the friend my hat 1 — He has it. — He has it not. — Who has 
my sheep ] — Your friend has it. — Wlio has my large sack 1 — The 
baker has it. — Has the youth my book ? — He has it not. — W hat has 
he V- — He has nothing. — Has he the hammer or the nail ] — He has 
neither the hammer nor the nail. — Has he my umbrella or my 
stick ] — He has neither your umbrella nor your stick. — Has he my 
coffee or my sugar 1 — He has neither your coffee nor your sugar ; 
he has your honey. — Has he my brother's biscuit or that of the 
Frenchman 1 — Ht has neither your brother's nor that of the French- 
man ; he has that of the good boy. — W T hich ship has he ] — He has 
my good ship. — Has he the old sheep or the ram ] 

9. 

Has the young man my knife or that of the painter ? — He ha& 
neither yours nor that of the painter. — Who has my brother's fin* 



16 



dog 1 — -Your friend has it.— What has my friend ?-— He has the 
baker's good bread. — He has the good neighbour's good chicken.—* 
What have you ] — I have nothing. — Have you my bag or yours 1 — 
I have that of your friend.— Have I your good knife ] — You have 
it. — You have it not. — Has the youth it (£>at C6) 1 — He has it not. 
— What has he?- — He has something good.— He has nothing bad. 
—Has he anything] — He has nothing. — Is he sleepy] — He is not 
sleepy. — He is hungry. — Who is hungry ]— The young man is 
hungry. — Your friend is hungry .—Your brother's boy is hungry. — 
My shoemaker's brother is hungry, — My good tailor's boy is 
ihirsty. — Which man has my book 1 — The big (grcp) man has it. — 
Which man has my horse 1 — Your friend has it.— He has your 
good cheese. — Has he it ? — Yes, Sir, he has it. 



TENTH LESSON.— gel)Ute £ecti0tt. 



The peasant, 
the ox, 
the cook, 
the bird, 



His. 



bet 23ctuet (gen. n) ; 
bet £)cbfe ; 
bet .ftod) ; 



Nom. 
Ace. 



Masc. 

fern, 
feinen, 



Neut. 

fern* 
fern. 



Obs. A. The conjunctive possessive pronoun fern is 
declined like ntein and 3fyr* (See Lessons II. and III.) 



The servant, 

the broom, 
Has the servant his broom 1 

His eye, 

his foot, 

his rice, 
Has the cook his chicken or 

that of the peasant ? 
He has his own. 

His or his own (absolute 
possessive pronoun). 



bet SBebtente ; 

t>a 23efen. 

£at bet 23ebtente fe'mcn 23efen ? 

fetn 2(uge ; 

fetnen $u£l ; 

feinen 9?et$. 

£at bet £ed) fetn 6ur)n cbet bat beg 

SSauetn 1 
(St §at baS feinige. 



Masc. 



Neut. 



N. ber fetntge* 
A. hen fetmgen* 



bag fetmge* 
ba$ fetm'ge* 



Has the servant 

mine? 
He has his own. 
Have you your shoe or his 1 



I have his. 



his trunk or £at bet 2Bcbtentc feinen .fteffet cbet 

ben mctmgen ? 
(St hat ben fetntgen. 
.pakn <Ste Sfyten <Sd)uf) obet ben 

fetmqen ? 
3d) fyabe ben fettuqen. 



17 



Somebody or anybody, some I Gen> ^ manmt 

one or any one (indefi- ^ Dat 3manbem . 

nate pronoun). ^ 3enuwtm 



Has anybody my hat ] #at Semcmb mctncn #ut l 

Somebody has it. } (£s l)at ibn Semcmb. 

Who has my stick 1 SOBcr f)at metnen ©tec! ? 

Nobody has it. Stttemcmb fyat ifjn. 

iVb owe, nobody or no* anybody. pieman b» 

O65. I?. Sticntanb is declined exactly like Sentcmb, 

Who has my ribbon ? ££et hat mettt 93cmb ? 

Nobody has it. sjHcmanb fyat c$. 

Nobody has his broom. Cfttemcmb l)at fctnen SBcfen. 

EXERCISES. 10. 

Have you the ox of the peasant or that of the cook? — I have 
neither that of the peasant nor that of the cook. — Has the peasant 
his rice 1 — He has it. — Have you it ] — I have it not. — Has his boy 
the servant's broom 1 — He has it. — Who has the boy's pencil 1 — 
Nobody has it. — Has your brother my stick or that of the painter] 
— He has neither yours nor that of the painter ; he has his own. — 
Has he the good or bad money ] — He has neither the good nor the 
bad. — Has he the wooden or the leaden horse ? — He has neither 
the wooden nor the leaden horse. — What has he good 1 — He has 
my good honey. — Has my neighbour's boy my book ] — He has it 
not. — Which book has he ] — He. has his fine book. — Has he my 
book or his own 1 — He has his own. — Who has my gold button 1 
— Nobody has it. *— Has anybody my thread stocking 1 — Nobody 
has it. 

11. 

Which ship has the merchant ] — He has his own. — Which 
norse has my friend ] — He has mine.- — Has he his dog 1 — He has 
it not. — Who has his dog 1 — Nobody has it.— Who has my bro- 
ther's umbrella ] — Somebody has it. — Which broom has the ser- 
vant] — He has his own. — Is anybody hungry] — Nobody is hun- 
gry. — Is anybody sleepy] — Nobody is sleepy. — Is any one tired ] — 
Nc one is tired. — Who is right] — Nobody is right. — Have I his 
oiseuit ] — You have it not. — Have I his good brother's ox ] — 
You have it not. — Which chicken have I]-— You have h.s. — la 
anybody wrong] — Nobody is wrong. 



18 



ELEVENTH LESSON.— (fflfte Cectxcn. 



The sailor, 
the chair, 
the looking-glass 
the candle, 
the tree, 
the garden, 
the foreigner, 
the glove, 

This ass, 
that hay, 

The grain, 
the corn, 

This man, 
that man, 
this book, 
that book, 



bcr sfflatrefe, bet 23ect$fncd)t ; 

bet @*tuf)t ; 

ber ©picgcC ; 

$>a$ Std)t ; 

ber 93ctum ; 

ber (fatten ; 

ber gxembc ; 

ber £anbfd)ufj. 

btcfer (5fe( ; 
biefee (btes) £eu. 

baS ,^ern; 
$>a$ ©ctretbe« 

btcfer Sftann ; 
fetter statin ; 
btefcS (McS a ) S3ucb ; 
ieneg S5ud). 



This or this one. 
That or that one. 



N. G. d. a 

Masc. btefer — e3 — em — e* 
Neut. jene3 — e£ — em — e£ 

Obs. It will be perceived that btefer and jetter are 
declined exactly like the definite article. (See Lesson 
TL) The English almost always use that, when the 
Germans use b t e f e $. In German j e n e r is only em- 
ployed when it relates to a person or a thing spoken 
of before, or to make an immediate comparison be- 
tween two things or persons. Therefore, whenever 
this is not the case, the English that must be translated 
by btefer* ^ 

Have you this hat or that one 1 #afcen @te btefen cber jenett #ut ? 

But. K ber, fonbern. 

Obs. 2l6er is used after affirmative and negative 
propositions ; fonbern is only used after negative propo- 
sitions. 

I have not this, but that one. 3d) fjafcc ntcbt btefen, fonbern jenen. 
Has the neighbour this book or $at ber 9?ad)&ar btefeS cber jencS 
that one 1 ftuti) 1 

a £)te§ is often used for biefeS in the nominative and accusative neu- 
ter, particularly when it is not followed by a substantive, and when it re- 
presents a whole sentence, as will be seen hereafter. 



19 

He nas this, but not that one. (St r)at fctcfeS, abet tud)t jetted 

Have you this looking-glass or £aben (Sic btcfen ctet Jench @pte» 

that one? gel? 

I have neither this nor that one. 3d) r)cit>c wctct btcfen nod) {enctt. 

That ox, biefet Ddbfe ; 

the letter, bet SBrief ; 

the note, bet Settel (bag SStUct) ; 

the hcrse-shoe, t>a6 £ufdfen. 

exercise '12; 

Which hay has the foreigner 1 — He has that of the peasant. — Ra*s 
the sailor my looking-glass ] — He has it not. — Have you this can- 
dle or that one ] — I have this one. — Have you the hay of my gar- 
den or that of yours ] — I have neither that of your garden nor that 
of mine, but that of the foreigner. — Which glove have you? — I 
have his glove. — Which chair has the foreigner ] — He has his 
own. — Who lias my good candle 1 — This man has it. — Wlio has 
that looking-glass ! — That foreigner has it. — What has your ser- 
vant (3br aSe&tcntct) 1 — He has the tree of this garden. — Has he 
that man's book I — He has not the book of that man, but that ot 
this boy. — Which ox has this peasant ] — He has that of your 
neighbour. — Have I your letter or his 1 — You have neither mine 
nor his, but that of your friend. — Have you this horse's hay] — I 
have not its hay, but its shoe. — Has your brother my note or his 
own 1 — He has that of the sailor. — Has this foreigner my glove 
or his own ] — He has neither yours nor his own, but that of his 
friend. — Are you hungry or thirsty ] — I am neither hungry nor 
thirsty, but sleepy. — Is he sleepy or hungry ] — He is neither slee- 
py nor hungry, but tired. — Am 1 right or wrong] — You are neither 
right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. — Have I the good« 
or the bad knife ] — You have neither the good nor the bad, but the - 
ugly (one). — What have I ] — You have nothing good, but some- 
thing bad. — Who has my ass ] — The peasant has it. 



TWELFTH LESSON.— gwaift* Section. 

N. G. D. A. 

TJiat or which (relative ( Masc. U>etd)er— eg— em — en* 
pronoun). ( Neut. tt>efd)eg — eg — em — eg. 

Obs. A. It will be perceived that the relative pro- 
noun toelcfyer is declined like the definite article, which 
may be substituted for it ; but then the masculine and 
neuter of the genitive case is beffett instead of t>eg, 
5Belcf)er is never used in the genitive case. 



20 

Have you the hat, which my £aben <Ste ten £ut, nxtcfyen metn 

brother has 1 SBtutet fiat ? 

1 have not the hat, which your 3d) fyabe nicbt ten #ut, n>ekf)en Sfjt 

brother has. SBrutct t)at. 

Have you the horse, which I $abe\\ @tc Das ^pfcrt), nx(d)e$ id) 

have] f)abe? 

I have the horse, which you have. 3d) fyabc tag $)fcrt, roclcfycS ©te 

Masc. Neut. 

f Nom. betjemge* baSjemge* 
TAatf or zAe one (determi- I Gen. be^jemgett* be^jenigett* 
native pronoun). ] Dat. bemjetugen, bemjemgen* 

tAcc. benjentgen* ba^jenige* 

Ota. 5. JDerjenige is always used with a rela- 
tive pronoun, to determine the person or thing to which 
that pronoun relates. It is compounded of the definite 
article and jetttg, and declined like an adjective, pre- 
ceded by this article. The article alone may also be 
substituted in its stead, but must then undergo the 
modification pointed out in the foregoing observation, 
as will be seen hereafter. 

I have that, or the one which S^aS ^"^^^^ ***? ^ 



you havre ' C 3* fabe ten, roeldben ©te fafcen. 

C<Bu fjaben ta^entcje, roelcfyeS tcfr 
^Tou have that which I have. < rjafce. 

C 6ie fyaben ta$, rc>etd)C$ td) fyabe* 

/" Masculine. 



j Nom. berjemge, u>eld)er* 
I Ace. benjentgen, welcfyen- 



'i%a£ which or 2Ae one which. ^ 

Nom. baSjemge, toefefyeg* 
Ace. ba^jemge, n>eld)e3* 

Wbich carriage have you . £Md)crt SOBagen baben @te ? 

I have that which your friend Set) f)abe ten (tenjentcjen), rc>elcr)en 
has. 3>f)t #rcunt fjat. 

The carriage, tct SQSagcn ; 

the house, ta$ £au& 

,™ ( Masc. berfetbe (ber namlicfje) 

i ne same. j NeuL ia ^ dic (ba ^ n a m iify). 



21 

Obs. C. SDerfefbe, the same^ is compounded oi 
the definite article and fetfc, and is declined like berje* 
tticje* It is frequently used instead of the personal pro- 
noun of the third person to avoid repetition and to 
make the sentence more perspicuous. 

Have you the same stick, which £aben @tc benfetbcn (ben namtU 
I have 1 d)en) ©tec!, ben id) ftabe ? 

f have the same. 3d) fjctbe bcnfelbcn (ten hcfmltdjjen). 

Has thaj man the same cloth, £at btefet gftann ba^fctbe (bag nam* 
which you have 1 Ud)c) £ud), roe(d)e$ (fcas) (§tc 

fjaben ? 

He has not the same. <§t fyat nid&t ba^fclt»c (bag nam(td)C). 

■las he (that is, has the same #at betfelbe metnen £anbfd)uf) ? 

man) my glove ] 
le has it not. (St fyat tfyn (benfelbcn) nid)i. 

EXERCISE 13. 

Have you the garden, which I have 1 — I have not the one that 
you have. — Which looking-glass have you 1 — I have the one 
which your brother has. — Has he the hook that your friend has ] — 
Ke has not the one which my friend has. — Which candle has he 1 
— He has that of his neighbour. — He has the one that I have. — 
Has he this tree or that one] — He has neither this nor that, but 
the one which I have. — Which ass has the man 1- — He has the 
one that his boy has. — Has the stranger your chair or mine ] — He 
has neither yours nor mine ; but he has his friend's good chair. — 
Have you the glove which I have, or the one that my tailor has ]- 
1 have neither the one which you have, nor the one which youi 
tailor # has, but my own. — -Has your shoemaker my fine shoe, or 
that of his boy 1— He has neither yours nor that of his boy, but 
that of the good stranger. — Which house has the baker 1 — He has 
neither yours nor mine, but that of his good brother. — Which car- 
riage have I ? — Have I mine or that of the peasant ] — You have 
neither yours nor that of the peasant ; you have the one which 1 
have. — Have you my 'fine carriage ] — I have it not ; but the 
Frenchman has it. — What has the Frenchman ] — Ha has nothing. 
— Wliat has the shoemaker] — He has something fine. — What has 
he fine 1 — He has his fine shoe. — Is the shoemaker right ] — He is 
not wrong ; but this neighbour, the baker, is right. — Is your horse 
hungry ] — It ((£$) is not hungry, but thirsty.- — Have you my ass's 
hay or yours ] — I have that which my brother has. — Has your 
friend the same horse that my brother has 1 — He has not the same 
horse, but the same coat. — Mas he (.pat bcrfclbe) my umbrella ? — He 
has it not. 



22 

THIRTEENTH LESSON.— IDui^nte KcttiotL 

DECLENSION OF MASCULINE AND NEUTER SUBSTANTIVE* 

I. Singular. 

Rules. — 1. Substantives of the masculine and neu- 
ter gender "take e$ or 8 in the genitive case singular : 
those ending in 8, #, J, % f take eg ; all others, particu- 
larly those ending in el, en, er, d)en and lent, take g. 

2. Masculine substantives which end in e in 
the nominative singular, take XI in the other cases of 
the singular and plural, 8, and do not soften the radical 
vowel. 

II. Plural. 

Rules. — 1. All substantives, without exception, 
take tt in the dative case of the plural, if they have 
not one in the nominative. 

2. All masculine and neuter substantives ending in 
d f en, er, as also diminutives in cfyett and lein, have the 
same termination in the plural as in the singular. 

3. In all cases of the plural masculine substan- 
tives take e, and neuter substantives er ; and soften the 
radical vowels a, 0, it, into a, 6, #♦ 

4. In words of the neuter gender ending in et, ett^ 
er, the radical vowel is not softened in the plural, ex- 
cept in : ba# Eloper, the convent ; plur. tie $(6fter* b 

The hats, tie £ute ; 

the buttons, bie ^nepfe ; 

the tables, t>tc Stfcftc ; 

the houses, trie £dufct ; c 

the ribbons, trie SBcinfccr, 

» Except bet* ,ftcife, the cheese ; gen. be§ $cife§ ; plur. bte $ta)t. 

b The declension of those substantives which deviate from thsse rules 
will be separately noted *. 

c It must be observed that in the diphthong CM, a is softened. In the diph- 
thong eu, U is not softened, as : bet ireuttb, the friend ; plur. bit ftreUttbe, th« 
friends 



23 



The threads 
the tailors, 
the notes, 

The hoys, 

the Frenchmen, 

men or the men 



tie $&t>cn ; 

bte ©djnrifccr ; 

tie Settel, tie asfflette. 

tie jtnaben ; 
tie grcui$ofen.; 
tie SKenfcfyen. 



DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE 
ARTICLE IN THE PLURAL. 



Nom, the good. 

Gen. of the good. 

Dat. to the good. 

Ace. the good. 

The good boys. 
The ugly dogs. 



For all genders. 

Nom. bte gittem 

Gen. ber gutetu 

Dat. benguten* 

Ace. bte gutem 

*Dtc guten jtna&ctu 
£)ie fyapttcfyen £unt>e. d 



Obs. Adjectives preceded in the plural by a posses* 
sive pronoun, have the same declension as with the 
definite article. 



My good (plural). 



Have you my good books 1 
I have your good books. 



For all genders. 

'Nom. meme gutem 

G.en. ntemer gutem 

Dat. meinen guten* 

^Acc meitte gutem 

£aktt <Sie meitte gutcn 23ud)Ct ? 
3d) \)aU S^re guten 23ud)ev. 



A TABLE 



OF the declension of substantives. 



Subst. Masculine 

rc*. 



Subst. Feminine. 



< 

o 
to 

K2 



G. 
D. 
A. 



€ or eg. 
or e. 



NO 
G. 

4 

A.j 



invariable. 



1 N. 
G. 
D 
A. 



Subst. Neutej. 

S or o$ 
or e* 



* The word *g>ttttb, dog, does not soften the rowel It in the plural 



~3 
< 



G. 
D. 

A. 



Snbst. Masculine, 

c. 



e. 

en or n. 

e. 



N.' 
G. 
D. 
A. 



24 

Subst. Feminine. 

Y ett or tt. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Subst. Neuter. 

ex. 



ex. 

erru 

er* 



EXERCISE. 14. 

Have you the tables 1 — Yes, Sir, I have the tables. — Have you 
rryr tables 1 — No, Sir, I have not your tables. — Have I your but- 
tons 1 — You have my buttons. — Have I your fine houses 1 — You 
have my fine houses. — Has the tailor the buttons 1 — He has not 
the buttons, but the threads. — Has your tailor my good buttons ?-» 
My tailor has your good gold buttons. — What has the boy 1 — He 
has the gold threads. — Has he my gold or my silver threads 1 — 
He has neither your gold nor your silver threads. — Has the 
Frenchman the fine houses or the good notes 1 — He has neither the 
fine houses nor the good notes. — What has he 1 — He has his good 
friends. — Has this man my fine umbrellas'? — He has not your fine 
umbrellas, but your good coats. — Has any one my good letters 1 — 
No one has your good letters.-^— Has the tailor's son (fcet (£ot)tt) my 
good knives or my good thimbles 1 — He has neither your good 
knives nor your good thimbles, but the ugly coats of the stranger's 
big (grcg) boys. — Have I your friend's good ribbons? — You have 
not my friend's good ribbons, but my neighbour's fine carriage.— 
Has your friend the shoemaker's pretty sticks, or my good tailor's 
pretty dogs 1 — My friend has my good shoemaker's fine books ; 
out he has neither the shoemaker's pretty sticks nor your good 
tailor's pretty dogs. — Is your neighbour right or wrong? — He is 
neither right nor wrong. — Is he thirsty or hungry 1 — He is neithei 
ihirsty nor hungry. 



FOURTEENTH LESSON.— bmr^nte Ceciion 



The Englishman, 
the German, 
the Turk, 
the small books, 
the large horses, 

Wave the English the fine hats 
of the French ' 



bet (Srtcjtanbct ; 
tcr £)eutfcfee ; 
tet Siirfc ; 
tic fletnen S3 defect ; 
tie cjrcjkn $)fcrte. 

£afcen bie ©nejlantet tic fcfeorwn $fr 
tc bet Jtan^ofen ? 



For all genders. 

f Nom. btejemgen or bic* 

rn J Gen; berjcmgeu — berer* 

I hose. <; p AT fcen j eni 'g CU — b cncru 

(^Acc. btejentgen — bie* 

Ota. A. When the definite article is substituted 
for berjemgc, its genitive plural is berer, and its dative 
plur. benetu (See also Lesson XII. Obs. B.) 

Have you the books which the £afccn @tc ttc SBucfycr, tx>ctd)C tic 
men have ? banner baton ? 

. have not those which the men 3cf) (jabc nicbt fciqcmgcn (ttc), vwU 
have ; but I have those which d)C tic bounce baben ; ciber id} 
you have. &c»l>c tic (btqenigen), rocldjc <Sk 

fyaben. 

For all genders. 

TAe same. gee Lesson ^ ^ c) 

Have you the same books, which $abcn @tc ttcfclbcn S3ud)cr, tic tdj 

I have] fjabcl 

I have the same. 3d) habc btcfctfcen. 

The Italian, the Italians, tcr Staltcncr, tic Stattcrtcr ; 

the Spaniard, the Spaniards, tcr ©pemier, tic ©pcmtcr.b 

For all genders. 

f Nom. toetrfje or bte* 

tth, • 7, / , A J Gexv. tt>clrf)er — beretn 

m«* (plur.) ^ D ^ tt)eld)m _ fcenem 

Obs. B. When the definite article stands for tt>eltf)er, 
its genitive case plural is not berer, but berem (See 
Lesson XII. Obs. A.) The genitives beflett, berett, are 
preferable to the genitives toeld)e$, tttflcfyer, being more 
easily distinguished from the nominative. 

For all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 

These. biefe, btefer, btefett, biefe* 

Those. jene, jener, jenen, jene* 

» 5)tefct^ctt is declined like btejcttlgett* 

k Nouns derived from foreign languages do not soften the radical vowel in 
th» plural. 

9 



26 * 

Obs. C. The definite article may be used instead 
of these pronouns. Before a noun it follows tie regu- 
lar declension ; but when alone, it undergoes the same 
changes as when substituted for berjemge (See Obs. A. 
above). The pronoun ber, ba$, is distinguished from 
the article ber, ba^, by a stress in the pronunciation. 
Afj, an article, it throws the principal accent on the 
word which immediately follows. 

Which books have you ] SDSddje 9$ucf)Ct fjctfccn <Stc 1 

Have you these books or those ] £cibcn @ie fctefe efcet jcne SSticfyer 1 
I have neither these nor those. ^ 

I have neither the one nor the > Set) F)cu3e nx'fcct btcfe ned) jene. 

other. c ) 

I have neither those of the Span- 3d) fyak tt>ct>er tic t>et (Spcuucr nod) 

iards nor those of the Turks. tie bet Surf en. 

EXERCISES. 15. 

Have you these horses or those ] — I have not these, but those.— 
Have you the coats of the French or those of the English 1 ? — I have 
not those of the French, but those of the English. — Have you the 
pretty sheep (fcas €>d)af takes e, and is not softened in the plural) 
of the Turks or those of the Spaniards] — I have neither those ot 
teh Turks nor those of the Spaniards, but those of my brother.— 
Has your brother the fine asses of the Spaniards or those of the 
Italians ] — He has neither those of the Spaniards nor those of the 
Italians, but he has the fine asses of the French. — Which oxen has 
yuui brother 1 — He has those of the Germans. — Has your friend my 
large letters or those of the Germans ] — He has neither the one nor 
the other (See Note c , Lesson XIV.). — Which letters has he ] — 
He has the small letters which you have. — Have I these houses or 
those ] — You have neither these nor those. — Which houses have 
1 ] — • Y ?i have those of the English. — Has any one the tall tailor's 
gold buttons ] — Nobody has the tailor's gold buttons, but somebody 
has those of your friend. 

16. 

Have I the notes of the foreigners or those of my boy] — You 
have neither those of the foreigners nor those of your boy, but those 
of the great Turks. — Has the Turk my fine horse ] — He has it 
not — Which horse has he] — He has his own. — Has your neigh- 
bour my chicken or my sheep] — My neighbour has neither your 
chicken nor your sheep.— W T hat has he ] — He has nothing good. — 
Have you nothing fine ] — I have nothing fine. — Are you tired ] — I 

« The English phrases the former and the latter, the one and the other, ar 
generally expressed in German by biefer, plur. fctefe, and jerter, plur. jette, bi 
m an inverted order, biefer referring to the latter and jener to the former 



27 

am not tired. — Which rice has your friend 1 — He has that of his 
merchant. — Which sugar has he ] — He has that which I have.— . 
Has he your merchant's good coffee or that of mine! — He has nei- 
ther that of yours nor that of mine ; he has his own. — Which ships 
(t>a$ Gsdjtff forms its plural in c) has the Frenchman] — He has the 
ships of the English. — Which houses has the Spaniard 1 — He has 
the same which you have. — Has he my good knives'? — He has your 
good knives. — Has he the thread stockings which I have ! — He has 
not the same that you have, but those of his brother. 



FIFTEENTH LESSON.— iFftnfyljnte Uttiott. 



The glass, 
the comb, 

Have you my small combs 1 
I have them. 

Them, 



My (plural), 
Your, — 
His, — 
Their, — 

Have you my fine glass 1 
Has he my fine glasses ] 
He has them. 
The man has them. 
He has them not. 
The men have them. 
Have the men them ? 

Have you my chairs or his % 

I have neither yours nor his 

Which chairs have you 1 
I have mine. 

Some sugar, 
some bread, 
some salt, 



fcer £amm. 

£abcn ©tc nirini Hetnen £amme? 
3cf) fjabe fie* 

fie (after the verb). 

Plural for all genders. 

N. G. D. A. 
meme-meuter-ntemen-meme* 
3f)re -3brer -Sfyrett -Sfyre* 
feme -fettter -femett -feme* 
ifyre -ifyrer -tfyrett -tyre* 

£akn ©ic mctn fdjflneS ®(a$? 

£at et metne fcfyonen ©lafct % 

(Sr bat fie. 

2)cr Sttann bat fte. 

(Sr fjat fte ntd)t. 

£)te banner feaben fte* 

£akn fte trie banner 1 

£akn (gte ntctne (Stuftfe obec bu 
fetntcjen 1 (See Lesson VII.) 

3d) fya&e roekt t>ie 3f)ttgcn nod) bic 
feint gen. 

2Bcid>c @tiit}(c fjafcen <Ste ? 

3cl) fyafce t)te metnicjcn. 

3ucf cr ; 
SBrob 5 

1 Rule. Some or any before a noun is not expressed 
M German. 



28 

EXERCISE. 17. 

Have you my good combs'? — I ha^e them. — Have you tic good 
aorses of the English ] — 1 have them not. — Which brooms have 
you ] — I have those of the foreigners. — Have you my coats or 
those of my friends'? — I have neither yours nor those of your 
friends. — Have you mine or his'? — I have his — Has the Italian 
the good cheeses which you have] — He has not those which I 
have, but those which you have. — Has your boy my good pencils ? 
He has them. — Has he the carpenter's nails 1 — He has them not. 
— What has he 1 — He has his iron nails. — Has anybody the thim- 
bles of the tailors 1 — Nobody has them. — Who has the ships of 
the Spaniards'? — The English have them. — Have the English 
these ships or those ] — The English have their ships. — Have your 
brothers my knives or theirs? — My brothers have neither youi 
knives nor theirs. — Have I your chickens or those of your cooks ] 
— You have neither mine nor those of my cooks.- — Which chick- 
ens have II — You have those of the good peasant. — Who has 
my oxen 1 — Your servants have them. — Have the Germans them 1 
— The Germans have them not, but the Turks have them. — Who 
has my wooden table 1 — Your boys have it. — Who has my good 
bread 1 — Your friends have it. 



— . 

i 
SIXTEENTH LESSON.— Qzt^tiXt jUctiott. 

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES WITHOUT AN ARTICLE. 

Rule. An adjective, not preceded by an article, 
takes the same termination as the definite article, ex- 
cept in the genitive singular, masculine and neuter, 
which then ends in en instead of eg* 

Masculine. Neuter. 

r N. guter SOBeut* gated ©af$* 
Good wine or some good . G ' S»ten®emeg. guten <SaU 
wine. &c. i D gutem ^ eine ^ gutem @atje# 

l^A. guten 2Betm guteg ©al$* 

Plural for all genders. 

Good or some good, &c. ( N. G. D. A. 
(plural.) ( gute, guter, guten, gute* 

Some good cheese, gutct: jtcife ; 

some good bread, guteg 2Brot>. 



29 

Singular. 

Some of tt any of it of it \ M ' "*"' *' ^felfott. 
borne oj tt, any oj it, oj it. j ^ wdd)e ^ beffejt/ ^elton. 

Plural for all genders. 

Some of them, any of them, ^ m ^ ^ ^^ 

Obs. The pronoun some or any, when taken in a 
partitive sense, is expressed by ttJefdf)* Of him, of it, of 
them, &c., when governed by a substantive, an adjec- 
tive, or a verb requiring in German the genitive, are 
expressed by the genitive of the personal pronouns, if 
relating to a person, and if to a thing, by the genitives 
beftett, be^felben, beren, berfefben, which may sometimes 
be omitted. 

Have you any wine 1 $abcn @te SBciti ? 

I have some. 3d) \)abc n>e(d)cru 

Have you any water 1 $abcn @tc SBaflet ? 

I have some. Set) tjabe rockbeS. 

Have you any good wine ? J^abcn <&ic qutcn SDBeitt ? 

I have some. 3d) ba&e nxlcben. 

Have I any good cloth 1 $abt tcb QUtcS Sue!) ? 

You have some. ©tc f)a6cn r&elcf>c$. 

Have you any shoes ? Joa&cn @te ©cbufye ? 

I have some. 3d) ^q6c roctdbe. 

Have you good or bad horses ? £aben©tc gutc cfcet fcfyfecbtc $fctt>C? 

I have some good ones. 3d) fyctbe gute. 

Have you good or bad wine ? £abcn Sic gutcn ot>ct fd)(cd)tett 

SBctn ? 

I have some good. 3d) babe autctt. 

Have you good or bad water 1 £ctbcn (Sic gutc$ cber fd)(ed)tc$ SBaf* 

fer? 

I have some good. 3d) babe gute& 

exercise. 18. 

Have you any sugar ? — I have some. — Have you any good cof- 
fee ? — I have some. — Have you any salt ] — I have some. — Have I 
any good salt? — You have some. — Have I any shoes ? — You have 
some. — Have I any pretty dogs? — You have some. — Has the man 
any good honey ? — He has some. — What has the man ? — He has 
some good bread. — What has the shoemaker ? — He has some 
pretty shoes. — Has the sailor any biscuits (Srotcbacf does not soften 
in the plural) t — He has some. — Has your friend any good pencils ? 
- — He has some. — Have you good or bad coffee? — I have somo 
good. — Have you good or bad wood ? — I have some good. — HaVe 



30 

I good or bad oxen ? — You have some bad (ones). — Has yoM 
brother good or bad cheese ? — He has neither good nor bad. — What 
has he good ] — He has some good friends. — Who has some cloth 1 
— M) r neighbour has some. — Who has some money 1 — The French 
have some. — W^ho has some gold 1 — The English have some.—* 
Who has some good horses'? — The Germans have some — Wh: 
has some good hay 1 — This ass has some. — W r ho has some good 
bread? — That Spaniard has some. — Who has some good books] — 
These Frenchmen have some. — Who has some good ships'? — 
Those Englishmen have some ] — Has anybody wine 1 — Nobody 
has any. — Has the Italian fine or ugly horses "? — He has some ugly 
(ones). — Have you wooden or stone tables'? — I have neither wood- 
en nor stone (ones). — Has your boy the fine books of mine 1 — He 
has not those of your boy, but his own. — Has he any good thread 
stockings ] — He has some. — What has the Turk] — He has nothing. 



SEVENTEENTH LESSON.— Qubtn^ntz tnixon. 

Singular. 

C N. G. D. A. 
No, none, not a, or not < M. fein, fetne£, fetttem, fetnen. 
any. ( N. fern, fetne£, femern, fern. 

Obs. A. The word fetlt has this declension when, 
like no in English, it is followed by a substantive ; 
but when the substantive is understood as with none 
in English, it forms its nominative masculine in er, and 
its nominative and accusative neuter ?n e3 or £♦ 

Have you any wine 1 $abtn @ie SSetn ? 

I have none. 3d) fycftc fctnen. 

Have you no bread * $abm Sic fcin SBreb ? 

I have not any. 3d) fyabe frincS (fctn$). 

Obs. B. It will be observed that any is expressed 
oy fern, when accompanied by a negation. 

Plural for all genders. 

No, none, or not any (plu- { N. G. D. A. 
ral). 1 feine, fetner, feutett, feme 

Have you no shoes 1 £akn @tc feine (Scfyufye ? 

I have none. 3c!) f)ak feine. 

Have you any 1 £nben @tc n>c(d)C ? 

I have not any. 3d) fab; feine. 

Has the man any 1 £at bet 93ionn nxtcfye ? 



31 

He has none. (St fycit Fctnc* 

Has he any good books £cit er gute 23(id(jcr ? 

He has some. (St Ijctt roclcfye* 

The American, for 2Cmcrifrmct ; 

the Irishman, t>ct Srianbct ; 

the Scotchman ; bet <Stf)Otttant>et (<Scf)Cttc) ; 

the Dutchman, t>ct Jbellcmbet; 

the Russian, fret 3?uffe. 

Rule. Compound words in ntatttt form their plural 
by changing this termination into leute* Ex. 

The merchants, bte jtctuflcutc ; 

the carpenters, tic 3tmmcrleutc» 

exercise. 19. 

Has the American good money I—He has some. — Have .he 
Dutch good cheese ] — Yes, Sir, the Dutch have some. — Has the 
Russian no cheese \ — He has none. — Have you good stockings ? — 
I have some. — Have you good or bad honey 1 — I have some good. 
• — Have you some good coffee ] — I have none. — Have you some bad 
coffee ] — I have some. — Has the Irishman good wine ] — He has 
none. — Has he good water 1 — He has some. — Has the Scotchman 
some good salt]— He has none. — What has the Dutchman ] — He 
has good ships. — Have I some bread ] — You have none. — Have I 
some good friends ] — You have none. — Who has good friends ] — 
The Frenchman has some. — Has your servant (3bt S3cfc)tentcr) any 
coats or brooms ] — He has some good brooms, but no coats. — Has 
any one hay] — Some one has some.— Who has some] — My ser- 
vant has some. — Has this man any bread ] — He has none. — Who 
has good shoes] — My good shoemaker has some. — Have you the 
good 1 ats of the Russians, or those of the Dutch ] — I have neither 
those of the Russians nor those of the Dutch, I have those of the 
Irish. — Which sacks has your friend ] — He has the good sacks of 
the merchants. — Has your boy the good hammers of the carpen- 
ters ] — No, Sir, he has them not. — Has this little boy some sugar ] 
— He has none. — Has the brother of your friend good combs ] — 
The brother of my friend has none, but I have some. — Who has 
good wooden chairs ] — Nobody has any. 



EIGHTEENTH LESSON.— QUfjtfeljttte JCertiott. 

The hatter, t>ct $utmad)Ct ; 

the joiner, fcet £tfd)lct (<Scf)trinct). 



82 



Masculine. 


Neuter. 


" Nom. em* 


etn* 


Gen. etne£« 


etneS* 


Dat. einem. 


einem 


k Acc. etnen* 


etm 



J. or «ft (one). 



Obs. A. When a substantive is understood, em like 
Fein, takes e r in the nominative masculine, and e 3 or 3 
in the nominative and accusative neuter. (See pre- 
ceding Lesson.) 



Have you a looking-glass ? 

I have one. 

Have you a book ? 

I have one. 

I have none. 



$aUn <3te etnen (Spiegel ? 
3d) babe etnen. 
£aben <Ste ctn S$ud) ? 
3d) babe etn* (etnetf). 
3d) babe fctns (fetnc$). 



Obs. B. Neither the indefinite article nor Fein is 
ever accompanied by tocld). 



And. 



Unfc. 



DECLENSION OF AN ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE 
ARTICLE OR A POSSESSIVE PRONOUN IN THE SINGULAR. 

(See Obs. in Lessons 111. and X11I.) 



A good. 



Masculine. 

' N. em gnter* 
G. etneS guren* 
D. einem gutem 
A. etnen gnten* 



Neuter. 

em Qiitc$. 
etneg gurem 
einem gnrem 
em gnte& 



Have you a good round hat . 

I have one. 

Has he a beautiful house 1 

He has one. 

He has none. 

1 have two of them. 

He has three. 
You have four. 
Have you five good horses 1 
I have six. 

I have six good and seven bad 
ones. 



4baben ®te etnen cutten runfcen £ut? 

3d) babe etnen. 

£at er ctn fcboneS £att$ ? 

(5r f)at ctng (ctnes). 

(St bat fetn$ (fetne£)» 

3d) babe frercn greet. (See Obs. 

Lesson XVI.) 
(5r bat fcercn fctct. 
<Ste baben fceren mer. 
£abcn @te fiinf ante fpfcrfcc ? 
3cb f)abe fceren fccl)^. 
3d) babe fed)$ gutc unb fiefcen 

fd)(ed)tc. 



33 



RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES RELATIVE TO THE DECLENSION 
OF ADJECTIVES. 

We have shown in the foregoing lessons that in 
German as in English, the adjective always precedes 
the substantive. When two or more adjectives are 
before the same noun, they all follow T the same declen- 
sion. Adjectives are not declined when they are not 
accompanied by a substantive expressed or understood, 
i. e., when they form the predicate of a proposition. 
Ex. 3br S^ut tfl fcfyon, your hat is beautiful ; mem 25ctnb 
tfl fcben, my ribbon is beautiful; %t)ve Qute ftrct) fcf) on, 
your hats are beautiful. 

When followed by a substantive expressed or under- 
stood, the adjective is declined, and assumes three dif- 
ferent forms, viz : 

1st, Before a substantive without an article pre- 
ceding, it takes the same termination as the definite 
article, except in the genitive case singular masculine 
and neuter, in which it adds e n instead of e $. 

2d, When it follows the definite article, or a word 
of the same termination, it adds e It in all cases, except 
in the nominative singular of all genders, and the ac- 
cusative singular feminine and neuter, in which it 
adds e* 

3d, When preceded by the indefinite article, or a 
possessive or personal pronoun, it adds e r in the nomi- 
native masculine, e in the nominative and accusative 
feminine, e $ in the nominative and accusative neuter 
and e n in the other cases. 

All participles partake of the nature of adjectives, 
and are subject to the same laws. 

2* 



34 



ft 

< 







A TABLE 








OF THE DECLENSION OF GERMAN ADJECTIVES, 


I. The adjective 

without an article before 

a substantive 


I II. The adjective 
proceded by the defi- 
nite article. 


1 III. The adjectivi* 
preceded by the indefl 
nite article. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


JSTeut. 


Masc. 


jFton. 


JVeut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


JV*e«t 


Nom. er 


e 


e$ 


e 


e 


e 


er 


e 


eg 


Gen. en 


er 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


Dat. em 


er 


em 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


Ace. en 


e 1 e3 


en 


e 


e 


en 


e 


eg 


r NoM. e 




en 








Gen. er 


For all 


en 


For all 






Dat. en 


genders. 


en 


genders. 






Ace. e 






en 











Obs. A. The adjective is declined in the same 
manner when taken substantively. 

B. Adjectives preceded by the words : alte, all ; 
eintge, etftcfye, some, sundry ; gewxffe, certain ; feme, none ; 
manege, several ; mefyrere, many, several ; folcfye, such ; 
Derfcfyiebene, various ; tnefe, many ; toefcfye, which ; tt>emge, 
few, lose the letter n in the nominative and accusa- 
tive plural ; but they keep that termination when pre- 
ceded by a possessive or personal pronoun in the 
plural. a 

C. Adjectives ending in e f, e n, e r, for the sake of 
euphony often reject the letter e which precedes those 
three consonants. Ex. instead of ebefer, golbener, tfyeue* 
rer, we say : ebler, golbner, tfyenrer* 

EXERCISE. 20. 

Have you a good servant 1 — I have one. — Has your hatmaker a 
beautiful house 1 — He has two of them. — Have I a pretty gold rib • 
bon] — You have one. — What has the joiner] — He has beautiful 

a Most modern authors frequently reject this distinction, and form all the 
eases of the plural in en. 



35 

tab.es. — Has he a beautiful round (runb) table ? — He has one.— * 
Has the baker a large louking-glass ? — He has one. — Has the 
Scotchman the friends that I have ? — He has not the same that you 
nave, but he has good friends. — Has he your good books ] — He has 
them. — Have I their good hammers ] — You have them not, but you 
have your good iron nails. — Has that hatter my good hat ] — He has 
not yours, but his own. — Have I my good shoes 1 — You have not 
yours; you have his. — Who has mine] — Somebody has them.— 
Has any body two letters ] — The brother of my neighbour has 
three. — Has your cook two sheep (plur. @cr)afe) 1 — He has four. — 
Has he six good chickens 1 — He has three good and seven bad. — < 
Has the merchant good wine ] — He has some. — Has the tailor good 
coats ] — He has none. — Has the-baker good bread l> — He has some. 
— What has the carpenter ] — He has good nails. — What has your 
merchant] — He has good pencils, good coffee, good honey, and 
good biscuits (plur. BnueOacfe). — Who has good iron] — My good 
friend has some. — Am I right or wrong ] — You are wrong. — Is any 
body sleepy 1 — The shoemaker is sleepy and thirsty. — Is he tired 1 
— He is not tired. — Has your servant the glasses of our (unfiTCt, 
see the next Lesson) friends ] — He has not those of your friends, 
but those of his great merchants. — Has he my wooden chair ] — He 
has not yours, but that of his boy. — Are you thirsty ] — 1 am not 
thirsty, but very hungry (gtopen hunger). 



NINETEENTH LESSON.— Jfam?el)ttte fsctiott. 

How much ? How many ? SBtetttel]* 

How many hats ? SSStcmel £iite ] 

Hov? many knives ? SStctricl goffer ] 

How much bread ? gBtetricl 33tot> ? 

Only, but. 91 U t. 

How many tables have you ! 2£tet>tc( Stfdje Ijafcett ®te ? 

I have only two. 3cb babe bcren nut $ivet. (See 

Obs. Lesson XVI.) 
How many knives have you • S&tcmcl SEcffcr rmben &k ? 
I have but one goq£ one. 3d) babe nut cm guteS. 

Eight, acfit ; 

nine, ncun ; 

ten, jefytt. 

a Cardinal numbers are used to answer the question torimff, how 
many! 



36 



IT 7 ^ (designating the na- 
ture or kind of a thing) ? 



What table have you] 
1 have a wooden table. b 
What tables has he ] 
He has stone tables. 
What book has your friend 1 
He has a pretty book. 
What paper have you ] 
I have some fine paper. 
What sugar has he ? . 
He has some good sugar. 



Our. 



Masc. Neut. 

N . wa$ fur em* wag fitr cut* 
A n>af fur emeu. rt>a$ fitr em. 

Plural for all genders. 

2Ba3 fur. 

££a$ fur etnen Sifcb bafren ©te ? 

3d) babe ctncn bo($erncn 3>tfd). 

SGfais fur Sifcbe bat cr ? 

(5r f)at ftetrterne Sifcbc. 

2£a$ fur ein ©ud) bat 3br greunt) ? 

<5r f)at ein bubfebes S3ud>. 

3£a$ fitr c papier baton 6te ? 

3d) babe fcboneS papier. 

SSas fur 3ucfer bat er 1 

(Sr fyat auten 3uc!er 

Masc. Neut. 

f Nom. uufer. uufer. 

J Gen. uufere$. uufereg. 

"S Dat. uuferem. uuferem. 

[ Ace uufereu. uufer. 

Plural for all genders. 

i N. G. D. A. 

Our (plural). < mtfere, uuferer, uufereu, un* 
( fere. 

Ours (singular and plural). 2)er (bag) unferige ; tie unfertgen. 

Ofo. When a consonant, {,m,u or r, stands between 
two e's, one of them is omitted to avoid too soft a pronun- 
ciation (see Lesson XXL, Obs. C), except when this 
letter is necessary to the termination of the word or 
the indication of the case. Thus we frequently say, 
BitferS, unferm, unfre, @ureg, d (Surem, (Jure, &c, instead of 
ittifereS, uuferem, uufere, (Sueretf, Querent, (Suere, &c. 

EXERCISES, 21. 

How many friends have you 1 — I have two good friends. — Have 
you eight gv'.d trunks 1 — I have nine. — Has your friend ten good 

b The pupils will take care not to answer here with the definite article. 

e The indefinite article is never placed before collective words, such as : 
$P<tmer, paper ; s 3£etn, wine ; 3 Uf frr, sugar, &c. 

d Gmer, your, is in fact the second person of the possessive pronoun. 3br Is 
the third person, used generally out of politeness, and for that reason written 
Willi a capival letter. (See Lessons II. and XV.) 



37 

brooms 1 — He has only three. — Has he two good ships ? — He has 
only one. — How many hammers has the carpenter] — He has only 
four. — How many shoes has the shoemaker ] — He has ten. — Has 
the young man ten good books 1 — He has only five. — Has the 
painter seven good umbrellas'? — He has not seven, but one. — How 
many corks (^Orepfen does not soften in the plur.) have I ] — You 
have only three. — Has your neighbour our good bread ? — He has 
not ours, but that of his brother. — Has our horse any hay ] — It (t&g) 
has some. — Has the friend of our tailor good buttons ] — He has 
some. — Has he gold buttons 1 — He has no gold (buttons), but sil- 
ver (ones). — How many oxen has our brother ] — He has uo oxen. 
— How many coats has the young man of our neighboirs (plur. 
Sfacbbarn) 1 — The young man of our neighbours has only one good 
coat, but that of your friends has three of them. — Has he our good 
rams ] — He has them. — Have I his ] — You have not his, but ours. 
— How many good rams have 1 1 — You have nine 

22. 

Who has our silver candlesticks 1 — Our merchant's boy nas 
them. — Has he our large birds ] — He has not ours, but those of the 
great Irishman. — Has the Italian great eyes (t>a£ 2(ucje takes n in 
the plur. and is not softened) ? — He has great eyes and great feet. 
—Who has great thread stockings'? — The Spaniard has some.— 
Has he any cheese 1 — He has none. — Has he corn ] — He has some. 
—What kind of corn has he ] — He has good corn. — What kind ot 
rice has our cook 1 — He has good rice. — What kind of pencils has 
our merchant '?— He has good pencils. — Has our baker good bread? 
—He has good bread and good wine. 

23. 

Who is thirsty 1 — Nobody is thirsty ; but the friend of our 
neighboui is sleepy. — Who has our iron knives 1— -The Scotch- 
man has ihem. — Has he them 1 — He has them. — What kind of 
friends have you 1 — I have good friends. — Is the friend of our 
Englishmen right ] — He is neither right nor wrong. — Has he good 
little birds, and good little sheep (plur. ©cbofc) 1 — He has neither 
birds nor sheep. — What has the Italian 1 ? — He has nothing. — Has 
our tailor's boy anything beautiful ] — He has nothing beautiful, but 
something ugly. — What has he ugly 1 — He has an ugly dog. — 
Has he an ugly horse 1 — He has no horse. — What has our young 
friend ] — He has nothing. — Has he a good book 1 — He has one.— 
Has he good salt T — He his none. 



TWENTIETH LESSON.— g»o«jig0te Cation. 

Much, many, a good deal of, 93 i e t. 

Much wine. 9?tc( 2$em, 

Much money. $tcl ©elfc. 



38 



Obs. A. When t> tet is preceded by an article, pro 
noun, or preposition, or when it stands alone and is 
used substantively, it is declined like an adjective ; 
otherwise it is indeclinable. 



Have you much good wine 1 
I have a good deal. 

Have you much money 1 
I have a good deal. 

Too much. 
You have too much wine. 



£>akn Sic met guten SSetn ? 

3d) (>abe oeffen met. (See Obs 

Lesson XVI. 
$abm &k met ®e(b ? 
3d) l)abc fceffen met. 

3u Diet; 

©te fyaben $u met ££etn. 



We. SOB i r. 

We have. 2£it bafcen. 

We have not. 2Btt fectben nicbt. 

We have little or not much money. SDBtr fyuben nicl)t met ®ett>. 



Enough* 

Enough money. 
Knives enough. 



© e n u g. 

(Mb genug. 
SDftfycc genug. 



O&s. J5. ©eitug is never put before the substantive. 

Little. 2Bentg. 

Obs. C. Our remark on tnef applies equally to tveniQ. 
But these two words are declined, when they relate to 
several distinct things, or anything that may be coun- 
ted, as will be seen hereafter. 



But little, only a little (itot much)* 

Have you enough wine 1 

I have only a little, but enough. 

A s.ttle. 

A little wine. 
A little salt. 

Courage. 

You have but little courage. 
We have few friendfe. 

Of them (relative to persons). 



91 u r tt> c n i g (ntdfyt md). 

£akn ©te £Betn genug ? 
3d) babe beffen nut roentg, ate ge* 
nug. (See Obs. Lesson XVI.) 

©in rocntg. 

©in rcentg 2£etn. 
(Sin rcenig @a(j. 

©te fyakn ntcftt met 9Eutfj. 
2Bit fycuxn roemg greunbe. 

3 ft t c r (gen. of the personal pro- 
noun fie, they; see Obs, Les« 
son XVI.) 



39 

Have you many friends ? $aUn Sic piel grcunbe ? 

We have but few. ££tr frozen ihrcr nur roctttge (See 

06s. C. above). 
You have but little money. (Sic babcn tttcf)t Mc{ ®e(t>. 

Has the foreigner much mone) ? £at bcr gtcmfce met @ett> ? 
He has but little. (§r fyat fcejfcn nur wcrtu}. 

exercises. 24. 

Have you much coffee 1 — I have only a little. — Has your friend 
much water ? — He has a great deal. — Has the foreigner much 
corn ] — He has not much. — What has the American ] — He has 
much sugar. — What has the Russian 1 — He has much salt. — Have 
we much rice 1 ? — We have but little. — What have we] — We have 
much wine, much water and many friends. — Have we much gold ] 
— We have only a little, but enough. — Have you many boys ]— - 
We have only a few. — Has our neighbour much hay ] — He has 
enough. — Has the Dutchman much cheese? — He has a great deal. 
— Has this man courage] — He has none. — Has that foreigner 
money ] — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Has the painter's 
boy candles (plur. 2td)tc)1 — He has some. 

25. 

Have we good letters] — We have some. — We have none. — 
Has the joiner good bread] — He has some. — He has none. — Has 
he good honey ] — He has none. — Has the Englishman a good 
horse] — He has one. — What have we] — We have good horses. — 
Who has a beautiful house ] — The German has one. — Has the Ita- 
lian many pretty looking-glasses ] — He has a great many ; but he 
has only a little corn. — Has my good neighbour the same horse 
which you have ] — He has not the same horse, but the same car- 
riage. — Has the Turk the same ships that we have ] — He has not 
the same, he has those of the Russians. 

26. 

How many servants have we ] — We have only one, but our bro- 
thers have three of them. — What knives have you] — We have 
iron knives. — What bag has the peasant ] — He has a thread bag. 
j— Has the young man our long (grc6) letters ] — He has them not. 
— V T ho has our pretty notes ] — The father (t>er $$atct) of the sailor 
has them. — Has the carpenter his nails ] — The carpenter has his 
iron nails, and the hatmaker his paper hats. — Has the painter beau- 
tiful gardens ] — He has some, but his brother has none. — Have*you 
many glasses ] — We have only a few. — Have you enough wine ] 
— We have enough of it. — Has anybody my brooms] — Nobody 
has them. — Has the friend of your hatmaker our combs or yours 1 
-—He has neither yours nor ours ; he has his. — Has your boy my 
note or yours] — He has that of his brother. — Have you my stick] 
— I have not yours, but that of the merchant. — Have you my 
gloves (plur. Jpcmt>fcl)ul)c) ] — I have not yours, but those of my 
eood neighbour. 



40 



TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in nrib ^an^ste 
Section. 



The pepper, 
the meat, 
the vinegar, 
the beer, 


ber spfcffet ; 
bas Jtetfd) ; 
bet (Sfftg ; 
bag £3ter. 


A few books. 


'N. etntge (etltcfye) Sitcfyer* 
G. etntger (etltcf)er) S3ucf)er* 
D. einigen (etltcfyen) SMtchertt 
A. etntge (etlicfye) S3itct)er* 


A few. 


(Stntgc, ctlicbe. 


Have you a few books 1 

i have a few. 

He has a few. 

I have only a few knives. 

Y ou have only a few. 


£aben <Ste etntge SBiic^er ? 

3d) babe etntge. 

(Sr bat etttcbe. 

Scb babe nut etntge Sfteffer. 

<Ste baben nut etntge. 


The florin, 

the kreutzer (a coin), 


ber (55u(ben (is not softened in the 

plur.) ; 
ber £ reiser. 


Other, 


2£nbcr (is declined like an ad- 
jective). 




Singular. 




Masc. Neut. 


The other. < 


r N. ber anbere* ba# anbere* 
G. be$ anberm be£ anbenu 
D. bem anbern* bem anberm 
A. ben anberm ba$ anbere. 



The others. 



Another, 
another horse 
other horses, 



Have you another horse 1 
I have another. 

No other. 



Plural for all genders. 

N. bte anberm D. ben cmbent. 

G. ber cmbent* A. bte anbenn 

(See Obs. Lesson XIX.) 

em 2fnberer ; 

etn anbere* Spferb ; 

anbere spfctbe. 

£aben (Ste etn anbereg $fetb ? 
3d) b^bc etn anbercs. 



Masc. 
Neut. 



Fetnen anberm 
fern anberetf* 



No others 

I have no other horse. 
I have no other. 
Have you other horses \ 
I have some others. 
I have no others. 

The shirt, 
the leg, 
the head, 
the arm, 

the heart, 
the month, 

the work, 

the volume, 

the crown (money), 

What day of the month ? 



41 

.ftetne anbere (See Lesson XVIII 
Obs 9 B. 

3d) ijctfje fdti nnbercg spferb. 
Scb babe feui entered 
£aben <§>te anbere ^)fcrt>c 1 
3d) babe anterc. 
3d) babe feme anbere, 

ba^ £emb (plur. en) ; 

ta^ SBetti (plur. e) ; 

tec ilepf ; 

ber 2(rm (is not softened in Aia 

plur.); 
tag &er$ ; a 
ber SHenat (is not softened in the 

plur.) ; 
fcas 3Berf (plur. e) ; 
t)cr 3*anb ; 
ber S baler (is not softened in the 

plur.). 

b e r (ba$) rot c t> t c f ft e ? 



O&s. Ordinal numbers are used in replying to the 
question ber or ba$ ttriettielfte ? what day of the month ? 
These numbers are declined like adjectives. They are 
formed of the cardinal numbers by adding t as far as 
twenty, and ft from twenty to the last, with the excep- 
tion of erjl, first, and britt, third, which are irregular, 
Ex. 



The first, 


ber or. 


ba§ erite; 


the second, 


ber 


grocitc ; 


the third, 


ber 


brttte; 


the fourth, 


ber 


trier te ; 


the fifth, 


ber 


fitnfte ; 


the sixth, 


ber 


fed)*te ; 


the seventh, 


ber 


fkbente ; 


the eig-hth, 


ber 


acbte ; 


the ninth, 


ber 


neunrc ; 


the tenth, 


ber 


gehntc ; 


the eleventh, 


ber 


elfte ; 


the twentieth, 


ber 


groanstajte ; 


the twenty-first, &c 


ber 


etn unb jwanjtijfte, k> 



' » QaB <ger$, the heart, takes ett § in the genitive and en in the dative 
lingular ; in the plural it takes e n in all the cases. 

b Henceforth the learners should write the date hefore their task. Ex. Son* 
bon, fcen evften 5ftai, etn taufenfc ac^t Ijunfrert uni> acfyt unb fcmfug, London, 1st 
May. i838. 



42 

Have you the first or second $aUn @tc t>ai> erfte cter fca$ grccttc 

book? »ud>? 

I have the third. Set) babe ba$ britte. 

Which volume have you? 2Cc(cl)cn Stant) baben ©te 1 

I have the fifth. 3d) fyabc ben ftinften. 

exercises. 27. 

Have you a few knives ? — I have a few. — Have you many 
rams ? — I have only a few.- — Has the friend of the great painter 
many looking-glasses ? — He has only a few. — Have you a few 
florins ? — 1 have a few. — How many florins have you ? — I have 
ten. — How many kreutzers has your servant ? — He has not many, 
he has only two. — Have the men the beautiful glasses of the Ita- 
lians ? — The men have them not, but we have them. — What have 
we ? — We have much money. — Have you the carriage of the 
Dutchman or that of the German ? — 1 have neither the one nor the 
other. — Has the peasant's boy the fine or the ugly letter? — He has 
neither the one nor the other. — Has he the gloves of the merchant 
or those of his brother? — He has neither the one nor the other. — 
Which gloves has he ? — He has his own. — Have we the horses of 
the English or those of the Germans ? — We have neither the one 
nor the other. — Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ? — We 
have them not ; the Americans have them. — Have you much pep- 
per ? — I have only a little, but enough. — Have you much vinegar ? 
"—I have only a little. — Have the Russians much meat? — The 
Russians have a great deal, but the Turks have only a little. — 
Have you no other pepper ? — I have no other. — Have I no other 
beer ? — You have no other. — Have we no other good friends ?— 
We have no others. — Has the sailor many shirts ? — He has not 
many ; he has only two. — Have you a wooden leg ? — I have not a 
(6ctn) wooden leg, but a good heart. — Has this man a good head ? 
—He has a good head and a good heart. — How many arms has that 
boy ? — He has only one ; the other is of wood (oen £013). — What 
kind of head has your boy ? — He has a good head. 

28. 

Which volume have you ? — I have the first. — Have you the se- 
cond volume of my work? — I have it. — Have you the third or the 
fourth book ? — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have we the 
fifth or sixth volume ? — We have neither the one nor the other.-— 
Which volumes have we ? — We have the seventh. — What day 
(•Den rmcrue(fU'n) of the month is it (baben rotr) ? — It is (>2Bit baben) 
the eighth. — Is it not (&abcn wit ntcbt) the eleventh ? — No, Sir, it is 
the tenth. — Have the Spaniards many crowns ? — The Spaniards 
have only a few ; but the English have a great many. — Who has 
our crowns ? — The French have them. — Has the youth much head ? 
■— - He has not much head, but much courage. — How many arms 
has the man ? — He has two. 



43 



2y. 



Have you the crowns of the French or those of the English ?— « 
I have neither those, of the French nor those of the English, but 
those of the Americans. — Has the German a few kreutzers 1 — He 
has a few. — Has he a few florins 1 — He has six of them. — Have you 
another stick 1 — I have another. — What other stick have you ] — 
I have another iron stick. — Have you a few gold candlesticks ?— » 
We have a few. — Have these men vinegar] — These men have 
aone, but their friends have some. — Have our boys candles'? — 
Our boys have none, but the friends of our boys have some. — Have 
you some other bags 1 — I have no others. — Have you any other 
cheeses ] — I have some others. — Have you other meat 1 — I have 
no other. (See note f , Lesson II.V 



TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. — %mi mib poattjigste 

Action. 

The tome (volume), t>cr Sfjett. 

Have you the first or third tome £cukn <Ste ten erftcn obct fcrttten 
of my work ! &f)etl mcincs "&Berr:6 ] 

Both, 23 e i b e (is declined like an ad- 

jective). 

I have both. 3d) fjafcc fcetbe. 

Obs. The singular of betbe is used only in the no- 
minative and accusative neuter. The plural b e i b e is 
employed when two substantives express the same 
thing, and the singular neuter beibe^, when they ex- 
press two different things : as, 

Have you my book or my stick 1 SjaUtx @te mcin S3udj ober metnen 

(Steel ? 
I have both. 3d) t;aue fceifccS. 

Still, yet, some or any more* $1 d). 

Some more wine. Sfted) 55cttt. 

Some more money. Sttecr) ©olfc). 

Some more buttons. £ftcd) $nopfe» 

Have you any more wine 1 $abm (Sic nod) 2£ctn ? 

c We have hitherto intentionally, and in perfect harmony with this system, 
refrained from speaking of feminine nouns. They will be touched upon here 
fcfter. (See Lesson LXXVIII.) 



44 



I have some more. 
Has he any more bread ] 
He has some more. 
Have I any more books? 
You have some more. 



3d) Ijabe nod) rocfcfyetn 
£at er nod) 23rct> ? 
(St bat ncci) rcctcbeS. 
£abc id) ncci) SUicbet ? 
<Ste fjaben nocb rcelcfye. 



iVoi awy more, no more* $ e t n — me I) t . 



I have no more wine. 

Have you any more vinegar 1 

I have no more. 

Has he any more bread 1 

He has no more. 

I have no more dogs. 

I have no more. 

Not much more. 

Have you much more wine 1 
I have not much more. 
Have you many more books 1 
I have not many more. 

One more book. 
One more good book 
A few books more. 

Have we a few hats more ? 

We have a few more. 



3d) babe fctncn 2£cin mefyk 

£abcn ©ie ncd) (Sffta, ? 

3d) babe fctnen merjr. 

£at er nccb *rot> 1 

Or bat t\'tn$ mefjr. 

3d) babe fetne £unbc mefyr. 

3d) fyabe ieine mefyr. 

S»Z t cf> t t)tel m e r) r . 

$abcn @te ncd) met SGBctn 1 
3cb babe t>cff^n ntcbt mci tncbr. 
^>aben <Sie ncd) met iBucber ? 
3d) fyabe fccren ntd)t wel mefyt. 

57ccb etn 9*ud). 
Sflccb etn cvuteS 33ud). 
9?ccb eintcje 83ucber. 
£aben lu'tr nccb etntcje £ute ? 
SBtr baben nccb etmcjc. 



Has he a few good knives more 1 £at cr nccb etntqe gute^eflTer? ] (Se€ 

Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) 

He has a few more. (5t bat nccb einiae. (See Obs 

Lesson XVI.) " 



EXERCISES. 30. 

Which volume of his work have you 1 — I have the second.— 
How many tomes has this work ] — It has three. — Have you my 
work, or that of my brother] — 1 have both (betfre). — Has the for 
eigner my comb or my knife] — He has both (bett>e*). — Have you 
our bread or our cheese 1 — I have both. — Have you my glass or 
that of my friend 1 — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have 
we any more hay 1 — W 7 e have some more. — Has our merchant any 
more pepper ] — He has some more. — Has he any more candles ]— 
He has some more. — Have you any more coffee 1 — W ? e have no 
more coffee; but we have some more vinegar. — Has the German 
any more water ] — He has no more water ; but he has some more 
meat. — Have we any more gold ribbons ] — We have no more gold 
(Lesson XVIII. Obs. B.) ribbons ; but we have some more silver 
(ribbons). — Has our friend any more sugar] — He has no more.— 
Have I any more beer? — You have no more. — Has your young 
man any more friends ] — He has no more. 



45 



Si- 
Has your brother one more horse 1 — He has one more. — Have 
you one more ] — I have one more. — Has the peasant one more ox ? 
— He has one more. — Have you a few more gardens ] — We have 
a few more. — What have you more 1 — We have a few good ships 
(plur. ©cbtffe) and a few good sailors more. — Has our brother a few 
more friends 1 — He has a few more. — Have I a little more money ? 
< — You have a little more. — Have you any more courage ] — I have 
nt more. — Have you much more money 1 — I have much more, but 
my brother has no more. — Has he enough salt] — He has not 
enough. — Have we buttons enough ] — We have not enough. — Has 
the good son of your good tailor buttons enough ] — He has not 
enough. 



TWENTY.THIRD LESSON.— Bxti nni> iw<mfa*t* 
Hcttioix. 



r 3S e r f d) t e b e tt e (is declined like 
an adjective, and hardly ever 
used in the singular.) (See 
Lesson XVIIL, Obs. B.) 



< 



Several. 



The father, 
the son, 
the child, 
the captain, 
the tea, 
the cake, 



Several children. 

As much, as many* 
As much — as, as many— 

As much bread as wine. 
As many men as children. 



For all genders. 



N. tterfdfneberte* D. tterfdn'ebenett* 
^G. fcerfctytebener* A. fcerfefyiebene* 

bet 2?atet ; 
fcer <Sebn ; 
tag .fttno ; 

bet jpauptmann (plur. £aupt(eute) ; 
bet Sbee ; 

bet £ud)en (is not softened in the 
plur.). 

$ctfd)tebene jUnbet. 

@o tttef. 

@o Diet — rote* 

€"o met $Btcb rote £&ctn. 
(So met banner role jUnbet* 



Have you as much gold as si- £aOen ©tc fo triel ©elb rote Stt&et ? 
ver? 



Of. 



S3 o n (preposition governing the 
dative). 



46 

I have as much of this as of 3d) tjcttjc fo Did Den btcfcm rote DOC 

that. jcnem. 

Have y ;>u as many hats as coats 1 Robert (Sic fc Did Jg>iitc rote 9?ccfe ? 
1 have as many of these as of 3d) f)aOe fo Diet con btcfen ttJtc Don 

those. jenen. 

As many of the one as of the So met Don ben ctnen volt Don ten 

other. ctnbern. 

Obs. A. When etn is used as an indefinite numer- 
al adjective, it is declined like other adjectives. 

Quite (or just) as much. ©ben fo D t e (. 

I have quite as much of this as 3cf) fa&c c&en fo Dtcl Don btefem tt)ic 
of that. Don [cnem. 

The enemy, ber gctnb ; 

the finger, ber ginger ; 

the boot, bet Sttefel. 

More. 20? c r) t (comparative advefb). 

More bread. 5D?ef)r SBtofc. 

More men, Sfflcfjr banner. 

O&s. B. 31 1 ^ answers to jAara in English, as tt) t c 
answers to as. 

More bread than wine. StterjE 23rob ate £Betn. 

More men than children. SDiefjr banner al$ jUnbcr. 

More of this than of that. SDJerjt: Don btcfcm ate Don jcncm. 

More of the one than of the other. 9}ter)r Don bem einen ate Don bem 

anbcrn.a 
More of these than of those. 9Ker)r Don btcfen ate Don jencn. 
I have more of your sugar than 3d) fate ntefjr Don S&tcjn 3ucfec ctl$ 
of mine. Den bem metntcjcn. 

Less. SBcntgcr (comparative of wentj) 

Less water than wine. SBentgcr Staffer ate £Bctn. 

Less than L SBcntcjet ate id). 

— than he. — ate er. 

— than you. — ate Ste* 

TAey. © t e. 

TA<m *Aey. 2C U ft C 

As much as you. (So Diet rote (Sic. 

As much as he. (So Dtcl rote ct. 

As much as they. ©o Dtcl rote fie. 

• When collective or plural nouns, as : 2B e t tt, wine ; 23 r C b, bread, &c. 
are to be represented by the pronouns, b i c f t X and j e n e r must be used 
and not ein and an ber. 



47 

EXERCISES 32. 

Have you a coat? — 1 have several. — Has he a looking-gjass ?— • 
He has several. — What kind of looking-glasses has he 1 — -He has 
beautiful looking-glasses. — Who has my good cakes'? — Several 
men have them. — Has your brother a child 1 — He has (tbrer, Les- 
son XVI.) several. — Have you as much coffee as honey] — I have 
as much of the one as of the other. — Has he as much tea as beer ? 
— He has as much of the one as of the other. — Has this man as 
many friends a3 enemies 1 — He has as many of the one as of the 
other. — Has the son of your friend as many coats as shirts ] — He 
has as many of the one as of the other. — Have we as many boots 
as shoes ] — We have as many of the one as of the other. 

33. 

Has your father as much gold as silver ] — He has more of the 
latter than of the former. — Has he as much tea as coffee 1 — He 
has more of the latter than of the former. — Has the captain as ma- 
ny sailors as ships ] — He has more of the one than of the other. — 
Have you as many rams as I ] — I have just as many. — Has the 
foreigner as much courage as we ] — He has quite as much. — Have 
we as much good as bad paper] — We have as much of the one as 
of the other. — Have we as much cheese as bread ] — W"e have more 
of the latter than of the former. — Has your son as many cakes as 
books ] — He has more of the latter than of the former ; more of 
the one than of the other. 

34. 

How many children have you ] — I have only one, but my bro- 
ther has more than I ; he has five.— Has your son as much head as 
mine 1 — He has less head than yours, but he has more courage. — 
My children have more courage than yours. — Have I as much 
money as you] — You have less than I. — Have you as many books 
as 1 ] — I have less than you. — Have I as many enemies as ) r our 
father ] — You have fewer than he. — Have the Americans more 
children than we ] — They have fewer than we. — Have we as many 
ships as the English ] — We have less than they. — Have we fewer 
knives than the children of our friends ] — We have fewer than 
they. 

35. 

Who has fewer friends than we ] — Nobody has fewer. — Have 
you as much of my tea as of yours] — I have as much of yours as 
of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine] — You have 
fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Spaniard as much of your 
money as of his own] — He has less of his own than of ours.— 
Has your baker less bread than money] — He has less of the latter 
&an of the former* — Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses 1— 



48 

He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; he has fewer of the 
one than of the other. — He has fewer horses than .we, and we 
have less oread than he. — Have our neighbours as many carriages 
as we ] — We have fewer than they. — We have less corn and less 
meat than they. — We have but little corn, but meat enough. 



TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. — t)i<>r ttU& pDattpgete 

Section. 

OF THE INFINITIVE. 

All German verbs form their infinitive in ett* This 
termination in verbs, the root of which ends in e I or e r, a 
is contracted by throwing out the letter e, as fyutbent, 
to prevent ; fammetn, to collect, &c. The verbs marked 
with an asterisk ( # ) are irregular. 

A wish, a mind, a desire, £ u ft; 
time, B e i t ; b 
to, g u • 

Obs. The preposition gu, to, always stands before 
the infinitive. In com? and verbs it is placed between 
the separable partick and the infinitive, as will be 
exemplified in future lessons. 

To work. Uthc tten. 

To speak. © p t c d) c n*, r e t> e n. c 

Have you a mind to work 1 £aben &w Cuft ;u arfoetten ? 

I have a mind to work. 3d) babe £uft $u arbetteju 

He has not the courage to speak. (St foot t>en Wlutt) md)t, ju fprcdjett. 

To cut. © df) n c t b c n*. 

To cut them, fie fcfynctfccn*. 

y 4«fc 

a By the root we understand that part of a verb which precedes the termi- 
nation c n of the infinitive ; e. g. in the verb lobett, to praise, I o b is the root 

•» The two substantives £ttft and 3?it are feminine. If they are ream red 
in a negative sense, fetne 2uft, and mcfyt $ett must be used. Ex. 3d) babe 
leine £uft ju fprecfyen, I have no mind to speak : er fyctt nicfyt %zit ju ctrbeitett, 
he has no time to work. t 

c (Sprecfyen is derived from bte (gpracfye, the language, and signifies to pro- 
duce or emit sounds in a physical manner ; rebett means to express ideas by 

ords, from bte dtfot, the discourse. 



49 



To cut some. 



Has he tini3 to cut trees 1 
He has time to cut some. 

To buy. 
To buy some more. 

To buy one. 

To buy two. 

To buy one more. 

To buy two more. 



I fcmfen. 



faufett, 



f Masc. toefcfyen, beffett, j §■ 
NeuL mld)e$, bcften, [ g 

Plural for all genders. 

xod&)t, fceren, bafcon fcfynet* 
bem 

£at cr Sett 93aume. }u fcbnetben ? 
(Sr fyat Sett nx(d)e $u fct>ncit>e«. 

$ a u f c n . 
9?ocf) faufen. 

$ ikfasc. ettten 
I NeuL tin$ 

3tt>ct faufctu 
( Masc. nod) etnen 
^ NeuL uorf) em$ 

STZcc^ $nxi faufcn. 

QCP The infinitive is always placed at the end oi 
the phrase whether preceded by JU or not. 

Have you a mind to buy one Jpafren <§k Cuft nod) cin $pfetfc> gu 

more horse 1 faufcn ? 

I have a mind to buy one more. 3d) fjak £uft ncd) etn£ gu faufcn. 
Have you a mind to buy some $abcn @ic Suft 23ttd)et 511 faufen ? 

books ? 
I have a mind to buy some, but 3d) f)a6e Suft roetcfye gu faufcn, 

I have no time. abcr id) fja.bc md)t 3eit, 

Has he time to work 1 J&at cr Sett $u atbetten ? 

He has time, but no mind to (St fyat Sett, abet feme £uft gu ars 

work. fatten. 

EXERCISES. 36. 

Have you still a mind to buy the house of my friend 1 — I have 
still a mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time 
to work 1 — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has he time to cut 
some sticks 1 — He has time to cut some. — Have you a mind to cut 
some bread"? — I have a mind to cut some, but I have no knife. — 
Haw you time to cut some cheese 1 — I have time to cut some. — 
lias he a desire o cut the tree 1 — He has a desire to cut it, but he 
bas no time. — Has he time to cut the cloth 1 — He has time to cut it. 
— Have 1 time to cut the trees 1 — You have time to cut them. — 
Has the painter a mind to buy a horse 1 — He has a mind to bay 
two. — Has your captain of the navy (8d)tff$capttan) time to speak 1 
—He has time, but no desire to speak. 
3 



I 



50 

37. 

Have ycu a mind to buy a carriage 1 — I have a mmd to bin ^ne 
—Have I a mind to buy a house 1-— You have a mind to buy one. 
•—Has your brother a mind to buy a great ox ] — He has a m ^id to 
buy a little one. — We have a mind to buy little oxen. — How *nany 
horses have you a mind to buy ] — I have a mind to buy four.-— Has 
any one a mind to buy a broom 1 — This man has a mind to buy 
one. — What has that man a mind to buy ] — He has a mind to 
buy a beautiful carriage, three beautiful horses, good tea, and good 
meat. 

38. 

Have you a desire to speak 1 — I hav e a desire, but no time to 
speak. — Have you the courage to cut your arm 1 — I have not the 
eourage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ($u fprecfyen)"] — You are 
not wrong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting ($u fcfynetfcen) 
my trees. — Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more 
bird 1 — He has a desire to buy one more ] — Have you a mind to 
buy one more beautiful coat ] — I have a mind to buy one more.— 
Have we a mind to buy a few more horses 1 — We have a mind to 
buy a few more, but we have no more money. (See Lesson XXII.) 

39. 

What have you a mind to buy 1 — We have a mind to buy some- 
thing good, and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beau- 
tiful. — Have their children a desire to buy any birds] — Their 
children have no desire to buy any. — Have you the courage to buy 
the trunk of the captain ] — I have a desire to buy it, but I have no 
more money. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog? — Nobo- 
dy has a mind to buy it. — Have you a mind to buy my beautiful 
birds, or those of the Frenchman'? — I have a mind to buy Ihose of 
the Frenchman. — Which book has he a mind to buy 1 — He has a 
mind to buy that which you have, that which your son has, and 
that which mine has. — Have you two horses ] — I have o»ly one, 
but I have a wish to buy one more. 



TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. — jFfinf mtb floattflgste 

&zttion. 

OF COMPOUND VERBS. 

There are in German two kinds of compound verbs • 
one kind consists of a simple verb and a particle 
which is inseparable from it ; the other cf a simple 
verb and a particle which can be separated, either to 



51 

give place to the syllable g e of the participle past, or 
to jtt, or to be itself placed after the verb or even at 
the end of the phrase. We shall distinguish the separ- 
able verbs _by placing j u between the verb and the 
particle. 8 Examples : 

To break. gctfcredjen*. 

To keep (to take care). 2Cufbenxif)ten (cmftutu'ir>af)ten). 

To pick up. 2(uff)cbcn * (aufuibebcn). 

To mend. 2Custu'fTetn (au^u&cffcrn)* 

To make a fire. gtuet cinmactyert (angumacfyen). 

Has the tailor time to mend my jpat bet (^cbnetbet 3dt meinen £RodC 

coat ] QU^uJbcffertt ] 

He has time to mend it. (St t)at 3cit irjn QU^uOc(Tcrn. b 

To wash. ££a[d)en *. 

C SBtennen *. c 
To burn, < £>erbtenncn (to destroy by burnr 

( in g)- . x 

To seek, to look for. (£ud)cn (governs the accusative). 

To warm. SBtftmen. 

To make. 90?ad)en (physically). 

To do. S&un* (morally d ). 

Has the shoemaker time to make £cit bet (Sd)uf)mad)Ct Sett meinc ©tie* 

my boots 1 fel ni mad)c-n ] 

He has time to make them. (St r)at 3ctt fie £U niacin. 

To be willing, to wish* SOS I ( e n ** 
Will you 1 



1, 



Are you willing ] SSScflcn^te? 

Do you wish ] ) 

[ will, I am willing-, I wish. 3d) uoxlt. 



Will he 1 is he willing ] does ) ^j. 
he wish] Juliet 



a These verbs may likewise be distinguished by the principal accent, which 
is placed on the root of the verb when the particle is inseparable, and when 
separable on the particle itself. 

b These examples show how the separable particle gives way in the infini- 
tive to 1 u . 

c The verb B ten tie it (as well as its compounds, serBvetttiett, &c.) is regu- 
lar when used in an active or transitive, but irregular when in a neuter or in- 
transitive sense. We denote such verbs by the following abbreviations : v, 
ac. and neut. irreg. 

d The verb m a c& e tt always relates to a determinate action, and is em- 
ployed nearly as the English verb to make, in the sense of producing anything ; 
the verb t f) u ir * on the contrary always, like the English verb to do, relates tc 
an indeterminate, action, as : @tn JUetb rwtrfjeit, to make a coat; fseucr ma= 
d> e u, to make a 'fire ; eilteit ©efallen tlnut, to ' do a favour ; fcine <Sc&ulbtgfeit 
tbun, to do one's duty. 



52 

He will, he is willing, he wish- ) ^ .-* 

es. 5 

We will, we are willing, we 5 m a 

wish. 3 

You will you are willing, 7 ~ . ^^ 

you wish. 3 

They will, they are willing, "> ,^ ; , ivv %w . 
xl J . ' , J ° >ote iDOllen. 

they wish. _) 

O&s. Jl. The particle J u does not precede the in 
finitive added to the verb tt> o H e n, to be willing. Ex, 

Do you wish to make my fire 1 SOSollen 8tc mctn Jjeucr cmmai 

*cn ? 
I am willing to make it. 3d) will e£ ctnmacfycn. 

I do not wish to' make it. 3d) will etf nicbt cmmacfyeru 

Does he wish to buy your horse ] SS til er 3fa ^fvtfc) Caufcn ? 
He wishes to buy it. (£t will Ct> faufcn. 



A TABLE OF COMPOUND VERBS/ 

I. Inseparable Verbs. 2 

These verbs are formed by prefixing one of the fol- 
lowing unaccented particles to simple verbs : be, emfy 
?nt, er, ge, fyinter, fcer, iDtber, jer* 

23c — kbcnfen *, to reflect. £>tntcr— f)tntcrgchcn *, to deceive. 

@mp — cmpjvblcn *, to recommend. SSer — serfprectKn *, to promise. 

(£nt — entflicbcn # , to run away. £Btbet — wtkrlegen *, to refute. 

(St — et batten *, to receive. 3ct — ^crl>rcc^>cn *, to break. 
(3c — geffrben*, to confess. 

II. Separable Verbs. 

2T6 — a&f&rctben * , to copy. 93ct — fretftefjen *, to assist. 

2Cn — anfcmgcn *, to begin. ©at — batficllen, to exhibit. 

2£ttf — cmfbeben *, to pick up. ©aruntet — fcatuntctmtfcfyen, to in- 

2Cu£-~au£gc[)en *, to go out. termingle. 

e %$?' 'J ™' is tne rea * second person plural; but the Germans generally 
use © t e , which is the third. 

f Our intention in giving tables of the most complicated grammatical parts, 
Is not that the learners should make an immediate application of them; we 
only wish to give them a clear and general idea of those parts, in order to en- 
able them to find them out more easily, as they will be in want of them in ad- 
vancing by degrees. They must in their exercises employ only the words and 
expressions made use of in the lessons. 

g We call verbs inseparable when they cannot, and sefarable when the* 
can be separated. 



53 

3)at>en — fca&enfonimcn*/ to escape. 92acf) — nacfymacbcn, to imitate. 

£)urcf) — t>urcl>vcifcn, to travel tleber — uberfltcycn *, to overflow 

through. Urn — unirocrfen *> to overturn. 

(Sin — etn|"d)(afen *, to fall asleep. Itntcr — untcrjinfen *, to go to thw 
-Jort — fertfahren *, to continue. bottom. 

$etm — bcimge^cn *, to go home. s X^etl — DOllgtefien * / to fill up. 

4>erau$ — bctauSfomnwn *, to come SB or — t^rgebeti *, to pretend. 

out. 33erau$ — potaugfagen, to foretell* 

$mmter — rjcruntetfcringen *, to SScrbei — fortu , tgchen* / to pass by. 

bring down. StarJet — r>erbcr|Vf)en *, to foresee. 

£equ — ber$unaf)cn, to draw near. 23ertiber — sorubcrfciljEen*, to pass 
£in — fyingeben % to go thither. by in a coach. 

£tnauf — tjtnaufftcigcn*, to ascend. 2Bcg*— meggefyen *, to go awa}' 

£tnau$ — fjuumSroerjvn *, to throw SQBkDer — wieierfotfimgn % to come 

out. again. 

jftnein — btnctngcF)cn *, to go in. 3u — gurebeti, to persuade. 

Snnc — tnnchnlten *, to stop. Suruc! — ffxtMhtytm, to return. 

9)itt — nrittbetten, to communicate. 3u(ammen — jufammvnfegcn, to put 
SJtcfoer — ntct'crtc^en, to lay down. together. 

Obs. B. Some compound verbs are either insepar- 
able or separable, according to their signification. We 
shall speak of them hereafter. 

EXERCISES. 40. 

Have you a desire to keep ray letter 1 — I have a desire to keep 
it. — Am I right in keeping (au^uberoo^citt) your money 1 — You are 
right in keeping it. — Has the tailor a desire to make my coat ?-— 
He has a desire to make it, but he has no time. — Has your tailor 
time to mend my coats ] — He has time to mend them. — Have you 
the courage to burn my hat ]— I have not the courage to burn it ; 1 
have a mind to keep it. — Has the shoemaker's boy a mind to mend 
my boots ] — He has no time to mend them. — What has our 
friend's tailor to mend 1 — He has to mend our old coats. — Who has 
to mend -our boots? — Oar shoemaker has to mend them. — What 
has our hatmaker to do ] — He has to mend your great hats. — Has 
your brother's joiner anything to do] — He has to mend our great 
tables and our little chairs. 

41. 

Do you wish to keep my twenty-seven crowns 1 — I wish to keep 
them. Will you pick up that crown or that florin ] — I will pick up 
both. — Do you wish to cut his ringer ] — I do not wish to cut it. — 
Does the painter wish to burn vinegar 1 — He wishes to burn 
some. — Is the peasant willing to burn his bread ] — He is not wil- 
ling to burn his own, but that of his neighbour. — Have you any- 
thing to do ] — I have nothing to do. — Have we anything to do 1 — 
We have to warm our coffee. — Do you wish to speak 1 — I wish to 
speak. — Is your son willing to work 1 — He is not willing to work. 



54 



4a. 



Do you wish to Duy anything ] — I wish to buy something,— 
What do you wish to buy l — I wish to buy some good books.— 
What has he to buy 1 — He has to buy a good horse. — Will you buy 
this or that table ] — I will buy (put the infinitive always to the end 
of the phrase) neither this nor that. — Which house does your friend 
wish to buy ] — He wishes to buy your brother's great house. — Is 
your servant willing to make my lire 1 — He is willing to make it.— 
Will your father buy these rams or these oxen 1 — He will buy 
neither the one nor the other. — Does he wish to buy my umbrella 
or my cane ]— -He wishes to buy both. 

43. 

Do you wish to make a fire ?--We do not wish to make any. — 
What do you wish to make 1 — I wish to make vinegar. — Will you 
seek my knife*] — I will seek it. — Have you toiookfor anything 1 — 
1 have nothing to look for. — Has he time to seek my son 1 — He has 
time, but he will not seek him. — What has he to do ] — He has to 
make a fire, to wash my thread stockings, to buy good cofTee, good 
sugar, good water, and good meat. — Will he buy your good trunk ] 
— He will buy it. — Will you buy my great or my little house 1 — 
I will buy neither your great nor your little house ; I wish to buy 
that of our friend. — Will you buy my beautiful horses ] — I will not 
buy them. 

44. 

How many rams will y^u buy 1 — I will buy twenty-two. — Does 
the foreigner wish to buy much corn] — He wishes to buy but 
little. — Do you wish to buy a great many gloves ? — We wish to 
%ny only a few ; but our children wish to buy a great many. — Will 
the} seek the same boots that we have? — They will not seek those 
which you have, but those which my father has. — Will you look 
for my coats or for those of the good Frenchman 1 — I will look for 
neither yours nor those of the good Frenchman ; I will look for 
mine, and for those of my good son. 



TWENTY.SIXTH LESSON. — Bed)* ntib ?ttim?100te 

Cation. 

To tear. Sertctfien*. 

To go. © c h c n *. 

At. 33 c i , ) prepositions governing 

To. 3 u , 5 the dative case. 

To be. Bdn *. 

Rule. The preposition 6 e i signifies with or at thv 
kouse of, the preposition j U, to or to the house of. 



55 

To be with the man or at the Set tern SOtanne fetn*. 

man's house. 
To go to the man or to the 3u bem Sftcmne gefjen*. 

man's house. 
To be with his (one's) friend or Sci fcinem #reunt>c fetn*. 

at his (one's) friend's house. 
To go to my father or to my 3u mcincm SSatcr gefyen** 

father's house. 

To be at home. 3u £aufe fctn*. 

To go home. 9la6) |>aufe gcr)etu 



To be with me or at my house. Set mir fein** 

To go to me or to my house. 3u mir gefyen*. 

To be with him or at his house. Set tj)m fctn** 

To go to him 01 o his house. 3u ifym geben*. 

To be with us or at our house. Set uns fctn** 

To go to us or to our house. 3u tmS gcftcn*. 

To be with you or at your house, ( Sei Sbncn fctn*/ ki (£*ud) fctn*. 

To go to you or to your house. ( 3u Sfytten gchen*, $u (Suci) gef?en* 

To be with them or at their house, Set tr)ncn fctn*. 

To go to them or to their house. 3u thncn gefyen*. 

To be with some one or at some Set 3emcmt>cm fctn*. 

one's house. 
To go to some one or to some 3u Scmanfccm gcr)en*. 

one's house. 
To be with no one or at no one's Set 92icmant>em fctn*. 

house. 
To go to no one or to no one's 3u £fttemcmbcm qef)cn*« 

house. 

At whose house ? With whom ? Set t& c m? 
To whose house ? To whom ? 3 u to c m ? 

To whom (to whose house) do 3u a?em roeUcn ©ic gefjen ? 

you wish to go 1 

I wish to go to no one (to nc 3d) rottf gu SKcmanfcem gcl)em a 

one's house). 
At whose house (with whom) is Set went tft Sfjt Srufcct ? 

your brother 1 

He is at ours (with us). (§t tft fret un&. 

Is he at home 1 3ft cr $u £cmfc ? 

He is not at home* <S*r tft ntd)t ju Jpaufe. 

To drink. Sttnfcn*. 

To carry (to take). Sragcn*. 

To bring (to carry). Sringen*. 

* In German, as in English, no more than one negative is ever exprob«c» 
as has already been seen in many instances. 




56 

EXERCISSS. 45. 

Do you wish to tear my coat? — T do not wish to tear it.- 
your brother wish to tear my beautiful book ] — He does not wish 
to tear it. — What does he wish to tear ] — He wishes to tear your 
heart. — With whom is our father] — He is with his friend. — To 
whom do you wish to go ] — I wish to go to you. — Will you go to 
my house ] — I will not go to your's, but to my tailor's. — Does your 
father wish to go to his friend? — He wishes to go to him. — At 
whose house is your son 1 — He is at our house. — Do your children 
wish to go to our friends ] — They wish to go to them. — Is the 
foreigner at our brother's ] — He is there (bet ir>m). — At whose 
house is the Englishman ]-— ■ He is at yours. — Is the American at 
our house] — No, Sir, he is not at our house; he is at his friend's. 
—Is the Italian at his friends 9 ] — He is at their house. 

46. 

Do you wish to go home 1 — I do not wish to go home ; I wish 
to go to the son of my neighbour. — Is your father at home ] — No, 
Sir, he is not at home. — With whom is he ? — He is with the good 
children of our old neighbour. — Will you go to any one's house? 
— I will go to no one's house. — At whose house is your son ] — 
He is at no one's house; he is at home. — What will he do at 
home 1 — He will drink good wine. — Will you carry my letters 
home] — 1 will carry them to my father's..— Who will carry my 
notes ] — The young man will carry them. — Will he carry them to 
my house] — No, he will carry them to his brother's. — Is his 
father at home] — He is not at home; he is at the foreigner's. 

47. 

What have you to drink ] — I have nothing to drink. — Has youi 
son anything to drink] — He has good wine and good water to 
drink. — Will your servant carry my books to my brothers' ] — He 
will carry them to their house. — What will you carry to my 
house ] — I will carry to your house two chickens, three birds, good 
bread, ?nd good wine (always put the infinitive to the end, and do 
not separate it from "to your house"). — Will you carry these 
chairs to my house ] — I will not carry these, but those. — What 
will the German do at home ] — He will work and drink good wine, 

48. 

What have you at home ] — I have nothing at home. — Have you 
anything good to drink at home ] — I have nothing good to drink ; 
I have only bad water. — Has the captain as much coffee as sugar 
at home] — He has as much of the one as of the other at home.— 
Will you carry as many crowns as buttons to my brother's ] — I 
will carry to his house as many of the one as of the other. — Will 
you carry great glasses to my house] — I will carry some to your 
house. — Has the merchant a desire to buy as many oxen as rams] 
— He wishes to buy as many of the one as of the other. 



57 

49. 

Has the shoemaker as many shoes as boots to mend! — He has 
as many of the one as of the other to mend. — Has he as much 
wine as water to drink 1 — He has as much to drink of the one as 
of the other. — Has the Turk a desire to break some glasses 1 — He 
has a desire to break some. — Has he a mind to drink some wine ? 
— He has no mind to drink any. — Will you buy anything- of (Oct) 
rne ] — I will buy nothing of you. — Of whom (JBci n?cm) will you 
buy your corn ] — I will buy it of the great merchant. — Of whom 
will the English buy their oxen? — They will buy them of the 
Dutch. — Will the Spaniards buy anything] — They will buy 
nothing-. 



TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— 0iebeit ttttb 
^txmn^igsie Section. 

w , ? C 2£ c ? (an adverb of place with* 

vvnere ' I out motion.) 

Whither ? where to 2 £ '** *$ X h ? (an adverb ° f pldC6 
wnitne? . where to < £ with motiont) 

Rules. 

1. The question tt> ? indicates rest in a place, or 
with any person or object whatsoever ; the preposition 
which answers this question always governs the da- 
tive. 

2. The question tt) o f) i tt ? denotes motion or direc- 
tion towards some place or object ; when answered 
by one of the prepositions a tt, to ; an f, upon ; I) t tt t e r, 
behind ; tt e 6 e tt, by the side ; it b e r, above ; u tt t e r, 
under; Jtt>tfd)ett, between; t)or, before; tit, in or 
into, it always requires the accusative. a 

There. £) a (rest, repose). 

Thither. |)inor b a f) t n (motion or direc- 

tion). 

To carry thither. £tn or bafytrt ttagen*. 

rr -4.4.1. -+1. { Masc. xbn ) inn or bafn'tt 

To carry it thither. j ^ ^ j ^^ 

a The same prepositions govern the dative when they answer the question 
wo? 

3* 



58 

f . carry some thither, j £; »<*" } *£& 

To carry them thither, ffe fym or bctfym tragen** 

Obs. A. The adverb b a, there, is always joined to 
a verb of rest, and the abverb f) i n or t> a t) t It, thither, 
to a verb of motion, jj in is used to express, motion 
from, and t) e r motion towards the person that speaks. 
Ex. @v ift bet, he is there ; id) rtritt and) t)kt (bafym) gefyett, 
I will also go thither ; tt>often ©ie fyerfommett? will you 
come hither ? 



To send. 

To come. 
To lead. 
I will send him (it) to you. 


C (Scnbcn.* 
\ <Sd)ttfen. b 

jtcmmen*. 

gufyrcru 

3d) rottl ifyn (e$) $u S&nen fd)tcfen 


When % 


SBann? 


To-morrow. 
To-day. 


Bergen. 
£eute. 



Some where, any where* Srgenbwo (rest). 

Some whither, any whither, 3tcjen£>tt>o()trt (direction). 

No where, not any where. 5? 1 1 a, c n fc> or n 1 1 9 e n t> 3. 

Do you wish to go any whither? Molten ©te irgenbti>of)ttt gefyenl 
I do not wish to go any whither. 3d) anil nirgent)^ fytngeftetu 

The physician, bcr 2fr$t. 

To write. ©cfytetben*. 

Have you to write as many let- $aUn <§te fc iriel SBvtcfe ^u fc^rct6en^ 
ters as my father 1 rote mem 25atet ? 

O&s. B. Where the verb stands at the end of a 
phrase, the word tt) i e , as, or a i $ f than, is placed with 
its nominative after the verb. 

I have to write more (i. e. let- 3d) FjaOe betcn mcf)t $u fcfyreifcen, a(g 
ters) than he. er. 

exercises. 50. 

Where is your bi ether! — He is at home. — Whither do you wish 
to gol — 1 wish to go home. — Whither does your father wish to 

b <S d) t of e n is used when a person is sent without any object, or with one 
of little importance, fen ben, on the contrary, always denotes a mission of 
Importance, whence bet @e[cmbte, the ambassador. 



59 

gv ? — He wishes to go to your house. — Whither will you carry 
this letter] — I a^ ill carry it to my neighbour's. — Is 'your son at 
home ] — He is there. — Whither will the shoemaker carry my boots % 
— He will carry them to your house. — Will he carry them home! 
— He will carry them thither. — Will you send good sugar home ] 
— I will send some thither. — Will the baker send good bread home ? 
— He will send some thither. — Will you come to me] — I will come 
to you — Whither do you wish to go ] — I wish to go to the good 
Frenchmen. — Will the good Italians go to our house ] — They will 
go no whither. — Will you take (fufyren) your son to my house 1 — I 
will not take him to your house, but to the captain's. — When will 
you take him to the captain's ] — I will take him there (ju tf)m) to- 
rn orrow. 

51. 

Will you go any whither (any where) ] — I will go no whithei 
(no where). — Will your good son go to any one] — He will go vo 
no one. — When will you take (fufyrcn) your young man to the pain- 
ter ] — I will take him there ($u tr)m) to-day. — Where will he carry 
these birds to] — He will carry them no whither. — Will you take 
the physician to this man] — I will take him there (gu ifym). — When 
will you take him there ] — I will take him there to-day. — Will the 
physicians come to your good brother] — They will not come to him. 
— Will you send me a servant] — I will send you none. — Will you 
send a child to the physician] — I will send one to him. — With whom 
is the physician] — He is with nobody. — Do you wish to go any 
whither] — I wish to go to the good Americans. — Has he time to come 
to my house ] — He has no time to come there. — Will the captain 
write one more letter ] — He will write one more. — Will you write 
a note ] — I will write one. — Has your friend a mind to write as 
many letters as I ] — He has a mind to write quite as many. 

52. 

Have you many letters to write ] — I have only a few to write. — 
How many letters has our old neighbour to write ] — He has as 
many to write as you. — Who has long letters to write] — The youth 
has some to write. — How many more letters has he to write ] — He 
has six more to write. — How many has he to send ] — He has twen- 
ty to send. — Has he as many letters to send as his father ? — He 
has fewer to send. — Has the hatmaker some more hats to send ] — 
He has no more to send. — Has your son the courage to write a 
long letter] — He has the courage to write one. — Will he write as 
many letters as mine ] — He will write quite as many. — Will you 
buy as many carriages as horses ? — I will buy more of the lattei 
than of the former. 



60 

TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— 3tcJ|t ntib ?tt(m?ifi0t€ 

Huticn. 

In order to (conjunction). It m — $tt. 
To see. © e b e n * 

O&s. JL The conjunctive expression in order to pre- 
ceding the infinitive is translated into German by it m 
J tt. When the sentence is short, a m, zVi order, may be 
left out. 

I will go to my brother in order 3d) ttriH 3a mc'tncm S3rubet gcfjcn, 
to see him. um tfm $11 feben. 

1 have no money (in order) to 3d) babe hin ©dt>/ (um) SBrcb $u 
buy bread. faufetn 

Has your brother a knife (in or- $ot 3br S8ruber ctn 9)?effer, (um) 
der) to cut his bread 1 fein 2*reb $u febnetrxn ? 

He has one to cut it. (£t fyat ctn.6, um ee $u febnetben. 

To sweep. 2Cn^fcf)trcn (au^ufefyten). 

To Ai/J. £ 00 t c n 7 

To slaughter, © d) ( a d) t c n 3' 

To sa/*.' © a ( $ e n . 

To 6<? a&fc. .51 6 tt n e n *. 

I can (am able) — he can (is 3d) Farm — et farm* 

able). 
We can (are able) — they can 2Sir fonncn — fie f onnett. 

(are able). 
You can (are able). 3r)r Fernet (@tc fonnen). 

O&s. jB, The particle j U does not precede the infini 
tive added to the verb fottrtert, to be able. (See Les- 
son XL.) Ex. 

Can you write a letter 1 Bennett @te etnen 95rtcf fd)tet&en ? 

I can write one. 3d) frmn etnen fct)tctt>etn 

He is able to work. (St Fann atfcetten. 







m 


Singular. 

Dat. Aco. 


To me. 
To him. 


me. 
him. 


1st person. 
3d person. 


mir* mid), 
tfym* ifym 



» £5btett means to deprive anv one of life ; fdjtadbrett, to slaughter, is use J 
Ifr speaking of animals, the flesh of which is eaten. Ex. ©etnen ftetttb tobten 
to kiP bis enemy; Deafen uno <2c§afe fcfylacfytett, to slaughter oxen and sheep 



61 



Tons. 
To you. 

To them. 

To kill me. 
To see me. 
To speak to me. 

To speak to him. 



US. 

you. 
them. 



Plural. 

Dat. Acc. 

im3. im3. 

@itdn ©ttfy. 

(3t)iten) (©ie b ). 

3d person. tbneiu ffe. 



1st person. 
2d person. < 



sfltfcb tb'Mcn. 
sfltfcb feberi*. 
SKt'db (mit mir or $n mir) fpre* 

cbcn*. 
Sbn (mit ttjm or $u il}m) fpte« 

cbcn*. 
Sbm fcbicfcn. 
3u tbni fcbicfcn. 
Shn mir (m mtr) fcbicfcn. 
Sfyn mtr mcrqen fcbicfcn (tr)n met* 

gen m mir fcbicfcn). 

JJj^ In German the dative precedes the accusative ; 
but when the accusative is a personal pronoun it pre- 
cedes the dative. 



To send to him. 

To send to his house. 

To send him to me. 

To send him t^ me to-morrow. 



It to me — them to me. 
It to him — them to him. 
It to us — them to us. 


f — 

Masc. 

tbm 
tbm 


It to you — them to you. 


tfym 


It to them — them to them. 


tfytt. 



Singular. 



Plural. 



Neut. 

e£ mtr - ffe mtr. 
e3 tt)m — fie tbm. 
e3 urt3 — ffe mt& 
eg @ucf) — fie @ucf). 
e£ ptmen)jte(3t)iten). 
eg tfynen — fie tfynen. 

When will you send me the hat 1 ££ann molten (Sic mir ben £ut 

fcbicfcn ? 
I will send it to you to-morrow. 3cb trill tfjn 3> b n e n mergen 

fcbicfcn. 



Some to me. 
Some to him. 
Some to us. 

Some to you. 

Some to them. 



Masc. 



Neut. 



Plural. 



f mtr toelcben. vt>elrf)eg. mtr mekfte. 

f tbm toelcfjen. rcelcfyeg. tbm wekfye, 

f im$ tt>efdf)en. melcfyeg. unS toeldbc. 

^\® nd) ?ioetcfu>tt »efafe0 i @ucf) n)c( * c * 

t tfynen roeWjen. u>eW)eg. tfynen rodefye. 



b See note a , Lesson XXXJ 



62 



To give* 
To lend* 



) e d e n % 



To give me. 
To lend me. 



& e i f) c n *• 

5G2ir $eben*. 
9L>ltr letfycn*. 

Are yoa willing to lend me SBollen <Ste mtt d?ett> (eifjett ? 

some money ] 
I am willing to lend you some. 3d) mill Sfyneu tvclcfycS leifjem 

A TABLE 

OF THE DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



FIRST PERSON. 



'♦J 






Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

.Ace. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



SECOND PERSON. 

bit, thou. 



trf), I. 

memer (ntem c ), of me. bemer (betn), of thee. 



mtr, 
tmdf), 

unfer, 

nn$, 

im3, 



to me. 
me. 

we. 

of us. 

to us. 

us. 

THIRD PERSON. 
A 



bir, 
btcf), 

tyr, 
euer, 
eucfy, 
eucfy, 



to thee, 
thee. 

you. 
of you. 
to you. 

you. 



Masculine. 



4 

< 

ft 
CO 



Nom. er, he, 

! 
Gen. femer (fein), of him 

Dat. tfym, to him 

,Acc. t^n, 



Feminine. 

fte, she, 

t()rer,ofher. 

ifyr, to her, 

himJjTe, her. 



Neuter. 



e£, it. 

femer (fern), of it. 
U)tn, to it. 



it. 





r NoM, 


< 


Gen. 
Dat. 




.Ace. 



For all genders. 

ffe, 

tfjrer, 
tfynen, 

ffe; 



they, 
of them, 
to them. 

them. 



c 3ftem, beat, fern, as genitives singular, for memer, bemer, femer, are uaed 
only in familiar discourse and in poetry. Ex. 33ergtfj mem m$t, forget me 



&ot. 



88 

EXERCISES. 53. 

Has the carpenter money to buy a hammer ? — He has some tc 
ouy one. — Has the captain money to buy a ship ! — He has some 
to buy one. — Has the peasant money to buy sheep (fcas @d)af adds 
c and is not softened in the plural) ! — He has none to buy any. — 
Have you time to see my father? — I have no time to see Him. — 
Does your father wish to see me] — He does not wish to see you. 
—Has the servant a broom to sweep the house ! — He has one to 
sweep it. — Is he willing to sweep it ! — He is willing to sweep it. 
— Have I salt enough to salt my meat 1 ? — You have not enough of 
it to salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in orc\er to see 
me !— He will neither come to your house nor see you. — Has out 
neighbour a desire to kill his horse ! — He has no desire to kill it.— 
Will you kill your friends ! — I w r ill kill only my enemies. 

54. 

Can you cut me some bread ! — I can cut you some. — Have you 
a knife to cut me some ! — I have one. — Can you wash your 
gloves ! — I can wash them, but I have no wish to do it. — Can the 
tailor make me a coat ! — He can make you one.— Will you speak 
to the physician ! — I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to 
see me in order to speak to me ! — He wishes to see you, in order 
to give you. a crown. — Does he wish to kill me! — He does not 
wish to* kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — Does the son of our 
old friend wish to kill an oj ! — He wishes to kill two. — How 
much money can you send me ! — I can send you thirty crowns. — 
Will you send me my letter ! — I will send it to you. — Will you 
send the shoemaker anything ! — I will send him my boots. — Will 
you send him your coats! — No, I will send them to my tailor. — 
Can the tailor send me my coat! — He cannot send it you. — Are 
your children able to write letters ! — They are able to write some 

55. 

Have you a glass to drink your wine ! — I have one, but I have 
no wine ; I have only water. — Will you give me money to buy 
some ! — I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you 
give me that which you have ! — I will give it you. — Can you 
drink as much wine as water ! — I can drink as much of the one as 
of the other. — Has our poor neighbour any wood to make a fire ! — 
He has some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and 
n:eat. — Are you willing to lend him some ! — I am willing to lend 
him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ! — I wish to 
6peak to him. — Where is he ! — He is with the son of the captain. 
— Does the German wish to speak to me! — He wishes to speak to 
you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours! — He 
wishes to speak to both. — Can the children of our tailor work l — 
They can work, but they will not. 



64 



56. 



Do you wish to speak to the children of your shoemaker 1 — 1 
wish to speak to them. — What will you give them 1 — 1 will give 
them great cakes. — Will you lend them anything ] — I have nothing 
to lend them. — Has the cook some more salt to salt the meat ? — 
He has a little more. — Has he some more rice ] — He has a great 
deal more. — Will he give me some 1 — He will give you some.— 
Will he give some to my poor children? — He will give them 
some. — Will he kill this or that hen ] — He will kill neither this 
nor that. — Which ram will he kill 1 — He will kill that of the good 
peasant. — Will he kill this or that ox ] — He will kill both. — Who 
will send us biscuits 1 — The baker will send you some.> — Have 
y*ou anything good to give me ] — I have nothing good to give you. 



TWENTY-NINTH LESSON.— ^eutt IXtib ^man)i^U 

To whom ? 80S e m ? (A question followed by 

the dative.) 
Whom ? For persons: £Scn?} (Questions 

> followed by 
What ? For things : 2B a 5 ? _) the accus.). 

DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN SB t X ? WHO ? 



Nom. Who ? what ? 

Gen. whose? 

Dat. to whom ? to what ? 

Ace. whom ? what ? 



Masc. and Fern. Neut. 

N. tt>er ? m$ ? 

G. ttefiett ? 

-n *A*m9 )atttt>ag?tt>or<m? 

D - n)em? Uorauf?^su? 

A. toert ? tz>a$ ? 



SOB e X f who, has no plural, and relates only to per- 
sons, without distinction of sex, as who in English. It 
may be used instead of berjemeje, tt>elrf)er, he who. 

SB3 a ^, which, has no plural, and always relates to a 
thing. It often stands for ba^jentge, tt>elct)eg or ba£, tt>ek 
tf)e£, that which. 

To answer, U n t tt> o r t c rt. a 

To answer the man. £)cra gtfcmnc cmtroortert. 

a The verb attttoortett is inseparable, although the accent rests upon tho 
particle ant; it governs the accusative with the preposition cutf, to. 33eattt* 
toorten, to answer, governs the accusative without a preposition. 



65 

To answer the men. 3)en Stfdnnefn a!?m?ortcn. 

To answer a letter. 2(uf etnen VBrief antruotten or etltcil 

£5rtef fceantroertcn. 

To it. £> a t a u f, 

To answer it. SDarauf antiuctten or ifyn (e<?) fceant* 

tuetten. 

Obs. A. The demonstrative local adverbs, bet, there ; 
fyiev, here ; tt)O r where ; are usually employed instead 
of demonstrative pronouns, and connected with the 
preposition which the verb requires. If the preposi- 
tion begins with a vowel, the letter r is added to the 
words bet and tt)0 for the sake of euphony. 

In. 3 n (governs the dat and ace ). 

In the. 3 n b e m (tm, rest b ). 

Into the. 3 n b e n (motion). 

In the. 3n be n (rest). 

Into the. 3n tie (motion). 

To go into the garden. 3n ben ©atten gefyen*. 

To be in the garden. 3n bem (tm) ©arten fetn*. 

To go into the gardens. Sn.bie ©arten gefyen*. 

To be in the gardens. 3n ben ©arten fein*. 

- 
Obs. B. The rapidity of pronunciation has led to a 

contraction of the last letter of the definite article with 
certain prepositions which precede it ; thus 6etm is of- 
ten said instead of bet bent, im instead of in hern, ix\$ in 
the accusative neuter instead of in ba$> 

According to this contraction we may say or write : 

2Cm, near the, for an bem. guts, for the, for fur ba$. 

Un$, to the, against 3m, in the, — in bem. 

the, — an t>a§. 3n6, into the, — in ba$. 

Uu% upon the, — auf t>a& 85cm, from the, — t>on bem. 

23etm, at the,- — bet bem. Sum, to the, — m bem. 

jDurcfyS, through the, — burd)ba$. 3ur, to the, — m ber. 

The theatre, bas Shearer; 

the forest, the wood, ber 3Balt> (plur. bte 2Mbet) ; 
the warehouse, tat ^Baatenlaget (is not softened itf 

the plur.) ; 

fc The preposition ttt is used when the place in which a person is, or to- 
wards which the motion is directed, is closed, or conceived to be so. It is 
followed by the dative to the question iv o , and the accusative to the question 
moIji» 




66 

the stoiehouse, fcctg 93ctratr)$fiaug ; v 

the magazine, ba$ ^ftagqln (plur. e) ; 

the provision, store, tec 93errat() ; 

the room, the chamber, t>a$ 3tmmcr ; 

the butcher, t)er glctfcfyct (bee 9tfe$get). 

To go into. £tneino,ef)en*. 

To 6e m *Ae. © a r i n f e t n *. 

Do you wish to go to the thea- SBolten (Ste tn$ Sweatee ger)en ? 

trej 

I wish to go thither. 3d) null f)tnctn gcrjen. 

Is your brother in the theatre ] 3ft 3 fa SBtuber tin ^faater ? 

He is there. (5t tft fcattru 

O&s. C The above examples show how b a t i t 
expresses rest in, and if in e in motion towards, the 
interior of a closed place. 

EXERCISES. 57. 

Will you answer your friend] — [ will answer him. — But whom 
will you answer ] — I will answer my good father. — Will you not 
answer your good friends 1 — I will answer them. — Who will 
answer me] — The Russian wishes to answer you, but he cannot. — 
Will the Russian write me a letter ? — He will write you one. — Can 
the Spaniards answer us ] — They cannot answer us, but w r e can 
answer them. — Wliat has the Englishman to do ] — He has to 
answer a letter. — Which letter has he to answer ] — He has to 
answer th-t of the good Frenchman] — Have I to answer a letter 1 
— You have not to answer a letter, but a note. — Which note have I 
to answer ] — You have to answer that of the great captain. 

58. 

Have we to answer the letters of the great merchants ] — We 
have to answer them. — Will you answer the note of your tailor? — 
I will answer it. — Will any one answer my great letter 1 — No one 
will answer it. — Will your father answer this or that note ] — He 
will answer neither this nor that. — Which notes will he answer t— 
He will answer only those of his good friends. — Will he answer 
me my letter ] — He will answer it you. — Will your father go any- 
whither ] — -He will go nowhither. — Where is your brother ] — He is 
in the garden of our friend. — Where is the Englishman ] — He is in 
his^little garden. — Where do we wish to go to] — We wish to go 
into the garden of the French. — Where is your son ] — He is in his 
room. — Will he go to the magazine 1 — He will go thither. — Will 
you go to the great theatre ] — I will not go thither, but my son has 
a mind to go thither. — Where is the Irishman ] — He is in the the- 
atre. — Is the American in the forest] — He is there. 

c In compound words the last only is softened. Ex. ba$ $orratf)§Ijau*, 
the storehouse; plur. bte SBorrar&gfjaufer. 



67 



59. 



Will you come to me in order to go to the forest ] — 1 Lave no 
*r*sh to go to the forest. — To which theatre do you wish to go ]— 
I wish to go to the great theatre. — Will you go into my garden, or 
into that of the Dutchman] — I will go neither into yours nor into 
that of the Dutchman; I will go into the gardens of the French. — 
Will you go into those of the Germans ] — I will not go thither (bins 
ctn)* — Have the Americans great warehouses 1 — They have some. — 
Have the English great stores 1 — They have some. — Have the Ger- 
mans as many warehouses as stores ? — They have as many of the 
latter as of the former. — Will you see our great stores ] — I will go 
into your warehouses in order to see them. — Have you much hay 
in ycir storehouses 1 — We have a great deal, but we have not 
enough corn. — Do you wish to buy some]— We wish to buy some. 
— Have we as much corn as wine in our storehouses ] — W T e have 
as much of the one as of the other. — Have the English as much 
cloth as paper in their warehouses ] — They have more of the one 
than of the other in them (ba ttn). — Has your father time to write 
me a letter ] — He wishes to write you one, but he has no time to- 
day. — When will he answer that of my brother ] — He will answer 
it to-morrow. — Will you come to my house in order to see my 
great warehouses ] — I cannot come to your house to-day; I have 
letters to write. 



THIRTIETH LESSON.— JDretesigaie ftertion. 

Upon. 2C u f ("governs the dat. and ace \ 

Upon the. C2Cuf bem (repose*) 

r \ltu f b en, t>a s (action). 

The market, bet sj^arft ; 

the ball, fcet $att ; 

the country, fcag £anb ; 
the place (the square) bcr $p(a§ ; 

the field, *>a$ §0. 

To be at the market. 2Cuf bem Wlattk b fetn*. 

To go to the market. ■ 2Cuf ben mavft gcf)en*. 

To be at the ball. 2tuf bem SSattc fetn*. 

To go to the ball. 2Cuf ben S&crtl gefcen*. 

To be in the country. 2(uf bem £anbe fetn*. 

To go into the country. 2Cuf t>a$ 2anb gefyen*. 

■ The preposition (tuf, upon, is used when the place is not closed, but open, 
t> The genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns sometimes termi- 
nates in s, and sometimes in e s (except those in el, en, er, d)ett and I c t it 
which always take §). These forms are equally good ; but the former ia 
more frequently used in conversation, and the latter in composition. The 
same distinction ought to be observed with regard to the dative singular o? 
masculine and neuter nouns, which takes e when the genitive takes e 9 



68 

To beat die place (in the square). 2(uf bem ^)(oge fetn*. 
To go to the place. 2£uf ben tylab qef)en*» 

To be in the field. 2£uf bem #elbYfetn*. 

To go into the field. 2Cuf fc)ci$ Jolt) o,ef)en*. 

_A£. 2C n (dat. and ace). 

At the. Tin bem (repose*-). 

To the. 2C n ben, b a 3 (action) 

The window, t)a$ $#nfter. 

To go to the window. 2(n ba$ Jenjier gefyen*. 

To stand, ©teben*. 

To stand at the window. 2Cn bem Jcnfiet fteften*. 

rp :+ . , A C2Cn Semonben fefyretben*. 

I o write to somebody. -? o- * <-« • * 

J C SemanDem fd)vetben*. 

A .„. .. . . C SOBcden (Sic an mtcb febret&Cfr? 

Are you willing to write to me » J ^^ ^ ^ ^^ , 

I am willing to write to you. ? |* '''In "1 ® " ftS 

° J c 3^ wtll ^bnen jebrctben. 

I wish to write to the man. 3d) twill an ben 93iann fefyveiktu 

To wAem ? 2C n ro e n ? 

To whom do you wish to write ) 2Cn men mollen <3te fd^rcibeit ? 

To me, to him. 2C n mid), an i fy n ♦ 

To the man. 2Cn ben 9}?ann. 

I will write to him. 3d) will tfym fcfjrciberu 

To whom ? SB c m ? 

To me, to him. $fl i r , t fj m. 

To whom do you wish to write 1 2£em rootten Sic fcf>rct6en ? 
To the man. *Dem 9D£anne. 

The nobleman, ber (Sbelmann ; d 

the boatman, ber @d)iffmann ; 

the bailiff, ber 2(uitmann ; 

people, £eute (plur,). 

exercises. 60, 

Whither do you wish to go? — I wish to go to the market. - 
Where is your cook 1 — He is at the market. — Where is my brother? 
— He is at the ball. — Will you come to me in order to go to the 
ball ] — I will come to you in order to go thither. — Is your father in 
the country 1 — He is there. — Do you wish to go to the country ?— 
I do not wish to go there. — Whither does your son wish to go 1— 
He wishes to go to the great place. — Is your friend at the great 
place 1 — He is there. — Does the Englishman wish to go into the 
sountry in order to see the fields ? — He does not wish to go inta 

c 3ltt, at, by, near, points out proximity to a person or a place, 
* For substantives terminating in maun, !*ee Lesson XVIL 



69 

the country in order to see the fields, but to see the forests, the 
birds, the water, and to drink tea. — Where is the son of the 
peasant] — He is in the field to cut some corn (cutting corn).— 
Does the son of the nobleman wish to go any whither ] — He does not 
wish to go any whither ; he is tired. — Whither does the son of the 
bailiff wish to carry corn 1 — He wishes to carry some to the store- 
house of your brother. — Does he wish to carry thither the wine 
and the meat 1 — He wishes to carry both thither. 

61. . , 

Is the friend of the Spaniard able to carry provisions ]— -He is 
able te carry some. — Whither does he wish to carry provisions ] — 
He wishes to carry some to our storehouses. — Do you wish t^ buy 
provisions in order to carry them to our storehouses ] — I wish to 
I buy some in order to take them into the country. — Do you wish to 
go to the window' in order to see the youth ] — I have no time to go. 
to the window. — Have you anything to do ] — I have a letter to 
write. — To whom have you a letter to write ] — I have to write one to 
my friend. — Do you wish to write to the bailiff] — I wish to write 
to him. — What do you wish to write to him ] — I wish to answer 
him his letter. — Are you able to write as many letters as I ] — I am 
able to write more of them than you. — Can you write to the (cm 
t)te) noblemen ] — I can write to them. — Have you paper to write ] — I 
have some. — -Is the bailiff able to wiite to anybody ] — He is not 
able to write to anybody. 

62. 

Have you time to stand at the window] — I have no time to 
stand at the window. — Is your brother at home ] — He is not at 
home. — Where is he ] — He is in the country. — Has he anything to 
do in the country ] — He has nothing to do there. — Whither do you 
wish to go ] — I wish to go to the theatre. — Is the Turk in the 
theatre ] — He is there. — Who is in the garden ] — T l .e children of 
the English and those of the Germans are there. — W here does your 
father wish to speak to me ] — He wishes to speak to you in his 
room. — To whom does your brother wish to speak ] — He wishes to 
speak to the Irishman. — Does he not wish to speak to the Scotch- 
man ] — He wishes to speak to him. — Where will he speak to him ? 
— He will speak to him at (in) the theatre. — Does the Italian wish 
to speak to anybody ] — He wishes to speak to the physician. — 
Where will he speak to him 1 — He will speak to him at the ball. 

63. 

Can you send me some money ] — I can send you some. — How 
much money can you send me ] — I can send you thirty-twc 
crowns. — When will you send me that money ] — I will send it to 
you to-day. — Will you send it to me into the country ] — I will send 
it to you thither. — Will you send your servant to the market ] — I will 
send him thither. — Have you anything to buy at the market]— 
I have to buy good cloth, good boots, and good shoes. — Whutdoet 






70 

the butcher wish to do in the country 1 — He wishes to buy there 
oxen and rams in order to kill them. — Do you wish to buy a chick- 
en in order to kill it ] — I wish to buy one ; but I have not the 
courage to kill it. — Does the boatman wish to kill any one 1— He 
does not wish to kill any one. — Have you a desire to burn my let- 
ters 1 — 1 have not the courage to do it. — Will the servant seek my 
knife or my paper ] — He will seek both. — Which knife do you 
wish (to have) 1 — I wish (to have) my large knife. — What oxen 
does the butcher wish to kill 1 — He wishes to kill large oxen.— - 
What provisions does the merchant wish to buy 1 — He wishes to 
buy good provisions. — Where does he wish to buy them! — He 
wishes to buy them at the market. — To whom does he wish to send 
them 1 — He wishes to send them to our enemies. — Will you send 
me one more book ! — I will send you several more. — Are you able 
to drink as much as your neighbour 1 — I am able to drink as much 
as he ; but our friend, the Russian, is able to drink more than both 
of us (mix fretfce). — Is the Russian able to drink as much of this 
wine as of that 1 — He is able to drink as much of the one as of the 
other. — Have you anything good to drink 1 — I have nothing to 
drink. 





THIRTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in ttnfr bmssigste 
Nation. 

The corner, t>cr 2BtnFet ; 

the fountain (well), t>er SSrunncn (is not softened *n 
the plur.) ; 

the hole, t>a£ £od). 

To leave, to let. S a f f e tt *. 

To go for, to fetch. $ o I e n. 

To send for. ipoten laffen*. 

I leave — he leaves. ^H 3d) kfje — cr (aft. 
W 7 e leave-— they leave. SSBir laffen — fie laffen. 

You leave. Sfjt: laffet (Bk laffen). 

Obs. A. The particle $ U, does not precede the infi- 
nitive joined to the verb laffm. See Lesson XL. Ex. 

We send for bread. 2Bir taffen 93tcb Ijtfen. 

We wish to send for wine. £Bit roellen SBcin tyolen laffen. 

To go for it, to fetch it. Sfjn or e*> fyolen. 

To go for some, to fetch some. £Bcld)en, tuekfycS F)0len. 

Thou £) u a 

a In addressing one another, the Germans use the second person singular 
and third person plural. The second person singular 5)u, thou, is usee! : 1. 
in addressing the Supreme Being ; 2. in sublime or serious style and in poetry; 



71 

Thou hast — thou art. £>u fjaft — £)u tiff. 

Art thou fatigued ! SSift £>u nuiue ? 

f am not fatigued. 3d) bin ntd)t miibe. 

Thou wilt (wishest), — thou art £)it tutllft — £)u fcmnft. 

able (canst). 

Art thou willing to make my fire? SEBiUft £)u mctn geuet onniad)CP * 

I am willing to make it, but I 3d) will eg cmmcicfyen, after id) tann 

cannot. ntd)t. 

Thou leavest. £)u Iff ffeft. 

TAy. Sing. £> e i n. Plur. £> e t n e b . 

To be obliged (must). 9# it f f e tt *. 

I must — he must. 3d) mu(5 — cr mup. 

We must — they must. SBtt niuffett — fie mftjfctt. 

Thou must — you mast. £)u mupt — Sfyr muffet or mupt 

(<Sie mitffen). 

O65. B. The infinitive joined to the verb tttitflen is 
not preceded by the particle Jit* (See Lesson XL.) 
Ex, 

We must work. JBit mtiffen cttktten. 

Must you write a letter to your SDiuflen @ic Sb^cm 23rubcr citten 

brother ] SSrtcf fdbrciben ? 

Is he obliged to go to the market ? SRufj cr auf ben Sftatft Cjcfyett ? 

He is obliged to go thither. (£t nutfi babtn cjeben. 

What hast thou to do ? 2Ba$ Ijaft £)u $u tr)un ? 

I have nothing to do. 3d) fjabc ntcbtS $u tf)im. 

What hast thou to drink 1 8Bas bap 2)u 3U trtnf en ? 

I have nothing to drink. 3d) babe nid)ts $u trin!en. 

What has the man to do 1 £Ba$ l)at bet 93larm gu tfyutt ? 

He is obliged to go into the (St mup in ten SBalt) Cjeben. 

wood. 

tu; .v^;., /^ v,;^,a 5 ^tefen 2Cbenb (accusative). 
This evening (to-night). J f ^ ^ 

In the evening 1 + ^ c * ^"^ fe enitive )- 

in me evening. ^ ^ ^ ^^ 

This morning. J f f n j*? 9 '" Causative). 

5 ft £>eute 9#orqcn. 

In the mornino- \ + S e * ^* r 9««$ (genitive). 

in tne morning. ^ + ^ g} ^ en# 

fl. it is a mark of intimacy among friends, and is employed by parents and 
children, brothers and sisters, husbands and wives, towards one another : in 
general it implies familiarity founded on affection and fondness. In polite 
conversation, persons always address each other in the third person plural. 
The third person singular and second person plural also, especially the fori ^r, 
are frequently used towards inferiors, as servants, &c. In writing, the 7 > 
nouns of address : 2>U, ^te and 3br, have a capital initial letter. 
b ^etn and 5)eme, thy, are declined exactly as metn and men?- tr*. 



78 

EXERCISES, 64. 

Wifl you go for some sugar? — I will ge for some. — Son (9$etn 
^cf)n), wilt Jhcu go for some water ] — Yes, father (metn &$atct), I 
will go for'teoire. — Whither wilt thou go ] — I will go to the well 
in order to fetch some water. — Where is thy brother 1— He is at 
the well. — Wili you send for my son ]« — I will send for him. — 
Will the captain senu lor my child'? — He will send for him (c6). — 
Where is he ] — He is in a corner of the ship. — Can yoii make a 
hole in the (with accusaiive) table ] — I can make one. — Art thou 
able to write a letter to me! — I am ab]e to write one to you. — 
Must I go any whither] — Thou must go into the garden. — Must I 
send for anything 1 — Thou must send for good wine, good cheese, 
and good bread. — What must I do 1 — You must write a long letter. 
— To whom must I write a long letter ] — You must write one to 
your friend. 

65. 

What must we do ] — You must go into the forest in order to 
cut some wood. — What has the Englishman to do] — He haft 
nothing to do. — Has the Spaniard anything to do 1 — He has to 
work. — W'here can he work ] — He can work in his room and in 
mine. — When will you give me some money ] — I will give you 
some this evening. — Must I come to your house ] — You must come 
to my house. — When must I come to your house 1 — This morning. 
—Must I come to your, house in the morning or in the evening ] — 
You must come in the morning and in the evening. — Whither 
must I go ] — You must go to the great square in order to speak to 
the merchants. — Where must the peasant go to ] — He must go into 
the field in order to cut some hay. — Must I keep anything (for) 
you (Sljncn) ? — You must keep (for) me (mtr) my good gold and 
my good works. — Must the children of our friends do anything] — 
They must work in the morning and in the evening. — What must 
the tailor mend (for) you ]— He must mend my old coat (for) me. 
— Which chicken must the cook kill ] — He must kill this and 
that. — Must I send you these or those books ] — You must send 
me (both) these and those. 



THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.-gttm tttt& fcmftriflSU 
Section. 

As far as. 25 1 g (an adverb of place). 

How far! 23t£ wcbtn ? (See Lesson XXVII, 

Rule 2.) 
As far as the corner. 23ts in ten SBinfvt* 

As far as the end of the road. 931$ an tag (Snfce De$ 2£ege& 






73 



tat (Snbe (has no plural) ; 
tat (Snbe. (plur. trie (Snben) ; 
bet 2Beg. 

33U auf ben SSoben beS $affe& 
23 i$ auf ben ©tunb beg 23runnen$ 
25 is auf ben ©runb bee Skunnen. 

bet SBoben ; 
bcr 23oben ; , 
bet ©runb ;■ 
tat -Jap ; 
ber S3cutc(. 



The end, 

the end (the extremity), 
the road, the way, 

To the bottom of the cask. 
To the bottom of the well. 
To the bottom of the wells. 

The bottom, 
the garret, 
the ground, 
the cask, 
the purse, 

I go, am going— he goes, is 3d) gel) c — et gefyet or ger)t. 

going. 
We go, are going — they go, are 2Bit gefyen — fte gefyen. 

going.. 
Thou goest, art going — you go, £)u gcrjeft or gcfjft — S()t yfyet oi 

are going. gefyt (€>te gefyen). 

All, every* 2C I (. 

2Uf, is declined like the definite article. It is nevei 
preceded or followed by an article, but may be so by 
a pronoun. 



Every day. 
Every morning. 
Every evening. 

At. 

At what o'clock 1 
At what time ? 
At one o'clock. 

Half. 

At half past three. 
At a quarter past one. 
At a quarter past eleven. 
At a quarter to one. 



t Me Sage. 
t 2We Bergen. 
t nik 2(benb. 

Urn. 

Urn rmetnet Ufjt ? 

Urn wcldfte 3cit ? 

Urn etng or urn ein ttf)t. a 

$ a lb. 

f Urn fja(6 trier. 
+ Urn ein SStcttcl auf frveu 
f Mm ein £Stettel auf #»(j(f. 
f itm ttti 8$mU\ auf em& 
Urn $tt>6lf or urn $w<S(f Ul)t. 



At twelve o'clock. 

At twelve o'clock at night (mid- Urn 2$tttetnad)t 
night). 

The quarter, 



At present, now. 

To go out. 

To remain, to stay. 



tat SBtcrtet. 

2£ u S g e f) e n * (au^ugefyen) 
23 i e t b e n *. 



8 Ut)V signifies clock, watch, and not hour, which is translated by (Stun**, 
When we say: .SBteotel Ufrr ift eg? it means: 3Bte»tel tft e$ auf ter tt$r? 
How much is it upon the clock ? For this reason we may leave out the wotd 
UJ)r, when r'e say : um' eiug, urn Jtt5lf, as above. 



74 



When do you wish to go out ] 

I wish to go out now. 

To remain (to stay) at home. 



80&cnn rootfen <Sie cutfgetycn? 
3d) mill jejt cmegeben. 
3u £cmfe MetOen*. 



Here. 


£ ter. 


To remain here. 


#iet blctfccn*, 


TAere. 


5)o. 


To remain there. 


3)a bletkn*. 



Are you going to your brother ? 

I am going to him. 

We are — they are. 

You are. 

We have — they have* 

You have. 

Are your brothers at home 1 
They are at home. 
They are not at home. 
Are the men thirsty ? 

Have your friends my books? 
They have them not. 
Have they time to write 1 

To thee. 
Thee. 



©cfyen (Sic $u Sfjtcm SStubet? 

3d) gcfye gu iftrn. 

2Btt finb — fie ftnb. 

3br fetb (©te.ftnbj. 

StBir fjaben — fie fjaben. 

3()r fyabet or fycibt (@te fjaben) 

©tnb 3bre SSrubet $u £aufe ? 
@tc finb $u £aufc. 
<Sie finb md)t $u £cntfe. 
<Stnb bie banner butfttg ? 

£aben Sfyte greunbc metne 93iidf)et? 
©k fjaben fie ntd)t. 
£>abcn fie 3ett $u fcfyreiben ? 

2)tr (dative). 

3D id) (accusative). 



055. Do and am, when used as auxiliaries, are nevei 
expressed in German. Ex. 



Do you wish to take me to my 

father ? 
I wish to take thee to him. 
Are you wil/ ing to give me a 

knife ? 
I am willing to give thee one. 
Am I going to him ] 
Thou art not going to him, but 

to me. 



£Betlen <Ste mid) au metncm SSatet 

fubren ? 
3d) will 5)td) $u tfjm fflfjren. 
Swollen (Sic mit cin g^effer gcben ? 

3d) will 3)ir etnS gcbett. 
©ebc id) $u ifjm ? 

SDu cjefjejt ntcfyt $u if)m, fonbetn ju 
mlr. 



exercises. 66. 

How far do you wish to go 1 — I wish to go as far as the end of 
the forest. — How for does your brother wish to go 1 — He wishes 
to go as far as the end of that road. — How far does the wine go ] 
— It goes to the bottom of the cask. — How far does the water go 1 
— It goes to the bottom of the well. — Whither art thou going? — 
£ am going to the market. — Whither are we going] — We are going 
into the country. — Are you going as far as the square ?— -I arr 



75 

going as far as the fountain. — When does your cook go to the 
market 1 — He goes there every morning. — Can you speak to the 
nobleman? — I can speak to him every day. — Can I see your 
father 1 — You can see him every evening. — At what o'clock can I 
see him 1 — You can see him every evening at eight o'clock. — Will 
you come to me to-day ] — I cannot come to you to-day, but to-mor- 
row. — At what o'clock will you come to-morrow 1 — I will come at 
half past eight.- — Can you not come at a quarter past eight ] — I 
cannot.— At what o'clock does your son go to the captain 1 — He 
goes to him at a quarter before one. — At what o'clock is your 
friend at home 'i — At midnight. 

67. 

Have you a mind to go out 1 — I have no mind to go out. — When 
will you go out 1 — I will go out at half past three. — Does your 
father wish to go out 1 — He does net wish to go out ; he wishes to 
remain at home. — Are yon willing to remain here, my dear (ftct>) 
friend 1 — I cannot remain here, I must go to the warehouse. — Must 
you go to your brother 1 — I must go to him. — At what o'clock must 
you write your letters ] — I must write them at midnight. — Do you 
go to your neighbour in the evening or in the morning ? — I go to 
him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — Where are you 
going to now ? — I am going to the play. — Where are you going to 
to-night 1 — I am going nowhither; I must remain at home in order 
to write letters. — Are your brothers at home 1 — They are not there. 
— Where are they ] — They are in the country. — Where are your 
friends going to 1 — They are going home. — Has your tailor as 
many children as your shoemaker 1 — He has quite as many of them 
(ibrer). — Have the sons of your shoemaker as many boots as their 
father ?— They have (t)eren) more than he. — -Have the children of 
)ur hatter as much bread as wine 1 — They have more of the one 
than of the other. — Has our carpenter one more son 1 — He has 
several more. — Are the Italians thirsty 1 — They are thirsty and 
hungry. — Have they anything to do 1 — They have nothing to do. — 
Are the children of the Irish hungry or thiisty? — They are neither 
hungry nor thirsty, but fatigued. 

68. 

Have you time to go out 1 — I have no time to go out. — What 
have you to do at home 1 — I must write letters to my friends. — 
Must you sweep your room 1 — I must sweep it. — Are you obliged 
to lend your brothers money 1 — I am obliged to lend them some. — 
Must you go into the garden? — I must go thither. — At what o'clock 
must you go thither 1 — I must go thither at a quarter past twelve. 
— Are you obliged to go to my father at eleven o'clock at night 
(#bent)6) 1 — I am obliged to go to him at midnight. — Where are 
the brothers of our bailiff? — They are in the great forest in order 
o cut great trees.— Have they money to buy bread and wine? — 
They have some. — Are our children wrong in going ($u <}d)cn) to 



76 



fche English 1 — They are not wrong in going ($u Cjefyen) to them.—- 
Must the children of the French goto the children of the English] 
— They must go to them. — Is the Russian right in remaining ($u 
Wetben) with the Turk 1- — He is not wrong in remaining with him. 
— Will you send for some wine and glasses 1 — I will neither send 
for wine nor for glasses ; I am not thirsty. — Is thy father thirsty ] 
—He is not thirsty. — Are you willing to give me some money in 
order to go for some bread ] — I am willing to give you some in 
order to go for some bread and beer. 



THIRTY.THIRD LESSON.— (Dm vaib hxm%\%Zlt 
Section. 



To sell. 

To tell, to say. 

To tell a man. 
The word, 
the favour, 
the pleasure, 

To give pleasure. 

To do a favour. 



83etf:aufen. 

@ a a, e n. 

(Stnem 5ftanne fagen. 
tag 2Bort; 
tet ©efalten ; 
tag ^erg/mcjcn. 
&>etcuuia,en macfyen. 
(Stnen ©efallen t()un*. 



Will you tell the servant to SMlen <Ste tern 33ebiente 

make the fire ] 
I will tell him to make it. 
Will you tell the servant to buy 

a broom ] 
I will tell him to buy one. 



tag Jeuer an$umad)en ? 
3d) will tfym fagen, eg anjumacben. 
SSMen <§te tern S5et)tcntcn fagen, 

ctnen Skfcn ^u faufen ? 
3d) will ifym fagen, etnen §u faufen. 



It is. 
Late. 

What o'clock is it 1 

It is three o'clock. 

It is twelve o'clock. 

It is a quarter past twelve. 

It wants a quarter to six. 

It is half past one. 

To be acquainted with {to know). 

To be acquainted with (to know) 

a man. • 
Do you know (are you acquainted 

with) this man 1 
1 know him (am acquainted with 

him). 



e $ t it 

©pat. 

t 2£te fpa't ift eg ? 

t SBicwet Ufjt ift eg ? 

@s ift tret Ufa. 

(£g ift $wflf Gwotf U&r). 

t (£g ift em &>tertel ouf etng. 

t ©g ift tret g&tertcl auf fed)g. 

t & ift fcatt gwet. 

$ e n n e n (governs the accus.) 

(Stnen Sftenfcfyen fernten*. 

jtennen (Sic ttefen Wlann ? 

3d) fenne U)n. 



77 

^ . C9i'6tf)iq fyabcn* (governs tha 

To want. £ accusative). 

™ , . , /. J 93 en St biqt fe in* (governs the 

To be tn want of. J ge nitive). 

[ want it. 3d) babe es notbtCj. 

[ am in want of it. 3d) tun teffen 6cnctf;igt. (See Les- 

son XVI.) 
Do you want this hat] #aben @ie btefen £ut notbtCj? 

Are you in want of this hat] ®int> ©ie bicfc^ £ute$ benctbtfjt ? 
I want it. 3d) f)abe i()n notbtcj. 

I am in want of it. 3d) bin fceffen benotbtCjt. 

Do you want this money ] £aben @te fctcfcS ®ctb notbtcj? 

Are you in want of this money ] ©hit) ©k fcicfe$ (StelfceS benotbtCjt ? 
I want it. 3d) b^e eS notbtcj. 

I am in want of it. 3d) bin fcefjetl knotfjigt. 

I do not want it. 3d) babe C5 ntd)t noting. 

I am not in want of it. 3d) bin beffen nid)t benotbtgt. 

I do not want anything ) m ^ ^ m 

I am not in want of anything. $ 

Do you want money ] } &AtjM ^> |T , , /s <e«.£; a 

* J . / * > ijctben (Ste ©elo nethta? 

Are you in want of money s $ D 

I want some. i &* i < , _,*. a i***.:* 

I am in want of some. \ 3cl) lwt ' C ■*** "ty* 

I do not want any. J ^ fi . ( . 

1 am not in want or any. $ 

06s. J.. 23eitotf)icjt fem*, must never be used when 
the noun is not preceded by a determinative word like 
the definite article, or a possessive or demonstrative 
pronoun. 

What 1 2B a 6 ? 

8S t^uln* want of i ~ J ■* *f* «• "to ' 

Ofo. J5. All the cases of the personal pronouns 
have been more or less employed thus far, except the 
genitive, which is as follows : 

Of me — of thee — of him. Reiner — iDekiet — fetner. 

Of us — of you — of them. Unjet — (Suet (Sfcter) — tfyret (for 

all genders). 

Is he in want of me ] 3ft er mctner benotf)tat ? 

He is in want of you. (§r tjr 3brer benotfytat. (See Les- 

son XVI.) 

Are you in want of these books] (Stnt) <Ste Mcfer SBucner benotbtgt? 

I am in want of them. 3d) bin berjVlben benotbtCjt. 

Is he in want of my brothers ] 3ft er incinet 33rttt>cr benotbtCjt ? 

He is in want of them ($t tffc ibrer benotbigt. (See Les« 

son XVI.) 



78 

EXERCISES. 69 

Will you do me a favour 1 — Yes, Sir, what one (rvaS fur ctnen) \ 
-Will you tell your brother to sell me his horse] — I will tell him 
to sell it you. — Will you tell my servants to sweep my large 
rooms ] — I will tell them to sweep them. — Will you tell your son 
to come to my father ] — I will tell him to come to him. — Have you 
anything to tell me] — I have nothing to tell you (put the dative 
before the accus.).— Have you anything to say to my father ] — I 
have a word to say to him. — Do your brothers wish to sell their 
carriage 1 — They do not wish to sell it. — John (Sofyann) ! art thou 
there (fta) ] — Yes, Sir, I am here (t)a). — Wilt thou go to my hatter 
to tell him to mend my hat ] — I will go to him. — Wilt thou go to 
the tailor to tell him to mend my coats ] — I will go to him. — Art 
thou willing to go to the market ] — I am willing to go thither. — 
What has the merchant to sell ] — He has beautiful leather gloves, 
combs, and good cloth to sell. — Has he any shirts to sell ] — He 
has some to sell. — Does he wish to sell me his horses ] — He 
wishes to sell them to you. 

70. 

Is it late?- — It is not late. — What o'clock is it]— It is a quarter 
past twelve. — At what o'clock does your father wish to go out ] — 
He wishes to go out at a quarter to nine. — Will he sell this or that 
horse"? — He will sell neither this nor that. — Does he wish to buy 
this or that r.oat'1 — He wishes to buy both. — Has he one horse 
more to sell ] — He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. — 
Has he one carriage more to sell ] — He has not one more carriage 
to sell ; but he has a few more oxen to sell. — When will he sell 
them] — He will sell them to-day. — Will he sell them in the 
morning or in the evening ] — He will sell them this evening. — At 
what o'clock 1 — At half past five. — Can you go to the baker ] — I 
cannot go to him; it is late. — How late is it] — It is midnight. 
— Do you wish to see that man 1 — I wish to see him, in order to 
know him. — Does your father wish to see my brothers ]— He 
wishes to see them, in order to know them. — Does re wish to see 
my horse ] — He wishes to see it. — At what o'clock does he wish 
to see it] — He wishes to see it at six o'clock. — Where does he 
wish to see it ] — He wishes to see it in (cmf) the great square. — 
Has the German much corn ti sell ] — He has but little to sell.— 
What knives has the merchant to sell] — He has good knives to 
sell. — How many more knives has he ] — He has six more. — Has 
the Irishman much more wine ] — He has not much more. — Hast 
tlmu wine enough to drink ] — I have not much, but enough. — Art 
thou able to drink much wine ] — I am able to drink much. — Canst 
thou drink some every day ] — I can drink some every morning and 
every evening. — Can thy brother drink as much as thou] — He can 
irink more than I. 



79 



71. 



What are you in want of? — I am in want of a good hat. — Are 
you in want of this knife ? — I am in want of it. — Do you want 
money? — I want some. — Does your brother want pepper? — He 
does not want any. — Does he want some boots ? — He does not 
want any. — What does my brother want? — He wants nothing. — 
Who wants some sugar? — Nobody wants any. — Does anybody 
want money ? — Nobody wants any. — Does your father want any- 
thing? — He wants nothing. — What do I want? — You want no- 
thing. — Art thou in want of my book ? — I am in want of it. — Is 
thy father in want of it ? — He is not in want of it. — Does your 
friend want this stick? — He wants it. —Does he want these or 
trnse corks ? — He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want 
of me? — I am in want of thee. — When do you want me? — At 
present. — What have you to say to me ? — I have a word to say to 
thee. — Is your son in want of us? — He is in want of ycu and 
your brothers. — Are you in want of my servants ? — I am in want 
of them. — Does any one want my brother ?— No one wants him.' 



THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.— fofcr ttttir bxmQlQZte 
tzztion. 

THE PRESENT. 

There is no distinction in German between : I love, 
do love and am loving. All these present tenses are 
expressed by : id) Hebe, I love. 

In the regular verbs the third person singular and 
second person plural of the present tense indicative 
mode are alike, and terminate (even in most of the ir- 
regular verbs) in et or t. The first and third persons 
plural in all German ve~bs are like the infinitive. 

To love. . "Ste&etn 

C love, C loves, ^ 

I 1 do love, he < does love, >3'd) tteOc, et fie&et or ficfct. 
( am loving. ( is loving-. ) 

Thou \ dTuove, you \ dTlove, I ®« '^Sff^ r ?? r °» 
I art loving. } are loving. $ bct or Uebt <«? {Ubm ^ 

C love, ( love, * 1 

We ^ do love, they ^ do love, S-SQBir fiebcn, fie licUtu 
( are loving ( are loving. ) 



80 



Obs. A. The letter e is often rejected in the second 
and third persons singular and in the second person 
plural of the present tense; but never in verbs the 
root of which ends in b, t, 1 f), ft, or in two or more 
consonants, after which t or ft could not be distinctly- 
pronounced, as in : fenben*, to send ; in fenbejt, er fertbet, 
2#r fettbet ; orbnett, to set in order ; in crbnefi, er orbnet, 
Sfyr orbnet, &c. On the other hand this contraction 
always takes place in verbs that end in e I n or e r n, 
as : fcfymeirfjeln, to flatter ; bu fcfymetrfjetft, er fdnnetcljeft, 3fyr 
fcfymeicfyelt ; dnbent, to alter ; in dnberft, er dnbert, 3f)r dm 
berk (See Lesson XXIV. the Infinitive.) 



To want. 

Do you want your money'? 
I ware* it. 

To set in order. 
To open. 

Do you open the window 1 
I open i . 



S3 r a u c!) e n (governs the accusa 
tive). 

$taud)cn (Sic 3f)t ©e(b ? 
3d) braucfye eg. 

Drbnert. 

Deffncn (aufmadfocn, aufeumadjen). 

50?cicl)en @ie t>ag genftet auf? 
3d) mad)e eg auf. 

06s. Z?. German verbs are generally not irregular 
in the present tense, but rather in the imperfect and 
past participle. Some,* however, are irregular in the 
second and third persons singular ; and as pupils 
should be acquainted with all the irregularities, we 
shall always mark these two persons whenever they 
present any. Of those which we have seen already, 
the following are irregular in the second and third 
persons singular. 



To give : ^ 

thou givest — he gives. 
To see : 

thou seest — he sees. 
To speak : 

thou speakest — he speaks. 
To take, to carry : 

thou carriest — he carries. 
To wash : 

thou washest — he washes. 
To break : 

thou breakest — he breaks. 



©efcen* : 

£)u gifcjt — er gt&t 
©efyen* : 

2)u ftcfyft — ct ftefjt. 
<Spted)en # : 

3)u fprtd&fi — er fprtdjt. 
graven* : 

3)u traaji — er trffgt. 
££afd)en* : 

2)u roa'ferjeft — er rca'fd)t. 
3crbrcd)en*: 

£)u aer&ttd)ft— er aetbridfet. 



8! 

□Cr* Personal pronouns not standing in the nomina* 
tive, take their place after the verb. 

Do you love him ? giekn ©ic i f) tt % 

I do love him. 3d) ttcbc t \) n. 

I do not love him. 3d) Hebe t f) n n i d) t* 

Does the servant sweep the jtcfyrt bet 23ct>tcnte t>ci$ 3tmmet 
room ] a u $ ] 

Obs. C In simple tenses, as the present or imp^r- 
feet, the separable particle is always placed at the 
end of the sentence ; unless this begins with a con- 
junction, a relative pronoun, or a relative adverb, in 
which case the particle is not separated from the verb, 
which then takes its place at the end. 

He sweeps it. (gr tifyct e$ cm& 

Does your father go out to-day? ®ef)t 3bt SSatet ficute aus? 
He does not go out to-day. (St gcf)t fjeute md)t ciu£. 

exercises. 72. 

Do you love your brother ] — I love him.- — Does your father love 
him ] — He does not love him.- — Dost thou love me, my good child I 
— I love thee. — Dost thou love this ugly man ] — I do not love him. 
— Does your father want his servant] — He does want him. — Dost 
thou want anything ] — I want nothing. — Does the servant open the 
window 1 — He does open it.-— Dost thou open it] — 1 do not open 
it. — Dost thou set my books in order] — I do set them in order. — ■ 
Does the servant set our boots or our shoes in order ] — He sets 
(both) the one and the other in order. — Do our children love us ] — 
They do love us. — Do we love our enemies] — We do not love 
them. — Do you want your money] — I do want it. — Do we want 
our carriage ] — We do want it. — Are our friends in want of their 
clothes (.ftlctbet) ] — They are in want of them. — What do you give 
me "? —I do not give thee anything. — Do you give my brother the 
book ] — T . do give it him. — Do you give him a hat ] — I do give him 
one. 

73. 

Dost thou see anything 1 — I see nothing. — Do you see my large 
garden ] — I do see it. — Does your father see our ship ] — He does 
not see it, but we see it. — How many ships do you see ] — We see 
a good many; we see more than thirty of them. — Do you give me 
books] — I do give thee some. — Does our father give you money 1 
— He does not give us any. — Does he give you hats ] — He does 
not give us any. — Do you see many sailors ] — We see more 
soldiers (fcet ©ottat, plur. en) than sailors. — Do the soldiers see 
many storehouses 1— They see -more gardens than storehouses. — 
4 * 



82 

Do the English give you good cakes ] — They do give us some 
Do you give me as much wine as beer ! — 1 give thee as mu^l A 
the one as of the other. — Can you give me some more cakes ?- - 1 
can give thee no more ; I have not many more. — Do you give me 
the horse which you have ] — I do not give you that which I have.— 
Which horse do you give me ] — I give you that of my brother. 

74. 

Do you speak to the neighbour ] — I do speak to him.— Does he 
speak to you ] — He does not speak to me. — Do your brothers speak 
to you ] — They do speak to us. — When dost thou speak to thy 
father 1 — I speak to him every morning and every evening. — What 
dost thou carry ] — I carry a book. — Where dost thou carry it to 1 — I 
carry it home. — Do you wash your stockings ] — I do not wash 
them. — Does your brother wash as many shirts as stockings'? — He 
washes more of the one than of the other. — Hast thou many more 
stockings to wash ] — I have not many more to wash. — How many 
more shirts have your friends to wash ]— They have two more to 
wash. — What does your servant carry ] — He carries a great table. 
—What do these men carry 1 — They carry our wooden chairs. — 
Where do they carry them to ] — They carry them into the large 
room of our brothers. — Do your brothers wash their stockings or 
ours] — They neither wash yours nor theirs ; they wash those ot 
their children. 

75. 

Dost thou not break my glass ] — No, Sir, I do not break it. — Do 
.he sons of our neighbours break our glasses 1 — They do break them. 
—Who tears your books] — The young man tears them. — Do you 
not tear them ] — I do not tear them. — Do the soldiers cut trees ] — 
The}' do cut some. — Do you buy as many hats as gloves ] — I buy 
more of the one than of the other. — Does your brother buy any 
bread ] — He is obliged to buy some ; he is hungry. — Do oui 
brothers buy any wine] — They are obliged to buy some ; they are 
thirsty. — Do you break anything. — We do not break anything. — 
Who breaks our chairs ] — Nobody breaks them. — Dost thou buy 
anything] — I do not buy anything. — Who keeps (takes care of) 
our money ] — My father keeps it. — Do your brothers take care of 
my books ] — They do take care of them. — Dost thou take care of 
anything] — I do not take care of anything. 

76. 

Does the tailor mend our coats ] — He does mend them. — What 
dost thou write] — I write a letter. — To whom dost thou write a 
letter] — To my father. — When does thy brother write his letters] 
— He writes them in the morning and in the evening. — What dost 
thou now. — I do nothing. — At what o'clock do you go to the the- 
atre ]— At a quarter past seven. — What o'clock is it now ] — It 



83 



wants a quarter to six. — At what o'clock does your cook go to tha 
market? — He goes there at five o'clock (put bal)tn to the end).-— 
Does he go thither in the evening] — No, he goes thither in the 
morning. — Do you go any whither 1 — I go no whither; but my 
brothers go into the garden. — Dost thou drink anything ] — I drink 
nothing ; but the Italian drinks good wine and good beer. — Do you 
send me one more book 1 — I do not send you one more. — Are you 
answering his letter 1 — I am answering it.—r-Does he answer thine 1 
—He does answer it. — What do you say 1 — I say nothing. — Must 
I give him money to remain here ] — You must give him some to 
go out. — Ts this man selling anything ] — He is selling good cakes. 
— What do you sell? — I sell nothing; but my friends sell nails, 
knives, and horse-shoes. — What does the man say 1 — He says no- 
thing.— What art thou looking for ? — I am not looking for any- 
thing. 

*** We should fill volumes, were we to give all the exercises that are applica- 
ble to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them- 
selves. We shall therefore merely repeat what we have already mentioned 
at the commencement : pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose 
a great many sentences in addition to those given ; but they must pronounce 
them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of 
speaking fluently. 



THIRTY.FIFTH LESSON. — Mnf ntib breissigste 

Nation. 



The pain, 
the tooth, 
the ear, 

the neck, 
the ache, 
the evil, 



bcr ©cfimct$ ; 

ber 3nf)n ; 

t)ct£ £% (is not softened 

takes en in the plur.) ; 
bet &ai* ; 

bat 2Bef) (plur. en a ) ; 
ba$ Uebe(. 



and 



Sore (ill, wicked). 93 6 fe . 
Bad. © cb 1 1 m m . 

Evil, ill. It e b c (. 



Have you a sore finger 1 

I have a sore finger. 

Has your brother a sore foot 1 

He has a sore eye. 

vVe have sore e) es. 



$abm <Stc etnen ftfffen $tnget? 
3d) hate etnen fcofcn #tna,er. 
Jbat 3hr ^rubct etnen Ob'fcn $uf* 1 
<St bat ein (>b'fe$ 2fua,e. 
SBtt fjafcen fcofe 2Xugen. 



* £ag 5Be^ the ache, is employed in the plural only to denote th« pangs tsf 
hildbirth. 



84 



JPhe bead -ache, 

the tooth-ache, 

the ear-ache, 

a sore throat, 

a pain in one's back 

He has the head-ache. 
I have the tooth-ache. 

The elbow, 
the back, 
the knee, 

To bring. 
To find. 

That which {what). 



ta$ jtepfwer) ;* 
ta$ 3a brawl) ; 
tag £)bri*nn>eb ; 

SKucfenfcbmeq. 

(Sr bat Jtepffcbmeqen.c 
3d) babe 3abn[d)meqctT. 

ter (StfOegcn ; 
ter SHiicfen ; 

tag £nie. d 

93 1 1 n g e<n *• 
•5 t n t c n *. 

£B a £ (tasjcntgc mekbe£, ta$ we!» 
cbes)- 

Ofo. J.. 3Ba3 is often used instead of ba^jemge, tx>e!* 
d)e3 or ba$, Welc^e^ that which. (See Lesson 1 XXIX.) 

Do you find what you are look- gtnten ©'te, vo a $ @tc fucben ? 

ing- for ? 
I find what I am looking for. 3d) ftnte, was id) fucbe. 
He does not find what he is look- (5t ftnt)ct rud)t, was er fud)t. 

ing for. 
We find what we are looking for. SSMr fatten, mag nut fucben. 
1 have what I want. 3d) babe, rua$ id) braucbe. 

I mend what you mend. 36 beffere au*>, .n?a$ @te ctus&cf* 

fern. 

05s. J5. As the second member of this phrase be- 
gins with a relative pronoun, the particle au$ is not 
separated from its verb which is removed to the end. 
(See Obs. G. Lesson XXXIV. and rule of Syntax, Les- 
son XLVII.) 

To read (thou readest, he reads). £ e f e n * (tu liefeft, cr ftefet oi 

tUft). 
To study. <S t u t i t e n . 

To learn. S e r n e n . 

Obs. C. The particle $ it does not precede the infini- 
tive joined to the verb fernett, to learn. (See Lesson 
XL. Ex. 

b Compound words are of the gender of the last component which expresses 
the fundamental or general idea. 

c (5d)merj, pain, is here in the plural. In compound words, SBefj is em- 
ployed in the singular, and ®djmer$ in the plural, thus: 3$ $rt&* «£oj>ftue§, 
and : 3d) fcabe Mopf fd)merjen, I have the head-ache. 

d $)a$ $me, the knee, does not take an additional e in the plural and is ne 
yertheless pronounced as if it did. 



85 

I learn to read. f 3d) U'tne (cfetn 

He learns to write. f (Sr (crnt fcfyret&en. 

French, fran^oftfcft (an adjective e ) $ 

English, enofttfd) ; 

German, bcutfd). 

Do you learn German ? Sctncn @tc beutfd) ? 

I do learn it. 3d) terne c<% 

I do not learn it. 3d) (erne U ntd)t. 

exercises. 77. 

Where is your father ]— He is at home.— -Does he not go out'?— » 
He is not able to go out ; he has the head-ache. — -Hast thou the 
nead-ache 1 — I have not the head-ache, but the ear-ache. — What 
day of the month is it (5)en ltuetrietiten fyabcn roir, Lesson XXI) to- 
day ] — It is the twelfth to-day. — What day of the month is (Dct 
rutemdfte tjt) to-morrow ] — To-morrow is the thirteenth. — What 
teeth have you? — I have good teeth. — What teeth has your bro- 
ther] — He has bad teeth.— Has the Englishman the tooth-ache ]— 
He has not the tooth-ache ; he has a sore eye. — Has the Italian a 
sore eye 1* — He has not a sore eye, but a sore foot. — Have I a sore 
finger] — You have no sore finger, but a sore knee. — Will you cut 
me some bread ] — I cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers. — • 
W T ill anybody cut me some cheese 1 — Nobody will cut you any. — 
Are you looking for any one] — I am not looking for any one. — 
Has any one the ear-ache 1 — No one has the ear-ache. — W'hat is 
the painter looking for] — He is not looking for anything. — Whom 
are you looking for ] — I am looking for your son. — Who is look- 
ing for me ] — No one is looking for you. — -Dost thou find what thou 
art looking for ? — I do find what I am looking for ; but the captain 
does not find what he is looking for. 

78. 

Who has a sore throat] — -We have sore throats. — Has any one 
sore eyes ] — The Germans have sore eyes. — Does the tailor make 
my coat ] — He does not make it ; he has a pain in his back. — Does 
the shoemaker make my shoes ] — He is unable (farm mcf)t) to make 
them ; he has sore elbows.- — Does the merchant bring us beautiful 
purses (t»cr VBeutcI) ] — He cannot go out ; he has sore feet. — Does 
the Spaniard find the umbrella which he is looking for ] — He does, 
find it. — Do the butchers find the sheep which they are looking for ] 
—They do find them. — Does the tailor find his thimble I — He does 
not find it. — Dost thou find the paper which thou art looking for ]— ~ 
I do not find it. — Do we find what we are looking for ] — We do 
not find what we are looking for. — W^hat is the nobleman doing ! 
— He does what you are doing. — W T hat is he doing in his room ]— 
He is reading. 

* Derived from bev B'?att£ofe, the Frenchman. 



86 



79. 

Art thou reading? — I am not reading. — Do the sons of the noble* 
men study? — They do study. — What are they studying? — They 
are studying German. — Art thou studying English? — I have no 
time to study it. — Are the Dutch looking for this or that ship ?— 
They are looking for both. — Is the servant looking for this or that 
broom ? — He is neither looking for this nor that. — Who is learning 
German ? — The sons of the captains and those of the noblemen are 
.earning it. — When does your friend study French? — He studies 
it in the morning. — At what o'clock does he study it ? — He studies 
it at ten o'clock. — Does he study it every day ? — He studies it 
every morning and every evening. — What are the children of the 
carpenter doing ? — They are reading. — Are they reading German ? 
— They are reading French ; but we are reading English. — What 
books does your son read ? — He reads good books. — Does he read 
German books ? — He reads French books. — What book do you 
read ? — I read a German book. — Do you read as much as my chil- 
dren ? — I read more than they, — Does your father read the book 
which I read ? — He does not read that which you read, but that 
which I read. — Does he read as much as I ? — He reads less than 
you, but he learns more than you. — Do you lend me a book ? — I do 
lend you one.— Do your friends lend you any books ? — They do lend 
me some. 



THIRTY-SIXTH 



LESSON.— Bzt\)B urib breissigsts 



Spanish, fparufcf) (an adjective a ). 

The termination tfcf) serves to form adjectives of the 
names of nations. Thus : 



Italian, 


ttaftcmfcf) ; 


Polish, 


pe(mfct) ; 


Russian, 


ruffifcb ; 


Latin, 


{atetntfcf) ; 


Greek, 


gttcdnf*; 


Arabian, Arabic, 


ar a Infer; ; 


Syrian, Syriac, 


fyttfd). 


The Pole, 


bet $pc(e ; 


the Roman, 


fcet 9?8mct ; 


the Greek, 


fcer (SJrtecb*$ 


the Arab, the Arabian, 


. fcer 2fra6<* > 


the Syrian, 


fcer ©gtet. 



* Derived from ©pamett, Spain. 



S7 



Are you a Frenchman 1 
No, Sir, I am a German. 

Is he a tailor? 

No, he is a shoemaker. 

He is a feci. 

To wish, to desire* 

The fool, 

the mouth, 

the memory, 
Have you a good memory ? 
He has a little mouth. 
Your bj other hks blue eyes. 
Do you wish me a good morn- 
ing] 
I wish you a good evening. 

Blue, 
black, 

Instead of. 

To play. 

To listen, to hear. 

Instead of listening. 
Do you play instead of studying ] 
I study instead of playing. 
That man speaks instead of list- 
ening. 



To listen to. 



I listen to him 

To listen t 
thing. 

That which 



&irti ©te em grange ? 

£Mn, metn £err, id) bin tin £>eut« 

fc&ef. 
3ft et etn ©dnietbet ? 
9Mn, cr. \ft etn ^cfyufjmadbet. 
(St 1)1 ein 9?arr. 

££unfcr)en. 

t>cr 9?art (gen. en) ; 
ber 9J?unb (has no plur.) ; 
tai (SteMcfytmfJ (plur. e). 
#afccn @te etn cjuteS ©ebacfjtnif} 1 
(St fyat etnen fletnen £)?unb. 
3f>t S^ruber bat Matte 2C«gem 
-SBimfcfcen <Ste nut etnen cuiren 

SOiergen ? 
3cf) ruitnfdbe 3&nen ctnert gutcn 

2Cbenb. 

Mau ; 
fd)ft>ar$. 

2Cn fta tt $u. 

© p i e I c n. 
$ o r c n. 

f 2(nftatt gu f)cren. 
t ^ptelen <§ic, anfratt $u (tubtren ? 
} Set) ftubtte, anftatt 311 fpieten. 
t liefer SKann fprtc|t, anftatt §u 
fyoten. 

r 2C n F) r e n (ansufjoren, governs 

the accusative). 
3 u f) 6' t c n (ut$u fycten, governs 
the dative). 

C 3$ W'rc tfyn an. 
(.Set) bore tl)m$u. 
some one or some- 2Cuf Semanben cbet ctmt fyftten. 



© a S, was. 



fjporen <Ste auf ba$, rcaS 3fynen ber 
Do you listen to what the man J SOtonn fagt ? 
tells you 1 ] #ercn (Ste auf ba$, wa$ bet 9#ann 

L S&ncnfagt? 
I do listen to it. 3$ fyote batauf. b 



*» 2ht$ Brett takes the person in the accusative, and £tU)6rett in the dative. 
They never relate to a thing ; but fyorett auf stands either with the person or 



88 

He listens to what I tell him. (St t)M auf bag, xa$ td^ tf)m fa#t 

To correct. §3 et beffct n, corrigtren. 

To ta£e ojf (as the hat). U b u e b m c n * (obgunebmcn). 

To ta£e 0/ (as clothes). 2C u 6 $ t e b c n * (au6$u$teben). 

To ta£e away. SOB e 9 n e b me rt*. 

To take. Sfce&men K 

Thou takest, — he takes. 3)u nimmft, — cr ntmmt. 

Thoa takest off thy hat. £>u mmmft £)rineit Jbxit 06. 

Do you take off your boots ] Bichm (Ste 3brc ©tiefeCn cm$ t 

We take off our coats. SOBtr gtebcn unferc Mcfe aug. 

Who takes away the chairs ? SQBer ntntmt t>te ©tiiblc roeg] 

The servant takes them away. £)et SSctnente ntmmt fie nx'Cj. 

exercises. 80. 

Do you speak Spanish 1 — No, Sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks 
Polish 1 — My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbours speak 
Russian ] — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak 
Arabic? — -No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you V 
—I have an English knife. — What money have you there ] — Is i' 
Italian or Spanish money] — It is Russian money. — Have you ai 
Italian hat ]* — No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a German ]— 
No, I am an Englishman.- — Art thou a Greek ] — No, I am a Span 
iard. — Are these men Poles'? — No, they are Russians. — Do the 
Russians speak Polish 1 — They do not speak Polish, but Latin, 
Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant ]— No, he is a 
joiner. — Are these men merchants? — No, they are carpenters. — 
Are we boatmen 1 — No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou a fool 1 — I 
am not a fool. — What is that man 1 — He is a tailor. — Do you wish 
me anything? — I wish you a good morning. — Wkatdoes the young 
man wish me ] — He wishes you a good evening. — Whither must I 
go 1 — Thou must go to our friends \g wish them a good day (Sag). 
— Do your children come to me in order to wish me a good evening 1 
— They come tr you in order to wish you a good morning. 

81. 

Has the nobleman blue eyes 1 — He has black eyes and a little 
mouth. — Hast thorx a good memory 1 — I have a bad memory, but 
much courage to learn German. — What dost thou (do) instead of 
playing 1 — I study instead of playing. — Dost thou learn instead of 
writing] — I write instead of learning. — What does the son of oul 
bailiff (do) ] — He goes into the garden instead of going into the 
field. — Do the children of our neighbours read 1 — They write in- 
stead of reading. — What does our cook (do)? — He makes a fire 

the thing, and always requires the accusative. Ex. 3»<£ f)5re tf)tt an, or t$ t)ijs 
ve tbm %\x, I listen to him ; but id? t)bxt auf bag, xva$ Bit mix fa gen, I listen to 
what you are telling me. 



89 

instead of going to the market. — Does your father sell his ox ?— - 
He' sells his horse instead of selling his ox. — Do the physicians 
go out ? — They remain in their rooms instead of going out. — At 
what o'clock does our physician come to you 1 — He comes every 
morning at a quarter to nine. — Does the son of the painter study 
EngUsh 1 — He studies Greek instead of studying English.— Does 
the butcher kill oxen ] — He kills sheep instead of killing oxen. — 
Do you listen to me ?— I do listen to you. — Does your brother listen 
to me 1 — He speaks instead of listening to you. — Do you listen to 
what I am telling you]— I do listen to what you are telling me. 

82. 

Does the man listen to what you are telling him 1 — He does listen 
to it. — Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them 1 
— They do not listen to it. — Dost thou listen to what thy brother tells 
thee ] — I do listen to it. — Do you go to the theatre 1 — I am going to 
the storehouse instead of going to the theatre. — Are you willing to 
listen to me ] — I am willing to listen to you, but I cannot ; 1 have 
the ear-ache. — Does thy father correct my notes or thine 1 — He 
corrects neither yours nor mine. — Which notes does he correct ?— 
He corrects those which he writes. — Does he listen to what you 
tell him 1 — He does listen to it. — Do you take off your hat in order 
to speak to my father 1 — I do take it off in order to speak to him. — 
Does thy brother listen to what our father tells him ?— He does 
listen to it.- — Does our servant go for some beer 1 — He goes for 
some vinegar instead of going for some beer. — Do you correct my 
letter ? — I do not correct it ; I have sore eyes. — Does the servant 
take off his coat in order to make a fire 1 — He does take it off. — 
Do you take off your gloves in order to give me money 1 — I do 
take them off in order to give you some.— Does he take off his 
shoes in order to go to your house 1 — He does not take them off. — 
Who takes away the tables and chairs'? — The servants take them 
iway. — Will you take away this glass ] — I have no mind to take i 4 - 
•iway. — Is he wrong to take off his boots ] — He is right to take 
ihem off. — Dost thou take away anything 1 — I do not take away 
mything. — Does anybody take off his hat] — Nobody takes it off. 



THIRTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qhbtn Utih 
bxciBBi%Bt£ Cection. 

Wet (moist). 91 a p (an adjective). 

To wet (to moisten). 91 a p ntac^en (nc£cn). 

To show. 3 c t q e n, n> e t f e n * (govern the 

dative a ). 

8 3tf<jen expresses the mere act of showing; toetfett implies showing with 
vnstruction, and is derived from the word : he SBetfc, the manner. 



90 



To let see (expose to sight). 

Do you let me see your gold 

ribbons 1 
I do let you see them. 

Brandy, 

tobacco, 

tobacco (for smoking), 

snuff, 

cider, 

meal (flour), 

apples, 

The gardener, 

the cousin, 

the brother-in-law, 

the handkerchief, 

the pocket handkerchief, 

the valet, servant, 

Do you go for your brother-in- 
law ] 
I do go for him. 

To intend {to think). 

Do you intend to go to the ball 

this evening 1 
1 do intend to go thither. 

To know. 

I know — he knows. 

We know ^ — they know. 
Thou knowest — you know. 



Do you know German 1 

I do know it. 

Do you know how to 

French 1 
Can you read French ] 



read 



<S c \, e n I a f f c n (governs the ae. 

cusative). 

Oaffcn (Ste mid) Sljre gotbctten f8dvt* 

ber fcf>en 1 
3d) taflfe (Sic btcfet&en fer)en. 

SBranntrnetn (masc.) ; 

%abat (masc.) ; 

SRoucbtabaf ; 

(Scbnupftauar ; 

giber (masc.) ; 

mbt (neut.) ; 

2Cepfel (Qlpfet) (plur. of ber tfpfel) 

bcr (Partner; 

bcr better ; 

bcr ©cbroaget ; 

t>a$ £ud) ; 

bat (Scbnupftud) ; 

bcr Wiener, bcr jtncd)t. b 

£oten Sic S^rcn @d)wager ! 

3c!) fjefe iljn. 

(55 c b c n f e n. 

©ebenfen (Sic bcutc 2C6cnb auf ben 

Salt $u gefjen-? 
3d) acbcn!c f)in$ii$encn. (See 03*. 

A Lesson XXVII.) 

Stiffen * (fonncn c ). 

3d) nxuf? — cr wti% 

£Btr roiffen — fie nnffen. 

£)u roctpt — 3^r roiffet (@ie roif> 

fen). 
£onnen (Sic bcutfd) ? 
3d) fann c£. 

C^onncn Sie fran$oftfd) tefert 1 



b ^tetter generally means servant ; hence : ber jtammerbtetter, the valet de 
chambre; bet' ^ircbettbtener, the church-minister, clergyman ; Jtnecfyt points 
Dut tlie lowest degree of servitude, hence : ber 4pau8?rierf)t, the menial ser- 
vant; ber eta(ifned)t, the groom, the stableman ; ber Sftettfnccfcf, the jockey. 

c SOBtffeit implies to have the knowledge of a thing, not to be ignorant cf it; 
fomten signifies to be able, to have the knowledge of an art or a science. Ex. 
3d) t»et& roctS (Sie faflen pollen, I know, what you wish to say. (£r femn 
emeu beutfefyen 33nef fdjrctbcn, he knows how to write a German letter. The 
learner must take care not to confound tDtffen*, to know, with fottrten*, to be 
able, and the latter not with f eitnett*, to be acquainted See Lessons XX VIJ2, 
and XXXIII.) 



91 

Can you make a hat! ^ 

Do you know how to maKe a S^onnen ©te ctnen £ut macfyen ? 

hat! 3 

Can you come to me to-day ! jlonncn @te fyeute $a nut fommcn ? 

IV swim. © cl) tt> t mm e n *♦ 

Do you know how to swim f ■) ., ^ fd)wimmc „ ? 
Can you swim! 3 

Whither ? where to? £B r) t n ! 
Whither are you going ! ?S$o gefycn ©te fjtn ! d 

exercises. 83. 

Do you wish to drink brandy! — No, I wish to drink w T ine. — Dt 
you sell brandy ! — I do not sell any ; but my neighbour, the mer- 
chant, sells some. — Will you fetch me some tobacco! — I will 
fetch you some ; what tobacco do you wish to have ! — I wish to 
have some snuff; but my friend, the German, wishes to have some 
tobacco (for smoking). — Does the merchant show you cloth! — He 
does not show me any. — Does your valet go for some cider ! — He 
does go for some. — Do you want anything else (nod) etn>a$) ! — I 
want some flour ; will you send for some (for) me ! — I will send 
for some (for) you. — Does your friend buy apples ! — He does buy 
some. — Does he buy handkerchiefs! — He buys tobacco instead oi 
buying handkerchiefs,— Do you show me anything ! — I show you 
gold and silver clothes. — Whither does your cousin go ! — He goes 
to the ball. — Do you go to the ball ! — I go to the theatre instead 
of going to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the garden! — He 
gr $s to the market instead of going into the garden. — Do you send 
yf ur servant to the shoemaker! — I send him to the tailor instead 
ol sending him to the shoemaker. 

84. 

?)ost thou go to fetch thy father ! — I do go to fetch him. — May 

gtunn) I go to fetch my cousin ! — You may go to fetch him.— 
oos your valet find the man whom he is looking for! — He does 
fin' . him. — Do your sons find the friends whom they are looking 
for *— They do not find them. — When do you intend going to the 
baU! — 1 intend going thither this evening. — Do your cousins intend 
to £o into the country! — They intend to go thither. — When do 
they intend to go thither ! — They intend to go thither to-morrow. — 
At what o'clock ! — At half-past nine. — What does the merchant 
wish to sell you ! — He wishes to sell me pocket-handkerchiefs. — 
D ) you intend to buy some ! — I will not buy any. — Dost thou know 

- 2Bof)ttt, as above, may be divided into two parts, the first of which is 
r ced in the beginning and the second at the end of the sentence. If the 
* ttence ends with a past participle or an infinitive, $in is placed before it 



92 

anything ] — I do not know anything. — What does thy cousin know ? 
— He knows how to read and to write. — Does he know German 1 — 
He does not know it. — Do you know Spanish 1 — I do know it.— . 
Do your brothers know Greek] — They do not know it ; but they 
intend to learn it. — Do I know English 1 — You do not know it; 
but you intend to study it. — Do my children know how to read 
Italian? — They know how to read, but not how to speak it. 

85. . 

Do you intend to study Arabic ] — I intend to study Arabic and 
Syriac. — Does the Englishman know Polish ? — He does not know 
it, but he intends learning it. — Do you know how to swim ? — I do 
not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your cousin know 
how to make coats'? — He does not know how to make any; he is 
no tailor. — Is he a merchant] — He is not one. — What is he ] — He 
is a physician. — Whither are you going ] — I am going into my 
garden, in order to speak to the gardener. — What do you wish to 
tell him ? — 1 wish, to tell him to open the window of his room. — 
Does your gardener listen to you ] — He does listen to me. — Do 
you wish to drink some cider ] — No, I have a mind to drink some 
beer ; have you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — 
When will you send for some? — Now. — Do you send for apples ? 
—I do send for some. — Have you a good deal of water ? — I have 
enough to wash my feet. — Has your brother water enough ? — He 
has only a little, but enough to moisten his pocket-handkerchief. — 
Do you know how to make tea ] — I know how to make some. — Does 
your cousin listen to what you tell him ? — He does listen to it. — 
Does he know how to swim ] — -He does not know how to swim.— 
W^here is he going to] — He is going no whither; he remains at 
home. 



THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— <3Uljt ttttir bxmziQQtc 
ftzttion. 

The intention. 3) e t 93 t f a g. 

Intended. ©efonnen. 

To intend or to have the intention, ©efonnen fetn*. 

I intend to go thither. 3d) otn gefonncn r;tn$uger)en. 

We have the intention to do it. £Btt ftnb gefennen e£ $u tfyun* 

(£ r f) a I t e n * (to receive i ny- 

thing sent). * 

jSScfommen* (to receive as a 
To receive. J present)# 

[ (S m p f a n g e n * (to welcome, to 
entertain). 



Thou receivest — He receives. 

He receives money. 

He obtains the preference. 

He receives his friends. 

Do you receive a letter to-day ] 

[ receive one to-morrow. 

To guide (conduct, take) 
To lead* 
i lead the horse info the stable. 

The preference, 
the stable, 
blind, 
sick (ill), 
poor, 

To extinguish. 

To light. 

To set on fire. 

Does he extinguish the candle ] 
He lights it. * 



93 

C £>u erf)d'(tft. (Sr ctrjalt. 
C £>u empfancjft.* (St empfd'ngt 

@r bcfcmmt ©e(b. 

(Sr erf) alt ben 23er$ug. 

(Sr empfangt feine greunbe. 

(Straiten @ie fyeute etnen 23rief ! 

3d> err)alte morgen etnen. 

. g u $v en "> b 
£ e i t e n 5 ' 
3d& ffifjre ba^ $fetb in ben ©tall. 

bet SSot^ug ; 
bet (Stall ; 
Mtnb ; 
ftanf ; 
atm. 

2C U ^ ( o f cl) c n (v. act. and r. ii 

au^ulcfcben). 
U n $ it n b e n (angu$unbcn). 
2C n ft e cf e n (anguftecf en). 

Sb'fcM cr bag £trf)t au$ ? 
(5t $unbct eg an. 



To depart, to set, out. It b t e i f e n (afyutetfen). 



When do you intend to depart ] 
[ intend to depart to-morrow. 



2£ann gebenfen @tc atvuitetfen ? 
3d) gebenfe motgen ab$utetfen 



EXERCISES. 86. 

Do your brothers intend to go into the country'? — They do in- 
tend to go thither. — Do you intend to go to my cousin ] — I do in-, 
tend to go to him. — Dost thou intend to do anything ] — I intend t^ 
do nothing. — Do you intend 4o go to the theatre this evening] — 1 
do intend to go thither, but not this evening. — Dost thou receive 
anything] — I receive money. — From (&>cn) whom dost thou receive 
some 1 — I receive some from my father, my brother, and my cousin. 
— Does your son receive books 1 — He does receive some. — From 
whom does he receive some? — He receives some from me, from his 
friends, and neighbours. — Does the poor man (bet 2Crme, See 
page 34, Obs. A.) receive money ] — He does receive some. — From 
whom does he receive some ] — He receives some from the rich. — 
~)ost thou receive wine] — I do not receive any. — Do I receive 
noney ] — You do not receive any. — Does your servant receive 



a The persons not mentioned follow the regular conjugation. (See Pre- 
sent Tense, Lesson XXXIV.) 

b $ii invert expresses the act of conducting only ; letfert means to conduct 
with safety. Ex. (Sttten jtrcmf en fu^rert, to conduct a sick person ; em Stittb, 
etnen 23lin&en teirett, to guide a child, a blind man. 



94 

clothes (.ft(ctber)] — He does not receive any. — Do you receive the 
books which our friends receive] — We do not receive the same 
which your friends receive; but we receive others. — Does your 
friend receive the letters which you write to him ] — He does re- 
ceive them. — Do you receive the apples which I send you] — I do 
not receive them. — Does the American receive as much brandy as 
cider ] — He receives as much of the one as of the other. — Do the 
Scotch receive as many books as letters ] — They receive as many 
of the one as of the other. 

87. 

Does the Englishman obtain the preference ] — He does obtain it. 
— Does your cousin receive as much money as I ] — He receives 
more than you. — Does the Frenchman receive his letters] — He 
does receive them. — When does he receive them ] — He receives 
them in the evening. — Wlien dost thou receive thy letters ] — I re- 
ceive them in the morning. — At what o'clock ] — At a quarter to 
ten. — Dost thou receive as many letters as I ] — I receive more ot 
them than thou. — Dost thou receive any to-day ] — I receive some 
to-day and to-morrow. — Does your father receive as many friends 
as ours (as our father) ] — He receives fewer of them than yours 
(than your father). — Does the Spaniard receive as many enemies 
as friends ] — He receives as many of the one as of the other. — Do 
you receive one more crown] — I do receive one more. — Does your 
son receive one more book] — He does receive one more. — What 
does the physician receive ] — He receives good tobacco, good snuff, 
and good pocket-handkerchiefs. — Does he receive brandy ] — He 
does receive some. 



Does your servant receive shirts ] — He does receive some. — Does 
he receive as many of them as my valet (does) ] — He receives quite 
as many of them. — Do you receive anything to-day] — . receive 
something every day. — Dost thou conduct anybody ] — I conduct 
nobody. — Whom do you guide ] — I guide my son. — Where are you 
conducting him to ] — I conduct him to my friends to wish them a 
good morning. — What is your son ] — He is a physician. — Does 
your servant guide any one ] — He guides my child. — Whom ("Ben) 
must I guide] — Thou must guide the blind. (Page 34, Obs. 
A.) — Must he conduct the sick person ] — He must conduct him. — 
Whither must he conduct him ] — He must couduct him home. — 
Whither is he leading your horse ] — He is leading it into the 
stable. — Dost thou guide the child or the blind man] — I guide both, 
— When does the foreigner intend to depart ] — He intends to depart 
this morninor. — At what o'clock] — At half past one. — Does he not 
wish to remain here ] — He does not (<Sr will ntcfct). — Do you intend 
to go to the theatre this evening ] — I intend to go there to-morrow 
Do you depart to-day ] — I depart now. — When do you intend to 



95 



write to your friends ! — I intend to write to them to-day. — Do yoin 
friends answer your letters ] — They do answer them. — Do you ex- 
tinguish the fire?— I do not extinguish it. — Does your servant light 
the, candle ] — He does light it. — Does this man intend to set your 
Wiu^house on fire 1 — He does intend to set it on fire (cmjuftccf en). 



THIRTY-NINTH 



LESSON. — ffemi 
Ration. 



nxib brdssigste 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



The comparative is formed by adding e r and the 
superlative by adding jl a to the simple adjective. 
Examples : 



Handsome — handsomer — 

handsomest. 
Small — smaller — smallest. 
Wild — wilder — wildest. 



Posit. Comp. Stjperl. 

©cfyon — fcfyoner — fcfymft. 

fflein — ffemer — Hetnjl. 

2Mb — n>itber — ttulbeft. 



Obs. A. Comparative and superlative adjectives 
are declined like the positive. Examples : 

Comparative. 



Masculine. 



Neuter. 



The handsomer 
table, the hand-<( 
somer book, &c. 



i>a$ fcfyonere SSucfy. 
be$ fcfyoneren Sucfyeg. 



r N. berfdjonere 

£tftf), 
G. be3 fdjonerett 

Stfdjeg, 
D. bent fcfyoneren bent fcfyoneren S3ud)e. 

Stfdje, 
A. ben fcfyoneren ba$ fcf)6nere b S3ncfy. 



a In the superlative, ft is sometimes preceded by e when the pronunciation 
requires it, as : fiig, sweet, fiifiefi; ftf)ierf)f, bad, fqjlecbtefi. In the word flW, 
great, the superlative grotfefi, is contracted into $l'i%t, as: ber gropte Wlaxm, 
the greatest man. 

b The letter e, which precedes or follows the consonant r in the compara- 
tive, is often omitted for the sake of euphony ; thus instead of: ber, b«8 fdjo* 
nere, be$ fdjoueren, bcm fcf)6neren, we say: ber, ba$ fd)6m*e, be8 fcfyouent, bera 
fdjbnetn, &c. (Soe Obs. Lesson XIX.) 



96 



Superlative. 

Masculine. Neuter. 



The smallest 
hat, the smal- < 
lest book, &c. 



ba$ Hemfie Surf). 
be3 flemjtert 23nc£)e3 



N> ber Heinfte 

G. be£ Hempen 

§ute#, 
D. bem Hempen bent Hempen SSncfye* 

A. ben Hempen ba3 Hetnpe 93nd£j* 
§ut, 



Obs* B. The radical vowels a, 0, U, are softened 
in the comparative and superlative into d, 6, fu° 
Examples : 

Posit. Comp. Superl. 



Old, &c. 


alt 


alter 


fiftejL 


pious, &c. 


fromm 


frommer 


frommp. 


young, &c. 


m& 


jitnger 


jiingp- 



Obs. C. The following adjectives, which are also 
used as adverbs, are irregular in the formation of their 
comparatives and superlatives. 

Positive. Comp. 

©alb, efyer, 

ber or bag fcalbtge, efyere, 

©ent, fieber, 

ber or ba$ fiebe, ttebere, 

\ ®ut, beffer, 

I ber or bag gute, beffere, 

£ocf), e f)6f)er, 

I ber or ba$ fyofye, fyofyere, 



Soon, 
Willingly, 
Good, 
High, 



Superlative. 
efyep {am ef)epen d ) 
efyepe* 

Kebft (am ttebpen) ; 
fo&jte 

bep (am bepen) ; 
bepe. 

fyocfyp (am l)6rf)pen); 
fyocfype. 



c On the adjectives which do not soften the radical vowels a, 0, U in the 
comparative and superlative, see Obs. D. hereafter. 

d When an adjective is used in the superlative degree adverbially, it is 
combine- 3 with a contraction of the definite article, and one of the preposi- 
tions, at. attf, $u, ttt, as: am ttjentgflen, the least; ctufi?t)ecf)fte, at the most; &um 
beften, for the best ; int nuttbeftett, at least. Hence the adverbs : fcfyottftettg, 
in the handsomest manner; fceftcng, in the best manner; f)ocfrftenS, at the 
most; ncidjfkttg, next time ; wemftftettS, at least, <fcc. 

e In the positive and comparative degrees the form Ijofj, not f)0d), is used as 
an adjective before a noun ; but as a predicate after the noun, the positive i» 
f)0dj. Ex. 3>er bofye SBattttt, the high tree ; ber fyobere s -8aum, the higher tree ; 
but biefer 33aum tft fjed), this tree is high. 



07 



Positive. 


CoMP. 


Superlative. 


ber or ba$ nafye, 

pel, 

ber or bag mele, 


rtafyer, 
tidt)ere, 
tnefyr, 
mefyre, 


jtdrf)ft(amttdct)pen); 

ndcbfle. 

ntetfl (am metjtat) ; 

metfte* 



Near, 
Much, 



This book is small, that is smal- 
ler, and this is the smallest of 
all. 

This hat is large, but that is 
larger. 

Is your book as large as mine] 

It is not so large as yours. 
It is larger than yours. 

Not so large. 

Are our neighbour's children as 

good f as ours 1 
They are better than ours. 

Whose ? 
It is. 

Whose hat is this 1 
It is the hat of my brother. 
It is my brother's. 
It is my brother's hat. 
Whose hat is the finest? 
That of my father is the finest. 
Whose ribbon is the handsomer, 
yours or mine 1 

Good, gentle, pretty, 

light, easy, 

heavy, difficult, 

great, grand (big, large), 

long, 

short, 

round, 

rich, 



iDtejcg SBud) tft Hetn, jeneS tft Rets 
ncr, tint) btefe? bier tft cm Hem* 
(ten (We Hctnfie) sen alien. 

£)te[et £ut tft are(j, aUcin jener if} 
grower. 

3ft 3.!)* SBudj fo Qreg rote fca$ wet* 
nige? 

St tft mebt fc grog a(S ba^ 3t)x\$c+ 

(5*6 tft grogcr aU bas Sfyrtge. 

9Hd)t fc grop* 

<Sinb bie .fitnber unfercS ^acr^^ar* 

fo arttg rote tie unfrigen ? 
©tc fint) arttger a(s tie unfrtgen* 

2S c f f e n ? s (See Lesson XXIX.) 
<S$ ift. 

SQ&cflen £ut tft bat ? 
@s ill ber 4but metneS S3rubct$. 
(5* ill nietne* JBruber*. 
@$ tft mctneS ^rubers £ut. 
S£cffen £ut tft ber fcbenjte ? 
JDer meincS ^Setter* tit ber fcMnfte. 
2Beffen #anb tft febonet, \>a* '$$fe 
gc ober bas mettuge 1 „ 

arttg ; 
tcicht ; 
0)n?er ; 

grc9 ; 
long; 
fur* ; 
runb; 
rcid)* 



Obs. D. The adjectives which do not soften the ra- 
dical vowels in the comparative and superlative, are; 
1st, Those of which the last syllable does not belong 

f In this phrase the word arttg does not quite correspond to the English 
word good; but it does in many others, as for instance : be good ! fet artig f 
a good child, tin cirtigeS S£ini>. 

k The wird which answers the question toeffetl ? is always put in the geni- 
tive case. 

5 



98 



to the primitive 11 word, as: banfhav, grateful; fdmfbtg, 
culpable ; bo^baft, malicious. Ex. artig, pretty ; artiger, 
prettier ; artigft, prettiest. 

2d, Participles, as: labenb, refreshing ; gelofct praised; 
tobenb, furious ; fucfyenb, seeking, &c. 

3d, Those which contain a diphthong, as: gettcttt 
exact ; faitf, lazy ; bfcut, blue ; gran, grey, &c. 

4th, Those terminating in e x, as tapfer, valiant, &c 

5th, The following : 

ffcir, clear ; 
fnapp, tight ; 
la bm, lame; 
loe, loose ; 
matt, wearied ; 
ntorjcb, brittle ; 
nac!t.. naked ; 
platt, flat ; 
Dlump, clumsy ; 
rob, raw; 
runt), round ; 



fan ft, gentle ; 
fatt, satisfied ; 
fcblaff, slack ; 
fcfylanf, slender; 
fitarty numb ; 
pct$, proud ; 
flraff, stiff; 
(hi mm, dumb ; 
tell, mad ; 
Mil, full ; 
$af)M, tame. 



IBM, pale ; 
bunt, variegated ; 
fa hi, fallow; 
falfcb, false; 
freb, joyful ; 
(jeraoe, straight; 
gcjurvfc, healthy ; 
glatt, smooth ; 
ijeM, hollow | 
&e(b, kind ; 
faM, bald ; 
faro,, stingy ; 

Obs. E. In German the superlative is almost al 
ways relative, and to express the absolute superlative, 
we use, as in English, one of the adverbs: fet)r,very 
recfyt, very ; !)otf) ft, extremely ; nngemein, uncommonly 
&c. Ex. @n fefyr armer SKann, a very poor man ; eirt 
fefyr fd)6neg jttitb, a very fine child. 

Obs. F. Than, after a comparative, is translated by 
a I g (See Obs. B. Lesson XXIII.) . To increase the 
force of the comparative, we use the adverbs nod), still, 
and xveit, far. Ex. 9?od) grower, still greater ; id) bin mit 
gliitf Itcfyer a(g er, I am far happier than he. 

Obs. G. The following adjectives have no compara- 
tive: 

Positive. Superlative. 

ber or bag angere, ber or bag dn# ertfe ; 
ber — ba$ innere, ber — bag innerfte ; 
ber — ba$ fymtere, ber — bag binterfte ; 
ber — bag mittlere, ber — bag-mittef fte ; 
ber — bag obere, ber — bag cberfle ; 

* By primitive we mean a word to which a syllable may be added in order I 
to form another word, as bctttfbar, which is formed of the word 2)artf, thapfc», | 
end the syllable Bar. 



The exterior, 
the interior, 
the posterior, 
the middle one, 
the superior, 



the inferior, 
the anterior, 



99 

Posittve. Superlative* 

ber or bag inttere, ber or bag uruerfle; 
ber — bag fcorbere, ber — tag t>orber|te* 

EXERCISES. 89. 



Is your brother taller (gtoj5) than mine 1 — He is not so tall, but 
oetter than yours. — Is thy hat as bad as that of thy father 1 — It 13 
better, but not so black as his. — Are the shirts of the Italians as 
white (nxup) as those of the Irish 1 — They are whiter, but not so 
good. — Are the sticks of our friends longer than ours 1 — They are 
not longer, but heavier. — Who have (9Bet (jot) the most beautiful 
gloves ] — The French have them. — Whose horses are the finest ? 
•—Mine are fine, yours are finer than mine ; but those of our friends 
are the finest of all. — Is your horse good ]— It is good, but yours 
is better, and that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses 
which we know. — Have you pretty shoes'? — I have very pretty 
(ones) ; but my brother has prettier (ones) than I. — From (25 en) 
whom does he receive them ] — He receives them from his best 
friend. — Is your wine as good as mine 1 — It is better. — Does your 
merchant sell good handkerchiefs 1 — He sells the best handkerchiefs 
that I know. 

90. 

Have we more books than the French ? — We have more of them 
than they ; but the Germans have more of them than we, and the 
English have the most of them. — Hast thou a finer garden than 
that of our Physician 1 — I have a finer (one). — Has the American 
a finer house than thou 1 — He has a finer (one). — Have we as fine 
children as our neighbours ] — We have finer (ones). — Is your coat 
as long as mine ] — It is shorter, but prettier than yours. — Do you 
soon (bolt)) go out] — -I do not go out to-day. — When does your 
father go out"? — He goes out at a quarter past twelve. — Is this man 
older than that (man) 1 — He is older, but that (man) is healthier 
(gefunucr). — Which of these two children is the better? — The one 
who studies is better than the one who plays. — Does your servant 
sweep as well as mine 1 — He sweeps better than yours. — Does the 
German read as many bad books as good (ones) 1 — He reads more 
good than bad (ones). — Do the merchants sell more sugar than 
coffee 1 — They sell more of the one than of the other. — Does your 
shoemaker make as many boots as shoes ] — He makes more of the 
one than of the other. 

91. 

Can you swim as well as the son of the nobleman ? — I can 
swim better than he ; but he can speak German better than I. — 
Does he read as well as you 1 — He reads better than I. — Have you 
the head-ache ? — No, I have the ear-ache. — Does your cousin 
Usten to what you tell him 1 — He does not listen to it. — Does the 



100 



son of your bailiff go into the forest] — No, he remains at home, 
he lias sore feet. — Do you learn as well as our gardener's son 7 -^ 
I learn better than he, but he works better than I. — Whose car- 
riage is the finest 1 — Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is 
still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one as fine apples 
as we 1 — No one has such fine (ones). (See end of Lesson 
XXXIV.) 



FORTIETH LESSON.— Jbkqigste flection. 



To begin. 

Thou beginnest — he begins. 
I begin to speak. 
Does your servant sweep the 
room, which I sweep ] 

To finish, to end* 

Not yet. x 

Already. 
Before. 
Do you speak before you listen ? 
Dees he go to the market before 

he writes] 
Do you take off your stockings 
before you take off your shoes ] 
I take off my shoes before I take 
oil my stockings. 



2Cnfangen* (anjufangen). 

iDu fangft on — cr fangt an. 
3d) fange art $u fprecben. 
jlcbrt 3br SBcMenter fca$ Simmer 
au$, roc(cl)e$ id) a\\$U\)U ? 

© n big i n. 

9?ecr> mcfyt. 

©ebon. 

(Sf)e (be&or). 

@prcd)cn (Bte, ef)e ®ie r>oten ? 

©cbt cr auf t>m Wlaxtt, ct)c et 

febrctbt ? 
3u'()cn <Ste 36te ©ttfimpfc au£, efye 

®ie Sfyre ©d)uf)e aus$ubcn? 
3d) jiefje methe (Scbut)c <u 6, c^e tdj 

meine ©ttumpfe au6$icf)fc. 



O65. J.. These examples show that when a con- 
junctive word, as a conjunction, a relative pronoun or 
relative adverb begins the sentence, the separable par- 
ticle is not detached from the verb, which is placed at 
the end. (See Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C, and Rule of 
Syntax, Lesson XL VII.) 

Often. 



D ft (oftmafg, 8fter$), its compara- 
tive is oftet, and its superlative 
am efteften. 

(So eft true Sie. 
Defter (fifter) att ©ic. 
9tfd)t fo oft ats ©ie. 

To breakfast. 5?tufjftuc!en. 

Eurly. % x ii f). 

Do you breakfast before you g} #tfif)ftticfcti <Ste, cl)e ©ie in ten 
into the wood ] SBatt) gefym? 



As often as 3 ou. 
Oftener than you. 
Not so often as you. 



101 

Does he breakfast before he be- guibftucft it, i\i et anftfnjt JU fit* 

gins to work ] fatten ? 

Do you breakfast as early as 1 1 grfibftficfrn ©tc fo frtir) rote id) ? 
I breakfast earlier than you. 3d) frutjpucfc friifoer flla @ic. 

£ate. © p & t. 

Too. 3 u. 

Too late. 3u fpfft. 

Too early. 3« ftur). 

Too great. 3" B rc ^ 

Too little. 3u UtifU 

Too much. 3u mU 

Do you speak too much 1 (£pn'd)cn <Ste )U met? 

I do not speak enough. 3d) fpted)C nid)t genu*}. 

O&s. B. We have seen (Lesson XXIV.) that the in- 
finitive in German is always preceded by the particle 
$iu This particle, however, is omitted before the infi- 
nitive, 

1st, When it is joined to one of the following verbs : 

Siiirfen*, to be permitted ; f)ei$en*, to bid ; fyelfen*, to 
help ; t)6ren*, to hear ; format*, to be able (can) ; laf* 
fen*, to let ; lebrett, to teach ; ternen, to learn ; mogen*, 
to be allowed (may) ; muflett*, to be obliged (must) ; 
feben*, to see ; follen*, to be obliged (shall, ought) ; tvoU 
fett*# to ba willing, to wish (will). 

$af)ren*, to ride, to go (in a carriage) ; futbett*, to 
find ; ful)Ien, to feel ; nennen*, to call, to name ; reiten*, 
to ride, to go on horseback. 

2d, When the infinitive is used in an absolute sense. 
Ex. gleijjtg fern ge$temt bem 9D?cmne, it behoves a man to 
be assiduous. When two infinitives are thus em- 
ployed, the verb which follows them is put in the third 
person singular. Ex. (Seine $el)ter befennen mtb 6ereuen 
ift fd)on balbe SSefferung, to acknowledge one's faults and 
to repent of them is already half an amendment. In 
constructing the phrase with e$ tp, it is, the verbs fein*, 
to be ; befennen*, to acknowledge ; bereuen, to repent 
are removed to the end and preceded by j it* Ex. di 
gejtemt bem 9ftcmne, fleigtg ju fetn (§£ ift fcfyon Iqalbt 23effc 
rung, feme geljfer ju befennen nnb ju bereuem 



102 



EXERCISES. 92. 



Do yru begin to speak ? — I begin to speak. — Does your brothel 
begin to learn Italian ] — He begins to learn it. — Can you already 
speak German ] — Not yet, but I am beginning. — Do our friends 
begin to speak] — They do not yet begin to speak, but to read. — ■ 
Does our rather already begin his letter? — He does not yet begin 
it. — Does the merchant begin to sell ? — He does begin. — Can you 
swim already] — Not yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your son 
speak before he listens ] — He listens before he speaks. — Does your 
brother listen to you (Lesson XXXVI.) before he speaks] — He 
speaks before he listens to me. — Do your children read before they 
write ] — They write before they read. — Does your servant sweep 
the warehouse before he sweeps the room ] — He sweeps the room 
before he sweeps the warehouse. — Dost thou drink before thou 
goest out] — I go out before 1 drink. — Does your cousin wash his 
hands (feme £>d'nK') before he washes his feet ] — He washes his 
feet before he washes his hands. — Do you extinguish the fire be- 
fore you extinguish the candle ? — I extinguish neither the fire nor 
the candle (mis, to the end). — Do you intend to go out before you 
write your letters ] — I intend writing my letters before I go out. — 
Does your son take off his boots before he takes off his coat ] — 
My son takes off neither his boots nor his coat (au6 ; to the end). 

93. 

Do you intend to depart soon (Mb) 1 — T intend to depart to- 
morrow. — Do you speak as often as I] — I do not speak as often, 
but my brother speaks oftener than you. — Do I go out as often as 
your father ] — You do not go out as often as he; but he drinks 
oftener than you. — Do you begin to know this man ] — I begin to 
know him.— Do you breakfast early 1 — We breakfast at a quarter 
past nine. — Does your cousin breakfast earlier than you? — He 
breakfasts later than I. — At what o'clock does he breakfast ] — He 
breakfasts at eight o'clock, and I at half-past six. — Do you not 
breakfast too early ? — I breakfast too late. — Does your father break- 
fast as early as you ] — He breakfasts later than I. — Does he finish 
his letters before he breakfasts ] — He breakfasts before he finishes 
them. — Is your hat too large ] — It is neither too large nor too 
small.— Does our gardener breakfast before he goes into the garden ?. 
-—He goes into the garden before he breakfasts. — Do you read 
French as often as German? — I read French oftener than German, 
— Does the physician speak too much ] — He does not speak enough. 
— Do the Germans drink too much wine? — They do not drink 
enough of it. — Do they drink more beer than cider] — They drink 
more of the one than of the other. — Have you much money] — « 
We have not enough of it. — Have your cousins much corn]— 
They have only a little, but enough. — Have you much more brandy 1 
—We have not much more of it. — Have you as many tables aa 



103 

thairs 1 — T have as many of the one as of the other. — Does ytut 
friend receive as many letters as notes 1 — He receives more of the 
latter than of the former. — Do you finish before you begin? — 1 
must begin before I finish (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in nnb merest* Union. 

THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 

The past participle of regular verbs a is formed from 
the second person plural of the present indicative, by 
prefixing to it g e. Ex. 3^ liebct or Itcbt, you love ; ge* 
ttebet or gdtebt, loved. The past participle of irregular 
verbs will always be given with the verb. 

All that has been said (Obs. A. Lesson XXXIV.) on 
the rejection of the letter e, is equally applicable to 
the past participle, this being formed from the second 
person plural. • 

Obs. A. Some verbs do not add the syllable (j e in 
the past participle. (See those verbs, Lesson XLV.) 

To be— been. S c t n * — g c tt> e f c n. 

Have you been to the market ? Stnfc @ie auf fccm 92lattU gcroc* 

fen? 

T have been there. 3d) bin fc>a geroefen. 

[ have not been there. 3d) bin nicbr ba geroefctu 

Have 1 been there I 2*in Kb fca gcroefen ?. 

You have been there. <&ic ftnb t)a genxfen. 

Has he been there 1 3)1 cr t>a genxfen ? 

Ever. 3c, iema($. 

Never. 9He, niciiiQl^ 

Have you been at the ball 1 Stnb'Stc auf bem 5^att genxfett ? 

Have you ever been at the ball 1 (Stub Stic je auf bem sPall cjeivcjcn ? 
I have never been there. 3$ bin ntc t>a genxfen. 

Thou hast never been there. <Du tuft ntc ba genxfen. 

You have never been there. Sic fint) (3f}t fat)) tucmafS t>a gc» 

nxfen. 
He has never been there. (Sr ift ntc ba genxfen. 

Have you already been at the Stnb Sie fd)on im Sd)aufptc( genx* 
play ? fen ? 

a The pupils, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fail 
to mark in their lists the past participle of those verbs. 



104 

I have already been there. 3cb 6tn fcbcn ba gerccfctt. 

You have already been there. (Sic ftnb fcbcn bet gcnxfen. 

The play, la$ (Scbctufptel (plur. c). 

I have not yet been there. 3d) bin nccb nicbt ta genxfem 

Thou hast not yet been there. £)u bift nccb nicbt bet genxfen. 

STou have not yet been there. ©te ftnt) nccb nicbt t>a genxfen. 

He has not yet been there. (Sr tjt nccb nicbt bet genxfen. 

We have not yet been there. UBit ftnt) nccb nicbt fret genxfen. 

Have you already been at my ©inb <5te fcfyon bci metnem &$atcr ge« 

father's (with my father) ] nxfen ] 

I have not yet been there (with 3$ bin nccb nicl)t bet tfjm genxs 

him). fen. 

Where have you been this morn- 2Bc ftnb <Ste btefen Bergen genx* 

ing? fen? 

I have been in the garden. 3d) bin im (tn bem) ©artcn genx* 

fen. 

Where has thy brother been] $>o tft £>etn SBruber genxfen ? 

He has been in the storehouse. <Sr ift tm $ortcttf)sl)au|"c genxfen. 

exercises. 94. 

Where have you been ] — I have been at the market. — Have you 
been at the ball ] — 1 have been there. — Have I been at the play ]- 
You have been there. — Hast thou been there? — 1 have not been 
there. — Has your cousin ever been at the theatre? — He has never 
been there. — Hast thou already been in the great square ] — I have 
never been there. — Do you intend to go thither 1 — I intend to go 
thither. — When will you go thither 1 — I will go thither to-morrow. 
— At what o'clock ] — At twelve o'clock. — Has your son already 
been in my large garden ] — He has not yet been there. — Does he 
intend to see it ] — He does intend to see it. — When will he go 
thither (htnetn) 1 — He will go thither to-day. — Does he intend to go 
to the ball this evening'? — He does intend to go thither. — Have you 
already been at the ball ] — I have not yet been there. — When do 
you intend to go thither (tK.f)in) ] — I intend to go thither to-morrow. 
— Have you already been in the Englishman's room] — I have not 
yet been in it (barin). — Have you been in my rooms] — I have 
been there. — When have you been there ] — I have been there this 
morning. — Have I been in your room or in that (in bem) of your 
friend ] — You have neither been in mine nor in that of my friend, 
but in that of the Italian. 

95. 

Has the Dutchman been in our storehouses or in those (in benen) 
of the English ] — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the 
English, but in those of the Italians. — Hast thou already been at 
the market ] — I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither. 
. — Has the son of our bailiff been there] — He has been th^re.— « 
When has he been there ] — He has been there to-day. — Does th* 



105 



son cf our neighbour intend to go to the market ? He does intend 
to go thither. — What does he wish to buy there ? — He wishes to 
buy some chickens, oxen, cheese, beer, and cider there. — Have you 
already been at my cousin's house 1 — I have already been there. — 
Has your friend already been there 1 — He has not yet been there. — 
Have we already been at our friends 1 — We have not yet been 
there (bet ibncn). — Have our friends ever been at our house? — 
. They have never been there. — Have you ever been at the theatre ? 
x have never been there. — Have you a mind to write a letter 1 — 
I have a mind to w T rite one. — To whom do you wish to write 1 — 
I wish to write to my son. — Has your father already been in the 
country ] — He has not yet been there, but he intends to go thither. — 
Does he intend to go thither to-day ] — He intends to go thither to- 
morrow. — At what o'clock will he depart? — He will depart at 
half past six. — Does he intend to depart before he breakfasts 1 — 
He intends to breakfast before he departs. — Have you been any- 
where 1 — I have been nowhere. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-SECOND LESSON. — Zmi untr merest* 
iUrtiou. 



To have — had* 



£aben* — gefjabt. 



DCJ 3 The participle past, as well as the infinitive 
(Lesson XXIV), when it forms with the auxiliary a 
compound tense, is in German placed at the end of the 
phrase. 



Have you had my coat 1 

I have not had it. 

Have I had it ] 

You have had it. 

You have not had it. 

Thou hast not had it 

Has he had it 1 

He has had it. 

Hast thou had my book 1 

I have had it. 

I have not had it. 

Have you had the books 1 
I have had them. 
Has he had them ? 
He has had them. 
Have you had bread 1 
I have had some. 
Hast thou had paper % 
5* 



#abcn <Ste mcincn $ecf gcbjabt? 

3d) babe ibn ntcbt gcbabt. 

$ab< % tch tbn gebabt? 

<&'u baben trjn gchabt. 

<5u baben tbn ntcbt gebabt* 

£)u baft ibn ntcfyt a/fjabt. 

£at cr ibn gebabt ? 

<§r bat tbn gebabt. 

£oft £)u metn SBud) gefyabt ? 

3cb babe c$ gebabt. 

3d) babe es nicbt gebabt. 

£>aben <Stc tie <£{id)et gcr)abt ? 
3d) babe fte gebabt. 
4bat er fte gcbabt ? 
(Sr b<U fie gcbabt. 
£aben (g'tc 23reb §ebabt ? 
3cb babe iDclebeS gcbabt. 
£aft £>u papier gebabt ? 



106 



lhave had none, 
Have 1 had any 1 

Has he had some wine ? 
He has had some. 
He has had none. 
What has he had? 
He has had nothing*. 



Scfi f)nfcc tVtnS gefiabt. 
£abe tcb nwlcbcs qcbafct ? 
£ot cr £&in a,ef)abt I 
d£r bat luddvn a/babt. 
(§r b^t feiften gehabt. 
SLBa6 bat cr gebobf 1 
(St bat ntd)t$ a/t)abt. 



He has never been either right f (£*r bat nic rpeDet S^cc^t nodf) Una 
or wrong. rcd)t getyabt. 

To take place* ©tatt ft n t> c n *. 

Does the ball take place this JtnM K't SBatt tiefcn 2Dcnb 

evening 1 (Statt ? 

It does take place. 
It takes place this evening. 



Found. 
When did the ball take place ? 

Yesterday. 
The day before yesterday. 
It took place yesterday. 



<$t fmfcct ®tatt. 

©r ftnfccf bwfeti 2C&cn& ©tatt. 

©ef unt) en. 

2£ann fjat t>cc 23att ©tatt gefun* 
ben ? 

©eftern. 

SScrqejtcrn. 

@t l;at geptern ©tatt gefunben. 



O&s. A Expressions such as <&tatt ftttben*, ought 
to be considered as separable verbs, of which the par- 
ticle is placed at the end in simple tenses and before 
the syllable g e of the past participle. Here the sub- 
stantive <&tatt, place, stands as a separable particle. 



Time. 

The first time. 
The last time. 
Last. 
How many times (how often) ] 
Once, 
twice, 
thrice, 
severaV times, 

Formerly. 

Sometimes. 

Do you go sometimes to the mar- 
ket? 
i do go sometimes thither. 



£>a$ erjte WaL 
£)as (e&te WqL 
Begfi, 

2Btc triefoial? 
etnmat ; 
$roctma( ; 
bteimat ; 
»crfd)iebene Sfllal 

@ h c b e m (e&emais, eficbeffen, »on 
mats); 

93* a n d) m a ( . 

©cben <Ste mancfymal ouf ben 

93?auft ] 
3d) gefye mancfymal bafytn. 



■ When the word 3JM is preceded by an adjective or an ordinal number, ft 
is written with a capital initial letter ; when annexed to a cardinal number, it 
begins with a small letter. 



107 

Gone. (3 c a, a n g e n. 

GW thither, $ t n 9 c cj a rt 9 c tn 

Have you gone thither some- (Stub (Sic mandjmal rjtrtcjccjana,cn ? 
times ? 

Obs. B. Here it may be seen how the syllable gc 
in the past participle is placed between the separable 
particle and the verb. (See Lesson XXV.) 

I have gone thither sometimes. 3$) few nmncbmat f)tna,cgana,eru 

Oftener than you. Dofrcr ate €Tic. 

Have the men had my trunk ] jpaben iMe banner metnen R offer 

gebafrt ] 
They have not had it. ©w baben thn ntcbt cjebaOt. 

Who has had it? . 8Bet hat tbn a,ct)abt] 

Have I been wrong in buying £abe td) llnrcct>t gcfya&t, 95 it eft cr $U 

books? faufcnl 

You have not been wrong in Sic haben nicbt Untccfyt Qcfyabt, wcU 

buying some. d)C $u faufctu 

EXERCISES. 96. 

Have you bad my glove ] — I bave bad it. — Have you bad my 
pocket-handkerchief] — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my 
umbrella ] — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my pretty knife ]— . 
I have had it. — When hadst (baft — qcbabt) thou it] — I had it yes- 
terday. — Have 1 had thy gloves ] — You have had them — Has your 
brother had my wooden hammer]. — He has had it. — Has he had 
my golden ribbon 1 — He has not had it. — Have the English had 
my beautiful ship] — They have had it. — Who has had my thread 
stockings ? — Your servants have had them. — Have we had the iron 
trunk of our good neighbour? — We have had it. — Have we had 
his fine carriage] — We have not had it. — Have we had the stone 
tables of the foreigners ] — We have not had them. — Have we had 
the wooden leg of the Irishman] — We have not had it. — Has th6 
American had my good work ] — He has had it. — Has he had my 
silver knife ] — He has not had it. — Has the young man had the 
first volume of my work ? — He has not had the first, but the 
second. — Has he had it] — Yes, Sir, he has had it. — When has he 
had it] — He has had it this morning. — Have you had sugar?— 
I have had some. — Have I had good paper] — You have had some. 
— Has the sailor had brandy] — He has had some. — Have you had 
any ? — 1 have had none. 

97. 

Has the German had good beer ] — He has had some. — Hast 
thou had large cakes (.ft lichen is not softened in the plur.) ] — I have 
bad some. — Has thy brother had any] — He has had none. — Hag 
the 6on of our gardener had flour ] — He has had some. — Have the 



108 

Poles had good tobacco ? — They have had some. — What tobacco 
have they had ? — They have had tobacco for smoking and snufl 
(Sftcmcb- tint) ^chnupftabaf). — Have the English had as much sugar 
as tea ? — Th^y have had as much of the one as of the other. — 
Has the physician been right] — He has been wrong. — Has the 
Dutchman been right or wrong? — He never has been either right 
or wrong. — Have I been wrong in buying honey ? — You have been 
wrong in buying some. — What has your cousin had ? — He has 
had your boots and shoes. — Has he had my good biscuits 
(3rmcbacf is not softened in the plur.) ? — He has not had them.— 
What has the Spaniard had ? — He has had nothing. — Who has 
had courage ? — The English have had some. — Have the English 
had many friends ? — They have had many of them. — Have 7 we 
had many enemies ? — W T e have not had many of them. — Have we 
had more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter 
than of the former. — Has your son had more wine than meat? — 
He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk 
had more pepper than corn ? — He has had more of the one than of 
the other. — Has the painter had anything? — He has had nothing. 

98. 

Have I been right in writing to my brother 1 — You have not 
been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had the head-ache ?— 
I have had the tooth-ache. — Have you had anything good ? — I have 
had nothing bad ? — Did the ball take place yesterday ? — It did not 
take place. — Does it take place to-day 7 — It does take place to- 
day. — When does the ball take place ? — It takes place this evening. 
—Did it take place the day before yesterday 1 — It did take place. 
— At what o'clock did it take place ? — It took place at eleven 
o'clock. — Have you gone to my brother's ? — I have gone thither.— 
How often hast thou gone to my cousin's house? — I have gone 
thither twice. — Do you go sometimes to the theatre ? — I go some- 
times thither. — How many times have you been at the theatre ?— 
I have been there only once. — Have you sometimes been at the 
ball 1 — I have often been there. — H is your brother ever gone to the 
ball ? — He has never gone thither. — Has youi father sometimes 
gone to the ball ?— He went (iff — a^anqcn) thither formerly.— Has 
lie gone thither as often as you?— He has gone thither oftener than 
I. — Dost thou go sometimes into the garden ? — I do go thither 
sometimes. — Hast thou never been there ? — I have often been 
there. — Does your old cook often go to the market ? — He does go 
thither often. — Does he go thither as often as my bailiff? — He 
goes thither oftener than he. 

99. 

Have you formerly gone to the ball ? — I have gone thither some- 
times. — When hast thou been at the ball ? — I was there the day 
before yesterday. — Didst thou find anybody there? — I found (babe 
gcfuntcn) nobody there. — Hast thou gone to the bail oftener than 



109 

thy brothers 1 — I have gone thither oftener than they. — Has yotu 
cousin often been at the play 1 — He has been there several times, 
— Have you sometimes been hungry 1 — I have often been hungry. 
— Has your valet often been thirsty 1 — He has never been either 
hungry or thirsty. — Have you gone to the play early ] — I have 
gone thither late. — Have I gone to the ball as early as you 1 — You 
have gone thither earlier than I. — Has your brother gone thither 
too late? — He has gone thither too early. — Have your brothers had 
anything] — They have had nothing. — Who has had my purse and 
my money 1 — Your servant has had both. — Has he had my stick 
and my hat ? — He has had both. — Hast thou had my horse or that 
of my brother] — I have had neither yours ^or that of your brother. 
~-Have I had your note or that of the physician ? — You have had 
both (bciDc). — What has the physician had ] — He has had nothing. 
— Has anybody had my golden candlestick ] — Nobody has had it, 
(See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY-THIRD LESSON.— JUm Uttir rnxfaztt 
Action. 

To do — done. & f) u n * — 9 e t r) a n. 

What have you done ] 2£n$ bakn (Ste getfyem ? 

I have done nothing. Scb babe mct)t* $etban. 

Has the shoemaker made my £at t>er @ct)uf)mcid)i'i: metne @ttefel 

boots ? genmebt ? 

He has made them. (?r bat ftc annacfyt. 

He has not made them. (§t fjat fie tud)t Qcmacfjt. 

To take off-taken off. <V*"^men*-ab$cntmmen. 

Have you taken your boots off? £ci&cn Sic Sbre ©ttefel au&jeaogcn? 
I have taken them off. 3d) fjadc fie ausgejogeiu 

This, that. £) t c f c $, bog. 

Has he told you that ? £at cr Sfjnert to* Qcfagt ? 

It. <£$. • 

He has told it to me. (5t r)at c$ mit gefagfc 

^ Obs. The neuter pronoun e $, it, which is some- 
times rendered into English by so, and more elegantly 
omitted, may in German relate to substantives of any 
gender or number, to adjectives, and even to whole 
phrases. 



110 

Have you told it to me 1 £aben <£tc eg mir .qefncjt ? 

I have told it to yon. 3d) babe e$ Sbncn a/facjt* 

Who has told it to him 1 ££er hat cs ihm gefagt ? 

Are you the brother of my friend 1 6'int> £ie t>er 23rut>cr meincS Jreum 

fce*? 
I am. f 3d) tun c & 

Are you ill ] ©tnfc 8te frmif ? 

I am not. f £cl) bin e 6 nicbt. 

Are our neighbours as poor as f (StnD unfere Stabbarn fo*tm, nrie 

they say ? ft e e 6 fagen ? 

They are so. f (Sic ftnfc c$. 

To 5jt?£?a^ — spoken. '© p r c cb c n * — 3 c f p r cb e n. 

I have spoken with the man. 3d) babe nut fcem SHannc gefprocfyen. 
I have spoken to the man. 3d) fyabe ten 9)tonn cjefprccben.* 

Wi7A. 931 t 1 (a preposition which gov- 

erns the dative). 

With which man have you 20?tt roetcbem 9)tannc baben <Ste gc* 

spoken 1 fprocben ? 

To which man have you spoken! 95k(cben Sftonn fyctben <Sie gefprocfyen ? 

Cut (past participle), ©cfefynttten. 
Picked up. 2( u f g e b c b e n. 

Washed. © e n3 f cb e n. 

Which books have you picked £8e(cbe SBitcbcr r)abctt <Sie aufgefyes 

up 1 ben ? 

I have picked up yours. 3d) babe tie Shrtgen anfgebeben 

(See Obs. B. preceding Lesson.) 

Burnt. 9$erbrennt. b 

Which books have you burnt? SSMcbc Switcher bnben Sfw ttcrbrennt? 
I have burnt no books. Set) babe fetne 23ud)cc DcrbcennU 

Torn. 3 err iff en. 

Which shirts have you torn 1 SBekbc 4bcmfccn baben <Sie $errif[en? 
I have torn my own. 3d) fyabe tie meinujen jemjfen* 

exercises. 100. 

Have you anything to do? — 1 have nothing to do.— -What haa 
your brother to do] — He has to write letters. — What hast thou 
done 1 — I have dono nothing. — Have I done anything 1 — You have 

a ^emanben fprecBett means to speak to somebody in an absolute sense, with- 
out mentioning the subject spoken of, whilst mil jiemanbem fpredjen, means to 
epeak with or to somebody about a particular thing, as: mtt Semanbem iibet 
ettuaS (oon etner £ctcbe) fprecben, to speak with somebody about something. 

b The participle past of the verb t>erbrenrten would be rerbrannt, if it wer« 
employed either in a neuter or intransitive sense. Ex. Are my books bimt? 
fttib meine *8iicber JoerfcramU? They are burnt, fie ftnfc uxhvannt (See Note 
S Lesson XXV. 



Ill 

torn my clothes (.ft(ctber). — What have your children done? — Thej 
have torn their beautiful books. — What have we done ? — V ou have 
done nothing"; but your brothers have burnt my fine chairs. — Has 
the tailor already made your coat? — He has not yet made it. — 
Has your shoemaker already made your boots'?— -He has already 
made them. — Have you sometimes made a hat? — I have never 
made one. — Hast thou already made thy purse ? — I have not yet 
made it.— Have our neighbours ever made books? — They made 
(Fjctbcn — $cmctd)t) some formerly. — How many coats has your tailor 
made ? — He has made thirty or forty of them. — Has he made good 
or bad coats? — He has made (both) good and bad (ones). — Has 
our father taken his hat off? — He has taken it off.— -Have your 
brothers taken their coats off? — They have taken them off. — Has 
the physician taken his stockings or his shoes off? — He has taken 
off neither the one nor the other. — What has he taken away ?— 
He has taken away nothing', but he has taken off his large hat.— 
Who has told you that? — My servant has told it to me — What Las 
your cousin told you ? — He has told me nothing. — W ho has told 
it to your neighbour ? — The English have told it to him. — Are you 
the brother of that (Mefes) youth? — I am (3d) bin es). — Is that boy 
your son ] — He is. — How many children have you ? — I have but 
two. — Has the bailiff gone to the market? — He has not gone 
thither. — Is he ill ? — He is. — Am I ill ? — You are not. — Are you 
as tall (groO) as I ? — I am. — Are your friends as rich as they say ? 
— They are. — Art thou as fatigued as thy brother? — I am more so 
(e£ mef)r) than he. 

101. 

Have you spoken to my father ? — I have spoken to him. — When 
did (babcn gefprodKn) you speak to him? — I spoke to him the day 
before yesterday. — Have you sometimes spoken with the Turk ? — 
1 have never spoken with him. — How many times have you 
spoken to the captain? — I have spoken to him six times. — Has 
the nobleman ever spoken with you ? — He has never spoken with 
me. — Have you often spoken with his son 1 — I have often spoken 
with him. — Have you spoken with him oftener than we ? — I have 
not spoken with him so often as you (have). — To which son of the 
nobleman have you spoken ? — I have spoken to the youngest. — To 
which men has your brother spoken ? — He has spoken to these. — 
What has your gardener's son cut ? — He has cut trees. — Has he 
cut corn? — He has cut some. — Has he cut as much hay as corn? 
— He has cut as nuch of the one as of the other. — Have you 
picked up my knife ? — I have picked it up. — Has your boy picked 
up the tailor's thimble? — He has not picked it up. — Have you 
picked up a crown ? — I have picked up two of them.- — What have 
you picked up ? — We have pkkkgd up nothing. — Have you burnt 
anything ?— We have burnt nothing. — What have the sailors 
burnt? — They have burnt their cloth coats.— Hast thou burnt my 
fine ribbons ? — 1 have not burnt them. — Which books has the 



112 



Greek burnt? — He has burnt his own. — Which s'.iips (<£cf)tffe) 
have the Spaniards burnt? — They have burnt no ships. — Have you 
burnt paper] — I have not burnt any. — Has the Physician burnt 
notes 1 — He has burnt none. — Have you had the courage to burn 
my hat ? — I have had the courage to burn it. — When did you burn 
it 1 — I burnt it yesterday. — Where have you burnt it ? — I have 
burnt it in my room. — Who has torn your shirt 1 — The ugly boy "»f 
our neighbour has torn it. — Has anybody torn your books 1 — !*>*• 
body has torn them. 



FORTY.FOURTH LESSON.— \)hv tmir merjigsie 

&U110VL. 



To drink - 
To carry - 
To bring- 
To send - 
To write- 
Te see - 
To give - 
To lend - 



-drunk. 

-carried. 

-brought. 

-sent. 

-written. 

-seen. 

-given. 

-lent. 



Infinitive. 
Zvintm* - 
SCragen* - 
SSringen* - 
©enben* - 
Scfyreibett*- 
©eben* 
©eben* 
Cetfyett* 



Past part. 
-getrtmfem 
-getragetn 
-gebracfyt 
-gefanbt 
-gefdjriebetu 
-gefebem 
-gegebem 
-geliefyem 



NEUTER VERBS. 

Neuter verbs are conjugated like the active. The 
latter, however, always form their past tenses with 
the auxiliary tydben*, to have ; on the contrary, some 
neuter verbs take fein*, to be, and others fyaben*, for 
their auxiliary ; others again take sometimes fyaben*, 
and sometimes fcm*. Those of which the auxiliary 
is not marked have the same as in English. 

To come — come (Past part.). £ o m m c tt * — 9 c I o m m c n. 
Togo — gone. ©efyen* — gc a, a no, en. 

Is the man come to your father? 3ft tor Stfctnn $u Stjrcm 83atcr <je* 

fenimen ? 
He is come to him. (5*r ijl w thm gcfcmmctn 

Is thy brother gone into the 3ft £Kun barter auf fca$ (auf$) 

field 1 ^ctb cjcvpncjcn ? 

He is gone thither. *(^ iff fcafun gcqanqcn. 

Have you seen the man 1 JpaU*n Site ton #tonn jjcfeljen ? 

I have seen him. 3d) babe ifon C|cfel)cn. 

Have you seen my book ? £aben <Sie man 93 ud) gefc^cn ? 



113 

I have seen it. 3d) F)ak e$ gcfcficn. 

I have not seen it. 3d) fabc e* njd)t Qcfcbcn* 

Wfon ?— WAere ? 2B a n n ? — 2B o ? a 

When did you see my cousin 1 £Bann baben ©ic mcincn 9Scttcr get 

feben ? 
I saw him the day before yester- 3d) fjabc tf)tf t)crgc(icm gefer)etu 

day. 
Where have you seen him 1 ££o babcn (Ste tbn gefeben? 

I have seen him at the theatre. 3d) babe ibrt tni Sbcatcr gcfer)ctn 
Where hast thou seen my book! 5£e baft 3)u mctn S^ucb a/feben ? 
I have seen it in your room. 3d) fabc e$ in 3{)teni 3tmmer- gefe* 

ben. 

Do you learn to read 1 Sernen (Sic fefen ? 

I do learn (it). 3d) (erne ci. 

I learn to write. 3d) (erne febretben. 

Have you learnt to write 1 £aben ©is febreiben gctetttt 1 

I have (learnt it). 3d) b^be es gelernt. 

To £ti0w (fo 5e acquainted with) it e n n en* — ge^annt. 
— known* 

Have you known those men ] £aben ©te jenc banner gefannt ? 
I have not known them. 3d) b fl be fie ntd)t gefannt. 

Obs. Instead of the past participle, the following 
verbs retain the form of the infinitive when preceded 
by another infinitive : b bitrfert*, to be permitted ; fyetgert*, 
to bid ; fyelfett*, to help ; tyoren, to hear ; fomtert*, to be 
able (can) ; tafien*, to let ; tefyren, to teach ; lernen, to 
learn ; mogen*, to be allowed (may) ; miiflfen*, to be 
obliged (must) ; feben*, to see ; follen, to be obliged 
(shall, ought) ; Gotten, to be willing, to wish (will). 

To let (to get, to have, to order). £ a f f e n *♦ (See Lesson XXXI. 

where this verb is conjugated 
in the present tense.) 

To get or to have mended — got ftusbefjVrn faf[cn*. 
or had mended. 

a Learners ought now to use in their exercises the adverbs of time, place, 
and number, mentioned in Lessons XXVII. XXXI. XXXII. and XLII. 

b It will be useful to remember i hat the particle J it does not precede the 
infinitive joined to one of these verbs. (See Obs. B. Lesson XL.) 

c Modern authors do not always observe this distinction, but ^ive the pre- 
ference to the regular form. Thu^. it is already generally said : X$cft babe tbtt 
fennen gelernt (not lernen), I have become acquainted with him ; ?u~b babe thm 
arbeitcn gebolfen (not belfen), I have helped him to work ; er ^)at mid? rtcfytig 
ffcrecfyen gelefyrt (not lernen), he has taught me to speak correctly. 






114 

To get or to have washed — got ££afd)en faflcn* 

or had washed. 
To have made — had made. Sfflacbcn (affcn*. 

Are you getting a coat made (do £af[cn <Ste ctncn 9?ccf macfyen? 

you order a coat) ] 
I am getting one made (I do 3d) fajfc ctncn mad)cn. 

order one). 
I have had one made. 3d) babe ctncn niocnen faffen. 

Has your brother had his shirt £>at 3br 25rut>cr fcin Jpcnit) tuafefyea 

washed ] laffen ? 

He has had it washed. (5r bat e$ roafefyen (a)|cn. 

The cravat, focts &a&tudj ; 

the neck, N*r £>a(?. 

Hast thou sometimes had cravats j^afl aDu manchmat £atetud)Ct aug* 

mended I befjern (afjen ? 

have had some mended some- 3d) babe manctymal tx>ctd)e auSbeffetn 

times. lajjcn. 

exercises. 102. 

Have you drunk wine 1 — I have drunk some. — Have you drunk 
much of it] — I have drunk but little of it. — Hast thou drunk 
some beer? — I have drunk some] — Has thy brother drunk much 
good cider] — He has not drunk much of it, but enough. — When 
did you drink any wine] — I drank some yesterday and to-day (3d) 
fyabe a/ftern tint) beutc nxtchen). — Has the servant carried the letter ] 
— He has carried it. — Where has he carried it to ] — He has 
carried it to your friend. — Have you brought us some apples ] — We 
have brought you some. — How many apples have you brought us] 
— We have brought you twenty-five of them. — When did you 
bring them ] — I brought (babe — a/bracbt) them this morning. — At 
what o'clock ] — At a quarter to eight. — Have you sent your little 
boy to the market? — I have sent him thither (t>abtn). — When did 
you send him thither ]-— This evening. — Have you written to your 
father] — I have written to him. — Has he answered you ]— He has 
not yet answered me. — Have you ever written to the physician ] — 
I ha^e never written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you ] 
— H has often written to me. — What has he written to you ] — He 
has written to me something. — Have your friends ever written to 
you ] — They have often written to me. — How many times (Lesson 
XLII.) have they written to you 1 — They have written tp me more 
than thirty times. — Have you ever sepn my son ] — I have never 
seen him. — Has he ever seen you ] — He has often seen me. — Hast 
thou ever seen any Greeks ] — I have often seen some. — Have you 
already seen a Syrian ] — I have alre'ady seen one. — Where have 
you seen one 1 — At the theatre. — Have you given the book to my 
brother ] (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XXVIII.) — 1 have given it to 
him. — Have you given money to the merchant] — I have given 
some to him. — How much have you given to him 7 — I have given 
to him fifteen crowns. — Have you given gold ribbons to cur good 



115 

neighbours* children? — I have given some to them. — Will you 
give some bread to the poor (man) (Page 34, Obs. A.) ? — 1 have 
already given some to him. — Wilt thou give me some wine 1 — I 
have already given you some.— When didst thou give me some ]— 
I gave you some formerly. — Wilt thou give me some now] — I 
cannot give you any (3d) tdnn 3t>ncn fcincn). 

103. 

Has the American lent you money ] — He has lent me some.— 
Has he often lent you some 1 — He has lent me some sometimes.— 
When did he lend you any? — He lent me some formerly. — Has 
the Italian ever lent you money ] — He has never lent me any. — 
Is he poor ] — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you 
lend me a crown 1 — I will lend you two of them. — Has your boy 
come to mine ] — He has come to him. — W^hen 1 — This morning. — 
At what time ] — Early. — Has he come earlier than I ] — At what 
o'clock did you come ] — I came at half past five. — He has come 
earlier than you. — Where did your brother go to ? — He went to the 
ball. — When did he go thither] — He went thither the day before 
yesterday. — Has the ball taken place 1 — It has taken place. — Has 
it taken place late] — It has taken place early. — At what o'clock] 
— At midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ] — He does learn 
it. — Does he already know how (Lesson XXXVII.) to read ] — He 
does not know how yet. — Have you ever learnt German ] — I learnt 
it formerly, but I do not know it. — Has your father ever learnt 
French ? — He has never learnt it. — Does he learn it at present]— 
He does learn it. — Do you know the Englishman whom I know] 
I do not know the one whom (Lessons XII. and XIV 7 .) you know; 
but I know another (Lesson XXI). — Does your friend know the 
same n^Meman whom I know ? — He does not know the same ; but 
he knows others. — Have you known the same men whom I have 
known (ruclcbe icb qcfannt hatv). — I have not known the same ; but 
I have known others. — Have you ever had your coat mended 1 — 
I have sometimes had it mended] — Hast thou already had thy 
boots mended ] — I have not yet had them mended. — Has your 
cousin sometimes had his stockings mended ] — He has several 
times had them mended. — Hast thou had thy hat or thy shoe mend- 
ed ?— I have neither had the one nor the other mended. — Have you 
had my cravats or my shirts, washed] — 1 have neither had the 
one nor the other washed. — What stockings have you had washed ? 
— I have had the thread stockings washed. — Has your father had 
& table made? — He has had one nade. — Have you had anything 
onade ? — I have had nothing made. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



116 

FORTY-FIFTH LESSON. — Siinf unir mtt]\%m 
Action. 

To receive — received. 33 c f o m m e n * (crfjaltCtt* 

empf angcn*). 

Obs. A. We have observed (Lesson XLL) that some 
verbs do not take the syllable g e in the past participle ; 
tiiey are, 

1st, Those which begin with one of the inseparable 
unaccented particles : be, emp, ettt, er, ge, fcer, ttnber, jer 
(See Lesson XXV.)? or with one of the following par- 
ticles, when inseparable : buret), through ; btnter, behind ; 
fiber, over ; um, around ; imter, under ; fcotf, full ; ttneber, 
again. a 

2nd, Those derived from foreign languages and ter- 
minating in irett, or tereru Ex. fiubiren, to study ; past 
part, ftubtrt, studied. 

Rule. All verbs, in general, which have not the prin- 
cipal accent upon the first syllable, reject the syllable 
ge in the past participle. 

How much money have you re- 2BieDte( ($5ctb fja&cn ftc fiefommen ? 

ceived 1 

I have received three crowns. 3d) ftafrc brct Chafer oefommen. 

Have you received letters 1 JjDCiben Ste ffirtcfc erbaltcn ? 

I have received some. Set) fyabc nxlcfye erbaltcn* 

To promise— promised. 8Serfprcd)C n* — $ crfprocfoen. 

Obs. B. Derivative and compound verbs are con- 
jugated like their primitives : thus the verb tterfprecfyen* 
is conjugated like fprecfyeu*, to speak, which is its pri- 
mitive. (Lessons XXIV. and XXXIV.) 

Do you promise me to come? ^crfprccbcn <£te nut $u tOmmen ? 

I promise you. 3cb t>erfprccbc eg Sbncn. 

The grosh (a coin), fcet ©rcfcbcn (is not softened in the 

; plur.); 

the denier, rxt ^pfennig. 
A crown contains twenty-four (§tn S hater rjat trier unb awanjtg 
groshes. (Stefcrjcn. 

a Verbs compounded with these particles are inseparable, when the par- 
ticles may be considered as adverbs, and separable, when they have tiw 
meaning of prepositions. 



117 



A grosh contains twelve deniers. ©in (SJrcfcncn bat $it>o(f ^fcnntqe. 

A florin contains sixteen groshes (Sin ©ulDen bat fcd)^ct)n ©refdben 
or sixty kreuzers, or forty-eight ebcr fccb^tg £reti$er, obet ad)t unb 
good kreuzers. mer$ig gute £tcu$er. 

A denier contains two oboles. Sin ^pfennig fyat §nwi fetter* 
The obole, tec feller. 



There is. 
There are. 

How many groshes are there in 

a crown ] 
Twenty-four. 

To wear out — worn out. 

To spell — spelled, ~ 
How ? 

Well. 
Bad, badly. 

How has he w T ashed the sbirt ? 

He has washed it well. 

How have you written the letter 1 

Thus. 
So so. 

In this manner. 

To call — called. 

Have you called the man! 
I have called him. 

To dry. 

To put (to place, to lay). 

Do you put your coat to dry 1 
I do put it to dry. 
Where have you placed (put) 
the book] 



<£$ I ft- 

(S$ finb. 

SSMemct ©refdjen ftnb in cincm Sfja* 

let? 
SSicr unb $tt>an$tg. 

2Cbttagcn * — a&jjetrajjen 

(abnugen — • abgenu£t). 
35 u cb ft a b 1 1 e n — b u d) ft a 6 i r t. 

©ut, woU (adverbs b ). 

@d)lcd)t, libel, fd)ttmm (adverbs c ). 

££ic bat cr ba$ £emb gciuafd)cn ? 
(5r bat t$ gut gauafeben. 
2Bic baben ©ie ben S3rtcf gefefyrie* 
bcnl 

© o fo. 

"2fuf btcfe Tfrt. 
; 2(uf biefc SBcife. 

9? u f e n * — g e r u f c n • 

£aben ©tc ben $ftann getufen ? 
3d) b«bc i|n gcrufen. 

Stocfnen. 
£ege n. 

Cegen Sic Sbrcn 9?cdf $u tredfnen ? 

3d> lege tbn $u troefnen. 

2Bo baben (Ste bag S3ud) Ijtngc- 

(cgt? (See Note d , Lesson 

XXXVII. 



h (55ut relates to the manner in which a thing is done. Ex. (§x rebet gut, he 
speaks well. SBobl denotes a certain degree of well being. Ex. 3$ bin 
ttobl, I am well ; id) tt>ei£ e£ roo&l, I know it well. 

c <Sd)led)t is the opposite to gut and libel the opposite to ttoM. Ex. (Sr 
fc&retbt fcblecbr, he writes badly. ©tttaS libel tubmen, to be offended at any 
thing, (&ebltmm is employed nearly in the same sense as libel, thus we say: 
fdjlimm genug, bad enough ; befto f glimmer, so much the worse. 



118 

1 have placed it upon the table. 3d) rjafcc e$ auf t>cn &tfd) gctegt 

To lie — lain* £ t c Q c n * — a, c I c 9 e n . 

Where lies the book ] ££0 (tcgt fcaS 93ucb ? 

It lies upon the table. ©5 (te^t auf t>cm Stfcfie. 

It has lain upon the table. (Sg f>at auf t>cm &tfd)e Qelccjcn. 

There. £) a r a u f . 

Does the book lie on the chair ] Ctcgt ba$ SBucl) auf tern (StuF)(e ? 
It does lie there (on it). (£s liecjt t) a r a u f. 

It has lain there. ($$ bat fcarauf gctcgem 

exercises. 104. 

Hast thou promised anything? — I have promised nohing. — Da 
you give me what you have promised me ] — I do give it to you.— 
Have you received much money ] — I have received but little. — How 
much have you received of it 1 — I have received but one crown.— 
When have you received your letter ] — I have received it to-day.— 
Hast thou received anything ]— -I have received nothing. — What 
have we received ] — We have received long (qro£) letters. — Do you 
promise me to come to the ball ] — I do promise you to come to it.— 
Does your ball take place to-night] — It does take place. — How 
much money have you given to my son ? — I have given him fifteen 
crowns. — Have you not promised him more 1 — I have given him what 
I have promised him. — Have our enemies received their money]— 
They have not received it. — Have you German money ? — I have 
some. — What kind of money have you ? — I have crowns, florins, 
kreuzers, groshes, and deniers. — How many groshes are there in 
a florin ] — A florin contains (hat) sixteen groshes, or sixty kreuzers, 
or forty-eight good kreuzers. — Have you any oboles] — I have a 
few of them. — How many oboles are there in a denier] — A denier 
contains two oboles. — Will you lend your coat to me ] — I will lend 
it to you; but it is worn out. — Are your shoes worn out] — They 
are not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother] — I will 
lend them to him. — To whom have you lent your hat] — I have not 
lent it ; I have given it to somebody. — To whom have you given 
it ] — I have given it to a pauper (t>ct 2Crmc). 

105. 

Does your little brother already know how to spell ] — He does 
know. — Does he spell well ] — He does spell well. — How has your 
little boy spelt] — He has spelt so so. — How have your children 
written their letters ] — They have written them badly. — Do you 
know (Lesson XXXVII.) Spanish ] — I do know it. — Does your 
cousin speak Italian] — He speaks it well. — How do your friends 
speak ] — They do not speak badly (ntcbt tt6c(). — Do they listen to 
what you tell them ] — They do listen to it. — How hast thou learnt 
English ] — I have learnt it in this manner. — Have you called me ]— 
I have not called you, but your brother. — Is he ccme 1 — Not yet 



119 

(Lesson XL.) — Where have you wet (nag macftcn) your clothes! 
— I have wet them in the country. — Will you put them to dry 
($ii trccfncn Icgch) 1 — I will put them to dry. — Where have you put 
m y hat ] — I have put it upon the table. — Hast thou seen my book ] 
— I have seen it.— Where is it ] — It lies upon your brother's trunk. 
— Does my handkerchief lie upon the chair] — It does lie upon it. — 
When have you been in the country] — I have been there the day 
before yesterday. — Have you found your father there ] — I have found 
him there. — What has he said 1 — He has said nothing.. — What have 
you been doing in the country ] — I have been doing nothing there. 



FORTY-SIXTH LESSON. — 0ec!)0 nnh tuerfaste 
Cation. 

Does your father wish to give 2Bttt Sfyr SSatct nut ctivaS 311 tfyun 

me anything to do ] gefcen ? 

He does wish to give thee some- (St wilt £)tt etrt>a$ $u tfyun gefcctu 

thing to do. 

Obs. 2) a J U , to it, relates sometimes to an kifin; 
tive, as: 

H?ve you a mind to work 1 IpaUn ©ie Cujt git arfccttcn ? 

I have no mind to it. 3d) babe feme £uft tarn. 

Is thy brother gone to the 3ft £)ctn £$rut>ec aufs £anfc> gegan* 

country ] a,en ? 

He is gone thither. (5t ift bafjtn gegangen. 
Hast thou a mind to go thither] J&aft £)u Suft l>a^tn $u gcfjen? 

I have a mind to it. 3d) fyabe Suft &a$u. 

How old are you 1 •* - ££te oft ftnb (Sic? 

I am twelve years old. 3d) tun $iu8(f 3abt a o!t. 

How old is your brother] SBtc ait ift 3f)r 33rufcet ? 

He is thirteen years old. (St ift &tet$cf)tt 3al)r att. 

Almost (nearly). S3 e t n a fi e or f a ft • 

About. U n 9 c f a f) r. 

Hardly. ^diim, 

He is almost fourteen years old. (St ift faft tricqefin 3aht ait 

I am about fifteen years old. 3d) bin* ungcfa'fjt fttnfeeijtt Saljt 

alt. 
He is almost sixteen years old. (St ift fcctnane fccr^elin Safir aft. 
Your are hardly seventeen years ©te fint> faum peben^tt M* a ^ 
old. 

* Here custom requires the singular limber. 



120 

Not quite. 91 t dj t g a n $. 

I am not quite eighteen years 3d) tun nid)t gan$ ad)t$e!jn Sa^t 

old. aft. 

An thou older than thy brother] SBtft £u after at* £)em S3rubet ? 

I am younger than he. 3d) bin [linger at* er. 

To understand — undei stood. 93erftcr)en* — oerftanfcun 

Do you understand me ] SSerfteften 0$ mid) ? 

I do understand you. 3d) r»crftel)e @te. 

Have you understood the man 1 £>at>en <Ste ben 93iann fcerftanben 1 
I have understood him. 3d) t)a6e irm t)erftanben. 

I hear you, but I do not under- 3d) tore @te y aber id) tterftefje ©ic 
stand you. nid)t. 

The noise, ber Carm ; 

The noise (roaring) of the wind, ba$ (Saufen be£ ££tnbe$; 

The wind, ber SBtnb. 

Do you hear the roaring of the £>oren <Ste t>a$ ©aufen be$ 2Btn< 

wind ] be? ? 

I do hear it. 3d) tore c$. 

To bark. S3 c Hen, 

The barking, bat 23eflen. 

Have you heard the barking of $aben ©ie t>a$ S3ctten bet #Unbe ge* 

the dogs 1 f)6rt ? 

I have heard it. 3d) fyabe e£ gel)6rt. 

To Zose — lost. S3 e r 1 1 e r c n * — t? c r t o r c n. 

To beat— beaten. & d) I a a, e n * — g e f d) I a g c tu 

Thou beatest,— he beats. £)u fd)(agjr, — er fd)(agt. 

To read — read (past part). Se^fen* — gefefen. 

To remain — remained. S3 ( e i e n* — g cbttcOctt (takes 

fein for its auxiliary). 
To take — taken. 91 e f) m c n * — g e n c m me tt. 

To £wom; — known. SB i f f e n * — g c n> u 9 t. 

Have you lost anything"? £akn <Ste etrcaS t-erforen? 

I have lost nothing. 3d) fyctbe nid)t$ t>erloren» 

To lose (at play)— Zo^. 23erfpietcn* — toetfptelt. 

How much has your brother lost? SSiemel fjat 3f)t SSruber fccrfpiclt? 

He has lost about a crown. (£r fiat ungefafyr cinen Sfyater t>et* 

fpiett. 
Who has beaten the dog 1 £Ber fiat ben £unb gefcMflgen ? 

No one has beaten it. Sfaemanb hat if)n gefebfagen. 

How many books has your cousin SOBtemcl 33iid)er f)at 3fa better fd)Otl 
already read % gelefcn 1 



121 

H« has already read five of them, gt fiat bercn fcrjCti fttnf $elefett, unfc 

and at present he is reading jcgt Iteptet bas fccfyfU. 

the sixth. 
Has the man taken anything- f £at bet SRarm Sfynen ctroa* gcs 

from you ] nommen 1 

He has taken nothing from me, f (Sr f)at mtr ntcfttS gcncmmcn. 
Do you know as much as this SBtffcn ©i* fo Met rote btefce 

man ? SKann ? 

I do not know as much as he. 3d) njetfi ntcbt fo met rote er. 
Have you known that ] £aben (Sic ba* genwjjt ? 

I have not known it. 3d) babe c$ mct)t Qerou$t. 

Where have our friends re- SBo finD unfete gteunbe gefcfie&en ? 

mained ] 
They have remained at home. @ie (tab $u 6aufe gcblteOcn. 

exercises. 106. 

Have you time to write a letter 1 ? — I have time to wr'te o*e.-~ 
Will you lend a hook to my brother ] — I have lent one to him 
already.— Will you lend him one more 1 — I will lend him two 
more. — Have you given anything to the poor ]-— I have given them 
money. — How much money has my cousin given you 1 — He has 
given me only a little ; he has given me only two crowns. — How 
}ld is your brother] — He is twenty years old. — Are you as old as 
fie] — I am not so old. — How old are you ] — I am hardly eighteen 
years old. — How old art thou ] — I am about twelve years old. — Am 
I younger than you 1 — 1 do not know. — How old is our neighbour- 
— He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as 
we 1 — They are older than we. — How old are they ] — The one is 
nineteen and the other twenty years- old. — Is your father as old as 
mine 1 — He is older than yours 1 — Have you read my book ] — I have 
not quite read it yet. — Has your friend finished his book 1 — He has 
almost finished it. — Do you understand me 1 — I do understand you. 
— Does the Englishman understand us ] — He does understand us. 
— Do you understand what we are telling you 1 — We do understand 
it. — Dost thou understand German]- — I do not understand it yet, 
but 1 am learning it. — Do we understand the English ] — We do 
not understand them. — Do the Germans understand us ] — They do 
understand us. — Do we understand them ] — We hardly understand 
them. — Do you hear any noise 1 — I hear nothing. — Have you heard 
the roaring of the wind 1 — I have heard it. — What do you hear]— 
1 hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose dog is this ] — It is the dog 
of the Scotchman. 

107. 

Have you lost your stick ] — I have not lost it. — Has your ser- 
vant lost my note ] — He has lost it. — Have you gone to the ball ? 
—No, I have not gone to it. — Where have you remained ] — I have 
remained at home. — Has your father lost (at play) as much money 
is I ?«~He has lost more of it than you 1— How much have I lost 1 
6 






122 

—You have hardly lost a crown. — Where has thy brother re* 
mained 1 — He has remained at home. — Have your friends re« 
mained in the country] — They have remained there. — Do you 
know as much as the English physician! — T do not know as much 
as he. — Does the French physician know as much as you 1 — He 
knows more than I. — Does any one know more than the French 
physicians'? — No one knows more than they. — Have your brothers 
read my books 1 — They have not quite read them. — How many of 
them have they read ] — They have hardly read two of them. — Has 
the son of my gardener taken anything from you ] — He has taken 
my books from me. — What hast thou taken from him 1 — 1 have 
taken nothing from him.-r-Has he taken money from you? — He 
has taken some from me. — How much money has he taken from 
you ? — He tas taken from me almost two crowns. (See end of 
Lesson XXXI V.) 



FORTY.SEVENTH LESSON.— 0iebim unir twrjigste 

jUction. 

To bite — bitten. S3 c 1 e n — cj c & t f f e n. 

Why ? SB a r u m ? 

Because. £B e i U 

flZr* The verb of the subject or nominative, (in 
compound tenses, the auxiliary) is placed at the end 
of the phrase, when this begins with a conjunction or 
a conjunctive word, such as a relative pronoun or a 
relative adverb. The conjunctions which do not re- 
quire the verb to be placed at the end, will be given 
hereafter. 

Why do you heat the dog ? SBarttm fdtfacjen <Ste ben £umb ? 

I beat it, because it has bitten 3cb fcblage tf)n, nxil ct mid) ijctuffcn 

me. fyat. 

Do you see the man who is in (Sefycn <gie ben Sfllann, roclcfyct (ber) 

the garden ] tm (fatten ift ? 

I do see him. 3>d) febe tfm. 

Do you know the man who has Jtennen <&h ben 9}?arm, bet (nxtdjer) 

lent me the book 1 nvtr bat $8ucb gclicljen r;at ? 

I do not know him. Scr) fenne ifm merit. 

Do you read the book, which I Cefen Ste X>a$ <8ucb, roctcfye* id) 3r}< 

have lent you ] nen qciiefjen ftabe ? 

I do read it. 3d) tcfe e& 

Obs. When the verb, which a conjunctive word 
causes to be placed at the end of the phrase, is com 



123 

pounded with a separable particle, this is not detached 
from it. Ex. 

I breakfast before I go out. 3d) friirjitucfc, ebe tcb ausgebc. 

Does the tailor she v you the 3ct^t 3fmcn t>er (ScbnetDer ben 9?Cdt» 
coat, which he is mending? tuelcben et auebefjert ? 

To wait. 2B a r t c n. 

To expect. (S r ro a r t e n.* 

To wait for some one or for 2(uf (Stnen ct»cr ctroaS roatten 

something. 
To expect some one or some- (5tnen obet etwag erroatten. 

thing. 
Do you wait for my brother] Shorten <Ste auf mctnw: &tdbvt? 
I do wait for him. 3d) roarte auf thru 

Do you expect friends 1 (Srroatten <Ste ^reunl; 1 

I do expect some. 3d) erroattc cmtge. 

To owe. ©AulMg fetu** 

How much do you owe me 1 SBtemel fint) ©if nur fcfcufbtg? 
I owe you fifty crowns. 3d) bin Sfynen fti n f^t g Skater fd)tit« 

t>tg. 
How much does the man owe SOBicoicl tj^ 3!;ntn t)cr 3}Zann fdbulbtg? 

you? 
He owes me ten shillings. @t if! nut germ ©dbtfltnge febutbig* 

Does he owe as much as you 1 3ft et fo met fcbulbtg rote @ie? 
He owes more than I. (St ift mebr fd)ulbtg at6 id)* 

The shilling, bet <^d)tUtng ; 

the pound, ba$ $)funb ; 

the livre (a coin), ber grange. 

To return — {to come back) — re* Burficffommen*-— gurScfge* 
turned. t o m men. 

At what o'clock do you return Utn rotemet Uht fommen ^te t>cn 

from the market? bem Sftarfte gurttcf ? 

I return from it at twelve o'clock. 3d) fomme mil groolf Ufyt son ba $u* 

ritcf. 

From there, thence {from it). 93 on t>a. 

Does the servant return ear ] y &ommt bet S3ebiente ftul) sen ba $u* 

thence T rue!? 

He returns thence at ten o'clock ©r femmt um $ef)n Ufyt SttergeitS 

in the morning. t>on ba ^urftcf. 

At nine o'clock in the morning, f Um neun Ufjt $ttergen£. 
At eleven o'clock at night. f Um elf Ufyr 2(benb$. 

a SSarten auf, with the accusative case, is used, when the person or thing 
spoken of is present, and er war ten, when it is not. 

b ^d)ulbtg fein*, to owe, is to be considered as a compound verb, of which 
the separable particle is placed at the end, fdjulfcig, due, owing, indebted, hav 
ing here the force of the separable particle. 



124 






How long ? 
During, for 



£B t e ( n n 9 c ? c 

SB a h t e n o (a premonition which 
governs the genitive case). 



How long has he remained SDStc tangc tft cr &a gcbltcben ? 
there 1 

A minute. 
An hour. 
A day. 
A year. 



A month. 

The summer, 
The winter, 

During the summer, 



(Sine minute. 

Sine <£tun&c.d 

Kitten £ao,. 

(Sin 3«b^ (a neuter substantive, 

taking e in the plur. without 

being softened). 
(Stnen SHenat. 



I 



How long have you spoken with 
the man 1 

I have spoken with him for three 
hours, 

How long has your brother re- 
mained in the country 1 

He has remained there a month. 

Have you remained long with 
my father ] 

I have remained with him for an 
hour. 

Long. 



t>er ©emmcr. 

t>er Winter. 

2Babrcno t>e£ ^ommerS. 

I)en ©emmet tiber. 

Den (Semmer btntmtcr;. 

££te lange baben @te nut tern Sftan* 

ne gefptecben ? 
3d) babe fctet ©tunben nut tfym ge* 

fprccben. 
£Bte langc tft 3f)t <Btut>ct auf t>em 

fiance geblieben 1 
(Sr tft etnen Sftenat t>a ge(>Uekn. 
<£tnb (£ie tange bet metnem SSatct 

geblieben ? 
Set) bin eine ©tunbe tang ki ir)m ge* 

btte&en. 
fiange. 



exercises. 108. 

Why do you love that man ]~I love him, because he is good. — 
Why does your neighbour beat his dog 1 — Because it has bitten 
his little boy. — Why does our father love me 1 — He loves you, be- 
cause you are good. — Do your friends love us? — They love us, be- 
cause we are good. — Why do you bring me wine] — I bring you 
some, because you are thirsty. — Why does the hatter drink ] — He 
drinks, because he is thirsty. — Do you see the sailor who is in 
(auf; the ship ! — I do not see the one who is in (auf) the ship, but 

c The accusative case answers to the question rote Tange ? how long? and 
other similar questions, re/?.tive to measure, weight, quantity, &c, as roie 
lang? how long? rote frfyroer? how heavy? to'teotei? how much? rote tbett* 
ft? at what price? rote roett? how far? rote gvojj? of what size? rote alt? 
how old ? 

<* 9ft mute, minute, ©funbe, hour, are two nouns of the feminine gender; 
they add n in al) the cases of the plural without softening the radical row- 
els. We can also say : erne Stunfce lano, during an hour ; tin ^aijr lang 
during a y&ar. 



125 

the one who is in (cmf) the square. — Do you read the books which my 
father has given you 1 — I do read them. — Do you know the Italians 
whom we know ] — We do not know those whom you know, but 
we know others (anfliTo). — Do you buy the horse which we have 
seen'? — 1 do not buy that which we have seen, but another (cm 
anlw£). — Do you seek what you have lost? — I do seek it. — Do you 
find the man whom you have looked for] — I do not find him.— 
Does the butcher kill the ox which he has bought in (auf with the 
dat.) the market ] — He does kill it. — Do our cooks kill the chickens 
which they have bought] — They do kill them. — Does the hatter 
mend the hat which I have sent him ] — He does mend it. — Does 
the shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him 1 — Ho does 
not mend them, because they are worn out. — Does your cent lie 
upon the chair ] — It does lie upon it. — Does it lie upon the chair 
upon which 1 placed it? — No, it lies upon another. — Where is my 
hat ] — It is in the room in which (luortn or in roclcbcm) you have been. 
—Do you wait for any one ] — I wait for no one. — Do you wait for 
the man whom I have seen this morning] — I do w T ait for him. — 
Art thou waiting for thy book ] — I am waiting for it. — Do you 
expect your father this evening] — I do expect him.— At what 
o'clock has he gone to the theatre 1 — He has gone thither at seven 
o'clock — At what o'clock does he return from there ] — He returns 
from there at eleven o'clock. — Has your bailiff returned from the 
market ] — He has not yet returned from it. — At what o'clock has 
your brother returned from the country] — He has returned from 
thence at ten o'clock in the evening. 

109. 

At what o'clock hast thou come back from thy friend 1 — I have 
come back from him at eleven o'clock in the morning. — Hast thou 
remained long with him ] — I have remained with him about an 
hour. — How long do you intend to remain at the ball ] — I intend 
to remain there a few minutes. — How long has the Englishman 
remained with you ] — He has remained with me for two hours- 
Do you intend to remain long in the country ] — I intend to remain 
there during the summer. — How long have your brothers remained 
if] town (in ocr <Stat>t) ] — They have remained there during the 
winter. — How much do I owe you ] — You do not owe me much.— 
How much do you owe your tailor ] — I only owe him fifty crowns, 
—How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ] — I owe him already 
seventy crowns. — Do I owe y i anything ? — You owe me nothing. 
— How much does the Frenchman owe you ] — He owes me more 
than you. — Do the English owe you as much as the Spaniards ] — 
Not quite so much. — Do I owe you as much as my brother ] — You 
owe me more than he. — Do our friends owe you as much as we ]— 
You owe me less than they. — Why do you give money to the mer- 
chant] — I give him some, because he has sold me handkerchiefs. 
— -Why do you not • mnk ] — I do not drink, because I am not 
thirsty. — Why do yoij pick ip this ribbon 1 — I pick it up, because 



126 

I want it. — Why do you lend money to this mail — I iend htm 
some, because he wants some. — Why does your brother .study ]— 
He studies, because be wishes to learn German (Icrtien tvill). — Art 
thou thirsty 1 — I am not thirsty, because I have drunk. — Has your 
cousin drunk already I — Not yet, he is not yet thirsty. — Do^s the 
servant show you the room which he sweeps ] — He does not show 
me that which he sweeps now, but that which he u as swept yester- 
day. — Do you breakfast before you go out] — I go out before I 
breakfast. — What does your shoemaker do before he sweeps his 
room ? — He mends my boots and my shoes before he sweeps it. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FORTY.EXGHTH LESSON.- <&zk,t nub tu^st* 
Zcttioxx. 

To live, to dwell, to reside, to SOB o I) n cm 
abide, to lodge. 

Where do you live ? 5£o roehnen (Sic? 

I live in William-street, number Set) rcebnc in fcer SKUfbcunSfhrape, 

twenty-five. Summer flinf un$ a $wan$tcj. 

W T here has your brother lived? QBc bat ihr ^rucct a/ruobnt ] 

He has lived in Frederic-street, C£*r bat in tcr JrtcfcncbsfhaVc, SHunuf 

number one hundred and fifty. mcr f}nnt>crr unfc fttnfttg qcrcebnt. 

Dost thou live at thy cousin's ££el)nft Du bet Dctncm better ? 

house 1 

I do not live at his, but at my 2>cf) roebnc rticht bet tfym, fenbern bet 

father's house. metnem &>atcr. 

Does your friend still live where &Bobnt Jbr £rcunb nod) (fca), wb 

I have lived ] id) gcroebnt babe 1 

He lives no longer where you ($t tuebnt r'd)t mcfjr (t*a), tt)C @ie 

have lived ; he lives at present c\croobnt I iben ; et tt>ct)nt icgt auf 

in the great square. bem a,rc£t i $)la§c. 

The street. JDic (Strafe (a noun of the femi- 

nine gender). 

The number. *Dk Summer (a noun of the femi- 

nine gender). 

To brush. 23 ti t ft c m 

Have you brushed my coat 1 £>abcn Sic metnen 9?ecf gcMtftct 1 
I have brushed it. 3d) f)aH i\)\\ a/burftct. 

How long ? 85* t e I a n ge ? 

Till, until. 23 i S. 

• In German, the conjunction una, is used to add a number less than a 
aundred. 



127 

1 ill twelve o'clock. 5 D 

Till to-morrow. 3$t$ mevgcn. 

Till the day after to-morrow. fb'vo fiber utergctu 

Till Sunday. *&i$ ^nntog. 

Till Monday. 93is Sgrotajy. 

Till this evening. JBt* beute Hbcnb. 

Till evening-. SfMs auf Ha 2Cberifo 

Until morning. S3i^ an t'en tfj^raeru 

Until the next day. SSt* jimi nntvrtt Sag, 

Until this day. 23t$ auf feiefen &a$. 

Until this moment. $*U auf fcufcti 2Uiqcnbft<l 

Till now — hitherto. g$is |egt — bt*l)er. 

To this place, hither, thus far, as $8is i)terf)et (an adverb of place). 

far as here. 
To that place, thither, so far, as 23tS fc>arjtn (an adverb of place). 

far as tiiere. 

Obs. The days of the week are all of the mascu- 
line gender, except tie 5KittH>cd)C, Wednesday, which 
borne authors use as feminine. 

Tuesday, £>knjtaa, ; 

Wednesday, SRtttroecb ; 

Thursday, ^ennevtfacj; 

Friday, -Jretrao, ; 

Saturday, (Samftao, (©cnnabcntO. 

Then. 2)ann — (aUbann). 

Till I return (till my return). SfU* id) mrucffemme. 
Till my brother returns (till my SHs mem &3rut>et $urutffemmt» 

brother's return). 
Till four o'clock in the morning. 9?t$ trier Ithr SftotqenS. 
Till midnight (till twelve o'clock S3te Wtttcrnacht (a noun of ths 

at night), feminine gender). 

How long did you remain with SBtc (angc ftnD ©te 6ci mcinem 

my father 1 ^atcr gebttc-ben? 

I remained with him till eleven 3d) bin bis elf lli)t 2tbent>$ bet ifyrn 

o'clock at ni^-ht. Cjcbliebcn. 

One, the people j they or any one 9J?a n (indefinite pronoun always 

singular). 

Have they brought my shoes 1 £ot man nietne (Scbunc qebracbt? 

They have not brought them yet, %)la\\ l)ax fie necb ntdt $ebrad)k 

What have they said ] 2£a$ not man cjetaqt ? 

They have said nothing. 9}tan hat ntcbts qejaqt. 

What have they done 1 §g£as hat man gethan ? 

They have done nothing. 9)fatt tjat md)t& gctl;am 



128 

To he willing (to wish), — been 2B U e n *, — gcrooUt 

willing {wished) . 

Has he been willing to go for £at ct ten 2Cr$t hckr\ njcltcn ? (not 

the physician 1 geivellt. See OZ>s. Less. XLIV.) 

He has not been willing to go Qx t)at il)n ntd)t t)olcn wellcn. 

for him. 

Has he wished to go out this $at cr fctefen Bergen au^gefyen 

morning ? roolkn ? 

He has not wished to go out. (sr hat ntcbt au^geben tvellcju 

Have they been willing to do it] £cit man cs tbun rucden ? 

They have not been willing to sfilan tjat t$ ntcl)t ^un roclten. 

do it. 

They have not been willing to 9J(cm rjat md)t$ tfjun roellcn* 

do any thing. 



To be able (can), — been able Si cnncn* — gcfennt. 
(could). 

Have they been able to find the $ot man tic ditcher jtnfccn fonnen ? 

books ] (not gefcrint. See Less. XLIV.) 

The) have not been able to find $Jlan l;ot fte nut)t fin ten f(5nnen. 

thejn. 
Has tne tailor been willing to £at tcr ^ennetter meincn SKcd au& 

men" my coat! befjern roolkn ? 

He has not been willing to mend (St fyat t(?n ntct)t auSbcffcrn rootlcn. 

it. 

Something (or anything) new. (StroaS 9? c u c $. 

What do they say new l ££a$ fagt man 9?eue$ ? 

They say nothing new. S3icm fagt ntd)t8 SfteucS. 

iVew;. 9Z e u. 

My new coat. 9)?etn ncucS .ftfetb. 

My new friend. SDiein nou't greunt. 

His new clothes. ©etne neuen JUcttcr. 

EXERCISES. 110. 

Where do you live? — I live in the large (in tcr cjrePcrv) street. — 
Where does your father live 1 — He lives at his friend's house.— 
Where do your brothe 's live ] — They live in the large street, number 
a hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy cousin's ] — 1 do live at 
his house. — Do you still live where you did live (genxfynt fyaben) 1— 
I live there still. — Does your friend still live where he did live 1 — 
He no longer lives where he did live. — Where does he live at present ? 
— He lives in William-street, number a hundred and fifteen.— 
Where is your brother? — He is in the garden. — Where is your 
cousin gone to ] — He is gone into the garden. — Did you go to the 
lay yesterday ] — 1 did go thither. — Have you seen my friend 1 — 
have seen him. — Wlien did you see him ] — l~saw (babe — gefehen) 
him this morning. — Where has he gone to l — I do not know CObs 



f 



129 

Lesson XLIIL). — Has the servant brushed my clothes ? — He has 
brushed them. — Has he swept my room 1 — He has swept it — How 
long did he remain here] — Till noon. — How long have you been 
writing] — I have been writing until midnight. — How long did I 
work] — You woiked until four o'clock in the morning. — How long 
did my brother remain with you '?— He remained with me until 
evening.^ — How long hast thou been working ] — 1 have been w T orking 
till now. — Hast thou still long to write] — I have to write till the 
day after to-morrow r . — Has the physician still long to work ] — He 
has to w T ork till to-morrow. — Mustl remain long here] — You must 
remain here till Sunday. — Must my brother remain long with you ? 
—Fie must remain with us till Monday .--How longi*ust! work]— 
You must work till the day after to-morrow. — Have you stili long 
to speak ] — I have still an hour to speak. — Did you speak long ] — 
I spoke (baK' — gcfprccbcn) till the next day. — Have ycu remained 
long in my room ? — I have remained in it till this moment. — Have 
you still long to live in this house] — I have still long to live in it 
(fcartu). — How long have you still to live in it]— Till Sunday. 

111. 

Does your friend still live with you 1 — He lives with me no longer. 
— How long has he lived with you ]— He has lived with me only a 
year. — How long did you remain at the ball ] — I remained there till 
midnight. — How long have you remained in the carriage ? — I have 
remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden till now ] 
— -1 have remained there (fcartn) till now. — Has the captain come 
as far as heret — He has come as far as here. — How far has the 
merchant come? — He has come as far as the end of the small road. 
— Has the Turk come as far as the end of the forest ? — He has come 
as far as there. — What do you do in the morning? — I read. — And 
what do you do then ] — I breakfast and work. — Do you breakfast 
before you read ] — No, Sir, 1 read before I breakfast. — Dost thou 
play instead of working ( Lesson XXXVI.) ] — I work instead of 
playing. — Does thy brother go to the play instead of goinrrinto the . 
garden ] — He doet not go to the play.— What do you do in the 
evening] — I work. — What hast thou done this evening] — I have 
brushed your clothes and have gone to the theatre. — Didst thou 
remain long at the theatre ] — I remained there but a few minutes. — 
Are you willing to wait here ] — How long must I wait ]— You must 
wait till my father returns. — Has anybody come ] — Somebody has 
come. — What have they (man) wanted (geruoUt) 1 — They (gjfrm) have 
wanted to speak to you.— Have they not beer* willing to wait ? — 
They have not been willing to wait. — What do you say to that 
man ] — I tell him to wait. — Have you waited for me long] — I have 
waited for you an hour.- — Have you been able to read my letter? — 
I have been able to read it. — Have you understood it ] — I have 
understood it. — Have you shown it to any one] — I have shown it 
to no one. — Have they brought my clothes ? — They have not brought 
them yet. — Have they swept my room and brushed my clothes ]— - 
6* 



130 

They have done both (Ufytf). — What have they said ? — Theyhavo 
said nothing. — What have they done] — They have done nothing.— 
Has your little brother been spelling] — He has not been willing 
to spell. — Has the merchant's boy been willing to work ] — He has 
not been willing. — What has he been willing to do ] — He has not 
been willing tc do anything. 

112. 

Has the shoemaker been able to mend. my boots] — He has not 
been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend them 1 
—Because he has had no time — Have they (man) been able to find 
my gold buttons 1 — They have not been able to find them. — Why 
has the tailor not mended my coat ?— Because he has no good 
thread. — Why have you beaten the dog ? —Because it has bitten me. 
— Why do you not drink ? — Because 1 am not thirsty. — What have 
they wished to say ] — They have not wished to say anything. — 
What do they (map) say new in the market? — They say nothing 
new there. — Have they (man) wished to kill a man? — They have 
not wished to ki 1 any one. — Have they said any thing new ?— 
T^ey have said nothing new. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.) 



FORTY-NINTH LESSON.— Jfam tttlir merest* 

To steal — stolen. © t c fi t e n * — g c ft c fj U tt# 

Thou stealest, he steals. 3>u jrh'Hft, — cr fttcMt. 

To steal something from some f 3cmcml>cm etivas ftcblcn*. 

one. 

Have they stolen your hat from f £at man Sfyncn Sfyrcn $ttt gt 

you ] frcblm ? 

They have stolen it from me. f 93*an not tf)tt mtr qcfteMcn. 

Has the man stolen the book f £at £)tt tec 9E)tann t>a£ 23udj 

from thee ? geftehlen 1 

He has stolen it from me. f ^" r b at c? ni * r flcfteMctt. 

What have they stolen from you] f 2Ba$ I)at man SftntH gcfteWen? 

AIL 2(1 ( is declined in the following 

manner. 

( N. G. D. A. 

AIL } Masc. atter — e3 — em — em 

( NeuL aUe$ — e3 — em — e£* 

( Plural for all genders. 

All (plural) 1 N. G. D. A. 

( Sltte — er — en— e. 



135 

jettfett The latter are always followed by the g o nitiv$, 
whilst the others never govern a case Ex. fcie^fett bei 
fluffed* on this side of the river ; jenfett t>e3 23ergeg, on 
the other side of the mountain. 

To go up the mountain. *Den 5uTq Mnmif gcbcn *. 

Where is your hrother gone to? 2A*e tfl Jhr jsRrutet ftitigigangctl? 
He is gone up the mountain. (Sr t)lt ten 55 erg luncmf gegangen. 

To give back again (to restore)* 2£ t c b e r 3 c b e n *. 

Thou givest back again. j£)u ojOft i&ivfcer. 

He gives back again. Qr a.tbt runtvr. 

Given back again. ^tetvra/qeben. 

Does he restore you your book 1 ©ibt er Jhnen £sbr ^ud) tDtcfccr ? 

He does restore it to me. (Et o,tbt cs rnir rmcter* 

Has he given you your stick jpaxa 3hncn 3bren £tecf nnebcr$e* 

back again 1 Cpbtn 1 

He has given it me back again. (5r bat tfyn mir nnefcera/Qcbctt. 

To begin, to commence. 71 n f a n a, c n *, begtnnen*. 

Begun, commenced. tfncu'fartpien, bcaennen. 

Have you already commenced $abcn &k Sfyren iBrtcf fdr)Ctt artges 

your letter] fanqen ? 

Not yet. 9?ecb n^dit. 

I have not yet commenced it. 3d) babe tfyn nod) ntcbt angefan* 

gen. 
Have you received a present] £obcn fete etn ©cfdbcnf befem* 

men ? 
I have received several. ?cb babe r>erfcbiebene befemmen. 

From whom have you received 23 en room IjaOcn @te ©efcfyenfe befrms 

presents 1 men ? 

Whence ? Where from J S95 b e r ? 

Ow£ o/. 2( u £ (governs the dative). 

Where do you come from ? ££c femmen <E>tc f^r ? 

Obs. C. The adverb toofier may be separated into two 
parts (as roofntt, Lesson XXXVII. ), the first of which is 
put at the beginning, and the second at the end of the 
phrase. If the phrase ends with a participle past, or an 
infinitive, her is placed before it ; but it precedes the 
particle JU of the infinitive. 

I come from (out of) the garden. 3cb femme au$ bem (SSarten. 

Where has he come from 1 SBehet ift er gefemmen ? 

He has come from the theatre, @t ift aue t>em Sweater gefemmen* 






136 

To be worth. 2B c 1 1 rj f c t n *♦ 

How much may that horse oe 2£tcme( fann bicfcS spfcrb ttJCt ^l 

worth ] fetn ] 

It may be worth a hundred (S* taxm l)unt>ert Sf)a(ct wcrtf) fcttu 

crowns. 
This is worth more than that. iBtcfcS tft mcftr nxrtb a(£ j^ncS. 
The one is not worth so much as £ae ctne tit ntcbt fo mcl rpettf) o(^ 

the other. t^a* an Dae. 

How much is that worth! jSttoid tft t>a$ nxrtb? 

That is not worth much. &a$ tft ntcbt rid nxrtf). 

That is not worth any tiling. £)as tft mcbts nxrtb. 

To fo toter. 23 c f f c r f c i n * (mcljr nxrtb 

fan *)• 

A.ml not as good as my brother? 2*tn id) md)t fc gut rote mem S3ru^ 

frer? 

You are better than he. $ f u ft btf[ ? * U £ M 

£ 8u* tint- mcbr nxrtb ctfg er. 

I am not as good as you. 3d) btn ntd)t fo $ut rote 6te. 

exercises. 115. 

Do you c 11 me ? — I do call you. — Where are you ? — I am on (cmf 
with the dative) the mountain ; are you coming up ! — I am not 
coming up. — Where are ycu ? — I am at the foot (am jRutfc) of the 
mountain ; wiil you come down ?■ — I cannot come down. — Why 
can you not come down 1 — Because I have sore feet. — Where does 
your cousin live ) — He lives on this side of the river. — Where is 
the mountain 1 — It is on that side of the river. — Where stands the 
house of our friend ? — It stands on that side of the mountain. — Is 
the garden of your friend on this or that side of the wood l — It is on 
that sidf (jcniottf). — Is our storehouse not on that side of the road 1 
—It is on this side (Hcept$&). — Where have you been this morning? 
—I have been on (Lesson XXX.) the great mountain. — How many 
times have you gone up the mountain ] — 1 have gone up (tunnuf 
gfgangen) three times. — Is our father below or above 1 — He is above. 
—Have the neighbour's boys given you your books back again 1 
—They have given them to me back again. — When did they give 
them back again to you ] — They gave (hatxn — rutt^cr^eqebon) them 
back again to me yesterday. — To whom have you given yon- stick * 
— I have given it to the nobleman. — To whom have the nobleman 
given their gloves 1 — They have given them to Englishmen. — To 
Which Englishmen have they given them ] — To those (Lesson 
XIV.) whom you have seen this morning at my house. — To which 
people do you give money 1 — 1 give some to those to whom (Lesson 
Al V) you give some. — Do you give any one money 1 — I give some 
to those who want any. — To which children does your father give 
cakes ] — He gives some to those who are good. 



!3? 



116. 



Have you received presents ] — I have received SDme. — Whit 
presents have you received 1 — I have received fine presents. — Has 
your little brother received a present ] — He has received several. — 
From whom has he received any ! — He has received some from my 
father and from yours. — Do you come out of the garden ] — I do not 
come out of the garden, but out of the house. — Where are you going 
to ? — 1 am going into the garden.— Whence comes the Irishman ? 
— He comes from the garden. — Does he come from the same garden 
from which (cms nxlcbnii) you come] — He does not come from the 
same. — From which garden does he come ? — He comes from that 
of our old friend.— Whence comes your boy 1 — He comes from the 
play. — How much is that carriage worth] — It is worth five hundred 
crowns. — Is this book worth as much as that ] — It is worth more. 
— How much is my horse worth 1 — It is worth as much as that of 
your friend.-j— Are your horses worth as much as those of the French ? 
— They are not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth ? 
— It is worth nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ] — He is 
better than yours. — Are you as good as your brother] — He is better 
than I. — Art thou as good as thy cousin ? — I am as good as he. — 
Are we as good as our neighbours ! — We are better than they. — 
Is your umbrella as good as mine ] — It is not worth so much.— 
Why is it not worth so much as mine? — Because it is not so fine 
as yours. — Do you wish to sell your horse ] — 1 do wish to sell it.— - 
How much is it worth 1 — It is worth two.hundred florins.— Do you 
wish to buy it] — I have bought one already. — Does your father 
intend to buy a horse ] — He does intend to buy one, but not yours. 
rSee end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-FIRST LESSON.— ©in nnb ffmfygste Cation. 

That (conjunction). £) a 9 (See Rule of Syntax, Les- 
son XLVII.). 

What do you say ? ££a$ facjen (Sic 1 

I say that you have my book. 2>cb f a q C/ frn§ (gie metn SBucb oakn. 

I tell you that I have it not. Scb fage Sfjnen, tap icl> e$ nid)l 

rmOe. 
Have you not had it ] £aben @>te e$ nicftt cjcfjabt ? 

I have had it, but I have it no 3cb babe c$ cjefyabt, aHt id) r)abe ci 
longer. ntd)t mcfyr. 

No more. 0H d) t m c r) r. 

Where have you placed it 1 ££o bokn <Ste es ntnc^ctcqt ? 

I have placed it on the table. Scb babe e$ auf ben Stfdj QdtyU 

Is it (does it lie) on the table * Ctcgt C6 auf com Stfcrje? 

it is (lies) on it. (£$ ttcgt fcarauf. 



138 



Some, a little. 



(S t ro a $ (e t n rc> c n t g). 



Can you give me some water] jlcnnen <Sie mtr ctiv>a5 $£aflet gi« 

ben ? 



I can give you some. 

Must. 

Necessary (adjective). 
To be necessary. 



Scb farm 3&nen roe(d)e$ cjebeu. 

93? u f f e n, past part. 9 c m u p t . 

£tt r b t a,. 

9i ct b tcj fctn*. 

Whip man ouf ben Stfarft aehen ? 
o)t es notbto, cuif ben $£arr:t $u ge« 
hen ? 



C >J32nn mtift bctMn p,ef)en. 



Is it necessary to go to the 
market ? 

It is necessary to go thither. 

What mus. one do in order to >l&ci* mutf man trjuti, urn fcCUtfd) git 

iearn German ] (ernen ] 

One must study much. $%m null) md fhiMren. 

"What must he do ? SLUn* nuw er thun ? 

He must go for a book. (St nu\u ctn Jt^ucb Men. 

What „ 1U st Idol «B« m u|»i* «(,«»! 

Sto/Z, «"fen*. <& 1 1 ( (. 

To fe sitting, been sitting. <S t p n * (takes baben for ita 

auxiliary), $efe .f j;Ctu 

You must sit still. (Sic miijfen ftill jigcri. ' , 

Have you been obliged to work $abin Ste me( arbntch-ftuiffen (Obs. 

much to learn German ? Lesson KLIV.), iim t)cut[d) jU 

' fe-rncn ] 
I have been obliged to work 3d) f)cibe mgI atbeitcn muffen* 

much. 

The competency, the subsistence. 2) a $ It u $ r! m m C it. 

the livelihood. • 
To ^ai>e wherewithal to live. 



Has he wherewithal to live 1 

He has. 

What must I buy 1 

Some beef. 

The ox (neat). 
You must buy some bee£ 

What do you wish 1 
What do you want 1 

I want some money. 

Do you want some money ? 



@cin Ku^ommen fyafcett* 

£at cr.fetn 2Cu$tommm ? 

(Et bat e$. 

S3Sa$ htu9 id) faufen T 

Pnt>fktf&. 

Rati s 7hno. 

(Su mttijen SRtnbftetfd) faufen 



£Sa$ molten ©tc ? 
C 5Ba$ tranche n Sie ? 
£ ^a? baben £ie ncrbig? 

53d) babe Q5elt> nottna,. 
3d) braucbe (Skfr. 
^raucben Sft* ^elb ? 
Do "you wish to have some jffioUcn <Ste ®ett> fyaben 7 
money % 



, 



139 



I do want 9)me. 

Do you want much ? 

I do want much. 

How much must you have ] 

How uracil do you want! 

\ only want a grosh. 

Js that all you want '? 

That is till I want. 

More. 

Do you not want more ] 
I do not want mure. 
What does he want ] 
He wants a 2oat. 
Have you what you want? 
I have what I want. 
He hai what he wants. 
They have what they want. 



Sen brcuicbc wefcbcS. 
^raucben £k t^fivn tuel? 
Scb m-auebe TcfjVn met. 
fffiuaitf mit^n Sic hoben ? 
Sftwtftci braucben <&u ] 
2kb brattebe uur ctnon ©rofeben. 
3 ft $a$ alU**, was ©w broud)cn ! 
<Das ill fcUes, tva* ict) broucfyc. 

Stt c b r. 

5*roncbcn ©if nicbt mebt ? 
gcb braucbt ntcbt utc()r. 
0a% braucbt tt ? 
(5*r braucbt cin Jtfetk * 
£abcn Sic, was Sic braucben ? 
Scb babe, ruaf tcb brauebe 
(£r bat, r\)Q6 cr braucbt. 
g?ie baben, was fie braucben. 



To 6e oMig-ed (*AaZ/, ought). BcUcn, past. part, a,efoUk 

What am I to do 1 SEpoS fell tcb tbun ? 

You must work. &\e fallen orbcttcn. 

Am 1 to go thither] Soil tcb btua/ben ? 

You may go thither. <Ste fonncn bino,cf)cn. 

EXERCISES. 117. 

Were (^tnb — qc-roefen) you yesterday at the physician's 1 — I was 
at his house (bet tbtn). — What does he say ] — He says that he can- 
not come. — Why does he not send his son ? — His son does not gc 
out (c\cbt ntcbt ou6, Lesson XXXIV. Obs. C). — Why does he not 
go out (oehr cr ntcbt au*) ] — Because he is ill. — Hast thou had my 
purse ] — I tell you that I have not had it. — Hast thou seen it] — I 
have seen it. — Where is it] — It lies upon the chair. — Have you 
had my knife]- I tell you that I have had it. — Where have you 
placed it ] — I have placed it upon the table. — Will you look for it ]— 
I have already looked for it. — Have you found it ] — I have not found 
it. — Have you sought (for) my gloves ] — I have sought (for) them, 
but I have not found them. — Has your servant my hat] — He has 
had it, but he has it no longer. — Has he brushed it? — He has 
brushed it. — Are my books upon your table] — They are (lie) upon 
it. — Have you any wine] — I have but little, but I will give you 
what I have. — Will you give me some water] — I will give you 
some. — Have you much wine] — 1 have much. — Will you give me 
some] — I will give you some. — How much do I owe you ] — You 
owe me nothing — You are too kind (outto,). — Must I go for some 
wine ] — You must go for some. — Shall I go to the ball ] — You 
must go thither. — When must I go thither] — You must go thither 
this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter ] — You must go for tim. 



140 

—Is it necessary to go to the market 1 — It is necessary to go 
thither. — What must one do in order to learn Russian ? — One must 
study much.— Must one study much to learn German ? — One must 
study much. — What shall I do? — You must buy a good book. — 
What is he to do ? — He must sit still. — What are we to do ? — You 
must work. — Must you work much, in order to learn the Arabic? — 
I must work much to learn it. — Does your brother not work ? — He 
does not want to work. — Has he wherewithal to live ? — He has. — 
Why m'jst 1 go to the market ? — You must go thither to buy some 
beef. — Why must I work ? — You must work, in order to get (tjabcn) 
a competency. 

118. 

What do you want, Sir ? — I want some cloth. — How much is 
that, hat worth ? — It is worth three crowns. — Do you want any 
stockings 1 — I want some. — How much are those stockings worth ? 
—They are worth twelve kreuzers. — Is that all you want? — That 
is all. — Do you not want shoes 7 — I do not want any. — Dost thou 
want much money ! — I want much. — How much must thou have? 
— I must have six crowns. — How much does your brother want? 
— He wants but six groshes. — Does he not want more ? — He does 
not want more. — Does your cousin want more ? — He does not want 
so much as I. — What do you want? — I want money and boots. — 
Have you now what you want? — I have what I want. — Has 
your brother what he wants ? — He has what he wants. 



FIFTY.SECOND LESSON— ZmA nxib ffin%ste 
Cation. 

To pay—*paid. 23 e } a f) ( c n — be tahtt. (See 

Obs. A. Lesson XLV.) 

To pay a man for a horse. . @tnem Marine cm *pfvrb bqafjlcm 
To pay the tailor for the coat. <Dem (SchnriDcr K'n fficcf bi»$ah(i*n. 
Do you pay the shoemaker for 23e$ciblen &H torn (Sct)ur)inad)cr. t>« 

the shoes? ©dm be? 

I pay him for them. ;3cb tunable fte ibm. 

Does he pay you for the knives? S3c$aMt cr 3bnen fur tie SCKcjjct? . 
He pays me for them. @r bi'gar)(t fie nur. 

Obs. A. These examples show that the verb 6e$af)* 
lett governs the dative of the person, and the accusa- 
tive of the thing. It may also be used with the pre- 
position fur, /or, as in English. Ex. I pay him for 
fhe boots, id) 6egat)te tbm fiir bie ©ttefeL But taken 
figuratively, in the signification of &eftrafeu, to punish f 



HI 

ii rs sometimes construed with the accusative of the 
person, as in the following expressions: tvavt% id) VDitt 
jDicb frejablert, wait, I shah pay (punish) you for it ; ben 
fyabe id) (d)6n bqatyt, I have paid (punished) this man 
well. 

"Have you paid the shoemaker £obcn Sic tern Sdrnftmadjct: t>ti 

for the boots ? Sttcfel Iqafitt ? 

I have paid him for them. 3cb babe fie ibm bc$ofjlr. 

I pay what I owe. 3d) liable, xo®$ ich jchUtfcj tun. 

Have you paid for your hook? $abm ®w 3m; ^ud) be$ai)lt? 

I have paid for it. 3$ babe c$ bejabfr. 

I have not yet paid for it. 3d) fyobc Cfi ncct) ntd)t be$af)(t. 

To demand-demanded. }© ectfln 9fn _ 8f r tan 9 w 

To asa: — asked. J 

To beg of— begged of. 2(nfprccbcn* — an a,e fpr ocfyen, 

To pray-prayed. | ffl . % & 

i o request — requested. j D 

To ask any one for money. 3?en Semanbcm ©ctb Dcrfnrtgcn, 

To beg money of some one. Scmonfren urn ©ell) anfprecben*. 
To request money of any one. Scmanben urn ®elt> bitten*. 

What do you ask me for] jfi*os wrlongcn Ste rcn mtr? 

I ask you for nothing. ^cb ttcrloncje nicbt* pen 3bncn. 

I beg some money of you. 3d) fprccbc-Stc urn (5*e(t> on. 
He has begged some money of ©t bat mid) urn ®clt> ana/fprcdjetu 
me. 

For. It m (a preposition governing the 

accusative). 

Do you heg some money of him 1 Sprecben Sic ibn urn ©c(o on ? 
I beg some of him. 3d) erlutte mtr tuetche^ pen tbm. 

To solicit any one to do a thing, ©twos pen 3cmont)cm crbitten*. 

For it. JD o t u tn. 

To ask him for it. $ || n * a ™ m "$$&*' 

(. (S$ pen ir)m pcrtancjen. 

To ask him for them. $ W*}™*? #*^** 

£ Ste pen tbm pcrloncjcn. 

I ask you for it. f 2* *f r f e @i « batU ^! 0IU 

J » C 3cb Perlange eg pen Sbnen. 

Do you ask me for anything . &>er(anqen Ste etroa£ pen mtr! 

I ask you for the t at. ?cb bttrc Ste urn ten |mt. 

Do you ask me for the hat 1 Smitten Sic mtcb um fcen &ut ? 

I ask you for it. 3d) bltte Sic tarum. 

To s;?ea& 0/ some one. 93 e n 3cm ante tn f p r c d) e n *« 

Does one speak of that man 1 'Spricbt man sen fctefem Sfllannt 1 
*~>ne speaks of hina, SRan fprtd;t son t^au 



142 



One does not speak of him. 
Do they speak of my book! 
They speak much of it. 
What do you say to it? 
1 say he is right. 



9)?an fprtcbt ntcbt pen ifim. 
(gprtcbt man r>en mctnem S3ud)« ? 
9)ian fprtcbt oicl bcmon. 
££a$ fa^cn ©ie baju (btcqu) ? 
3d) foge; Hog a 9ttfd)t t?at. 



Content, satisfied. 
New. 



3 u f r i c b c n. 

To be content with any one. SDitt 3?manbem $ufricben fctn** 
Are you content with this man 1 <Stnb @te mit btcfcm 9)?cmne $uftw* 

ben? 
I am content with him. 3d) bin mit tfym auftiebem 

Obs. B. Of \) t e r, Aere, and b a, 2/iere, compound 
adverbs are formed by means of certain prepositions 
governing the dative or accusative. In these adverbs 
fyter and ba stand instead of the three genders singular 
and plural, dative and accusative of the demonstra- 
tive pronoun : btefer, btefe, btefe£ (ber, bte, ba$), which is 
never used with a preposition. 

Are you content with your new <Stnb <&h mit 3>f)rem ncucn RUxtt 

coat 1 guftteben ? 

I am contented with it. 3d) bin bamtt $ufrtcben. 

I am discontented with it. 3d) bin un$ufriefccn bamtt. 

Discontented. Un^ufrtcbcn. 

Of what do they speak 1 2£open fprtcbt man ? 

They speak of peace, of war, of 93?an fprtcbt per. bem gfrteben, POlt 

your book. bem Jlrtecje, pen 3brem.!^ucl)e, 

Do they speak of peace ? fprtcbt man rcn bem grtefcen ? 

They do speak of it. Sftan fpttcbt bapon. 

Obs. C. The adverb tt>0, where, like fyev and ba 
(See Obs. above), forms compound adverbs with certain 
prepositions governing the dative or accusative. In 
these tt)0 takes the place of the dative and accusative 
of the pronoun interrogative toelcfyer, welcfye, tt>eld)eg, or 
toa$. 



With what are you content? 
I am content with my book. 

With whom are you satisfied 1 
I am satisfied \q ith my master. 

To study — studied. 



SBemtt ftnb ©ie gufrtcben ? 

3d) tnn mit metnem &htd)e gufrie* 

ben. 
SRtt mem ftnb <§te jufrieben? 
3cb bin mit metnem Cetjrer- $uftic» 

ben. 

©tubtr en — ftubttt. (S*» 
Obs* A* Lesson XLV ) 



143 

To correct-corrected. | € ^^tr en^c cr r tgtti 

To question, — interrogate, graven (governs the ace). 

The uncle, tcr Dbetm (is not softened in tka 

plural) ; 
the gentleman, the lord, ter Jpetr ; 

the master, the tutor, the pre- ) ^ cr o c [ )rcr ♦ 
ceptor, the professor, J f 

the scholar, ter ^cbitfer ; 

the. pupil, tet 3oojtnc\; 

the fee, wages, salary, tec I'ehn (has no plur.) ; 

the lesson, tic Section (a feminine noun, 

taking en in the plur.) ; 
the exercise, tie 2(ufa,abe (a feminine noun, 

taking n in the plur.) ; 
To receive a present from^some S3 en Senidntem em ©ejetyenr! befom* 
one. men*. 

exercises. 119. 

Have we w r hat we want ] — We have not what we want. — What 

do we want 1 — We want a fine house, a large garden, a beautiful 

carriage, pretty horses, several servants, and much money. — Is 

that all we want '?— That is all we want. — What must I do ] — You 

must write a letter. — To whom (Lesson XXX.) must I write ] — 

You must write to your friend. — Shall I go to the market ] — You 

may go there. — Will you tell your father that I am waiting for him 

here 1 — 1 will tell him so (Obs. Lesson XLIII.).— What will you 

tell your father ! — I will tell him that you are waiting for him here. 

—What wilt thou say to my servant % — I will say to him that you 

have finished your letter. — Have you paid (for) your table 1 — I have 

paid (for) it. — Has your uncle paid for the book ] — He has paid 

for it. — Have I paid the tailor for the clothes ] — You have paid 

him for them. — Hast thou paid the merchant for the horse 1 — I have 

not yet paid him for it. — Have we paid for our gloves 1 — We have 

paid for them. — Has your cousin already paid for his boots 1 — He 

has not yet paid for them. — Does my brother pay you what he 

owes you 1 — He does pay it me; — Do you pay what you owe ] — I 

do pay what I owe. — Have you paid (with the dative) the baker ? 

—I have paid him. — Has your uncle paid the butcher for the meat 1 

—He has paid him for it — Have you paid your servant his wages ? 

—1 have paid them to him. — Has your master paid you your wages 1 

— He has paid them to me. — When did he pay them to you ] — He 

paid (bat — Inhabit) them to me the day before yesterday. — What do 

you ask this man for 1 — I ask him for my book. — What does this 

boy beg of me ? — He begs of you some money. — Do you ask me 

for anything 1 — I ask you for a crown. — Do you ask me for the 

i bread"? — I ask you for it. — Do the poor beg money of you 1 — They 

beg some of me. — Which man do you ask for money 1 — I ask hitn 

for some whom you ask far s©m«. — Whioh merchants do you ask 



144 

for gloves ] — I ask those who live in William-Street (Lesson 
XL VIII.) for some. — Which joiner do you ask for chairs 1 — I ask 
that one, whom you know, for some. — What do you ask the baker 
for ] — Iask him for some bread. — Do you ask the butchers for some 
m>at ] — I do ask them for some. — Dost thou ask me for the stick ? 
— I do ask thee for it. — Does he ask thee for the book] — He does 
ask me for it. — What have you asked the Englishman for ] — I have 
asked him for my leather trunk. — Has he given it to you ] — He has 
given it to me. 

120. 

Whom have you asked for some sugar ? — I have asked the mer- 
chant for some. — Of whom have the poor begged some money ]— 
They have begged some of the noblemen. — Of which noblemen 
have they begged some 1 — They have begged some of those whom 
you know. — Whom do you pay for the meat ] — 1 pay the butchers 
for it. — Whom does your brother pay for his boots ] — He pays the 
shoemakers for them. — Whom have we paid for the bread ? — We 
have paid our bakers for it. — Of whom have they (man) spoken ?— • 
They have spoken of your friend. — Have they not spoken of the 
physicians ! — They have not spoken of them. — Do they not speak 
of the man of whom (ren nxtdH'ni) we have spoken? — They do speak 
of him. — Have they spoken of the noblemen 1 — They have spoken 
of them. — Have they spoken of those of whom we speak 1 — They 
have not spoken of those of whom we speak, but they have spoken 
of others. — Have they spoken of our children or of those of our 
neighbours 1 — They have neither spoken of ours nor of those of 
our neighbours. — Which children have been spoken of 1 — Those 
of our preceptor have been spoken of. — Do they speak of my book 1 
— They do speak of it. — Of what do you speak ] — We speak of 
war. — Do you not speak of peace 1 — We do not speak of it. — Art* 
you content with your pupils ] — I am content with them. — How 
does my brother study 1 — He studies well. — How many lessons 
have you studied ? — I have already studied fifty-four. — Is your 
master satisfied with his scholar] — He his satisfied with him.— 
Has your master received a present ] — He has received several. — 
From whom has he received presents ] — He has received some from 
his pupils.— Has he received any from your father ] — He has re- 
ceived some (both) from mine and from that of my friend. — Is he 
satisfied with the presents which he Has received ] — He is satisfied 
with them. — How many exercises hast thou already done ] — I have 
already done twenty-one. — Is thy master satisfied with thee 1 — He 
-ays that he is satisfied with me. — And what dost thou say ] — I say 
that I am satisfied with him. — How old art thou ] — I am not quite 
ten years old.— Dost thou already learn German? — I do already 
learn it. — Does thy brother know German ] — He does not know it. 
— Why does he not know it] — Because he has not learnt it. — Why 
has he not learnt it ] — Because he has not had time. — Is your father 
at home 1 — No, he has departed, but my brother is at home. — Where 



145 



fa your father gone to 1 — He is gone to England.— Have you some^ 
times gone thither 1 — I have never gone thither. — Do you intend 
goin^ to Germany this summer ? — I do intend going thither. — Have 
you the intention of staying there long ? — I have the intention of 
staying there during the summer. — How long does your bi other 
remain at home ? — Till twelve o'clock. — Have you had your gloves 
dyed. — I have had them dyed. — What have you had them dyed I — 
I have had them dyed brown. — Will you tell your father that I 
have been here 1 — I will tell him so. — Will you not wait until he 
lomes back again ?— I cannot wait. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-THIRD LESSON. - mxzi mxb fitatygate 
tcttion. 



To eat — eaten* 
fnou eatest — he eats. 



(Sffcn* — gegeffen. 



£m if:v — et tffet or tgt. 
£3u gitttag effen — au Stfittag gegefs 
To dine {eat dinner) — dined. < fen. 

{ <Spetfen — gefpetfet or gefpetf't. 
C llui mtctuet lifer fpeifen <s£ie ? 
At what o'clock do you dine 1 < Urn n>cld>e 3ett effen <Sie $u 50lits 

( tag ? 
I dine at five o'clock. 3d) fpctfe um fdnf (urn furtf Ufjr). 

I have dined. 3d) fjafre $u Sffltttag gegeffen. 

I have dined earlier than you. 3d) fjabc frii()cr gefpetf't al$ <Ste. 

II we you already breakfasted 1 jpaben €>te fchen gefrufyftticft ? 



The dinner. 
The breakfast. 

To eat supper {to sup). 



The supper. 

I wish to eat supper. 

I have supped late. 
After. 

After you. 
After me. 
After him. 
After my 1 rother. 
I have breakfasted after him. 
7 



£)ag sjEtttageffcn. 

3u 2Ct>cnt> effen*/ 2C&enfc* 
6 vet) effen*. 

£>a$ 2C6cnteffen, bag 2f6enWre&. 

3d) ruitt 2Cbent>brcb effen. 
{ 3d) fyabe [pat $u 2fbent> gegeffen. 
{ 3d) f)abe fpd't 2f6cnb6rob gegeffen. 

9? a cf) (a preposition governing 
the dative). 

9lad) 3*)nen. 

S?ad) nur. 

9?acb ibm. 

sftacb metnem 93rufcer. 

3cb &abc nad) ifjm gefriUfyftucft. 



146 



To hold—held. 

Thou holdest — he holds. 
Will you hold my stick ? 

To try — tried. 
To taste — tasted. 

Will you try to do that % 

I have tried to do it. 

You must try to do it better. 

Have you tasted that wine 1 

I have tasted it. 

Are you looking* for any one ? 
Whom are you looking for 1 
I am looking for a brother 
mine. 



An uncle of mine. 
A neighbour of yours. 
A relation of mine. 



fatten* — gcfjaltes*. 

£)u bffltfl — ct bait 

SBollen ©ie metnen ©tocf r)atten f 

C$pr obtren — pro tut t. 
I $$ e r f u d) c n — 1> c r f u d) t. 
C^often — gefeftet. 
C $ e t f u d) e n — t>etfucf)k 

£MIen ©tc wtfudjen, t>a£ $u than 1 

3d) babe setfucbt, e$ $u tbun. 

©te mfijfen Derfudjen, e» beffer $u mat 

d)cn. 
6aben @ie btcfen SGBctn gefeftet (t>ei*» 

fucbt) ? 
3d) babe tbn gefeftet (t)etfud)t), 

©ucben ©te Semanfcen ? 
SGBen fucben @te ? 
°f t 3d) fucbe etnen metnet 25tut>er. 

Ace. Sing. Gen. jPZ&r. 
f ©nen ntemer Dftetme. 
t ©itert S^ter ^iacfybarn* 
f @tnen memer aSerrccmbtetn 



Ois. Adjectives taken substantively are declined like 
other adjectives. Ex. ber SSer^anbte, the relation; gen. 
beg Sernxmbtett, of the relation, &c. ; ber aSebtente, the 
servant ; gen. beg S3ebtenten, of the servant, &c. ; em 33er* 
manbter, a relation ; em SSebtenter, a servant, &c. 



The parents (father and mother). 
He tries to see an uncle of his. 

A cousin of his. 
A friend of ours. 
A neighbour of theirs. 
He tries to see you. 
Does he try to see me 1 

To inquire after some one. 

After whom do you inquire 1 
i inquire after a friend of mine 

The acquaintance. 
Whom do you look fo^ 



2)tc tfeftcrn (gttern)* 

(Sr fucbt etnen feiner Dr)etme $u fe* 

ben. 
f (Stnen fetner SSettern. 
j (Sin en unfercr ftreunfce. 
j ©in en ibret 9?acbbatn. 
&r fucbt <Sie $u fcb««* 
(Sucbt er mid) $u feben ? 

Sflacr; Semanbem ftacjen. 

Stacb n>cm fragen ©te ? 

3d) fcaa,e nad) einem metnec gttftttu 

fcc. 
<Det J&efcmnte. 
2Ben fud)cn@ic? 




14* 

I am booking for an acquaintance 3d) fttcfye etnen metnct SSefcmntetn 

of mine. 
I ask him for a piece of bread. 3d) bttte if)n urn cin <&t(\d 23rob. 

J?wfe 1. The preposition of, which in English stands 
between two substantives, when the second determines 
the substance of the first, is never expressed in Ger- 
man. Ex. 

A piece of bread. f (Sin ©tficf 93rob 



©in (SHa* ©affcr. 
term S^cgen papier. 
Drct 93cgcn papier. 



A glass of water. 

A sheet of paper, 

Three sheets of paper. 

The piece, $a$ 'Stiicf ; 

the sheet, bet *8egen ; 

the small piece (little bit), bets (Stiicfcben ; 

the little book, bag £$ud)tdn. # 

Rule 2. All diminutives terminating in cfyett and tein 
are neuter, and those terminating in ling are mascu- 
line. To form diminutives from German substantives, 
the syllable rf) e n or I e i it is added, and the radical 
vowels, a, 0, U, are softened into a, 6, ft. Ex. 

The small house, la$ &au$d)cn ; 

the small picture, ba£ $U(bd)en ; 

the little heart, t>a$ £>et$cbm ; 

the little child, $>a$ jUnblctn ; 

the little boy, bas tfnablcm, $na'Mjen; 

the suckling (baby), ber (Saugltna, ; 

the favourite, darling, ber Sickling ; 

the apprentice, ber Settling. 

exercises. 121. 

Have you already dined ? — Not yet. — At what o'clock do you dine 1 
— I dine at six o'clock. — At whose house (53et roem, Lesson XXVI.) 
do you dine 1 — I dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom 
(bet tuem) did you dine yesterday 1 — I dined (babe — gefpetf't with a re- 
lation of mine. — What have you eaten 1 — We have eaten good bread, 
beef, apples, and cakes. — -What have you drunk? — We have drunk 
good wine, good beer, and ^ood cider. — Where does your uncle dine 
to-day 1 — He dines with (bet) us. — At what o'clock does your father 
eat supper ] — He eats supper at nine o'clock. — Do you eat supper ear- 
ierthan he] — T eat supper later than he. — At what o'clock do you 
breakfast] — I breakfast at ten o'clock. — At what o'clock did you 
eat supper yesterday ? — We ate (rjaben — a/geffen) supper late. — 
What did you eat 1 — We ate only a little meat and a small piece of 
bread.— When did your brother sup ? — He supped after my father 



148 

— Where are you going to? — I am going to a relation ot mine, i* 
order to breakfast with him. — Do you dine early 1 — We dine late. 
■ — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ] — I am willing to hold them. 
•—Is he willing to hold my cane ] — He is willing to hold it. — Who 
has held your hat 1— My servant has held it. — Will you try to 
speak. — I will try. — Has your little brother ever tried to do exercises'? 
--He has tried. — Have you ever tried, to make a hat ? — I have nevei 
tried to make one. — Have we tasted that beer ? — We have not 
tasted it yet. — Which wine do you wish to taste ] — I wish to taste 
that which you have tasted. — Have the Poles tasted that brandy ] 
— They have tasted ; .t. — Have they drunk much of it (t>aoen) 1 — 
They have not drunk much of it. — Will you taste this tobacco 1 — 
I have tasted it already. — How do you find it] — I find it good. — 
Why do you not taste that cider ] — Because I am not thirsty. — 
Why does your friend not taste this meat] — Because he is not 
hungry. 

122. 

Whom are you looking for 1 — I am looking for the man who has 
sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking fur any one ] — He is 
looking for an acquaintance of his. — Are we looking for any one ] 
- — We are looking for a neighbour of ours. — Whom dost thou look 
fori — I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of 
mine] — No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to 
speak to your uncle ? — I have tried to speak to him.- — Have you 
tried to see my father 1 — 1 have tried to see him. — Have you been 
able (Less. XL VIII.) to see him ] — I have not been able to see him. 
— After whom do you inquire 1 — I inquire after your father. — After 
whom dost thou inquire ] — I inquire after the tailor. — Does ibis 
man inquire after any one] — He inquires after you. — Do they in- 
quire after you ] — They do inquire after me ] — Do they inquire 
after me ] — They do not inquire after you, but after a ^riend of 
yours. — Do you inquire after the physician] — 1 do inquire after 
him. — What do you ask me for] — I ask you for some meat. — 
What does your little brother ask me for ] — He asks you for some 
wine and some water. — Do you ask me for a sheet of paper ] — I 
do ask you for one. — How many sheets of paper does your friend 
ask for] — He asks for two. — Dost thou ask me for the little book ] 
— I do ask you for it.— What has your cousin asked for ] — He has 
asked for a few apples and a small piece of bread. — Has he not 
breakfasted yet ] — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — 
What does your uncle ask for ] — He asks for a glass of wine. — 
What does the Pole ask for ] — He asks for a small glass of brandy. 
— Has he not already drunk ] — He has already drunk, but he is 
Btill thirsty. 



49 

FIFTY-FOURTR LESSON.- bier nitb funfygste 
Cextton* 

I see the man who has my mo- 2>cb fcfie ben 9}?anrt, nxkbet mem 

ney. (Suit) hat. 

I see the child who plays. ?cb febe trnS .fitnt\ rcefche* fpteft. 

I perceive him who is coming, ^cb bemertV ten, tuelcber ftmuit. 

1 see him who owes me money. 3cb ft PC ^n, i\JCtcl)cr nur d>ctD \d)uU 

t>jg iff. 

p. ., ,-,. f 23cmerrVn (Sic btc ^etbattn, wclcfye 

Do you perceive the soldiers i v ™ • < o 

who are ping into the store- { tY . £ ~. ^ ; ^ ,>, *,~ *«.. 

, , | 5 b » 23cmcrfcn dste t>te ^eftctten, roclcpe 

in ftas $ftacjqtn (btnetir) gcben V 

I do perceive those who are go- C 3icb bemcrfe Me, ruetcbe bafjtn geben* 

ing into it. £ 3cb bcmaU fcte, reelcfye btnetn ge^ri. 

J./so. 2f u d). 

TV> perceive — perceived* 23 c m c r f e n — b e m e r f t. 

Have you perceived any one 1 £aben ^!^ 3emant>en bemctfi ? 
1 have perceived no one. 3cb babe 9Ucmant>cn bemerft. 

The soldier, bcr (Seftat. a 

To 2:0 to the store-house. < ~ J" /, l~ • ,* • • \ * * * 

fe i 3n fcas 932aa,qtn (btnctn) cjeben*. 

O&s. JL Direction towards a place or towards a 
country is expressed by the preposition xiad) with the 
dative. 

Willingly. (Bern. 

To like. f ©crn baben*. 

To like to see. f (Sjern febenf. 

To like to study. f (Sk'rn jrut>tren. 

To like wine. f ($5ern 9Sktd trtnfen*. 

He likes a large hat. f C£r bat §ctri etnen cjre^en .frut. 
Do you like to see my brother ] \ (8'eben fete metnen 23rut>er a/tn 1 

I do like to see him. f Jscb febe tbn genu 

I like to do it. f £sch tbue e$ gern. 

Do you like water! f trtnfen @te gern Staffer? 

No, I like wine. f 9Mn, icb trtnfe gern SQBctn. 



Fowl, 


£ubn ; 


the fish, 


fcer A'ifcb ; 


fish, 


£tfcbe (plur.) ; 


the pike, 


tcr £echt ; 


pike, 


£ed)te (plur.). 



* Substantives derived from foreign languages and terminating in : attt 
ax 6), at, et, ent, i\t, it, og, add en to the genitive singular and to ail the other 
cases singular and plural. 



150 



To like something. 
I like fish. 
He likes fowl. 
I do not like fish. 

By heart. 
To learn by heart: 

Do your scholars like to learn 

by heart? 
They do not like learning by 

heart. 
Have you learnt your exercises 

by heart? 
We have learnt them. 
Once a day. 
Thrice or three times a month. 



t <5tn grcunb Don ctm$ fctn.* 
t 3d) bin etn greunb t>on gtfcfeen. 
t (Sr igt gern £uf)n. 
t S* bin inn £ccunb »on ®ifd)cn. 

2Cu6rcenbtg. 

2C u 6 «> c n b t g (erncn. 

Scrnm 3fac (Sd)itlcr gern ctuSwen* 

t>ig? 
(Sic tetncn md)t gent au£n?cnbtg. 

#a&en @tc 3f)re 2Cufgabcn au&wn* 

big gdctnt ? 
• SQ&tr^abcn Sic gclcrnt. 
(Stnmal bc6 $ag$. 
jDnimal beg 9Jlcnat& 



O&s. JB. The genitive is used in reply to the ques- 
tions : tt)attn ? when ? ttne oft ? how often ? in speak- 
ing of something that takes place habitually and at a 
determinate period. 

Six times a year. @>edj$mat bc£ 3a1)te$. 

How many times a day does he 955 ic Mehual (rate oft) tft cr bc$ 



eat 1 

He eats three times a day. 
Do you eat as often as hel 
When do you go out 1 
We go out early in the morning. 



Sage ? 
<S£ tflt brctmat bcS SagS. 
(Sffcn 01c fc eft tine er ? 
SBann gefyen (Sic au£ 1 
2Bit getyen be£ SRorgenS friifj au$. 

SOB.e n tt (See Rule of Syntax, 
Lesson XL VII.). 

I intend paying you if I receive 3d) Otn gefonnen, (Sic $u 6qaf)(cn, 
my money. rcenn id) mctn (5$c(b befomme. 

Do you intend to huy wood 1 ©cbenfen (Sic £e($ $u faufen ? 

I do intend to buy some, if they 3d) gcbenfc roeicbcS 311 faufen, roenn 
pay me what they owe me. man nut beja fytt, rca£ man mit 

febutbtg tft. 

How is the weather? . 1 © fl * fat ffifcttcr ift e* 1 

What kind of weather lsit! ) ' ' 

It is line weather at present. (§S tft left fd)8ne$ £Bett$r. 

How was the weather yester- % 

day] 
What kind of weather was it 

3 r esterday 1 

Obs. C. 2Bar, was, is the imperfect of the auxilia 
ry verb fetn*, to be; we shall speak of it hereafter 
(See Lesson LVII.) 



► 2&a$ fur ^Better wax ci geftern ? 



151 



Was it fine weather yesterday 1 
It was bad weather yesterday. 
It was fine weather this morning. 

Is it warm ] 
It is warm. 

Very. 
It is very warm. 
It is cold. 
It is very cold. 
It is neither cold nor warm. 

Dark, obscure, 
dusky, gloomy, 
clear, light, 

It is gloomy in your shop. 

Is it gloomy in his room ? 

I- is gloomy there. 

The shop, 

moist, humid, damp, 

dry, 
Is the weather damp "? 
The weather is not damp. 
It is dry weather. 
The weather is too dry. 
It is moonlight (moonshine). 
We have too much sun. 
We have no rain. 

The moonlight, moonshine, 

the rain, 

the sun, 
Of what do you speak 1 
We speak of the weather. 

The weather, 



££at e£ gefietn fcWneS better ! 
(S$ wax gcjtern fcr)led)te$ better, 
(5*» uoat btefen D^or^en feline* £&t* 

ter. 
3ft c6 warm ? 
(Ss tft warm. 
0efc 

©8 tft febr warm. 
(S$ tft £att. 
®$ ift febr fatt. 
(5s tft rccber fait nod) watttu 

ftnfter ; 
bimfel ; 

@g tft bunfef in Sfacm Oabetu 
3ft e$ bunM in fanem Stmmet I 
@$ tft bunfet barin. (See Ota. i 
and C. Lesson XXIX.) 

bet Caben ; 
fcud)t ; 

trocfen. ^ 

3ft eg feucbre* SBctter 1 
£>as better tft ntcbt feucfyt 
"6$ tfttvocfene* ^Better. 
£)a<r> better tft $u trocfen. 
<5*$ tft Otfonbfcbctn. 
2Btr baben $u Diet (Sonne* 
SGSir fyaben Ceinen SHegen. 

bet 93?onbfd)etn ; 

ber JHcgen ; 

bte Sonne (a feminine noun). 

SBoson fpred)en (Ste ? 

££tr fprecfyen torn (t>on bem) 2Be tetw 

ba$ ^Better. 



EXERCISES. 123. 

Do you perceive the man who is coming 1 — I do not perceive 
him. — Do you perceive the soldier's child ? — I perceive it. — What 
do you perceive ? — I perceive a great mountain and a small house. 
—Do you not perceive the wood 1 — I perceive it also. — Dost thou 
perceive the soldiers who are going to the market 1 — I do perceive 
them. — Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden*? — 
I do not perceive those who are going into the garden, but those 
who are going to the market. — Do you see the man to whom I 
have lent money ] — I do not see the one to whom you have lent, 
but the one who has lent you some. — Dost thou see the children 
who are studying 1 — I do not see those who are studying, but those 



m* 



152 

who are playing. — Do you perceive anything * — I perceive nothing 
— Have you perceived the house of my parents ? — -I have percebed 
it. — Do you like a large hat ? — I do not like a large hat, but a 
large umbrella. — What do you like to do ? — I like to write.— Do 
you like to see those little boys ? — 1 do like to see them. — Do you 
like beer ? — I like it.-— Does your brother like cider 1 — He does not 
like it. — What do the soldiers like ? — They like wine and water.— 
Dost thou like wine or water? — 1 like both (iwtvs). — Do these 
children like to study ? — They like to study and to play. — -Do you 
like to read and to write ? — I like to read and to write. — How many 
times do you eat a day ? — Four times. — How often do your cl. ildren 
drink a day ? — They drink several times a day. — Do you drink as 
often as they ? — I drink oftener. — Do you often go to the theatre ? 
— I go thither sometimes. — How often do you go thither (in) a 
month ? — I go thither but once a month. — How many times a year 
does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes thither twice a year. — 

Do you go thither as often as he ? — I never go thither Does your 

cook often go to the market I — He goes thither every morning. 

124. 

Do you often go to my uncle's ? — I go to him six times a year. — 
Do yo>i like fowl ? — I do like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What 
do you like ? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — What 
fish does your brother like! — He likes pike.— Do you learn by 
heart] — I do not like learning by heart. — Do your pupils like to 
learn by heart? — They like to study, but they do not like learning 
by heart. — How many exercises do they do a day 1 — They only 
do two, but they do them well. — Do you like coffee or tea? — 1 like 
both. — Do you read the letter which 1 have written to you (Rule of 
Syntax, Lesson XL VII.) ? — I do read it. — Do you understand it ? — 
I do understand it. — Do you understand the man who speaks to you ? 
— I do not understand him ? — W^hy do you not understand him ?\-I 
do not understand him because he speaks too badly. — Does this man 
know German ? — He does know it, but I do not know it. — Why do 
you not learn it? — 1 have no time to learn it. — Have you received 
a letter ? — I have received one. — Will you answer it. — I am going 
to (3cb rutll) answer it. — When did you receive it ? — I received it at 
ten o'clock in the morning.— Are you satisfied with it ? — I am not 
dissatisfied with it. — What does your friend write to you ? — He 
writes tome that he is ill (Rule of Syntax, Lesson XL VII.). — Does 
he ask you for anything ? — Fie asks me for money. — Why does he 
ask you for money ? — Because he wants some. — What do you ask 
me for ? — I ask you for the money which you owe me. — Will you 
wait a little? — I cannot wait. — Why can you not wait? — I cannot 
wait because I intend to depart to-day. — At what o'clock do you in- 
tend to set out ? — I intend setting out at five o'clock in the evening. 
- — Do you go to Germany ? — I do go thither. — Are you not going to 
Holland ? — I am not going thither.— How far has your brother gone ' 
—He has gone as far as London. 



161 

the (twn ben) people of that country 1 — I say that they are good people 
(i'S qute Scute fine). — Is your brother at Dresden ? — No, Sir, he is 
at Vienna ] — Is the living good at Vienna ] — The living is good 
there. 

131. 

Have you been in London] — I have been there. — Is the living 
good there ]■ — The living is good there, but dear. — Is it dear living 
in Paris ]— It is good living there and not dear. — At whose house 
have you been this morning ] — I have been at my uncle's. — Where 
are you going to now ] — 1 am going to my brother's. — Is your brothei 
at home ] — I do not know. — Have you already been at the English 
captain's ] — I have not been there yet. — When do you intend going 
thither 1 — I intend going thither this evening. — How often has your 
brother been in London ] — He has been there thrice — Do you like 
travelling in France ? — I like travelling there, because one finds 
good people there. — Does yo*ur friend like travelling in Holland. '? 
— He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad there. 
— Do you like travelling in Italy 1 — I do like travelling there, be- 
cause the living is good there, and one finds good people there ; but 
the roads are not very good there. — Do the English like to travel in 
Spain] — They like to travel there ; but they find the roads there too 
bad. — How is the weather ] — The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? 
— It is very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday 1 — It was stormy. — 
Did you go into the country 1—1 did not go thither, because it was 
stormy. — Do you go to the market this morning 1 — I do go thither, 
if it is not stormy. — Do you intend going to Germany this year? — 
I do intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad. — Do you in- 
tend breakfasting with me this morning ] — I intend breakfasting 
with you, if I am hungry. 

132. 

Does your uncle intend dining with us to-day 1 — He does intend 
dining with you, if he is hungry. — Does the Pole intrnd drinking 
some of (r>en) this wine 1 ? — He does intend drinking some of it (bat 
Dcul, if he is thirsty. — Do you like to go on foot ]— I do not like to 
go on foot, but I like going in a carriage when (tuenn) 1 am travel- 
ling. — Will you go on foot ] — I cannot go on foot, because I am too 
tired. — Do you go to Italy on foot ] — I do not go on foot, because 
the roads are there too bad. — Are the roads there as bad in the summer 
as in the winter ] — They are not so good in the winter as in the 
summer. 

133. 

Are you going out to-day] — lam not going out when it is raining 
— Did it rain yesterday ] — It did not rain. — Has it snowed ] — It has 
snowed. — Why do you not go to the market ]— I do not go thither, 
because it snows. — Do you wish to have an umbrella ] — If you have 
one.— Will you lend me an urnDrella' 1 — I will lend you one. — What 
sort of weather is it ] — It thunders and lightens. — Does the sun 
shine ! — The sun does not shine, it is foggy. — Do yem hear the 



162 

thunder 1 — I do hear it — How long have you heard the thunder.—* 
I have heard it till four o'clock in the morning. — Is it fine weather . 
— The wind blows hard and it thunders much. — Does it rain 1 — It 
does rain very fast (ftarf). — Do you not go into the country ! — How 
can I go into the country, do you not see how (one) it lightens 1 — 
Does it snow 1— It does not snow, but it hails. — Does it hail ] — 
It does not hail, but thunders very much. — Have you a parasol 1 — 
I have one. — Will you lend it me ] — I will lend it you. — Have we 
sunshine 1 — We have much sunshine, the sun is in my eyes. — Is it 
fine weather 1 — It is very bad weather, it is dark ; we have no sun- 
shine. 

134. 

Are you thirsty 1 — I am not thirsty, but very hungry. — Is your 
servant sleepy] — He is sleepy.-— Is he hungry 1 — He is hungry. — 
Why does he not eat ] — Because he has nothing to eat. — Are your 
children hungry] — They are very hungry, but they have nothing 
to eat. — Have they anything to drink 1 — They have nothing to 
drink. — Why do you not eat? — I do not eat when (tvcnn) I am not 
hungry. — Why does the Russian not drink 1 — He does not drink 
when he is not thirsty. — Did your brother eat anything yesterday 
evening] — He ate a piece of beef, a small piece of fowl, and a 
piece of bread. — Did he not drink 1 — He also drank. — What did 
he drink ] — He drank a large glass of water, and a small glass of 
wine. — How long did you stay at his house (bet tr)m) 1—1 stayed 
there till midnight. — Have you asked him for anything ] — I have 
asked him for nothing. — ?Has he given you anything ] — He has 
given me nothing. — Of whom have you spoken ] — We have spoken 
of you. — Have you praised rne 1 — We have not praised you ; we 
have blamed you. — Why have you blamed me 1 — Because you do 
not study well. — Of what has your brother spoken ] — He has 
spoken of his books, his houses, and his gardens. — Who is hungry] 
— My friend's little boy is hungry. — Who has drunk my wine ?— 
No one has drunk it. — Hast thou already been in my room? — I 
have already been there. — How dost thou find my room 1 — I find it 
beautiful. — Are you able to work there ] — I am not able to work 
there, because it is too dark. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY.SEVENTH LESSON.— 0iebett tttib fttl%0te 
tttlxon. 

OF THE IMPERFECT AND PERFECT TENSES, 

In English there are three imperfect tenses, viz : I 
praised, did praise, and was praising. These three 
are expressed in German by one imperfect id) lobte. It 
is used to express a past action or event in reference 



163 

to another, which was either simultaneous with or an 
tecedent to it. It is the historical tense of the Germans, 
and is always employed in narration, particularly 
when the narrator was an eye-witness of the action or 
event. The perfect tense, on the contrary, expresses 
an action or event, as perfectly past and ended, with- 
out any reference to another event, and when the 
narrator was not an eye-witness. In this latter in- 
stance the imperfect also may be used, if the narrator 
accompanies his narrative with any phrase denoting 
that he does not speak in his own name, as man fagt or 
fagt man, they say, it is said, &c. 

The perfect tense is compounded of the present of 
the auxiliary, and the past participle, as in English. 
(See Lessons XLL, XLII. &c.) 

I was — he was. 3$ mar — cr mar. 

We were — they were. £Btr maren — fte marcn. 

Thou wast — you were. £)u marft— 3fa marct (Ste maren). 

Were you content ? ££arcn (Sic $ufmben 1 

I was very content. 3cb mar (Vbr $ufrtcfcen. 

Was the wine good ? £Bar t>er £Bein a,ut ? 

It was very good. @r mar fefyr gut. 

Were yau there yesterday ? (Sint> (Sk geffetn fca gemefen 7 

I was there to-day. 3d) bin bcute t>a gcmefen. 

Where was he the day before 2Bo tft cr tjorgejfrtn o/mefcn ? 

yesterday ] 

Were you already in Paris ? (Sinb ©te fcbcn in 93art$ qemefen \ 

I was there twice already 1 3d) bin fd)on $metma( £>a a/mefcn. 

Obedient — disobedient. ©eherfam — ungefjcrfam. 

Negligent. 3£ad)lafftg» 

Obs. A. The imperfect of regular verbs is formed 
from the infinitive by changing en into t, and adding 
the proper termination to each person, viz. e, to the 
first and third persons singular, en, to the first and third 
persons plural, eft, to the second person singular, and 
tf> to the second person plural. Ex. 

C loved, f loved, ) <*, u cite „ tt 

I 1 did love, He ] did love, [ VS 

(was loving. ( was loving. ) 

( loved, ( loved, ) or>\. tutJl^ 

We did love, They did love, i^l^T 
( were loving. ( were loving. ) ' 



164 

ilovedst, C loved, ) Tu ftcbtefl — 

didst love, You < did love, > Slit ltebtet(£te 
wast loving. ( were loving. ) Itcbten). 

Obs B. The consonant t of the imperfect is pre- 
ceded by e, if the pronunciation requires it, which is 
the case in all verbs, the root of which ends in t>, t, tb ; 
or fl, or in several consonants united. (See Obs. A. 
Lesson XXXIV. and Lesson XLL) Ex. 

f worked, fworked, 1 r^ t *i. j. 

I did work, He did work, F* £*£ ~ 

[was working. [was working. J 
fworked, fworked, \<xn- u - *. 

We did work, They did work, \% ^^ 

l^were working. [ were working, j ' 
fworkedst, fworked, 1 £u arbettetejl: — 

ThouS didst work, You \ did work, 3br arbeitetct 

[ wast working. [ were working. J (©te arbdteten) ♦ 

Obs. C. In all German verbs, whether regular or 
Irregular, the third person singular of the imperfect 
tense is the same as the first person ; and the third 
person plural is the same as the first in all the tenses. 

I bad — he had. 3cb batte — cr batte. 

We had — they had. 9^tr batten — fie batten. 

Thou had st — you had. £)u battel— 3br battet (<gtc fatten) 

Had you money ? fatten <2>tc ($etD? 

I had some. 3d) batte nx(cbe£. 

Had your brother books 1 £atte 3br ^Brut^et Quebec ? 

He had some. (S;r batte nxlcbe. 

What had we? gUas batten u)tr? 

What sort of weather was it yes- %£a$ fitr better xvav e$ gcjlern ? 

terday ] 

It was fine weather. (S$ war fcnoneS better. 

Had you a wish to buy a horse ? fatten (Ste 2uft tin ^fcrb gu fail* 

fen ? 

I had a wish to buy one, but I Scb batte Ouft etnS $u fcmfen, abet 

had no money. id) batte fein ®cfb. 

Did your cousin intend to lean ££cir 3bt* better ejefenncn fceutfd) $u 

German ] (ernen ? 

He did intend to learn it, but he (Sr mar Qefennen eg $u letnen, a&et 

had no master. er batte fcinen Scorer. 



165 

EXERCISES. 135. 

Were you at home this morning J — I was -not at home — Where 
were you 1 — I was at the market. — Where were you yesterday ]— • 
I was at the theatre. — W T ast thou as assiduous as thy brother ]— « 
[ was as assiduous as he, but he was more eleven than I. — Where 
have you been ! — 1 have been at the English physician's.— Was 
he at home ?■ — He was not at home.* — Where was he ] — He was at 
the ba.Il. — Have you been at the Spanish cook's ] — I have been at 
his house. — Has he already bought his meat 1 — He has already 
bought it. — Have 3'ou given the book to my brother ] — I have given 
it to him. — Hast thou given my books to my pupils] — I have 
given them to them. — Were they satisfied w T ith them (fcamtt) ]-~ 
They were very well (fchr) satisfied with them. — Had your cousin a 
wish to learn German 1 — He had a wish to learn it. — Has he 
learnt it? — He has not learnt it. — Why has he not learnt it ] — 
Because he had not courage enough. — Have you been at my 
father's ] — I have been there (bet thm). — Have you spoken to him > 
— T have spoken to him. — Has me shoemaker already brought yov 
the boots ] — He has already brought them to me.-— Have you paid 
him (for) tiiem * — I have not paid him (for) them yet. — Have yon 
ever been in London"? — I have been there several times. — W^hat 
did you do there 1 — I learnt English tkere. — Do you intend going 
thither once more]- — I intend going thither twice more.— Is the 
living good there 1 — The living is good there, but dear, — Was your 
master satisfied with his pupil 1 — He was satisfied with him.-- 
Was your brother satisfied with my children 1— -He was very well 
(fchr) satisfied with them. — Was the tutor satisfied with this little 
Doy ] — He w T as not satisfied with him. — Why was he not satisfied 
with him 1 — Because that little boy was very negligent. 

136. 

Were the children of the poor as clever as those of the rich ?— 
They were more clever, because they worked harder (uiebr). — Did 
you love your tutor] — I did love him, because he loved me. — Did 
he give you anything ?- — He gave me a good book, because he was 
satisfied with me. — Whom do you love 1 — I love my parents and 
rny preceptors. — Do your tutors love you 1 — They do love me, 
because I am assiduous and obedient. — Did this man love his 
parents J — He did love them. — Did his parents love him 1 — They 
did love him, because he was never disobedient. — How long 
did you work yesterday evening] — I worked till ten o'clock. 
— Did your cousin also work ? — He did also work. — When 
didst thou see my uncle? — I saw him this morning. — Had 
ie much money 1 — He had much. — Had your parents many 
friends ] — They had many. — Have they still some ? — They have 
still several.— Had you any friends] — I had some, because I had 
money — Have you still some ?— I have no longer any, because 1 
have no more money. — Where was your brother ? — He was in the 
garden. "— Where were his servants ]— ~ They were in the house.— 



■ 



166 

Where were we ?— We were in a good country and with (fcetj 
good people. — Where were our friends ] — They were on (hoard) 
the ships of the English.— Where were the Russians 1 — They 
were in their carriages. — Were the peasants in the fields 1 — They 
were there. — Were the bailiffs in the woods 1 — They were there — 
Who was in the storehouses ? — The merchants were there. 

137. 

What sort of weather was it ] — It was very bad weather. — Was 
it windy ] — It was windy and very cold. — Was it foggy] — It was 
foggy. — Was it fine weather 1 — It was fine weather, hut too warm. 
- — What sort of weather was it the day before yesterday ] — It was 
very dark and very cold. — Is it fine weather now] — It is neither - 
fine iio A bad weather.- — Is it too warm ] — It is neither too warm 
nor too cold. — Was it stormy yesterday 1 — It was very stormy. — 
Was it dry weather ]-- The weather was too dry ; but to-day it is 
too damp.— Did you go to the ball yesterday evening'? — I did not 
go, because the weather was bad. — Had you the intention to tear 
my books ] — I had not the intention to tear, but to burn them. 
(See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— 3Ul)t tmb funfygste 
Nation. 



3* fpracf} a — 
er fpracfy* 

2Sir fpracfyen 
— jTe fpracfyen* 

06s.C.Less.LVU. 

25u fpradbjt — 
3br fpracfyei 



{spoke, fspoke, 

did speak, He < did speak, 
was speaking. [was speaking. 
{spoke, fspoke, 

did speak, They -J did speak, 
were speaking. lwere- speaking, 
fspokest, fspoke, 

Thou < didst speak, You<j did speak, 

I wast speaking, lwere speaking.J (@tefprad)en)» 

Obs. In irregular verbs the imperfect of the indica 
tive is formed by changing the vowels : a, et, t, 0, U, 
and adding the termination belonging to each person. 
Hence in the irregular verbs we shall mark only the' 
change of that vowel, together with the termination of 
the first person, in order to enable learners to know 

a Learners ought now to add to their list of verbs the imperfect of all ir- 
regular verbs which they have been using hitherto, or will have to use hers 
after. 



1G7 

the imperfect tense. Examples : the verb fprechett 
above changes in the imperfect the radical vowel e into 
a ; Metbert, to remain, changes it into it, thus : id) Mich, 
I remained ; gefyen, to go, into i, thus : id) gutg, I went ; 
jteben, to draw, into o, thus : id) jog, I drew ; fcfylctgen, 
to beat, into U, thus : id) fd)htg, I smote. 

Compound verbs follow in general the conjugation of 
simple verbs. 

At first (in the beginning). (Srft, §ucrfr (anfdngS). 

Afterwards. £cniad) or nacfyfyer. 

Hereupon, upon this. £tcrauf* 

[O" 3 Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
word than the subject, its order is inverted, and the 
subject stands after the verb in simple, and after the 
-auxiliary in compound tenses. b 

At first he said yes, afterwards (Srft fagtc c x [a, fjcrrwd) netn. 

no. 
At first he worked, and after- (Srjl atfceitete, unb r)crnacf) fpictte er, 

wards he played. 
I do not go out to-day. ^>cute gefje icb ntd)t cm*. 

Now you must work. Segt mtrffcn © i e arbctten. 

My father set out yesterday. ©efU'tn iffc me i n 93 a t e r aftge* 

rctf't. 
Here lies your book and there put tiegt 3f)r SBud) unb t>a 3fa 

your paper. gainer. 

He came afterwards. @t tffc betnad) (nad)f)et) cjcFemmen. 

Upon this he said. £terauf fagte c r. 

I drink as soon as I have eaten. 3$ trinfe, febatb id) gegcfion 6aoe* 
As soon as I have taken off my Cobalt) id) metne @dmbe au*cje$Cs 
shoes I taks off my stockings. gen 6a6e,'$ie$e id) metne @triiuipfe 

cms. c 
What do you do after supper 1 ? SBaS tbun ©te nad) heig 2Cbcnfccf* 

fen? 

To sleep — sZe;?*. <Sd)tafett — cjefdjtafen. Im- 

perfect fcbl t ef. 

I sleep, thou sleepest, he sleeps. 3d) fd)tafc, bu fd)lafft, cr fd)(aft. 

b From this rule must be excepted the conjunctions which serve to unite 
sentences vSee Lesson XLVII.) ; they leave the subject in its place and throw 
the verb to the end of the sentence. 

« See Obs. C. Lesson XXXIV. 



168 



Does your father still sleep ? 
He does still sleep. 

To live. 



©d&t&ft 3(jt 93atctncdM 
C£t fcbtaft rwcl). 

2 e b c n. 



[s your relation still alive * f l l ebt Sbf 33mt>anbtct nccf) ? 

He is no longer alive (he is dead), 7 (Sr tcbt nicbt mebr. 



Without. 

Without money. 
Without speaking. 
Without saying anything. 



D b n e (is followed by $u befo: 
the infinitive). 

Obne (Mb. 

t Dbne $u fprcchen. 

j Dfyiu etroas $u fagcn. 

To go away— gone away. SB e 9 g e b e n *— w cggegangen. 

Iraperf. g i n 9. 

He went away without saying (gt gtng rocg, cr)nc etrca$ ^u fagcn* 
anything. 

© n b r t c!) . 

2(n!ommcn*— angefommen. 
Imperf. f a m. 

3ft cr enb(td) angcfommen 1 

(5r tft nccb nicbt angeEommen. 

Jicmmt cr enbttd) ? 

(Sr fonmit. « ! 



At last. 

To arrive — arrived. 

Has he arrived at last ? 
He has not arrived yet. 
Does he come at last? 
He does come. 

To give away — given away. 



2B e 9 g e b e n* — \v e g g e g e b e n 
Imperf. gab. 

To cut off— cut off (past part.). 2£ b f d) n e i b e n* — a b g e f cl) n 1 1 * 

t e n. Imperf. f ch n 1 1 1 • 



Has he given away anything? 
He has given away his coat. 



$at er etr&a$ roeggegeben 1 
(St bat fein Mni> rueggegeben. 



To cut one's throat. 
They have cut his throat. 

To crop a dog's ears. 

What have they done to him ? 
They have cut off his ears. 

Aloud. 



Semanbcm fcen.&alg abfebrtctben *. 
50£an bat ifjm bm ipats abge* 

febnttten. 
(Stnem £unbe t>te JDfyren abfcfyneU 

ben *. 
££a$ baben fie tfjm grtfyan ? 
©tc no ben ibm btc Dfyren abge* 

febnttten. 

fca.ut. 

Does your master speak aloud ] <Si>rtd)t 3br deforce (aut ? 
He does speak aloud. (St fpricftt (aut. 

In order to learn German, one Um beutjet) $u (ernen, mup man (aut 
must speak aloud. fprccben. 

exercises. 138. 

Hadst thou the intention to learn English 1 — I had the intention 
o learn it, but I had not a good master. — Did your brother intenJ 



169 

to buy a carriage 1 — He did intend to buy one, but he had no more 
money. — Why did you work ] — I worked in order to learn Ger- 
man. — Why did you love that man 1 — I loved him because he loved 
me. — Have you already seen the son of the captain ] — 1 have a" ready 
seen him.— Did he speak French 1 — He spoke English. — Where 
were you then (Lesson XLVIII.)] — I was in Germany. — -Did you 
speak German or English! — I spoke neither German nor English, 
but French. — Did the Germans speak French 1 — At first they spekp 
German, afterwards French. — Did they speak as well as you V — 
They spoke just as well as you and I. — What do you. do oi the 
evening. — I work as soon as I have supped. — And what do you do 
afterwards 1 — Afterwards T sleep. — When do you drink ] — I drink 
as soon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep 1 — I sleep as soon as 
I have supped. — Dost thou speak German 1 — I spoke it formerly. 
— Dost thou take off thy hat before thou takest off thy coat 1 — I take 
off my hat as soon as I have taken off my clothes.— -What do you 
do after breakfast 1 — As soon as I have breakfasted I go out. — Art 
thou sleeping 1 — You see that I am not sleeping. — Does thy brother 
still sleep 1 — He does still sleep. — Have you tried to speak to my 
uncle I — I have not tried to speak to him. — Has he spoken to you * 
— As soon as he sees me, he speaks to me. — Are your parents still 
alive 1 — They are still alive, — Is your friend's brother still* alive 1 
— He is no longer alive. 

139. 

Have you spoken to the merchant?- — I have spoken to him. — 
Where have you spoken to him ? — I have spoken to him at my 
house (bit tntr). — What has he said 1 — -He went away without say- 
ing anything.— Can you work without speaking 1 — I can work, but 
not study German, without speaking. — Do you speak aloud when 
(avnn) you are studying German 1 — I do speak aloud. — Can you 
understand me ? — I can understand you w r hen (roenn) you speak 
iloud. — Wilt thou go for some wine ] — 1 cannot go for -vine withont 
money. — Have you bought any horses 1 — 1 do not buy without 
money. — Has your father arrived at last ?-— He has arrived. — When 
did he arrive 1 — This morning at four o'clock. — Has your cousin, 
set out at last 1 — He has not set out yet. — Have you at last found 
a good master 1— I have at last found one. — Are you at last learning 
English ] — I am at last learning it.— Why did you not learn it al- 
ready 1 — Because I had not a good master. — Are you waiting foi 
any one ?— I am waiting for my physician 1— -Is he coming at last 1 
—You see that he is not yet coming. — Have you the head-ache f— 
No, I have sore eyes. — Then you must w T ait for the physician. — 
Have you given away anything]—! have not given away anything. 
— What has your uncle given away ? — He has given aw T ay his old 
clothes. — Hast thou given away anything !- — I had not anything to 
give aw r ay. — What has thy brother given away 1 — He has given 
away his old boots and his old shoes. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



170 

FTFTY.NINTH LESSON.— Nenn tttti* fitn%6te 
Cetiion. 

J5egw. SBorbcn. 

Ots. A. The learner must remember that tt)erben * 
not fern*, is the verb which serves to form the passive 
voice (Lesson LV.). The past participle of the former 
is ttwbett, and that of the latter getoefeiu (Lesson XLL) 

Have you been praised ? (Stnb @tc gc(ct»t rootben ? 

I have been praised. 3d) bin gele&t wcrbcn. 

Hast thou been blamed 1 'SStft JDu cjctabett wetbcn ? 

[ have not been blamed. 3d) bin ntd)t gctat)c(t roerbcn. 

Have we been loved ] (Stub rtnr gettcfct roorbcn ? 

By whom has he been punished 1 SScn went ift cr geftraft tuerbcn ? 

He has been punished by his (§r ift aon feincm $8atct gejfraft root* 

father. ten* 

When has he been punished ? 853cmn ift cr geftraft rcorben ? 
He has been punished to-day. @r ijt r)eutc geftraft rootfcem 

I was — he was 1 3d) rourbc — er rourbe ] 

We were — they were > praised. 28tr rourben — fte nntrben I ^^ 
Thou wast — you were J £)u wurbejT — Sfyrnuirbet J ^ 

(<Ste rourben) J 

Were you loved 1 SOSurben @tc cjeUcfrt ? 

I was loved. Set) tmtrbc gettefct; 

Was he hated ? SBurbc cr gebapt ? 

He was neither loved nor hated. @t rcmrbe tucber geltefct nod) gcl)apt. 

To become. £B c r b e n *. 

The past participle of this verb is : 

Become. © C tt) r b c n. a 

And its imperfect : 
I became — he became 3d) rcarb or rcmtbe — cr roatb or 

murbe. 
Thou becamest. JDu roarbjt or nmtbeft. 

Ota. 5. In all the other tenses and persons, tt>erben*, 
to become, is conjugated as the verb which serves to 
form the passive voice. (See Lesson LV. and above.) 

He was made a king. 7 j. re s »" :* 

He became a king/ j f <^ marb £cn.g. 

■ Not toorben, which is t*ie past participle of the verb that serves to form 
n@ passive voice, as may be seem above. 



171 



Have you become a merchant] ©inb @ic .ftaufmann cjewetben ? 

I have become a lawyer. 3d) bin ttbttofat gerootben. 

He has taken the degrees of a f (St tft doctor geroetbcn. 
doctor. 

The king, bet ^b'ntg ; 

the successor, bcr sflacbfofgct ; b 

the lawyer (barrister at law), bcr ttb&efcit (See Note % Lessoa 

L1V.) ; 

the office, the employment, tag 2(mt. 



Learned. 

To fall sick. 

To be taken ill. 

To recover, to grow well. 

To recover one's health. 
He was taken ill. 
He has recovered his health. 

What has become of him 1 

He has turned soldier. 
He has enlisted. 

To enlist, to enroll. 

Children become men. 



®cU\)xt 

> t Sivani nxtben *. 

> | ®cfunb roctben *. 

t (St roarb franf. 

T (St iJT gejunb gerootben. 
C 9£a5 ijt aug tf)m gerootben ? 
C ££o tft et Mnqefommen ? 

(St tji gfolbat geroctben. 

(St oat fid) antuetuen laflfcn. 
C (Sctbat roerbcn*. 
C^id) anmetfteit laffcn*. 

2CuS &mbetn tt>ett>en Scute. 



SKctgen* — getiffen. 



To tear — torn. 

To snatch — snatched. m 

I tore — we tore. 3d) tip —rott tiffen. 

Thou torest — you tore. £>u rtffeft — Sfjr rtfivt ((Ste tiffen). 

He snatched it out of my hands. (St tip c$ tirir au$ ben £a'nbett. 
What did he snatch out of your 2Ba3 tip et Sfynen au$ ten £anben ! 
hands 1 



I was there, 
there. 



When. UH (t>a, tuenn). (See Lesson 

XL VII.) 

when you were 3d) war t><\, att @te ^a roaten. 



Next year. 

Last month. 

Last Monday. 

Next, 

last, 
When was he in Berlin ? 
He was there last winter. 
When will you go to Berlin? 



Sfla'rtftcs 3af)t. 

SSottgen ((egrcn) SWonat. 

Se|ten 9Jttntcig. 

nacbft ; 

t>ortg, (egt. 

2£ann roar et in SSetttn ? 

(St ruat fcortqen SKtntcr ba. 

££ann rcellen 8te nad) Setttn tetfen ? 



b Masculine substantives derived from a regular verb do not soften the radi« 
ral vowel in the plural, as : !iftad)folaer, which is derived from uarfjfolgen, to 
follow, to succeed ; plur. fete Sftarijfofflev, the successors. 

^ The verb revert, to tear, to pull, to wrest, must not be mistaken for §er* 
cctBftt, which means : to tear to pieces, to rend, to burst asunder. 



172 

I will go tniiner next summer. 3d) will nacbften (Seamier tifyin 

ret fen. 

So that. @o bag (See Lesson XL VII.),. 

I have lost my money, so that I 3d) habc niein ©eft wrlcrcn; fo bap 

cannot pay you. id) £ic mci)t bc$ablen fann. 

I am ill, so that 1 cannot go oat. 3d) bin rxanf, fo Dap let) ntd)t au^es 

ben fann. 

The imperfect of fontten is id) fonnte I could. 

The way to Berlin. £)et gBccj nad} SSerlin. 

The way from Berlin to Dresden. £)er SJko, Don 23erltn nod) £>rc$ben. 

Which way has he taken 1 iBMcben *2Bcoi bat er cjenommen? 

He has taken the way to Leipzic. (£r bat ten &Beg nad) CHpjtg a/nom* 

men. 

Which way will you take] ££etcben 5[^eq rccllen @te nefymen? 

I will take this way. 3d) will biefen ^Seo, netjmen. 

And I that one. Unb id) jenen. 

exercises. 140. 

Why has that child been praised 1 — It has been praised, because 
it has studied well. — Hast thou ever been praised 1 — 1 have often 
been praised. — Why has that other child been punished ] — It has 
been punished, because it has been naughty and idle. — Has this 
child been rewarded 1 — It has been rewarded, because it has worked 
well. — W T hen was that man punished ? — He was punished last 
month. — W^hy have we been esteemed 1 — Because we have been 
studious and obedient.-— Why have these people been hated? — Be- 
cause they have been disobedient. — Were you loved when you were 
at Dresden 1 — I was not hated. — Was your brother esteemed when 
he was in London ] — He was loved and esteemed. — When were you 
in Spain 1 — I was there when you were there. — W T ho was loved and 
who was hated ? — Those that were good, assiduous, and obedient, 
were loved, and those who were naughty, idle, and disobedient, 
were punished, hated and despised. — What must one do, in order 
not to be despised 1 — One must be studious and good. — Were you 
in Berlin when the king was there! — I was there when be was 
there. — W"as your uncle in London when I was there] — He was 
there when you were there. — Where were you when 1 was at Dres- 
den 1 — I was in Paris. — Where was your father when you were in 
Vienna]— He was in England. — At what time did you breakfast 
when you were in Germany ] — I breakfasted when my father break- 
fasted. — Did you work when he was working ? — 1 studied when he 
was working. — Did your brother work when you were working] — 
He played when I was working. 

141. 

What iias become of your friend ] — He has become a lawyer. — 
What has become of your cousin ? — He has enlisted. — Was youi 



173 

uncle taken ill 1 — He was taken ill, and I became his successor in 
his office. — Why did this man not work? — He could not work, be- 
cause he was taken ill. — Has he recovered 1 — He has recovered. — 
What lias become of him] — He has turned a merchant.— What 
has become of his children? — His children have become men. — 
What has become of your son 1 — He has become a great man. — 
Has he become learned ] — He has become learned (c$). — What 
has become of my book ! — I do not know what has become of it.— 
Have you torn it 1 — I have not torn it. — What has become of out 
neighbour] — I do not know what has become of him. — Did they 
wrest the book out of your hands] — They did wrest it out of my 
hands. — Did you wrest the book out of his hands ?— I did wrest it 
out of his hands. — When did your father set out] — He set out last 
Tuesday. — Which way has he taken ]— He has taken the way to 
Berlin. — When were you in Dresden ] — I was there last year. — 
Did you stay there long-'? — I stayed there nearly a month. — Has 
my brother paid you] — He has lost all (Obs. /?., Lesson XL1X.) 
his money, so that he cannot pay me. (See end of Lesson 
XXXI V.) 



SIXTIETH LESSON.- 0*rl»igste faction. 

Of whom , of which. 33 o n b c m, tt) o t> o tt. 

Ohs. A. Of which, when relating to a thing, may 
be translated by the preposition which the verb re- 
quires, added to the adverb tt>o* 

I see the man o c whom you 3d) jVbe ben SOfrum, t> o n b e m (turn 
speak. nxlcbem) <§U fpreebcn. 

I have bought the horse of which 3d) babe bas ^pferb gefauft, ttOtt 
you spoke to me. D e m @te tint mtr gefprecben fyaOctn 

Has your father the book of £at 3br better $a$ 23ud), tt) t) tt 
which I am speaking ] id) [predK ^ 

Whose. S) e f f e n. Plur. b c r c tt. 

The man whose. £>et 90?cmn, beffen. 

The child whose. £>a* .£tnb, bi'fftn. 

The men whose. 3Die farmer, bcreru 

I see the man whose brother has Stft'feb'c ben sjftann, beffen SSrubct 

killed my dog. mcincii JDtnib getSbtct bat. 

Do you see the child whose fa- (Sehcn ^ic bets .fttnb, beffen SSatct 

ther set out yesierday ? gcfh'rn nbgcreipt t jl ? 

I do see it. 3cb fcfic e$. 

I see the man whose dog you 3cb febe ben ^cmn, fceffett £unb <§U 

have killed. gctoDtet babcit. 

Do you see the people whose ©*%tt <Stc bie Scute, bcrcn pferb i& 

horse I have bought] gefewft (jobc? 



174 

I do see them. 3cfy fefye fte. - 

[ have seen the merchant whose 3d) fyabc ben Jtaufmonn gefefyen 
shop you have taken. beffen £aben (Sic gcncmmcn fyaben- 

DCJ 3 Incidental or explicative propositions are 
placed either immediately after the word which they 
determine, or at the end of the principal proposition. 

(3dj Fjo&e nut bem $?annc, beffen 
£au6 abgcbrannt tft, gcjpvedben. 
3d) ftaOe nut bem 9)tannc gefprecfyen, 
beffen £au$ abgebrcmnt iff. 
CWbbx enncn, (verb act. and neut. 
To burn — burnt* < irreg.) q 6 9 c b r a n n U Imperf. 

C b t a n n t e. 

!£aben @te bag <8ud), tx?e(d)C!g id) 
Sbnen getiefyen fyabe, gctefen ? 
£aben (Ste ba£ ffiud) $e(efen, roelcfyeS 
id) Sfynen geftefyen fyabt» ? 
I have what I want. 3cfy fyabe, rc>a6 id) braucfye. 

That, the one of which. £) S, beffen. 

Have you the' paper of which £aben <Ste ba£ $)Gpicr, beffen @te 
^you have need ] benctfyigt ftnb ? 

I have that of which I have need. 3d) fyabi t>a$, beffen id) benctfytgt bin. 

Dative. Gen. 

That, the one of which, ( M. ber, fcon toelrfjem-ber, beffen* 
of whom. \ N. ba'g,*>on wef^em-ba^, beffen* 

I see the man of whom I speak. 3* fefye ben 50?ann, fcen roekfyem id) 

fpr cd)C. 
I see the one of whom I am 3d) fefye ben (benjentgen), sen rock 
speaking *o you. d)em id) nut Sfynen fptccfye. (See 

Lesson XII.) 
Which book have you] SQBeidfycg <8ud) fyaben @ie? 

have that (the one) of which I 3* fyobe b Q S (ba^eni^e), beffen id) 
have need. benotfyt^t bin. 

Dative. Gen. 

those, the one, of which. { g; £ {£*• } We, ocrc. 

Which men do you see 1 SSMcfa banner fefyen <Ste ? 

I see those of whom you have 3cfy fefye bie (biejenigen), x>cn reels 
spoken to me. cfyen (t>on ben en) ©tc mit mir 

qcfrtecfyen fyaben. (See Lesson 

5QV.) 



175 

Which nails has the man ? SBetdje Stfagcl foot bet S^ann ? 

He has those of which he has (St hat Me (Otqcmcjen), fceten a be 
need. tiotfjtgt if!. 

Dat. P/u?% 
To whom. Den en. 

t see the children to whom you 3d) fef)e t>tc jltnbet, \> e n e n ©ti 
gave apples. 2Cepfe( gcge&cn fyaben. 

Of those. 23 c n tenen (dative). 

Of which people do you speak ] SSon rocfdjen 2cuten teben (Ste ? 
I speak 0/ tfAose whose children 3d) tet>e son ben e n (bcnjentgcn), 
have been assiduous. fceren JUnfcet fleiptg gcnwfcn (inb. 



DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE 
when it is used instead of either 
The demonstrative pronouns btefer, jener, the determi- 
native pronoun berjentge,or the relative pronoun toelcfyer. 
(See Obs. Lessons XII. and XIV.) 



Masculine. Feminine. 


Neuter. Plural for all genders. 


Nom. ber bte 


bag bte 


Gen. beflfen (be#) beren 


beflfen (be£) berer (beren) 


Dat. bem ber 


bem benen 


Ace. ben bte 


ba$ bte. 



Obs. B. In the genitive singular masculine and 
neuter, be$ is often used instead of beflen, chiefly in poe- 
try and compound words. 

Obs. C. When the definite article is used instead 
of irelcfyer, its genitive plural is not berer, but beren* 
(See Obs. Lesson XIV.) 

EXERCISES. 142, 

Did your cousin learn German 1 — He was taken ill, so that he 
could not learn it. — Has your brother learnt it ] — He had not a 
good master, so that he could not learn it. — Do you go to the ball 
this evening — I have sore feet, so that I cannot goto it. — Did you 
understand that Englishman 1 ? — I do not know English, so that I 
could not understand him. — Have you bought that horse ] — I had 
no money, so that I could not buy it. — Do you go into the country 
on foot ] — I have no carriage, so that I must go thither on foot. — 
Have you seen the man from whom I received a present] — I have 
not seen him. — Have you seen the fine horse of which I spoke to 
you] — I have seen it. — Has your uncle seen the books of which 



176 

you spoke to him] — He has seen them. — Hast thou seen the man 
whose children have been punished ] — I have not seen him. — To 
whom were you speaking when you were in the theatre? — J was 
speaking to the man whose Brother has killed my fine dog. — Have 
you seen the little boy whose father has become a lawyer 1 — I have 
seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ] — I have seen the 
people there whose horses and those whose carriage you bought.— 
Whom do you see now] — I see the man whose servant has broken 
my looking-glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent 
me money ] — I have not heard him. — Whom have you heard ] — 1 
have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. — Hast thou 
brushed the coat of which 1 spoke to you] — I have not yet brushed 
it. — Rave you received the money which you were wanting] — I 
have received it. — Have I the paper of which 1 have need ] — You 
have it. — Has your brother the books which he was wanting] — He 
has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose shop we 
have taken] — We have spoken to them. — Have you spoken to the 
physician whose son has studied German ] — I have spoken to him. 
— Hast thou seen the poor people whose houses have been burnt] — 
I hav^ seen them. — Have you read the books which we lent to 
you ? — We have read them. — What do you say of them ] — We say 
that tl.ey are very fine. — Have your children what they want] — 
They 1 ave what they want. 

143. 

Of wl ich man do you speak ] — I speak of the one whose brother 
has turned soldier. — Of which children did you speak? — I spoke 
of those whose parents are learned. — Which book have you read ] 
■ — I haye read that of which 1 spoke to you yesterday. — Which 
paper has your cousin] — He has that of which he has need. — 
Which fishes has he eaten ] — He has eaten those which you do not 
like. — Of which books are you in want ? — I am in want of those 
of which y„'i have spoken to me. — Are you not in want of those 
which I am reading] — I am not in want of them. — Is any one in 
want of the coats of which my tailor has spoken to me?— No one 
is in want of them. — Do you see the children to whom I have 
given cakes ] — I do not see those to whom you have given cakes, 
but those whom you have punished. — To whom have you given 
money ( — I have given some to those who gave me some. — To 
which children must one give books] — One must give some to 
those who learn well and who are good and obedient. — To whom 
do you give to et.t and to drink] — To those who arejiungry and 
thirsty. — Do you give anything to the children who are idle ]— I 
give them nothing. — What sort of weather was it when you went 
(ginqen) out ] — It was raining and very windy. — Do you give cakes 
to your pupils] — They have not studied well, so that I give them 
nothing. (See end of Lesson XXXIV. j 



185 



Have yon thrown a stone into 

the river 1 
1 have thrown one into it. 



Now. 

Where does the stone lie now ! 
It lies in the river. 



To draw, to pull. 
To drag. 

The evil, the pain, 
To hurt. 



r 



To hurt some one. 

The injury, -the damage, 
To cause {to do). 

To prejudice some one. 

It is a pity. 

Have you hurt that man 1 

I have not hurt him. 

Why have you hurt that man ) 

I have not hurt him. 
Does this hurt you? 
It does hurt me. 
Have I hurt you] 
You have not hurt me. 

Harm. 

Have I ever done you any harm) 

On the contrary. 
No, on the contrary, you have 

done me good. 
I have never done harm to any 

one. 
To do good to anyhody. 

To show — shown. 



To be good for the health, to be 
wholesome. 

That does me good. 



£abcn (Sic ctncn <Srctn in ben J(uf 

gciuorfcn ] 
3ch babe cincn fun cm geroorfen. 

(Obs. A. Lesson L.) 

9i uiu 

££o (ieqt nun ber @tein ? 
(St licgt in tern (tin) <sluf[e. 

3 1 e f) e n *. Imperf. § c g. 

<S d) ( e p p e n. 

ba? Scib. 

8»efi tbun*. 

Semanbem ctftctf-gu £etbet$ttu*« 

3euicmbeni ctn 2cit> than*, 

3cman$ctx£j$8ftf tbun*. 

3emanbem s M\c$ jufugen. 

ber (Scbaccn. 

3 u f it g c n , Dcrurfodben 

Semaftbem (Scbaben $ufugen. 

t <&s ifi ©chare, 

£aben dsie rtefcm Ratine etroaS $u 

&ctt>c ejethan 1 
3d) fabe tbm md)t§ $u Octbe ge* 

than. 
g&arum baben Sic btefcm $?anne 

ctn s 3etb qethan 1 
3d) babe trjui ntd)t$ 3?.cfe$ getfyan. 
Shut baS 3^acri rocb ? 
(£s tt)ut twit ruob. 
^abc id) Sbnen rfcch gct^an ? 
8'te baben mir ntd)t iveb aetfran. 

23 of ei?. . 

&aix id) S^twn jc 23ofc$ getfjan ? 

3m ©eqentbetl. 

£ftetn, tm ©egentbett, @ie baben mtt 

(SHites getr)an (enutefen). 
Scb habe nte 3emanbem etroaS $u 

Setb gctban. 
Semanbem ®utc© tbun* (erroeU 

fen*). 
(Srroetfen* — cnutefen. Imperf. er* 

rutce. 

3utrag(td)7 fi * 

" 3>tes tbut mir roebjL 
; DteS tft mir $utraglid). 



186 

W hat does the servant do with 2&a$ modbt t>er SScbtente nut feine* 

his broom ? g^fen 1 

He sweeps the room with it. (£r fcfjrt t>ag Simmer bamit au£. 

What does he wish to make out ££as rmll er au$ btejem £0(32 ma* 

of this wood ? d)cn ? 

He does not wish to make any- (St ivtU nidjtS fcarauS madjen. 

thing of it. 

To pass by the side of some one. 2Cn Semanfccm f orbetgcr)en *. 

I pass by the side of him. 3d) gefye an t()in Derbet. 

Have you passed by the side of @int> (Ste an metnem 23rufc>er fors 

my brother ? betgegangen 1 

I have passed by the side of him. 3d) bin an ir)m forbetgegangen. 

To ^row; «w;«y. SSegtuerfe n *. 

He has thrown away his money. (Sr fjat fein (3$ett) roeggcroorfen. 

Before. 18 r (dative and accusative). 

To pass before a place. 53or etnem Dtte f orbetgefyen *. 

To pass by a place. 2Cn etnem £)rte fotbetgefyen *• 

He has passed before my house. (5r tft for metnem |>aufe sorbetge* 

gangen. 
I have passed by the theatre. 3d) bin am Sweater f orbetgegans 

gen. 
He has passed before me. (Sr tjt for mir forbetgegangen. 

exercises. 148. 

How many times have you shot at that bird 1 — I have shot at it 
twice. — Have you killed it 1 — I have killed it at the second shot. — 
Have you killed that bird at the first shot 1 — I have killed it at the 
fourth. — Do you shoot at the birds which you (see) upon the houses, 
or at those which you see in the gardens ]— I shoot neither at 
those which I (see) upon the houses nor at those which I see in the 
gardens, but at those which I perceive upon the trees. — How many 
times have the enemies fired at us \ — They have fired at us several 
times. — Have they killed any one 1 — They have killed no one. — 
Have you a wish to shoot at that bird 1 — I have a desire to shoot at 
it. — Why do you not shoot at those birds 1 — I cannot, for I have 
no powder. — W^hen did the officer fire ? — He fired when his 
soldiers fired. — How many birds have you shot at? — I have shot 
at all that I have perceived, but I have killed none, for my powder 
was not good. 

149. 

Have you cast an eye upon that man 1 — I have cast an eye upon 
him. — Has your uncle seen you? — I have passed by the side of 
him, and he has not seen me, for he has sore eyes. — Has that man 
hurt you ] — No, Sir, he has not hurt me. — What must one do in 
order to be loved ] — One must do good to those that Wve done us 



197 

harm. — Have we ever done you harm 1 — No, you have on the 
contrary done us good. — Dc you do harm to any one] — I do no 
one any harm ] — Why have you' hurt Ihese children] — I have not 
hurt them. — Have I hurt you] — You have not hurt me, hut your 
children (have). — What have they done to you ) — They dragged 
me into your garden in order to beat me. — Have they beaten you ] 
— They have not beaten me, for I ran away. — Is it your brother 
who has hurt my son 1 — No, Sir, it is not my brother, for he has 
never hurt any one. — Have you drunk of (sen) that wine ? — I 
have drunk of it, and it has done me good. — What have you done 
with my book] — I have placed it on the table. — Where does it lie 
now ] — It lies upon he table. — Where are my gloves 1 — They are 
lying upon the chair. — W^here is my stick] — They (Sftcm) have 
thrown it into the river. — Who has thrown it into it ] (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON. — bier nnfr serljjigrt* 
Cation. 

To spend time in something. <Dte 3ctt nut ctroaS ju&rtngen * or 

fyinbttngen*. 

Imperf. brought. 33rad)te. 

What do you spend your time in] SOBomtt bringcn @ie tie 3ett $u ? 

Rule. A demonstrative, relative, or interrogative pro- 
noun is never used with a preposition, when it relates 
to an indeterminate thing. Instead of the pronoun, one 
of the adverbs ba, too is joined to the preposition ; thus : 
oar an, ft r an ba3 ; troran, for an tva$ ; tvcvanf, for auf 
tt>a3 ; toomit, for tmt n>a3, &c. (See Obs. B. and C, 
Lesson LIL) 

I spend my time in studying. Scb brittle trie 3ett mtt ©tutrircn $u. 
What has he spent his time in ] &Bctmt ijat et trie Sett gu^cbracbt ? 

To miss, to fail. S3 c r f c r) I c n, t> e r a b f a u m c n. 

aDcc ^aufmann r)at ta$ ©e(b $u 

brtnqen tterabjaumt (t>erfef)(t). 
&ct jlaufmann bat Detabfaumt (t>cr^ 
feb(t), fcas ©e(b $u ftnngetu 
You have missed your turn. " (&ic baben 3bre 9?etbc wrfeMt. 
You have failed to come to me ©te fyaben wrfebtt, ttcfen SOtforgett ;u 
this morning. nrir $u Eomroen. 

The turn, trie 3?etl)e. 

To hear. $ o r c n. 

To hear of some one. 83on 3cmanfc>em Ftfrcn. 



The merchant has failed to 
bring the money. 



18S 

Have yon heard of my friend ] Jpabcvi <BU tten mctntm Jrcunfce ge* 

horr? 
I have heard of him. 3'cb babe pen ibm cohort. 

Of whom have yon heard ? &>en twin bnbcn (Etc c^chort ? 

Have you heard nothing new? jpoben (Ste nicbt* s Ju'tu'6 gcl>2rt? 
1 hear that your father has ar- ^cb bore, t>o£ 3(jr &>ater anc^em* 
rived. men tf& 

To assure. 9Scrftd)crn (governs the dat.). 

Obs. The verb Derffdhern requires the dative of the 
person, when followed by the conjunction bag, expressed 
or anderstood ; otherwise it takes the accusative of the 
person, and the genitive of the thing, or the dative of 
the person and the accusative of the thing. 

!3cb rerftcfycrc @ic mctncS JBi'iffan* 
3cb wftcijerc bfynen metnen Set? 
(ton*. 

!©e febeben* — qcfcfocbcn 
r c n. Imperf. to lb € r f u%r. 

To happen, to meet with. W c 9 e c\ n c n (has fan* for its 

auxiliary). 

The fortune, happiness, fcn$ (SJIiict ; 

the misfortune, to? Itnqliicf. 

A great misfortune lias happened. (§6 t|t ein grepeg Itnqfttcf Q,cfcbeben. 
He has met with a great misfor- (£* tft ibm etn orcftcs Unhurt begegs 

tune. net (l^•t^crfar)rcn). 

I have met with your brother. 3d) bin Sbrem prater bcg;gnct» 

Are tnere many horses in this vil- ©ibt c$ ml spferbe in ttefcrn £>etf<? ? 
lage ? 

TAere. SDafelbft or b<u 

Therp is not a single good horse (5s gtbt fctn cin^tgeS gute^ 3>fctb ba* 

there, feftffc 

The village, t>a$ £>etf; 

single, cingtg. 

Are there many learned men in ©tbt e$ wt (Mcfirtc in #tanfretd) ? 

France ] 
There are a good many there. (5$ gtbt ft'br trtcte cn» 
There are no apples this year. (£$ gtbt fetne 2Cepfct &tcfc$ 3^. 

To oe 0/ wse, ^0 oe g-ood. So u g e n. 
To be good for something. 3u itivat taugeit 



189 

Of what use is that] 3Be$tt taucjt ca$ ? (Ota. C, Les- 

son LIL, and Rule, page 
187.) 
It is good for nothing. (5* tauat $u nicftt^. 

Tlie good for nothing fellow, ber $migctuet)t$ ; 

the fault, the defect, t>er gd)U*r, 
Is the stuff which you have 3ft free 3cug / ten Sic gefauft rjafcen, 

bought good ] QUtl 

No, it is good for nothing". ) c^ • ■• * ■ A# „; U o 

iNo, it is worth nothing. J ' ■ 

EXERCISES. 150. 

1 do not see my gloves ; where are they ] — They are ying in 
tlie river. — Who has thrown them into it '? — Your servant, because 
they were no longer good for anything. — What have yon done with 
your money ! — I have bought a house with it (r-anut). — What has 
the joiner done with that wood 1 — He has made a tahle and two 
chairs of it. — What has the tailor done with the cloth which you 
gave him 1 — He has made clothes of it for (far with the accus.) 
your children and mine. — What has the baker done with the flour 
which you sold him 1 — He has made bread of it for you and me. — 
Have the horses been found ] — They have been found. — Where 
have they been found I — They have been found behind the wood, 
on this side (Lesson L.) of the river. — 'Have you been seen by 
anybody ? — I have been seen by nobod}^. — Have you passed by 
anybody 1 — I passed by the side of you, and you did not see me. — 
Has any one passed by the side of you ]— No one has passed by 
the side of me. 

151. 

Do you expect (Lesson XLVII.) any one '? — I do expect my 
cousin, the officer. — Have you not seen him'? — I have seen him 
this morning ; he has passed before my house. — What does this 
young man wait for (Obs. C, Lesson LIL and page 187,? — 
He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for anything?- — am 
waiting for my book. — Is this young man wiring for his money 1 
— He is waiting for it. — Has the king passed (in the carriage) 
here (Met roerlKt) ? — He has not passed here, but before the the- 
atre. — Has he not passed before the new fountain ]-— He has 
passed there ; but I have not seen him. — What do you spend your 
time in ] — I spend my time in studying. — What does your brother 
spend his time in 1 — He spends his time in reading and playing. — 
Does this man spend his time in working]— He is a good for 
nothing fellow ; he spends his time in drinking and playing. — 
What did you spend your time in, when you were at Berlin? — ■ 
When I w 7 as at Berlin, I spent my time in studying, and rding on 
tiorseback. — What do your children spend their time in ] — They 
spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me what you owe me ! 
—1 cannot pay it to you, for our bailiff has failed to bring me my 



190 



money. — Why have you breakfasted without me? — You failed tc 
come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted without you. — 
Has the merchant brought you the stuff which you bought at his 
house (bet ifjm) ] — He has failed to bring it to me. — Has he sold 
it to you on credit ? — He has sold it to me, on the contrary, for 
cash. — Do you know those men V-*-L do not know them; but I 
think that they (e£) are good for nothing fellows, for they spend 
their time in playing. — Why did you fail to come to my father 
this morning ] — The tailor did not bring me the coat whieh he 
promised me, so that I could not go to him. 

152. 

Have you heard of any one 1 — I have not heard of any one, 
for I have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the 
officer who has killed a soldier ] — I have not heard of him. — Have 
you heard of my brothers 1 — I have not heard of them. — Of whom 
has your cousin heard 1 — He has heard of a man to whom a 
misfortune has happened. — Why have your scholars not done 
(gemad)t) the exercises'? — I assure you that they have done them. 
— What have you done with my book 1 — I assure you that I have 
not seen it. — Have you had my knives 1 — I assure you that I have 
not had them. — Has your uncle arrived already] — He has not 
arrived yet. — Will you wait till he returns ]— -I cannot wait, for I 
have long letters to write. — What have you heard new ] — I have 
heard nothing new. — Has the king assured you of his assistance ! 
— He has assured me of it (beffen, Obs. Lesson XVI.). — What has 
happened to you] — A great misfortune has happened to me. — 
W x haf? — I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me 
a blow with his stick. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



■i 



SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.— JFimf ntiif eeripigste 
Cation. 

How long is it since 1 SQB'tc fanqe iff e$ fd)0n, tap ? 

It is long since. (£$ tjl fdjon tange, tap. 

Is it long since you breakfasted ] 3ft c$ fcbon tancjc, tap <Ste gefrfi&ftfidft 

rjaben ? 
It is not long (it is a short time) (£g tft nod) ntd)t lange, tap id) gefrftfj* 

since I breakfasted. ftiicft fyabc. 

It is a great while since I break- (5$ tft fcbon ferjr tancje, tap id) ge* 

fasted. friibJTucft bofeft. 

I breakfasted an hour ago. 3d) babe t)oc cinet ©tunfce gcfrul): 

ftiicft. 

Obs. A. In speaking of time, the word ©tltltbe 



191 

hom\ a must be employed, and not the word \\l)V, which 
signifies watch. 

Two hours ago. 23or groet Stunben. 

Is it long since you saw him ] 3ft C$ f3)0n (angc, t>ap <Stc i^tt cjcfes 

ben (jabcn ? 
How long is it since you saw &£te (ongc tft c£, tap @tc tf)n gcfefjcn 

him ] ()abcn 1 

I mw him a year ago. 3d) babe ifyn t>ot ctncm 3ar)tc gcfc* 

ben. 
Two years ago. 95er $rpci Saljrcm 

An hour and a half ago. £3et anbettbalb (Stunben. 
Two hours and a half ago. 93 et t>rtttt)a(b <8tunben. ■ 

Is it long since you are in 3ft cS fdjen fangc, tag (Sic in $vanb 

France ] rctd) ftnb ? 

Have you been long in France 1 f (Stnb (Sic fd)on (ange in granf* 

rctd)? 
He has been in Paris these three C f (5r tft fett bret Sabren in spattg. 

years. £ f (gr tft feben bret 3af)rc in s pari£ 

How long is it since he was 2Bte (ange ift e$, bap ct fyiet roar ? 

herel 
He was here a fortnight ago. (5t roar t>or Meruit SSagcn fytcr. 

It is but a year since. (S$ ift erft cin Sarjr, tap. 

Ofo. I?. IfoZ is translated by ttur (Lesson XIX. ] 
when it relates to a quantity, and by cr jl when to time 

It is more than a year since. (5$ ift (anger aU cin 3abr, bap. 
It is hardly six months since. ($$ ftnb fcuim fecijg Senate, bap. 
It is nearly two years since. (5S ftnb ungefabr $wti Safytc, bap. 
It is almost a year since. (£g ift balb cin 3^/ bo&. 

I have been living here these two f 3$ roofync felt $tt>et 3a()rcn fytcr. 

years. 
How long have you had that f ££te fange b^ben jgfte ba» ^pferb ? 

horse ] 
I have already had it these five f 3d) fyafce c$ fcf)cn funf 3ar)re. 

years. 
It is already more than three (56 ftnb fefyen mcljr a{$ brci donate 

months since. ba$. 

I have not seen him for a year. 3d) bate i()n in ctncm Safyre ntcfy 

gefeben. 

Soon, almost. 93 a I b. 

A few hours ago. S3cr cinigen ©tunben. 

Half an hour ago. QScr einet batben iStunbc. 

A quarter of an hour ago. 95or cincr 23terte(ftunbc. 

* $)ie ^iunbe, the hour, is a feminine noun, and has it in the plural. 



192 

I hare seen him more than twen- 3cf) fyofce tr)n mcfyt otg $won$ta,mal 

ty times. • gefcbcn. 

More than a hundred times, SJletjt cits fyuntcrtmal. 

Since. (Sett (a preposition governing 

the dative). 
How long ? f © c 1 1 rc> a n n ? 

How long nas he heen here ! f ^ctt ruonn tft cv f)tct ? 
These three days. f ^ett tret Socmen. 

This month. f ©cit einem Senate. 

To cos*, jt c fi c n (is an impersonal verb 

governing the dative of the 
person)* 

How much does this book cost 2Btetriel feftct Sfynen fcicfeg S3ud)? 
you ] 

II costs me three crowns and aj 7.- . - «. . . v . ' . fc ■ lM r^^,,^ 
11/. *< ©$ fcitct mtr tret unt) cm en rjolbet* 

C Snoler. 

f ©lefer Sifdj foftct tr)m cd)tf)a(& <M* 

This table costs him seven! ten. 

florins and a half. j £>iefet Stjtf) feftet tnm ficbcn unt 

[ etrien r)a(bc» ®ulten. 

Ohs. B. The adjective bdb, half, is declined when 
before a substantive ; but it is not declined in fraction- 
al numbers, as attbertr)aI6 / one and a half, compounded 
of ber cmbere (jtoetie), the second, and ha\b, half; brttt* 
bal&, two and a half, compounded of ber brttte, the 
third, and tyalb, half. 

To purchase (to buy). (§ t n f: o u f e n. 

What have you purchased to- ££os fyofren (Sic fjeute etno/Fouft ? 

day ? 
I have purchased three pair of 3d) fiofrc tret $poor @?cbunc unt 

shoes, and two pair of boots. givet $)acir ©tiefet eincjefauft. 
Have you purchased anything £oben <Sie fyeute etv»a$ etngefauft 1 

to-day ! 

O&s. C The names of weights, measures, and 
quantities, as well as the word 9)?ann, man, meaning a 
soldier, are not used in the plural, when preceded by 
a noun of number. 

My father has bought twenty 9}?etn 9Sotcr not $nxtn$tcj $)funt 

pounds of sugar. 3»cfer qefauft. 

Three quires of paper. ©ret SBudb Ropier. 

i regiment of a thousand men. (Sin Regiment fen toufent 9J|ann. 



193 

The pound (weight), t>ct$ ^funb ; 

the dozen, fcas J)u(ient) ; 

the pair, to6 tyaax ; 

the quire of paper, fcas ibucb papier ; 

the foot (measure), ber Juft, t>ct (Scfylll)? 

the inch, fcer Sell ; 

the regiment, fcas 9?t\qtmcnt ; 

the ring, bcr dlh\$ ; 

the picture, fcaS ©emalfce. 

exercises. 153. 

Have you ever been in this village ? — I have been there several 
times. — Are there good horses in it ? — There is not a single one in 
it. — Have you ever been in that country 1 — I have been there once. 
— Are there mai^y learned men there ? — There are many there, but 
they spend their time in reading. — Are there many studious chil- 
dren in that village? — There are some, but there are also others 
who will not study. — Are the peasants of this village able to read 
and write] — Some are able to read, others to write and not to read, 
and many both to read and to write; there are a few who are 
neither able to read nor to write. — Have you done the exercises ? — 
We have done them. — Are there any faults in them ? — There are 
no faults in them, for we have been very assiduous. — Has your 
friend many children? — He has only one, but who is a good for 
nothing fellow, for he will not study. — In what does he spend his 
time ] — He spends his time in playing and running. — Why does 
his father not punish him] — He has not the courage to punish 
him. — What have you done with the stuff which you bought?-— 
I have thrown it away, for it was good for nothing. — Have you 
thrown away your apples ? — I tasted (them), and found them very 
good, so that I have eaten them. 

154. 

Have you been long in Paris? — These four years. — Has your 
bro her been long in London 1 — He has been there these ten years. 
— Is it leng since you dined? — It is long since I dined, but not 
long since I supped. — How long is it since you supped ? — It is 
two hours and a half. — Is it long since you received a letter from 
your father ? — It is not long since I received one. — How long is it 
since you received a letter from your friend who is in Germany ?— 
It is three months since I received one. — Is it long since you spoke 
to the man whose son has lent you money ? — It is not long since I 
spoke to him. — Is it long since you saw your parents ? — It is a 
great while since I saw them. — Has the son of my friend been 
living long in your house ? — He has been living there a fortnight 
(tneqcfyn Sage). — How long have you had these books? — I have 
had them these three months. — How long is it since your cousin 
set out ? — It is more than a month since he set out. — What is be» 

a 



194 

corns of the man who spoke English so well? — 1 do not krurw 
what is become of liim, for it is a great while since I saw him.— 
Is it long since you heard of the officer who gave your friend a 
stab with his sword ? — It is more than a year since 1 heard of him. 
— Hnw long have you been learning German ? — I have been learn- 
ing it only these three months. — Are you already able to speak it? 
—You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of 
the French noblemen been learning it long ? — They have been 
learning it these five years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — 
Why can they not speak it ? — They cannot speak it, because they 
are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it well? — They 
have not a good master, so that they do not learn it well. 

155. 

Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German with 
(bd) the same master with whom we learnt it? — I have not seen 
him for nearly a year. — How long is it since that child ate ? — It 
ate a few minutes (Lesson XLVII. Note d ) ago. — How long is it 
since those children drank ? — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. 
— How long has your friend been in Spain ? — He has been there 
this month. — How often have you seen the king ? — I saw hirn more 
than ten times when I was in Paris. — When did you meet my 
brother ?— I met him a fortnight ago. — Where did you meet him ?— 
In Qiuf) the great square (SpTctg) before the theatre. — Did he do you 
any harm ? — He did me no harm, for he is a very good boy. — Has 
your son long been able to read ? — These two days only. — With 
(SSet) whom has he learnt it?— He has learnt it with (Oct) the Ger- 
man tutor. — How long have you been spending your time in study- 
ing ? — Nearly these twenty years. — Have you purchased anything 
to-day ? — I have purchased something. — What have you bought ? 
— I have bought three casks of wine and thirty pounds of sugar. — 
Have you not bought any stockings ] — I have bought nine pair of 
them. — Have you also bought handkerchiefs ? — I have bought two 
dozen 61 them. — Why have you not bought gold rings ? — I could 
not buy anything more, for I had no more money. — Are thei? many 
soldiers in your country ? — There is a regiment of three thousand 
men there. — How long have I kept your cousin's money ? — You 
have kept it almost a year. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.— 0*cf)3 XXtib zct^i^U 
Cation. 

Just now. (So cOcn. 

t kaye just seen your brother 3d) f)abe fc cfcen Srjren S3rutw gefc* 



195 



He has just written. 

The men have just arrived. 



(St \)c\t fc efren gcfcftttefcen. 

£>ie Scute finD jc eben anacfemmnw 



To spend money. 2(u$a.cben*. 

How much have you spent to- S&wtuel Ijafccn ®te fycutc au&jcaeben? 
day? 

To 5jt?enc? (to eotf, £o consume), 33ct$ef)tcru 

What am I to pay 1 t 2$as babe id) t?er3ebrt ? 

How much has he spent at the f 'Btemcl Ijat et bet I) cm SBirt^e 

inn] t>et$ebtt? 

He has fifty crowns a month to f <5t t)at t»cn SDienat fttnfttg S^atct; 

live upon. gu t>er$ef)tcru 

To squander, to dissipate, £>etfcf)tt)enfc>etu 
to lavish. 

He has squandered all his (St fiat fcin gan$c$ SSetmb'gen Wt* 

wealth. 
The landlord, the innkeeper, 
the wealth, the fortune, 
entire, whole. 



What countryman are you 1 

From Venice. 
From London. 
I am from Dresden. 



febreenbet. 
bet SBttth ; 
t>a$ SBetmogcn ; 
gems. 

"t 2£ebet ftnt> ©te? £Bo ftnb 6ie 

! fat? 

_2Ba$ fut ein Cant>Smarm a ftab.Stc? 

25cn (au$) QSenefctg. 
2>cn (aue) £ent>en. 
Set) bin aue 2)rc$ben. 



Obs. A. The syllable er is the characteristic termi- 
nation of the masculine gender, b and signifies the per- 
son that performs or is accustomed to perform the thing 
expressed by the verb. This syllable joined to the 
name of a town or country, forms a substantive de- 
noting the man born in such a town or country. Ex, 



He is a saddler, 

a baker, 

a locksmith, 
the lock, 
the saddle, 
the key, 



et ift ein ©attfet ; 
ein SVacfer; c 
ctn ©ctyoljet ; 
tag ©'cbtejS ; 
t>ix (battel ; 
fcet eci)Utf[e(. 



.» The plural of ber SanbSmatm, the countryman, one of the same country, 
k SattbSleute. Its feminine is £artb£mamurt, country-woman, a woman of the 
game country. This word must not be mistaken for bet gatlbmcmtt, the coun- 
tryman, farmer, rustic, the plural of which is Scmbleute. 

b For this reason most substantivss of this termination are of the mascu* 
line gender. 

« Derived from latftn, to bake. 



He is from Berlin, 

Are you an Englishman? 

Whence do you come? 
I come from Pa*ris. 

To serve, to wait upon. 



196 

f (St tft ctn ffii'tttncr. 
©tnt) ©i« cin (Sn^lcmbet* 

< 2£of)cr fommen ©te ? 
( 5B© fommen 6'te ber ? 
Set) fonmic twa s pan0. 



£ £) t e n c n (g 
< £$ e b i c n e n 

( sative). 



governs the dative). 
(governs the accB 



To serve some one, or tc wait 3 e m a n b e m b i e n C tn 

upon some one. 
To be in one's service. S3 c i 3 e m a n b e m bienett. 

Has he been in your service ] £at cr bet Sbncn gebtcnt ? 

Does he serve you well ] Skbimt ct @tc cmt ? 

He serves me very well. (5r bebtent mid) fefjr gut. 

This is to no purpose (of no use). + £>a$ burnt ju nicfytS. 

Do you choose any of it 1 f Siann id) S^nen bamtt bicnen ? 

I do not like it. } V ~ .. .« .,, v 

It will not do for me. J t ®«mtt tft nut nuftt gcbtent. 

fSSerbcrben* (verb. act. and 
rp ) J neut. irreg.). 

I0S P 0U - I3u@d)anben m a d) e n (a vul- 

L gar expression). 

£>u wtbtrbft, cc setbtrbt. (Imp. 

t)crbarb.) 
©tc rjaben metn 95uc6 ttcrborben. 
SErin S3ud) tft wborben Qu ©charts 

ben gemacbt). 
#at cr mciricn Jput serbotben ($u 

(Scfjanbcn Qemctcfyt) ? 

93efd)abtgcn. 

iOtefet j&ut ftef)t Sbnen flttt 
2Btc flcfjt tnir btcfer £uf ? 
C£r ftef>t Sfynen ntcfyt gut. 
2aterlicbjt. d 
£Bunberfd)6n. 



Thou spoilest — he spcils. 

You have spoiled my book. 
My book is spoiled. 

Has he spoiled my hat ] 



To damage. 

That hat fits you well. 
How does this hat fit me] 
It does not fit you. 

Most lovely, charming. 

Admirably. 

To dress, to Jit, to sit well. SI t C i b C tt. 

Obs. B. The verb ffetbett, when it signifies to fit, to 
sit well, is neuter ; but when it means to dress, to clothe, 
it is active, and governs the accusative in both signi- 
fications. 



* Siller is the genitive plural of the word all, all. It is sometimes thus 
Wned to the superlative to give it more strength. 



197 



That hat fits you admirably well. 

That coat fits him. 

My father clothes me. 

God clothes the poor. 

The man with the blue coat. 

How was the child dressed? 

It was dressed in green. 

How large! 

Of what size ! 
How high ! of what height ! 
How deep ! of what depth ! 
Of what height is his house ! 
It is nearly thirty feet high. 



£>tcfcr. £ut flcttet <&\c atterttcfcft 

£>iefer meet H'cifeet tfm gut. 

93Mn $ater flftfcct mid). 

G5ett flctfcet tie 2Crmcn. 

2)er SHctnn nut torn bkuicn £Uit>e. 

ffiMc roar tas .fitnt gcHctfcet? 

f (56 roar a,tun % qeHe'tfcet. 



I pte cjrep ? 



2Bte bed) ? 
"SL^tc ttcf ? 

SGtMe bed) ift fcin $au§ ? 
©5 ift ungefabt fcretfHg gup r)ecfy 
(Lesson LXV. Obs.^C.) 

True. 2£ a b r. 

. s it true that his house has been 3ft e$ roafjr, tap fein $a\l$ afccjci 

burnt ! brannt ift ? 

It is true. (S6 ift roabt. 

Is it not ! (meaning, Is it not f 2fad)t ix>al)t ? 
true!) 
The philosopher, tcr SBcftroetfc, ten ^Fjtfefepr; (g<n, 

en). 

EXERCISES. 156. 

Who is the man who has just spoken to you ! — He is a learned 
man. — What has the shoemaker just brought! — He has brought the 
boots and shoes w T hich he has made us. — Who are the men that 
have just arrived ! — They are philosophers. — Of what country are 
they ! — They are from London. — Who is the man who has just 
started ! — He is an Englishman, who has squandered away (rcr- 
(tbrventet) all his fortune in France. — What countryman are you !— 
I am a Spaniard, and my friend is an Italian. — Wilt thou go for 
the locksmith ! — Why must I go for the locksmith! — He (£)crfclbc) 
must make rne a key, for I have lost the one belonging to my room 
(ten mctncS Simmers). — Where did your uncle dine yesterday ! — • 
He dined at the innkeeper's.- — How much did he spend ! — He spent 
three florins. — How much has he a month to live upon! — He has 
two hundred florins a month to live upon. — Must I go for the sad- 
dler! — You must go for him, for he must mend the saddle. — Have 
you seen any one at the market ! — I have seen a good many people 
there. — How were they dressed ! — Some were dressed in blue, 
some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. 

157. 

Who are those men ! — The one who is dressed in grey is my 
neighbour, and the one with the black coat the physician, whose 
son has given my neighbour a blow with a stick. — Who is the man 



198 



with the green coat? — He is one of my relations. — Are you fioui 
Berlin ? — No, I am from Dresden. — How much money have your 
children spent to-day 1 — They have spent hut little ; they have 
spent but one florin. — Does that man serve you well 1 — He does 
serve me well ; but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take 
this servant? — I am willing to take him if he will serve me. — Can 
I take this servant? — You can take him, for he has served me very 
well. — How long is it since he (first) served you? — It is but two 
months since. — Has he served you long ? — He has served me (for) 
six years. — How much did you give him a year (fees Jabtes) % — I 
gave him five hundred francs without clothing him. — Did he board 
(2C£) with (bet) you? — He did board with me. — What did you give 
him to eat? — I gave him whatever (sen aflem, voaz) 1 ate. — Were 
you pleased with him 1 — I was much (fcfyt) pleased with him. (Seo 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Submit nxib 0*dfti06te 

iUrtiott. 



To trust with* 2C n t> c r t r a tt e n. 

To entrust, to confide, to commit SSertraucn. 
in confidence. 

I trust you with my money. 3d) ttettrauc Sfinen mctn (5kft> an. 

He has trusted me with his mo- (St fjat mir fetn ©c(t> an&ctttaut. 

ney. 
I entrust you with a secret. 3d) ttetttaue S&nen cm ($5ef)ctm* 

nip. 
To unbosom one's self to one. f <Std) Semanbem ttetttaucn. 



The secret, 
To keep anything secret. 

I have kept it secret. 

Secret (adjective). 



fca$ ©ef)ctmm9 (plur. c a )« 
@tn?a$ gebctm fatten. 

I nap erf. f)te(t. 
3d) babe eg gc&ctmgcljaltctu 
©efyctm. 

25 e 1 1 a g e n. 



To pity* 

With all my heart. f SScn gan$cm Jbcr^cn. 

Do you pity that man? 95e!Iagcn <$k frtcfen 9}?ann? 

I do pity him with all my heart. 3$ beftoge i()n sen gan^cm #ct» 

Sen. 



To offer — offered. 
I offer it you. 



2Cntucten* — angefcoten. 
Imperf. t. 

3d) butt c$ 3vncn an. 



* Neuter nouns terminating in % add e to all cases of tho plural withoul 
•oftening the radical vowel. 



199 

From. $ u t (a preposition governing 

the accusative). 

_ . -_ r it- C^crqc fur .etroaS traaen* 

To take care of something. £ ^ ^ 2Cd)t ^ m J en *. 

Masc. Neut. 

To take care of it. j gg g£jf ft* j fo e , 6eforgen . 

To take care of the hat. £>cn £ut in 2£cf)t ncftmcn*. 

Imp erf. nabm. 
Do you take care of your clothes] 9lci)tmn dsic 3bre jlfduct in 2Cc^t ? 
I do take care of them. f 3d) nerjmc ftc in 2£d)t. 

Obs. A. There are in German many substantives, 
adverbs and other words and expressions which form 
one signification with the verb, as : cwgtt>ertbtg tertten, to 
learn by heart ; b gent effort*, to like to eat (Lesson 
LIV.) ; fdmtbtg fein*, to owe (Lesson XL VII.), &c. These 
are placed exactly like the separable particles (Lesson 
XXV.), but are never joined to the verb. 



C 2Betton @te fur mem $)fevt> f<v« 
Will you take care of my horse 1 < gen ? 

( SSftHen (Sie mem g)fert> befbrgen ? c 

: will take care ef it. \ 2* *«J *?? % ^ n ' 

} Sdft will e$ fcefergen. 

To take care. Bergen, ftefotgen. 

The merchant of Hamburg. £)ct hamburger- .ftaufmann. 

Obs. B. The genitive of names of towns is gener- 
ally expressed in German by an adjective. This is 
formed by ad ling the syllable er to the name, and is 
indeclinable. Ex. 

Singular. Plural. 

f Nom. ber ?eipjtcjer ©tubent — bie^ ?etp* 
The student I Gen. be3 ?expgtger ©tubenteit — ber I jiger 
of Leipzic. | Dat. bem ^eipjtger ©tubentert - ben [ <£tu* 
l^Acc. ben 2eipjtger ©tubenteu — btej bentem 

b This and the ahove examples show that such a construction is not alto 
fether unusual in English. 
c The first of these two expressions is the best. 



200 

The citizen (burgess) of London, fc>cr Convener SStirqer ; 
the citizen of Paris, bet SParifcr Spftrgcr ; 

the beer of ktrasburg, fraS ©trap burger SBtcr. 

exercises. 158. 

Are there many philosophers in your country? — There are as 
many there as in yours. — How does this hat fit me 1 — It fts you 
very well.— -How does this hat fit your brother 1 — It fits him ad- 
mirably.- — Is your brother as tall (oreV) as you 1 — He is taller than 
I, but I am older than he. — How high is this man? — He is five 
feet, four inches high, — How high is the house of our landlord? — 
It is sixty feet high. — Is your well de«p 1 — Yes, Sir, for it is fifty 
feet deep. — How long have those men been in your father's service 1 
* — They have been in his service already more than three years.— 
Has your cousin been long at Paris ? — He has been there nearly 
six years. — Who has spoiled my knife? — Nobody has spoiled it, 
for it was spoiled when we were in want of it. — Is it true that youi 
uncle has arrived 1 — I assure you that he has arrived. — Is it true 
that the king has assured you of his assistance ] — 1 assure you that 
it is *rue. — Is it true that the six thousand men whom we w T ere ex- 
pecting have arrived ? — I have heard so. — Will you dine with us? 
— I cannot dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brother 
drink a glass (of) wine ? — He cannot drink, for, I assure you, he 
has jut t drunk. — Do you throw away your hat 1 — I do not throw it 
away, /or it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat]—- 
He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — There are many 
learned men in Berlin, are there not (ntcbt roabr) 1 asked Cuvier a 
man from Berlin (frer SBcr(tncr). Not so many as when you were 
there, answered the man from Berlin. 

159. 

Why do you pity that man ? — I pity him, because he has trusted 
a merchant of Hamburg with his money, and the man (Mefcr) will 
not return it to him. — Do you trust this citizen with anything] — I 
do not trust him with anything. — Has he already kept anything 
from you 1 (Sbncn etrvas bebatten). — I have never trusted him with 
anything, so that he has never kept anything from me. — Will you 
trust my father wih your money 1 — I will trust him with it. — What 
secret has my son entrusted you with ] — I cannot entrust you with 
that with which he has entrusted me, for he has desired (bitten*) 
me to keep it secret. — Whom do you entrust with your secrets ] — 
I entrust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them. — Has 
your brother been rewarded ] — He has on the contrary been pun- 
ished ; but I beg you to keep it secret, for no one knows it. — What 
has happened to him 1—1 will tell you what has happened to him, 
if you promise me to keep it secret. — Do you promise me to keep 
it secret ] — I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. (Sea 
•nd of Lesson XXXIV.) 



201 



SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON—fccfe anir 0«h ? ig S te 
Cmion. 

Each man. 3^ cc gjjcnfch. 

Each child. Setes; £tnfc. 

Every one. Scccrmann. 

I he whole world. £>k gartjc 2Bclt. 

Ofo. A Sefcermamt adds t in the genitive, and re- 
mains invariable in the other cases, thus : 

TNom. Sebermaittt. 

Every one, every body. J £ EN> 3*cnnonn*. 

j Dat. Sebermcmn. 
(^Acc. Sebermamt. 

Every thing (meaning all). 2( ( 1 c « . 

Obs. B. Me#, all, taken substantively, is put in the 
neuter gender singular. Ex. ■ \ ^ 

He knows every thing. @ r f onn Me ^ 

He is fit for any thing. | @ r ^ a „ flH ^ ^ gc( , r(1Ucftcn . 

w^« C u ® a% whoIe ' entire ' is used wit h the article, 
Dut all, all, is never used with it. 

The whole town. ©ic qm]C @tnbt> 

J he whole society. Sit g aiye ©efcltfcliaft. 

His whole wealth. ) _, . l 

All his fortune. J ® Cin 9«iW$ aSccnto'scn. 

T waTk 1 in) ( , meanin8 ' the plaCe to ta ®*> a wm ; 

th. concert,' _ Gcnccrt; 

the walk (meamng the walking), fccr epajteroonfl. 

walk W r e a r t e tr" y Pe °^ le inthe ®* marcn F f8 «* «* fcm Spa. 
I have cut his finger. t 3cb \l jjj H^ 9 e, 

He has cut my leg. t g „ flt „, id) } „ ^ ^ ^ ^ 

£ has SifoC ""^ ilr^ ^Wniftb 

Entirely. g^ff" ?£ ^"^ 

To 5nn^ along with one. OT 1 1 6 r t n 9 c n *. 

Have you come quite alone ? ein „ @i f flflnj flM „ 9cfcmmm ? 



202 

Obs. D. Sfffem, as a conjunction, has the same signifi- 
cation as abev, but ; as an adverb it signifies alone. 

No, I have brought all my men Sftetn, id) f)abe alle metne Scute nut* 

along with me. CjCbracbt. 

He has brought all his men along (Sv hat alie jetne Scute nutgebtadjt. 

with him. 
Have you brought your brother £ctfren v£te 3&rcn 23tufccr nutges 

along with you ] brad)t? 

I have brought him along with 3d) Ijabc tfyn nutgebtad/t. 

me. 
Have you told the groom to bring £aben ®U bem (Stallf ncd)t grfagt, nil* 

me the horse ? cas 5>ferb $u bttngen ? 

The groom, t>er ©tollfncdjt. 

'Unmet t, in bcr itt a fj c (go- 
verns the genitive). 
Near. \ 5$ e t (governs the dative). 

91 e b e n (governs the dative and 
accus.). 

Near me. 9?ebcn nur. 

f 33et tern Jcuer. 
Near the fire. \ 2(m Setter. 

[ &>or bent geucr. 
Near the castle. Unnpctt t>e$ (Sd)toffc& a 

Where do you live 1 &i>o roofynen (Sic ? 

I live near the castle. 3d) tpcf)ne unnxtt beg (Sd)teffe& 

What are you doing near the fire 1 £Bct6 tfyun ©ie bet t)cm gvuet ? 

To fall. g alien (takes fern for its auxi- 

liary). 

Thou fallest— he falls. £u fattfl — er fffttt 

Fallen. ©efallcn. 

Fell (Imperf.). fjfat 

To drop (meaning to let fall), fallen ( a f f c n ** 

Has he dropt anything 1 &aX er etroaS fallen laffen ? 

He has not dropt anything. (&v Ijat ntd)t$ fallen (affen. 

To hinder, to prevent. 23crf)tnbetn. 

You hinder me from sleeping. <ste ttevfytnbern mid) $u fdjlafen. 

EXERCISES. 160. 

Whom do you pity ?— I pity your friend — Why do you pity 
him ? — I pity him because he is ill. — Do the merchants of Berlin 

• $a8 @c$foji/ the castle, is declined exactly like fca* gc^Iog, the lock. 



203 

pity anybody ]-^They pity nobody. — Do you offer me anything ?— 
I offer you a gold ring. — What has my father offered you ] — He 
has offered me a fine book. — To whom do you offer those fine 
horses ? — -I offer them to the French officer. — Do you offer that fine 
carriage to my uncle ? — I do offer it to him. — Dost thou offer thy 
pretty little dog to these good children ] — I do offer it to them, for 
I love them with all my heart. — What have the citizens of Stras- 
burg offered youl — They have offered me good beer and salt-meat 
(gVfatgcnc'S Jktjcb). — To whom do you offer money ? — I offer some to 
those Parisian citizens, who have assured me of their assistance. — 
WiJ you take care of my clothes ] — T will take care of them. — Wilt 
thou take care of my hat] — I will take care of it. — Are you taking 
care of the book which I lent you ] — I am taking care *f it. — Will 
this man take care of my horse ? — He will take care of »t. — Who 
will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will take ca.e of him. 
— Does your servant take care of your horses ] — He does take care 
of them. — Is he taking care of your clothes ] — He is taking care of 
them, for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk 
Strasburg beer ? — I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate 
Leipzic bread ] — It is almost three years since I ate any. 

161. 

Have you hurt my brother-in-law ! — I have not hurt him ; aut he 
has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ]-— With the 
knife which you had lent him. — Why have you given that boy a 
blow with your fist ?— Because he hindered me from sleeping.— 
Has anybody hindered you from writing] — Nobody has hindered 
me from writing; but I have hindered somebody from hurting your 
cousin. — Has your father arrived ] — Every body says that he has 
arrived ; but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt 
your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have they 
cu. off this man's leg] — They have cut it off entirely. — Are you 
pleased with your servant ] — I am much (fefjr) pleased with him, 
for he is fit for anything. — What does he know? — He knows every 
thing. — Can he ride on horse-back ] — He can. — Has your brother 
retur»e-. at last from Germany ] — He has returned thence, and has 
brought you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me 1 
— He has told him to bring it to you. — W T hatdo you think (fagcn) of 
(}u) that, horse? — I think (facje) that it is a fine and good one, and 
(I) beg you to lead it into the stable. — In what did you spend your 
time yesterday] — I went to the public walk (fret ^pa$n'rptci£), and 
aftei wards to the concert.— Were there many people in the public 
walk] — There were many people there. 

162. 

What did you see at the concert ? — I saw many people. — What 
did you do after the concert] — I went to the inn (tat QBtvtr)sljau$) 
in order to dine. — Have you dined well ] — I have dined very well. 



204 

but 1 have spent too much. — How much have you spent 1 — I have 
spent nearly two florins and a half. — Is the fare (Spetfet man) good 
at your inn 1 — it is very good ; but every thing is so dear, that one 
must be rich to dine there. — Have you dropt anything] — I have 
dropt nothing; but my cousin dropt some money. — Who picked it 
up ] — Some men who were passing by picked it up. — Have they 
returned it to him ] — They have returned it to him, for they were 
good people. — Where were you going to when I met you this morn- 
ing'? — I was going to my uncle. — Where does he live? — He lives 
near the castle.- — What news has (faaf) your uncle 1 — He has no 
news. — W 7 hat has happened to him? — A little misfortune has hap- 
pened to him.— Will you tell me what lias happened to him ! — I 
will tell it you ; but I beg you to keep it secret. — I promise you to 
tell it to nobody. — Will you tell me now what has happened to 
him ] — He fell as (ate) he was going to the theatre. — Is he ill ? — 
He is very ill. — I pity him from my heart, if he is ill. — Have you 
succeeded in finding a hat that fits you well ? — I have succeeded in 
finding one, — Haw does it fit youl* — It fits me admirably. (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SIXTY-NINTH LESSON.— Jfam tmb 0*^13*1* 

Cecticm. 

Far. SBett. 

How far ? 3&te rcett ? 

How far is it from here to Ber- &3ie ruett tft e$ son f)tet nacfj !8et* 

lin? tin? 

Is it far from here to Berlin 1 3ft e$ toctt »en r)tet nacr) SSetftn ? 
It is far. ($$ tft tuett. 

It is not far. @$ tft nicbt ro'ctt. 

How many miles is it 1 SBtetfieJ tffteUen ftnb c$ ? 

It is twenty miles. (56 ftnb jtoktify Action. 

The mile, bte 90frt(e (a feminine noun a ). 

It is almost a hundred and thirty ©§ ftnb bctnahe hunt>err unb fcrctfng 

miles from here to Berlin. SOtfetlen rcn bier nacb Berlin. 

It is nearly a hundred, miles from (5$ ftnb uno,efd'nr bunbett SOU'lUn t)0lt 

Berlin t: Vienna. Berlin riacr) &Bten. 

To like better. £ i c ft c r m S g c n. b 

Part, past gemod)t* 
Imperf. mocbte. 

• like betfer, thoi likest better, 3>cl) tnaq fteber, bu ntaajt ttefcet, it 
he likes better. mag iiebet. 

» A German mile fi equal to four English miles and a half. 

k ZkHx is the comparative to gent. (See Lessons XXXIX. and UV.) 



205 

f Set) mag lieber bier bktben ate au$i 
I like staying here better than ! o/ben. 



:t) au$* 



HKtJ SLd^lHg licit? UCUCi man i vjn v... 

going out. 1 3cb bfribC lU'fccr r)tcr, m bag ic 

i &<¥ 

(^(Oi)rn ©tc lieber febmben ate fprcs 
cben ? 
©cbrciben Sic lieber, ate t>ap ©ic [pre* 
cben ? 
!3cb mag lieber frrechen ate fcbtcU 
ben. 
3d) fpred)C lieber, a(S tap id) fd)rci* 
be. 
He likes to play better than to <gr mag lieber fpielcn ate jlubu 

study. ren. 

He likes to do both. (Sr tbut twfctS pern. 

I like beef better than mutton, f 3d) eft? lieber ftinfc ate Sd)op* 

fenflotfcb.c 
He likes beer better than wine, f @r tvtnft (ieber 93tor at* 8©ctn. 
Do you like bread better than f (Sffen ©tc lieber 23ret> 0(6 Stfe 

cheese] fe? 

I like neither the one nor the 3d) cfic Icing ccn beifcen gent. 

other. 
I like tea as much as coffee. 3d) trtnfe cben fo gern Ztyl W\t 

Coffee: 
The calf, fca£ £alb. 

Qw*c£, fas*. (55 e f cb w i n b, f d) n c 1 1 

Slow, slowly. £ a n 3 f a m. 

He eats quicker than I. (Sr tft gefdbttnnfccr ate id). 

J)a you learn as fast as 1 1 Serum ©tc fo (dwell tote id) ? 

1 learn faster than you. 3d) (erne fcbneller ate (Sic. 

1 do not understand you, because 3d) nerftebe ©ic tud)t, will ©tc jU 
you speak too fast. fcbnell fprcdjen. 

Cheap. SBoblfctf. 

Dors he sell cheap ? SSerfaufr cr roeblfeif ? 

He does not sell dear. (5r wrfauft ntcbt tbeucr. 

He has sold to me very dear. (£r t)ut mil fefjr. tt>cucr scrfauft. 

So. © c. 

So mwc/i. ©0 Diet 

c When two or more compounds terminate, in the same component word, 
this is joined only to the last, and a German hyphen (-) is placed after the 
others Ex. ber Qin- unb 5lu3tfano,, the entrance and exit; cr ift etn fitter 
£piad)= utto Scfcretblebrer, he is a good master of languages and of writing; 
Sfttnbs unb ecbopfenfieifcb, beef and mutton; auf* unb juinacfoen, to open and 
to shut; instead of ber (Jtngano, unb Slugqang, ber Sptadjlebrer unb ed?mb* 
lefyrer, StinbjUijty un^ ©c$opfeufletfc$, aufmatyen unb $umad;en. 



206 

This man sells every thing so 3Mefcr Sfflann ttetfauft oTTe^fc teener 
very dear that one cannot buy bap man ntctjts fret ttjm faufen 
any thing of him. farm. 

[O^ In & sentence in which the verb ought to stand 
at the end (Lesson XL VII.), when the auxiliary feiu* 
or werben*, or one of the verbs biirfen*, fonnen*, lafjeit*, 
tttogcn*, mitfien*, folfett*, ttoHen*, is added to an infini- 
tive, it must be placed immediately after that infini- 
tive, as is seen in the above example. 

I do not know what you wish to 3cb roctjj htd)t> roaS @te fagen tx>ot» 

say. ten. 

You speak so fast that I cannot &'w fprecben fo febnett, bap td> <Ste 

understand you. ntcbt Derjlebcn 6ann. 

I assure you that he wishes to 3d) serftebcte (Sic, tap et @te (pre* 

speak to you. cben will 

To drink. Sri n f en*. 

Drank. Ztant (Imperi ). 

Do you drink tea or coffee % Stinfen Sic Sfyee ober .ftaffee ? 

I drink neither the one nor the 3d) trinfe fetaS Don fcctben. 

other. 
What do you drink in the morn- SBaS trinfen Ste bc£ 93?otCjcn$ ? 

ing? 

EXERCISES. 163. 

How far is it from Paris to London? — It is nearly (frctnabe) * 
Hundred miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Ham- 
burg 1 — It is far. — Is it far from here to Vienna 1 — It is almosi a 
aundred and forty miles from here to Vienna. — Is it further from 
Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzie to Berlin 1- — It is further from 
Berlin to Dresden than from Leipzie to Berlin. — How far is it from 
Paris to Berlin 1 — It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from here 
to Berlin. — Do you intend to go to Berlin soon 1 — I do intend to go 
thither soon. — Why do you wish to go this time 1 — In order to buy 
good books and a good horse there ; and to see my good friends.— 
Is i* long since you were there 1 — It is nearly two years since I was 
there. — Do you not go to Vienna this year? — 1 do not go thither, 
for it is too far from here to Vienna. — Is it long since you saw 
your Hamburg friend 1 — I saw him hut a fortuight ago. — Do youi 
scholars like to learn by heart] — They do not like to learn by 
heart ; they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. — - 
Do you like beer better than cider? — I like cider better than beer. 
— Does your brother like to play 1 — He likes to study better than 
io play. — Do you like meat better than bread? — I like the latter 
better than the former. — Do you like to drink better than to eat 1 
—I like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink 



207 

bettor than to eat. — Does your brother-in-law like meat better tba» 
fish ] — He likes .fish better than meat. — Do you like to * n-ite better 
than to speak] — I like to do both. — Do you like fowl better than 
fish 1 — Do you like good honey better than sugar] — I like neither. 

164. 

Does your father like coffee better than tea % — He likes neither. 
— What do you drink in the morning ]— I drink a glass of water 
with a little sugar; my father drinks good coffee,' my younger bro- 
ther good tea, and my brother-in-law a glass of good wine. — Can 
you understand me] — No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will you 
be kind enough (|"e gut jVtn) not to speak so fast (langfamcr ui fvrcs 
cbcn) ? — I will not speak so fast if you will listen to me. — Can you 
understand what my brothei tells you ] — He speaks so fast, that I 
cannot understand him. — Can your pupils understand you] — They 
understand me when I speak slowly ; for in order to be understood 
one must speak slowly. — Why do you not buy anything of that 
merchant] — I had a mind to buy several dozen of handkerchiefs, 
some cravats, and a white hat of him ; but he sells so dear that I 
cannot buy anything of him. — Will you take me to another ? — I 
will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of last year. 
— Does he sell as dear as this (one) ] — He sells cheaper. — Do you 
like going to the theatre better than going to the concert] — I do 
like going to the concert as well as going to the theatre ; but I do 
not like going to the public walk, for there are too many people 
there. — Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish ? 
— They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn Ger- 
man. — Do they like to speak better than to write s — Tftey like to do 
neither. — Do you like mutton ] — I like heef better than mutton. — 
Do your children like cake better than bread ] — They like both. — 
Has he read all the books which he bought ? — He bought so many 
of them, that he cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some 
letters ] — I have written so many of them, that I cannot write any 
more. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTIETH LESSON.— 0kben?igst£ Union. 

OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. * 

When the action falls upon the agent, and the ob- 
jective case refers to the same person as the nomina- 
tive, the verb is called reflexive. 

In reflexive verbs the pronoun of the object is of the 
same person as that of the subject, and stands either 
in the dative or the accusative, according as the verb 



208 

governs the one or the other case. In the third person 
singular and plural it is always jtcf), whether the verb 
governs the dative or accusative. 

A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 

To disguise myself— to disguise sfljid) wrftctten — lln$ aerftettcn. 

ourselves. 
To disguise thyself— to disguise £)tct) Dcrftcllen — (Sud) DcrftcIXcn 

yourselves. 

A REFLEXIVE VERB GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

To represent to myself— to re- asjitr Dorftclten — ltn$ DorftcHen 

present to ourselves. 
To represent to thyself— to re- «Dit ttOrjMten — (Sucf) tJOtfU'ttcn* 

present to yourselves. 

THIRD PERSON FOR ALL GENDERS. 

Singular and Plural Dative and Accusative. 

To disguise one's self— to repre- (Bid) ccrfMlen — fid) aorftcttctt 
sent to one's self. 

DCP* The personal pronoun of reflexive verbs is 
placed after the verb as in English ; and so are all 
other personal pronouns when they are not in the no- 
minative. 

Obs. A. There is no real reflexive verb in English, 
that is to say, such as cannot be used otherwise ; but 
XT German, there are many, as for instance the follow- 
ing, which govern the accusative : 

To rejoice. (Stcb freuett. 

To be ashamed. Sid) fcbatnen* 

To look back. ©id) umfvben*. Imperf. fctfj. 

Do you see yourself? ©eben 0k fid) 1 (Select 3fa @udj ?) 

I do see myself. 3cb [ebe mid). 

Thou cuttest thyself. £>u fcbnct^cR Did)* 

He cuts himself. Qv fcbnctt>ct ficb. 

1 am afraid to go thither. 3d) furcbte mid) f)tn$u()el)etu 

They burn themselves. <gte brennen fid). 

To flatter. © d) m e t d) c I n (governs the da- 

tive). 
Dost thou flatter thyself] ©dmictdK'lft 2)u Sir? 

1 do not flatter myself. 3d) fd)mctd)te nut nidjt 



209 



We do not flatter ourselves. 
He disguises himself. 
You represent to yourself. 

To fear some one. 

To be afraid of somebody. 

I am not afraid of him. 

I do not fear him. 

Of whom are you afraid ? 

Whom do you fear] 

To enjoy something. 

To amuse one's self in doing J 

something. 
To pass away the time. 
To drive away. 
Driven away. 
Drove away. 

The pastime, the diversion. 
In what do you amuse yourself? 
I amuse myself in reading. 
He diverts himself in playing. 



g£tr fcbmetcbctn un£ ntd)t 
<5t rjcrttellt ftcb. 
^te ftellen fid) net. 

gemcmfcen furcbten. 

(&\&> per ^emanfrem furcbten. 

Sch fitrchrc tntcb ntcbt r>er ifyau 

jlcb fitrcbfe thn titebU 

&>or ruem furcbten Si* fid)? 

££en furcbten @ic 1 

?(£'tcb ?um 3ettt?ertrct6 mit ttwai 
c" befebafttcjen. 

£ue 3ett rertreiben*. 

SScrrretben*. 

SSertrteben. 

SSertriob (Imp erf.). 

£)er 3ettr>ertreib. 

SBomtt pertrctben (Ste ftcb He Beit ? 

3cb r>ertretbe intr Me 3eit nut Cefen. 

(Sr ucitrctbt fid) Me 3eit mit Spiclcn. 



Masc. 



Fern. 



Neut. 



Each or each 5 3eber, jebe, jebe$. 

i ©H jeber, eme jebe, em jebe£. (3ebermamt.) 



one. 



Obs. B. ^ebev, jebe, jebe$, has no plural, and is de- 
clined like all, with the characteristic termination of 
the article (Lesson XLIX.). Preceded by the indefinite 
article, it is declined like an adjective preceded by this 
article. 

Every man has his taste. Sefcer Sffienfcb bat feinen ©cfefymacf. 

Each of you. <$tn jefrer sen (Sucb. 

Every body speaks of it. Sefcermcmn fpttcbt onyen. 

Each man amuses himself as he (gift jet>er sertmbt ftcb t>ic 3ett wit 

likes. e£ tbm gcfallt. 

Each one amuses himself in the ©in jefret ttetttetbt fid) tie 3eit fo gut 

best way he can. er fann. 

The taste, fc>et ©efcbmcicf. 



To mistake, to be mistaken* 

Every man is liable to mistake. 
You are mistaken. 

To soil. 
To deceive. 



(Sid) trren, ft cb t a u f d) c n. 

Seber Sttenfcb fctnn ftcb trim 
©te trren ftcb. 

<Befcbmugcn, fcbmttgtcj nmcr)en. 
SSetrtujen* (betrieqen*). 



210 

Deceived. SSetrcgen (past part) Imperf. fce« 

trot}. 
He has cheated me of a hundred (Sr bat mid) um rjunfcett Scaler t>e* 
crowns. trogen. 

A t (over). He bet (a preposition governing 

the dative and accusative). 

To rejoice at something-. ©id) uOcr ctroctS frcueru 

I rejoice at your happiness. 3d) freue mid) fi6et Sfjr ©Iticf. 

At what does your uncle rejoice! &£eruber frcut fid) Sbc Dbcim ? 

To believe. ©la u ben. 

This verb requires the person in the dative, and the 
thing in the accusative. It governs also the accusa- 
tive with the preposition an* 

Do you believe *hat man? (Stfaubcrt ©tc btcfcm Marine? 

I do not believe him. 3cb cfiaubt 3bm nicbt. 
Do you believe what I am tell- ©lauben (Ste mir, \va$ id) 3t)ncn 

ing you 1 fagc ? 

* I believe in God. 3>cb qtaube an ©etr. 

The God, fcer ©ott (plural ©otter) ; 

the story-teller, the liar, bet Cugner. 

To utter a falsehood, to lie. Ctigcn (part, past (jelogen, Imperf. 

(iS'ee the Continuation of this Lesson* Page 211.) 
EXERCISES. 165. 

Have you written long or short letters ] — I have written (both) 
A ong and short ones. — Have you many apples 1 — I have so many 
of them that I do not know which I shall (foil) eat. — Do you wish 
to give anything 1 to these children 1 — They have studied so badly, 
that I do not wish to give them anything. — What is this man re- 
joicing at? — He is rejoicing at the luck which has happened to his 
brother. — What dost thou rejoice at] — I rejoice at the good fortune 
that has happened to you. — What do your children rejoice at ] — ■ 
They rejoice at seeing you. — Do you rejoice at the happiness ot 
my father'? — I do rejoice at it. — What does your uncle say to my 
happiness ] — He rejoices at it from his heart. — Do you flatter my 
brother] — I do not flatter him. — Does this master flatter his pu- 
pils ] — He does not flatter them. — Is he pleased with them ] — He 
is much (fcf)r) pleased ($ufriefcert) with them when they learn well ; 
but he is highly (fehr) displeased with them when they do not learn 
well.- — Do you flatter me] — I do not flatter you, for I love you. — 
Do you see yourself in that small looking-glass? — I do see myself 
in it. — Can your friends see themselves in that large looking- 
glass] — They can see themselves therein. — Why do you not re- 
main near the fire] — Because I am afraid of burning myself. — 



211 

Does this man make his fire ? — He does not make it, for he if 
afraid of burning" himself. — Do you fear me 1 — I do nut fear you. — 
Do you fear those ugly men ] — I do not fear them, for they hurt 
nobody. — Why do those children run away ? — They run away, be- 
cause they are afraid of you. — Do you run away before your ene- 
mies ] — I do not run away before them, for I do not fear them. 

166. 

In what do your children amuse themselves ? — They amuse 
themselves in studying, writing, and playing. — In what do you 
amuse yourself? — I amuse myself in the best way I can, for I read 
good books, and I write to my friends. — In what do you amuse 
yourself when you have nothing to do at home 1 — T go to the play 
and to the concert, for every one amuses himself in the best way 
he can. — Every man has his taste ; what is yours 1 — Mine is to 
study, to read a good book, to go to the theatre, the concert, the 
ball, and the public walk, and to ride on horseback. — Has that 
physician done any harm to your child] — He has cut his finger 
(eg in t>en finger), but he has not done him any harm ; so you are 
mistaken, if you believe that he has done him any harm. — Why do 
you listen to that man 1 — I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; 
for I know that he is a story-teller.— How do you know that he is 
a story-teller 1 — He does not believe in God ; and all those who 
do not believe in God are story-tellers. — Why does your cousin 
not brush his hat 1 — He does not brush it, because he is afraid of 
soiling his fingers (fid) fcic ginger). — What does my neighbour tell 
you 1 — He tells me that you wish to buy his horse ; but I know 
that he is mistaken, for you have no money to buy it. — What do 
they say at the market? — They say that the enemy is beaten. — Do 
you believe it 1 — I do believe it, because every one says so. — Why 
have you bought that book 1 — I bought it, because I wanted it to 
learn German ; and because every one spoke of it. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



CONTINUATION OF THE SEVENTIETH LESSON, 

ifoige hex BhbcnfiQBtm flection. 

When a proposition has no definite subject, the 
English, in order to avoid the pronouns they, people, 
&c, use the verb in the passive voice ; and say : / was 
told, instead of, They told me ; It was given to me, in- 
stead of, They gave it to me. This is expressed in Ger- 
man by means of the indefinite pronoun man, one, as 
in French by on. Ex. 



212 



I a~o told that he is arrived. 2Q?cm fagt mit, tag et angcfommen 

iff. 
A knife was given to him to cut 9Q?an gab ibm etn Scoffer, fetn SBrcb 

his bread, and he cut his $u febnetten, unt) et fd)nitt (id) in 

finger. ten Jiugcr* 



PERFECT OF REFLEXIVE VERBS. 



Have you cut yourself] 

I have not cut myself. 

Have those men cut themselves 1 

They have not cut themselves. 

Hast thou hurt thyself? 

I have not hurt myself. 

Who has cut himself] 

I have cut my finger. 

I have rejoiced. 
I have flattered myself. 
Thou hast cut thyself. 
He has flattered himself. 
We have been afraid. 

You have miitaken. i 



To pull out. 

He pulls out his hair. 

He has pulled out his hair. 

He has cut his hair. 

I have had my hair cut. 

I have cut my nails. 

The hair, 

To go to bed. < 

To get up, to risW, 

Do. you rise early] 
I rise at sun-rise. 

I go to bed at sun-set. * < 

At what time did you go tc bed ] 

At midnight. 



£aben (£te ftcb gefebnttten ? , 
Scb babe mtcb ntcnt gefebmtten. 
■faitben ftcb ttefe banner getcbtutten ? 
(£tc baben ftcb mebt gefebmtten. 
£flft £)n Dxv lveb getbem ? 
Scb babe inir iud)t wch getban. 
SI'er bat ftcb gefebmtten ? 
f 3'cb babe nucb in ten Jtngct ge» 
febmtten. 

f Scb babe mtcb gefreut (gefteuet) 

Scb babe nitr gei'cbmckbelt. 

£)u baft £)tcb 'gefebnttten. 

(Sr bat ficb ge[cbmetcbe(t. 

f SQJM'r baben tin? gefiircbtet. 
~ f Sbr babt (Such getrrt. 
[ f (Sic fyaben fid) garrt. 

2C u $ r c t (5 c n*. 

f (5t retfit ficb tie $ciaxc au$. 

f (it bat ficb tie fxiare auegeriften. 

•f <$t bat ftcb tie £aare abgefcbmt* 

ten. 
f Scb babe nut tie £aare febnetten 

taffen. 
f Scb l)abc mit tie Sttagel abgefefynti* 

ten. 
tag #aat (plur. c). 

"3u ©dte geben*. 
! (Scblafen gefyen*. 
. Stcb legem 

2(ufftebcn*. 

<£teben ©t* frttb auf ? 
Scb ftebc nut (Scnnenaufgang auf. 
"3*" .qefjc nut (Scnnenuntergang gu 
S?cttc. 
Scb lege micb nut (^ennenunrcrgang. 
Urn roelcbe 3ett fint 6te $u 23ette gc* 

gangen ? 
Urn ajtittetnadjt. 






213 

At three o'clock in the morning. Urn cm Whv 93?era,cn$. 

He went to bed late. C£r tft [pat §u *etti gcaariQett. 

At what o'clock did you go to Urn nncmd Uf)r (InD (fete ^cftcttt i« 

bed yesterday ] £U'tte o/a/incjen ? 

At a quarter past eleven. Urn cm 23tertcl ctuf jwolf. 

The bed, fca* SWtt (plur. en). 

The sun-rise S K>r ^ cnnennu ^ an 9- 
1 ne sun-rise, £ ^ ?|ufeon9 bcr @cmu 

rp, C Dcr (gemu'nuntcra/uiq. 

ine sun-set, £ ^ UntcrQan9 ta <~ cnnc# 

Nothing but. 91 I d) t $ a'l.is 

lie has nothing but enemies. <5r bat mdjfe ate Jcinbe. 
He drinks nothing but water. (§r trtnft ntd)t$ at* Staffer. 

EXERCISES. 167. 

Did your father rejoice to see you 1 — He did rejoice lo see me. — 
What did you rejoice at? — I rejoiced at seeing my good friends. — 
"What w 7 as your uncle delighted with (2£etubet f)at fid) tf)t £>f)etm 
Cjcfrait) 1 — He was delighted with (uber) the horse which you 
brought him from Germany. — What were your children delighted 
with ]— -They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had 
had made (for) them. — Why does this officer rejoice so much (fo- 
fehr) ? — Because he flatters himself he has good friends. — Is he not 
right in rejoicing] — He is wrong, for he has nothing but enemies. 
— Do you flatter yourself that you know German 1 — I do flatter 
myself that I know it; for 1 can speak, read, and write it. — Can 
you write a German letter without an error (bet gcb(cr) 1 — I can. — 
Does any one correct your letters 1 — No one corrects them ; they do 
not require (Oraud)cn ntcbt) to be corrected, for I make no faults in 
them. — How many letters have you already written ] — 1 have al# 
ready v ritten a dozen. — Have yo t hurt yourself] — I have not 1 irt 
myself. —Who has hurt himself] — My brother has hurt himself, 
for he has cut his finger. — Is he still ill ] — He is better. — I rejoice 
to hear that he is no longer ill ; for I love him, and I pitied him from 
my heart. — Why does your cousin pull out his hair ]• — Because he 
canni pay what he owes. — Have you cut your hair 1 — I have rot 
cut it (myself), but I have had it cut. — Why do you pity that 
child ] — Because he has cut his foot. — W^hy was a knife given to 
him ? — A knife was given to him to cut his nails, and he has cut 
his finger and his foot. 

168. 

Do you go to bed early 1 — I go to bed late, for I cannot sleep if 
I go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? — 
Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock 
do your children go to bed ? — They go to bed at sun-set. — Do they 
rise early 1 — They rise at sun-rise. — At what o'clock did you rise 
to-day? — To-day 1 rose late, because I went to bed late yesterdaj 



214 



evening. — Does your son rise late? — He must rise early, for ha 
never goes to bed late. — What does he do when he gets up ] — He 
studies, and then breakfasts.— Does he not go out before he break- 
fasts 1 — No, he studies and breakfasts before he goes out. — What 
does he do after breakfast] — As soon as he has breakfasted he 
comes to my house, and we ride (on horseback) into the forest. — 
Didst thou rise this morning as early as 1 ] — I rose earlier than 
you, for I rose*before sun-rise. (See end of Lesson XXXI V*) 



SEVENTY-FIRST LESSON.- (R n nnb sitbaijigete 
CerJion. 



To take a walk. (Spqtcten Cjefyen*. 

To take an airing in a carriage, ©pajteten fafyren * (Imp. fuf)t)» 
To take a ride on horseback. (Spa^teten retten* (Imp. ritt)* 

DC/ 13 A. When two or more infinitives, two past 
participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
pend upon each other, the last in English is put the 
. first in German. 



Do you wish to take a walk (to 

go a walking) 1 
I do wish to take a walk (to go 

a walking). 
He wishes to take a walk. 
Thou wishest to take an airing. 
^They wish to take a ride. 
Do you wish to see him work 1 
Has your brother been praised 1 

He takes a walk every day. 

Do you often walk ? 

I take a walk every morning. 



SBoHen <&k fpajteren gefjett ? 

3d) mitt fpqtetcn cjefyen 

(St rcutt fpagtertm gefjetu 
£)u ttnllft fpa^teren fafyrcru 
(Sic moflen fpajteren retten. 
Gotten @tc tf)n arbetten fcfjen ? 
3ft 3()t 23t:ut>er gelobt worsen ? 

(St gefyt attc Sage jpa^teren. 
<3JeF)cn ®ic oft fpa$teten ? 
3d) gef)e alle Sftorgen fpa^teten 



To take a child a walking. ©in Jttnb fpqtercn fitfjrm 

Do you take your children a £uf)ten <Ste 3 fore Winter fpajtetetw 

walking 1 
I take them a walking every 3$ fiifyte fie cute 2C6enb fpa$ietetu 

evening. 

[O" 3 Z?. Two infinitives or participles not deper. d- 
ing on each other follow the English construction. 

One must love and praise one's $flan mup fetnen JrcunJ) licben Uttfc | 

friend. loOen. 

Whom nrist we despise and SB en mup man wacfjten unb ftra# | 

punish J fen ? 



215 

1 take a walk, when I have no- 3d) gefjie fpajteren, rocnn id) $u .pouf* 
thing to do at home. rud)ts $u tt)un fyafce. 

O&s. A. The adverb tt>ctmt is used to interrogate 
with respect to time only. In all other instances the 
English when is translated by tt>etttt* Ex. 

When do you start ] g&mn rctfen ©it cb ? 

When did he start] Sftann ift cc aOgcrcift? 

To #?acA. Screen. 

06s. J3. This verb, when joined to an infinitive, 
governs the name of the person in the accusative ; 
and when the thing taught is expressed by a substan- 
tive, it governs a double accusative, the one of a per- 
son and the other of a thing. 

He teaches me to read. <5t (cfirt mid) fcfen. 

I teach him to write. 3db Ul)xc tbn fcbm&cn. 

He teaches me arithmetic and (5r (efcrt mid) fc>a£ £Rcd)ncn unt> 

writing. ©cfyrctOen. 

O&s. C. All infinitives taken substantively are of 
the neuter gender. Any German infinitive may thus 
be taken substantively, e. g. ba$ 9ied)nett r arithmetic; 
from recfyttert, to reckon ; ba3 ©cfyretben, the writing, 
from fcfjreiben*, to write, &c. 

I teach you the German Ian- 2>d> tcFjre @te tie fccutfcfye <5pra* 
guage. d)e. a 

rttnterr td)ten. 
To instruct. < Unter rid) t ert&ctlen (or <je* 



The instruction, the lessons, ter ttntctttdjt. 

He gives me lessons. I g flg ™ r Wnterrtd)!. 

I give him .essons in German (I 3d) gebc (or cttr)eUc) i()m tlntcrrtdr)t 

teach him German). tm ^)cutfd)cn. 

I gave lessons in English to his 3d) rjabe fetnen jttnbctn Untcmdjjt 

children (I taught his children tm (Sngltfdjen ettfjettt. 

English). 
He takes lessons in dancing. (gt mrnmt Untctrtdjt tm £ctn$ctn 

The learned man, fcer ©etel>rte ; 

* 2) it <3fcra$e, the language, is a feminine noun, and has tt in the plural. 



1 



216 



a learned man, etn CSSctcfirtcr (See Obs. Lesson 

LII1.) ; 

the clergyman, ber (Sxtftltdje ; 

a clergyman, . cm ©eifUtd)er ; 

the German master (meaning 
the master of the German 
language), 
the German master (meaning 
that the master is a German, 
whatever he teaches), 
.he dancing master, 
To dance. 
To cipher, to reckon. SRccfyncn. 

To remember ', to recollect. Bid) crinnertu 

Obs. D. This verb governs either the genitive alone, 
or, less elegantly, the accusative with the preposition 
am 



• bet £K'utfcl)tcf)rcr ; 

> bet beutfcfye Cefytet ; 

tcr Sanmictftct. 
£an$en. 



Do you remember that man ] 
I do remember him. 



(Snnncrn @te fid) btcfeS Cannes? 
3d) crtnncrc mtd) fcincr. 
("(Srtnncrt et fid) fetncS SScrfpre 

Docs he recollect his promise t J ^Jjjg cr ^ an ^ ^^ 

I d)cn ? 



He does recollect it. 

Does he recollect it 1 

I remember you. 

I recollect them. 

He remembers me. 

He recollects us. 

I have remembered him. 



\ ($r ertnnert fid) beffcm 
{ (St ertnnert fid) baron* 
5 (Srtnncrt cr fid) beffen? 
\ (Srtnncrt cr fid) baran ? 

3d) crtnncrc mtd) Sfytcr. 

3d) crinncrc mid) tnrer. 

(gr ertnnert fid) metnet. 

(Sr ertnnert fid) unfer. 

3d) ^abc mid) fcincr ertnnert. 



EXERCISES. 169. 

Do you call me 1 — I do call you. — What is your pleasure 1 — You 
must rise, for it is already late.— What do you want me for?— 1 
have lost all my money at play, and I come to beg you to lend me 
some. — What o'clock is it 1 — It is already a quarter past six, and 
you have slept long enough. — Is it long since you rose ? — It is an 
hour and a half since I rose. — Do you often go a walking]-— I go 
a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to 
take a walk ! — I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. — 
Has your brother taken a ride on horseback 1 — He has taken an 
airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? — They 
go a walking every morning after breakfast. — Do you take a walk 



217 

after dinner? — After dinner I drink tea and then I take a walk.— 
Do you often take yo lr children a walking ? — I take them a walking 
every morning and every evening. — Can you go along with me ?— 
I cannot go along with you, for 1 must take my little brother out a 
Walking. — Where do you walk 1 — We walk in our uncle's garden 
and fields. — Do you like walking 1 — I like walking better than eat- 
ing and drinking. — Does your father like to take a ride on horse- 
back ] — He likes to take a ride in a carriage better than on horse- 
back. — Must one love children who are not good 1 — One ought, on 
the contrary, to punish and despise them. — Who has taught you to 
read 1 — I have learnt it with (bet) a French master. — Has he also 
taught you to write 1 — He has taught me to read and to write. — 
Who has taught your brother arithmetic 1 — A German master has 
taught it him. — Do you wish to take a walk with us] — 1 cannot £0 
a walking, for I am waiting for my German master. — Does your 
brother wish to take a walk 1 — He cannot, for he is laking lessons 
in dancing. 

170. 
Have you an English master ? — We have one. — Does he also 
give you lessons in Italian 1 — He does not know Italian ; but we 
have an Italian and Spanish master. — Wliat has become of your 
old writing master 1 — He has taken orders (has become a clergy- 
man). — What -has become of the learned man whom I saw at your 
house last winter ] — He has set up for a merchant. — And what has 
become of his son ] — He has turned a soldier. — Do you still recol- 
lect my old dancing master 1 — I do still recollect him ; what has 
become of him 1 — He is here, and you can see him, if you like 
(roellen).- — Hast thou a German master ? — I have a very good (one), 
for it is my father, who gives me lessons in German and in Eng- 
lish. — Does your father also know Polish 1 — He does not know it 
yet, but he intends to learn it this summer. — Do you remember 
your promise 1 — I do remember it. — What did you promise me ? — 
I promised to give you lessons in German ; and I will do it. — Wil 
you beg ; n this morning? — I will begin this evening, if you please 
(nxnn es ,3 tot en gefalltg tft). — Do you recollect the man whose son 
taught us dancing] — I no longer recollect him. — Do you still recol- 
lect my brother 5 ! 1 — I do recollect them very well, for when I was 
studying at Berlin, I saw them every day. — Does your uncle still 
recollect me 1 — I assure you that he still recollects you, — Do you 
speak German better than my cousin 1 — I do not speak it as well as 
he, for he speaks it better than many Germans. — Which of your 
pupils speaks it the best ] — The one that was walking with me yes- 
terday speaks it the best of them all. — Is your uncle's house as high 
as ours ? — Yours is higher than my uncle's, but my cousin's is the 
highest house that I have ever seen. — Has your friend as many books 
as 1 ? — You have more of them than he ; but my brother has more 
of them than (both) you and he. — Which of us (2Ber »Mt une) has 
the most money 1 — You have the most, for I have but thirty crowns, 
my friend has but ten, and you have five hundred. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 
10 



218 

SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.— Zwti ntih &ubz\\ji%%U 

tttiion. 

To make use of tc use. © t cb b e b t e n c n (governs tho 

genitive). 

Do you use my horse 1 SPcbienen Ste ftd> me'ncS >pferbe6? 

I do use it. Sjcb bebtenc micb bcffclfyro; 

Does your father use it ? S3cDtcnt fief) 3fa 93ater bejfdbcn ? 

He does use it. (§r bebicnt fid) beffelben. 

Have you used my carriage ] £aben @te fid) twines SOBacjenS be: 

blent ? 
I have used it. Set) babe mid) beffelbcn bebtent. 

Do you use my books] SScbtcnen @tc ficb mctnet 53ttd)et? 

I do use them. 3d) bebtene mid) berfelben. 

May I use your book ] &ann td) nticb 3^rc6 23ud)e$ bebtes 

nen? 
Thou mayest use it. 3)u fannft £>\d) beffetben bebicnen* 

To approach, to draw near. (Stcb na'bctn (governs the dative). 

To withdraw from, to go away ©id) entfernen (governs the dative 

from. with the preposition sen). 

Do you approach the fire 1 9tfabern <Sic fid) bent Jeuct ? 

I do approach it. 3d) ndbere micb bemfelben. 

I go away from the fire. 3d) entferne micb t)om $euer. 

I go away from it. 3d) entferne mid) bason. 

What do you recollect? £Boran erinnern ©tc fid) ? 

I recollect nothing. Scb erinnere mid) an nicbtS. 

What are you withdrawing from? SBetion entfernen -©tc ficb? 
Are you cold ? t 3ft eft 3 I & n e n Rift ? 

I am very cold. f ®$ Ul m t r fcr>r fair. 

I am not cold. f (5* ijt m t r ntcbt fait. 

Art thou cold ? f 3ft e$ D 1 1 fait ? 

Is 1 o warm 1 f 3ft e$ ibm warm ? 

Are they warm or cold 1 f 3>ft c$ tbnen warm obet fait? 

They are neither warm nor cold, f (&$ ift tbnen rocbec warm nedj 

fait. 
Who is cold ? f 2B«n tft e$ fait? 

My feet are cold. f (&$ ift mir an ben ${i§cn fafr. 

His hands are cold. f (£'6 ift ibm an tm .^dnrcn fa(t. 

Why does that man go away from £Barum cntfernt fid) biefer Sftann tton 

the fire] bem #euct? 

He goes away from it, bosause (£r entfetnt ficb bason, weit eg ibm 

he is not cold. ntcbt fatt ift. 

To freeze— frozen. f $ r t e r e tt — Cj e f 1 r e n. 

Froze. §tor (imperfect). 

QJj 4 The impersonal verb frieren, to freeze, govern* 



219 

the accusative, and may also be used for the English 
verb to be cold, as : 

I am very cold. f (S* frtcrt mid) fefyr. 

I am not cold. \ ®S frtcrt mid) ntd)t. 

Who is cold ] t ^ c » f^rt e * ? 

My feet are cold. \ 9}ftr frteren tie glide. 

His hands are cold. { 3^ m M^en tic £ant>e. 

For what ? whereto ? for what SB $ u ? 
purpose ? 

What do you want money for ? Sffiegu l6raud)cn ®k ®clb ? 

I want some to buy a carriage 3d) btauebe roelcrjeS, urn etnen £Ba* 

with. gen $u ftmfen. 

What does this horse serve you ££c$u fctcnt Sfynen biefeg $fert> ? 

for] 
It serves me to ride out upon. (5$ r/tcm out au^utetten or $um 2(u^ 

rctten. 
To ride out. 2fusretten*. 

To go oat in a carriage. 2Cu6fa()ren*. 

exercises. 171. 

Which is the nearest way to go to your uncle's castle ? — This 
way is shorter than the one we took yesterday ; but my father 
knows one which is the nearest of all. — Do you use my carriage 1 
— I do use it. — Has your father used my horse 1 — He has used it. 
— What does this horse serve you for] — It serves me to ride out 
upon. — Do you use the books which I lent you 1 — I do use them. — 
May I ( .ftcmn id)) use y«ur knife ] — Thou mayest use it, but thou 
must not cut thyself. — May my brothers use your books'? — They 
may use them, but they must not tear them. — May we use your 
stone table ] — You may use it, but you must not spoil it. — What 
has my wood served you fori — It has served me to warm myself 
with. — For what purpose do your brothers want money 1 — They 
want some to live upon. — What does this knife serve us fori — It 
serves us to cut our bread, our meat, and our cheese with. — Is it 
cold to day 1 — It is very cold. — Will you draw near the fire] — I 
cannot draw near it, for I am afraid of burning myself. — Why does 
your friend go away from the fire 1 — He goes away from it, because 
he is afraid of burning himself. — Art thou coming near the fire 1 — 
I am coming near it, because I am very cold. — Are thy hands cold 1 
— My hands are not cold, but my feet are. — Do you go away from 
the fire ] — I do go away from it. — W T hy do you go away from it? — 
Because I am not cold. — Are you cold or warm ? — I am neither cold 
nor warm. 

172. 

Why do your children approach the fire ? — They approach it, be- 
rause they are cold. — Is any body cold 1 — Somebody is ©old. — Who 



220 

is cold ] — The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. 
— Why does he not warm himself] — Because his father has no 
money to buy wood. — Will you tell him to come to me to warm 
himself? — I will tell him so. — Do you remember anything] — I re- 
member nothing. — What does your uncle recollect] — He recollects 
your promise. — What have I promised him ? — You have promised 
him to go to Germany with him next winter. — I intend to do so if 
it is not too cold. — Are your hands often cold ] — My hands are 
scarcely ever cold, hut my feet are often so. — Why do you with- 
draw from the fire 1 — I have been sitting near the fire this hour and 
a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does your friend not like to 
sit near the fire 1 — He likes, on the contrary, much (fefyr) to sit near 
the fire, but only when he is cold. — May one approach your uncle ? 
—One may approach him, for he receives every body. (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.THIRD LESSON. ~Um unb *Ubmfa*tt 

Section. 

To shave $ Stofitcn (verb active). 

i o snave. ^ @id) ^^ (yerb ^ flexive ) # 

To get shaved. ©id) rcifiren Iciffcn*. 

To dress, to put on clothes. 2Cn$icfn'n*. 

To dress. 2l"nHriben. 

To undress, to put off clothes, ttu^tcfyen*. 

To undress. tfusiU't&cm 

Obs. A. Sfttjteftett* expresses either tc dress or to put 
on clothes, but cmfleibett can only be used to express the 
English to dress. The same may be said with regard to 
au3$tef)ett* and au^fietbem 

Have you dressed yourself? &aUn <Stc ficf> anqcffctbet ? 

I have not yet dressed myself. 3d) \)abe mid) nod) ntd)t angcHeibet* 

Have you dressed the child] Jpabm <&k bas jttnb ana^ea/n ? 

I have dressed it. 3d) fycibe c$ atiQCAOgcn. 

He has put on his coat. (Sr bat fetncn 9?ocf angqecjen. 

He has taken off his shoes. (5r fyat fetnc ©cbufje augcjejogctu 

To wake. g£ecr\m, ctujwecfen. 

To awake. (Srroacbcn, aujwad)cn. 

Obs. B. SBecFen and ctufwetfett are active verbs, but 
ertt>arf)en and cmfwacfyen are neuter, and take the verb 
fettt* for their auxiliary. Sftecfett signifies to wake in- 
tentionally, auftt>ec£en unintentionally : Ex. SBotten ©ie 



221 

mid) urn $wei Ubv tt>etfen ? Will you wake me at two 
o'clock? %flad)en Ste femen Scirm, bamit (gte ifyn nidjt 
aufiDccfeit, do not make any noise, that you may not 
wake him. dvtv>aci)m means to awake at once or by ac- 
cident. Ex. 3d) exxvad)te auf etnmcd ai\$ metttem Xvanme, 
I at once awoke from my dream. 3luftr>ad)ett, means to 
awake regularly without any accident. Ex. £e£ SDZor^ 
gen3 aufvpacfyen, to awake in the morning. 

To come down ( Syrah, fynab > fletgen*, Cjefien*, 
(See Less. L.) ( Remitter, fytmmter 5 retten*, fafyren*,!^ 

To go down into the well. 3n ben 93rurmcn rnnuntcr ftctgen*. 

To come down the hill. ©cm ^ercje beraft ftei9cn*» 

To go down the river. Dm (Strom htnab fasten*. 

To alight from one's horse, to 25cm ^fetbe Pcigcn*. 
dismount. 

To alight, to get out. \ l^fP™^ n - * 

° ' & } Urn fccm SEcigcn (fatten*. 

To mount — Jo ascend. <& t c t q e n (part.- past (jcjttccjett. 

Imperf. fttca,). 

To mount the horse. 2Cuf£ (auf fccts) >pfetb iMgcn*. 

To get into the coach. Sn ben 2£aqcn fTCtgen*. 

To go on board a ship. 3n cm ©cfytff flctgcn*. 

The dream, the beard, bet Srctum ; bcr 33att ; 

the stream (the river), ber (Strom. 

Where is your brother ? £L*c tjt Srjr <T>rubet ? 

He is in the garret. <Sr ill auf bem JBcben. 

Will you desire him to came SQBellen Ste if)n bitten f)cvab (Fjcrun* 

down 1 ter) m Ecmmen ? 

The garret (the loft) under the £)ct S^cben uniet bem £)ad)C etne$ 

roof of a house. - £aufc$. 

To come down. $erab (or fjetunter) femmen. 

To behave, to conduct one s $ <Stcf) auffiifjtcn. 

self. I ©id) betracjen* (Imperf. bettug). 

I behave well. Scb fuhrc mtcfe out auf. 

How does he behave 1 SGBic fuf)rt cr fide) auf? 

Towards. (55 c 9 e n (a preposition governing 

the accusative). 

He behaves ill towards this man. (£r betta'&t fid) fdt)tcdr>t a/gen btcfen 

9)?ann. 
He has behaved ill towards me. (St (?at fid) fiM Qea,en nucr; bcttagen. 



222 

To be worth while. £)cr 30? u lj c a tu e 1 1 f) e t n * 

fs it worth while ] 3ft c£ fret 5D?iihc roertf) ? 

It is worth while. (5*6 i ft fcer 9#ftri.e nxrtr). 

It is not worth while. (Ss tft ntcrjt tcr \))Utr)e iwrtr). 

Is it worth while to do that? 3ft es fcet SJiufyc vucrtl), fcicfeS $t 

tf)im ? 

Is it worth while to write to 3ft c$ fret 9)?ulje rocrtf), an tffn gu 

him ] fcl)rctbcn ? 

Is it better ] 3ft c* deffer ? 

It is better. (5s ift beffer. 

ft is better to do this than that. (S*> ift Defter, tuefeS ot$ jeneS gu 

tbun. 
It is better to stay here than to (5$ tft beflcr, fttcr $u Mc.tOen, citg fpa* 
go a walking. gtercn gu gefjen. 

exercises. 173. 

Have you shaved to-day? — I have shaved. — Has your brother 
shaved] — He has not shaved himself, but has got shaved. — Do 
you shave often 1 — I shave every morning, and sometimes also in 
the evening. — When do you shave in the evening] — When I do 
not dine at home. — How many times a day does your father 
shave ] — He shaves only once a day, but my brother has such a 
strong beard, that he is obliged to shave twice a day. — Does your 
uncle shave often 1 — He shaves only every other day (cincn Sng urn 
ten cinftern), for his beard is not strong. — At what o'clock do you 
dress in the morning ] — 1 dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and 
I breakfast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — 
Does your neighbour dress before he breakfasts ] — He breakfasts 
before he dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou un- 
dress? — I undress as soon as I return from (aus) the theatre. — 
Dost thou go to the theatre every evening] — I do not go every eve- 
ning, for it is better to study than to go to the theatre. — At what 
o'clock dost thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ]— 
I then undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten 
o'clock. — Have you already dressed the child ] — I have not dressed 
it yet, for it is still asleep (fcblaft ncch). — At what o'clock does it 
get up ] — I gets up as soon as it is waked. 

174. 

Do you rise as early as I] — I do not know at what o'clock you 
rise, but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to 
wake me to-morrow at four o'clock ] — I will tell him. — Why have 
you risen so early ] — My children have made such a noise that 
fthey wakened me. — Have yc u slept well ] — I have not slept well, 
for you made too much noise — At what o'clock must I wake you? 

• 2)te Sftii^e, is a feminine suostantive, and takes U in the plural. 



223 

—To-morrow thou mayest wake me at six o'clock. — At what 
o'clock did the good captain awake 1 — He awoke at a quarter past 
five in the morning. — When did this man go down into the well ] 
— He went down into it this morning. — Has he come up again 
yet (rmctkT fyerauf gi-ftte^cn) ? — He came up an hour ago. — Where 
is your brother ] — He is in his room. — Will you tell him to come 
down ] — I will tell him so ; but he is not dressed yet. — Is your 
friend still on the mountain? — He has already come down. — Did 
you go down or up this river] — We went down it. — Has your 
brother dined already ? — He dined as soon as he had alighted from 
his horse. — Is your uncle already asleep (fcblcifcn*) ] — I believe 
that he is asleep, for he went to bed as soon as he had alighted. — 
Did my cousin speak to you before he started ] — He spoke to me 
before 1 e got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother] — I saw 
him before I went on board the ship. 

175. 

How did my child behave] — He did behave very well. — How 
did my brother behave towards you ] — He behaved very well to- 
wards me, for he behaves well towards every body. — Is it worth 
while to write to that man] — It is not worth while to write to him. 
— Is it worth while to alight in order to buy a cake 1 — It is not 
worth w r hile, for it is not long since we ate.— -Is it worth while to 
dismount from my horse in order to give something tc that pcor 
man ] — Yes, for he seems to want it ; but you can (tormen) give 
him something without dismounting from your horse. — Is it better 
to go to the theatre than to -study] — -It is better to do the latter 
than* the former. — Is it better to learn to read German than to speak 
it ] — It is not worth while to learn to read it without learning to 
speak it. — Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking ] — It is 
better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to get into a 
coach than to go on board the ship ] — It is not worth while to get 
into a ^oach or to go on board the ship when one has no wish to 
travel (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.FOURTH LESSON.— t)kr XXXtb fticbttlftptt 

To hire, to rent. 9ft i C 1 t) c tt. 

To hire a room. ©in 3'tmmet mtct&cn. 

Have you hired a room ] £aben @ie etrt 3immcr gcmictr)ct ? 

I have hired one. 3'd) rjabc etrt* genitetfyct. 

To let aScrmictbc n. 

He has a room to let. @t hat cm 3tmmct 311 wrmictOctt 

To part with something. C£trcae» abfcfyafim 



224 



Do you intend to part with your 
horses ] 

I have already parted with thern. 

He has parted with his carriage. 

Have you parted with (dis- 
charged) your servant ] 

I have parted with (discharged) 
him. 

To get rid of something. ") 

To rid one's self of something. 5 

Did you get rid of your damaged 
sugar I 

I did get rid of it. 

Did he get rid of his old horse 1 

He did get rid of it. 

To hope, to expect, $ f f C n. 

Do you expect to find him there? £offen ©tc tf)ti la gu fmben ? 
I do '^xpect it. 3cb boffe eg. 

Hope and expectation make ^cffcn unt) #arten madbt SCRandhen 

gum barren. (See Lesson XL. 
Obs. £.) 
fatten. 



©inb @te gefonnen, 3b?e g3fert)c afc* 

JUfcbaffen ? 
3d) babe fie feben abejefebafft 
(£*t bat fetnen SBagcn abgefcbafft* 
£abcn <Sie Sbren iBebtcnten abge* 

febafft ? 
3cb f>al>c tfon abgefcfyafft* 

f (Stroag log rccrben*. 

f <Stnb <gte 3bren Krborbenen 3u* 

c!cr lcr> gctverben ? 
f 3d) bin ibn les qeroorben. 
t 3ft cr fetn cites s pferD log gewot* 

ben? 
f @r tft eg log gewotben. 



and 
many a dupe. 

To wait, to tarry. 



To change. 
To exchange, to truck. 



Saufcben* 
"g*er tau febem 



£umtaufcben. 

To change one thing for another. (Stroag gegen ctwaS ttertaufeben oi 

umtaufeben. 
I change my hat for his. 3d) taufebe mcinen #ut gegen ben 

feirtigen urn. 



To put on one's hat. 
To put on linen. 
To p U on a cravat. 



£>en £mt auffefsen. 
SBtffcbc* anlcqcn. 

©in ^>al5tudb umbtnben*. Part, 
past, gebunben. lmperf. banb. 



Id^oLon. }3*^cinc„n„tanauf. 

He puts on other (shifts his) (St tegt ($tebt) anbere SODflfdjc an. 

linen. 

He changes his linen. (gr roecbfdt feme 2£afcbe. 

I put on another cravat. 3d) binbe ein anbercg £a(gtud) «m. 

I change my cravat. 3d) rocct)$(e bag £algtud). 

* 3)te SBctfcije, the linen, is a feminine collective noun and has consequent* 
ly no plural. 



225 



To put on other cloches. J ^ ^^ ^^ 

„ ., i +u i (£*r ftetbet ftct) tun. 

He puts on other clothes. j ^ ^^ fefiw ^^ 



(St $icf)t cm anbcrcS Jpcmb an. 



He puts on another shirt. j ^ ^^ ^ ^ 

m , 4li , i (Sin anberes $>fctb ncfjmch*. 

' ° chan ^ e the horse - J $a« 0fcrt rvUfdn. 

To exchange. £$ c d) f e ( n. 

To take fresh horses. £)tc $)fcrbe roedbfefn. 

To exchange a piece of money. (Sin (Stucf (15ct^ tucci)fcfn. 

To correspond with some one. SBriefc nut Scniaribem rwebfefn. 

Do you correspond with your SQBcchfctn Bte 53tiefe mttS^enl 23a* 

father ] tct ? 

I do correspond with him. 3d) r&edpfe SBriefc nut tljftf. 

To m^. © t d> mi d) c n. 

Amongst. XI n t e t (a preposition governing 

the dative and accusative). 

I mix among the people. 3d) nrifcftc nudv unter tic Oeutc. 

He mixes among the soldiers. (5c mifd)t fid) untcr bic ©elbatcn. 

OlBtebcretfenncn*. 
To recognise or fo acknowledge. ^(Srfennen*. 

C. Imperf. c r i*a n n t c. 

Do you recognise this man 1 (Srfcnncn ©ie bicfen $)?ann ? 
It is so long since I saw him, 3d) fyabc ifjn feben fo lan^c md)t ge* 
tint I do not recollect him. ft? hen, bap id) ifjn nid)t roicberet* 

!cnnc. 

exercises. 176. 

Have you already hired a room ] — I have already hired one.— ■ 
Where have you hired it] — I have hired it in William Street, 
number (one) hundred and fifty one. — At whose house (®et roem) 
have you hired it ] — At the house of the man whose son has sold 
you a horse. — For whom has your father hired a room ] — He has 
hired one for his son who has just arrived from Germany. — Did 
you at last get rid of that man ! — I did get rid of him. — Why has 
your father parted with his horses ] — Because he did not want 
'them any more. — Have you discharged your servant] — I have dis- 
charged him, because he served me no more well. — W T hy have yon 
parted with your carriage] — Because I do not travel any more.— 
Has your merchant succeeded at last in getting rid of his damaged 
sugar ] — He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on 
credit] — He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not sell it 
on credit. — Do you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — T hope to ar- 
rive there at a quarter past eight, for my father is waiting for me 
this evening. — For what have you exchanged your carriage whick 
10* 



226 

you no linger made use of] — I have exchanged it for a fine Ara« 
bian hojse. — Do you wish to exchange your book for mine 1 — I 
cannot, for I want it to study German with. — Why do you take 
your hat off? — I take it off, because I see my old writing-master 
coming. — Do you put on another hat to go to the market ] — I do 
not put on another to go to the market, but to go to the great con- 
cert. 

177. 

Why does your father put on other clothes ] — He is going to the 
king, so that he must put on others. — Have you put on another hat 
to go to the English captain ] — I have put on another, but I have 
not put on another coat or %ther boots. — How many times a day 
dost thou put on other clothes ] — I put on others to dine and to go 
to the theatre. — Do you often put on a clean shirt (an nxij}c$ ibcmb) ] 
— I put on a clean one every morning. — When does your father put 
on a clean shirt ] — He puts it on when he goes to the ball. — Does 
he put on a clean cravat (ctn rodije* &o(stud)) a s often as you? — He 
puts one on oftener than I, for he does so six times a day. — Did 
you often take fresh horses when you went to Vienna ] — I took 
fresh ones every three hours. — Will you change me this gold coin 
(t^a* ©eloftucf) ] — I am going to (mill) change it for you ; what money 
do you wish to have for it (Dafitr) 1 — I wish to have crowns, florins, 
and kreuzers. — Do you correspond with my friend ] — I do corres- 
pond with him. — How long have you been^corresponding with my 
brother] — I have been corresponding with him these six years al- 
most. — Why do you mix among those people? — 1 mix among 
them in order to know what they say of me. — Have you recognised 
your father ] — I had not seen him for such a long time, that I did 
not recognise him (3d) tjatte thn fo tongc nicfet gefi'fyen, bapid) tf)n ntd)t 
rbicbcr erfanntc). — Do you still speak German] — It is so long since 
I spoke it, that I have nearly forgotten it all. — Amongst you (Untct 
(Such) country people there are many fools, are there not(ntd)t nxtbr) ] 
asked a philosopher lately (neultcb) of a peasant (ctncn S3aucrn). 
The latter (Dicfer) answered him : " Sir, one finds some in all sta- 
tions (ber ©tanb)." "Fools sometimes tell the truth (bic SOSafyt* 
fyett)," said the philosopher. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) ' 



SEVENTY.FIFTH LESSON.— JFftnf nrib sieben?ig*te 

tttixon. 

To find one's self (to be > to do). <& i d) 6 e ft n b c n *. Imperf. fcrnb* 

How do you do ? f $to kftnben 61c fid) ? 

I am very well. j 3 C *> fccfiinbe mid) febr rocbt. 

How is your father? SBte tefmbet fid) 3&r $txx ISatixl 



227 



Obs. In the German the words £err, sir, $vau, ma* 
dam, &c. must be preceded by the possessive pronoun. 



He is ill. 



Your brother. 
Your cousin. 
Your brothers. 



f <£r fccftnM fid) itOcl. 
t 3 b r 40 c t r SSrubcr. 
f Sbr £err hotter, 
t 3-&*e £ ct ten SBrubet. 



To stay, to sojourn. ©id) auftaften*. Imperf. fjtcft.* 

Have you stayed long at Vien- .pafcen Sie fid) lange in SBten aufges 

na 1 rjaften ? % 

I have stayed there only three 3d) babe nvtd) nur tret Sage fc>a auf* 

days. gehattcrw 

Where does your brother stay at 3£o halt fid) Sfir $crt SBnibcr ges 

present ] gonnxirttq auf ! 

At present ©cqenroartig. 

To mock at, to criticise some one <Stcb ttber Semanfccn obcr etroaS auf* 



or something. 
To laugh at some one. 
He criticises every body. 

To earn, to get. 
To gam. 

To get one's bread. 



batten*. 

Stcb fifcet ^cmanbeti Uiftta, macben. 
(5r bait fid) fiber S^crmann auf. 

25 c r b t c n c rt. 

©cwtnnen*. Part, past, 9 e * 
tuonncn. Imperf. 9 c w a n n. 

I&tin 53rct> tterbteneri or crrnerben*. 
Part, past, crrcotfcen. Imperf. 
tmoxh. 



To get one^s livelihood by. © t d) e t n a h x e tt mi t. 

He gets his livelihood by work- (£t erna'brt fid) nut 2Crbeiten. 

ing. 

I get my livelihood by writing. 3d> ernarjre mid) nut (Scbretfren. 

I gain my money by working. 3d) petbtene man ®elb nut ?{rbetten. 

By what does this man get his SSouut ctntffjrt fid) Dtefer, SDlann? 

livelihood ? 

To spill. $8 e r g t e (5 e n *, Part, past, t> e 1 5 

9 c f f e n. Imperf. » e r 9 £. 

He has spilt the wine over the 6t bat fcen SBcin auf ben &tfd) t)CCi 
table. gojTcn (action). 

a Compound verbs are conjugated exactly like simple verbs. We shall 
therefore merely note the irregularities of the latter, and leave it to the learner 
himself to add the separable or inseparab*e particles. Thus fattb is the im- 
perfect of ftnben* to find (See Lessons XXXV. and XLIL), and befanf that 
of beftnfrcn*. The participle past of ftnben is qefunben, and that of beftnDen*, 
fcefuttten, the syllable ge being omitted on account of the inseparable particl© 
(See Lesson XLV.). <6telt is the imperfect of the verb fjaltctt* to hold ' Les- 
§ou LIIL), and btelt auf that of auffvalrcn*. The past participle of fallen if 
fatten, and that of aufyalten* aufa,e§alten. 



228 



To stand, © t e b c n *. Part, past, gcftanfcca 

Imperf. ftant>. 

The wine is on the table. £>er 2£ctrt fter)t ouf fcem Stfcf>e 

(rest). 

Has your father already de- 3ft 3br £crr SSatcr fcben abgeretpt? 

parted ] 
He is ready to depart. 
Ready. 
To make ready. 
To make one's self ready. 
To keep one's#self ready. 



<5r ift berett afyutetfen. 

SBcrett. 

SBemten. 

®tcb berett macben. 

<Stcb berett batten*. 



To split (to pierce)* 

To break somebody's heart. 
You break this man's heart. 



To hang. 

To be hanging* 



Was my hat hanging on the nail 1 

It was hanging on it. 

I hang if. on the nail. 

The thief has been hanged. 

Who has hung the basket on the 

tree ] 

The thief, 

the robber, the highwayman, 
The patient (the sick person), 

Tolerably well. 
It is rather late. 
It is rather far. 



3etfpatten (fc>urcf)fcet)rcn). 

Semanbem fcaS $erj Durcbbobren. 
@ie tmtcbbebten tuefem Marine t>a$ 

|>anqen (verb active, regular). 
$ a n q c n * (a neuter irregular 

verb). Part, past, gebangen. 

Imperf. btng. 

#i«g rnetn £ut an bem 9lagcl? 

(£: tying Damn. 

£f, bange tbn an ben Stfagel. 

3>r Dteb ift gebangt roorben. 

2Ber bat ten ^orb an ben 23aum ge* 

bangt ? 
ter Jtyeb ; 
bet Member. 
i:t patient. (See Note, Lesson 

L1V.) 
Siemhcb, fc jtcmftcf). 
(&$ tft -jtemttcb fpat. 
(36 tft jtemlid) roett. 



exercise 178. 

How is your father 1 — He is (only) so so. — How is your patient? 
— He is a little better to-day than yesterday. — Is it long since you 
saw your brothers ]— I saw them two days ago. — How were they ? 
—They were very well. — How art thou] — 1 am tolerably well 
(ntcbr (ibel).— How long has your brother been learning German 1 
—He has been learning it only three months. — Does he already 
speak it? — He already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your 
cousin who has been learning it these five years. — Is it long since 
you heard of my uncle ? — It is hardly three months since I heard 
of him. — Where was he staying then? — He was staying at Berlin* 
but now he is in London. — Do you like to speak to my uncle ]— 






229 

I do like very much (fcfit) to speak to him, but T do not Hke (id) nafa 
nicbr gern) him to laugh at me.— Why does he laugh at you 1 — He 
laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why has your brother no 
friends 1 — He has none, because he criticises every body. — What 
do you get your livelihood by] — I get my livelihood by working. 
— Does your friend get his livelihood by writing] — He gets it by 
speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood by 
working] — They do not get it by doing any thing, for they are 
too idle to work. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.— gerjjs nub eitbenpgste 

junction. 



2Cn etnxiS stoctfeln (governs the da- 
tive with the preposition an). 
3rtH'tfcln Stc barcm ? 



To doubt any thing. 
To question any thing. 
Do you doubt that] 
. do not doubt it. 
I make no question, have no >%d) sroctfte mct)t barcm. 

doubt of it. J 

It is not to be doubted. 
What do you doubt] 
1 doubt what that man has told 

me. 



£)aran ifl: ntcbt $u pcifctn. 
aHeran $n>«fcln Sic? 
3d) pciffj on bcm,wa$ bicfet OTanti 
uur gefagt f)at. 



To agree to a thing. 

To admit or grant a thing. 
To confess a thing. 
Do you grant that 1 
I do errant it. 



How much have you paid for that 

hat] 
I ha^e paid three crowns for it. 

For. 

I have bought this horse for five 
hundred francs. 

The price, 
Have you agreed about the price ! 

We have agreec abou; it. 

About what have you agreed ? 



Ue&r (or nKqen) ctrocu? etntg (oi 
cine) tuetben*. 

■ (Stroag eiftgefieben* or jugefcen*. 

©cflchcn Sie esi ? 

3cb a/tfebe e* (or id) gefterje cs ctti, or 
icb gebe es $u). 

S&temel baben @te fur biefer £ut &e* 

iMi ? 
3d) babe btei Scaler bafiir 6e$af)(t. 

•J it r (a preposition governing the 
accusative). 

3d) babe btcfeS q3fcrb ftir (or urn) 

fiinf bunbert -Jronfcn gefauft. 

bet $)rct$. 

(Stub ©tc (iter ben 9)rct$ (rocgen bc$ 

spretfe*) eiittg gavcrbert ? 
85Mr finb barubcr (bcSrocgcn) etntcj 

qcrootben* 
SBcruLuT (rocsrocgen) finb @tc etntg 

geworbeu ? 



230 



About the price. 



( Itebcr ben g)rct§. 
2 $£cgcn be* ^rctfc^ 
On account of (about). SGBcgen (a preposition governing 
the genitive). 
Do you confess your fault? ©ejleben @ic Sbrcn fitfjlct cin? 

I do confess it. 3d) gcjiche tfyn cin. 

I confess it to be a fault. 3d) gejtebc, tap e£ cin Jcrjtcr tft. 



To agree, to compose a differ- 
ence. 

To consent. 

However* 
For all that. 

To wear. 

Whet garments does he wear? 
He wears beautiful garments. 

Against my custom. 

As customary. 
The partner, 



reid 



(Bid) wrgtctcbcn*. Part, past, t>ct> 
gltcbcn. Imperf. rxtgltd). 
:b tu'tctmgeru 

(StnrvtUigen. 

3nb effen, bed), iebocf). 
£> e ffe n u nge ad) tc t. 

Stage n*. Imperf. ttug. 

SBaSfut Jtetbct tra'gt er? 
(St trdgt fd)b'ne JUcifcer. 

©cgen meine ©eroebnrjett (a fern 

noun taking en in the plural) 
SGBle gerocbnltd). 
bet vpanbcUgcncp (gen. en). 



To observe something, to take (&hva$ merfen (gcroafyt wetbert*, fc* 



notice of something. 
Do you take notice of that ? 
I do take notice of it. 
Did you observe that] 
Did you notice what he did? 

J did notice it. 



ben*). 
SHcrfcn <£U US ? 
3cb nierfe c$. 
£abcn ©tc U$ gemctft ? 
£aben €?U gefeben, n>a$ et gctljatt 

bat? 
3d) babe e$ gefeben. 



To expect (to hope). SSetmutben (boffen). 

Do you expect to receive a letter SSermutben @tc einen 5*ttcf »on Sty* 

from your uncle ? 
I do expect it. 
He expects it. 
Have we expected it? 
We have expected it. 



rem £)beim £u etbalten ? 
3cb boffe e$. 
(£*r t>crniU(bet c£. 
£abcn retr e6 r>crmurbct? 
2Btt baben cs oetmutbet. 



To get (meaning to procure). 
I cannot procure any money. 



SSetfcbaf fen. 

3d) fann nut fetn ©ctb &erfd>affett. 
He cannot procure any thing to (St fann fid) nid)t$ $u cjjen t>ctfd)af* 
eat. fen. 



exercises. 179. 



What have you gained that money by ? — I have gained it b^ 
Working. — What have you done with your wine ? — I have spilt it 



231 

on the table. — Where is yours ] — It is on the large table in my lit- 
tle room ; but you must not drink any of it, for I must keep it fox 
my father who is ill. — Are you ready to depart with me 'i — I am so, 
—Does your uncle depart with us 1 — He departs with us if he plea- 
ses. — Will you tell him to be ready to depart to-morrow at six 
o'clock in the evening 1 — I will tell him so. — Why are you laugh- 
ing at that man ] — I do not intend to laugh at him. -—J beg of you 
not to do it, for you will break his heart if you laugh at him. — Why 
have they (man) hanged that man 1 — They have hanged him, be- 
cause he has killed somebody. — Have they (man) hanged the man 
who stole a horse (from) your brother (in the dative) 1 — They (33tan) 
have punished him, but they have not hanged him : they only hang 
highwaymen in our country (bet un*). — Where have you found my 
coat ] — I found it in the blue room ; it was hanging on a great nail. 
— Will you hang my hat on the tree 1 — I will hang it thereon. 

180. 

Do you doubt what I am telling you 1 — 1 do not doubt it. — Do 
you doubt what that man has told you] — I do doubt it, for he has 
often told me what was not true (ivabr). — Why have you not kept 
) r our promise ] — I know no more what I promised you. — Did you 
not promise us to take (fiibrcn) us to the concert (on) Thursday ] — I 
confess that I was wrong in promising you ; although (tneeffen) the 
concert has not taken place. — Does your brother confess his fault? 
— He does confess it. —What does your uncle say to that letter]— 
He says that it is written very well ; but he admits that he has 
been wrong in sending it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault 
now ] — I confess it to be a fault. — Have you at last bought the 
horse which you wished to buy ] — 1 have not bought it, for I have 
not been able to procure money. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.SEVENTH LESSON. — Gkbztl Utib 
sieben^sste Cation. 

OF THE PLUPERFECT. 

This past tense expresses an action entirely finished 
when another action which relates to it was com- 
mencing. 

After having read (after I had 9Zad)bcm tcfe gclefcn fyatte. 

read). 
After having cut the bread (after 9fad)focm ct fcaS <Bret> gefdjmtten tyatt 

he had cut the bread). te. 

After having eaten (after he had £ftaci)t>em er cjegeficn fyatte. 

eaten.) 



232 

After cutting myself. Nacbbcm tcb micb gcfcbntttcn batte. 

After dressing yourself. SRacbfem ©tc ftcb angejegen batten. 
After he had withdrawn from the DiCicbt»cui cr ftcb Will gcuer entfernt 

fire. , hatte. 

After thou hadst shaved. fjjadb&em £)u £)tcb rafirt battcft. 

After they had warmed them- ^act)Dcm fie fid) geroarmt gotten. 

selves. 

Before I set out. (£bc tcb abretfe. 

When I had read, I breakfasted. Stfncbbem id) gckfen fyatte, frurjjtucfte 

id). 

DC? 3 In the second member of a compound phrase the 
nominative is placed after its verb. 

When you had dressed you went Nacbbcm @tc ftcb angqogen fatten, 

out. g t n g c n Sic au& 

When he had cut the bread he Sftacbbem cr t)a$ ^reb gcfcbntttcn belts 

cut the meat. ie, f cb n 1 1 1 cr ba^ glctfd). 

After he had read the letter he Nacbbcm ct ben S3ricf gclcfcn batte, 

said. fa gtc cr. 

Before T depart I will once more (She tcb abrctfe, will i cb nccf) citts 

see my children. mat mcine $tnber feben. 

Obs. A. This transposition of the nominative does not 
take place when the phrase begins with the subject. 

He cut the meat after he had cut (Sr febnitt bag Jftetfcb, nacbbcm cr tai 
the bread. l^rob gefebnitten fattu 

What did he do after he had 2Bas tfax cr, nacbbcm cr gegeffen fyats 
eaten ? tc ? 

He went to bed. <gr gtng $u 23ctte. 



THE FOLLOWING VERBS GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE WITH THE 

preposition iiber* 

To be afflicted at something. ttcber etmat betrtibt fetn*. 
To afflict one's self at something, <Stcb fiber ctnxi* berruben. 
Are you afflicted at the death of ©tnb ©te fiber ben Sob metnc* 

my friend ? ^reunre* betnibt? 

I am much afflicted at it. J[cb tun febr bctrubt bar fiber. 

At what is your father afflicted T £Boruber ift 3t)r £err $ater bctrfi&t ? 

The accident, bcr 3«faC ; 

the death, bcr Sob. 

To die (to lose life). ©terben* 

1 die, am dying. Scb ftcrbe* 

Thou liest, art dying. <Du fhrb|i. 



233 

He dies, is dying. (Er fftrbr. 

Died. Part, past, gefferfen. Imperfect 

Port). 

To complain of some one or some- @ t cb u b e r 3 c ni a n b e n e b e t 
tAi/ig-. enuad b c H a 3 e n (b c f d) n> e - 

rcn). 

Do you complain of my friend 1 S3eHac|en ©tc ftcf> tibcr mctnctl 

^reunb ? 
I do complain of him. 3d) beHacje mid) tibcr thru 

Of whom do you complain? liefer nxn bcfla^cn &k fid) ? 

Of w nat does your brother com- SBerubet befcfymert fid) 3*)r 23rubcr ? 
plain 1 

To wonder, to be astonished or © i d) u b c r C t tt? a $ to u n b e r n. 
surprised at something. 

Do you wonder at what I have SOBunbcrn <&\c fid) tibcr t>a$, was td) 

done 1 qerban fjabc ? 

I do wonder at it. 3d) rpnjnfcere mid) barfibcr. 

At what are you surprised 1 SSoriiber rcunbern Sic fid) ? 

To be glad. £ t c b f c i n* (governs the dative). 

To be sorry. Scib f c i n* or 1 f) u n* (governs 

the dative). 

I am glad of it. f (£*$ iff mir tt cb. 

I am sorry for it. f (£$ thtit or (ift) mir tetb. 

I am glad to hear that your father (§6 tft mir (tcb $u sernebmen, baS 3fyt 

is well. fecrr iJSotcr fid) rootyl reftnbet. 

To hear (to understand). SSerneljmcn*. 

Dear, lieb ; 

sad, sorrowful. traurtg. 

The prince, bcr Jurft ( s ]3rtn$) (en in the go* 

nitive) ; 
the count, bcr ©rnf (er. in the genitive) ; 

the baron, bcr 23aren. 

To pronounce li u 6 f p r c d) C n*. 

The Saxon, bcr (Sncbfc ; 

the Prussian, bcr $)reiiftc ; 

the Austrian, bcr Defrrctdjcr. 

Saxony, (Sacbfcn ; 

Prussia, Sprcuiicn ; 

Austria, Dcftretd) ( Defter retd) a ). 

The Christian, bcr Shrift (gen. en) ; 

the Jew, bcr 3ube ; 

the negro, bcr Sttcger (bcr S^obr, gen. en) 

• All names of countries are neuter. 



234 

EXERCISES. 181. 

Has your father at last bought the house ! — He has not bDught it, 
for he could not agree about the price. — Have you at last agreed 
about the price of that carriage ! — We have agreed about it. — How 
much have you paid for it 1 ? — I have paid fifteen hundred francs (oct 
$rantY) for it. — What hast thou bought to-day! — I have bought 
three beautiful pictures, a pretty gold ring, and two pair of thread 
stockings. — How much hast thou bought the pictuies for ? — I have 
bought them for seven hundred francs. — Do you find that they are 
dear ! — I do not find so. — Have you agreed with your partner! — I 
have agreed with him. — Does he consent to pay you the price of 
the ship ] — He does consent to pay it to me. — Do you consent to go 
to England ! — I do consent to go thither. 

Have you seen your old friend again (roicfrcr qcfchcn) ! — I have 
seen him again. — Did you recognise him ! — 1 could hardly recognise 
him, for contrary to his custom, he wears a long sword. — How is 
he ! — He is very well. — What garments does he wear ! — He wears 
beautiful new garments. — Have you taken notice of w T hat your boy 
has done ! — I have taken notice of it. — Have you punished him for 
it ! — I have not punished him for it, because he has confessed his 
fault. — Has your father already written to you! — Not yet; but I 
expect to receive a letter from him to-day. — Of what do you com- 
plain ? — I complain of not being able to procure some money. — - 
W T hy do these poor people complain ! — They complain because they 
cannot procure a livelihood. — How are your parents ! — They are 
as usual (wit qcrt)obn(tcb), very well. — Is your uncle (3hr Jpat 
£)f)etm) well! — He is better than he usually is (a($ qercormttd)). — 
Have you already received a letter from your friend who is in Ber- 
lin ! — I have already written to him several times ; he has, how 
ever, not answered me yet. 

182. 

What did you do when you had finished your letter 1 — I went to 
my brother, who took (fuhrcn) me to the theatre, where I had the 
pleasure to find one of my friends, whom I had not seen for ten 
years.— What didst thou do after getting up this morning! — When 
I had read the letter of the Polish count, I went out to see the the- 
atre of the prince, which I had not seen before (nocb ntcbt). — What 
did your father do when he had breakfasted ! — He shaved and went 
out. — What did your friend do after he had been a walking! — He 
went to the baron. — Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut the 
bread !— T -Ie cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When do you 
set out! — 1 do not set out till (crft) to-morrow; for before 1 depart 
I will once more see my good friends. — What did your children do 
when they had breakfasted! — They went a walking with their dear 
preceptor. — Where did your uncle go to after he had warmed him- 
self! — He went nowhither. — After he had warmed himself he un- 
dressed and went to bed. — At what o'clock did he get up ! — He go* 
up at sunrise. — Did you wake him? — 1 had no need to wake hiio 



235 

for he had got up Defore me. — What did your cousin do when he 
heard (of) the death of his best friend 1— He was much afflicted, 
and went to bed without saying a word. — Did you shave before you 
breakfasted] — I shaved when 'I had breakfasted. — Did you go to 
bed when you had eaten supper 1 — When I had eaten supper I 
wrote my letters, and when I had written them I went to bed. — At 
what are you afflicted 1 — 1 am afflicted at that accident. — Are you 
afflicted at the death of your relation] — I am much (febr) afflicted 
at it. — When did your relation die? — He died last month — Of 
what do you complain 1 — I complain of your boy. — Why do you 
complain of him] — Because he has killed the pretty dog, which I 
received from one of my friends. — Of what has your uncle com- 
plained 1 — He has complained of what you have done. — Has he 
complained of the letter which I wrote to him ] — He has com- 
plained of it. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— ftd)t mxb 0uben?ij0te 

Section. 

Declension of Feminine Substantives. 

Nom. Gen. Dat. Acc. 
TVi S Singutar: tie, ber, ber, bte* 

I Plural. bte, ber, bett, We 

I. Singular. 

Rule. All feminine substantives, without excep- 
tion, together with all foreign feminine words adopted 
into German, as : tie %cvm, the form ; bte ?tnte, the 
line, remain invariable in all the eases singular. Ex. 
Nom. bte $rcw, the woman ; Gen. ber §rau, of the 
woman ; Dat. ber $rau, to the woman ; Acc. bte 
§rau, the woman. 

II. Plural. 

Rule. Feminine substantives ending in e, ef, er, add 
It, and all others en, in all the cases of the plural ; and 
do not soften the radical vowels. (See Table of the 
Declension of Substantives, Lesson XIII.) 
There are two exceptions to this rule : 
1st, The two substantives: bte 9D?ittter, the mother; 
Me Zcd)tev, the daughter, soften the radical vowels in 






236 



the plural without adding n* a Ex. Plural : bte QKuttt* 
the mothers ; bte £ocf)ter, the daughters. 

2d, Feminine monosyllables containing an a or it, 
are declined in the plural like masculine substantives, 
that is, they add e in all the cases and soften the radi 
ca] vowel. b 



The floor — the doors. 
The bottle — the bottles. 
The fork — the forks. 
The pen — the pens. 
The hand — the hands. 
The nut — the nuts. 

She — they. 



Has she ! 
She has. 
She has not. 
Have they? 
They have. 
They have not. 



Sing. Plural. 

bte £[yar, — bte £bitrem 
bte gfafdje — bte glafd)em 



bte @a6el 
bte geber 
bie ftanb 
bte JRufJ 



bte ©abeltu 

— bte gebenn 

— bte ftanbe* 

— bte Jtuflfe. 



My (feminine singular). 
My (plural for all genders), 



©tc — fte. 
Personal 
XXVIII.) 

£at fie ? 
<£ie hat. 
<£te bat ntd)t. 
£>aben fie ? 
(Sic ha ben. 
©te fyaben ntd)t. 

Nom. Gen. 
metne, ntetner, 



(See Table 
Pronouns, 



of the 

Lesson 



Dat. Acc. 
ntetner, tnetne* 
metne, ntetner, ntetnen, metne. 



Obs. A. In this manner all possessive pronouns of 
the feminine gender are declined, as : Seine, thy ; feme, 
his ; tfyre, her ; unfere, our ; (Snre, your ; tfyre, their. 

The father and his son or his £)er $ater unb fein (Sofytt obct fetne 

daughter. gochter. 

The mother and her son or her £)tc gutter unb tf)r @oI)n obet tfjrc 

daughter. Socbtet, 

The child and its brother or its £)&$ £tnb unb fetn 23tubet cbet 

sister. fetne ©dwefter. 

My door — my doors. Nettie Shut — metne Shuten. 

Thy fork — thy forks. £)etne ©abet — Deine ©abeln. 

a Except in the dative. It will be remembered that all substantives with- 
out exception take it in the dative plural, if they have not one in the nomina- 
tive. (See Lesson XIII.) 

b The declension of those substantives which deviate from these rules 
will be separately noted. 



237 



His pen — his pens. 
Hei brother — her brothers 
Hei sister — her sisters. 
Her book — her books. 



©cine yveber — feme 5?ebertn 
Sbr ©ruber —-tbre ©ruber. 
Sbrv ©ebwefter— tbre ©cbroeftctn. 
Sbr JBud) —tbre ©udjet. 



THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE DEFINITE ARTICLE OF Til 
FEMININE GENDER. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



the good"") <n 
of the good ^ ™J 
to the good f p 

the goodj 



Singular. 
Nom. bte gufe. 
Gen. ber gutert. 
Dat. ber gutem 
Ace bte gttte. 



Plural. 
bte gttten. 
ber guten. 
ben guteit. 
bte gutem 



Obs. B. The adjective preceded by a possessive 
pronoun of the feminine gender, as : tttettte, betne, &c. 
has exactly the same declension as with the definite 
article. 



My good linen, 
the right hand, 
the left hand, 
the language, 
. the tongue, 
the street, 
the town, 
the woman, the wife, 

the girl, 

the young lady, 

My right hand aches. 
His left hanc 1 aches. 

The room, 

the chamber, 

the cabinet, 

the apartment, 
The front room, 
the back room, 
the silk, 
the silk stocking, 



metne aute 2etmt>anb ; 

tie recbte £>ano ; 

bte tihfe &an\) ; 

bte @prad)C ; 

bte 3una,e ; 

bte ©tra&c ; 

tie etat)t ; 

tie $rnu (does not soften aad 

takes en in the plural) ; 
bag 932abcbcn ; 
bas grctutetn. 

5QZtr febmer^t bte recite £anb. c 
3f)m febmcqt bte linte £anb. 

bte ©tu&e ; 
ba6 Simmer ; 

bte .hammer ; 

bat (Siemad). d 

bte ©tube porn bcraug ; 

bie ©tube btntcnauS ; 

bte (Setbe ; 

ber fetbene tfetrumpf. 



c When the sensation expressed by the impersonal verb is felt only in a 
i »rt of the body, the person is put in the dative. 

f etube is the room commonly inhabited and in which there is a stove, 
f miner is the general word for room, whether there is a stove in it or not. 
Hammer is a small room in which there is no stove, and in which various 
things are kept ; hence bte Jtletberfammer, the wardrobe ; bte ^obettfainmer, 
llie garret, &c. @emad) is only used m speaking of the apartments in a ca»« 
tie or a palace. 



238 



THE ADJECTIVE WITHOUT AN ARTICLE IN THE FEMININE 
GENDER. 

Nom. 
Good, &c. (in the singular).! Qi\te f 
Good, &c. (in the plural). | gute, 

Some good soup, (Shite ©uppc 

Some bad pens. @d)led)ti jetcrn. 

Some beautiful linen shirts, tgcbonc h'imuanftene £>cmben. (See 

Obs. Lesson IV.) 

THE ADJECTIVE PRECEDED BY THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE 
IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 



Gen. 


Dat. Acc. 


guter, 


guter, gute. 


guter, 


guten, gute* 



A good, &e. (feminine). 



N. erne gute. G. enter guten* 
A. eme gute* D. etner guten. 



the following pronouns are declined like the 
definite article. 






This or this one, that or that one, btcfc, [cm. 

Some, sundry, etntge, et(td)C. 

Many, several, mc&re or mefyrere. 6 

Whbh, roekfye. 

All alle. 

Many a one, some, manner, mctndje, manc!je& 

2Cnt)ere is declined Jike an adjective. 

Obs. C. In the plural all adjectives, ordinal num- 
bers, and pronominal adjectives have the same declen- 
sion for all genders, as we have already seen in many 
Earts of this work, particularly in the Table of the 
declension of Adjectives, Lesson XVIII. 

REMARK. 

To become intimately acquainted with the declen- 
sion of adjectives, ordinal numbers, and pronominal 
adjectives, the learner has only to familiarize himself 
with the definite article ; for when the adjective is 
preceded by a word having the characteristic termina- 
tion/ it takes en in all the cases, except in the nomi- 

« Some authors write mefjre, others mefjteve. The latter is more usual, 
the former more correct. 

f The terminations of the definite article are called characteristic because 
they characterize the case, number, and gender. 



239 

native singular of all genders and the accusative sin- 
gular feminine and neuter, in which it takes e (Page 
33, Rule 2d.). The adjective itself takes these termi- 
nations when it is not preceded by any article* or if 
the word preceding has not the characteristic termi- 
nation, as : em, mem, fetn, &c> in the nominative of the 
masculine, and nominative and accusative of the 
neuter gender. 

This principle is clearly exemplified in the adjective 
preceded by the indefinite article. The nominative 
eitt, not having the characteristic termination er for 
the masculine and e3 for the neuter, the adjective 
takes it. Ex. @m guter 3Kann, em QUte$ Mini. 

The characteristic termination ol the masculine 
being e r and that of the neuter e g, that of the femi- 
nine is e : so that is is sufficient to join the ending e to 
a word of the characteristic termination to make it 
feminine. Ex. Masc. and neuter : btefer, btefe£ ; femi- 
nine : btefe ; masc. and neuter : jener jene3 ; feminine, 
jette. 

These principles being once well understood, the 
learner will find no difficulty whatever in declining 
adjectives, ordinal numbers or pronominal adjectives. 

Have you my pen 1 $abc\\ (gte nictne ficbct ? 

No, Madam, I have it not. 9?etn, 9J?abam (cutafcige Jrcm 11 ), id) 

babe fie ntcbt. 
Which bottle have you broken 1 $Mcbc ^tafebe fyaben <Stc $erbted)cn ? 
Which soup has she eaten? ffiMcbc <Suppe bat fie ejeqeffen ? 

W'hat pear have you 1 %£d$ fur cine 23irne boben <&ic 1 

What linen have you bought 1 £$a$ fur £etnnxmt> bjaben ©tc ae* 

fauft ? 
Do you see my sister 1 (gfehen Ste mctne (Scbrocftet ? 

I do see her. Scb febe fie; 

Have you seen my sisters 1 £aben (Sie metne (Scbtvcftcrn gefc* 

ben? 
No, my lady, I have not seen 9Zctn, metn graulctn, id) fjafcc ftc 
them. ntcl)t gefeben. 

6 Except in the genitive singular masculine and neuter, in which it takes 
en, and in the nominative and accusative neuter in which it changes as into 
e$. (Page 33, Rule 2d.) 

h If speaking to a lady of rank, pabtgc %XM, gracious Lady, must bo 
, ised. 



240 

The nose, tie 9?afe ; 

the butter, tic Gutter ; 

the soup, tic (Suppe ; 

the towel, ta£ £flnttud) ; 

the napkin, ta6 SeUertud), tic ©crctette. 

exercises. 183. 

Are you not surprised at what my friend has done ] — I am much 
surprised at it. — At what is your son surprised 1 — He is surprised 
at your courage. — Are you sorry for having- written to my uncle 1 
— I am, on the contrary, glad of it. — At what art thou afflicted 1 — [ 
am not afflicted at the happiness of my enemy, but at the death of 
my friend. — How are your brothers 1 — They have been very well 
for these few days. — Are you glad of hi — 1 am glad to hear that 
they are well. — Are you a Saxon 1 — No, I am a Prussian. — Do 
the Prussians like to learn French 1 — They do like to learn it. — 
Do* the Prussians speak German as well as the Saxons ? — The 
Saxons and the Prussians speak German well ; but the Austrians 
do not pronounce it very well (md)t flflju gut) ; notwithstanding 
they are (teffen ungeacbtct ftnt U) very good people. — Which day of 
the week (SBelcbcn &ciq in tcr 2Bec.be) do the Turks celebrate (fetern) 1 
— They celebrate Friday (ten greitctg) ; but the Christians cele- 
brate Sunday, the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birth-day 
(tct ©eburtstag). 

184. 

Has your sister my gold ribbon 1 — She has it not. — What has 
she ? — She has nothing. — Has your mother anything 1 — She has a 
fine gold fork. — Who has my large bottle ] — Your sister has it.— 
Do you sometimes see your mother ? — I see her often. — When did 
you see your sister ] — I saw her three months and a half (Obs. C., 
Lesson LXV.) ago. — Who has my fine nuts? — Your good sister 
has them. — Has she also my silver forks ] — She has them not. — 
Who has them 1 — Your mother has them. — Have your sisters had 
my pens 1 — They have not had them, but I believe that their chil- 
dren have had them. — Why does your brother complain ? — He 
complains because his right hand aches. — Why d^ you complain % 
— I complain because my left hand aches. — Is your sister as old 
as my mother I — She is not sc old, but she is taller. — Has your 
brother purchased anything] — He has purchased something. — 
What has he bought? — He has bought fine linen and good pens. 
■ — Has he not bought some silk stockings 1 — He has bought some. 
— Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not writing. — Why 
does she not write 1 — Because she has a sore hand. — Why does 
the daughter of your neighbour not go out] — She does not go out, 
because she has sore feet. — Why does my sister not speak ] — Be- 
cause she has a soar mouth. — Hast thou not seen my silver pen? 
— I have not seen it. — Hast thou a front room ? — I have one be- 



241 

h!nd, but my brother has one in the front. — Does the wile of out 
shoemaker go out already ] — No, my lady, she does not go out 
yet, for she is still very ill. 

185. 

Which bottle has your little sister broken 1 — She broke the one 
which my mother bought yesterday. — Have you eaten of my s:mp 
or of my mother's ] — I have eaten neither of yours nor your mo- 
ther's, but of that of my good sister. — Have you seen the woman 
that was with (bet) me this morning ] — I have not seen her. — Has 
your mother hurt herself? — She has not hurt herself. — Have you a 
sore nose 1 — I have not a sore nose, but a sore hand. — Have you 
cut your finder 1 — No, my lady, I have cut my hand. — Will you 
give me a pen] — I will give you one. — Will you (have) this (one) 
or that (one) ] — I will (have) neither. — Which (one) do you wish 
to have 1 — I wish to have that which your sister has. — Do you 
wish to have my mother's good black silk or my sister's 1 — I wish 
to have neither your mother's nor your sister's, but that which you 
have. — Can you write with this pen ! — I can write with it (Ohs, 
B.. Lesson LIL). — Each woman thinks herself amiable ((teben^ 
ttmrbta,) and each is conceited (befigt (£ta,enltebe). — The same (t^bcn 
fc) as men (btc 9Ecmn6pcrfon), my dear friend. — Many a one thinks 
himself learned who is not so, and many men surpass (ubertreffen*) 
women in vanity (an (SitetCeit). (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



SEVENTY.NINTH LESSON.— Jfrmt nxib ekbzxt$s*t* 

jCertion. 

To go into the kitchen, to be in 3n bte £ud)e geljen*, in ber Mcfje 
the kitchen. fetn*. (See Lesson XXIX. 

Note b .) 
To go to church, to be at church. 3n bte £ttcr;e gcfjen*, in bet ilirdje 

fetn*. 
To go to school, to be at school. 3n bte <Sd)utc gcfjen*, in ber (gdf)ute 

fetn*. 
To go into the cellar, to be in 3n ben jtcttct: flcfjcn*, in bent &tU 
the cellar. (er fetn*. 

The dancing school, btc Santfcbutc ; 

the play (the comedy), btc £emobte ; 
the opera, bte £)pcr. 

i o go a hunting, to be at hunt- | 2(uf btc Scigb qcrjcn*, auf ber 3aa,& 
ing. fetn*. (See Lesson XXX, 

Note \) 

To go to the castle, to be at the 2fuf ta$ ©cbtefj a,er;cn*, °auf bem 
castle. (SctyoJTc fetnV 

■ The preposition auf denotes action and existence upon the exterior of any- 
thing or motion towards an elevation. 

it 



242 



To go to the exchange, to be at 
the exchange. 

The bank, 
the bench, 
To go to fish or a fishing. 
To hunt. 

The whole day, aL the day, 

the whole morning, 

the whole evening, 

the whole night, all the night, 

the whole year, 

the whole week, 

the whole society, 

All at once, 

suddenly (all of a sudden), 

Next week. 
Last week. 
This week. 
This year. 
Your mother, 

your sister, 
your sisters, 

A person, 
The belly-ache, 

She las the stomach-ache. 
His sister has a violent head- 
ache. 



2Tuf Me SBorfe gefyen*, ouf tet 233rfe 

fein*. 
tie a^anf (plur. SSanfcn) ; 
bit' SBcmf (pluu £3anr~e). 
•Jifcrjcn gefyen*. 
3'agen. 

ben gan$en Sag ; 
ben garden SHorgcn ; 
ben gan^cn 2CbenD ; 
bte gan$e 9?acbt ; 
to§ gan$e Saftr ; 
tie gan^e 2£ocbe ; 
tie gan$e ©efellfd)aft. b 
auf etnmat; 

£)te fttnfttge (nacbfte) 2Scdbe. 
£>ie Dcrigc (sergangene) ££ocl)e. 
3)tefe >2£ocbe. 

t 3bre grew Puttee (See Ofo. 

Lesson LXXV.) ; 
t 3&t gtauletn (Scbmeftet ; 
t 3bre jrauiein ©djrwftern. 
cine spcrfon. 
tag SBcmcbrocl); plur. tie SSaucf)* 

febmeqen. 
&it bat sj^agenfdjmerjcn (plur.). 
©cine <&tyw\tn t)at fjeftigeS &opf« 

reel). 



Some of it, any of it. ' 
Some of them, any of 

them. 
Of it, of them. 



Sing. 

and 
Plur. 

fern. 



Pronouns possessive abso- 
lute. 
Mine, his, hers, 
Ours, yours, theirs. 



Sing. 



Singular and Plural fem* 

A . 

SEBelcfye, beren, berfelbem 
(See Obs. Lesson XVI.) 



Feminine. 
_- a 



Singular. 

tie meintge, tte fetntge, tie tbrtge. 
tie unfrige, bte (Suttge, tie tfyrtgc 



* Substantives terminating in et, t)tit, fett, f$aft, and atl) are feminine. 



243 



Mine, his, hers, 
Ours, yours, hers. 



* Plural, 



Have you my pen or hers ? 
I have hers. 

To her. 



Plural. 

bte metmgett, bte fetmgen, bit 

ifyrtgett. 
bfe unfrtgett, bie (Surtgen, bte 

ifyrigeru 

£akn <gie meine gebet: cbet bie ir> 

rtge? 
3d) fjabe bie tfyrige. 

3 & r (See Table of Personal Pro- 
nouns, Lesson XXV11L). 



What do you wish to send to SSctf rooflen (Sie Sfjrct 9Euf)me fcfyU 

your aunt ? cfen ? 

I wish to send her a tart. 3d) roill tf)t cine Serte fcfticfen. 

Will you send her also fruits ? SBollen <Ste tf)r ctucb #tud)te fcfyicfen ? 
I will send her some. 3d) roill ifjr n?c(ei)C fcfycfen. 

Have you sent the books to my £ctf>en (Sic metnen (Scfytvejiem bie 



sisters 1 
1 have sent them to them. 

The fruit, 

the tart, 

the aunt, 

the peach, 

the strawberry, 

the cherry, 

the cousin (aunt), 

the niece, 

the might (power), 

the maid-servant, 

the gazette, 

The relation. 



JBiicper $efd)icf t ? 
3d) fyabe fie tfjncn gcfd)tcft. 

bie grudjt ; 

bie Serte ; 

bie $fluhmc (bie Sante) ; 

bie ^ftrficbe ; 

bie (Srbbeete ; 

tie .Ktrfcbe; 

Me SBafc ; 

bie Stftcbte ; 

bie Sftacbt ; 

bie tylaofi ; 

bie 3ettung.d 

ifeT.berSBerwanbte; ) (anadjee- 
F. bie SSermanbte ; \ tive noun. 



The neighbour (feminine), bie 9?ad)0atinn ; 

the ware (merchandise, goods), bie SBaare* 

Obs. A. A feminine substantive is formed by join- 
ing the syllable inn to a masculine substantive. Ex. 



The actor, 
the actress, 



ber ©cbciufpteler ; 
bie <Sd)aufpteletinru 



e These pronouns have the declension of an adjective p/eceded by the defi* 
nite article. (See Lesson VII.) 
d Words terminating in ung are feminine. 



244 



Obs. B. If the radical syllable of the masculine sub* 
stantive contains one of the vowels a, 0, U, it is gen- 
erally softened on being made feminine by the addi- 
tion of the syllable imu Ex. 



The countess, 
the fool (fern.), 
the cook (fem.), 

the peasant (peasant's wife), 

the sister-in-law, 

To catch a cold, 
To have a cold, 
To have a cough, 
I have caught a cold. 

The cold, 

the cough, 
To make sick. 
It makes me sick. 



tie ©raftnn ; 
tie ^arrtnn ; 
tie ^oci)tnn ; 
tie ^auerinn ; 
tie ©ctjroagcrinn. 

ten <£d)nupfen befcmmen*. 

ten ©cbnupfen baben*. 

ten £uften fyaben*. 

3d) [jabc ten ©djnupfen befommcn. 

tet ©.cbnupfen; 

tec £uften. 

$tanf mad)cn* 

(S3 macl)t mid) franr*. 



EXERCISES. 186. 

Where is your cousin? — He is in the kitchen. — Has your cook 
(fem.) already made the soup ] — She has made it, for it stands al- 
ready upon the table. — Where is your mother ] — She is at church.— 
Is your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thither. — Does your 
mother often go to church 1 — She goes thither every morning and 
every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to 
church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up. — At what o'clock 
does she get up ] — She gets up at sun-rise. — Dost thou go to school 
to-day 1 — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at school 1 — I 
learn to read, write, and speak there. — Where is your aunt? — She 
is gone to the play with my little sister. — Do your sisters go this 
evening to the opera 1 — No, Madam, they go to the dancing school. 
—Is your father gone a hunting ] — He has not been able to go a 
hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting ? — I like 
to go a fishing better than a hunting. — Is your father still in the 
country ] — Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What does he do there 1 
— He goes a hunting and a fishing there. — Did you hunt when you 
«vere in the country ? — I hunted the whole day. 

187. 

How long have you stayed with (bet) my mother 1 — I stayed with 
her the whole evening. — Is it long since you were at the castle ?— 
I was there last week. — Did you find many people there ! — I found 
only three persons there. — Who were those three persons 1 — They 
((§£) were the count, the countess, and their daughter. — Are these 
girls as good as their brothers ] — They are better than they. — Can 
your sisters speak German"? — They cannot, but they are learning 






245 

u —Have you brought anything to your mother 1 — I brought nei 
guod fruits and a fine tart. — What has your niece brought you !— « 
She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, and good 
peaches. — Do you like peaches 1 — I do like them much (fefyt). — 
How many peaches has your neighbour (fern.) given you ] — She 
has given me more than twenty of them. — --Have you eaten many 
cherries this year ? — I have eaten many of them. — Did you give 
any to your little sister] — I gave her some. — Why have you not 
given any to your good neighbour (fern.) ] — I wished to give her 
some, but she did not wish to take any, because she does not 
like cherries. — Were there many pears last year ] — Thtre were not 
many. 

188. 

Why do your sisters not go to the play ] — They cannot go thither, 
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — Did you 
sleep well last night 1 — I did not sleep well, for my children made 
too much noise in my room. — Wliere were you last night] — I was 
at my brother-in-law's. — Did you see your sister-in-law ? — I did 
see her. — How is she? — She was better yesterday evening than 
usual. — Did you play] — W T e did not play, but we read some good 
books ; for my sister-in-law likes to read better than to play. — 
Have you read the gazette to-day ] — I have read it. — Is there any 
thing new in it ] — I have not read anything new in it. — Where have 
you been since (fetttJcm) I saw you] — I have been at Vienna, Lon- 
don, and Berlin. — Did you speak to my sister ] — I did speak to her. 
— What does she say V — She says that she wishes to see you.— 
Where have you put my pen ] — I have put it on the table. — Do you 
intend to see your aunt to-day] — I do intend to see her, for she has 
promised me to dine with us. — I admire (kitmnfcern) that family 
(fctc ^amiltc), for the father is the king and the mother the queen of 
it. The children and the servants (t>a£ ©eftrtfce has no plural) are 
the subjects (t>cr Untcrtfyan, gen. en) of the state (ber Stoat). — The 
tutors of the children are the ministers (t)cr 93UmfU'v), who share 
(tbetlcn) with the king and queen the care (t)ic (Sorqe) of the govern- 
ment (t>te Kittening). The good education (tie (Sr$ter)ung) which 
is given to children (See Obs. Contin. of Lesson LXX.) is the 
crown (fcte .ftronc) of monarchs (t>er £ftcttarcr; y gen. en). (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTIETH LESSON.— Qtcl)t}ig3te UttUm. 

To march (to walk)* 93?arfd)itcn. a 

To walk (to go on foot). ©efyen* ($u Jupe gcr)en). 

a The v^rb marfd)trett takes the auxiliary fettt*, when there is a destination 
of place, else it takes either frctben* or fetn*. Ex. 3)te Slrmee tfl nctd) dlom 
marfefyirr, the army has marched to Rome; bie 2lrmce r)at (or tft) fceu'gattjett 
Xa$ matfefytrr, the army has marched the whole day. 



246 



To step 

To travel. 

To wander (to go on foot). 

The traveller, 

the wanderer (the traveller on 

foot), 
To walk or travel a mile. 
To make a step (meaning to step 

physically). 
To take a step (meaning to take 

measures morally). 
To go on a journey. 
To make a speech. 

A piece of business, ") 
an affair, 5 

To transact business, 

To salt. 

Salt meat, 

fresh meat, 

the food (victuals), 

the dish (mess), 

the milk, 
Salt meats, 
Milk-food, 

To attract. 

The load-stone attracts iron. 

Her singing attracts me. 

To allure, to entice. 
To excite, to charm. 
To charm, to enchant. 
To enrapture, to ravish. 
1 am enraptured with it. 
Tho beauty, 
the harmony, 
the voice, 
the power (the force), 

To meddle with something. 

To concern one's self about 

something. 
To trouble one's head about 

something, (to meddle with 

something). 



(Scbtettcn*. Part, past, gefcfyrttten 

Imperf. [cfyrttt. 
SRetfcn, > take fein for theii 
SBanfcern, J . auxiliary, 
ter SRcifcnte ; 
tct &£antctcr (SGBanterSmann). 

Sine 93?cUc $urticf(cgen. 
(Stncn <5d)ritt macfyen. 

(Sincn ©cfytttt tfyun*. 

Sine 9?ctfc macfien. 
(Sine SRctc fatten*. 

ein ©cfefyaft (plural e> 

©efd)aftc madjen. 

<S a I % c n. 

gefaljeneS Strife!) ; 

pafdbc* ^cifcl) ; 

tic ©petfc ; 

tag ©ertd)t (plur. c) ; 

tic s^ttd). 

gefatync (Spctfcn ; 

93Ztld)fpctfc. 

2Cn ft cb $tel)cn* (& e r c t^ t e* 

^en*, a n 3 tc f) c n *). 

£)er SJZagnct jierjt tag © ; fcn an 

ft*. 
3f)t ©cfang stefjt mid) an. 

£ecfcn. 

Sicken. • 

33c$au6ctru 

(SntjMen. 

3d) bin tatubcr entyfiefk 

tic @d)b'nbctt; 

tic harmonic ; 

tic ©ttmmc ; 

tic ©eroatt* 

<Std) in ctwa$ mtfefjen. 
@td) mit etruaS abgeben*. 

©tcfe urn ctwaS fccf fimmenu 



247 



I do not meddle with other peo- 
ple's business. 

The quarrel (the contest), 
the commerce (the traffic), 
Strange (foreign), 

It is strange. 

He employs himself in painting. 
The art of painting, 
chemistry, 
the chemist, 
the art, 

To look at some one. 
To concern some one. 
I look at you. 

The thing, \ 

I do not like to meddle with 
things that do not concern me. 
What is that to me 1 
What is that to you 1 

To repeat. 
The repetition, 

the beginning, the commence- 
ment, 
the wisdom, 

the study, 

the goddess, 
the lord, 
the nightingale, 
A.11 beginnings are difficult. 

To create* 

The creator, 

the creation, 

the benefit (the kindness), 

the fear of the Lord, 

the heaven, 

the ea*rth, 

the solitude, 

the lesson, 



3d) mifdjc mtcl) md)t in ftcmbc 

£cmbe(. 
tcr £>anbe( ; 

bet Jpanbel (has no plural). 
ftemb. 
(Se iffe ftnbetfcat. 

(St ciibt fid) nut bet 9D?a(etet a&. 

tie 9£fla(crci ; 

tie (Sbenue, tie (Scbetbcrunfi ; 

bet (SbemtCet (bet (Sd)etbeUinji(et) ; 

bic £unft. 

Semanben anfeben*. 
Semonben angeljcn*. 
3cb febe Sic an. 
I bte ©acbc, 
b«5 2)tng (plur. e). 
3d) nufd)c mid) ntcbt gem in £)tttge 

bte mid) nidbtg ana/ben. 
t ££a* a,ef)t tat midi' an ? 
t 80&a6 gefyt la6 (Ste an ? 

SB t e b e t fj o t c n. 

ba$ SStebcrfyoU'n. (See Lessen 

LXXI. Obs. C.) 
bet 2(nfang ; 

bte S£ct$nett ; 
C la* Stubium ; b 
\ la* Stubiten ; 

bte ©otttnn ; 

lav £etr ; 

bte 9£ad)ttgafl[. 

2CUet 2(nfang ift fd)tvet (a proverb). 

© cb a f f e n. Part, past, gefdjaffen. 
Imperf. fd)uf. 

ber <Scbopfet ; 

bte ©cbSpfwng ; 

bte SQBcbltbttt ; 

bte gutd)t beg #ettn ; 

ber $imme( ; 

bte (&tlc ; 

bte (Stnfantfett ; 

bte Section; 



b Substantives terminating in Itm, form their plural by changing um into 
en. Ex. bag Snfcunbuum, the individual; plur. bte^nbivunten; bas etuHum, 
the study; plur tie <S tub ten. 



248 

the exercise, tie tfufgabc ; 

the goodness. tic ©ute. c 

I have done it for your sake. 3d) fyafcc c$ SOrctrocgen gctfycm. 

Obs. The preposilion ttegen takes its place either 
before or after the genitive which it governs ; but when 
it follows a oersonal pronoun, the letter t is substituted 
for the lettei r of the pronoun which then forms one 
word with the preposition. The same *hing should be 
observed with regard to the prepositions fyalbnt, on ac- 
• count of, and um — ttullen, for the sake of, with this 
difference, that the latter never stands before the sub- 
stantive. Ex. 

Sfflctnetroegcn, mcinctfyalOcn, on ac- Itnfertrccgcn, unfettfycil&cn, on ac- 
count of me. count of us. 

£>etnemH'C|cn, tetnctfycMcn, on ac- (SurchucQcn, eurctfycitben, on account 
count of thee. of you. 

S'etnetnx^cn, feinctfyalkn, on ac- Sfjretrwgcn, tf)rctl)cift>en, on account 
count of him. of them, for their sike, 

3f)tctnxgen, t()rct!)a(0cn, on ac- 
count of her. 

In the same way we say : urn ntemetttntten, for my 
sake ; nm bemetttuttett, for thy sake, &c. 

He has done it for the sake of (£t fyat c$ urn ifyrctantlcn gctFjan* 
her. 

On account of you and your Sfyrct^ unt 3f)tcr Winter, efren fe* 
children, as well as on account roebl M meinet- unt tcr SRetni* 
of me and mine, I have put gen roegcn, r)abc tcb Sfynen fcttfe 
you in mind of and inculcated nncfyttge unt untruglid)C 2Baf)t* 
this important and infallible rjcit $u (SJcmutfyc Qcfutjrt unt an* 
truth. gcfcharft. 

The cleanliness, the uncleanli- tic Cftctnltcfyfcit ; tic ttnreinttcfyfcit ; 
ness, 

the government (meaning the tic Dbrtcjfctt. 
magistrate), 

Sensible, reasonable, ttemfinfttg. 

Not only — but also. Sfttcfyt allctn — fontertt aud). 

exercises. 189. 

Will you dine with us to-day 1 — With much pleasure. — What 
have you for dinner ? — We have good soup, some fresh and salt 
meat, and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food ] — I like it bet- 

« Abstract substantives have no plural in German ; as btc GJitte, the good* 
aen ; bte £iefce, the love, &c. 



249 

ter than all other food. — Are you ready to dine 1 — I am ready. — Do 
you intend to set out soon 1 — I intend setting out next week. — Do 
you travel alone 1 — No, Madam, 1 travel with my uncle. — Do you 
travel on foot or in a carriage 1 — We travel in a carriage. — Did you 
meet any one in (cmf with the dative) your last journey to Berlin 1 
— We met many wanderers. — What do you intend to spend your 
time in this summer 1 — I intend to take a short journey. — Did you 
walk much in your last journey 1 — I like very much to walk, but my 
uncle likes to go in a carriage. — Did he not wish to walk 1 — He 
wished to walk at first, but after having taken a few steps, he 
wished to get into the carriage, so that I did not walk much. — 
What have you been doing at school to-day 1 — We have been listen- 
ing to our professor, who made a long speech on (ubcr with the 
accus.) the goodness of God. — What did he say? — After saying, 
" God is the creator of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is 
the beginning of all wisdom ; " he said, " repetition is the 
mother of studies, and a good memory is a great benefit of God." — 
Why did you not stay longer in Holland 1 — When I was there the 
living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay there longer. 
— What sort of weather was it when you were on the way to Vi- 
enna 1 — It was very bad weather ; for it was stormy, and snowed, 
and rained very heavily. d 

190. 

What are you doing all the day in this garden! — I am walking 
in it (fccirtn). — What is there in it that attracts you 1 — The singing 
of the birds attracts me. — Are there any nightingales in it ! — There 
are some in it, and the harmony of their singing enchants me. — 
Have those nightingales more power over (fitter with the accus.) 
you than the beauties of painting, or the voice of your tender ($xU 
licb) mother, who loves you so much 1 — I confess, the harmony of 
the singing, of those little birds has more power over me than the 
most tender words of my dearest friends. — What does your niece 
amuse herself with in her solitude? — She reads a good deal and 
writes letters to her mother. — What does your uncle amuse himself 
with in his solitude 1 — He employs himself in painting and chem- 
istry. — Does he no longer do any business! — He no longer does 
any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your 
business 1 — He does not generally (^cwobntid)) meddle with other 
people's business ; but he meddles with mine, because he loves 
me. — Has your master made you repeat your lesson to-day 1-~-Hq 
has made me repeat it. — Did you know it 1 — I did know it pretty 
well. — Have you also done some exercises 1 — I have done some, 
but what is that to you, I beg ! — I do not generally meddle with 
things that do not concern me ; but I love you so much (fo fcbr) that 
I concern myself much (fcfyr) about what you are doing. — Does any 
one trouble his head about you 1 — No one troubles his head about 

* The learner must here repeat all the expressions relative to the impersonal 
verb t 8 t ft, it is, in Lessons LIV. and LVI. 
11* 



250 

me ; for I am not worth the trouble. — Not only for the sake oi 
cleanliness, but a*so for the sake of health (Me ©cfunbfjctt), prudent 
people avoid (fid) fytttcn tfor with the dative) imcleanliness, and wash 
themselves often. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON. — ©in tmb adjtfigstt 
tcttion. 

OF THE FUTURE. 

The first or simple future is formed from the present 
of the auxiliary tt>erbeit% to become,* and the infinitive 
of the verb, as in English from shall or will, and tne 
infinitive. Ex. 

I shall love, he (she) will love. 3d) n>erbe Itcbcn, cr (ftc) nrirb (teben. 
Thou wilt love, you will love. 2)u nnrjt licOcn, 3fyc rvcrbct (jB'xc 

rvetben) Itcbcn. 
We shall love, they will love. 85ttt nxtbcn Ueben, ftc rcerben Itcbcn. 

I shall be loved. 3d) roetbc §cltebt n>crben. 

Will you love my mother 1 SSerben <Ste ntctne Gutter Ucben ? 

I shall love her much. 3d) roetbe ftc fcfjr Itcbcn. 

I shall never love her. 3d) nxrbe ftc rue Ucbcn. 
I shall love her when she loves 3d) rocrbe ftc Itcbcn, wenn ftc nttd) 
me. Itcbcn rtnrb. (See Less. XL VII.) 

Will you go out to-day ? SQBcrben (Sie r)cute ausgefjen ? 

To be dusty. (Staubta, f e t n *, ftauben. 

Is it dusty? 3ft e6 -jtau&tg? 

It is dusty. ©6 ill jtaubtg. 

It is very dusty. (Sg tjt fcf)t jtaubtg. 

Is it muddy out of doors 1 3ft eg fdbmugtg bVaufen ? 

It is very muddy. <5*$ tjt fefyt fdjmugtg. 

To be smoky, to smoke. SRaud)Ctt* 
Is it smoky ] Does it smoke 1 SRaud)t cS ? 
It is very smoky. It smokes & raud)t fefjr. 

much. 
It is too smoky. It smokes too (&$ raucfyt $u fcr)r. 

much. 

To go in. &i n e t n $ c Ij c n *. 

To come in. $ e r c i n i o m m en*. 

• The verb Werben*, when employed in the formation of the future and 
•ther tenses, loses its proper signification. 



251 

Will you go in 1 SSSctbcn Sic fjincln gcf)cn ? 

To s& down. © t d) f c 6 c n. 

To sit. Si gen* (verb neuter). Part* 

past, 9 c f c f f C n. Imperf. fap. 

I will sit down on that chair. 3d) will mid) auf fctcfen @tuf)l fegem* 

Where did be sit ] s Ii"c [aO cr ? 

He sat upon that chair. Qv fap auf bicfem <Stu f)(e. 

To /We /ejfr. U c l> r t g b U i c n .*• Imperfect, 

Hie (>. 

How much money have you left! SBtctuet @ctb f^ct6t Snnen tlbrtg? 
I have a crown left. (5s IMeibt mir etn Abater tibrtg. 

I have only three crowns left. (&$ btctOen tniv nut frrct Sbalet ufrrtg. 
If I pay him I shall have but ££cnn id) ibn bejafyte, nntt) mir nut 
little left. locnlg ubrtoi blei&cn (or fc rotrfc 

mit nut iwcnig tibt'tg bkifcn). 

DCf 3 -^- The subject is placed after the verb in an 
inversion of propositions ; that is, when that which 
ought to stand first is put after, and forms as it were ; 
the complement of the other. An inversion of propo- 
sitions takes place when the first proposition begins 
with a conjunction. Ex. 

If he comes, I shall speak to him SSenn et femmt, roctbe id) nut tfjm 

(inversion). fprecben. 

I shall speak to him if he comes 3d) rocrfce nut ir)m fptecfyen, wenn ec 

(without inversion). Ccmmt. 

If it is fine weather to-morrow, 1 gfcenn cs mergen fcboncS SBcttct tjt, 

shall take a walk (inversion). roetbe idj [vafierm ejeben. 
I shall take a walk it it is fine 3cb rocrfce fpagteten geben, roenn e$ 

weather to-morrow (without ntetgen fcfyoneS £Bettcc tft. 

inversion). 

Hj^ jB. The subject is also placed after its verb, 
when in an inversion of propositions, the conjunction 
tt>entt, if, is omitted in the first. This omission of the 
conjunction may take place or not ; but when it does, 
the second proposition begins with the conjunction f 0, 
then (so). 

Then (so). <3c. 

If I receive my money I shall £**"*? $ ™ ® Ctb r £ZH 
r J * . ' C fo bi&iW id) @te. 

b Whenever a will or intention and not merely futurity is to be expressed, 
the verb ttotfen* is used. 



252 

If he sneaks to me I shall an- ( <Spd * t Ct * U mh (for : mm CC * U 
swer nim. ^ mcrtwi; 

O&s. When the conjunction tt>emt is not omitted, the 
conjunction fo of the second proposition may either be 
omitted or not, unless the proposition is of a certain 
length. 

If you will promise me to keep SBcnn (£tc mit ttcrfprccbcrt roettcn, c$ 
it secret, I shall tell it to you. $chetm $u r/alten, fo roetfcc id) c$ 

Sfyncn feujen. 

I have spent all my money, so 3d) fjnbe cul mctn (5Mb <m$CK$^ 
that I have none left. ben, fo tap mix feinS mefjt ubrifl 

fctetbt. 

To^ZZ. guUen (anfuHen). 

To fill a bottle with wine. (Sine #(afdbe mit S^ctn cmfutten. 

I fill my purse with money. 3d) fiiflc metnen Seutct (metric J8or> 

fe) mit ®e(b. 
With what do you fill that glass? SSomit futlen (Stc fctcfeS ©la$ ? 

EXERCISES. 191. 

Will your father go out to-day ? — He will go out, if it is fine 
weather. — Will your sister go out] — She will go out, if it is not 
windy. — Will you love my brother? — I shall love him with all my 
heart, if he is as good as you. — Will your parents go into the 
country to-morrow ? — They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall 
we take a walk to-day ?— We will not take a walk, for it is too 
muddy out of doors. — Do you see the castle of my relation behind 
yonder mountain ? — I do see it. — Shall we go in ? — We will go in, 
if you like. — Will you go into that room ? — I shall not go into it, 
for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, Madam. — Will you 
not come in ? — Will you not sit down ? — I will sit down upon that 
large chair. — Will you tell me what has become of your brother ? — 
I will tell you. — Here is the chair upon which he sat often. — W r hen 
did he die ?— He died two years ago. — I am very much (fenr) afflic- 
ted at it. — Hast thou spent all thy money ? — I have not spent all. 
— How much hast thou left of it? — I have not much left of it; I 
have but one florin left. — How much money have thy sisters left ?— 
They have b' * three crowns left. — Have you money enough left to 
pay your tailor ? — I have enough of it left to pay him ; but if I pay 
him. I shall have but little left. — How much money will your bro- 
thers have left? — They will have a hundred crowns left. — Will 
you speak to my uncle if you see him ? — If 1 see him, I snail speak 
to him. — Will you take a walk to-morrow ? — If it is fine weather, I 
«hall take a walk ; but if it is bad weather, I shall stay a', home.— 



253 

Will you pay your shoemaker 1 — I shall pay him, if I receive my 
money to-morrow. — Why do you wish to go ]— If your father cornea 
1 shall not go ; but if he does not come, I must go. — Why do you 
not sit down 1 — If you will stay with (bet) me, I will sit down ; 
but if you go, I shall go along with you. — Will you love my chil- 
dren] — If they are good and assiduous, I shall love them; but it 
they are idle and naughty, I shall despise and punish them. — Am 
I right in speaking thus (jc) ] — You are not wrong. (See end ot 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-SECOND LESSON.— %mi Ktib ac^XQBtc 
Action. 

OF THE PAST OR COMPOUND INFINITIVE. 

In German, as in English, the past infinitive is formed 
from the infinitive of the auxiliary and the past par- 
ticiple of the verb ; but in English the past participle 
stands after the infinitive, whereas in German it pre- 
cedes it. Ex. 

Have loved, to have loved. ($5c(tcbt baben, a/tiebt $u fjaben. 

In order to have loved. Urn gcltcbt $u baben. 

Without having loved. £)bne gcttebt $u baben. 

Have been loved. ©eltebt roerfcen [inn. 

To have been loved. ©eltebt reetDen $u fetn. 

OF THE PAST FUTURE. 

The past or compound future is formed, as the first 
or simple future (preceding Lesson) from the present 
of the auxiliary tt>erbett* and the past infinitive Ex. 

I shall have loved, he (she) will 3cb roerpe qeltcbt fyaben, cr (|ic) rmtt) 

have loved. qeltebt baben. 

Thou wilt have loved, you will £)u rotrft adtcbt fiaben, 3br rocrbct 

have loved. (^te roercen) qcttebt balvn. 

We shall have loved, they will 2Bir roercen geltebt fjaben, fie nxtben 

have loved. cjeltebt baben. 

I shall have been loved. 3d) nxrfce gettebt roetben fetn. 

I shall have written my letters 3cb rocrbe metne <priefe gefchneben 

before you return. baben, ebe <&\c jurfieffommen. 

wi, tu -a c ^ v, r$£mn tcb *a* s Yfert> be$ab(t baben 

When I have paid for the ho.se . » ^ ^ M , fn) 

I shall have only ten crowns I ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 
• ' [ ttbrig bletben. 



254 



iCf* A. When at the end >f a proposition there are 
two infinitives, two past pai ticiples, or an infinitive 
and a past participle, the verb which on account ot 
the conjunction ought to be thrown to the end of the 
phrase, may be placed either before or after those in- 
finitives or participles. Ex. 



What will you 
have dined] 



do when you J 



f 2£a$ wctbcn Sic tf)tm, rocnn <£k $u 



93ttttag gcgeffcn t)aben roetCcn, 

or rocrben ]i\ SDttttag gcgcffen (ja* 

^ ben ? 

When I have spoken to your ( m ™ i* 3brcn IBrubcr .gefprccften 

brother I shall know what I / g fl f cn ™%£*, f *« «? &"**£ 

have to do I & abcn ' f° wcrt>e td) ix>l ff cil/ wa6 ld > 

[ $u tfyun fyabc. 

DC/ 3 The latter way of placing the verb is the most 
elegant and most usual. Ex. 

(3d) fafte tfym gefagt, bag ©tc *>a$ 
g>ferD fjaben wrfaujjfti mufjen (and 
not Dcrfrmfcn gemugt or mufjen 
\jaUri)* 



The same (feminine). 

The same thing. 

One and the same. 

It is all one (the same). 

Sucn. 



£) i c f c ( b e, b t c n a m It d) e. (See 
Lessons XII. and XIV.) 

f 3)tefc(t>e (bte nam(td)c) <Sad)C. 
{ jDagjclfce (t>a$ nd'm(id)c) £>ing. 

(£*tncrlci. 

(§s tft etnertct. 



Masc. Fern. Neut. 
©olcfyer, folrfje, fotcfyeg 
(is declined according to 
the characteristic termi- 
nation). 



Obs. A. When fold) is preceded by ettt or fettt, it has 
the declension of an adjective. Ex. 

Such a man, such a woman, such (Sin fo(cf)Ct sfflann, cine folcfje $rau # 

a child. ctn fo(d)C$ jtinb. 

Such men merit esteem. <§cld)C 9)ienfd)cn ttetbtcnen 2(d)tung« 

O&s. B. When fold) is followed by em, it is not de* 
clined. Ex. 



255 

Such a man, such a woman, such deleft ein 9J?ann, fefdj cine -JrcM, ;Ofc!j 
a happiness. cin ©lucf. 

Orc *Ae outside of without, out of . 2( u p e r f) a 1 1> (a preposition gov- 

erning the genitive). 

The church stands outside the Die Jttrcfye ift auferfjatt) bee ©tabt. 

town. 
I shall wait for you before the 3d) roerbc &xt per bem Sfyere (j&tctiU 

town-gate. there) erroarten. 

m, , C bas ©rabttbor. 

The town or city-gate, £ ^ ^ ^ ^^ 

To go oat. £inau£qchcn*. 

To come out. £erausi:ommen*. 

Seldom (rarely). ©ctten. * 

Does he sit under the tree ? @t£t et unter bem 95aumc ? 

He is sitting under it. (Sr (tgt bar unter* (Ofo. I?. Les- 

son LII.) 

m ,. ^ , N (ftortfabten*. 

To continue {to proceed). ^ § o r tfe § c h.» 

He continues his speech. t ®r faljtt in feincr $ebe fort. 

rpi ... 5 *> cr 2Cppcttt, 

lne appetite, ^ ^ ^^ ^ ^ ^ ^ . 

the narrative, the tale, bie ©rjafjtung; 

the shore (the coast, the bank), bas lifer ; 

the sea-shore, t>a$ Ufet beg SRecreS ; 

on the sea-shore, am Ufet be$ StteereS. 

iVo* wn^'Z (not before). 9Hd)t e fj e r — 6 t S. 
Before. (S f) e , c r> c oU, b e » r. 

I shall no see him until I go 3d) rcerbe ibn ntc!)t fcr)en, efye (6e* 
thither. vex) id) rjtngcbc. 

Did you see him before his de- £mben <&'w ir;n vet fciner 2tt>reife ge* 
parture ] fehen ? 

I will not do it until you tell 3d) tbue e$ nicfyt, fciS @tc e$ mit fa# 
me. gen. 

There is, there are. 3)a ift, Plural, ba ftnb. 

Here is, here are. &ux ift, — bier ftnb. 

Here I am. £tet bin id). 

There is my book. £)a ift mein S3ud). 

There it is. £)a ift c$. 

There they are. £)a ftnb fie. 

* Sortfe^en is a regular verb active and governs the accusative ; fortfaljreti*, 
on the contrary, is neuter and irregular and governs the dative with the pre- 
position in or mit. 



256 

Therefore. ©egroegcn, bafjcr. 

That is the reason why. 3)a$ tjr Ctc UrforfK, ruatum. 

Therefore I say so. iDcjJnKgcn fagc id) c$. 

My sister's feet are cold. Reiner ©cbrocfter frtcrcn tuc $tfge. 

Her hands are cold. 3br frtcrcn fcte Jbcinte (c$ ift it)t an 

t>cn £ant)cn fait). 

EXERCISES. 192. 

When will you go to Italy ? — I shall go as soon as I have learnt 
Italian. — When will your brothers go to Germany ? — They will 
go thither as soon as they know German. — When will they learn 
it ? — They will learn it when they have found a good master — 
How much money shall we have left when we h?ve paid for our 
horses ? — When we have paid for them we shall have only a hun- 
dred crowns left. — Have you told my brother that I have been 
obliged to sell the carriage ? — I have told him so. — Have you writ- 
ten to the same man to whom my father wrote? — I have not writ- 
ten to the same, but to another. — Have they already answered you] 
— Not yet, but I hope to receive a letter next week. —Have you 
ever seen such a person ?-~I have never seen such a one. — Have 
you already seen our church ' — I have not seen it yet. — Where does 
it stand? — It stands outside the town. — If you wish to see it, I 
will go with you in order to show it to you. — Who is there? — It is 
I. — Who are those men ? — They are foreigners who wish to speak 
to you. — Of what country are they ? — They are Americans.— 
Where have you been since 1 saw you? — We sojourned long on 
the sea-shore, until a ship arrived, which brought us to France. — 
Will you continue your narrative ? — Scarcely had we arrived in 
France when we were taken to the king who received (aufnafom) us 
very well and sent us back to our country. — Whom are you look- 
ing for ? — I am looking for my little brother. — If you wish to find 
him you must go into the garden, for he is there. — The garden is 
large, and I shall not be able to find hirn if you do not tell me in 
which part (K»r &bet() of the garden he is. — He is sitting under 
the large tree under which we were sitting yesterday. — Now I 
shall find him. 

193. 

Why do your children not live in France? — They wish to learn 
English, that is the reason why they live in England. — Why do 
you sit near the fire? — My hands and feet are cold, that is the rea- 
son why I sit near the fire. — What do the people live upon that 
live on the sea-shore ? — They livu upon fish alone. — Why will you 
not go a hunting any more ? — I hunted yesterday the whole day, 
and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, that is the reason why I shall 
not go a hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ? — I shall not eat 
before I have a good appetite. — Why does your brother eat so 
much ? — He has a good appetite, that is the reason he eats so much 
•—If you have read the books which I lent you, why do you not re- 



257 



turn them to me 1—1 intend reading them once more, that is the 
reason why I have not yet returned them to you ; but I shall return 
them to you as soon as I have read them a ($um) second time. — 
Why did you not bring me my clothes 1 — They were not made, 
therefore I did not bring them ; but I bring them to you now, here 
they are. — You have learnt your lesson, why has your sister not 
learnt hers] — She has taken a walk with my mother, that is the 
reason why she has not learnt it ; but she will learn it to-morrow. 
— When will you correct my exercises ] — I will correct them when 
you bring me those of your sister. — Do you think (gtauben) you 
have made mistakes in them. — I do not know. — If you have made 
mistakes you have not studied your lessons well ; for the lessons must 
be learnt well, to make no mistakes in the exercises. — It is all the 
same, if you do not correct them (for) me to-day, I shall not learn 
them before (|"c r&erfce icb ftc erjt) to-morrow. — You must make no 
mistakes in your exercises, for you have all you want, in order to 
make none. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY.THIRD LESSON. -JDm m\h adji$J0te 
Cediott. 



To die of a disease. 
The small pox, 



She died of the small pox. 

The fever, the intermitting fever, 

He had a cold fit. 

He has an ague. 

His fever has returned. 



The apoplexy, 

He has been struck with apo- 
plexy. 

To sell well. 
Wine sells well. 
Cloth sells well. 
Wine will sell well next year. 



I 



2Cn etnet (dative) Jtranffydt ftet* 

tH'tt*. 

t>ie Sfatttrn (plural of Me 3Mat* 

tor, the blister, the pustule, the 

pock), 
(fete tit an frcn Slattern geftot&en. 
fcas gteber, bag 5l l ecbfe(fteber. 
(Sr hatte etnen 2Cn fall' sen gtefcer, 
(Sr rjat t>a$ jkbet befemmen. 
(5t bat fcaS gtcber rmeeer fcefom* 

men. 
bcr fxMrijj, t>er ©cMaa,ffufi. 
sDet ©cbtaq fyat thn gerubrt. 
(£r tft com <Sd)(aa,e gcrii^rt roci* 

ten* 
($uiten 2C(\aang bofcen*. 
(S*ut abqehen*. 
SBte! jtatifer ftnfrcn*. 
f jDer 9S*etn gebt gut a& (fiat guten 

2ft\qanq). 
f 2)as Such hat guten 2Cfrgang (fin* 

bet tue( .ft&ufrr); 
| £)et SBetn rotrb nacbfteS Satyr gu* 

ten 2Cbqanq boOen 



258 





To open. 




To shut. 




To open. 


That door opens easily. 


The 
The 


door does not shut, 
window shuts well 



Far off, from afar. 

That house is seen far off. 



jDeffncn, cwfmad&cn, ctuffd)(teficn*.» 
T 3umad)cn, $ufd)(iepcn* (active 

verbs). b 
3ugeben*, $ufcb(tc£cn*. Part, pas't, 

gcfchtcfTcn. Imperf. fcbletf. 
"2Cufgd)en* (a neuter verb), jtd) Bflf 

ncn. 
SDtefe gbftt gel)t (cid>t ouf (ift (etc!) 1 

511 effnen). 
JDte Zhiix fdblicpt mcfit. 
£)ae; genfto fcMtefJt gut. 

SScn rocttcm, t>en fcrne. 
gjian ficht Dicfcs £au$ t>en tvettcm 
(son fcrne). 



f^ommerfletter tragt man mcfyt im 
Summer clothes are not worn J SOBtnter. 
in winter. ] ^emmerftcttet nxttcn md)t im 2Bin* 

( tcr getragen. 

That is not said. 2)cig rotrb ntcfet gefagt. 

That cannot be comprehended. 3)ctg ift unbcgrctfltd). 

<£* ift fceutttd). 



It is clear. 

To conceive, to comprehend. 

According to circumstances. 

The disposition, 
the circumstance, 

According as. 

According to circumstances. 

It depends on circumstances. 



SScgrrifen*. Part, past, fccgttffen. 
tmperf. fccgriff. 
C %lad) ten Umfrantcn. 
i. 9f?acb 9$efcbaffcnhctt tct Umftante. 

tic ^efebaffenfjett ; 

tcr llmftant. 

Stfacbtcm, jc nacfytcm, in fo fern, 
fftacbtcm e$ ift (nacbtcm e£ fommt). 
9?ad)tem tic Umftante ftnt. 



Do not put the glass upon tbe (Stetten ®te ta£ ®te$ rttcbt ouf ten 
table, for it will break. Stfcb ; tenn c$ nurt 3crbrecf)Cti. 

Imperf. ^crbracr). 
To put. ©tcllcn. 

To lay. £egcn. 

* Deffnen and anfmacften mean to remove the obstacle in order to give ac- 
cess, as : tie £t)ore, bte jfcjiir cineS 3tmmer§, etnen ecfyrcmf, etnen s ^vtef offnen 
or aufmacben, tc open the town-gates, the door of a room, a cupboard, a let' 
ter. Deffnett is only employed to make an opening in the thing itself, as : et* 
nut ?etct)ttam, etne 5lbct, em (tyefcfrwiir offnen, to open a corpse, a vein, an ab- 
scess, because there is no opening yet. So we say bte £aufgra&en offnen, to 
open the trenches. 9luffrf)ltef;en i s only employed in speaking of things that 
are shut with a key or a padlock. 

b The same distinction is to be made between JtttTtacfyett and jufcfyltefkn*, qj 
between aufmacben and auffcfyliefien*. 



259 

To set, to seat. (Se&cn. 
To stick. (Stccfen/ 

Are the women handsome ] <Stnb Mc Jfraucn fcnon ? 

They are so ; they are rich and Sic ftnt) c 6 ; fie ftnt) rcicb tint) fd)8tw 
handsome. 

W hat countrywoman is she ] j ^ . ^ ' [^ ? 

She is from France. ©te tjl cms (or pen) Jranfrcid). 

To be angry at somebody (about SBSfe auf Scmcmfccn (tibct ettucu?) 

anything). fctru 

What are you angry about 1 SQBerii&ct ftnt) @ic bofc ? 

Are you sorry for having done &f)tit c$ Sfjncn left, c$ getfjem *U 
it? baben? 

r (£$ tbut rntr fctb. 
I am sorry for it. < (Ss tjl mtr md)t ftefc (See Lesson 

C LXXVII.) 

Polite (courteous), impolite (un- £cfltd) ; unrjofticr). 

civil). 
Happy, unhappy. ©tiicf(td) ; ungt&fftd). 

What sort of pen have you lost 1 2£a$ flic cine £ct>ct fyaben Sic t)cr(c 

ten? 
A gold one. (Sine qetuenc. 

What sort of pens has your 2Ba$ far Jcuettt f)at 3t)re Sc^wcftct 

sister made ? Qcfdjmttett ? 

Good ones. ©ute. 

exercise 194. 

Of what illness did your sister die 1 — She died of the fever. — 
How is your brother 1 — My brother is no longer living. He died 
three months ago. — I am surprised at it, for he was very well last 

* (Stellen is used when the person or the thing spoken of is, as it were 
standing upright, and legen when it is lying. Ex. Die ®l»ifer, bte ^iafebe aur 
ben Stfcb ftdlett, to put the glasses, the bottle on the table ; em tftiub anj ka$ 
SBett legen, to place a child uponjhe bed ; em .ftletb auf bag 33ert legen, to put 
a coat upon the bed ; mo baben eie meinen (grocf tytngeftellt? where have you 
placed my stick? tt>o fyaben <&ie mem 9JMfer bmgelegt? where have you put 
my knife ? The verbs fteben* and liegen* may be explained by the English 
verbs: to stand and to lie. Ex. 3br (Srocf ftet)t in meinem ji^^er, your 
stick is (stands) in my room; 3fer prober ftebt am $enfter, your brother 
Btands at the window ; 3br ^D'icffer Itegt auf bem £ifcbe, your knife is (lies) 
upon the table ; bier ftebt 3 for Stocf 'unb ba liegt 3br 5)teffer, here stands 
your stick and there lies your knife, ^efeen nearly answers to the English 
verb to seat, as : fefcen &k ftcb btevber, seat yourself here. It is also used in 
the following idiom: 3emanbcn in ben v&tcmb fe^en, to enable some one, as: 
id) babe ttm in Un (stanb gefefcr, e§ jti tbun, I have enabled him to do it. 
<§rtetfen, as an active verb, is used with the preposition in followed by the 
accusative. Ex. 3n bte Xafcfye ftecfen, to put into the pocket. We shall 
hereafter see various other examples of these verbs. 



260 



summer when I was in tne country. — Of what did he die ] — He 
died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ? — She is 
not well ; she had an attack of ague the day before yesterday, and 
this morning the fever has returned (uni) tuefen 932cra/n router). — 
Has she the intermitting fever ? — I do not know, but she often has 
cold fits. — What has become of the woman whom I saw at your 
mother's 1 — She died this morning of apoplexy. — Did the wine 
sell well last year] — It did not sell very well; but it will sell 
better next year, for there will be a great deal of it, and it will not 
be dear. — Why do you open the door] — Do you not see how it 
smokes here] — I do not see it; but you must open the window in- 
stead of opening the door. — The window does not open easily, 
that is the reason why I open the door. — When will you shut it ? 
— I will shut it as soon as there is no more smoke. — Why do you 
not put those beautiful glasses on the small table ] — If I put them 
upon that little table they will break. — Did you often go a fishing 
when you were in that country ] — We often went a fishing and a 
hunting. — If you will go with us into the country, you will see the 
castle of my father. — You are very polite, Sir; but I have seen 
that castle already. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON. 

tzztion. 



-bhv tmir arljt^sste 



The utility, the use, 

the advantage, 
This thing is of no use. 

To profit by a thing. 

To turn a thing to profit. 

To be useful to any one. 
Of what use is that] 
That is of no use. 

Useful. 
Useless. 
Is it useful to write a great deal ] 
It is usetul. 

Is it well (right) to do it] 
It is not well (wrong) 

What is that ] 

I do not know what it is» 

To be called* 

What is your name 1 
My name is Charles. 



fcer SHufscn ; 

fcer £>ertbet(. 

SMefc ©ache tft sen fetnem 92uf en. 

9?u£en au* etner Sfldbc $tebcn*. 

<£tcr> cine ©ache ^u 9fu£e madjen. 

3emant>em nugen (or migen). 

2L*e$u nt'igt fcas ? 

£>as nu£t nici)t$. 

9$|lttfc 

Itnntig, nufte& 

3ft ce nflftfid), t>M 6 U ffyvctkn ? 

(SS tft nu£ltd). 

3ft c$ tutttq, e$ $u tfiun ? 
(5$ tft unlulltg (untccfyt) 

2£a£ tft fc>a*? 

3d) foetfj ntct)t, tvaS eS tft. 

$ e t 6 e n *• Part, past, ct c r) c t p e n, 
Imperf. 1) i e p. 

t iB*ic bcifcen (Sic? 

+ 3d) f)ctpe (mctn SRamc ift) JiarL 



261 

What do you call this in Ger- ££tc fyetjft tag auf tcutfcf) ? 

man ? 
How do you express (say) this SBic fagcn (Sic tag auf fran$6ftfd) ? 

in French ? 
What is that called 1 ££te ncnnl man tag ? 

To name. Sftenncn*. Part, past, gcnannt 

Imperf. nanntc. 

DECLENSION OF THE NAMES OF PERSONS. a 

The names of persons are declined either without 
or with the article. Without the article they take & 
in the genitive, and en in the dative and accusative, 
with the article they add nothing to their termination, 
Ex. 

Nom. ©ttfyefat or ber SGBMefm, William. 

Gen. 28tlhelmg — be$ SStlbelm, of William. 

Dat. SBtlfyelmen — bem SSilbetm, to William. 

Ace. 21Sitt)elmett — ben 2Bilt)elm, William. 

Nom. (SItfabetf) or bte Sh'fatof), Elizabeth. 

Gen. @lifabett)3 — ber &i\abet\), of Elizabeth. 

Dat. @(tfaf>ett)eu — ber (Sltfabetf), to Elizabeth. 

Ace. (Slifabetfyen — bte (Slifabetfy, Elizabeth. 

Obs. A. Names of persons terminating in fcf), £, fi, 
$r ^/ b ta ^e eng in the genitive. Ex. §ran$, Francis ; 
gen. grcmjen£* Names of females in a or e (txie com- 
mon endings for almost all such names) change in the 
genitive a or e into en£. Ex. SSBtlfyelnuna, Wilhelmine ; 
gen. 2Bilt)elmmen£, of Wilhelmine. Seonore, Eleanor ; 
^eonoren^, of Eleanor. 

Obs. B. To indicate that the ending of the geni- 
tive is not a part of the name, it is commonly separ- 
ated by an apostrophe as in English. Ex. Sct)ttter'3 
©ebtcfyte, Schiller's poems ; ©oetfye'3 SGBerfe, Goethe's 
works. 

Sooner — than. (Sfjet — als. 

Rather — than. Sit'frcr — atg. 

He ha3 arrived sooner than I. (St tft efyct angefemmen a(g tcf). 

8 For the proper names of countries and towns, see Lesson XLIX. 



262 

(fctc&ct roerfc id) mctn ©ctb in ben 
5*lu£, cbe id) e$ wrfcbivenbc. 
©be id) mctn ©e(b twfdjjwnl)?, roer* 
fc id) C6 licber in ten glup. 
J will rather pay him than gp 3d) will tfyn licber bqafyten, alg f)ttl» 

thither. qcf)cn. 

I will rather burn the coat than 3d) rot 11 ben $oc£ licber ttctbrennen, 
wear it. q(5 tbn trocjen. 

Sure. (55 e it) i p. 

To be sure of a .thing. (Since (Sacbc gewifi fcin*. 

I am sure of that. 3d) bin beffen cjercip. 

I am sure that he has arrived. 3d) rcci& (or bin) cjerotp, bap ct an* 

cjefommen ijt 
I am sure of it. 7 p- *. •>. * r. 

I know it well. j 3* wetP «* fleiotp. 

To repair to, to go to. ®td) roobin begeben*. 

I went to my room. 3d) becjob mid) ouf mctn Simmer. 

He repaired to that town. <5*t beo/ib ftd) in btcfe (Stabt. 

To repair to the army, to one's ©id) $ut 2lrmce, $u fcincm SRcgtmen* 

regiment. te begeben*. 

I repaired to that place. 3d) babe mid) an btcfen £5rt begeben. 

He repaired thither. (§r bat ftd) ba bin begeben. 

Go where you please. ©eben (Sic, rootym <Ste rootlen. 

George the Third. Gkorg bcr £)rtttc. 

Louis t ] ie Fourteenth. Cubrotg bcr $ter$ebntc. 
Henry the Fourth. £einud) bcr iCiertc. 

Europe, European. (Suropa; curopaifd). 

Fluently. ©elauftg. 

Charles the Fifth spoke several &arl bcr $unfte fprad) gelauftg met)* 
European languages fluently. rcrc curepai|~d)e <Sprad)en. 
Such a thing. (So etroa$. 

Have you ever seen such a £aben <Ste [c fo ctroaS gefeljen ? 

thing ] 
Have you eve; heard of such a £aben (Sic jc fo etnxtS ger)i5rt ? 

thing ] 
I have never seen nor heard of 3d) babe me fo ctroas Cjefefjen nod) 
such a thing. gefyort. 

exercises. 195. 

When did you .see my father's castle 1 — I saw it when 1 was 
travelling last year. It is one of the finest castles that I have ever 
seen ; it is seen far off. — How is that said 1 — That is not said. 
That cannot be comprehended. — Cannot every thing be expressed 
in your language 1 — Every thing can be expressed, but not as in 
yours. — Will you rise early to-morrow ] — It will depend upon cir- 
cumstances ; if I go to bed early, I shall rise early, but if I go to 



Q63 

bed late, I shall rise late. — Will you love ;ny children? — If they 
are good, I shall love them. — Will you dine with us to-morrow ] — 
If you get ready (juOemtcn tafjVn) the food I like, 1 shall dine with 
you. — Have you already read the letter which you received this 
morning] — I have not opened it yet. — When will you read it]— 
I shall read it as soon as I have time. — Of what use is that ] — It is 
of no use. — Why have you picked it up ] — I have picked it up, in 
order to show it to you. — Can you tell me what it is 1 — I cannot 
tell you, for 1 do not know ; hut I shall ask my brother who will 
tell you. — Where have you found it ] — 1 have found it on the bank 
of the river, near the wood. — Did you perceive it from afar ] — I did 
not want to perceive it from afar, for 1 passed by the side of the 
river. — Have you ever seen such a thing ] — Never. — Is it useful to 
speak much ] — If one wishes to learn a foreign language it is use- 
ful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to write as to speak ] — 
(t is more useful to speak than to write ; but in order to learn a 
foreign language, one must do both (beifces). — Is it useful to write 
all that one says ] — That is useless. 

196. 

Where" did you take this book from ] — I took it out of the room 
of your friend (fern.). — Is it right to take the books of other people ? 
— It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it, and I hope that your 
friend will not be displeased ; for I will return it to her as soon as 
I have read it. — What is your name ] — My name is William. — 
What is your sister's name ] — Her name is Eleanor. — Why does 
Charles complain of his sister ] — Because she has taken his pens. 
— Of whom do those children complain ] — Francis complains of 
Eleanor and Eleanor of Francis. — Who is right] — They are both 
wrong; for Eleanor wishes to take Francis's books and Francis 
Eleanor's. — To whom have you lent Schiller's works ] — I have lent 
the first volume to William and the second to Elizabeth. — How is 
that said in French ] — That is not said in French. — How is that 
said in German ? — It is said thus. — Has the tailor already brought 
you your new coat] — He has brought it to me, but it does not fit me 
well. — Will he make you another] — He must make me another ; 
for rather than wear it, I will give it away. — Will you use that 
horse ] — I shall not use it. — Why will you not use it ] — Because it 
does not suit me. — Will you pay for it ] — I will rather pay for it 
than use it. — To whom do those fine books belong ] — They belong 
to William. — W^ho has given them to him ? — His good father. — 
Will he read them ? — He will tear them rather than read them. — 
Are you sure that he will not read them ] — I am sure of it, for h© 
has told r.ie so. (See end of Lesson XXXI V.> 



264 



EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON.— JFimf ttttb aci^igste 



Sweet. 

mild, 

agreeable, 
Sweet wine, 
A mild zephyr, 
A mild air, 
A soft sleep, 
Nothing makes life more agree- 
able than the society of and 
intercourse with our friends. 

Sour, acid. 

To cry<, to scream^ to shriek* 

To help. 



Thou helpest, he helps. 
I help him to do it. 
I help you to write. 

I will help you to work. 
To cry out for help. 

To inquire after some one. 

Will you have the goodness to 
pass that plate to me 1 

Will you pass that plate to me 
if you please? 
To reach. 

If you please. < 

oomplaisant, pleasing. 
4s you Mease. 
At youi pleasure. 
As you likb* 

To kn >ck at the door. 
To happen. 
Something has happened. 



fctnft; 
angencbm. 

fitter 2£ein ; 

etn fanfter 3cpfy)r; 

cine fanfte £iift ; 

etn fanfter <Scb(af. 

9?tcbt$ macbt fra$ 2e6cn angenefjmer, 

ate tie ©cfcll|"c{)aft unt) fcec Uuuymg 

nut unfern grcunfcen. 

(Sauet. 

<§ cb r e t c n *. Part, past, g c * 
febrtccn. Imperf. febtte. 

$ e 1 f e n * (governs the dative). 
Part, past, g e f) o I f c n. Imperf. 

&u fjilfit, ec &ilft. 
[" 3d) belfe tbm tortn. 
[ 3d) bin tbm fcattn Ocbutfttcb. 

Scb ^clfe 3bnen fd)tctOcn. (See Les- 
son XL.) 

3cb will Sbnen arkttcn fyetfem 

Urn £ii(fe febreten*. 

©id) nacb 3cmanfrcm ctfuntifloi 
(nacb S^nianbem fragen). 

Pollen 8te t)te ©tite baben, nrir fctcfe 
^cbtiffct $u retcben ? 

Snellen ©tc nur gefalltgft fctcfe <ScJ){lf* 
fot retcben ? 

$Ketcbcn. 

®efaUtajr. 

2£enn es SOncn gefatttg iff. 

©efdlltg. 

2Bic c^ S^ncn gefaflig tft. 



I 



2di t>te &biit ftepfen. 

©icb eretqnen, ftcb $ittraqcn* (take 

fjafcen for their auxiliary). 
33erfctUen*, gefebeben*, begegnen 

(take fetn). 
<$$ bat ftel) etrociS jugctragen (cretg^ 

net). 



265 



What has happened ? 2£a$ if! ttorqefatlen (qefcbebert) ? 

A great misfortune has happened. (&§ iff: ctn groped Unatucf QejcrjcfyetU 
Nothing has happened. ©Sift ntd)t6 oergefatlcn. 

A misfortune has happened to (§6 ifl tfym ctn tlngtiict fcegegnet. 
him. 



I had an accident. 

To pour* 



To pour away. 
To shed. 



3d) fyatte ctncn 3ufoW. 

(SHefien*, fcfyuttcn, einfcfycn* 

fen. 
SB e g g i e ff e n*. 
SS e r 9 i e p c n*. 



To shed tears. 
A tear. 



Sfjrflncn wrgtegcn* (Part, past, t>cr* 

geffen. Imperf. wtgop), 
(Sine Sbrane. 
With tears in his, her, our, or SMtt tfyrancnben 2Cugcn. 

my eyes. 
I pour wine into a glass. 3d) gicpe £Betn in etn ®fa$. 

I put corn into a sack. 3d) fd)(itte @etrctbe in ctn en ©odf. 

I pour out some drink for that 3d) fcfyenfe btcfcm 93tanne $u trtnfen 

man. cin. 

I pour away the wine, for it is 3d) giepe ten 2Bctn rceg, benn ev tewgt 
good for nothing. md)t$. 

, t £B a $ anfcetteffen* (a n & e* 
> f f c n, o n Oetr af). 
; 6 a n b e ( a n 9 c n. 

As to me, I do not know what f 2£a$ mid) cmKtrifft (ant)cTancjt) / 
to say. fo rocip id) nid)t, was id) fagen foil 

To mee£ wifA. t# n * re ff en * (governs theacc). 

Part, past, getroffen* 1m 
perf. traf. 

Where have you met with him ] f £Bo r)ci&en <Sie tfjn angctteffen ? 



As to, as for, with respect to. 



< tr o 1 

C.t SB a : 



I do not know what to do. 
I do not know where to go to. 



t 3d) noetp md)t, wa$ id) tFjun felt* 
t 3cb rocip md)t, roohin id) gefjen 
foil. 
He does not know what to an- f (Sr roetp ntdr>t, wag et antwortett 

swer. foil* 

We do not know what to buy. t 85^ wtffen ntd)t, wa$ ttrit faufitl 

folien. 

To unbosom one's self to some <Sid) Semcmbem ttertrauen. 

one. 
To trust some one. 3cmanbcm traucn or ttertrauen. 

To distrust one. j gtnem nufitraum 



Do you trust that man ? 
12 



( (Stncm ntcbt trauen. 
Srauen (or uertrauen) @U btejtm 
SRanne ? 



2m 



l do trost hlra, 

He trusts me. 

We must not trust everybody. 

To laugh at something". 

Do you laugh at that 1 

I do laugh at it. 

x\.t what do you laugh ? 

To laugh at, to deride some one. 

I laugh at (deride) you. 

Full 

A full glass. 

A full j^iass of wine. 

A book full of errors. 

The means, 
To afford (to have the means). 
Can you afford to buy a horse ] 

I can afford it. 

I cannot afford it. 

The lady, 

To taste, to like, to relish. 

How do you like this wine % 
1 like it well. 
I don't like it. 



Scb ftauc (or uertrciuc) tf)m. 

(Sr rraut (or sertrcmt) mtr. 

2Btr mtifTen nid)t* client Seten 

trau en. 
ttcber etnxts tacben. 
Cad)cn @ie tavtibcr ? 
3d) locbe baxixb&v* 
£Bcrubcr facben Sic ? 
, SemanDcn ansfacbcn (or wrlacfyen). 
3d) latyt 6te au$ rr>er(acl>e ©tc). 

95 on. 

©in t>olle$ ©r<& 

©in 65(as Doll SBctn (cm i>ofte$ ®fa* 

Bfetti). 
(Sin *£ucb roller gebter. 

tag fitter. 

SDte PitM baton*. 

#aben @tc tic SOiittcO cm spfert $u 

faufen ? 
3d) babe tie SEtttcl bagu (tdf) t)*U 

fie). 
Scb babe fte.mdjt. 
tic £>ame. 

<S cb m c cf c n. 

2Bte febmctft Sbncn ttcfet fffiein ? 
(St febmceft nur gut. 
(St febmctft nur md)t. 




EXERCISES. 197. 

Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart? — They will ra- 
ther tear them than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask 
me for ] — He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If he 
will repair to-morrow morning to my house I will pay him what I 
owe him. — He will rather lose his money than repair thither. — 
Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently several European languages, 
said that we should (man mtiffe) speak Spanish with the gods, 
Italian with our (jetnet) mistress (tic ©ettcbte Obs. Lesson LIJI.) 
French with our (fetnem) friend (masc), German with soldiers, 
English with geese (tie ®an6), Hungarian (unoartjeb) with horses, 
and Bohemian (bobnufeb) with the devil (tet Scufcl). — Why does 
the mother of our old servant shed tears 1 What has happened to 
her] — She sheds tears because the old clergyman, her friend, who 
was so very good to her (tcr tbt fo met ©utcS getban bat), died a few 
days ago, — Of what illness did he die? — He was struck with apo 
plexy. — Have you helped your father to write his letters ] — I have 
helped him. — Will you help me to work when we go to town ? — 1 



267 

will help you to work, if you will help me to get a livelihood.— 
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap 1 — I have 
inquired after him ; hut nohody could tell me what has become of 
him. — Where did he live when you were here three years ago 1 — 
He lived then in Charles Street, No. 55. — How do you like this 
wine ] — I like it very well ; but it is a little sour, 

198. 

How does your sister like those apples? — She likes them very 
.veil ; but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you have 
\he goodness to pass that plate to me ? — With much pleasure. — 
Shall ((gell) I pass these fishes to you? — I will thank you to pass 
tfiem to me. — Shall I pass the bread to j*our sister ] — You will 
}blige (Krbinfocn*) me by passing it to her. — How does your mo- 
ther like our food ] — She likes it very well ; but she says that she 
has eaten enough. — What dost thou ask me for ] — Will you be kind 
enough to give me a little bit of (son) that mutton ] — Will you 
pass me the bottle, if you please ] — Have you not drunk enough ] 
— Not yet; for I am still thirsty. — Shall I give (etnfcfyenfrn) you 
some wine 1 — No, I like cider better. — Why do you not eat ? — I do 
not know what to eat. — Who knocks at the door] — It is a foreigner. 
— Why does he cry? — He cries because a great misfortune has 
happened to him. — What has happened to you ] — Nothing has 
happened to me. — Where will you go to this evening ] — I don't 
know where to go to*— Where will your brothers go to? — I do not 
know where they will go to ; as for me, I shall go to the theatre.— 
Why do you go to town ? — I go thither in order to purchase some 
books. — Will you go thither with me ] — I will go with you ; but I 
do not know what to do there. — Must I sell to that man on credit? 
— You may sell to him, but not on credit; you must not trust him, 
foi he will not pay you. — -Has he already deceived anybody?— 
He has already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. 
— Must I trust those ladies ] — You may trust them ; but as for me, 
I shall not trust them; for I have often been deceived by the wo- 
men, and that is the reason why I say, we must not trust every 
body. — Do those merchants trust you ? — They do trust me, and I 
trust them. 

199. 

Whom do those gentlemen laugh at 1 — They laugh at those la- 
dies wha wear red gowns (fcaS Mtit>) with yellow ribbons. — Wliy 
do those people laugh at us 1 — They laugh at us because we speak 
oadly. — Ought we to (SERufl man) laugh at persons who speak bad- 
ly] — We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the contrary, 
to listen to them, and if they make blunders (J-cfttcr), we ought to 
correct them for them. — What are you laughing at 1 — I am laughing 
at your hat ; how long (frit roann) have you been wearing it so 
large ] — Since (©ritfcem) 1 returned from England.— Can you afford 
to buy a horse and a carriage? — I can afford it. — Can your brother 



268 

afford to buy that large house ] — He can afford it. — Will he buy it 1 
— He will buy it, if it pleases him. — Have you received my let* 
ter] — I have received it with much pleasure. 1 have shown it to 
my German master, who was surprised at it, for there was njt a 
single mistake in it. — Have you already received Jean Paul's and 
Wieland's works ] — I have received those of (r>on) Wieland ; as 
to those of Jean Paul, I hope (fo boffe id)) to receive them next 
week. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY.SIXTH LESSON.— 0ert)S nnb ac^igstt 
Cation. 

Who is there ? 2Bet if! ba ? 

It is I. 3d) bin e& 

Is it you 1 (Stnb @tc e$ ? 

It is not I. 3d) bin e$ ntcfyt. 

It is you. (Bit finb ?& 

It is he, it is she. (St tji es, fte ift eS. 

Are they your brothers? <Stnb e* 3bte 2?tubct ? 

They are not my brothers. (£•$ finb meine $rubet ntcfyt. 

□CF 3 Appositional phrases a are in German always 
put in the same case as the principal noun. Ex. 

NOMINATIVE. 

Lycurgus, the Spartan legislator. Styfrtrg, ber ©cfegge&er ©parta^. 
Religion, this daughter of hea- Die SMtgien, btefe &od)ter bc$ £tffl* 

vem, is the faithful companion mete, ift tie treue ©efa'brtum ber 

of men. SJttnfcfyen. 

GENITIVE. 

The duty of a father, the natural £>e$ Stated, beg naturUcnen 23ors 
tutor of his children, is to pro- niunbeS fetner £tnber, Spfftcfyt ijt 
vide for them. eS, fur fie $u fergetu 

DATIVE. 

That honour is due to my friend £)tefe ©bre gebd&rt mcinem gfreunbe, 
who is a brave man. cincm brawn Sflanne. 

I gave the father, this honest old 3d) b^c bem £3ater, btefem red)t* 
man, the model of his family, fcpaffenen ©retfe, bem buffer jfU 
that advice. ner -ganulic, tm SKat!) a/ge* 

ben. 

* We call a phrase appositional when it serves to explain and determine th* 
principal noun. 



269 

That happened under Constan- £>teg gefcfyafj untet (Setiffrnttn bem 
tine the Great, the first Chris- ©rcficn, bem erftcn d>ri)ltid>en .ft at* 
tiari emperor. fet. 

ACCUSATIVE. 

t concerns my friend, the coun- (S$ betrtfft metnen S reun ^/ ^m 

seller N. ftatb 9?. 

t have known the king, that 3cb bnbe ben jtb'ntg, btcfen £Bofy(tf)as 
benefactor of his people. tcr fetneg SSctfcs, gc^annt. 

The duty, fcttf g>fltcbt ; 

the companion, ber ©efahtte ; 

the tutor (the guardian), ber ©ermunb (plur. SSotmiinbct) ; 

the model, t>a£ buffer ; 

the family, tie Jamtlte; 

the people, bas&Selr'; 

honest, tecbtfefyaffen ; 

faithful (true), treu. 

To thee, my dearest friend, I give £>tr, meinem liebften grcunbe, Cjebe 
this ring. tcf) btefen $tnc> 

DCP 5. In German, the pronoun must be in the 
same gender, number, and case, with the substantive. 

Of me, who am his nearest re la- 93on nur, fetrtem nacbften 8$ertt?anbs 

tion, he requests nothir-g, ten, scrtangt cr tiidbtg. 

Is it they who speak? > ©tub fie e£, bte fprecfyen ? 

It is they. / <gtc fi«D eg. 

It is 1 who sneak f 5" 3* ° tn C ^ ber fr ridf)t * 

it is 1 who speaK. r |c^ bin eg, ber tc*> fprec^e. 

ECJ 3 C. Whe| n a personal pronoun is followed by 
a relative pronouu j+ may or may not be repeated af- 
ter the latter ; but if it is not repeated, the verb which 
follows the relative pronoun must stand in the third 
person, though the personal pronoun be of the first or 
second person, 

It is vou who laugh. £ £ «J* i\ »« 6 ie tadjen ; or, 

° C ©te ftnb eg, bcr fad)t. 

r£)u tuji eg, ber bu eg ejetfjan fjaft; 
It is thou who hast done it. < or, 

C £u bift eg, ber eg getfjem Jjat. 
It is you, gentlemen, who have ©ie jinb eg, metne £crren, tie ba$ 
said that. gefagt fjaben. 

To look like (to appear) 2Cugfeben* rote. 

How does he look 1 2£ie ftct)t er aug ? 



270 



He looks gay (sad, contented). (St ftefyt lufttg (ttcmrig, jufrieben) 

cm*. 
This beer looks like water.- £)tcfe$J8tcr fteht ctu$ rote Staffer* 

You look like a doctor. (Sic fefyen vow ctn 2Cr$t au£. 

Our equals. f Unfcrce; ©tctcbc.n. 

He has not his equal or his f (St fyat fctiu'5 ®(etd)cn nid)t. 
match. 



To resemble some one. 



He resembles me. 

I resemble your brother. 

I resemble him. 

Each other. 



We resemble each other. 



' 3 e m a n t> c m gfetcben*. Part. 
past, gecjltcben. Imperf. Qtid>* 
3 e m a n t) e m a b n t i cfy fdjcn* or 
fctn*. 

©t fteljt mtr aftnttd). 

3d) 9(etooc Sfyrem 23tuter* 

3d) Mn itjm afynltd). 

(S i n a n b e t (an indeclinable pro- 
noun)^ 



5 ££t r Qtctdbcn etncmbcr. 



efyen ctnanbet afm(td). 
They do not resemble each othen (Ste f ^n ctnanbet mcl)t af)n(td). 
The brother and the sister love 3)ct '^Bmbet unb tic ®cf)n>ejtet (U* 

each other. t» en ctnanbet. 

Are you pleased with each other? (Stnb (£?i e nu * cinanbct juftteben ? 



We are (so). 

I am well. 

To drink to some one. 

To drink some one's health. 



3emanbeiiM«tnnfen*. 

CSemanfcc* v@cfunt>f)ctt ttinfen*. 

\2Cuf 3cmk" n ^ e ^ ©efunbfyett tt;n* 

C fen*. 
3ci/trtnFe °^ re ®cfunbbcit» 
3d) tt'^g £iif Sfoi (Sk'funbfjeit. 

To make some one's acquaint- S5cfatintfd;aft mit Sentanbcm macfyetu 

ance. 
To become acquainted with some- Scmcmben fennen (etncn. 

body. 

'3d) Ijafce feinc 23efanntfdjaft ges 



I drink your health. 



I have made his acquaintance. 



macbt. 
3d) babe S5c!anntfd)Qft mit tfjm ge* 
mad)t. 
I have become acquainted with 3d) fyabc tfyn fenn?n §c(ctnt. 

him. 
Are you acquainted with hiin <Stnb <Ste nut ifym (ifyt) fccfrmttt? 
(her)? 



*> ©member indicates that the action expressed by the verb is reciproea* 
between several persons or things, and is employed for all cases and gender*. 



271 

Do you know him (her) ] Bennett @U tfin (fie) ? 

I am acquainted with him (her). 3* bin nut trjm (tt)t) befannt. 
I know him (her). 3* fenne tf)n (fie)* 

He is an acquaintance of mine, dr tfr metri JBefanntcr. 
She is my acquaintance. <Stc ift meine SBtfottnte. 

He is not a friend, he is but an (St tft fcttt greuflflj cr tft nut An 
acquaintance. 95cfanntcr. 

Obs. So denotes the consequence of a preceding 
proposition. (See DCr 3 B. Lesson LXXXI.) 

As thou hast not done thy exer- SBeU t>u betne 2Cuf^abcn ntcnt gut ge* 

cises well, thou must do them niadbt baft, fo nmpt tat fie ncd) ems 

again. mat ntadjen. 

As he did not come, I sent for £)a cr ntcbt fam, (fo) tic? id) tt)n ru* 

him. fen. (Lesson LXXXI.) 

Again, once more. Cfted) ctnmat. 

As. £)a, nxit. 

EXERCISES. 200. 

Where have you become acquainted with that lady? — I have be- 
come acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Is 
it thou, Charles, who hast soiled ray book]— It is not I, it is your 
little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine ink-stand? 
— It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have spoken of iris 1 
— It is we who have spoken of you, but we have said of you nothi. \g 
but good (®utce). — Why does your cousin ask me for money and 
books 1 — Because he is a fool ; of me, who am his nearest relation 
and best friend, he asks for nothing. — Why did you not come to 
dinner ($um 9Kittagcffcn) 1 — 1 have been hindered, but you have been 
able to dine without me. — Do you think that we shall not dine, if 
you cannot come'? — How long did you wait for me 1 ?— We waited 
for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not come, we dined 
without you. — Have you drunk my health ] — We have drunk yours 
and that of your parents. — A certain man liked much wine, but he 
found in it (fccircm) two bad qualities (fcic (S'tcjcnfcrjaft). " If I put 
water to it (rrinein)?" said he, "I spoil it, and if I do not put any 
to it, it spoils me." — How does your uncle look 1 — He looks very 
gay ; for he is much pleased with his children. — Do his friends 
look as gay as he ? — They, on the contrary, look sad, because they 
are discontented. — My uncle has no money, and is very contented, 
and his friends who have a great deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — 
Do you like your sister] — I like her much, and as she is very com- 
plaisant towards me, I am so towards her ; but how do you like 
yours ] — We love each other, because we are pleased with each 
other. 

201. . 

Does your cousin resemble you? — He does resemble me. — Do 
your sisters resemble each other 1 — They do not resemble each 
other ; for the eldest (t>te altefte) is idle and naughty (unattto,), and 



272 



the youngest assiduous and complaisant towards every body. — Who 
knocks at the door] — It is I, will you open it] — What do you 
want { — I come to ask you for the money which you owe me, and 
the books which I lent you.— If you will have the goodness to 
come to-morrow, I will return both to you. — Do you perceive yon- 
der house] — I do perceive it, what house is it] — It is an inn (DaS 
££trtb$r)aus) ; if you like, we will go into it to drink a glass of 
wine; for I am very (fl'br) thirsty. — You are always thirsty when 
you see an inn. — If we enter it, I shall drink your health. — Rather 
than go into an inn I will not drink. — When will you pay what 
you owe me ] — When I have money ; it is useless to ask me for 
some to-day, for you know very well that there is nothing to be had 
of him who has nothing. — When do you think you will have mo- 
ney ] — I think I shall have some next year. — Will you do what I 
shall tell you? — I Will do it, if it is not too difficult. — Why d, you 
laugh at me ] — I do not laugh at you, but at your coat. — Does it 
not look like yours 1 — It does not look like it; for mine is short 
and yours is too long, mine is black and yours is green. (See end 
of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY.SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbm nnb adjQigste 

taction. 



To get into a scrape. 
To get out of a scrape. 

I got out of the scrape. 

The snare, 

always, 
That man always gets into bad 
scrapes ; but he always gets 
out of them again. 

Between. 



(Bid) £a'nM gujtcben*. 

©id) bcrcmS be(jvn*. 

©id) ou6 t>cr ©cbltngc $teben*. 

®td& son ctroas (es niacbcn. 

3d) babe nur Fjetaus gebetfetu 

3d) babe mid) aue fcer ©ctyirtge gc$o* 

9 en * 
3d) tun gut fcation gefommen. 
Me ©djltngc ; 
tmmct. 
2)tcfet 9ttann gtebt ftcb tmmct fcfcftm* 

mc £ant>el $u ; abcr et f)tlft fid) im< 

met nuefcet betauS. 

3 w x f cb e n (governs the dative 
and accusative). 



The appearance, fca$ 2fnfcr)cn ; 

the sight, the face, t>a£ ©cjid)t ; 

the mien, the look, t)te SOitene ; 

the countenance, the physiog- t>te ©ejtcbtsbilfcmng. 

nomy, 

To have the appearance. £>a$ 2Cnfcben bafren*. 

To appear ©djeincn** Imperf* fcfyten. 



273 



2fu?>feben*. 
©ut cuisfcben*. 
©ut $u fctn fd)ctnen*» 

0i fc^en febr out auS. 

<Sic ftebt ttctbrtevltd) au$. 

©ie fci)ctnt bofe (wbrtepttd)) $u 

fctn. 
(Sic fcbetnen ^ufrieben $u fctn. 
©ie feben Dcrgnugt auS. 

3cmanbem cm fceunbltd)C$ ©cftd)l 
macben. 

(Stncn freunbUc^ empfancjcn*. 

greunbttd). 

Semanbcm cin bofeS ©eftd)t macfien. 

2Bcnn id) t)icfcn sJEann bejud)e, nncbt 
et mir ctn bofe£ ©eftcbt, atiflatt 
mid) freunbltd) auftuncbmcn. 

(Sin $ftann sen gutem 2Cnfe()en. 

©in «JHann i)cn fcbtedbtcm 2Cnfcf)etu 

fieute Doti fcblecbtem 2Cnfeben. 

(Sid) einbilben (governs the da- 
tive). 

That man whom you see, seems £)ct 9D2antt, t>cn <2>te feben, fcfecint 
desirous of approaching us. fid) una (dative) na'betn $U wollctt. 



To look. 
To look well. 
To look good. 

You (appear) look very well. 

She looks angry. 

She appears to be angry. 

They appear to be contented. 
They look contented (pleased). 

To look pleased with some one. 

To receive one kindly. 

Friendly, kindly. 

To look cross at some one. 

When I go to see that man, in- 
stead of receiving me with plea- 
sure, he looks displeased. 

A good-looking man. 

A bad-looking man. 

Bad-looking people or folks. 
To imagine. 



To visit, to go to see some one. 
To pay some one a visit. 

To frequent a place. 

To frequent societies. 
To associate with some one. 

It is all over with me ! 

It is all over ! 

It is too late to consult to-day 
about what was done yesterday 
(a proverb). 
The spite, the displeasure, 
the grief, the sorrow, 
To vex, to spite some one. 
To hurt some one's feelings. 
You have vexed (spited) that 

man. 
You have hurt that man's feel- 
ings. 

The place, 
I know a good place to swim in. 

12* 



Scmanbcn bcfucbcn. 
Scmanbcm ctncn <8cfud) madjen. 
(Stncn £5tt befucben. 
©efclifcbaftcn bcfud)cn. 
9)ttt Scmanbcm umgcben*. 

<&$ tft urn mid) cjefcbeben ! 
3d) bin tjcrlercn ! 



(§6 tjt batutu gcfcbcben ! 
©cfcbebene £>inge finb mdjt$u cmbero 
((Spticbroott). 

bet S3crbtug ; 

bet .Rummer. 

Semanbem £$ctbtu£ madjen. 

Semanben ftanfen. 

(Sic baben biefem 932anne 23erbrug 

gemacbt. 
®te baben bicfen SEann gefranft 

tcv £)rt, btc ©telle. 
3d) recip cine cmte ©telle sum 
©cfynrimmctf. 



274 



To swim. 



©dbroimmcn*. Part, past, gefcfywom* 
men. Imperf. febroamm. 

(Srfabrcn*. Imperf. etfufjt 
@ r b u ( b e n. 

(S m p jt n b e n*. Imperfect, ems 
p f a n b* 

I have experienced a great deal. 3d) babe met etbutbet (empfunben, 

etfabrcn). 
I have experienced a great many 3d) Ija&c met Ungtftcf gefyabt. 
misfortunes. 



To experience. 

To endure (experience). 

To feel (experience). 



To suffer. 



2 e ib en* (ge tit ten, titt). 



To feel a pain in one's head or j 2Cm £opfe obct am #ufe tetben* 

foot. 
I felt a pain in my eye. 



t 3d) tjabe am 2(uge gctttten. 



To neglect. 



93etnad)(afftgen. 
To mfss (to neglect). S3etfaumen* 

You have neglected your prom- @tc fjaben il)r SSerfpred^en ttetnadf)* 

ise. tafftgt* 

You have neglected to come to <Ste baben twfaumt, $ut<Stunbc ($ut 



your lesson. 

To yield. 

To yield to some one. 

To yield to something. 

To yield to necessity. 

We must yield to necessity. 

To spring. 



Section) $u fommen. 
2Beicben* a takes fein. Part, past, 

gerotd)en. Imperf. wid). 
Scmanbem nacbgeben*. 
r<Stcb in ctnxts (accus.) fd)tcfetu 
< @td) gu etroa$ bequemen. 
C. @$ bet etroa* bcroenben (affen*. 
©id) in bie Sftotbrocnbigfctt febtcfen, 
Sftan mup fid) in bie Sttotljroen&tgftit 
fefytcfen. 



©pringen*. Part, past, gefprungetn 

Imperf. fptang. 
£tipfen. 
©ptengen. 

2tu$taffen*. Imperf. tiep. 
9Son unten berauf fprtngen*. 
93etwart$ fprtngen. 
Suritcf fprtngen. 
The child hopped joyfull around £)n$ &tnb fjttpfte freubtg um mid) 
me. bcrum. b 



To jump (hop). 

To Mow up, to burst. 

To omit. " 
To spring up from below. 
To spring forward. 
To spring backward. 



» SOBetdjett, to steep, and ertoetdjett, to soften, to mollify, are active and regu- 
lar verbs, and consequently take baben* for their auxiliary. 

b 4?iipfen, to jump, to hop, to frisk, is generally used in speaking of animals 
mat spring, and of children. 



275 



The besiegers let the bastion £>k SBetogerer ftcpcn bte SSaftet fprert* 

blow up. oicn- 

The copier has omitted a few 2>cr 2f0fcJ)rci0er ^Qt ctntQc3cUcn oug< 



lines. 

To rush upon 
something. 



some one or 



The cat springs upon the rat. 
To leap on horseback. 

To run. 
To swing. 



ebet thva$ lot 
jluqen, fc$ tens 



tytfaU 



C 2Cuf Scmanbcn 

fprtngcn*, lo£ 

tun*. 
Ucbcr Scmanbcn cbcr ctroag 

ten*. 

2)te .ftage fprtnqt auf bte SRottc teg. 
(Sid) auf bag 5)fcvb febrotngen* (gc« 

jcbnwngen. febroana,). 
SKennen* (gtraunt, tannic), 
(gcbnmigcn* (gefebroungen, fdjnxmg). 



To still greater ill luck. 3u necb grejktcm Unglfict 

To still greater good luck. 3u necb gtb'jJetem ©lucf. 

To my still greater ill luck I 3u nod) gtfc'&ctem UngMicf §a6c tcfj 
have lost my parse. inline 23otfc ttCttotm 

exercises. 202. 

Is it right to laugh thus at everybody'? — If I laugh at your coat, 
I do not laugh at every body. — Does your son resemble any one 1 — 
He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink 1 — I do not know 
what to drink ; for I like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. 
-—If you wish to have some other I shall go down into the cellar 
(Lesson LXXIII.) to fetch you some. — You are too polite, sir, I 
shall drink no more to-day. — Have you known my father long 1 ? — I 
have Joiown him long, for I made his acquaintance when I was yet 
at (auf) school. We often worked for one another, and we loved 
each other like brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each 
other. — When I had not done my exercises, he did them for me, 
and when he had not done his, I did them for him. — Why does 
your father send for the physician 1 — He is ill, and as the physi- 
cian does not come he sends for him. 



203. 

Is that man angry with (auf with the accus.) you 1 — I think he 
is angry with me, because I do not go to see him ; but I do not 
like to go to his house : for when I go to him, instead of receiving 
me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not, believe that 
he is angry with you, for he is not so bad as he looks. — He is the 
best man in (pen) the world ; but one must know him in order to 
appreciate (febagen) him. — There is (CSS tft) a great difference (bet 
tlntcrfcbtcb) between (dative) you and him ; you look pleased with 
all those who come to see you, and he looks cross at them.—- 
Why do you associate (geben <Bu — urn) with those people? — I as- 
sociate with them because they are useful to me. — If you continue 
to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for they have 



276 

many enemies. — How does your cousin conduct himself? — He 
does not conduct himself very well ; for he is always getting- into 
some bad scrape (or other). — Do you not sometimes get into bad 
scrapes 1 — It is true that 1 sometimes get into them, but I always 
get out of them again. — Do you see those men (lieutc) who seem 
desirous of approaching us ? — I do see them, but I do not fear 
them ; for they hurt nobody. — We must go away, for I do not like 
to mix with people whom I do not know. — I beg of you not to be 
afraid of them, for I perceive my uncle among them.— Do you 
Know a good place to swim in 1 — I do know one. — Where is it ? — 
On that side of the river, behind the wood, near the high-road (tue 
Cantftropc). — When shall we go to swim ? — This evening if you 
like. — Will you wait for me before the city-gate] — I shall w ait for 
\ou there; but I beg of you not to forget it. — You know that I 
never forget my promises. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



EIGHTY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &cl)t trttb aciftigste 
jlalicn. 

By all means (obstinately). 9)&t alter SOfacbt unb ©eroatt- 

To follow. Qfclgen, nacba/ben* (govern the da» 

five). 
To pursue. SSetfetgcn (governs the accus.). 

I have followed him. 3d) ton tfjm nacbo/a/m^en. 

To lose one's wits. £>cn SSerftanb Dettieren*. Imperf, 

wrier. 

The sense, the wit, the intellect, ber ?BerftanK 

That man has lost his wits, for £tefer OJJcmn f)at ben QSerftanb t>cr* 

he does not know what he is loren, benn er rvcip md)t, toa$. tt 

doing. thut. 

That man wishes by all means JDiefer Sfflann mitt mtr nut alter dte* 

to lend me his money. watt fetn ®e(b let ben. 

Obs. A. The neuter of the demonstrative pronoun 
btefed (bag) may in the singular relate to substan- 
tives of any gender or number, and even to a whole 
proposition. 

Is that the ladv whom you spoke 3ft ba$ bte £)ame, wn ber <Ste nut 
of to me 1 mtr gcjprccbcn baben ? 

That is a bad man. £>ae tft etn btifer 9}?onn. 

Which are the pens with which $lefcbe$ fino bte fiftsvn, nut benctt 
you write so well ? ©te fo cjut febretben ? 

Obs. B. The neuter of the interrogative pronoun, 



2T7 



tt> e I rf) e £, which, may equally relate to substantives of 
any gender or number. 

Which is the best pronuncia- S3Md)C$ tft tie befte 2(u*fprad)e ? 
tion? 



What a beautiful book ! 



SBc(d) ctn fd)Snc$ S3ud) ! 






Obs. C. SGBelcf), when it expresses admiration, may 
be followed by the indefinite article. It remains then 
invariable. 



What a g eat man ! 

What fine weather ! 

What good people they are ! 

What a happiness ! 

How fort mate ! 

How lucky ! 



S3Mcb ctn aro§er Warm ! 
S&defee* fcbene ^Better ! 
SSclcbe cjute £cute ftnt) t>a^ ! 

>5Bctd> ctn mM or n>eld)c$ GrtucH 



Perhaps. 
I shall perhaps go thither, 



2SieUctd)t. 

3d) rocrbe mettetcbt rjtngcfjcn. 

Obs. D. How, before an exclamation, is translated 
by note, ttne&tel, toeld). Ex. 



How good you are ! 

How foolish he is ! 

How foolish she is ! 

How rich that man is ! 

How handsome that woman is ! 

How kind you are to me ! 

How happy you are ! 

How much I owe you ! 

How much I am obliged to you ! 

How many obligations I am ( 
under to you ! { 

How many (what a multitude 

of) people ! 
The multitude, the great number, 



To be under obligations, to be 
obliged to some one foi some- 
thing. 

To be indebted to some one for 
something. 

To owe something to some one 

I am indebted to him for it, 



9Ktfc gut finb (Sic ! 

2£tc bumtti tft et ! 

8?t£ bunun ijl fie ! 

SBte retch tft bicfer SBcmn ! 

2fne feben tft btofc tfrau ! 

SfBclcbe ©fitc Sw fur mtdb Ijaben ! . 

fitaS ftnt) Sic fo ^lucfUcb ! 

3£icmc( tcb 3bnen ntcbt febufbtg bin ! 

££te fcfjr bin td) 3(jncn ntcbt pcrbun* 

ben! 
>S£as tcb 3bncn ntcbt tjcrbanfc ! 
>JSStcmi( id) Sbncn ntcbt $u rcrbanfen 

babe! 
©elebe gtfenfcbenmencjc ! 2Betd) etne 

^enc^e #otf$! 
tie SKcncjc. 



3emanbem 
fetn*. 



fiCr ctroag wtbunben 



? 



Jcmonbcm ctroaS wrbanfen o> ;u 
perbanfen tjaben*. 

£)a$ &abe id) it)m 3U wrbcmtau 



1 



273 

To thank. £> a n ! c n (governs the dative) 

lo thank some one for some- 3cnianbem fiir etrcag banfen. 

thing*. 
1 thank you for the trouble you 3d) banfe 3bnen flit bie 9Mfje, b* 

have taken for me. B'u fid) fur mid) gcgcben fyaben 

Is there anything more grand 1 $£a$ tft grb'Qer ? 
Is there anything more cruel? 3£a$ tft graufamct ? 
Is there anything more wicked 1 ££a8 tft gettlefer ? 
Can anything be more handsome I jlarin etroas fdjonet (cm? 

To run up. £etktfaufen* 

To hasten up. 4berbctetlen 

To run to the assistance of some 3emanbcm 311 £titfe etten. 
one. 

To save, to deliver. 9?etten. 

To hasten. (Stlen. 

To plunder (to rob). sptuntern. 

Many men had run up ; but in- SBietc Scute roaren fyer&eigeertt; a!!et» 
stead of extinguishing the fire, anftatt ba$ Jeuer d u Wfd)C«> (tngen 
the wretches set themselves to Me (Slcnben an £U ptun&cwu 
plundering. 
To begin something. (SrroaS anfangen*. Imperf. ftng. 

To set about something. ©id) an etivaS (ace.) madjen. 

Have they been able to extin- £at man bag Jtuet tofefyen f onnen ? 

guish the fire ] 
Have they succeeded in extin- 3ft eg tbnen gefangen, bag geuct $u 

guishing the fire 1 lefeben ? 

The w T atch indicates the hours. £)te Uhr $ctgt bte ©tunben an. 
To indicate. 2Cn$cigctu 

To quarrel. © t d) 3 a n f e ru 

To chide, to reprove some one. Semanben au^anftm or au£fd)elten* 

(gefebotten, fd)a(t). 
To scold some one. 9)Ht 3emant>em janfen* 

The quarre bet 3an£, bte 3an6erct. 

To dispute, to contend aoout Ucbcr ctroag ftretten* (gcjfrtttett, 

something. ftrttt). 

About what" are those people dis- £Bot(iber fttetten btefe Ceute ? 

puting "? 
Tbev are disputing about who (Sic garden ftd), roct gucrft gcr)cn fctL 

snail go first. 

OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 

The present participle is formed from the infinitive, 
by adding the letter t>* Ex. Siebeit, to love ; present 



279 

part. Itebettb, loving ; arbettett, to work , present part, 
arbettenb. 

The present participle in German is used in the at- 
tributive sense like an adjective. Ex. din fterbenber 
SSater, a dying father ; ber (acfyenbe $rub(utg, the smiling 
spring ; bte nafyenbe ©tunbe, the approaching hour ; bag 
jitternbe $mb, the trembling child. But it cannot be 
used as a predicate. We cannot say with the Eng- 
lish : the boy is readings This must be expressed ny 
the present tense, as: ber &nab? Kcft b 

In English the present participle is used to express 
cause, reason, condition, and time. But this is rarely the 
case in German. " For in all such instances the present 
participle is translated by the following conjunctions 
with the verbs expressed by the English participles : 
al$, when, as ; ttacfybem, after ; bet, as ; inbem, as, whilst ; 
ttett, because. Ex. 

Being lately at your brother's 2C(S id) neuttd) fcet Sftrem SSrubcr 

house, I gave something to his roat/Cjab id) feinetf £mt>ern etroag. 

children. 

Having eaten supper, she went to 9?ad)bem c fie gtt 9?ad)t gegeffen fyatte, 

bed. Qtng fie $u j&ctte. 
Having no money, I cannot lend 3)ci tcb fetn ®e(t> babe, fo fann id) 3^- 

you any. nen tctnS leiben. 

Knowing that you are my friend, 3>a id) rt>ct§, fca& &c mem Jreunb 

I beg of you to do me that fa- ftnb, fo tutte id) <Sic, mic btcfett 

vour. ©cfottcn $u tf)un. 

Not finding my brother, I went Snbem td) meinen 23rut>er ntcbt fhnb, 

to my sister. (fo) $tng id) $u metner (Sdbroeftcr* 

Being ill, I cannot work. 2Be'tl id) Iran! tun, frmn id) ntd)t ars 

&ettcn. 

O&s. jE?. These examples show that each of the con- 

a In sublime style, principally in poetry, it may be used adverbially. Ex. 
3tttemb »or jebem ^cfratten Ubt ber ?$urd)ffame in ennger 2lngft, trembling at 
each shade the fearful lives in constant anxiety. 3>bm in bte 9Rebe etnfauenb, 
fcegann ber eble $d}tlleg, interrupting him, the noble Achilles began. 

b Several words formed originally from verbs, have lost the nature of pre- 
sent participles, and are used as adjectives only, both in the attributive and 
predicative sense ; they are : brmgenb, pressing ; briicfettb, oppressive ; ctnneb* 
menD, captivating ; fltefknb, fluent ; fyinretfknb, overpowering ; franfenb, mor- 
tifying; retjenb, charming. Ex. 3btc®itten ftnb febr etnnelunenb, her man- 
ners are very captivating ; bte Clotty tft brtngenb, the necessity is pressing; 
>te Saft tft britcfenb, the burden is oppressive ; btefe 33eletbtgmttf ift franfenb, 
this insult is mortifying ; fettle 3Rebe tft fltefjenb, his speech is fluent; fie i)J 
mjenb, she is charming. 

« ^Tlac^bem can only be employed with the pluperfect of the indicative. 



280 

junctions ai#, ttachbem, ba, tnbem, toetl, has its peculiai 
signification, and that there is necessarily a difference 
m their application: 1st, al$ refers to a definite event 
of a past time ; 2d, rtatf)bem states that an action was 
finished when another action commenced ; 3d, ba im- 
plies a logical cause from which an inference is drawn ; 
4th, tnfcent is used to state that an event is simultane- 
ous with another event ; 5th, tt>eil expresses a real rea- 
son why a thing is or takes place. 

Obs. F. The present participle may, in English, be 
converted into a substantive by a preceding article, 
as : the reading, the writing, the speaking. This can- 
not be done in German, where the infinitive must be 
employed, as : bag ?efen, bag Scfyreiben, bag Spredien. As 
an adjective, however, but not as an abstract substan- 
tive, the present participle may elliptically be turned 
into a substantive, as : ber ?efenbe, one that reads ; ber 
©cfyrei&enbe, one that writes; ber ©precfyenbe, one that 
speaks. 

By too much reading one fatigues £5urcf) $u tnefcS £efen cwuibtft man 
the eyes. fid) tie ttua^cn. 

Obs. G. Sometimes the present participle is transla- 
ted by a substantive preceded by a preposition. Ex. 

I saw your brother whilst I was 3c!) f)a6e Sbrcn 23ruber im SSorbetge^ 
passing by. fycn Qcjcfyen. 

He came with a book under his (Sr Fam rait cinem 23udf>e untcr tern 

arm. 2(rme. 

When I was in the country, I was 2C(6 id) ouf tern Canfce roar, fccfant) id) 

very well. nitcb fehr roobf. 

She smiled as she was saying <Ste (actyctte, intern fie fca$ fagte. 

ths. 

To perform (to represent), SSeritcftcn. 

To entertain (to amuse). Untcr batten** Imperf. untcr fjtctt. 

To bargain (to deal). .^antctn. 

To reply. (£*tnrictcrn. 

To be struck with horror 83on ©rauen ((Srntfegen) befallen 

nxrtcn*. 

The horror, tag ©raucn, tag (Sntfegen. 

A violent head-ache. (Sin fjefttgeg ^opfivef). 



281 

EXERCISES. 204. 

Ah, it is all over with me! — But, bless me ! (mctrt ®ctt!) why 
do you cry thus 1 — I have been (Sftcitt bat mtr) robbed of my gold 
rings, my best clothes, and all my money : that is the reason why 
I cry. — Do not make so much noise, for it is we who have taken 
them all in order to teach you to take better care of your things 
(Sacben), and to shut the door of , your room when you go out — 
Why do you look so sad ] — 1 have experienced great misfortunes ; 
after having lost all my money, I was beaten by bad-looking men ; 
and to my still greater ill-luck 1 hear that my good uncle, whom I 
_ove so much, has been struck with apoplexy. — You must not 
afflict yourself so much, for we must yield to necessity ; and you 
know well the proverb : " It is too late to consult to-day about whal 
was done yesteiday." — Can you not get rid of that man] — I cannot 
get rid of him, for he will absolutely (fcurcbcuie) follow me. — He 
must have lost his wits. — What does he ask you for ] — He wishes 
to sell me a horse, which I do not want. — Whose houses are these ] 
■ — They are mine. — Do those pens belong to you ]-— No, they be- 
long to my sister — Are those the pens with which she writes so 
well ] — They are the same. — Which is the man of whom you com- 
plain ? — It is he who wears a red coat. — " What is the difference 
(t>cr llntcrfcbtct*) between a watch and me 1 " inquired a lady (of) a 
young officer. "My lady," replied he, "a watch marks the hours, 
and near (bet) you one forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who 
had never seen asses, seeing several in Germany, said : " Lord (^t'tn 
@5ett), what large hares there are in this country ! " — How many 
obligations I am under to you, my dear friend ! you have saved my 
life ! without you I had been (ruare icb) lost. — Have those misera- 
ble men hurt you 1 — They have beaten and robbed me ; and when 
you ran to my assistance they were about to strip (ousjtifjen*) and 
kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you from (cms) the hands 
of those robbers. — How good you are ! — Will you go to Mr. Tor- 
tenson's to night (^ejVn 2CbcnD) ? — I shall perhaps go. — And will 
your sisters go? — They will perhaps. — Was you pleased at the 
concert yesterday ? — I was not pleased there, for there wau such 
a multitude of people there that one could hardly get in — I bring 
you a pretty present with which you will be much pleased. — What 
is it] — It is a silk cravat. — Where is it] — I have it in my pocket 
(t>\c Safcbc). — Does it please you ] — It pleases me much, and I 
thank you for it with all my heart. — I hope that you will at last 
accept (anncbmcn*) something of (rcn) me. — What do you intend to 
give me ] — 1 will not tell you yet, for if I do tell you, you will find 
no pleasure when I give it to you. 

205. 

Why do those men quarrel ] — They quarrel, because they do not 
know what to d). — Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire? 
—They have at last succeeded in it; but it is said that several 
houses have been burnt. — Have they not been able to save any- 



282 

thing 1 — They have not been able to save anything ; for, instead of 
extinguishing the fire, the miserable wretches who had come up set 
themselves to plundering. — What has happened ? — A great misfor- 
tune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without me ] — 
They waited for you till twelve o'clock, and seeing that you did not 
come, they set out. — Tell ((5q6f)len) us what has happened to you 
lately. — Very willingly, but on condition (nut t>cm 9*e6tnge or untet 
ber i^ctongung) that you will listen to me attentively (oufmcrffam) 
without interrupting (unterbrecbcn*) me. — We will not interrupt 
you, you may be sure of it. — Being lately at the theatre, I saw The 
speaking picture and The weeping woman performed. This latter 
play (2)a6 (c&tere ©tucf) not being very (fonbcrUch) amusing to me, I 
went to the concert, where the music (Die 9)iufit) caused me a vio- 
lent head-ache. I then left (ocrlafien*) the concert, cursing (oer* 
rcmnfcbcri) it, and went straight (gerafrc) to the mad-house (t>a$ tflav 
tenfjaufe), in order to see (befudjen) my cousin. 



EIGHTY-NINTH LESSON.— Jfemt tttti> aclftigate 
Section. 

Towards, against. ©eg en > ^ 

Against* £B 1 1> e t j° 

©egen denotes the direction of two things turned 
towards each other and is used for towards and against ; 
Xt>ii ex, on the contrary, denotes hostility -and is only 
used for against. Ex. 

To take the field against the ©ccjen (or nnbet) ben Jctnb $u getbe 

enemy. gkben*. 

What have you against me ? £8a$ baben <Ste gegen (or rotter) 

mt* ? 
You speak against yourself. <Ste xct)cn gecjen (or rotber) ftcb feI6ft* 

To swim against the current. ©egen ben (Strom fdntummen*. 
The love of a father towards his £)tc Stebc etne£ 23atcrS gegen (not 

children. tmber) feinc .fttnocr. 

I have nothing against that. 3d) t)Qbe md)t$ bagegen. 

&eZ/, selves. (Set bft or fe lb e t (is indeclin* 

able). 

I myself. Sdb fttftfe 

Thou thyself, he himself. 3>u (Vlbft, er fctbfi. 

We ourselves, you yourselves. 2Bir fclbft, 3fa (Sic) fcl&fl. 

rhey themselves. ^ie frfbft. 

lie himself has told it to me. <Sr fclbft &at e$ nut gefagt. 



283 

Obs. A. The pronoun preceding self is not transla* 
ted into German. But the personal pronoun preced- 
ing felbft is declined. 

He has given it to me (not to (Sr f)at cS mtv fetfcft gcgcftctn 

another person). 
They themselves have come to (Sic fctbjr ftnfo $u nur gcfemmen. 

me. 
We have given it to them (not 2Btr fyafccn eg ifjncn fetbft gegefceru 

to others). 

The day before. 2)cr Sag Mrtjer. 

The preceding day, bcr t>er()crgcf)cnbc Sag. 

The day before Sunday is Satur- 3)et Sag oor Senntag (jct£t ©am$* 

day. tag. 

The day before (the preceding £)cr Sag »crf)cr (bcr ttorfycrgcljcnbe 

day) was Friday. Sag) roar cm grcttag. 

Again (anew). 9Sen Stfeuem, ttuebcr. 

Once more (again). Stfed) ctnmat. 

He speaks again. @r fprtcbt rotebcr. 

I must hear him again. 3d) mug tt)n r>en Stfeucm fyorcru 

Obs. B. The adverb tt>teber must not be mistaken for 
the inseparable particle ttnber (Lesson XX V*), nor for 
the preposition ttribev, against. It answers to the 
English word again. Ex. tttteberfornmen*, to come 
again ; ttrieberanfartgert*, to begin again. It must not 
be mistaken for juriicf, back again, which as in English 
denotes retrogression. Ex. QuxMUmmm*, to come 
back again. 

The light, ta$ Sid>t 

To blow. SMofcn* (gcMafcn, 6ttc$). 

To blow out. 2(ii*btafcn*. 

To flee. gttcben* (gcficfjcn, flor)). 

r@mfltcben». 
To run away. < (Sntlaufcn*. 

C £>ar>cn foufen*. 
Why do you run away 7 8£arum toufen <^ic meg (bat>on) ? 

I run away, because I am afraid. 3>cb laufc bar-en (nxg), recti id) mid) 

furcbtc (or rocU id) Jurcrjt l)abc). 
To make one's escape. } 

To run away, to flee. > Sic J?lud)t nefjmen* (or ergrctfen*). 

To take to one's heels. ) 

He deserted the battle. @r tft cmS bcr ScWad)t cntflcr)cn or 

cntlcuifcn. 
The thief has run away £)cr £>tcb ift en-tfoufen (baron* or wcg* 

gclaufcn). 



284 

To catch, to lay hold of, to seize. (Srgtctfcn* (ergttffen, crgriff). 

To translate. ttebctfcgen.* 

To translate into German. 2(iif bctitfcb libcrfcgen. 

To translate from French into 2(u* fcem gran$ofifd)cn in£ £5cutfdx 

German. ubcrjVjsen. 

To translate from one language 2tus einct ^pracfye in tic anfccre ixhtt 

into another. jejctf. 

To introduce. (Sin fit hr en. 

I introduce him to you. 3d) fiifjrc tfjn bet Sfynen etn. 

Since or from. 93 o n — on, f e 1 1. 

r9?en biefcm tfugenbticfe an. 
From that time. < (Sett btefer Seit, 

C $on fctefct 3eit an. 

06s. C Compound prepositions must be divided 
and the case which the preposition governs placed be- 
tween the two component parts, as : 

From my childhood. £3en metnet Sugeno an. 

From morning until evening. 9S cm 9ffict$en 6t$ gum 2tbent>. 

r? .1 u • • 4. *u j S 95 cm 2fn fan ac big nun (Snfce. 
From the beginning to the end. < t> v - r ?y^ re. s. 
5 °. J 23en 2lnfang bte ^u (Snfce. 

To produce (to yield, to profit). (Sinbringen*. 

To destroy. Serftb'ren. 

To reduce. jjberabfegen. 

To limit. (gtnfdKanfen. 

To diminish (to lessen). 93erflctnern. 

To reduce the price. £>en tytci* betabfegen. 

To reduce (to bring down) the Den $>tei$ big auf etnen &r)a(et 

price to a crown. berunterbttnejen*. 

The merchandise, bte £Baare. 

The price of the merchandise f iDte SBaare fd)taa,t a(^ 

falls. 

The yard, the ell. tie (Site. 

To deduct. f Sflaftfaflen*. 

Having not overcharged you, I \ Da id) <Sie gat nicftt ftbcrfc|t r)abe, 

cannot deduct anything. fo fann id) nid)t$ nacbtaffen. 

To aTttXch. ftp* (^separable). 
By the year (or a year), jd'l)r(id) ; 

by the day (or a day), tacjltcb ; 

by the month (or a month), monatttd). 

a In uberfe^ert, tc translate, the accent being on the root of the verb, ft B C 1 
is inseparable, and consequently its past participle is iiberfe^t, n;t tibergefefct 
(See Lesson XL V.) 



285 

By no means. G5ar ntcfit. 

Not at all. ©an$ unD gar nid)t. 

How much does that situation SBtemel brtngt Sljncn btefcS 2Cmt 
yield you a year! iabr(td) ein? 

EXERCISES. 206. 

On entering the hospital (r:as Jocfpttal) of my cousin I was struck 
with horror at seeing several madmen (oer 3?rtrr, gen. en) who came 
up (naben) to me jumping and howling (bettlen). — What did you do 
then 1 — I did the same (c* eb.cn fo macben) as they, and they set up 
a laugh (emfemgen* $u lacben) as t hey were withdrawing (fid) ^irucfs 
$tehen or roegbegeben*).. — When 1 was yet little I once (ctnft) said tc 
my father, u I do not understand (ivrfteben*) business, and I do not 
know how to sell ; let me play." My father answered me, smiling 
(Id'cbdn), " In dealing one learns to Heal, and in selling to sell." 
" But, my dear father," replied I, " in playing one learns also to 
play." " You are right," said he to me * " but you must first (sots 
r)cr) learn what is necessary and useful." 

Do you already know what has happened] — I have not heard 
anything. — The house of our neighbour has been burnt down. — 
Have they not been able Jto save anything 1 — They were very for- 
tunate in saving the persons that were in it ; but out of (sen) the 
things that were (fid) b'eftnfccn*) there, they could save nothing. — 
Who has told you that 1 — Our neighbour himself has told it to me. — 
Why are you without a light ? — The wind blew it out, when you 
came in. — W x hat is the day before Monday called ] — The day be- 
fore Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not run to the assistance of 
your neighbour whose house has been burnt down ? — I could not 
run thither, for I was ill and in bed. — What is the price of this 
cloth ] — I sell it at three crowns and a half the ell. — I think (pru 
ten*) it very dear. — Has the price of cloth not fallen 1 — It has not 
fallen : the price of all goods has fallen, except (auscjenommett) that 
of cloth. — I will give you three crowns for it. — I cannot let you 
have it for (urn) that price, for it costs me more. — Will you have 
the goodness to show me some pieces (ba£ &i\d, plur. e) of English 
cloth ] — With much pleasure. — -Does this cloth suit you ] — It does 
not sui me. — Why does it not suit you ] — Because it is too dear ; 
if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it (t)cu?on) . 
— Having not asked too much, I cannot take off anything. 

207. 

You learn French ; does your master let you translate 1 — He lets 
me read, write and translate. — Is it useful to translate in learning 
a foreign language ] — It is useful to translate when you nearly 
know the language you are learning; but while (ivenn) you do not 
yet know anything, it is entirely useless. — What does your Ger- 
man master make you do 1 ? — He makes me read a lesson; after- 
wards he makes me translate French exercises into German ox* 



286 

(S6er with the accus.) the lesson which he h^is made me read ; and 
from the beginning to the end of the lesson he speaks German to 
me, and I have to answer him in the very (fclbft) language which 
he is teaching me. — Have you already learnt much in that manner? 
— You see that I have already learnt something, for 1 have hardly 
been learning it four months, and I already understand you when 
you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read it as well 1 
— I can read and write as well as speak it. — Does your master also 
teach English ? — He does teach it. — Wishing to make his acquaint- 
ance, I must beg of you to introduce me to (bet) him. — As you wish 
to make his acquaintance, I shall introduce you to him. — How many 
exercises do you translate a day 1 — If the exercises are not difficult 
I translate (from) three to (Ins) four every day, and when they are 
so, translate but one. — How many have you already done to-day 1 
— It is the third which I am translating; but to-morrow I hope to 
be able to do one more, for I shall be alone. — Have you paid a visit 
to my aunt] — I went to see her two months ago, and as she looked 
displeased, I have not gone to her any more since that time. — How 
do you do (to-day) 1 — I am very unwell. — How do you like that 
soup 1 — I think (finfcen*) it is very bad ; but since I have lost my 
appetite I don't like anything. — How much does that situation 
yield to your father 1 — It yields him more than four thousand 
crowns. — What news do they mention (faqen) ? — They say that the 
Turks have taken the field against the Russians. — Every one will 
find in himself the defects which he remarks in others : the defects 
of others are before (us), our own behind us. (See end of Lesson 
XXXIV.) 



NINETIETH LESSON.— Njmn}igst£ Uttiotl. 

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I may have, thou mayest have, 3d) fya&e, £)U r)akft/ ct (fie, C$) 

he (she, it) may have. f)ctfte. 

We may have, you may have, 2Btr fyafcen, 3*)t r)afcet, fie Ijafcctt. 

they may have. 

I may be, thou mayest be, he 3d) fet, 3)u fetcft (or fctft), ct (fie, 

(she, it) may be. cs) (ft. 

W e may be, you may be, they 2Btt feten, 3fyt fctct, fte fetem 

may be. 

I may become, thou mayest be- 3d) roetbc, £)u roerbeft, Ct (fie, c$) 

come, he (she, it) may become. nxrbe. 
We may become, you may be- &Bit roerbett, 3fyt roctbet, fte roet* 

come, they may become. t)ctt. 

1 may praise, thou mayest praise 3d) fofce, £>u lobeft, n (fie/ e£) lefa* 
he (she, it) may praise. 



.287 

We may praise, you may praise, £5>ir leOcn, Sfjt Met, ftc (eben. 4 
they may praise. # 

0&s. J.. The present of the subjunctive differs, in 
regular verbs, from the present of the indicative only 
in the third person singular, which rejects the letter U 
All German verbs are regular in the present of the 
subjunctive, which is formed from the infinitive. 

Obs. B. The letter e which is often omitted in the 
present of the indicative (Obs. A, Lesson XXXIV.) 
must always be retained in the present of the sub- 
junctive. 

He who requires to be honoured SBet ttertcmgt, tag man tfyn fetncS 
on account of his riches, has $Ketcl)tf)um$ nxqen retcbre, fcet 
also a right to require a moun- rjat aud) etn $Kcd)t $u wtlangen, 
tain to be honoured that con- ta£ man etnm SBcta, wrefyte, fcer 
tains gold. <5$ett> in fid) fyat. 

IMPERFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive 
does not differ from that of the indicative. In irregu- 
lar verbs it is formed from the imperfect indicative 
by softening the radical vowels and adding an e* b 

The imperfect of the subjunctive is used after the 
conditional conjunction toetttt, if, expressed or under- 
stood. 

(f I had money . SBenn td) (Mb fja'tte (or fjatte td) 

©ett>). 

* In conjugating their verbs, learners would do well to prefix a conjunction 
to each person of the subjunctive, not because a conjunction should necessa- 
rily precede that mode, but because it is advisable to get into the habit ot 
placing the verb after the conjunction, particularly in compound verbs. 
They may use for that purpose one of the conjunctions ba$, ttetttt. Ex. 
5)ct£ id) aHdjretbe, that I may copy ; toetm id) abfdmebe, if I copied ; toetm 
id) abgefctyrteben fycttte, if I had copied ; bctfj tdj ctt>fd)reiben werbe, that I shall 
copy, &c. These examples show that when the phrase begins with a con- 
junction (Lesson XL VI].), the separable particle is not detached from the 
verb in simple tenses, and in the past participle gives way to the syllable gc. 

b From this rule must be excepted the sixteen irregular verbs which com- 
pose the first class in our list. These, having already an e in the imperfect 
indicative, do not add one in the subjunctive. Several of them do not soften 
the radical vowel, but become regular again in the imperfect subjunctive, as : 
Eemtert*, to know; ttemten*, te name, to call; rennen*, to run; fenfcen *, to 
aend ; IWttben*, to turn. 



288 

If I saw him. 2?cnn tcf> ihn fd'bc (or ffifK id) tftn) 

If he did it. Sin'nn cr eS tbdte (or rfjatc er es)* 

Were he to lose # his money. £Benn cr fctn ©ett> wrlore. 

Were he to beat his dog. SS*cnn cr fetnen .bunt) j$ttige. 

If you were rich. SQBcnn (Ste reicf) ruarcn (or roarcn 

<Sie rcicl)). 

Ofo. C As soon as tt>emt is not conditional it re- 
quires the indicative mode. Ex. 

If he is not ill, why does he send ££cnn cr nicbt Iran! tfr, roarum (apt 
for the physician ? cr t>cn Doctor fommcn ? 

Obs. D. Instead of toetttt, the imperfect subjunctive 
of the verb fotten is often used at the beginning of a 
sentence, as should in English. 

Should you still receive my let- ©olltcn ©te metnen SBrtcf nccf) beute 
ter to-day, I beg you will call crbalten, fo bitte id) (Sic, aucjen* 
on me instantly. Wtcfltd) $u nur $u fommcn. 

Should he be hungry, something ©elite cs tbn buncjern, fo miipte man 
must be given to him to eat. tbm ctrcas $u effett ejeben. 

OF THE CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL TENSES. 

The conditional tenses are formed from the imper- 
fect subjunctive of the verb tt>erbett # , which is: id) 
ttmrbe, I should or would become, and, as in the future 
tenses (Lesson LXXXI. and LXXXIL), the present of 
the infinitive for the conditional present, and the past 
of the infinitive for the conditional past. The imper- 
fect of the subjunctive may be used instead of the 
conditional present, and the pluperfect of the subjunc- 
tive for the conditional past. Ex. 

I should do it. 3d) rcmtbe e$ tfjun (or icb tfya'tc e$). 

He would have done it. (St ttmrfce c$ get ban fyaben (or tt 

fjatte e$ getbem). 

We would go thither. £Btr rcurfcen fcabtn cjefyen. 

You would go thither. 3br rourfcet btnejeben. 

They would go thither. <§ic rourben htngeben. 

Thou wouldst thank me once. £)u n?uvt>eft nur einft fcanfen. 

A.t one time, one day (once). (Stnft, etnc* £ocjc$. 

Obs. E. The imperfect of the subjunctive or the 
conditional tense may be employed either before or 
after conditional propositions, as in English. Ex. 



289 

] should buy it if I had money 3d) fauftc e$ (or id) roftrbe e$ fan- 

enough. fen), wenn id) (5>clt> genug f)cittc. 

U 1 had money enough I would 8S*enn icb ©elb 9? A$ Wtte, fc routbf 

buy it. tcb c£ f cm fen (or jo faufte id) eg). 

Had I money enough T would pay £atte id) ©rft> genug, fo be^at)(tc tcb 

for it. e$ (or fc nut r be tcb eg be$af)(cn). 

Had 1 money I would give you $atte idb ($3clD (or rcenn tcb ®elb 

some. I) arte), fc wit r be tcb Sbncn spetebe^ 

geben (or fo gabc id) Sbnett- wd 
cbe$). 
If I went thither 1 should see gBenn id) bingtngc, fc wutbe tcb ifyn 

him. fchen. 

Were I to give it to him, he would (SJabe tcb c£ tf)m, cr wurbe c6 (or fe 

keep it. wutbe er es) bebatten. 

If I gave it to him, he would not 2S>cnn id) cs tbm gabe, fc wutbe er cS 

return it to me. nut nicbt wiebetgeben. 

Had you come a little sooner (or, Sfiaren pu einen 2tugenbfict ebcr ge* 

if you had come a little sooner) f ommen (or wenn <Sie eincn 2(iu 

you would have seen my bro- genblicf efjcr gefommen waten),fo 

ther (or, you might have seen wttrben ®ic metnen ^tubet gefe? 

my brother). ben baben (or fc batten @ie niefe 

nen $3tubct gefeben). 
If he knew what you have done, SBenn er wttpte, ma* <Ste getbein r)a^ 

he would scold you. ben, fc wutbe er <Sie ausfcbclten. 

If there was any wood, he would SBcnn Jpcl] ^a mate, fo wtitbe et 

make a fire. ^ Jeucr anmacben. 

*If I had received my money, I ££enn icb metn (Sklb befemmen \)attc, 

would have bought a pair of fc wtirbe id) nut ein tyaax neue 

new shoes. ©djufje gefauft bemen. 

Ofo. jP. The imperfect subjunctive of the verbs 
Rnnen*, tooften*, mogen*, bitrfen*, is often employed to 
express various feelings, as : 

1st, ^ontten, fear or desire. Ex. 

He might .all. ($r fonnte fatten. 

I might (could) do it. 3d) fonnte e$ tfjun. 

2d, SGoffett, solicitation. Ex. 

Would you have the goodness 1 SBeflten <Ste bic ©Cite baben ? 
Would you be so good ? Sfcollten @te fc gutig fein ? 

VVouldst thou do me the favour? SGBclireft bu nut tie ®efall ; g£ett tu 

metfen ? 

3d, SEftogen, desire, either with or without the adverb 
gent. Ex. 

! should like to know. \ §* ni l! c j* c w ^ ctu . ff 

) 3d) nibebtc gem wtffen, 

L3 



290 



4th, SDittfett, politeness either in the present of the 
indicative or the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. 



May I ask you for the knife 1 
May I beg of you to tell me ? 

Would you learn German, if I 

learnt it? 
I would learn it, if you learnt it. 

Would you have learnt English, 

if I had learnt it ] 
I would have learnt it, if^youhad 

learnt it. 
W T ould you go to Germany, if 1 

went thither with you] 
I would go thither, if you went 

thither with me. 
Would you have gone to Ger- 
many, if I had gone thither 

with you ? 
Would you go out, if I remained 

at home 1 
I would remain at home, if you 

went out. 

Would you have written a letter, 
if I had written a note 1 



The spectacles, 

a pair of spectacles, 

the old man, 

the optician, 
To go (or come), to fetch. 
To keep one's bed (one's room). 

The plate, 

the son-in-law, 

the daughter-in-law, 

the progress, 

the step (the pace), 

really, 



£)otf (or burfte) id) @ie um fcaS 

SJtf ffa bitten ? 
£>arf (or burfte) id) <Sie bitten, mit 

3U fagen ? 

2Burben @te beutfd) (etnen, roenn id) 

eg lernte ? 
3d) rourbe eg (ernen. rcenn *<Stc eg 

(erntcn. 
gBurben @te engfifd) gefctnt fyaben, 

roenn id) eg gelernt bfitte ? 
3cb roiitbe eg gelernt fyaben, roenn 

@te eg geternt batten. 
SSfirben ©tc nacb £)eutfcblanb retfen, 

roenn id) nut Sbnen bafytn retfete ? 
3d) rotirbe bafyin retfen, roenn ©te 

nut nut bafytn retfeten. 
SSurben @te nacb £)eutfd)lanb gc* 

retf't fern, roenn id) nut S^ncn 

ba bin gcretf't ware ? 

SBfirben (Sic auggefyen, rcenn id) 

gu Jpaufe bttebe ? 
3d) routbc $u £aufe bletben (or id) 

bttebe $u £aufe) roenn @te augs 

gin gem 
SMtben @te einen 95ttef gefebneben 

fjaben, roenn id) etn S3tUet gefdjties 

ben fyatte ? 

bie SSritte (is in German used ia 

the singular) ; 
etne SSttlle ; 

bet aire S0?ann, bet ®ret$ ; 
tcv Dpttcug ; 
tfbfjelen. 
£>ag SSett (teg 3tmmet) f)ttien. 

bet Seller ; 

bet ©cbnnegcrforjn ; 

bie ©cbwiegertocbtet; 

bie $ettfcbtttte (plural) ; 

bet ©cbtitt ; 

nritHtd)* 



exercises. 208. 
Would you have money, if your father were here ? — I should 
have some, if he were here. — Would you have been pleased, if 1 1 



291 

had had some books 1 — I should have been much pleased, if you had 
had some. — Would you have praised my little brother, if he had been 
good? — If he had been good, I should certainly (gennfi) not only 
have praised, but also loved, honoured, and rewarded him. — Should 
we be praised, if we did our exercises ] — If you did them without 
a fault, you would be praised and rewarded. — Would rny brother 
not have been punished, if he had done his exercises'? — He would 
not have been punished if he had done them. — Would your sister 
have been praised, if she had not been skilful ] — She would cer- 
tainly not have been praised, if she had not been very skilful, and 
if she had not worked from morning until evening. — Would you 
give me something, if I were very good ] — If you were very good, 
and if you worked well, I would give you a fine book. — W^ould 
you have written to your sister, if I had gone to Dresden? — 1 
would have written and sent her something handsome, if you had 
gone thither. — Would you speak, if I listened to you ? — I would 
speak, if you listened to me, and if you would answer me. — Would 
you have spoken to my mother, if you had seen her] — I would 
(have) spoken to her, and have begged of her to send you a hand- 
some gold watch (bte Ufyt), if I had seen her. 

209. 

One of the valet de chambres (ber jtammetbtcnct) of Louis the 
XIV. ( s 3ubnnc] bc$ XIV.) requested that prince, as he was going to 
bed, to recommend (empfeMen*) to the first president (t)cr Dbcrprafts 
bent) a law-suit (t)cr ^rc^ep) which he had against his father : in-law 
(tvdeben et nut [eirtem fecfyauegemtcr fubrte), and said, in urging him 
(in 3emant>cn bvtncjen*) : "Alas (lid)) sire ((Suet ^ftqeftatj, you have 
but (<Stc turfen nur) to say one word." " Well ((St)," said Louis 
XIV., " it is not that which embarrasses me (tas tft e* ntcbt, ruaS 
mid) anfichf) ; but tell me, if thou wert in thy father-in-law's place, 
an'"", thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou be glad if I said that 
word]" 

If the men should come, you would be obliged to give them some- 
thing to drink. — If he could do this he would do that. — A peasant 
having seen that old men used spectacles to read, went to an opti- 
cian and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and 
having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician 
put another pair of the (sen ben) best which he could find in his 
shop upon hirs nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the 
merchant said to him : " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at 
all]" "If I could," said the peasant, " I should not want your 
spectacles." — I have always flattered myself, my dear brother, that 
you loved me as much as I love you ; but I now see, that I have 
been mistaken. I should like to know why you w r ent a walking 
without me. — I have heard, my dear sister, that you are angry wkh 
me, because I went a walking without you. — I assure you that, had 
I known that you were not ill, I should have come for you ; but I 
inquired at your physician's about your health, and he told me thai 
you had been keeping your bed the last eight days. 



292 



210. 



A French officer having arrived at the court of Vienna (am 5$tc* 
ru'r £crV)> the empress Theresa (Me .ftoifertnn Sfyirefta) asked him, 
if (cb) he believed that the princess of (pen) N., whom he had seen 
the day before, was (ware) really the handsomest woman in (sen) 
the world, as was said 1 " Madam," replied the officer, " I though 4 
so yesterday." — How do you like that meat 1 — I like it very well. 
— May I (£arf or turftdeb) ask you for a piece of (son) that fish ] — - 
If you will have the goodness to pass me your plate, I will give 
you some — Would you have the goodness to pour me out some 
drink ] — With much pleasure. — Cicero seeing his son-in-law 7 , who 
w r as very short (f(eirt), arrive with a long sword at his side (an bet 
(Scitv*), said : " Who has fastened (actuinDcn) mv son-in-law to this 
sword 1 " (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-FIRST LESSON. — ©in ntib twrnqigsu 
tation. 

To propose. © t d) t) o t n e I) m e n • . 

I propose going on that journey, 3d) nebme mit t>or, btefe Strife $u 

mcid)en. 

rr, 7 C @ t d) ft c m ft f) c n. 

To enavavour. £ © j d, * « ft r e b e n, (troAtcn). 

I endeavour to do it. 3d) iKiixixht niter), e$ $u tfyttn, 

I endeavour to succeed in it. 3d) fuct)C, ce b a I) t n 4U btttiQcn 

To aspire after something. SRach etivaS ttad)tcn. 

Heaspires after pi aces of honour. (St tracbtet nad) (Sl)tenjMletU 

The honour, t>tc (Sure ; 

the riches, bcr $Hetd)tr)um ; 

the title, bet Sttcl. 

I shouid not have complained of 3d) rourbe mid) ixbcv t>ci$, roag ct 
what he has done, if it had getban §at, ntd)t kflaqt fjafcen,- 
injured only me ; but m doing* nxnn ei tuir mir gcfcj)abet batte ; 
it, he has plunged many fami- abet cr foot Mete ^amtltcn babuvd) 
lies into misery. in? (S(enb gejtuqt. 

Since you are happy, why do £)a ©te b c cb qliicf(td) ftnb, roaruiii 
you complain? bcHagcn ©tc fid) b e n n ? 

O&s. J.. In German a good many words, as : betttt 
bod), tt>ol)f, &c. are used for the sake of euphony 
Such words cannot possibly be rendered in English 
Ex. 



293 

Wha*, do you wish to say with 2Bo$ iDClIcn <Sic b e tt n bcmut fas 

this? gen? 

Since you have nothing to tell £)a ©tc tbm bod) tud)t$ $u fagen 

him, why do you wish to see fjakn, roarum rooUen ©te tf)n 

him ] ten n feben ? 

Who has made the best use of 2£cr bat w obi ben'kjten 03cOrauc^ 

his money ] pen fctncin ©clbc gcmocljt ? 

To injure. (Scbaben. 

To plunge (to precipitate). ®titr$en. 

The use, t>er (gefcraudj. 

You would oblige me much, if <&w tvurben mid) febr berttttbctt, 
you would do me this favour. ruenn 6'te mtr btefe ©cfalltgf ctt 

ernxifen roollten. 
If you would render me this SODcnn &w mtr biefett £uenft (etften 
service, you would oblige me rueltren, fo nmrben <Ste mid) fc r)r 
much. pertunben. 

To oblige. SSettunben*, Derpfticbten, 

To render a service to some one. Semanbem etnen £>tenft (etften. 
The obligation, bte &etf>tnbHd)&it. 

To tie (attach). SMnben*. 

I tie the horse to the tree. 3d) tunbe ta$ $)ferb an ben 23aum. 

He is the most honest man that £)a$ iff ber ebrttcbfte Sftann, ben 
has ever been seen. ' man }c (jcmals) gefeben []jat» 

I want a horse that must be tal- 3>d) nm& ein $>ferb fyahen, t)a$ (mU 
ler than this. cbeS) grower tft oli btefeS. 

I am sorry that she is ill. ©5 tft (tl)ut) mtr tetb, bajj fie frant 

i% 
I am glad that you are come. (£$ tft mtr fteft, bop <Ste gefommen 

ftnb. 
I am astonished that he has not 3d) rotmbere mid), ^} er fctne 2(ufs 

done his exrrcises. gaben ntd)t gemacbt bat. 

He will marry her though she is (5t rturb fie betratben, ob fte gktd) 

not rich. ntcbt retch tft. 

I will wait until he returns. 3d) null rocirten, U$ er $urficffommfc 

In case that should happen, let 3m Jalle e$ gcfd)tebt, fo fajfen ©tc" 

me know : % nud>*6 rotjfen. 

OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Obs. B. In German the subjunctive, being only 
used to express doubt or incertitude, is not governed 
by any particular words. It has more affinity to the 
English subjunctive than to that of any other lan- 
guage, and more than would at first be supposed. We 
sometimes, however, prefer the subjunctive where the 
English use the potential should, or would, though we 
could in this case even use either the potential or the 
subjunctive. Ex. 



294 

should do it, if it were possible. 3d) tt) it 1 b e e$ tfyun, roenn eg mflg* 

lid) n> a r e. 

Were I in your place, or if I were £$ a r c id) an 3brcr ©telle, obet 

in your place. ivenn id) an Sbrcr ©telle id a re. 

Had he the treasures of Croesus, $ a 1 1 c cr bie ©cbage be* (Srofu*, 

or if he /^ac? the treasures of eber rccnn cr bie ©cbage bes (Srfc 

Crcesus. fu* b a 1 1 c. 

That man would be happier, if £)icfer £ftann rourbc q(ucfttcfter 

he left off gambling. f ein, rocnn cr t>a£ ©ptefen (tcpe. 

He would have been happier, if & tt> u r b c gtiidltcbcr g c rc> c f c n 

he had left off gambling. f c i n, rocnn cr tai ®yiiU% g e s 

! a f f e n b a 1 1 e. 
If you knew how ill I am, you ££cnn Sic rt> It 1 c n (or it) it p t e n 
would not £e astonished to find ©ie), rutc franf id) bin, fo n> it r 2 
me in bed. ben ©te ntcbt erjlount f c in (fo 

roaren ©tc nicbt erftaunt), mtd) 
im SBette $11 fin ben. 
He would not /iawe done it, had (Sr ro ix r b c eg nid)t g c t r) a it r)as 
he foreseen the result. ben, b a tt c cr ben (Srfolg 

r>orau6gcfeben. 
I should think myself ungrateful, 3d) rourbe mid) f^ r unbanffcat: 
did I not consider you as my f) a 1 1 c n, f a b e tcl) ©te ntd)t a($ 
benefactor. metnen SBobltbatcr a n, 

The French wow/d not have gain- £)te gxangofen rc> u r t) e n bie (Scl)lacf)t 
ed the battle, if they had not nicbt geroonnen b ci b c n (or 
Aad superior numbers. fatten tie ©d)lad)t ntcbt 9 e 5 

tt) n n e n), nxnn fie ntcbt cine 
fo grope llebermad)t son- Ceutcn 
g e b a b t fatten* 

O&s. C In English the potential should or would is 
used to express a wish relating to a future time, and 
the subjunctive to express a wish relating to a past 
time. In both instances the Germans use the subjunc- 
tive. Ex. 

I wish you would do it. 3d) rounfebte, ©te t fj a t c n e£, or 

bap ©te c$ t b a t e n. 
I wish jouw >uld go thither. 3d) rotinfebte, ©te 9 i n g e n b t n, 

or ba9 ©te b t n gt n gen. 
I wish you Aad done it. 3d) rottnfcbte, ©ie batten e$ g e s 

t b a n, or bap ©;e c£ g e t b & n 

batten. 
I wish you Aad ^one thither. 3d) nmnfcbte, ©ie ro a r c n bins 

g c g a n g e n, or ba$ ©te b i it * 

g c g a n g c n rc> a r e n. 
1 should have wished to see him, 3d) b a 1 1 e g e rc> it n f d) t, tfytt $U 
had it been possible. feben, tt> a" t e c£ mogtid) g e tt> e * 

[en. 



295 

I should like to read, if I had 3d) (afe gctn, werm td) nut 3ctt 
only time. I) a 1 1 £. 

Obs. D. Some expressions require sometimes the 
indicative and sometimes the sxibjunctive according to 
the manner in which the sentence is formed. Ex. 

f Indie. @t« mag fo retcf) fetn, 

However rich he may I tioie er nritt. 

be. ] Subj. (£x fex fo retcfy, ttue er 

^ tt>oKe* 

flndic. 3l)re ©ewctft ntag fo 

Whatever your power J gro$ fern, at$ jte mill, 

may be. | Subj. 3f)te @ett>a(t fei nod) 

I fo grog. 

Obs. E. In German we never employ the indica- 
tive, 

1. In conditional propositions with or without the 
conjunction VDemt, if. (See preceding Lesson.) Ex* 

If I could I would do it. SSenn id) fonnte, fo tfycite id) e$ ; or 

fonntc id), fo tfyate id) cS. 

If she were amiable he would £Benn fie Ueben$tt>(itt>tg mare (or 
marry her. roare fte ftebtm&tturfcig), fo fyetra* 

tfyete er ftc. 

2. In exclamations and wishes. Ex. 

If I had friends ! ^g>atte id) grcunbe ! 

If I were rich ! £Bdrc id) tad) ! 

May heaven grant it ! 3)et £>imme( gebe c$ ! 

God forbid ! (SJett ber)tite ! 

I could not have thought it . £>atte tcfy'S t)od) nid)t ge^aubt ! 

3. After the verbs er$af)tett, to relate ; fragett, to ask ; 
fagett, to say, and others, which relate indirectly, either 
to what we have said ourselves, or to what we have 
heard said by other persons. Ex. 

He related to me, that he had (§r et$&Mte nut, ta$ cr (Sduffbrud) 

suffered shipwreck, and had getttfen, unt) fcin gan$eS JBetmSgen 

lost all his fortune. setloten fyatte. 

He asked me whether I was not (£t ftagte mid), ob id) ntcbt t)cr tmb 

such a one, whether I had no bet ruatc, ob id) fcin Gstetb ba'ttc, 

money, why I did not know roarum id) nid)t fefyreiben fb'nntk 
how ta write. 



296 

Thou art master on the cross- £)u utft ctn SHciftet auf bet 2Crm. 

bow, Tell. brutf, Sell. 

They say, thou standest up to 93?an fagt, t>u na'fymcfi c$ auf mil 

any shooter ] jefcetn (Scbitfecn ? 

CecbtUcr'6 ©iiBrfm Sett.) 

I told him he had made a mis- 3d) fagtc thin, fcap cr ftch c^cirri fyat* 

take ; but he thought that was to ; cr utcinte abcr, t>o* ruarc md)t 

impossible, as he had looked moojltcb, recti cr C6 fereimal turd)' 

it over three times. • gefeben bdttc. 

A wise man said, The reason (Sin 2£etfcr fnCjtc : £)cr SOJcnfd) F)ate 

why a man has but one mouth ccPnxgen cincn 9)?unt> unt) $tt)ct 

and two ears is, that lie may £)bren, taunt cr roemger fprcctye, 

speak less and hear more. unt) tncfyr fyore. 

O&s. i* 1 . Mr., Mrs., and Miss such a one, are often 
translated by ber ttnb ter for the masculine, tie unb hie 
for the feminine, fca£ unb ba$ for the neuter. 

He said he would marry Miss (St facjtc, cr nxrbc a fc>a$ unt) bag 
such a one. Jgfrtfutein betratben. 

To suffer shipwreck. ©cbtffbrud) lctt>cn*. 

Possible, mb'gltcb ; 

impossible, unmogltdj. 

Whether. D 6. 

Obs. G. £)6 is only used in indirect questions, or 
before sentences which express doubt or possibility. 
Ex. 

[do not know whether he is at 3d) roctp mcf)t, 06 ct $U $aufc if!. 

home. 
I did not know whether you 3d) rouffte ntcrjt, 06 cS Sfjnen (tc& 

would be glad of it. fctn rcfirfce. 

The question is whether he will (Ss tft t)tc ^rage, e& cr c$ rmrb tfyun 

do it. rocllcn. 

Obs. H. Db is a component of the following con- 
junctions : obg(etrf), o6fd)Ctt, ofm>ob(, objroar, though, al- 
though. These conjunctions ought to be considered 
as two separate words, for the subject or even the 
case of the verb may be placed between them. Ex. 

I shall buy that horse, though it 3$ nxrbe McfcS $)fcrb frutfen, cb C$ 
is not an English one. cjlctct) fctn (£no,lant>cr tft. b 

* SBcrbe is here in the future of the subjunctive. (See the following Les- 
ion.) 
b When the subject or case of the verb is not a personal pronoun, it is not 



297 

Though he is my cousin, he £>b ct gfctcr) (or fcben) twin SScttet 
nevertheless dce& not come to ift, fo iommt ct bed) nid)t $u tiur. 
see me. 
Although he has promised it to £%(cicb cr c$ mtr r-erfprcd)cn r)at, fo 

me, I do not rely upon it. gable id) tctb nicbt barauf. 

Although he is poor, he does ©b cr fdicn (or cjtctcb, £iuar, reefy) 
nevertheless a great deal of arm if!, fo ttjut et t)cd) tncl (5Jute$* 
good. 

However, nevertheless, bed) ; 

the folly, tic Sberbctt, btc 9?arrbctt ; 

the character, bet (Eharartct (plur. c), btc ®cs 

mutfjsatt; 
bashful, timid, -fclGbe ; 

fearful (timid), futcbtfam ; 

natural, naturltd) ; 

oolite (civil), impolite (uncivil), f)6flid) ; unfyofUcf)* 

EXERCISES. 211. 

Well (9iUii), does your sister make any progress ? — She would 
make some, if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me. — - 
Not at all (d>qn$ unb gar ntcbt), I assure you that I should be highly 
satisfied, if all my pupils worked like you.— Why do you not go 
out to-day ]«— 1 would go out if it was fine weather. — Shall I have 
the pleasure of seeing you to-morrow ] — If you wish it I will come. 
—Shall I still be here when you arrive (bet Sbrvr tfnfunft) ] — Will 
you have occasion (®c(c^enr)cit) to go to town this evening] — I do 
not know, but I would go now if I had an opportunity (btc (Sk's 
feqcnbctt). — 'You would not have so much pleasure, and you 
would not be so happy, if you had not friends and books. — Man 
would not experience so much misery (fo tuel (S(cnb) in his career 
(auf fctncr 2aufbaf)n), and he would not be so unhappy, were he not 
so blind. — You would not have that insensibility (Me ©cfubttoftgrat) 
towards the poor, and you would not be so deaf to (taub cjecjcn) their 
supplication (btc £Utte), if you had been yourself in misery for some 
time. — You would not say that if you knew me well. — Why has 
your sister not done her exercises 1— She would have done them, 
if she had not been prevented. — If you worked more, and spoke 
oftener, you would speak better.— I assure you, Sir, that I should 
learn better, if I had more time. — I do not complain of you, but of 
your sister.— -You would have had no reason (llrfad)c) to complain 
of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. — What 
has my brother told you 1 — He has told me that he would be the 
happiest man in the (pen bcr) world, if he knew the German lan- 
guage, the most beautifu, of ail languages. 

usually placed between these two words. Ex. DBaktdj btefeS $ferb fettt 
(Snglanbet ift, fo roevbe id) e§ bed) fan fen, although this horse is not an Eng- 
lish one, I shall nevertheless buy it. Db^letcb btcfem Sftcmne md)ts totberj&jja 
vett ift, fo betlctgt er fid) bod;, though nothing has happened to this man, he is 
nevertheless complaining. 

13* 



298 

212. 

I should like to know why I cannot speak as well as you.— 1 
will tell you : you would speak quite as well as I, if you were not 
so bashful. But if you had studied your lessons more carefully 
(beffer), you would not be afraid to "speak; for, in order to speak 
well, one must learn ; and it is very natural, that he who 
does not know well what he has learnt should be timid. — You 
would not be sojtimid as you are (a(s <B'u finb), if you were sure to 
make no mistakes — There are some people who laugh when I speak. 
— Those are impolite people ; you have only to laugh also, and 
they will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I (do), you would 
speak well. — You must study a little every day, and you will soon 
be no longer afraid to speak. — I will endeavour to follow your ad- 
vice, for I have resolved (fid) ttotnefymen*) to rise every morning at 
six o'clock, to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. — De- 
mocritus and Heraclitus (in German as in English SpcvadxtnZ, &c), 
were two philosophers of a (tton) very different character : the first 
laughed at (fiber with the accus.) the follies of men, and the other 
wept at them. — They were both right, for the follies of men deserve 
(tk'rtuenen) (both) to be laughed and wept at. — My brother told me 
♦that you had spoken of me, and that you had not praised me. — We 
should have praised you, if you had paid us what you owe us. — 
You are wrong in complaining of my cousin, for he did not intend 
to hurt your feelings. — I should not have complained of him, if he 
had only hurt my feelings ; but he has plunged into misery a whole 
family. — You are wrong in associating with that man. He only 
aspires after riches. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY.SECOND LESSON.— %mi mtir iteutqi0Ste 

To be thoroughly acquainted with 502it etner <Sad)e genau Oefannt (or 

a thing. Dertraut) fan*. 

To make one's self thoroughly (Sid) nut einer (Sacfye kfrmnt (or 

acquainted with a thing. ttertraut) macfH'n. 

I understand this business. 3d) bin tint fciefer ©acfye Dertraut (of 

befannt). 
Acquainted, befannt ; 

intimate, familiar, DCtttaut. 

1 am acquainted with that. f 3d) bin bamtt befannt (wttraut). 

A species (a kind), cine 2Crt, a cine ©artung. 

What kind of fruit is that ? \ ®» a * ^ A & l Crt Wt# ? C * ? 

) 2Ba$ fur cine grudbt tjt bteg? 

a The plural of collective noun? is generally formed by adding Strtett, 
Kinds. sp^eJes, to the singular. Ex. ine Qbftcuteit, fruit (i. e. various sorts ol 
fruit) ; hi? ®etr«beavten, corn (i. e. various kinds of corn). 



299 



The kernel (of an apple, a pear, 
an almond), 

The stone, 

kernel-fruit, 

stone-fruit, 

[t is a kernel-fruit. 
To gather fruit. 

The dessert, 
Tc serve up the dessert, 

The fruit, 

the plum, 
the anecdote, 
the soap, 
the roast-meat, 

To dry (to wipe). 
To cec«se (to leave off). 
I leave off reading. 
She leaves off speaking. 



i bet &etru 

bet (Stem ; 
t>a$ jternebfh 
fcaS Steinebjt 

(SS if! etne jtcrnftud)k 

£)b|1 bred)cn*. 

bet 9?ad)ttfcb. 

ten 9*ad)tt[d) aufttagen*. 
< tag £>bjr, 
( tie grud)t ;t> 

tie $>flaume ; 

tie 2(nectcte ; 

tie Seife ; 

ter S3raten. 

2fbtrccfncn. 

2Cufboren. 

t 3d) bete auf $u (efetu 

t <8'ie ijort auf $u fprccr)en. 



To avoid. 



( gotten 
( Cermet 



etten* (gemieten, nuct) 
eit>cn*. 
To avoid some one. * Scmatitcn meiten*. 

To avoid something. (Stwas rxrmetben*. 

To escape (avoid a misfortune). (Stnem Uncjlticfe entgefyen* or cntritu 

nen* (entrennen/enttann). 
The punishment, tie Strafe. 

To avoid death he ran away. Urn tern Sote $u entger)en, nar)m er 

tie gtud)t. 
The flight, the escape, tie g(ud)t. 



To do without a thing. 



Can you do without bread 1 

I can do without it. 

I do without bread. 

Do you do without bread ? 

I do without it. 



(Sine (or einer) <Sad)e entbeljren 
(governs the gen. or the ace), 
Sid) befyelfen* ofyne etr»a$. c 
^onnen (Sie ftd) ofyne S3rot 6er)e(* 

Jen ? 
Bennett <Sic bag 25rob (be$ 23rct>e^) 

entbebren ? 
" 3d) femn C8 entbefiten. 
3d) bebelfe mid) efync £8reb. 
SSeMfcn @ic ftd) or>nc SSrob ? 
3d) fann cS entbefyreru 



b ?>te ^rud)t is the fruit of trees and plants. Ex. $>te ftelbfriici&te, the fruit 

of the fields. %tud)t is also employed figuratively: Ex. 3Me Brud)t fetner 

Slrbwt, the reward of his labour. Sl bft is only used in speaking of apples, 

. plums, and similar fruit. Hence ba3 jtentobft, kernel-frmt; fcag etem* 

Obft, stone-fruit. 

c <£ntbebren is employed in the sense of to be without and to do without , 
ffc& beljeifen* in the sense only of to do without. 



300 



There are many things which we £Btr muffen t>ieU$ entbefjren. 
must do without. 

iWlan fogt, cr rocrbe morgcn arrets 
fen. 
9)?cm fagt, tag cr mcrgen aOrcifcn 
nxrbe. 



FUTURE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



The futures of the subjunctive differ from those of 
the indicative only in the second and third persons 
singular, which are : tt)erbeft and tt>erbe, instead of tturjt 
and voirb. Ex. 



Thou wilt praise. 
He will praise. 
Thou wilt have praised. 
He will have-praised. 



£)u rccrbeft (often. 
(5r nxrbe (oben. 
S)u nxrbeft $c(e&t fjafcen. 
(§t n>crt)e cjclebt l;aben. 



The future of the subjunctive implies a coming but 
uncertain event. Ex. 

!$Jlan fagt, cr rocrbe balb anfems 
men. 
Sftan fagt, tap cr 6a(b anfommen 
rcerbe 

93?an fjofft, cr roerbe nod) ^u rccfytes 
3eit angefemmen fetn. 

£ttan befft, baj] cr nccb $u reciter 3ctt 
angefemmen fetn werbc. 



It is hoped that he will yet 
Lave arrived in time. 



They will warm the soup. $ftan nurb bte (Smppe md'rmcn. 

Dinner, or supper, is on the tabb f sjftan f)Gt aufgetragen. 
(Literally : one has served up) 



2Cufroartcn. 

t itanntcb Sfaten bamttaufrcartcn? 



To serve, to attend. 

Can I nelp you to some of it? 

Shall I help vou to some soup 1 ") f .ftatin tcb Sbnen nrtt (B'uppe auf» 

Shall I help } »u to some soup ] 3 wartcn ? 

I will trouble you for a little. f 3d) bitte nur ctn rccntg batuw 

To ask for (politely). (^teb nu^tuttcn*. 

May I crave (beg) the favour of f ^arf id) mtr Sfyrcn 92amcn au& 
your name ? bitten ? 



301 

The woman, tie Jrau ; 

the wife, fcas &3cit>. a 

exercises. 213. 

i come to wish you a good morning. — It ou are very kind.— 
Would you do me a favour ! — Tell me what you want, for 1 would 
do anything to oblige you. — I want five hundred crowns, and I beg 
of you to lend them to me. I will return them to you as soon as 
I have received my money. You would oblige me much, if you 
would render me this service. — I would do it with all my heart, if 
I could ; but having lost all my money, it is impossible for me to 
render you this service. — Will you ask your brother whether he is 
satisfied with the money which I have sent him ] — As to my bro- 
ther, though it be little, he is satisfied with it: but I am not so; 
for having suffered shipwreck, I am in want of the money which 
you owe me. — Henry IV., meeting (ontrcfien*) one day in his 
palace (ber 5>a(ct|t) a man whom he did not know (t>ev thm unbcfruvtit 
war), asked him to whom he belonged (^uc^cbcrcn). " I belong tc 
myself," replied this man. " My friend," said the king, " you 
have a stupid master." 

214. 

Have they served up the scup ] — They have served it up some 
minutes ago. — Then it must be cold, and I only like soup hot (iuat~ 
me @uppc). — They will warm it for you. — You will oblige me. — 
Shall I help you to some of this roast-meat] — I will trouble you 
for a little. — Will you eat some of this mutton? — I thank you, I 
like fowl better. — May I offer you some wine ] — I will trouble you 
for a little. — Have they already served up the dessert] — They have 
served it up. — Do you like fruit] — I like fruit, but I have no more 
appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese ] — I will eat a little. — Shall 
I help you to English or Dutch (bellanetfd)) cheese ] — 1 will eat a 
little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that] — It is stone-fruit. 
— What is it called ] — It is called thus. — Will you wash your 
hands] — I should like to wash them, but I have no towel to wipe 
them with. — I will let you have (gdX'n laffcn) a towel, some soap, 

d 5>te % M a\l is used in titles, in which case it is not expressed in English. 
Ex. ^te fsrcut (Sraftnn, the countess. It stands for, 1. the mistress of the 
house. Ex. TMs ift bte fstau »om «6attfo "that is the mistress of the house ; 
2. the consort. Ex. Seine ftrctu tft febr fcfron, his lady is very handsome; 



tins 



3. the sex, but then it is generally combined with the word 5?erfon or 3 
mer. Ex. cUenneu (fete btefe ftraiterisperfon {hki?3 §rauen$immer)? do you 
know that lady ? The word SBetfr means : 1. in general a woman of the 
lower classes. It is sometimes combined with the word ^erfon, and in speak- 
ing contemptuously with the word Q3Ub. Ex. 3Me SBeiber Bom gememcn 
3>olfe, the women of the lower classes ; bte 2BctB§p*erfwt, baS ^BctBbilb, the 
female ; 2, a consort among the lower classes. Ex. @r feat etu3£etb fletwms 
men, he has taken a wife (has married) ; 3. the sex in general. Ex. (lit! 
tfclee Siietb, a woman of noble sentiments; bte -JUxluv be3 SBetM, wo»uan'f 
nature. 



302 

and some water. — I shall be much (fcr)r) obliged to you. — May 1 
ask you for a little water ] — Here is some (Da fyabcn <Ste). — Can 
you do without soap ] — As for soap, I can do without it ; but I 
must have a towel to dry my hands with. — Do you often do with- 
out soap ? — There are many things which we must do without.— 
Why lias that man run away ] — Because he had no other means of 
escaping the punishment which he had deserved. — Why did your 
brothers not get a better horse 1 — If they had got rid of their old 
horse, they would have got another better one. — Has your father 
arrived already! — Not yet, but we hope that, he will airive this 
very day (nod) fjeute). — Has your friend set out in time 1 — I do not 
know, but I hope that he will have set out in time. 

215. 

Will you relate something to me ? — What do you wish me to re- 
late to you 1 — A little anecdote, if you like. — A little boy asked 
(ferK'rn) one day at table (bet Stfcbe) for some meat ; his father said 
that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should wait until 
some was given to him. The poor boy seeing every one eat, and 
that nothing was given to him, he said to his father : " My dear 
father, give me a little salt, if you please." "What will you do 
with it ? " asked the father. " I wish to eat it with the meat (3d) 
ttrill-c$ au fcem $U'tfct)e effen) which you will giveme, 1 ' replied (wrfe* 
$en) the child. Every body admired (Oerounfrcrn) the little boy's wit ; 
and his father, perceiving that he had nothing, gave him meat with- 
out his asking for it. — Who was that little boy, that asked for meat 
at table ? — He was the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask 
for some meat] — He asked for some because he had a good appe- 
tite. — Why did his father not give him some immediately? — Be- 
cause he had forgotten it. — Was the little boy wrong in asking for 
some 1 — He was wrong, for he ought to have waited. — Why did 
he ask his father for some salt 1 — He asked for some salt, that (t>cu 
nut) his father, might perceive that he had no meat, and that he 
might give him some. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-THIRD LESSON. -JDrei unir ttetm^get* 
Certiou. 

To execute a commission. ©inert TCuftrctg ciuSttcfyten, aotfjteljen*, 

foefergen. 
I have executed your -sommission. 3d) babe Sbren 2fuftra^ gut autfge? 

ttctjtet (t>efl$ogen, befetcft). 
1 2 

[ have received with the greatest 3d) fya&e S^r untcrm fed)(!en an 
pleasure the letter which you 3 4 

addressed to me, dated the 6th mtcf) gertcfttctcS (^cbretkn nut 
instant. tern gropten SScrgniigen ctfyat* 

ten. 



303 



DCr 3 When the adjective precedes the noun (Les- 
t* 1 XVTQ.) all words relating to it are plact.d before 
the adjective, or the participle used adjectiveiy, in the 
following order : 1st, The article or pronoun ; 2d, all 
words relating to the adjective or the participle adjec- 
tive ; 3d, the adjective or participle adjective ; and 
finally, 4th, the noun. Ex. 



A. man polite towards everybody. 



A father who loves his children. 

You have to study the twentieth 
Lesson, and to translate the 
exercises relating to it. 



Have you executed my commis- 
sion V 
I have executed it. 
To do one's duty. 
' To fulfil one's duty. 
To do one's task. 
That man always does his duty. 

That man always fulfils his duty. 

Have you done your task 1 

To re y upon something". j 

To depend upon something. ] 

He depends upon it. 

I rely upon you. 

You may rely upon him. 

To suffice, be sufficient. ©enugen, fyinrctcfien, genug Jem*. 

To be contented with something. (Sid) mit etwaS tu'anitgen* 



1 2 3 

(Sin gegen Sebetmann F) 6 flicker 

4 

12 3 4 

(Sin (Vine £inbcv ttebenbet 5?atet% 
©te fyafcen tie ^fln.^igfte Section 
1 2 3 
gu fiubttcn, unb bie bqu gebfc 

4 
rtgen TCufgaben $u uberfef$en* a 

fiabm B\c mctnen 2Cuftrcta ciu^ge* 

rtcbtet ? 
3d) babe tbn au£gertd)ter. 
(Seine ©duilbigfrit tbun*. 
(Seine tyfttcbt erfiillen. 
(Seine 2Crbett madden. 
Dtefer 93<ann tl)ut tmmer fetne <£d)\\U 

bigfett. 
Jttefer 9DJann crfullt immet fetn< 

$)f*Knt. b 
£aben <Ste 3br e 2Ctbett gemacfyt ? 

[ ©id) cmf ctroa^ r>et(affen*, 

(5t Dcrtaf't ftcb barcuif. 

Scb ttetlaffe mid) anf (Sic. 

(Ste fonnen fid) auf tf)n wrlajfcn. 



Is that bread sufficient for you ! \ f * Sbncn biefrt ©rob genug ? 
J e 3ft btefe$ S3rob fur ©le genug 
It is sufficient for me. (S$ qetutqt mir. 



? 



a This kind of construction, wherein the noun stands separated more or 
less from its article, is more frequently made use of in elevated style than in 
conversation. 

b ^fltd)t is that which our own conscience obliges us to ; (SdjuTbtgfctt. the 
orders given us by our superiors, an J is derived fron? bte ©cfyulb, the obliga* 
{ion, debt. 



304 

Will that money be sufficient for 2Btrb btefe$ (5?elb btefem SERanne ge* 

that man ? nugen ? 

It will be sufficient for him. ($$ mitb tf)m genii gen. 
Little wealth suffices for the wise. SByntg genugf bem s 2Setfen. 
Was this man contented with ^pat ftd> l)tcK*i: 9J2qnn nitf^Dtefct @um* 

that sum? me begtuigt? 

{ s I£at btefe (Summc fur btefen 931ann 
btnvetebenb ? 
£Bar btcjjj (Summc btefem Marine gc* 
nug ? 
It has been sufficient for him. (St fyat peb bamtt begrtfigt. 
He would be contented if you (St nriitbc pel) begnugen, roenn Ste 
would only add a few crowns. nut nod) etntge Scaler l)tn$ufttgen 

mollten. 

To add. £tn$ufugcrt. 

To build. SSaiicn. 

To embark, to go on board. <Steb ctnfd)iffcn. 
The sail, ta$ (Segcl. 

To set sail. itnter (Seget gcf)cn** 

To set sail for. ©cgcln nacb. 

To sail for America. 9?aeb tfmerifa fegetn. 

With full sails. 9Jfit Dotien ©egcln. 

To sail with full sails. 93ht Delicti ©egcln fabrcn*. 

He embarked on the sixteenth of (jjc f)at peb am focr)^e()ntcn (cbet ben 
last month. feeb$ebnten) (egten 9)ionat$ etnges 

febtfft. 
He sailed on the third instant. (St tjt ben brittcn (obet am brittcn) 

btefe* untet (Seget gcgaugeny 

That is to say (£ *.). £)aS bctf't (nam(teb). 

Et csetera (ste;)f and so on, and Unb fo meitet (abbreviated tu f. W.). 
so forth 

Otherwise, differently. 2(nber$. 

In another manner. 2(uf cine anberc ?ftt. 
If I knew that, I would behave SQBcnn id) bas mu|le y rotitbe id) mid) 

differently. cmberS benebmen. 

I f I haa known that, I would SBcnn id) $>&* gercupt batte, fo rofirb* 

have behaved differently. icb mid) embers benommen ()aben. 

To behave. @id) benebmen*. 

Else (otherwise). @cnf!» 

If not. 9Bc ntebt. 

Mend, else (if not) you will be SBcffcrn ®te peb/ fenft (mo ntd)t) 

punished. mttb man @ie ftrafen. 

I cannot do it otherwise Set) frinn t$ nicl)t anberS macben. 






OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

The second person singular of the imperative, being 
formed from the second person singular of the indica- 
tive, is only irregular when the latter is so. Ex. @e* 
ben*, to give ; second person of the indicative, tut gtbft, 
thou givest; imperative, $\b, give thou, jjelfeu*, to 
help ; second person of the indicative, in l)tfffi> thou 
helpest ; imperative, t>itf> help thou. 

From this rule must be excepted : 1st. The follow- 
ing verbs : fyaben*, to have ; second person, bu bctjl:, 
thou hast ; imperative, fyabe, have thou ; fein*, to be ; 
second person, bit bill, thou art ; imperative, fet, be 
thou ; toerben*, to become ; bu tvixft, thou becomest ; 
imperative, tt)erbe, become thou ; nnflen*, to know ; 
second person, bu toetpt, thou knowest ; imperative, ttnfie, 
know thou ; n>ctfen*, to will ; bu mttft, thou wilt ; im- 
perative, tt)ol(e* 2d. Verbs which, in the second person 
of the indicative present, change the letter a into &♦ 
In the imperative they resume the radical vowel. Ex. 
?aufeu, to run ; bit Ictttfit/. thou runnest ; imperative, lau* 
fe, run thou. 

All the other persons of the imperative are derived 
from the present of the subjunctive, which is always 
regular, as well as the plural of the present of the in- 
dicative. 

Have patience ! &<\Un <Ste ®ebu(b! 

Be attentive! ©etcn (Stc'cmfmcrEfam ! 

Go thither! Gkben <&'u bin ! 

Give it to me ! (Skben (Sic C6 mir ! 

Give it to him ! ©ebon ©te C6 ibui ! 

Patience, impatience, £>ie ©cfcult) ; tic UngeMb. 

Lend it to me ! Ccifjcn (Stc c$ tint ! 

To borrow. Screen (let ben*). 

I will borrow some money of 3cb will nut ocn 3fynen (Belt) Uihct 

you. (bercjen). 

I will borrow this money of you. 3d) to? ill tuefeS (Mb BOB S^nett foot- 

gen. 
Borrow it of (or from) him. SSorgen <Sie e? &en tfjm. 

I do borrow it from him. 3d) bor§c e6 DOn- thm. 

Obs. A. These examples of the imperative are for 
the third person plural, which is most commonly used 



306 

in polite conversation ; but we sometimes also employ 
the second person plural, particularly in exhortations, 
as : 

Be (ye) good. <&cib gut. c 

Know (ye) it. SQStfiet e£. d 

Obey your masters, and never ©erjotcbet e (Surert Sefjrcrn, unt) ma* 

give them any trouble. cbet tfynen nte SSerfcrup. 

Pay what you owe, comfort the SBqabler, roa$ Sbr fcfoulbtg felt) ; 

afflicted, and do good to those troftct bic llnQ(iicfticl)cn / unb tfjitt 

that have offended you. benjentgen ®utc$, bte @ud) bdeu 

btQt baben. 

Love God, thy neighbour as thy- gtcbet ©ott unt) (Suten SWcfyfltcn rule 

self (in German yourself). (Sud) fctbft- 

To obey. d5ef)etd)en. 

To comfort. Srojlen. 

To offend. SBeletbtcjen, 

The neighbour, ter 9?ad)fte ; 

sadness, tie Zrauxlcfttit ; 

the creditor, t)cr ©Idutuget ; 

the watch, tie itbr ; 

the snuff-box, tie £)ofe. 

Obs. B. We often employ compound imperatives, 
in order to give to understand that we either com- 
mand or invite. They are formed for the third person 
sing, and plur. with mogen*, may ; fotfen*, shall ; and 
for the first person plural with {afjert*, to let, which 
likewise forms the compound imperative in English; 
and with tt>ollen # , will. Ex. dv mag loben, let him (he 
may) praise ; er foil lofcen, let him (he shall) praise ; fee 
ntogert loben, let them (they may) praise ; fTe follen loben, 
let them (they shall) praise ; laftet Utt3 loben, let us 
praise ; ttnr tt)oKen loben, let us (we will) praise, &c. 

Let us always love and practise £affet un3 immer tie Sugenb (tcben 

virtue, and we shall be happy unt) emStiben, fo roerben rotr in 

both in this life, and in the btefem unb jencm £eben ojucfttd) 

next. fetn. 

Let us see which of us can shoot 2Btr molten feben, nxt t)on un$ am 

best. beften fd>iepcn fann. 

c From 3>br fetb, second person plural of the indicative. 
<* From 5^r ttnffet, &c. &c. 
• From 5fr gef)ord)et, &c. &c. 






307 



EXERCISES. 216. 



Have you executed my commission 1 — I have executed it.— Has 
/oar brother executed the commission which I gave him? — He has 
executed it. — Would you execute a commission for me ] — I am un- 
der so many obligations to you,~that I will always execute your 
commissions when it shall please you to give me any. — Ask the 
horse-dealer (t>er spfcrfccfja'ntto) whether he can let me have the 
horse at (fur) the price which I have offered him. — I am sure that 
he would be satisfied, if you would add a few florins more. — I will 
not add anything. If he can let me ha.ve it at'(fftr) that price, let 
him do so; if not, let him keep it (fo mag cr e* bcf)a(tcn). — Good 
morning (in the accus.), my children! Have you done your task? 
— You well know that we always do it; for we must (nuljjten) be 
ill not to do it. — What do you give us to do to-day 1 — I give you 
the ninety-third lesson to study, and the exercises belonging to it 'to 
do, — that is to say, the 216th and 217th. Endeavour to commit 
(madbcn) no errors (fcer g\'f)(cr). — Is this bread sufficient for you 1 — 
It would be sufficient for me, if I was not very hungry. — When did 
ycur brother embark for America] — He sailed on the thirtieth of 
last month (kgten donate). — Do you promise me to speak to your 
brother 1 — I do promise you, you may depend upon it. — 1 rely upon 
you. — Will you work harder for next lesson than you have done for 
this 1 — I will work harder.— May I rely upon it ] — You may (fort* 
tten c$). 

217. 

Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadness alters 
(d'nfcern) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse (aro/r). — Be not 
afraid of your creditors ; be sure that they will do you no harm. — 
You must have patience, though you have no mind for it (t>a$u) ; 
for I also must wait till I (man) am paid what is due to me.-— As 
soon as I have money, I will pay all that you have advanced (au$: 
legen) for me. Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think 
of (benfen an* with accus.) it every day. I am your debtor (t>et 
©crjulbner), and I shall never deny ((eucmen) it.-— Do not believe that 
I have had your gold watch, or that Miss Wilhelmine has had your 
silver snuff-box, for I saw both in the hands of your lister when 
we were playing at forfeits (^fa'nber fptdcn). — What a beautiful 
inkstand you have there ! pray, lend it to me. — What do you wish to 
do with it ] — I wish to show it to my sister. — Take it, but take 
:;are of it, and do not break it. — Do not fear. — What do you want 
of (sen) my brother 1 — I want to borrow some money of him. — 
Borrow some of somebody else. — If he will not lend, me any, I will 
borrow some of somebody else. — You will do well. — Do not wish 
(for) what you cannot have, but be contented with what Providence 
(tue s £crjcbung) has given you, and consider (fccbenfen*) that there 
are many men who have not what you have. — Life (DaS Sebcn) 
being short, let us endeavour to make it (e£ uns) as agreeable (angc* 
neljm) as possible. But let us also consider that the abuse (Oct 



SOS 



^fttfftraucb, of pleasure (in the plur. in German, 93ergnitgungcn) 
makes it bitter (bitter). — Have you done your exercises 1— I could 
not do them, because my brother was not at home. — You must not 
get your exercises done by (sen) your brother, but you must do theirs 
yourself. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-FOURTH LESSON.— \)kx Xixib tt*rni?ijj*te 
Cation. 



To be a judge of something. 
Are you a judge of cloth 1 
I am a judge of it. 
I am not a judge of it. 
I am a good judge of it. 
T am not a good judge of it. 



f ©id) auf ctroag »erjicr)cn*. 

f £>crjrebcn &ii ficfo auf £ud) ? 

t Scb wrflfche nricb tarauf. 

t Scf) Dctftebe mid) ntcbt fcarauf. 

f 3d) serjrehc mid) febr gut fcatauf. 

f 3d) wrjkije mid) nid)t fefyr gut 
fcarauf. 



To draw. 

To chalk. 
The drawing, 
the drawer, 
To draw from nature, from life. 

To draw a landscape from nature. 

To manage or to go about a thing. 
How do you manage to make a 

lire without tongs 1 
I go about it so. 

You go about it in a wrong way. 
I go about it in a right way. 
How does your brother manage 

to do thaU 
Skilfully, dexterously, cleverly. 

Awkwardly, unhandily. 

He should have managed the 

thing better than he has done. 
You should have managed the 

thing differently. 
They ought to have managed it 

as I have done. 
We ought to have managed it 

differently from what they did. 



3 e t d) n c m 

Sftacfyctcbncn (Mftten). 

tie 3etcbnung ; 

ter 3eid)ner. 

9Jacb K't 9?atur, nad) tern Scben 

^eicbncn. 
(Sine fcantfefyaft nad) bcr Plaint jcicfts 

ncn. 
<&$ anfangen*. 
2Bte fangen 6k eS an, ofme Sange 

Jeuet an$umad)cn ? 
3d) fange es fo (or auf t>icfc £Betfe) 

an. 
<Ste fangen c<> nicftt gut an. 
3d) fange e£ gut an. 
SBtc fangt 3 for Gutter- eg an, urn 

fctcfeS $u tbun ? 
©efeb'teft (auf cine gefefytdte ofcer fcU 

nc ?Irt). 
tlngefdjtcfr. 
(Sr batte eg beffct anfangen fotfen. 

(Sic batten eS antcrS anfangen 

nut fie n. 
<Ste batten eS mad)cn fellcn, nne id). 

SBir fatten cS inters madjen follcn, 
alg fie. 



309 



aSct&tcten*. Part, past, t)Ct* 
betcn. Imperf. berbct. 

3d) t>cr6tctc Sjjncn, btcfcS ju tfjun. 

^itcbcrfajjcn*, F)cruntcr(affcn*. 

S)te Xugen nteKTiWaa/n*. 

£)cr £>erbcma, gcbt auf, faltt. 

t £)er >X£ccbfclccur$ tft c^cfatlcn (ftefjt 

hktiriqer}. 
t £)er Sao, netgt fid). 

>§•$ rctrb 9?ad)t. 

(£$ nrirb fpat. 
©id) bticfcn. 

£ttbtcn. 

91 i e d) c n * (qcrecbcn*, red)). 

(5r riecbt nad) jtneb(aud). 

Scmanbcm ben s pu(* fublcn. 
C 3n etroaS nnllta>'n (or ctnntttttgen). 
I ©cine (Sinwilli^ung §u ctroas cjeben* 
C 3d) ptUtge bamn/ 
C 34 3°^ metne Ginantttauna, ba$u. 

C SScrbcrqcn* (wrbera/n, wrbarg). 
I ©crjkrfen. 

3n SBtabrfcrifc 

3n ber ktjat (rmrfltd), roar;rr;aftta,). 

btc &bat ; 
roabr (recbt) ; 
roabrfyaft ; 

Qv tft cin roabrbaftcr sj}fann. 
This is the right place for this £)as tft bcr roabre (red)te) $(a§ f(k 
picture. bufe€ (Semcdbe. 

As I live ! f ©o rcabr id) kbc ! 

To think much of some one. 2fuf Semanbcn ml fatten*. 

To esteem some one. Semanben fcba£cn. 

[ do not think much of that man. 3d) baltc ntcbt Old auf bicfert 9J?ann. 

I think much of him (I esteem 3d) battc mcl auf il;n (id) fefyage it)ti 
him much). fc(;r). 



To forbid. 

1 forbid you to do that. 

To lower. 
To cast down one's eyes. 
The curtain rises, falls. 
The stocks have fallen. 

The day falls. 

Ft grows towards night, or night 

comes on. 
It grows dark. 
It giows late. 

To stoop. 

To feel. 
To smell. 

He smells of garlic. 

To feel some one's pulse. 

To consent to a thing. 
I consent to it. 



To hide, to conceal. 

Indeed. 
In fact. 
The fact, 
true, 
genuine, 
He is a true man. 



To permit, to allow 

The permission, 
. permit you to go thither. 

{To command, to order). 



(5 r ( a u b c n. 

btc (SrfaubmiSf. 

3d) crlembc 3&BCH r)tn$Ut)er)cn (oi 
bafjin $u a,cr)cn). 

BefeMen* (bcfoblcn, befall). 



310 

Obs. When the third person plural is employed in 
the imperative instead of the second, the personal pro- 
noun always follows the verb, but never when the 
second person is employed. Ex. 

Order it to be done. SSefefjIcn @te, la$ mem eg tfyue 

Be virtuous. <Seit> tugenbtyoffc 

Will you permit me to go to the SBeUen 0tc rott crlaufccn, auf ben 

market ] Wlaxtt $u qcfyen ? 

To hasten, to make haste. ©ten, fid) fputem 

Make haste, and return soon. (Silcn ©U unb fommen @ie fcalb 

mtcbet. 

I had done reading when your Set) battc aufqefyort $u (c|tn, alg Sfjt 
brother entered. SBrubcr bcrcintrcit. 

fou had lost your purse when I ©ie batten Sbre Stfb'rfc oevtoten, ctl$ 
found mine. icb tic metntqc fanb. 

To step in, to enter. £cretntreten (qetrctcn, trat). 

To be ashamed. <§ t d) f d) a m c n. 

To be ashamed of some one or (Sid) Semanbeg obet etner ©adjc 

something. fcMmen*. 

I am ashamed of my impatience. 3d) fcba'me mid) metnet llnqcbutb. 

To copy, to transcribe. 2(b|~cbret6en*. 

To decline. £)ec(tntrcn. 

The substantive. &a$ £auphuctt. 

To transcribe fairly. S gf. n «* j*5gR 

The adjective, the pronoun, the bag SSctroert; bag #urtuort ; tot 

verb, the preposition, 3ettroert ; bag aSenvort. 

The dictionary, the grammar, l>a$ S3?(5rterbud> ; bie <Sptadj(eF)t* 

(btc ©rammattQ. 

Do good to the poor, have com- £but ben 2Crmcn ©ute$, unb fiabt 
passion on the unfortunate, 50?tt(etbcn nut ben ilnqlucHtdKn, 
.and God will take care of the fo retrb bcr lube ©ott fur t>a$ 
rest. Uebricje fergen. 

To do good to some one. Scma'nbcm ©utcg tfjun*. 

To have compassion on some SGNtttctben nut Scmanbcm baben*. 
one. 

Compassion, pity, ta§ SOHtletben ; 

the rest, bag Itebrtqe. 

He has no bowels. f (5r bat fetn 3}tft(ctbcn. 

For pity's sake. \ 2(ug SDSlfetbCtW 

EXERCISES. 218. 

What must we do in order to be happy 1 — Always love dtnd 
practise virtue (Ctcbct unb tibet btc — tmmcr aug), and (fc) you w ,1 be 
happy both in this and the next life. Since we wish to be r <ppy, 



311 

let us do good to the poor, and let us have compassion on the un- 
fortunate ; let us obey our masters, and never give them any trouble ; 
let us comfort the unfortunate, love our neighbour as ourselves, and 
not hate those that have offended us ; in short (!uv$), let us always 
fulfil our duty, and God will take care of the rest. My son, in or- 
der to be loved, you must (mup man) be laborious and good. Thou 
art accused (Oefd)iilt>tgi'n) of having been idle and negligent in thy 
affairs. Thou knowest, however (jeted)), that thy brother has been 
punished for (axil) having been naughty. Being lately in town, I 
received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly complained of 
thee. Do not weep ; now go into thy room, learn thy lesson, and be 
(a) good (boy), otherwise thou wilt get (in the present tense) nothing 
for dinner. — I shall be so good, my dear father, that you will certain- 
ly (qcrtnp) be contented with me. — Has the little boy kept his w^rd ? 
— Not quite, for after having said that, he wxnt into his room, took 
his books, sat down at the table (ftcb on t>en Sifcb fcgen), and fell 
asleep (cinfcblafcn*). He is a very good boy when he sleeps, said 
his father, seeing him some time after (fcarciuf). 

219. 

Are you a judge of cloth 1 — I am a judge of it. — Will you buy 
some yards (for) me ] — Give me the money, and (fc) I shall buy 
some (for) you. — You will oblige me. — Is that man a judge of 
cloth 1 — He is not a good judge of it. — What are you doing there ] 
— I am reading the book (in fc>em 33ud)i') which you lent me. — You 
are wrong in always reading it (tmmet bartn $u fefcn). — What do you 
wish me to do ]— Draw this landscape ; and when you have drawn 
it, you shall decline some substantives with adjectives and pro- 
nouns. How do you manage to do that 1 — I manage it so. — Show 
me how }^ou manage it. — What must I do for my lessons of to- 
morrow (t>te morgenbe (Stunbe) 1 — Transcribe your exercises fairly, 
do three others, and study the next lesson. — How do you manage 
to get goods without money? — I buy on credit. — How does your 
sister manage to learn German without a dictionary ?— She manages 
it thus. — She manages it very dexterously. — But how does your 
brother manage it 1 — He manages it very aw T kwardly : he reads, 
and looks for (cmfjucbcn) the words in the dictionary. — He may 
learn in this manner (mif fctefe ££et[c) twenty years without know- 
ing how to make I single sentence (t>er ©ci§). 

■ 220. 

Why does your sister cast down her eyes 1 — She casts them 
down because she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Let 
us breakfast in the garden to-day : the weather is so fine, that we 
ought to take advantage of it (c5 fremifeen). — How do you like thai 
coffee ? — I like it very much (r>crtteff(tcn). — Why do you stoop ] — 1 
stoop to pick up the handkerchief which I have dropped. — Why do 
your sisters hide themselves ] — They w T ould not hide themselves, 
if they did not fear to be seen. — Whom are they afraid of? — They 



312 

^te afraid of their governess (Vic (Sr^tehertnn), who Bcolded them 
yesterday becaiise they had not done their tasks. — An emperor, 
who was irritated at (aujgeftrticbt Cjcc^cn) an astrologer (tct QfcrnjbefU 
ter), asked him: "Wretch, what death (nxlcben £ct)ti§) dost thou 
believe thou wilt die]" — "I shall die of a fever," (Lesson 
LXXXIII.), replied the astrologer. " Thou liest," (page 210) said 
the emperor ; " thou wilt die this instant (in ttefcm 2ht$ttlMi(f) a vio- 
lent (tV'waltfam) death." As he was going to be seized (vrcjvetfen 
Wollcn*), he said to the emperor, " Sir ((SnatHgftcr ftcrr), order some 
one to feel my pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." 
This sally (DtojVr cjute (£tnfall) saved his life. — Do not judge (rut* 
ten), you who do not wish to be judged ! — Why do you perceive 
the mote (Toe Streh) in your brother's eye, you who do not perceive 
the beam (ter SBoIfon) which is in your own eye ] — W^uld you 
copy your exercises if I copied mine ] — I would copy them if you 
copied yours. — Would your sister have transcribed her letter if I 
had transcribed mine] — She would have transcribed it. — Would 
she have set out if I had set out ] — I cannot tell you what she 
would have done if you had set out. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-FIFTH LESSON.— JFftnf ttttb nett!l#g*te 
Cation. 

To grow (to wax). ■ SBocbfcn* (takes fetn* for its 

auxiliary. Part, past, gerocid)* 
fen. Imperf. toud)8). 

To grow rapidly (fast). <s5cbndl roaebfen*. 

That child has grown very fast SDicfe* .£int> ift in farmer 3eit fef)i 

in a short time. geroaebfen (or fyerangercacfyfen). 

To grow up (to grow tall). ,g>etantt>ad)fcn*» 

The flower, tie Sfttmiie ; 

the shelter, ter @cbu|? (He ©tdjctljett) ; 

the cottage, the hut, tic @tref)()iitte. 

To shelter one's self from some- (gtd) t)0r cttvag (dat.) fd)(i|en. 

thing. 
To take shelter from something. (£icb »cr etroaS (dat.) in @td)Ctl)eU 

fegen. 
Let us shelter ourselves from the jffitr roeflcn un$ t>or tern 9tc$cn (tern 

rain (the storm). SSiate) fd)U§en (in <5td)crl)rit 

fefsen). 
*Let us enter this cottage in order OaflVn Biz un$ in ttefc ©trcfibiittc 

to be sheltered from the storm geben, urn t>er tern (Sturumx'tteT 

(tempest). in <Sicberl)ctt $u fctn. 

For fear of. 2(u$ Jurcbt — $ u ' 

To catch a cold. ©id) erfdltcn. 



313 



will not go out for fear of 
catching a cold. 



He does not wish to go to town 
for fear of meeting with one 
of his creditors. 

Every where, throughout. 

All over (throughout) the town. 

Under the shade. 

Let us sit down under the shade 
of that tree. 



To pretend* 



3d) nritt ntd)t auSgefjen, au$ $urd)t 
mid) gu etfatten (ober mil id) 
mid) t»er ©rraltimg fiitcbte, ebet 
cms ^uvcfcty ben 6d)nupfen $u be* 
femmen). 

($t will ntcbt nad) bet ©tobt gcben, 
au$ Jurcfct emeu feinet ©tauOtgcr 
an^utreffen. 

Uebrratt 

f 3n fcet gan$cn ©tabt. 

f 3n ben (bem) ©djatten. 

f @e$en nut un$ in ben ©djattcn 
biefes 23aume$ (cbet unlet btefen 
S3aum in ben ©fatten). 

f £ fjun' (ft* jteClen), aU eb 
or a I $ ro c n n (followed by 
the imperfect of the subjunc- 
tive). 

That man pretends to sleep. ©iefet 90?ann ftctXt fid)/ cit$ cb et 

febttefe. 
This young lady pretends to jDtcfeS $rau(cm tbut, ate tterfiunbc 
know German. fie beutfeb, or a($ roenn (ot>) fie 

beutfd) ocrfiftnbe. 
They pretend to come near us. <Sie ftcllcn fid)/ cilg cb (or roetm) fie 

fid) un$ nar)em rooUten. 

TAera, ^M5, 50, consequently. 2C(fC» 

O&s. J.. This word must not be mistaken for the 
English word also, which is translated into German 
by and). 



In a short time. 
Lately. 

To make a present of something 
to some one. 

Mr. Fischer wrote to me lately, 
that his sisters would be here 
in a short time, and engaged 
me to tell you so ; you will 
consequently be able to see 
them, and to give them the 
books which you have bought. 
They hope that you will make 
them a present of them. Their 
brother has assured me, that 
they esteem you without know- 
ing you personally. 
14 



3n £ur$em. 

Stolid). 

Semonbem cin (SSefcbenE nut eta)a$ 
mad)en. 

£ert gifebet febrieb nut ncultd), t>a$ 
feme -grciufem ©cbmejiern in 
.fturgem btetbet fommen routben, 
unb bat mtcb, e6 Sbnen $u fagen. 
(Sic roctben fie alfo fcfjcn / unb 
tbnen bte S3iicbct geben fb'nnen, 
nx'lcbe €S.e gefauft fyaben. @ie 
beffen, baj} (Sic tbnen cm ©efebene 
bemut macben roctben. 3b r &?$- 
$>ct bat midb serftcbett, bafi fie ®tc 
bocbfd)&'§en, obne <Ste petfonltcb $t F 
lennetu 



314 



Would to God. 

Would to God it were so. 
Would to God he had done it. 



SMte ®ott. (See Obs. F. Lesson 

XC.) 
SBolltc ©ctt, e£ roatc fo. 
SBotlte ©ott, cr tjcitte c$ gctfyan. 



To want amusement. ? o^^ <xt>,u, t A ^ * 

To get or be tired. j Ccngc SJBettc fiakn * 

How could I get tired in your £Bte fonnte id) feei Sftncn (ange ££ei* 



company ! 


le Ijaben ? 


Firstly (at first), 


crjtene ; 


secondly, &c. 


• $rocitcn$ K« 



To have reason to. 
He has reason to be sad. 
He has much sorrow. 



llrfacfie fjafecn* — $u. 

(£t f)at Urfad)e traurtg $u fem 

<5r foot met $ctt>rufj (Summer). 



Ofo. B. When any one is thanked for a thing, he 
must answer in German : 



You have no reason for it. 



t (<Ste fafcen) 9Uc*)t Utfad&e. 



To look upon or into. ©efyen ouf or nacr). 

The window looks into the street. £)a£ ^enfter gefyt auf tic (nad) bet) 

(Srrape. 
The back door looks into the £)te ibtntcttfytit gc-fyt nad) tern (55at« 

ten. 



garden. 

To drown. 

To be drowned. 

To jump out of the window. 
To throw out of the window. 



(Sttrd'nfen (active verb). 
(Srtrinfen* (neuter verb). Part. 

past, erttunfen. Imperf. et* 

tronf. 
(Srjciufen* (neuter verb). Part. 

past, etfoffen. Imperf. crfoff. 

C 2Cu$ bem #enfter fprtngen*. 
1 3um genftet f)inau$ fpttngen*. 
C 2(u$ t>em Verifier rocrfen*. 
C 3um genjtet fotnauS wetfen.* 



To sAooJ (meaning to kill by @ t f d) t c p c n *. 
shooting). 



To blow out some one's brains, 



fScmanbcm cine $ugel t>ot ten $opf 
fdjicpen*. 
Semanbem cine £uget buret) t>a$ 
©cf)trn jagen. 

To shoot one's self with a pistol. <Stcb nut etnet $>tjMc erfefytepen*. 
He has blown out his brains. (£r t>at fid) erfdjeffen. 
He has blown out his brains with (St l>at fid) nut etnet $tjlc(e ns 
a pistol. fcfyoffen. 



315 

I am di owning. 3d) ertrinfe. 

He jumped out of the window. (St tjt au$ bem $enfter fjcfprungen* 

To get paid. f ©id) bqabfen (affcn*. 

To suffer one's self to be pre- f (Sid) bitten (affcn*. 

vailed upon, 
To get one's self invited to dine, f (£td) $um 9)iittagcffen eintabctt 

foffen*. 

Get paid. f gajfen <Ste fief) kgafjten ! 

Let us set out. £affen pie un£ (or rwr rooHcn)' ate 

retfen. 
Let us breakfast. gaffen <Sie un$ (or rmt rootten) frfifc 

ftiicfcn. 
Let him give it to me. £)ap cr nur c£ gc^c, or et gebe e$ 

nur. 
Let him be there at twelve o'clock. £>ap cr urn $roo(f ItFjr t>a fct, or cr fet 

urn jroolf Uf)t t)a. 
Let him send it to me. £)ap cr nur e$ fcnt>e, or cr fenbe e$ 

mm 
He may believe it. £)ap cr ajfaufcc, or cr glaufee e& 

To be at one's ease. 33ef)agen, bcr)ag(tc& ober bequem fcin* 

(impers. verb, gov. dat.). 
To be uncomfortable. UnbebagUd), unbequcm cber genirt 

fetn*. 
I am very much at my ease upon (S3 ift nur auf biefem @tuf)lc fcr)r 

this chair. bcbagttd). 

You are uncomfortable upon your <£•$ ift Sbncn md)t r>cr)agttcr> (ober. 

chair. unberjag(td)) auf Sbrem ©tuble. 

We are uncomfortable in that (5$ bebogt un$ in biefem Jtoftfyaufe 
boarding-house. (biefer g)cn(icn) md)t. 

To make one's self comfortable. (S3 ftd) bequcm madjetu 
To put one's self out of the way. ©id) bemufyen. 
Make yourself comfortable. Sftadben @tc C5 ftd) bequcm* 

Do not put yourself out of the S3 emit f) en <Ste fid) md)t. 

way. 
Do as if you were at home. 3#un (Sic, a($ roenn <Stc $u #aufe 

roaren. 

Go and tell him that I cannot ©ef)t unb fagt tbm, bap id) r)cute 

come to-day. ntdyt femmen fann. 

He came and told us he could (Sr fam unb facjte UttS, bap cr nid)t 
wot come. fommen £onnte. 

• 
To prefer. 9Sor$iel)cn* (ge^cgen, $eg). 

[ prefer the useful to the agree- 3d) a'terje $>a$ 9£ug(id)C bem 2Cnge* 
able. tte^men oot. 



For when the Manly and the 
Fair, 

When Strength and Beauty- 
form a pair,. 

Then rings it out a merry song. 



316 

Obs. C. When an adjective is used substantively 
in the masculine or feminine gender, a noun is always 
understood, e. g. ber 9?etd)e, the rich, meaning ber ra'dje 
9D?arm ; bte ©cfyone, the beautiful woman, meaning bie 
frf)one grew* 

Few words to the wise (proverb). (Me&rten : ft gut prcbigen (^pttcljs 

wort). 

Obs. D. An adjective used substantively without 
a noun being understood is always put in the neuter 
gender, e. g. ba$ ©rofte, the great ; bae @rt)afcene, the 
sublime ; ba$ Sleu^ere, the exterior ; ba£ Sttnere, the in- 
terior. 

What he likes best is hunting ©etn OtefcftcS' iff tic 3oc|b unb ba$ 
and fishing. ^ifefyett. 

' £)enn wo bag @trcncjc nut bem Bars 

ten, 
-5H5o ©tarfeS ficfy unb 93itfbeS paar^ 

ten, 
w 3)a gifet c^ etnen cjuten .ftfang. 
(@ d) U I e t in his Steb t>on ber 
©tccfe, the song of the bell). 
Severe, tender, mild (gentle). ©treng, yxzt, nitlb. 
To be welcome. SQSittfemmcn fan*. 

You are welcome every where. @te ftnt> ubcrall nullfommen. 

He will arrive in a week. (St nrirb in ad)t Sacjen (etner 3Bod)e) 

anfommen. 
It took him a week to make this (St fyat btefe £Retfe in acf>t Sagen 

journey. gemacfyt. 

He will have finished his studies (St rmro fctne (Stubten in etnem 

in three months. SSterteljafyre t>otlenbct fjafoen. 

He finished his studies in a year. (St fjat fetne (Stubtcn in etnem 3>aljs 

tc sollenbet. 

EXERCISES. 221. 

Have you already seen my son 1 — I have not seen him yet, how 
is he 1 — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognise him, 
for he has grown very tali in a short time. — Why does this man 
give nothing to the poor 1 — He is too avaricious (qet^tq) ; he does 
not wish to open his purse for fear of losing his money. — Wliat 
sort of weather is it ] — It is very warm ; it is long since we had 
afty rain (e£> bat (anqe ntcbt qereanet) : I believe we shall have a 
storm (etn ©ennttet bef'ommen). — It may be (£>a$ farm vdcM fetn). — 
The wind rises (fid) crf)cben*),it thunders already; do you hear it! 
— Yes, I do hear it, but the storm is still far off (rcett entfernt). — 



317 

Not so far as you think; see how it lightens. — Bless me (3D2c'm 
©ott), what a shower (wckl) etn cntfegttcber JKegen tpt &as) ! — If we go 
into some place we shall be sheltered from the storm. — Let us go 
into that cottage then ; we shall be sheltered there from the wind and 
the rain. — I have a great mind to bathe (baocn) to-day. — Where will 
you bathe ? — In the river. — Are you not afraid of being drowned * — 
Oh no! I can swim. — Who taught you-(cs) 1 — Last summer I took 
a few lessons at the swimming-school (fete @d)tt>tmmfcl)uh > )' — Where 
shall we go to now 1 — Which road shall we take ? — The shortest 
will be the best. — We have too much sun and I am still very tired ; 
let us sit down under the shade of this tree. — Who is that man that 
is sitting under the tree 1 — I do not know hint. — It seems, he wishes 
to be alone ; for when we offer to (roeflcn*) to approach him, he 
pretends to be asleep. — He is like your sister : she understands 
German very well ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends 
net to understand me. 

222. 

Have you seen Mr. Jaeger ] — I have seen him ; he told me that 
his sisters would be here in a short time, and desired me to tell you 
so. — When they have arrived, you may give them the gold rings 
.which you have bought; they natter themselves that you will 
make them a present of them, for they love you without knowing 
you personally. — Has my sister already written to you ] — She has 
written to me, I am going to answer her. — Shall I (^ctl tcb) tell her 
that you are here ] — Tell her ; but do not tell her, that I am wait- 
ing for her impatiently. — Why have you not brought your sister 
along with you ? — Which one 1 — The one you always bring, the 
youngest (tie fftnqffc)- — She did not wish to go out, because she has 
the tooth-ache. — I am very sorry for it ; for she is a very good girl. 
— How old is she ] — She is nearly fifteen years old. — She is very 
tall for her age (bas 2C(ter). — How old are you ] — I am twenty-two. 
— Is it possible ! I thought you were not yet twenty. 

223. 

Will you drink a cup of (btc gaffe) tea 1 — I thank you, I do not 
like tea. — Do you like coffee ? — I do like it, but I have just drunk 
some. — Do you not get tired here ] — How could I get tired in this 
agreeable society ] — As to me I always want amusement. — If you 
did as I do, you would not want amusement ; for 1 listen to all those 
who tell me anything. — In this manner I learn (ctfabren*) a thou- 
sand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but you do 
nothing of that kind, that is the reason why you want amusement. 
— I would do every thing like (two) you, if I had no reason to be 
sad. — I have heard just now that one of my best friends has shot 
himself with a pistol, and that one of my wife's best friends has 
drowned herself. — Where has she drowned herself!— She has 
drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. Yester- 
day at four o'clock in the morning she rose without saying a word 



818 



to an} cne, leaped out of the window which looks into the garden, 
and threw (ftitqen) herself into the river where she was drowned. — 
Let us always seek the friendship (tie greunt^fd)aft) f t, ne g 00( j anc | 
avoid (flteben*) the society of the wicked ; for bad society corrupts 
(tk'rberben) good manners (tie Stttew, fem. plur.). — What sort oi 
weather is it to-day 1 — It snows continually (nod) tinnier), as it 
snowed yesterday, and according to all appearances (attem 2Cn|cfcci* 
ne nacf)) will also snow to-morrow. — Let it snow, I should like it to 
snow still more, and to freeze also, for I am always very well when 
't is very cold. — And I am always very well when it is neither 
3old nor wajrm. — It is too windy, (gar $u rmnbtq) to-day, and we 
should do better if we staid at home. — Whatever weathej it may be, 
I must go out, for I promised to be with my sister at a quarter past 
eleven, and I must keep my word. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-SIXTH LESSON.— Qa\)Z nttb twmifasfe 
iUction. 



Notwithstanding, in spite of. 

Notwithstanding that. 

In spite of him (her, them). 

Notwithstanding his promise. 



C Itrtgcadjtct (governs the gen.). 
(_ SQBiDcr (governs the accus.). 

£)effen ungcacfytet. 

SSiber fctnen (tbrcn) Smitten* 

(Scinch $etfpted)ens una,ead)tet. 



Even. d?ogar. 

He has not even money enough (Sr bat focjat nicfyt (Mb genua,, urn 
to buy some bread. 23tob $u faufetu 



To manage. 



Do you manage to finish your 
work every Saturday night ! 



Do you manage to have your 
work done every Saturday 
night ] 

Try to dc that to oblige me. 
I manage to go thither. 



(SS berQejMt mad&cit, bap. 
(5S fo etnrtd)ten, bap. 
(56 fo macfyen, bap. 

r 9J?atf)en @te eg fo, tag @ie atfe 
©am(!a9 2(benb nut 3t)rct Arbeit 
ferttg metben ? 
SKtcbtcn <§u eg fo etn, tag ©te jeten 
©amftag 2Cbenb mit Sfctet Arbeit 
fettta, roctben ? 
r SHtdbtcn ©ic eg fo etn (otec macron 
(&k eg fo), tap @te afle (Samftog 
«{ 2(benb mit Sbrer tttbett fcrttg 
ftnb (oter tfyre 2Ctbett fcrttg fyas 
ben) ? 

S3efrtcben @tc fid), btefcS $u tr)un- 

urn mid) $u Derbtnbcn. 
3d) rtd)te eg fo etn, tap id) (jtngefjen 

fann. 



319 

To have done. $erttg fein*. 

Will yo 1 soon have done work- ©tnb ©tc batb nut 3(jrcr TCrbeit 

ing? fcrttg ? 

I shall soon have done. 3d> rcerbe balto bamtt fcrttg fetn. 

To keep warm. (Sid) warm fatten*. 

f o go always neat. ©id) immcr rctnttd) fatten*. 

To be (to keep) on one's guard. ©id) bitten, fief) tterfeben*. 

To take care (be careful). ©tcb in 2Ccbt ncfaten*. 

To keep on one's guard against ©id) Mr Semanbem in 2Cd)t nefymen* 

some one. (or bitten). 

Take care that you do not fa J. Stterjmcn Sic fief) in 2Cef)t (rjfitcn ©ie 

fief)), ^a§ ©ie ntcbt fallen. 
To beware of somebody or some- ©icb r-or 3cmanbem cber Dor ctnxtg 

thing. fatten (or in 2fcf)t nefatcn*). 

Keep on your guard against that £iiten ©ie fid) t>ot t>icfcm 2$anne« 

man. 
If you do not take care of that 2Bcnn ©tc fid) t>cr btcfem $)fcrbc 

horse it will kick you. ntcbt in 2Cd)t nefymen, fo rmtb eg 

©te febtagen. 
Take care. ©efan (Sic fict) t?cr. 

I fear he will come. 3d) furcbte, ba§ er femme. 

I do not doubt but he will come. 3d) $nxtfle ntcbt ^ap er fomntt. 

The bad weather hinders us from £)ag febtecbte Sffietter r>erF)tnbert, tc$ 

taking a walk. roir fpa^teren a,ef)en. 

I shall prevent you from going 3d) roerbe fcfan tjerrjtnbetn, ba$ ©te 

out. auggeben. 

( shall not set out till every 3d) tt>ett>e nid)t abrcifen, big attcg 

thing is ready. fertig ift. 

The enemy is stronger than you £)et getnb tft ftatfer, alg©iegcgtaut>t 

thought. faben. 

I shall certainly come, unless I 3d) rocrbe genng fommen, eg fei 

am taken ill. benn, beg id) Cranf roitrbe. 

To be taken ill (to fall sick). &ran! rocrben*. 
Very little more, and I would do (£g fefjtt roentg, bap id) eg tfyue. 

it. 
It is in your power to obtain me f (Sg ftebt nut bci 3^en, t>a$ id) 

that situation. biefe ©telle befommc. 

He is quite different from what (Sr ift gan$ anbetg, atg cr Dot gwet 

he was two years ago. Sabren roar. 

You do not act any more as you ©te fanbetn ntcbt mcr)t fe, rote (or 

have done. ©te banbeln anberg, alg) ©te ges 

fanbett fafrcn. 
Before you undertake anything (Sbe ©te ctnxtg unterncrjmen, fagen 

tell me of it. ©te es mtr. 

Did any body know how to tell £at Scmanb ouf cine naturttcbere 

a story in a more natural (more (ungeruntfettere) 2(rt $u eqafytctl 

artless) manner than Lafon- gcruuft, aU Safontatnc ? 

taine 1 



320 

A thought, etn ®cbcmfc (masc.) ; 

an idea, cine 3>bec ; 

a sally, .etn (Stnfatt (masc). 

To be struck with a thought. (Strten tinfoil bciben* (etnfcutcn*) 

A thought strikes me. 5" f* ^ mlv «*?« & 

That never crossed my mind. (So etmaS iff mir nte etngcfcuTcn. 

To take it into one's head. f (Sicb ctnfallcn laffcn*. 

He took it into his head lately to f (Sr lieg (id) neu(id) etnfaUcn, mi<$ 

rob me. gu beftcblen. 

What is in your head ? f ^ a ^ fatlt Sbnen em. 

In order that, in order to. 2fuf bap or bamtt. 

He works in order to be one day (St arbettet, bctmtt cr fctncm SSaters 
useful to his country. (ante ctnft (etneS SageS) nfigli$ 

nxvbc. 

The native country, the father- bctS 83atcrlcmb. 
land, 

One day, once, etneS SageS, etnffr. 

To be born. ©ebttrtig fetn*. 

Where were you born 1 t &Bo pnb @te gebtirttg ? 

I was 1 orn in this country. f 3d) bin in btefem Ccmbe geblirttcj, 

Where was your sister bora 1 f £Bo ift Sfjrc ©cbrocftcr gebtirttg ? 
She was born in the United States f ©te if! in ben 23eretntgten <&taas 

of North America. ten sen 9?et&amertfci gebtirttg* 

Where were your brothe shorn? f 2£o finb Sfoe S&tfibet gebtirttg ? 
They were born in France. f ®* e fwb in grcmfretd) gebutttg. 

Around, round. £crum (umber). 

All around, round about. 9?unb Return (runb umfjer). 

The dish went around the whole S)ie (Scbtijfet gtng bet bcr gan&en 

company till it came back to Stfcbgefeltfcbaft l)erum, btS fie rote* 

the landlord. ber gum SBirtbe gurucf femu 

We sailed around England. £Btr fegeften urn (Sngtcmb fjerum. 

They went about the town to look Ste gtngen in ber (Stabt umber, um 

i at the curiosities. ibre inneren ^ertrxwtbtgMten $u 

bettacbten. 

To go around the house. Um t>a$ £ctug r)crum geben*. 

To go about the house. 3>n bem £cmfe umbergeben* 

To express one's self. ©tdb auSbrMen. 

To make one's self understood, (Stcb tfcrftanbltcb mctcben 

To have the habit. £)ie ©eroebnfyett fyaben*. 

To accustom. (55en)6'bnen. 

To accustom one's self to some- ©id) cm ctma6 (accus.) gett>6bnen« 

thing. 
Children must be accustomed £tnbet muff en bet Bctten an bie lit* 

eurly to labour. belt cjercftbnt roerben. 



321 

r(5ine (accus.) @acT)e geroobnt fan* 
To be accustomed to a thing. < (Stner &ad)t (gen.) qerocrmt fein* 

C.2(n cine (Sad)e gercofynt fcin* 
I am accustomed to it. 3d) tun e* gerDct)nt. 

I cannot express myself in Ger- 3d) fann mid) im 3)eutfd)cn ntcbt gut 
man, for I am not in the habit cmsfcuicfen, mil id) ntcbt $u fpres 
of speaking it. d)cn Qctucfynt tun (cfcet : rccit id) 

tm @prcd)cn ntd)t'Qcubt bin). 
You speak properly. f (Sie refcen, wic fid)'5 qerjort. 

To chatter. Sploiifcctm 

To prate. ®d)rea§cn. 

A prating man, cin ^Mcmberer, (gdnaxajut, 

A prating woman, cine ^cfyruagetinn. 

To practise. Uebetn 

I practise speaking. f 3cJ) ufrc mid) im <Spted)Ctt. 

To associate (to converse) with 9#it Semcmbem umqerjen*. 

some one. 
I associate (converse) w r ith him. 3d) qcrje mit ifym urn. 

exercises. 224. 

Have you been learning German long ? — No, Sir, I have only 
been learning it these six months. — Is it possible ! you speak 
tolerably (jtemltd)) w T ell for so short a time. — You jest (febeqen) ; I 
do not know much (of it) yet. — Indeed, you speak it well already. 
I think you flatter me a little. — Not at all ; you speak it properly. 
— In order to speak it properly one must know more (of it) than I 
knov/. — You know enough (of it) to make yourself understood. — I 
still make many mistakes. — That is (tfjut) nothing ; you must not 
be bashful ; besides (liberties) you have made no mistakes in all 
you have said just now. — I am still timid because I am afraid oi 
being laughed at (man mod)te fid) uber mid) tufttq mad)en). — They 
would be very unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be (t)enn) so 
unpolite as to laugh at you ] — Do you not know the proverb 1 — > 
What proverb ! — He who (Lesson XXIX.) wishes to speak well, 
must begin by speaking badly. Do you understand all I am telling 
you'? — I do understand and comprehend (begreifen*) it very well; 
but I cannot yet express myself well in German, because I am not 
in the habit of speaking it. — That will come in (mit t>er) time. — I 
wish it (may) with all my heart. 

Good morning, Miss. — Ah ((5t) ! here you are at last. I have 
been waiting for you with impatience. — You will pardon me, my 
dear, I could not come soone r 'eber). — Sit down, if you please. — ■ 
How is your mother 1 — She is oette" to-day than she was yesterday. 
— I am glad of it. — Were you a* oie ball yesterday ] — I was there. 
— Were you much amused (fid Htuftto&iji — Only so so. — At what 
o'clock did you return home 1 — A f * quarter past eleven, 
14* 



322 



225. 



Do you sometimes see my brother ?— -I do see him sometimes \ 
when I met him the other day (nculid)), he complained of you. " ll 
he had behaved better, and had been more economical (fparfam)," 
said he, " he would have had no debts (@d)ult>en, plur.) and I 
would not have been angry with him." — I begged of (bitten*) him 
to have compassion on you, telling him, that you had not even 
money enough to buy bread. "Tell him, when you see him," re- 
plied he to me, " that notwithstanding his bad behaviour towards 
me, I pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one should 
not laugh (fpetten) at those to whom (Lessons XIV. and LX.) one 
is under obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be 
much obliged to you," added he in going away. — Why do you 
associate with that man ]— I would not associate with him, if he 
had not rendered me great services. — Do not trust him, for if you 
are not on your guard, he will cheat you. — Take care of that horse, 
otherwise it will kick you. — Why do you work so much ] — I work 
in order to be one day useful to my country. (See end of LessoL 
XXXIV.) 



NINETY-SEVENTH LESSON.— Qkbm ntib nemqijste 

Cation. 

He is too fond of me to do such f (Sr debt mid) gu fer)t, al$ t>a$ er 

a thing. fcuefes tfyun follte. 

I will rather die than do that. f 3d) null lieber fterben, al§ fcafi td) 

fckjeS tfnm [elite or ale fctefc* tfyun. 
She loved him so much, that she @ic Itebte it>n fo fefjr, t)ap fie ii)n fo* 

even wished to marry him. cjat fyctrcitben ruotlte. 

He cannot have said that unless f (£t frmn t'ufoS md)t gefagt fyaben, 

he is a fool. e£ pet benn, bag et etn SRaxt ift. 

To get married (to enter into ( ©id) ttcrfyetratben. 

matrimony). ( ©tdj i)crelj(td)en or t)crmd'l)(en. 

To marry somebody. Semanken l)etratf)en. 

To marry (meaning to give in aSerfjcttatfjen (set el) lichen). 

marriage). 
My cousin, having given his Sftacbbem.mem better fetne ©dbroe* ■ 

sister in marriage, married fter t>ctf)etratf)et t)atte (Page 280), 

Lady Pommern. fjetratfjete et gtautem Don $>om* 

mern. 
Is your cousin married 1 3ft 3fa j£>crr SScttcr »erljctrati)et ? 

No, he is still a bachelor. f S^cin, cr tft nod) letug. 

To be a bachelor. f £et>tcj fetn*. 

Embarrassed, puzzled, at a loss. 23 e 1 1 e Cj e n. 

The embarrassment, the puzzle, tie 93crlcgenfjctt. 

You embarrass (puzzle) me. (Sic jcgen mid) in SSetlccjcnfjett. 



323 

i. a puzzle (perplex) me. (Sie macfyen mx$ cctlcgcn. 

The marriage, tie .jpettatft, tie (Stye. 

II < demands my sister in mar- (£r t>cr(ano,t meine ©cfyweflcr $Ul 
riage. (5l)e. 

To take measures. £flaj}regcln nef)tnen* (or ctqretfen*). 

I shall take other measures. 3>d) roerfcc antere SDJafrcgeln crgreu 

fen (or nefymen). 

Goodness ! how rapidly does 9)ietn ®ott ! rote t>crftrcidf)t tie 3ctt 
time pass in your society. in Sbret ©efellfcbaft. 

The compliment, fca$ (Sompttment (plur. e a ). 

You are making me a compli- <Sie macben mtt fca em (Sompttment, 
ment to which I do not know rcerauf id) md)t£ $u anttnotten 
what to answer. wei|j. 

The least blow makes him cry £)et ftemfte ©cfitog mod)t tfjn wcU 
(weep). nen (brmo,t ifyn sum &£etnen). 

To frighten. <Stfcr)tecf;en(a regular active 

verb)* 

To be frio-htened i <$rfcbrecfen* (a neuter irregular 

1 o De ingntenea. ^ yerb) ^ ( crfd)rccfcn/ cr |$ ra f ). 

Thou art frightened, he is fright- £)u crfc^rtdfft, er erfefytttf t. 

ened. 
Be not frightened. (Srfcfyrecfen (Ste md)t. 

The least thing frightens him £)aS ©etmajte evfcljrecft tfjn (fie). 

(her, them). 
At what are you frightened? SBerftfcct erfdjrecfen <Ste ? (See 

Obs. C. Lesson LI1.) 
To be frightened at something. Iteber ctn>a$ (accus.) erfd)tecfen*. 

^, , Jtfbfjanqen* — -ttom 

To depend on, upon. } 2U forum en *-a uf. 

That depends upon circumstan- £)a$ fja'ngt son ten Umfldnten afc. 

ces 
That does not depend upon me. £)a$ fmngt mdjt t)cn nttr a&. 
It depends upon him to do that. <£*6 (jcingt Den tf)in a&, tiefeS gu tr)mt. 
O ! yes, it depends upon him. £) ! [a, tag bdngt son trjim a& 

(fommt auf tfjn an). 
That mau lives at every body's JDtcfcr sftlann Ubt auf SctctmanttS 

expense. Unfoften. 

The expense (cost), tie Unfeften (is never used in the 

singular). 
At other people's expense (or 2Cuf 2(ntetet Unfoften. 

charge). 

a Neutei nouns derived from foreign languages and terminating in ettt take 
c in the plural, except the two words: bag $ar lament, the parliament; bag 
ytegiment, the regiment, which like all other neuter nouns, take er in all the 
cases plural. 



324 



The fault, 

It is not my fault. 

Do not lay it to my charge. 
Do not accuse me of it. 
Who can help it 1 

W /lose fault is it 1 
I cannot help it. 

The delay, 
He does it without delay. 
t must go (must be off). 

Go away ! be gone ! 



tie <Sd)ulb. 
{ t 3d) k in ™*t Permit taran, 
( t ®* if* nidjt metne ©djulfc 

i f dkbcn ©te nut t>ic 6d)u(t nid)t 

2£et farm tafiit ? 
5 t £to iff <Sd>ult> baran ? 
> SBcffcn 8'cbult) i|l eg ? 
{ 3d) farm ntcbt£ fcafur. 
{ 3d) farm e6 nid)t anfcenn 

tct 2tuffd)ub. 
(Sr tfjut e* ebne 2fuffd)ut>. 
t 3d) will mad)en, tap id) /orb 
fomme* 

t 9Jtad)<m (Sic, tap ®te fortfommcn ! 



To be astonished (surprised), © r ft a u n e n, e r ft a u n t f e t n * 
I am surprised at it. 



An extraordinary thing happened 
which surprised every body. 



Many things have passed which j 
will surprise you. 



Many days will pass before that^ 
takes place. 



To jest. 

The jest, 
You are jesting. 

He is no joker (cannot take a 
joke). 

To beg some one's pardon. 
I beg your pardon. 
To pardon. 

The watch goes too fast. 
The watch goes too slow (re- 
tards). 
My watch has stopped. 

To stop. 
Where did we leave off] 



3d) crftaune tartibet. 

3cb bin tartibet crftaunt. 

(§5 ereignete fid) ctroas 2CufJerertcnt* 

Itcbes, roorubet Sctcrmonn ers 

ftaunte (crftaunt war). 
6$ ift 95tele$ gefd>cbcn, rocvubcr ©te 

erftaunen rpcrten. 
@$ bat ficb QStel^ ctetgnet," rootubct 

(Sic erftaunen rcetben. 
gftcbrerc Sage roetten fjtngefjcn, efye 

ttefeS gefcbtcbr. 
<£■$ rocrten tnebtere Sage fytngefjen, 

cbc ttejl'6 gcfcbicbt. 

©" d) c r ^ c n. 

tcr ©cbcrj, 

@ic fd)eqcn. 

(St (apt ntcr/t mit fid) fdjerjen. 



3enianbcn urn S$cr$ctr)ung bitten* 
3cb bttte <Ste urn SSet^etbuna,, 
83cr$etben* (t)cr$teben, t>et$tcb> 

£>ie Ubt a,ebt ocr (or $u ftub). 
S)ie Ubc gcl)t nad) (or $u fpat> 

50?cine Ubt ift fteben Qcbltebem 

(S t c b c n bletbcn*. 

t ££o fint wit fteben geblieben^ 



325 

Adhere did we stop 1 t ®° ft n & wtr geMteben ? 

We left off at the fortieth Les- &£ir fint> fret t>ct t>ier^tgftcn Section, 

son, page 100. ©cite 100 fteben geblieben. 

To wind up a watctn (Sine Uf)r ciufetel)cn*. 

To regulate a watch. (Sine Ufjr jMlen. 

Your watch is twenty minutes Sfyre Ufyr gel)t gvran^tg sjfltnuten .311 

too fast, and mine a quarter frtify (»cr), tint) fcne metntge cine 

of an hour too slow. 33icrte(|lunt>e gu fpcit (ricid)). 

[t will soon strike twelve. (S£ lvtrt) gtetcb $n?6lf fctyagen. 

Has it already struck twelve 1 Ipat e£ fdbon ^wotf gefdylugen ? 

To strike (heat). (£d)tagcn # (Imperf. fd)lug). 

Thou strikest, he strikes. £)u fcl)tacjft, cr fctytagt. 

Till I see you again. _ "> + f ft{ ^to^,-* 

I hope to see you again soon. 3 ' ; 

To fail, to want, to ail. gf C f) f e ru 

What ails you ] "7 <m * * «./* ^»r ? o 

What is the matter with you 1 j® fl « *» ^ 1Kn? 
You look so melancholy. (Sic fefyen fo fd)vx>ermutr)tg au$. 

n i- + . .-, , Ctlntet ber £U't>inauna, fcafL 

On condition, or provided. ^..j. ^ s . 3 J 3 ',-, 

r £ ?0?it oem SBetnnge, bag. 

I will lend you money, provided 3d) null Sftnen ©etb (etften, unter 

you will henceforth be more fcet 33et>ingung, bap @i| in 3ti* 

economical than you have ni- runft fparfamer feicn, alt @ie big* 

therto been. fyet gcrcefen fint). 

Henceforth. ^n 3u!unft. 

Economical. ©parfam or rjauSfyatretifd). 

To renounce gambling. jDem ©ptctc entfagen. 

The game (sport, play), bag (Spiel. 

To follow advice (counsel). f ® incm ®f* $f£ 
v y £ ©men SRatl) Oefetgcti. 

EXERCISES. 226. 

What o'clock is it ] — It is half past one. — You say it is half past 
one, and by (auf with the dat.) my watch it is but half past twelve. 
- — It w : 1 soon strike two. — Pardon me, it has not yet struck one. — 
I assure you, it is five and twenty minutes past one, for my watch 
goes very well. — Bless me! how rapidly time passes in your so- 
ciety. — You make me a compliment to which I do not know what to 
answer. — Have you bought your watch in Paris ? — I have not 
nought it, my uncle has made me a present of it (bamtt). — What 
nas that woman entrusted you with ? — She has entrusted me with 

b This is the way in which Germans who are intimately acquainted 
generally express themselves when separating. It answers the French: au 
plaisir de vous revoir, or simply au revoir. 



326 

a secret of a (r»en cittern) great count who is in a great embarrass* 
ment about the marriage of one of his daughters. — Does any one 
ask her in marriage ?— The man who demands her in marriage is a 
nobleman of the neighbourhood (au$ bet 9tfcid)barjct)aft). — Is he rich ] 
— No, he is a poor devil who has not a farthing (bet feller). — You say 
you have no friends among your schoolfellows (bet 9Jhtj"d)u(er) ; but 
is it not your fault] You have spoken ill of them (son tfynen), and 
they have not offended you. They have done you good and never- 
theless you have quarelled with them (page 278). Believe me, he 
who has no friends deserves (tterbtenen) to have none. 

227. 

Dialogue (Da$ ©efprcid)) between a tailor and lis journeyman 
• (bet ©efell, gen. en). Charles, have you taken the clothes to the 
Count Narissi 1 — Yes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did 
he say ] — He said nothing but that (cutset bei|}) Le had a great mind 
to give me a box on the ear (tue £)f)tfetge), because I had not 
brought them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I, 
I do not understand that joke : pay me what you owe me ; and if 
you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures. Scarcely 
($aum) had I said that, when he put his hand to his sword (ncicr; 
t>em iDegcn gteifen*), and I ran away (bte gtucfyt nefymcn*). 

228. 

At what are you astonished 1 — I am astonished to find you still 
in bed. — If you knew how (rote) sick I am you would not be as- 
tonished at it. — Has it already struck twelve 1 — Yes, madam, it is 
already half past twelve. — Is it possible that it is so late? — That is 
not late, it is still early. — Does your watch go well (recbt) 1 — No, 
miss, it goes a quarter of an hour too fast. — And mine goes half an 
hour too slow. — Perhaps it has stopped. — In fact, you are right. — Is 
it wound up 1 — It is wound up, and yet (between) it does not go. — 
Do you hear, it is striking one o'clock. — Then I will regulate my 
watch and go home. — Pray (3c!) tutte) stay a little longer (nod) etn 
roenta,) ! — I cannot, for we dine precisely at one o'clock (nut bent 
^cfytagc cinS). — (Adieu), till I see you again. 

229. 

What is the matter with you, my dear friend 1 why do you look 
so melancholy ] — Nothing ails me. — Are you in any trouble (£abett 
@tc irqenb etnen .Summer) ] — I have nothing, and even less than 
nothing, for I have not a farthing and owe a great deal to my cre- 
ditors. Am I not very unhappy 1 — When a man is well and has 
friends he is not unhappy. — Dare I ask you a favour 1 — What do 
you wish ? — Have the goodness to lend me fifty crowns. — I will 
lend you them with all my heart, but on condition that you will re- 
nounce gambling and be more economical than you have hitherto 
been. — I see now, that you are rny friend, and I love you too much 



I 



327 

not to follow your advice< — John ! — What is your pleasure, sir ?-~ 
Bring me some wine. — Presently, sir. — Henry ! — Madam 1 — Make 
the fire. — The maid-servant has made it already. — Bring me some 
paper, pens and ink. Bring me also some sand (tor ©treufanfc) or 
blotting-paper (cci£ Cb'fcbpamct), sealing-wax (fcer Stegellocf) and a 
light (I'tdK). — Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, and be back 
again at twelve o'clock in order to carry my letters to (cuif) the post 
office. — Very well, madam. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-EIGHTH LESSON.— &.cl)t unb tuntl^fAt 
Action. 

Out of, except. U U f ct (governs the dative). a 

Out of, or without doors. 2fttfjct t»cm .&aufc. 

He works out of doors. (Sr orftettet cutset fcem £aufe. 

They were all present, except <Sie roaren atle t)a, aupcr ten 6ctbcn 

the two brothers. S3riibetn. 

Except you and I, nobody was 2Cu£'er Sfyncn unb nut fcf)(te £Ric^ 
• absent. ntanfc. 

Besides that, otherwise. 2CufJi??bem (iiberbtc6). 

Excepting this, he is an honest 2Cuperfc>em' ift cr etn cf)rUcI)cr 20?ann. 

man. 

It can be done. f (S$ giivt 5D?ttte(, b eg $u tbun. 

There is no means of finding f (5* tft nicbt mog(td) (eoct e£ gtbt 
money now. fctn 9J?tttd), jtcb in btejVm 2fugen* 

fettcfc ©elt> $u t?crfd)ojfcn. 

Along. Sd'tt^ (governs the dative as 

well as the genitive). 

Along the road. ^cin^bce ^. 

s £ ScmgS t>cm 28ege. 

All the year round. f JDcig gcin$e 3af)t: fytnburcl). 

To enable — to. 3n ben (Stanb fegen — $u. 

To be able — to. 3m ©temfce fettt* — $u. 

To sing. ©tngen* (Part, past, gefungett. 

Imp erf. fang). 

a 5I«?er employed as a conjunction may be followed by any case, according 
to the verb by which the case is governed. Ex. 3>tf> fyafce s Jltemcmbcn aufcet 
ifyn gefefyett, I have seen no one except him; e3 tear -fttemcmb ba, aujjer er, 
nobody was there except he. 

b ^cig 9Jitttet> the means, is here in the plural. 

The ^position Uin$8 must not be mistaken for the adverb fctngfi, super- 
ative of knge, a long while. Ex. £an<j3 ben Ufern beS Stents bin id) fd)on 
latujft geveifet, it is a long time since I travelled along the be -ders of tfie 
Rhine. 



328 

To the right, on the right side 9Scd)tg, reenter £onb* 

(or hand). 
To the left, on the left side (or ZxnH, (infer £>onb* 

hand). 
Could you not tell me which is j^ennten ©ie mtr ment focjen, weldjca 
the nearest way to the city ber fuqejte 2Beg tft, urn onS Stjot 
gate 1 gu fommen ? 

Go to the foot of this street, and ©cben ©te tie gon$e ©troge fytnouf 
when you are there, turn to the (r)tnab) ; unt> roerm ©ie often 
right, and you will find a cross- (unten) ftnb, roenben ©te fid) 
way, which you must take. UnfS ; ba vurben ©te einen 

£reu$tveg pnben, fiber ben ©te 
gefjen. 
And then ] lint) fjernad) ? 

You will then enter a broad street, £ernad) fonnncn ©te in cine jjienis 
which will bring you to a great (id) brctte ©trope, bte ©te ouf 
square, where you will see a einen greftcn §>(a§ fitbrt, *do ©te 
blind alley. einc ©oefgafie feben nxrben. 

You must leave the blind alley ©te (often bte ©oefgoffe (infer £onb, 
on your left, and pass under unb geben burcb bte ©cfyrmbbogen, 
the arcade that is near it. bte baneben ftnt)* 

Then you must ask again. f 2H&batitf frogen ©te wetter*. 

The arcade, ber ©d)tt)ibbogcn ; 

the cross-way, ber &reu$nxg ; 

the shore (bank), boS ©eftobe ; 

the blind alley, bte ©oefgoffe. 

Through. £) u r d) (governs the accusative)* 

Do not cross (on horseback) the $Kette ntcfyt burd) ben £Bo(b ! 

forest. 

He made his way through the f (?r bof)nte ftd) einen £Beg burd) 

enemy. bte getnbe. 

By this means the patient was £)urd) btefeS SDttttcl rootb ber SixanU 

cured. gefunb. 

He speaks through the nose. (5r rebet burd) bte Stfofe* 

Without. £> fj n e, fonber (govern the 

ace us.). 

Do not go out without me. ®cf)en ©te cfine mid) nidr>t au$ ! 

Without the least doubt. ©onber d ollen 3n>etfe(* 

To last (to wear well). gotten*, bouern. 

That cloth will wear well. £)tefe£ Such nnrb gut gotten. 

How long has that coat lasted £Bte (onge l)ot Sfynen btefeS JUetb 
you? gcf)o(ten ? 

To my liking. 9?od) metnem S3ctic0cn (d5efatlcn> 

* ©Ottber instead of or)ne is only used in poetry. 



The question is to kn )W what 
we shall do to pass the time 
agreeably. 



329 

To every body's liking. £tad) SetermcmttS 23elteben (9£c(jlt 

gefallen). 
Nobody can do any thing to his $itcmcm& tann tfjm ettx>a^ tecfyt ma* 
liking. d)cn, 

rr,, • .. + { (55 banMt fid) urn. 

Hie question is, it turns upon. < .-,-. 1 . J _ f ^ -. 

It does not turn upon your Qgg bant>clt ftcb ntcl)t urn 3&r SScrs 
pleasure, but upon your pro- cuuigen, fonbern urn 3t)te Sorts 
gress. fd)ttttc. 

You play, sir, but playing is not (Ste fpielen, mctrt £ert ; abet @tc 

the thing, but studying. follcn nid)t fptetcn, fentern ftut>i«- 

ten. 

« n ,, $ Urn roa$ (roetum) f>anbclt ftcb'S ? 

W hat is going on ? j ^^ ^ ^ fln ? 

■ @$ femint batauf an $u nriffen, roag 
ttnr tf)un roerten (conversational 
style : 2Btt mujfen tm|fen, ruaS 
ttrir trjim follen), urn unfete 3ett 
angenefjm rjtnsubttncjen otct $u$us 
brtncjcn. 

I propose (intend) joining a hunt-^ 3cb nct)me nur t)or, eitter Sagtpartte 
ing party. bei$uroof)ncn. 

On purpose. Wit Jteig, r>otjagud). 

I beg your pardon, I have not 3d) bttte @te urn ^er^etfjung, id) 
done it on purpose. fyabt eg nid)t Borjaglid) (nut g(cip) 

fjetfyan. 

A game at chess, eine $)artte ©cfjadj.- 

A game at billiards, eine \patttc 25Ulart« 

To play upon the violin. 2fuf ber iStodne fptctcn* 

To play the violin. £)te 33te(tne obet &>toltn fpteten. 

To play for something. ttm etrcaS fpteten. 

To play upon the harpsichord. 2(uf tern JUaruet: (t>a§ ^(at)ier) fpte* 

len. 

To play upon the flute. 2Cuf Oct Jtote (tie pte) btafen* 

To play at cards. Garten fpteten. 

The game of chess, la$ (Scbacbfptet ; 

the card, tie £atte ; 

the playing at cards (tne card- ba§ Jlattenfptel ; 
playing), 

the pack of cards, t>a$ (Spiel partem 

Obs The name of the instrument is put in the ac- 
cusative when we wish to express, with the verb fpt'e* 
ten, that a person knows how to play ; but when we 
wish to express that he is actually playing, it require? 
the preposition auf with the dative. Ex. bie SStctutr 
fpielen,. to play the violin ; auf fcer SStelme fpielen, to play 



330 

upon the violin. The names of games are employed 
without an article, and the rest is as in English. 

To blow. SBlafcn* (geblafen, MieS). 

Thou blowest, he blows. JDu Wafeft, er blaft. 

To hold one's tongue. 7^-^ - . , rr , fr . . 

To stop speaking, to be silent. j©*wctgcn* (fltfefancgcn, ftrmtg). 
Do you hold your tongue? (Scbroeigen (Sic? 

I do hold my tongue. 3d) fd)roetge. 

After speaking half an hour, he Stfacb&em a ctne (jat&e (gtunbc gere- 
held his tongue. bet fjatte, fd>rotcg er. 

To suspect. 95 e r m u t f) c n. 

f suspect what he has done. 3d) uermutfjc, wag cr gctfjan fjat. 

He does not suspect what is (§t wrmutfyet md)t, ruaS tfym roibco 

going to happen to him. fat)ren rcirb. 

Do you intend to make a long ®ebenfen ©tc fid) tange in bet (Stabt 

stay in town ? auftu batten ? 

I do not intend to make a long 3d) geben!e mid) nid)t lange ba auf 
stay there. ju batten. 

To make a stay. ©id) aufbatten*. 

The stay, the sojourn, bet 2Cufcntf)a(t. 

To think. 2) e n £ e n * (gcbact)t, bacbte).. 

To think of some one or of some- Un Semanbcn cbet an etroaS ben* 

thing. fen*. 

Of whom do you think ? Tin men benfen <Sie? 

Of what do you think? SBoran benfen (Sic? (See Rule, 

Lesson LXIV.) 

EXERCISES. 230. 

Sir, may 1 ask you where the Earl of B. lives 1 — He lives near 
the castle (Lesson LXVIII.) on the other side (jenfeit) of the river. 
— Could you tell me which road I must take to go thither 1 — You 
must go along the shore ((angS bem ©cftabe bin), and you will come 
to a little street on the right, which will lead you straight (gcrafce) 
to his house (auf ba£ JpauS $u). It is a fine house, you will find it 
easily (le'icbt). — I thank you, sir.— -Does the Count N. live here? 
— Yes, sir, walk in ((id) fyerein benuiben), if you please. — Is the 
count at home 1 I wish to have the honour to speak to him. — Yes, 
sir, he is at home ; whom shall I have the honour to announce 
(me(iHn) ] — I am from B., and my name is F. 

Which is the shortest way to the arsenal (t>a$ SeugbauS) ? — Go 
down this street, and when you come to the foot, turn to the left 
and take the cross-way ; you will then enter into a rather narrow 
'enge) street, which will lead you to a great square, where you will 



831 

see a blind alley. — TVrough which I must pass ] — No, for there is 
no outlet (t)cr 2(u5ganq). You must leave it on the light, and pass 
under the arcade which is near it. — And then ! — And then you 
must inquire further. — 1 am very much obliged to you. — Do not 
mention it (^6 iff ntd)t Urfad)c). 

231. 

Are you able to translate a French letter into German 1 — I am 
(es). — Who has (eg) taught you ] — My German master has enabled 
me to dc 't- — You are singing, gentlemen, but it is not a time for 
singing; you ought to be silent, and to listen to what you are told. 
— We are at a loss. — W^hat are you at a loss at] — I am going to 
tell you : it is a question with us how we shall pass our t\me agree- 
ably. — Play a game at billiards or at chess. — We have proposed 
joining a hunting party : do you go with (us) ] — I cannot, for I 
have not done my task yet : and if I neglect it, my master will 
scold me. — Every one according to his liking ; if you like staying 
at home better than going a hunting, we cannot hinder you. — Does 
Mr. K. go with us] — Perhaps. — I should not like to go with him, 
for he is too great a talker, excepting that he is an honest man. 

What is the matter with you] you look angry. — I have reason 
to be angry, -for there is no means of getting money now. — Have 
you been at Mr. A's ? — I have been at his house ; but there is no 
possibility of borrowing any from him. I suspected that he would 
not lend me any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask him ; 
and had you not told me to do so, I should not have subjected my- 
self (fid) ausfegcn) to a refusal (Die aOfd)(d'gtge 2Cntroott). 

232. 

I suspected that you would be thirsty, and that your sister would 
be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you hither. 

I am sorry, however, that your mother is not here. I am aston- 
ished ((£s befrembct mid)) that you do not drink your coffee. — If I 
were not sleepy I would drink it. — Sometimes (^a(t)) you are slee- 
.py, sometimes cold, sometimes warm, and sometimes something 
else is the matter with you (tft Sfynen etroaS 2(nt>cre$). I believe 
that you think too much about (an) the misfortune that has hap- 
pened to your friend (fern.). — If I did not think about it, who would 
think about it 1 — Of whom does your brother think ? — He thinks of 
me ; for we always think of each other when we are not together 
(beifammen). 

I have seen six players (bcr ©ptcfet) to-day, who were all win- 
ning at the same time ($u ghudxt Sett). — That cannot be, for a 
player can only win when another loses. — You would be right if I 
were speaking of people that had played at cards or billiards ; but 
I am speaking of flute and violin players (bcr $fStcn? tint) &VteItnfpic3 
fer). — Do you sometimes practise (mcidben) music 1 — Very often, for 
I like it much. — What instrument do you play 1 — I play the violin. 



332 

and my sister plays the harpsichord My brother, who plays the 
bass (hex: 58ap), accompanies (beg(etten) us, and Miss Stolz some- 
times applauds us (3emanbem SSetfall guEfatfcbcn). — Does she not 
also play some musical instrument (ba* muftfoltfcbc Snftrument) ] — 
She plays the harp (bte £>atfe), but she is too proud (fto($) to prac- 
tise music with us. — A very (fct)t) poor town went to considerable 
expense (bet bettad)t(td)e 2(ufft)anfc) in feasts and illuminations (mtt 
^teuberrfeften unb (£rteucf)tungen) on the occasion of its prince passing 
through (Oct bet £>utd)tetfe tl)te£ — ). — The latter seemed himself 
astonished (erjlaunt) at it. — " It has only done," said a courtier 
(bet £cfinann), " what it owed (to your majesty). " — " That is true,' 1 
replied (petjegen) another, "but it owes all that it has done." (See 
end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



NINETY-NINTH LESSON.— Jfom Utli> iWtttqiflate 
Cation. 



Either — or. (Srttroebct — obet. (Lesson 

LXI.) 

Efe either has done it, or will (5t hat e*> entnxbet gctfjan, cber tmtb 
still do it. c$ nod) tfyun. 

Obs. A. It has been noticed in many parts of this 
work, that certain conjunctions correspond with others 
that generally follow them. These conjunctions are: 



(Less, 



(gtttweber, is followed by : ober (Lesson LXI.), either — or. 

je, or befto, the — the. 
J fonbent and) (Lesson LXI.), 
I not only — but also, 
t fo — bod), or QUid)Wot)l, or 
XCI.) < md)t$ be (lo wemger, though- 
f nevertheless. 

fo, however — still. 
( o&g, or al$ and) (Lesson 
I LXI.), as well — as. 
{ nod) (Less. VII. and LXI.), 
( neither — nor. 

fo, if — so. 

fo — bod), though — yet or 
nevertheless. 



5^/ a 
Ttid)t alTem, 
%lid)t mtr, 
Dbgletd), ) 
O6fct)on, > 
Dbwofyf, ) 
©o, . 

©onwfyf, 

2Ceber, 

SOBcnn, 
SQemt gletcf), 



SOBenn fdjon 



8" 



« 2>e unites two comparatives. 

*» SBetttt is not only combined with gletd) and f$on, but also with atlbtxi, 



333 . ■ 

Saber, or alfem or gtexdE)VDof)l 
or jebod), though — never- 
theless, or but. 

Prepositions either govern the £)te 9Serfyd(tm6n>8rtet (^rapofittos 
genitive, or the dative, or the nen) recjteren entrcebet ben ©cnU 
accusative, or finally the da- tYd, ober ben SDatt.p, obet ten 2Cc? 
tive and accusative. cufatit), ober enbltd) ben ©ait) anb 

2Cccufattt>. 

The sooner, the better. 3c eber, je (teller. 

c'he greater our pleasures, the 3e grower unfere #reuben ftnb, befto 
more we feel how transitory nu'f)t empftnben wit ifjte 93 cr* 
they are. gangltcfyfrit. 

Obs. E>. £efto may be placed in the first member of 
:*e piirase, in which case je begins the second. Ex. 

A. work of art is the more beau- ©in .5tunfttt)erf tft befto feboner, je 

iiful the more perfect it is. ttotltamenet e* tft. 

(Sulzer.) 
She is not only handsome, but (gte tft nicf)t nut fdjo'n," fenbern aud) 

che is rich also. rctet). 

Not only his idleness, but his in- 9?td)t nur fetne gautbett, fenbern 

discretion also makes him con- aud) fetne tlnbefcbetbenbett mad)t 

temptible. ibn tteracbtltd). 

Though this young lady is not £)bcjfetd) btefe* Jraufem ntcbt fenc 

very handsome, she is never- feben tft, fo tft fie bed) fefyt UebenSs 

theless very amiable. ttnirbtQ. 

However handsome she may be, (So febon fie aud) fein tnag, fc tft fie 

still she is not amiable. beeb ntcbt liebenennirbio,. 

You as well as your sister. ©oroobl <Ste, a(£ Sfyt grauletn 

(Scbnx'fter. 
She is as handsome as she is <gic tft foroobt fd)6'n alS ItebenSwiits 

amiable and rich. btq unb retd). 

They had neither bread, nor meat, <§u fatten n>eber SBrob, nod) S^tfd), 

nor arms, nor money. nod) 2Baffen, nod) ©e(b. 

f he does not pay you for the £Benn er Sbnen bat $)fetb nid)t 6e* 

horse, tell me. gab(t, fo fagen ©te e$ nur. 

Though I should have money, £$enn id) Qieid) ®e(b f)attc, fo ga(>e 

still I would give him none. id) tf)in beeb fctnS. 

Indeed I do not know him yet, 3wav fennc icb ibn nocb nid)t, abet 

but he seems to be docile. er fd>ant mir fcfajam. 

(ebocb, and), felBfl, and nur. Ex. SBentt cmbev3, if otherwise; toeim jebed), if 
however; tram and) or foemt felfcfi, if even; ttenu nur, if only. All these 
compound conjunctions must be considered as two separate words, between 
which the subject and even the case of the verb (when a personal jironoun) 
may be placed. The same observation applies to the combination o: ob witb 
other words. (See Lesson XCI. Obs II Note*.) 



334 

Though I wrote to him, never- 3cf) t)*tk tfjm par gefcbrteben, gfetcf)* 
the] ess he has not answered n;cl)( foot er nut nicbt cjeantroortct* 
me. 

f 3d) ro(infd)te, cc F)d'tte eg md)t a,cs 
I wish he had notdone it. j ^ft^ laf er c * nld)t ^ an 

[ tjcttte. 

Ois. C The conjunction b a $ may be omitted ; 
but then the verb immediately follows its subject. 

I wish you would go with me. \ £* ™JJJ e ' ft 1^?*, |fc 

J 8 f 3d) roottte, tafi @tc nut nur gtn^cn. 

^Scb beffe, 3(jt £rau(etn ©cfywjtet 
n>trb metnen SStubct- fyetra? 
tben. 
3cb boffc, bag Sfyt gMuletji Vetoes 
ftcr mcinen SBrufcer fyetratben 
rotrb. 

{©cfogt, nur batten roebet SBtob, nocfy 
££etn, nod) ®clb. 
©cfcfrt, t>ap n)tr roebet 33rob, noclj 
BBctn, ncd) ®etb batten. 
fSQScUte ©ott, atfe grope £erren tfebtew 
ben ftrteben ! 
2Bollte ©ott, bap atte grope £erre». 
ben ^rtetJcn (iebten ! 



I hope that your sister will 
marry my brother. 



By virtue of. Si t a f t (governs the genitive). 

By virtue of his employment (St mup fraft fetneS 2CmteS fo f)an« 
(his office) he must act thus. beln. 

According to {by virtue of). 93 e r m 6 p, e (governs the gen.). 

According to your order I must 33crmocje 3t)rc^ S3cfef)t$ mup id) fo 
speak *thus. fptecben. 

Instead of. 2Cnftott or ftatt (governs the 

genitive). 

He sent his daughter instead of tfnftott fctncS <3of)ne6 febtcfte er fetne 

his son. Socbter. 

He has adopted him. (gr bat tbn an JUnbeS (Statt c an? 

cjenommen. 
Go thither instead of me. ©tatt metner fjefye 3)u f)tn. 

« The word ©tatt, lieu, place, when thus separated from an, rnrst be con 
ridered as a substantive. 



335 

( 

In consequence of {according to). 2 a u t (governs the genitive). 

According to his letter, he ought Saut fctncS SBrtefeS, mug et ben 
to arrive here on the 18th of 18tcn t>tcfc^ fyict cintrcffcn. 
this month. 

To exclaim. ICuSrufen* (Imperf. rtcf)* 

To make uneasy. SSeunrulricjcn. 

To be uneasy (to fret). SBcunrubiqt (bcfcrgO fctn* 

Why do you fret (are you un- Saturn fint) Sic bcunrur)igt (be* 

easy) 1 fcrqt) ? 

I do not fret (am not uneasy). 3cb bin ntcbt fccferc\t (t>eunrur;tgt). 

Compose yourself! 23 eru r)tgcn <Sie fid) ! 

To alter, to change. Sid) ttcranbcrru 

That man has altered a great deal DtcjVr Sflann hat fid) fcftr ttetanbcrt, 
since I saw him. fettbcm id) tbn nid)t gcfcfjcn Ijafce. 

To alter a coat. (Stncn died dnbetn. 

To recommend. (Smpfefjten*. 

To take leave (to commend one's ©id) empfef)(cn*. 

self). 
Farewell, adieu ! 3d) empfefjfc nrid) 3(l)tten ! 

I have the honour to bid you f 3d) fyabe bie ©tyre, mid) 3fyflM $u 

adieu. empfefyleru 

O65. D. This and teben ©te tt>ofjf, farewell, is the 
general salute of the Germans when leaving each 
other. 

Farewell (adieu) ! £cfren ©tc roeW ! 

To bid one's friends adieu. (Setncn ^reunben CcT6crt>ol)t fagett. 

The recommendation (respects, bie (Smpfefytuncj. 
compliments), 

P ^ 8 Kf com P limentstohim ^ad)en 6le iftm (ir,t) mctne Snu 
Remember me to him (to her). J Pf el ) lun 9' 

To enjoy. (Senicpen* (governs the ace.) 

Enjoy all the pleasures that vir- ©entcpen &t alle $8crcuutgtmgett, 
tue permits. tt>e(cfte bie gugenb crtaiibt. 

The past, tic &krgcmcjenr>ett, bat 23ctgan$cnc; 

the present, bat ©egenwarttge ; 

the presence, bie ©egennxirt. 

In his presence. 3n feittet (Begenroatt. 

The future, ba$ 3ufitnfttge ; 

the loss, bcr QSertuft ; 

the loss if time, tot Seitoerlujt. 

Not to fail. 2Cu$ttd)ten, ntd)t crmangefa. 



336 

Pray, present my compliments 3cb tuttc (Sic, Sbrcm $ranfcm 
(my respects) to your sister. (Scbrocftcr qtiftgft ntctnc (Smpfeb* 

lung $u macben. 

{9S*enn e$ Sbnen gefeitltg tjr, or 
simply gcfcilligft. 
SGfrenn Sic fc gut fetn roottcn or 
simply giittgft. 

I shall not fail. \ f* ^ e * ™« r W**V 

} 3d) rocrbc ntcl)t ermangcbt. 

EXERCISES. 233. 

I have the honour to wish you a good morning*. How do you 
do? — Very well, at your service (3bncn aufytrearten). — And how 
are they all at home (bcftnM man fief) bet Sbncn $u Joaufe) ? — Toler- 
ably well, thank God ((Sort fet £a'nf). My sister was a little indis- 
posed (unpafltcb), but she is better (ttrieber berqefrettt) ; she told me 
to give you her best compliments (fie (d'§t ficb Sbtien bejienS cntpfcb(en). 
— I am glad ((5s tft mtr licb) to hear that she is well. As for you, 
you are health itself;- you cannot look better (<Ste fonnten ntcbt befs 
fcr ausfeben). — I have no time to be ill ; my business would not per- 
mit me. — Please to sit down (QMte&en (Sic ficb ntebeqnlaffen), here 
is a chair. — I will not detain you from your buiness (von fc>cn (5$es 
feb often abhalten*) ; I know that a merchant's time is precious (c^afi 
cinem .ftoufmanne Me 3ett fcftbac tit). — I have nothing pressing (ntcbtg 
<5t(tge£) to do now, my courier is already dispatched (mctne Spoft tffc 
febert abqeferttqt). — I shall not stay (ficb auf batten*) any longer. I 
only wished in passing by (tm s £erbetgebcn), to inquire about (ficb) 
crfunMqen nacb) your health. — You do me much honour. — Tt is very 
fine weather to-day. If you will allow me, I shall have the plea- 
sure of seeing you again this afternoon (narf) Sifcbc), and if you 
have time we will take a little turn together (fo gefjen nrir etn nxntq 
mit etnanftct fpagicrcn). — With the greatest pleasure. In that case I 
shall wait for you. — I will come for you (<Bk abbcten) about (qeqcn) 
seven o'clock. — Adieu then (alfc), till I see you again. — I have the 
honour to bid you adieu. 

234. 

The loss of time is an irreparable (unerfc|(tcb) loss. A single 
minute cannot be recovered (tt)tct>etcr(anqen) for ail the gold in the 
world. — It is then of (son) the greatest importance (Me S&tcbtigfett) 
to employ well the time, which consists only of minutes (au$ $ftt? 
nuten bejteben*) of which we must make good use (Me man rocbt be? 
nnfcen muti)< — We have but the present ; the past is no longer any 
thing, and the future is uncertain. A great many people (®ebt x\cU 
Sttenfcben) ruin themselves (ficb $u (?5runfc ricbten), because they wish 
to indulge themselves too much (ruett fie ftcb afl$u qutlicb tbun rt)ellcn). 
If most (Me metften) men knew how to content themselves (ficb be? 
gnt'qen) with what they have they would be happy, but their gree- 
diness (Me (SJtettgfett) very often makes them unhappy. In order to 



337 

be happy, we must (mup man) forget the past, not trouble ourselves, 
about (jkb 6'cfftmmern urn) the future, and enjoy the present. — I was 
very dejected (trautto,) when my cousin came to me. " What is 
the matter with you 1 " he asked me. " Oh (ad)) ! my deai 
cousin," replied I, "in losing that money, I have lost every 
thing." " Do not fret," said he to me, " for I have found your 
mcney." 

235. 

As soon as Mr. Flausen sees me he begins to speak French, ; n 
order to practise it (urn fid) $u ubcn), and overwhelms me with po- 
liteness (nut 4bb'fttd)6ctten ftbcrha'ufcn), so that I often do not know 
what to answer (n>a£ id) tt)m antiuetten fell). His brothers do the same 
(e£ cbcnfo utacben). — However, they are very good people ; they are 
not only rich and amiable, but they are also generous (a^cftmutf)tq) 
and charitable (tucbltrjattg). They love me sincerely (aufrtcbtu}), 
therefore, I love them also, and consequently (fclylid)) shall nevei 
say anything to their disadvantage (9iad)tbctitg«^ »cn tfjnen). 1 
should love them still more, if they did not make so much ceremony 
(t)ie ilmftance) ; but every one has his faults (t>et $d)Ut), and mine 
is to speak too much of their ceremonies. 

236. 

Have the enemies surrendered (ftcb ergeben*) 1- — They have not 
surrendered, for they did not prefer life to death ; and though they 
had neither bread, nor water, nor arms, nor money, they determined 
to die rather than surrender. — Why are you so sad ?— You do not 
know what makes me uneasy, my dear friend (fern.). — Tell me, 
for I assure you that 1 share (theitcn) your sufferings (t>a$ Setben) as 
well as (ebon fciuebl ats) your pleasures (t>te Ju'uDe).— Though I am 
sure that you partake of (Sbetl an etncr ®>a$c tictjmetv*) my suffer- 
ings 1 cannot, however, tell you now (in btcfcm 2(ugenbltcf) what 
makes me uneasy ; but I will tell you when an opportunity offers 
(qelog/ntltcb ct>er bet ©eleven belt). Let us speak of something else 
now. W^hat do ycu think of the man who spoke to us yesterday 
at the concert ] — He is a man of much understanding (cm febr bers 
jtanbtqcr 93ifahtt), and not at all wrapt up in his merits (oon feinen 
93crtuenftcn ctngenennnen fetn*). But why do you ask me that ] — To 
speak of something. — It is said (Wan fagt) : contentment surpasses 
riches (3ufrtct)enf)eit gefyt itber 3?rid)thnm) ; let us then always be> 
content. Let us share with each other (mit ctnanbet tt)ei(cn) what 
we have, and live all our life-time (unfer qan^es Sebcn) inseparable 
(un^cttrennttcb) friends. You will always be welcome (nntlfemmen) 
at my house, and I hope to be equally so (e<> amh) at yours. — If 1 
saw you happy I should be equally so, and we should be more con- 
tented than the greatest princes, who are not always so. We shall 
Se happy, when we shall be perfectly (ocllfcmmcn) contented with 
what we have ; and if we do our duty as we ought (gcbortg). God 
15 



338 

will take care of the rest (fo ttritt) fcer tube ($5ott fiir t>a$ Uefcttge fen 
gen). The past being no longer any thing, let us not be uneasy 
•ibout the future, and enjoy the present. 

237. 

Behold, ladies, those beautiful (f)crrftd)) flowers, with their 
colours so fresh and bright (nut tfyrcn fo frifefyen unt> glan$ent>cn gfat« 
ben) ; they drink nothing but water. The white lily has the colour 
of innocence (tie ttnfct)ult)) ; the violet indicates gentleness (Mc 
(Scmftmutt)) ; you may (man fann) see it in Louisa's eyes. The 
forget-me-not (£)a$ &krgt£metnntd)t) has the colour of heaven, our 
future (funfttq) dwelling (Me SBorjnung, repeat the genitive), and the 
rose (Me 9?ofe), the queen of flowers, is the emblem (tag @intUntt)) 
of beauty (tie (Scfyonfjeir) and of joy (Die Jteute). You (9ttan) see 
all that personified (oewnrfttcbt) in seeing the beautiful Amelia 
(2Cmaftc). — How beautiful is the fresh verdure (tag juncje frtfcfye 
($tun) ! It is salutary (roorjt tl)un*) to our eyes, and has the colour 
of hope (tie ^offnung), our most faithful (treu, repeat the genitive) 
friend (fern.), who never deserts (tJCrfojjcn*) us, not even in death 
(tm &ote»). — One word more my dear friend. — What is your plea- 
sure ? — I forgot to tell you to present my compliments to your 
nother. Tell her, if you please, that I regret (betauern) not having 
been at home when lately she honoured (beefyten) me with her visit. 
— I thank you for her (in ifjrem 9?anten), I shall not fail. — Farewell 
then. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



HUNDREDTH LESSON.— §ntib*TteU UctlOtl. 

OF THE ADVERB. 

We have hitherto shown by numerous examples for 
the practice of learners, the place which the adverb 
is to occupy in a sentence. Let us now determine the 
place of the adverb by standard rules. 

As the adverb modifies the signification of the verb, 
it should always be near it, particularly the negative 
ttid)t, which, if misplaced, would entirely change the 
meaning of a phrase. Ex. 

I have not the honour to know 3d) f)aU ntc^t tic (Sl)te, (Sic $u 
you. fennen. 

And: 
1 have the honour not to know 3d) babe Me (SI)?e, ©tc tud)t $U 

fennen, 






339 



Rules 



1st, The adverb precedes the adjective, the meaning 
of which it modifies. Ex. din toafyrfyaft guter SJJfatttt, a 
truly good man ; eute ttnrHtd) gute ©etegenfyett, a truly 
good opportunity ; em fet)r arttge^ $mb, a very good 
child. 

2d, It follows the imperative and precedes the infi- 
nitive to which it relates. Ex. SKebett ©te taut, speak 
aloud ; fprecfyen ©te md)t fo fdytteK, do not speak so quick- 
ly; fcfyretben ©te tangfam, fo tt>erben ©te fd)6n fcfyretbett, 
write slowly, and you will write well ; id) bttte ©te, 
X\\d)t «$u fdt)rtett ju fcfyretbett, pray, do not write too fast. 

3d, It follows the simple tense of the verb, but pre- 
cedes it when the sentence depends on a conjunction. 
Ex. 3d) fage eg Sfytten fret fyerau^, I tell you frankly ; 
id) fcerftefye ©te ntd)t, n>etl ©te ju fdjneft fprecfyen, I do 
not understand you, because you speak too fast (Les- 
son LXIX.) ; er tcmmt xxrn jefytt Ul)r 9Korgett3 a Don ba 
jltritcf, he returns from there at ten o'clock in the morn- 
ing (Lesson XL VII.) ; tt>enn ©te fangfatn rebeten, fo tt>itr* 
be id) ©te fcerftefyett, if you spoke slowly I should under- 
stand you. 

4th, In compound tenses it precedes the past parti- 
ciple. Ex. (it fycitte laut gelefen, wemt ©te tfyn offer baju 
angefyalten fyatten, he would have read aloud, if you 
had oftener engaged him to do so ; id) hill fcfyon ba ge* 
ttJefett/ I have already been there (Lesson XLI.) ; id) 
bjabc tf)tt ttorgeflem gefefyett, I saw him the day before 
yesterday. 

5th, It follows the case of the verb, but precedes it 
when it is a partitive, or joined to an indefinite article. 
Ex. 3d) fat) tint geftew, I saw him yesterday ; er ^at e$ 
mix fo eben gegeben, he has just now given it to me ; id) 
ttntt tfyn Sfynett ntorgen fcfyttfett, I will send it to you to- 
morrow (Lesson XXVIII.) ; fyaft 25tt mattcfymat §aKtfe 
d)er au^beffern taflfen ? hast thou sometimes had cravats 
mended ? id) fyabe mancfyntat tt>e(d)e au^beffew (affett, I have 

a Um $e$tt Uf)T 3ttorgen8, is an adverbial phrase, and all sorts of adverbial 
expressions, or compound adverbs, as they may be called, follow the rules ©i 
simple adveibs. 



340 

sometimes had some mended (Lesson XLIV.) ; fyabetl 
®te je einert (Sl'epbanten gefeben ? have you ever seen an 
elephant 1 id) l)dbe m'e emen gefebert, I have never seen 
one ; et l)atte btefen s D?ergett fern ©eft), he had no money 
this morning ; er trdgt gent emen gro£en fynt, he likes to 
'vear a large hat. 

6th, It precedes the case of the verb when governed 
by a preposition. Ex. %d) ttntt tf)tt morgen ju 3f)nen fcfyt* 
(fen, I will send him to you to-morrow (Lesson 
XXVIII.) ; frnb ©te Icmge 'bet memem SSater gebttebett ? 
have you stayed long with my father (Lesson XL VII.) ? 
id) bin erne ©ttmbe Icmg bet tfym gebttebett, I have stayed 
with him a full hour (Lessons XL VII. and XL VIII.) ; 
ttnr fpracfyen fo eben ttott 3t)nen, we have just spoken of 
you ; fomtett ©te tjeute ju mtr fommen ? can you come to 
me to-day? 

PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE nid)U 

Rules. 

1st, It likewise follows the simple tense and the 
case of the verb, when there is one, but precedes the 
infinitive and the past participle. Ex. %d) tterftefye bte* 
fen SDiaittt tticfyt, I do not understand that man ; ber Warm 
f)Ctt ben v^ojfer tttdbt, the man has not the trunk; ber 
juitge 9D?ettfct) (3iingttttg) bat tf)n tttcfyt, the young man has 
it not (Lesson IX.) ; ©te eflfen tttcfyt, you do not eat ; id) 
Ijabe tbn nid)t gebabt, I have not had it (Lesson XLII.) ; 
er mil ntcf)t arbetten, he does not wish to work ; tcf) babe 
ft)tt mcfyt gefefyeit, I have not seen him ; id) f>a6e jTe ntdjt 
gefannt, I have not known them (Lesson XLIV.) ; id) 
\)bxc ©te, aber tterjlefye ©te tttcfyt, I hear, but do not un- 
derstand you (Lesson XL VI.) ; id) Qebe e3 tfym ntcf)i> I 
do not give it to him ; fte Iteben fid) nid)t, they do not 
love each other ; id) fcfymetdtfe mtr ntcfyt, I do not flatter 
myself; fte fefyen etnanber mcf)t a\)x\lid), they do not re- 
semble eaeh other (Lesson LXXXVL). 

Obs. A. When the negative sentence is preceded 
or followed by an affirmative one, nid)t precedes the 
case of the verb, but if the affirmative sentence con- 
tains another nominative with aber, the negative fol- 



341 

lows the general rule. Ex. 3d) babe md)t biefctt, fott* 
bent jenett, I have not the latter, but the former ; er fycti 
btefe£, abcr nid)t jene$, he has the latter, but not the 
former (Lesson XL) ; id) ijabe Sfyren S>nt nid)t, abec ntettl 
SSraber bjat ifytt, it is not I who have your hat, but my 
brother. 

Obs. B. A negative, not depending on the nomina 
tive of the verb, precedes the word the sense of w/iich 
it modifies. Ex. dv arbettetbett gattjen Zclq nid)t, he does 
not work during the whole day ; and man arbettet nidjt 
bett gaitjen Za$, one does not work all day. 

2d, The case of the verb being governed by a pre- 
position, nid)t, like other adverbs (Rule 6 above), pre- 
cedes it. Ex. @r tft ntdf)t ju £aufe, he is not at home 
(Lesson XX VI.) ; trf) fitrcfyte mid) ntcfyt Dor tfym, I do not 
fear him (Lesson LXX.). 

3d, It follows the adverbs of time, but precedes all 
other adverbs, as adverbs of quality, of place, &c 
Ex. 3d) arbcite beute nid)t, I do not work to-day ; ex 
fcbretbt nidjt fcfyim, he does not write well ; er tjt nid)t 
ba, he is not there ; trf) gefye ntcfyt bafyitt, I do not go 
thither. 

4th, It follows the adverb nod). Ex. 2>rf) bin ttorf) 
mrfit ba ge^efen, I have not yet been there ; id) bin nod) 
nidjt bet tbnt gett>efett, I have not yet been at his house 
(Lessor XLL). The following sentences, however, 
must be distinguished from each other : tvotten ©te tt o d) 
\\ t d) t ettva$ eflfett ? will you not eat anything yet ? and 
roolfett gte nid)t nod) ettva$ eflfert ? will you not eat 
anything more? In the latter sentence tttrf)t modifies 
the signification of nod) ettva$. 

Obs. C. The negative precedes the word and), when 
the sentence is both interrogative and negative, but 
follows it when the sentence is simply negative. Ex. 
83m id) nid)t and) ba gett>efert ? have I not also been 
there ? imb id) and) nid)t f nor I either ; uttb er and) nidjt 
nor he either. 

To pretend ,o be ill. \ J §»* ^ *™f, a "^ t>Ctt * 

r } t ©agcn, man fet trant. 



342 



This boy always pretends to be £)tefct £no£>e gtbt fie!) tmmet f(ft 
ill; but when we sit down to fran? au$ ; attetn roenn man gu 
dinner, he is generally well Stfcbe gebt, fo tft er geroobnltdi 
again. nricbet bcrgeftellt (wtcber gefunb). 

To fc jflirf. t Pollen*, 

He is said to have suffered ship- f (gr fell an bet £ufte sen ©tcttten 

wreck near the coast of Sicily. ©cbtffbtucb Qctittcn boben. 

Out of all his property he is said f @* foil »on alien fetnen &abfeltg? 

to have saved nothing but an fctten ntdbtg &U etnen teeren SKeU 

empty portmanteau. fefac! gctettet fjaben 

OF TENSES. 

1st, The present tense is frequently substituted for 
the imperfect, to enliven the narrative and excite at 
tention. This is sometimes done in English, but not 
so often as in German. Ex. 

[magine my horror ! Yesterday 
I went with my child to the 
gate of the town, to see the 
ascent of the balloon. We 
were soon surrounded by the 
crowd, when suddenly I lost 
sight of my child, and it was 
not till an hour afterwards 
that I found it, trampled un- 
der foot and nearly crushed 
to death. 



£)enft (Sucb metnen ©dbtecfen ! id) 
gefee geftern mit metnem Jttnbe 
»cr bat Sfjcr, urn ben friftbatlon 
aufftetgen gu fcfyen, fommc nut 
tt)m tn$ (SJebtanqe, sctftcte e$ att^ 
ben ttucjen, unb ftnfce eS crjt nad) 
enter (Stunbc betnabe getbrticft unb 
gettteten rotcbet (for: id) gtng, 
lam, tetlot and fanb). 



Se|t etflimme tcb ben *Betg; ein 
ttefes £bal ereffnet ftcb metnem 
forfebenben 2fugc ; gttufeben gotten 
©ebtifeben ttcfetf ctn floret $acb/ 
gu metnen $#en roctben £ammet, 
unb butcb ben fetnen £$att> btes 
cben ftcb bte legten (Sttablen bet 
ftnfenben (Scnne. 



I now ascend the mountain ; a 
deep valley unfolds itself to 
my delighted eyes ; a limpid 
stream murmurs among the 
verdant shrubs ; sheep are 
grazing at my feet, and I be- 
hold the last rays of the set- 
ting sun breaking through the 
deep foliage of the distant 
wood. 

2d, The present tense is employed for the future, 
when that time is indicated by another word in the 
sentence. Ex. 

We leave to-morrow for Berlin, £)?otgen tetfen wit nocb SBctltn ; in 
but 1 shall be back within a ocbt Sogcn fomme tcb dhct rotebet, 
week, and I shall then cer- unb bonn befucbe tcb *Dtd) gemtg 
tainly come to see you. (for roetben nrit tetfen, roetbe tdj 

wtebetfommen, &c). 



343 



I shall be back in a moment. 3d) famine gfetd) wicbcr. 

We scale the castle this very 2>iefe£ (2d)(op erftetgen nut in Mefet 

night. Sttadbt. 

I have the keys, we kill £>er <Sd)lufjel bin id) md'cfyttg ; 

rvtr ermerben 
The guards, and deliver thee Die £utcr, retpen *Dtd) an$ Pettier 
from thy prison. jammer. 

(© critter' $ smona (Stuart). 

1st, The imperfect has already been touched upon 
in Lesson LVIL It is the historical tense of the Ger- 
mans. Ex. 



Scipio Africamis was in the ha- 
bit of saying, he never was 
less idle than when he had 
nothing to do ; and in fact his 
busiest time was that which 
he spent in solitude. For it 
was there he meditated over 
his great enterprises and his 
future deeds. In the bosom 
of retirement, he traced plans 
for the happiness of his coun- 
try ; and there, far from the 
intercourse of his fellow-citi- 
zens, he devoted his thoughts 
to the promotion of their wel- 
fare. 



©ctpto, ber 2tfti£aner, fcigtc, et roan 
rue nxntger efyne Sefcbafttauna,, 
aU roerm er nid)t$ §u ttjun bd'tte. 
SBtrfttcl) war er aud) nie mef)t be; 
fdbafugt, alg in bet (Stnfamtett ; 
benn fyter fann cr fetnen rtnd)ttgen 
itnternefnnungen unb ©efcba'ftea 
nacb ; ijkt, ttn (Sdbofie ber £Rur>c, 
ettfwarf cr $)lane $um SGScbl (cities 
23aterlanbeS, unb f)tcr, entfernt 
son bem itretfe fctner Sftttfturgcr, 
untcrfjtett er fid) etn$tg unb atiein 
nut bem ©IMe berfelben. 



2d, Tt is used to narrate an action or event of which 
the narrator was an eye-witness, or to express an ac- 
tion in reference to another which was either simulta- 
neous with, or antecedent to it (Lesson LVIL). 

Yesterday a child was drowned, ©tftcttt ertranf etn &inb, a($ id) auf 

while I was on the bridge. ber 23rucfe fianb. 

He granted my request because (St gcroafytte meine S^ittc, noctf er fte 

he found it just. gcrccbt femb* 

I was playing with my pupil, 3d) fptcfte mit metnem Segttnge, a($ 

when the news was brought man mir bte 9Ead)rid)t fcradjtc. 

to me. 



1st, The perfect tense is used to express an action 
or event as perfectly ended without any reference to 
another circumstance, and when the narrator was not 
an eye-witness of it. Ex. 



344 

Were you yesterday at the con- ©tnfc ^ie qejiern tm £ptuert gem«* 

cert I ruefen ? 

Has the army been beaten 1 3ft fctc tfrmce gcfcbtaqcn rcetben ? 

Has anybody been drowned? 3ft 3^nonb crtnmrVn ? 
Were you ever in Vienna 1 <Stnt> 8tc j[e in iiitcn o/nxfen ? 

2d, The imperfect may even be used when the nar- 
rator has not witnessed the event ; but then he must 
take care to add to his narrative a phrase like . fagte 
er, he said ; fagt Titan, it is said, &c. Ex. 

fhey say, that day before yester- SSerQCJtctn, fa £t m a n, wax etn 
day there was a great feast in £tojk$ gejt in bet <Stat)t. 
the town. 

They say there was a battle on Den fiinf unb gwan^tojJen ^crtgcn 
the 25th of last month. foii&at&t rjript C6, ftc( cine (Scl)tad)i 

t)cr. 

Obs. D. We have already seen (Lesson XXXIV.) 
that we cannot say with the English, I am writing, I 
do write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
present id) fcfjret&e, I write ; nor, I was writing, I did 
write, both of which must be expressed by the only 
imperfect id) fcfyrteb, I wrote (Lesson LVIL). Expres- 
sions such as the following : When you come to learn, 
he is to write, to go, I am to have it, fyc, cannot be 
translated literally in German. In such cases we use 
the future when mere futurity, and the verb fotlett when 
necessity or a wish is to be expressed. Ex. 

When you come to learn French. SBcmn <3te fran^cftfd) lertten rocrtctu 

He is to write. . (Sr nnrfc jcbmben. 

Am I to go thither ? (Sett id) btngerjen ? 

He is to go thither. (5r fell f)tnqef)cn. 

Am I to have this book? ©ell id) fctefeS £tod) fja&m? 

Am I to give you a pen] (Sell id) 3hnen ctrtc Jcbe'r geben ? 

I was to speak for them all. 3d) fcllte fur 2(lle fpred)cn. 

He was to arrive on the 20th. @t fcllte fort ^vangtgftcn attfommett 

Obs. E. At the end of a phrase we sometimes omit 
the auxiliary of the perfect and pluperfect tenses, when 
the phrase that follows it begins with another auxi- 
liary. Ex. 



Though 1 have never been in 
Paris, I am nevertheless ac- 
quainted with all that is 
going on there* 



345 

f £>b id) g(ctc3f> tile $u g)art$ geroefen 
bin, bin id) t)od> son atlem un* 
tetricfytet, n;a$ bafelbft ©orgeat ; 
or, 
£>b id) gktcb ntcmate $u span* geroes 
fen, fo bin id) ted) t>on allem un? 
tetticbtet, nxiS bafelbft t>orgcf)t. 
AlS he did not answer me, I wrote* Da cr nut nid)t gecintroertet (bat), 
to him no more. babe id) tfjm nid)t mef)t gejcfyriez 

ben. 
The enemy having been beaten, 9?ad)bem bet $etnb gefebfagen root* 
it is to be hoped that the war t)cn Oft), tft ju fyeffen, bap bet 
will be at an end. ittteg geenbigt fetn tmeb. 

EXERCISES. 238. 

Have you seen )'our niece? — Yes, she is a very §,Dod girl who 
vrites well and speaks German still better : therefore she is hon- 
oured and loved by every one. — And her brother, what is he doing? 
— Do not speak to me of him, he is a naughty (bb'fe) boy, who 
writes always badly and speaks German still worse : he is there- 
fore loved by nobody. He is very fond of dainties (ber gute Stiffen) ; 
but he does not like books. Sometimes he goes to bed at broad 
day-light (bei bellem Sage), and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit 
down to dinner, he is generally better again. He is to study 
physic (bte 2(qnetfunft) ; but he has not the slightest inclination for 
it (gar fetne 2 lift ba$u). — He is almost always talking of his dogs 
which he loves passionately (leibenfd)aft(tcb). — His father is ex- 
tremely (cutfJetetbenfttcb) sorry for it. The young simpleton (ret 
SMcDftnmgc) said lately to his sister: " I shall enlist (Selbat met* 
ben* ober fid) annxtben (ajfen*) as soon as peace is proclaimed (of? 
fentlicl) befonnt macben obet publiciren). 

•239. 

My dear father and my dear mother dined yesterday with some 
friends at (in dat.) the (hotel) King of Spain (r>en ©panktt). — Why 
do you always speak French and never German 1 — Because I am too 
bashful. — You are joking; is a Frenchman ever bashful 1 — I have 
(a) keen appetite : give me something good to eat. — Have you any 
money 1 — No, sir. — Then I have nothing to eat for you. — Will you 
not let me have some on credit 1 I pledge (tterpfemben) my honour. 
— That is too little. — W^hat, sir ! 

My dear friend, lend mt a ducat (bet JDucat, gen. en). — Here are 
two instead of one. — How much I am obliged to you ! — t am al- 
ways glad when I see you, and I find my happiness in yours. — Is 
this house to be sold 1 — Do you wish to buy it? — Why not? — Why 
does your sister not speak 1 — She would speak if she were not al- 
ways so absent (^erftteut). — I like pretty anecdotes (Me 2Cnecbcte) ; 
tfiey season (rouqen) conversation (bte ttnterfycittung) and amuse (be* 
15* 



346 



Cufttgen) every body. — Pray, relate me seme. Look, if you pleases 
at page 389 of the book (in t>em 5Uicf)e) which I lent you, and (fo) 
you will find some. — To-morrow I shall set out for Hanau ; but in 
a fortnight (in meqebn Sagcn) I shall be back again, and then 1 
shal] come to see you and your family. — Where is your sister at 
present ? — She is in Berlin, and my brother is in Leipzic. — This 
little woman is said to be going to marry the counseller N., your 
friend; is it true"? — I have not heard of it. — What news is there 
of our great army 1 — It is said to be lying (ftefyen*) between the 
Rhine and the Weser. All that the courier told me seeming very 
probable (n)afirfd)etn(id)), I went home immediately, wrote some 
letters, and departed for Paris. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



HUNDRED AND FIRST LESSON.— tyunbzxt unb CXBU 

&ution. 



To begin to laugh, to weep, to 
cry, &c. 

To pledge. 
To pawn. 

To destroy by fire and sword. 

To look out of the window. 

I do not know whether this so- 
ciety will admit me. 

After ten o'clock you will not 
find me at home. 

The weather is clearing up. 

My hand is asleep. 

To smell of garlick. 

To smell of wine. 

The sermon is over. 

That is the question. 

He has nearly fallen. 

I did not find a living soul 



2Cnfangen $u tacfyen, $u roetnen, $u 

fcfyreien u. f. n>. 
SScrpfd'nben. 
93ctfe|cn. 
£fttt Setter unfc ©c&wert wfyecren* 
2ht$ tern Jenfter fef)en*. 
3d) twig md)t, c6 biefe ®efellfdf)aft 

mid) rc>irt> r)aben rcollcn. 
f $lad) acr)n 1% treffen <Ste mid) 

nid)t mebr $u £aufe. 
£*$ Better ^ettert ft* attf. 
f gtteinc £anb tft etngefefyfofen. 
$lad) JtnoWaud) riedjen*. 
9latf) Bctn rtecrjen*. 
2)te g^rebtgt ift au$. 
(SS tft tic g'rage (e$ femmt barauf 

an), 
f (Sr ware Oetnafye gefallen. 
3d) fyabe fretnc lebenbtge ©ecle ange* 

troffen. 



To meet with. 2Cntreffen* (Part, past, gettof* 

fen* Imperf. traf). 

You have the wrong key. <Stc baften ben unredyten (Sd)liiffc(. 

He is now dn the road. ($r ift je|t auf t)cm Bege. 

Give me a clean plate, if you ©cben ©te mtr gcfalligft etnen ret* 
please. nen Seller. 



/ 



347 

YATtlOUS WAYS OF TRANSLATING THE VERB, TO PUT. 

To put one's hand into one's 3n bte Safcfye a, ret fen*. 

pocket. 

To put one's son to school. ©ctnen (Scfyn in tie <Sd)u(e 1 1) u n* 

(5 r i n a, e n *)♦ 

To put one out to prenticeship 3emanben in bie 2el)te t r) u n *. 

(to bind one prentice). 

To put to account. 3tt Sfced&nung § t c f) e n *• 

To put tonight. 3n tic g(ud)t jap, en (ober fd)ia? 

9 e n *)• 
To put one's hat on. ©eincn Jput a u f f e § c tu 

To put an end. ©in @nbe m a cl) e n. 

VARIOUS WAYS OF TRANSLATING THE VERB, TO SET. 

To set pen on paper (to take the Die gefcer etgtetf^tt*, 

pen in hand). 
To ,?e* sail. ilntct <Segc( g e f) e n * (a & f e $ e ( n> 

To set in order (to regulate, 3n Dt^nung b r i n g c n *♦ 

settle). 
To set something on fire. (StroctS a n $ ii n b e tt (a n ft e tf e n)« 

To set to work. ©id) an bte 2(rbeit m a d) e n. 

IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS DEPENDING 

1st, On the use or omission of an article, 

I have read Schiller. 3d) fjafce ben (Sd)UIet gelcfen* 

He broke his neck. (St fyat ben £a(5 gebtecben. 

Nature is the best instructress. £) i e 9?atut ift bie befte 2erjtetitttt. 

Man is mortal. £>et SKenfd) tft ftetb(id). 

Human life is short. 2) a $ menfd)ttdf)e £e&en ift !uq. 

Vice plunges its followers into £>a£ Softer ftur$t feine 2Cnf) anger 

perdition. in6 QSecbetben. 

Eloquence is powerful. 2) i e SBcrebtfamfett ift madjttg. 

Poetry is enchanting, £> i e £nd)thmft ift fce$aubetnb. 

Government. • • g) i e SRegtetung, 

History teaches us experience. JDte ($5i'|d)td)te tefitt un$ (Stfafytung 

Saint Paul. 3) c r tjctlige $)au(u$. 

Most of his contemporaries. £) i e nunjten feiner 3eitgenoffen. 

In town. 3n b e r ©tabt. 

To go to church. 3n b i e JUtcfye geijen*. 

TVb East Indies. £)ftinbten. 

Tki West Indies. SBcftinbieiu 

Before the conclusion of the dra- SSor (Snbigung beS <Scr)aufpte(e& 

ma. 

2d, On the use of a pronoun. 

I take the liberty of writing to 3d) ncfjme tni-t tic gtetfjeit, ai 
you. <gte gu fdr>retbcn. 



348 



How goes it? How do you do? 

Very well. 

I have bought a hat. 

Let us go on a party of pleasure. 

He is quite at home. 
He is very conceited. 
I have it in my hands. 
I have it before my eyes. 
I consent to it, (willingly or with 
pleasure). 



SOSte gefjt'S 3 & n e n ? 

(56 gctjt nut fefjr wor>(. 

3d) babe m t r etn en £>ut cjelraufk 

SBtr roctlen u n $ (jeutc etn &$ercm& 

gen »erfci)ciffcn. 
(Sr macbt ft d> *■■$ bequem. . 
<5t bitbet fi d) met etn. 
3d) babe e£ in £anben. 
3d) babe' e$ »or ^ugert* 
3d) bin e 6 gufricben. 



3d, On the use of a verb. 



Who has saii mass to-day 1 
I am wiM yow in a moment. 
We shall have a storm. 

How & that % 

I do not scruple to do it. 

What do you think of it? 
They will not dissuade me from 

it. 
To buy a lottery ticket. 
To be born* 
To bring forth. 
To cfoi^ (to ca/Z in question). 
To lay the cloth. 
To set down (to compose). 



2&er bat bcute btc sDZcffe getefen! 

3cb f o m m e gtetcb. 

2Bir nxrben etn ©emitter fe c £ o m * 

m e n. 
SKte g e b t ba$ $u ? 
3d) traqe fein S3ebenr!en, 

e$ $u tbun. 
££a$ batten ©te baron ? 
3d) tafTe mir tag ntdjt auStcben* 

3n btc gotten* f c % e n. 
3ur 2Mt £ c ni m e n * ? 
3ur 83Mt b r t n g e n *• 
3n Siuetfet % x e b e n;*. 
£)en Stfcb becfen. 
(Scbriftltcf) auffegen. 



4th, On the use of a preposition. 



2£tc tfebt eg u m 3bre ©cfunb&eit * 
2C n « Canb treten*. 
(56 ftebt itbel m i t tbnt aug. 
3cb nxtte u in fern'S ^r)nter* 



How is your health ? 

To land, to go ashore. 

His affairs are in a bad state 

I bet six crowns. 

I forgive you. 3d) batte C6 Sbncri ; it cuit* 

To esteem one's self happy. Sid) fur glucflicb batten. 

To make an enemy of some one. (2>td) 3emant>en ^um getnbe ntac&ctk 

I fear to be burdensome to you. 3d) furd)tc Sbnen $ut £aft $u fallen 



OBSERVE ALSO THE FOLLOWING IDIOMS. 



To prescribe milk-diet. 
To copy fair. 

Of one's own accord. 
We shall not live to see it. 
U is all over with me. 



© t c Sfltfcbfur sererbnen. 

3n* g?dne febreiben* (rein obfebrcu 

ben*). 
?tu« fret en <2'riicfvn. 
35>tr ruerben e£ went ertebenv 
(5$ tft urn mid) o,efd)ebetu 



349 

My head turns round (is giddy). (SS n/trb mtr fcfttMttbttcf). 

I faint. Set) befomme cine Dr)nmad)t 

1 thought you were a German by 3d) fytelt @tc fur etnen gefrovnen 

birth. £)eut|cben. 

To live on bad terms with some ttneintg mit Semanbem te&en. 

one. 
To follow an unprofitable trade. (Stdb mit fcrebtofen jtunften a&gc&cn* 
This seems reasonable. £)a$ (apt fid) tjb'ten (fcfyetnt ttetnunf* 

To lose one's reputation. ^etnen guten Sftamcn serlieren*. 

j^y means o/. S)littc'tft or ocrmtttetft (go- 

vern the genitive). 

He has succeeded by means of SSermtttetji S^rc^ 93ciftcmbc$ tft c$ 

your assistance. tbm gelungcn. 

We reached the shore by means £Btr fomen mittelft (ttermtttetft) ctneS . 

of a boat. Jlat)nc6 cms Ufet. 

Towards (to meet). ©ntgegen (governs the dative)* 
We went to meet his father. 2Btt gtngen fetnem SSatcr entgegen 

Against (in opposition to). 3 u w i b c t. 
Never act against the laws. £anb(e n * e ^ m ®*f c i cn surctbet. 

Opposite. dlege-nfiber. 

My house is opposite his. sjEetn #au$ ftefyt bem fehugen gegett* 

liber. 

O&s. The prepositions entgegen, juttnber, and gegen* 
fiber are always placed after the case which they 
govern. 

Next to (after). £tf a cl) (t (governs the dative). 

Next to you I like him jsst. £)?dd)jt Sftneq ifi ex mtr bcr Ctebfie. 

Together with (besides, inclu- sflcfcft, fammt (govern the dative). 

ding). 
He lost the ducat together with (St setter ben IDufeatgq fammt ben 

the crowns, sold the garden Sbalern, serfaufte ben ©arten 

including the house. nebjl t>em £auj"e. 

Lf I were now to question you as 2Bcrm id) @ic jefct fraqtc, trie tcb in 
I used to do at the beginning unfern etiten Oectteium $u tbun 
of our lessons, what would pjftgtc (rote id) anfangS m tbun 
you answer? Pflegtc), mas nnirben <Sie ant* 

tvorten ? 



350 

We found these questions at first £Btt fcmben anfnngS btefe Srctgen 
rather ridiculous, but full of etrcas (ad)Cr(id) ; afletn ttoll 23et5 
confidence in your method, we troucn cutf Sb l ? Cebtarr, beants 
answered as well as the small roorteten rtur btffdbsri, fo gut c$ 
quantity of words and rules we uns bet Heine SSorratb son 2£ots 
then possessed allowed us. tern unb JHecjcln (^prtnctpten), ben 

wxv tamatt fatten, geftattcte (et* 
laubte). 

We were not long- in finding out ££it rjabcn baft) gemerft, bcif btc 
that those questions were cal- -graven barauf berecbnet rcaren, 
culated to ground us in the un6 buret) tic rotberfprecbenben 
rules, and to exercise us in 2Cnrti>orten, bie rott eje^rouncjett 
conversation, by the contradic- roaten, barauf $u $eben, bie *prtn; 
tory answers we were obliged ctpten (SKcgeln) ein^ufebcirfen unb 
to make. un$ in bet Untcrfjoftung $u iiben. 

We can now almost keep up a 3-egt Fonnen it>tr un£ betnafye t»cll= 
conversation in German. femmen auf beutfd) (im £)eutfd)en) 

unterbalten. 

This phrase does not seem to us Dtefer ©a| fcfyetnt un6 md)t (ogtfd) 
logically correct. ttcbttQ. 

We should be ungrateful if we £Btr rcaren unbanfbat, roenn voiv 
allowed such an opportunity etne fo ferjene (Sklegcnbett t>orbeu 
to escape without expressing ger)cn ticpen, obne Sbnen unferc 
our liveliest gratitude to you. lebfyaftejie Danfbarfett $u bejetgen. 

in all cases, at all events. 2Cuf jeben £citt. 

The native, ber (Stnqeborne ; 

the insurmountable difficulty, bie unuberro'tnbltcbe (^totcrtgfett ; 

this energetic language, btefe energtfebe (tYaftcolle) <&yxad)£ ; 

the acknowledgment, bie (Srfennt(tcl)feit ; a 

tls.B gratitude, the acknowledg- bie 2)cmfbat6eit 
ment, 

exercises. 240. 

Will you drink a cup of coffee 1 — I thank you, 1 do not like 
coffee. — Then you will drink a glass of wine 1 — I have just drunk 
some. — Let us take a walk. — Willingly ; but where shall we go 
to 1 — Come with me into my aunt's garden ; we shall there find a 
very agreeable society. — I believe it (*Das glaube id) gcrn) ; but the 
question is whether this agreeable society will admit me. — You 
are welcome every where. — What ails you, my friend ? — How do 
you like (2Bte fd)tne<ft Sbnen) that wine] — I like it very well (bett* 
ltd)) ; but I have drunk enough (^ut ©enucje obcr genug) of it. — 
Drink once more. — No, too much is unwholesome (uncjefunb) ; I 
know my constitution (bie ^atur). — Do not fall. — What is the mat- 
ter with you ? — I do not know ; but my head is giddy ; I think I 
am fainting. — I think so also, for you look almost like a dead per- 
son. — What countryman are you 1 — I am a Frenchman. — You 

a (§rfenntltd)fett is derived from erfennett, to acknowledge. Qanlhaxhit 
expresses both gratitude an 1 acknowledgment. 



351 

speak German so well that I took you for a German by b*rth. — Yofi 
are jesting. — Pardon me, I do not jest at all. — How long have you 
been in Germany ] — A few days. — In earnest] — You doubt it per- 
haps, because I speak German ; I knew it before I came to Ger- 
many. — How did you manage to learn it so well 1 — I did like the 
prudent starling (bet ©tcicir). 

Tell me, why yjMa are always on bad terms with your wife (Me 
gxau) 1 and whyjpo you engage in unprofitable trades'? — It costs 
so much trouble Jfee fefU't fc Mil 3flfir)c) to get an employment (MS 
man cut — befcmmt). — And you have a good one and neglect it (e4 
btntan|"c£en ctcr rcrnacbtafftqcn) . Do you not think of the future? 
—Now allow me to speak also (3c£t faffcn ®tc mtcb cud) rtfccn). 
All you have just said seems reasonable, but it is not my fault (g§ 
t)l ntcbt metric ^d)u(b), if I have lost my reputation ; it is that of my 
wife (metric grciu tji (gcbult> bciran) ; she has sold my finest clothes, 
my rings, and my gold watch. I am full of debts (roll ^dbulfcen 
fctn*), and I do not know what to do (ma* id) anfangcn cfccr tbun fell). 
— I will not excuse (cntfcbutttgen) your wife ; but I know that you 
nave also contributed (bettraqen*) to your ruin (fccis ^crfretben). 
Women are generally good when they are left so. 

241. DIALOGUE. 

The master. If I were now to ask you such questions as 1 did 
at the beginning of our lessons, (viz.) Have you the hat which 
my brother has 1 am I hungry ] has he the tree of my brother's 
garden ] &c. what would you answer] 

The pupils. We are obliged (Qqnmngen) to confess that we 
found these questions at first rather ridiculous ; but full of confi- 
dence in your method, we answered as well as the small quantity 
of words and rules we then possessed allowed us. We were in 
fact not long in finding out that these questions were calculated to 
ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in conversation, by the 
contradictory answers we were obliged to make. But now that we 
can almost keep up a conversation in the energetic language which 
you teach us, we should answer : It is impossible that we should 
have the same hat which your brother has, for two persons canno* 
have one and the same thing. To (2Cuf with accus.) the second 
question we should answer, that is impossible for us to know 
whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we should say : 
that there is more than one tree in a garden, and in telling us that 
he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does not seem to us logi- 
cally correct. At all events we should be ungrateful if we allowed 
such an opportunity to escape, without expressing our liveliest 
gratitude to you for the trouble you have taken in arranging those 
wise combinations (Huge SBcge etnfcWcigcn* obct (Sombtnctttonen ma- 
d)en), to ground us almost imperceptibly (bctnabc unmcrflicb) in the 
rules, and exercise us in the conversation of a language which, 
taught in any other way, presents (bartueten*) to foreigners, and 
even to natives, almost insurmountable difficulties. (See end of 
Lesson XXXIV.) 



352 

HUNDRED AND SECOND LESSON. — tyutibtxt ttttb 
}tt)dte Section. 

To avoid death, with which he Urn bcm Sebe $u enrcjeben, t>cr tbm 
was threatened, he took to beserjianb (mount er bebrebct 
flight. mat), nabm (jpriff) cr t>ie glud)t. 

I warrant you (I answer for it), f 3d) frebe Sbneti bafur. 

So goes the world. f So gebt el in bet 5£e(t. 

But must one not be a fool to ZCbet mtifite man ntcbt etn 9?ctrr fetn, 
remain in a place bombarded menn man an cittern son llngarn 
by Hungarians ? bombatbtttcn Drtc btetben molite ? 

The deuce take the Hungarians f £)ag tie llna/itn, metcbe Jewtj 
who give no quarter ! ©nabc Cjcbcn (nxkbe gar ntdjt 

fefyonen), brim £cnt"et ma'ten ! 

Will you be my guest % Gotten <Ste metn ©aft fcin ? 

Will you dine with me 1 SBellen <Ste nut mir effen ? 

rScmanbcn $u ©aft bitten*. 
To invite some one to dinner. < 3emant>en itxnx SQUttageffen ctnlas. 

C ben*. 
I have ordered your favourite f 3d) babe 3brc Cetbfpeife jubcrcttcn 

dish. taffen. 

There is nothing like a good (§g gebt nid>tS iiOcv ctn gutc$ ©tftdf 
piece of roast meat. SSrotcn. 

The roast meat, ber SBtaten, ba$ ©ebratene ; 

the guilty, ber Scbulbtge ; 

the innocent, ber llnfcbulbtge ; 

a good (jovial) companion, ctn lufttger ^rubet ; 
the husband, ber SJtonn ((Sbemann), 

i (Stnen (Sfet an etner Sadbe hatKn* 

To be disgusted with a thing. < (Stner ,<Sad)C (genitive) uberOtii|f*§ 

( fetn*. 

Who hazards gains. > f ^r i fct) gcroagt tjt f)afb gerr-ennen. 

Nothing venture nothing have. J £3ptid)l*;c$.) 

To strike (in speaking of light- f (Sinfdbiagcn* 
ning). 

The lightning has struck. f (5$ K) Q r etngefebfaqen. 

The lightning struck the ship. f £)et 2Mt§ fcblug in$ Scbtff 

WTiile my brother was on the 2((5 metn s -8ruber auf bet offenct* 
open sea a violent storm rose^ (See (cbet auf bem b^ben $Weere) 
unexpectedly; the lightning* rear, ctbob fid) (!am unt>ctmutbet) 
struck the ship which it set etn Fjcfttgct (Sturm ; ber ©tig 
on fire, and the whole crew febtug ins ©duff/ bas er anjtinbc* 
jumped into the sea to save te, unb ba$ fjan^e ©cbtfi"6Do(f 
themselves by swimming. fptan^ (ftur^tc fid)) tn$ mtvc, urn 

fid) nut Scbmtmmen $u tetten. 



353 

He was struck with fright, (St nmrbe ton (Scfcrecfen kfdtcfi 

. when he saw that the fire (erfefyraf beftig), ati er for), t)ag 

was gaining on all sides. frci* geucr auf alien ©cttcn uni 

fid) grtff. 

He did not know what to do. f C£r nni&tc nid)t, tt>C$u ct fid) ent* 

fd)lte£en [elite. 

tT - C (5t mecbte nacbfinnen, rote er roclUe. 

He refleciea m yam. | ^ fann — ^ m ^ 

In vain. SSergeblicb, fcrgeben*, umfenjV 

To reflect (to hesitate). (Sid) beftnnen* (Part, past, frefens 

ncn). 
He hesitated no longer. f (§r frefann ftcf> nid)t tanget* 

I have not heard of him yet. 3d) fyciU ned) fetnc Sfacrjricrjt r>en 

ihm erbalten. 
My friend who was present told SCRetn grcunb, roelcber ^nqccjcn roar, 
me all this. tat mir alleg b.cfeS er$a()it. 

What w T ould have hecome oH 5£te rocire eg nur erganqen. ? 
me? I £BaS roare au£ nut 9ewcrb.cn ? 



A FEW MORE IDIOMS. 

It is a fortnight (a week) since SSteqebn (acbt) Sage (ang fctn id) 

I was out. ntcbt auggeqangen. 

Will you not go out to-day ? ©te roerben ted) fycutc auSgeben ? 
I would not importune you. Scb rottf 3().ncn ntd)t befd)rvet(id) 

fallen. 
He has nothing to live upon. (Sr bat mcbtS ^u (eben. 
I board and lodge him. 3d) gebe it)m freten Stfd) unt) £8cb' 

nung. 
The mystery will be discovered. £He <Sad)e tx>trt> fd>on an ten Sag 

femmen. 
They are going to lay the cloth, sjfton'rmrb. ftafb ben Sifd) becfen. 
He lives high (feasts, eats, and (5r ijjt unt) trinft gut, 

drinks well). 
Have you done 1 ©tnb ©tc ferttg ? 

That is his business. £)a mag er jufeben. 

To do one's best. @etn 2feiiS«rfte| trjun*. 

He has assisted me. (5r ift mir $ur £>anb gegangen. 

We must not be too particular. £L% nuiffen eg fo genau nid)t ner)s 

men. 
He is not to be blamed for not (5$ if! ihm ntcbt 311 fcrbenfen, ba|5 er 

doing it. e£ nicbt tbut. 

The book is out of print ; it was £)a* 5<ucb ift r>ergri*fcn ; eg war ftei 

publised by N. 9?. oerlegr. 

Will you please to take a plain SBcllen ©ie nut eincm etnfacben 

supper with us ? 2(benbeffen Oct ung furlicb (cber 

Wtltcb) nefymen ? 



354 

The general has been defeated ®ct geltfyetr if! oufS $oupt gefd)ta* 
and the army routed. gen unt tie 2(rmec ufcet ten £au* 

fen gercetfen tDOttcn. 

The angel, tet <5ngel ; 

the masterpiece, tog SD'Jetftcrftftcf ; 

her physiognomy, iftrc (Sn'ftcbtstutfcung ; 

the expression. ter 2(ustrucf ; 

her shape, tt)re ©cftott ; 

the action, tie £nntlung » 

the look, tet llnhiid ; 

the contentment, tie 3ufrtetenr)eit ; 

the respect, tie (£1)rfurd)t ; 

the admiration, tie SBmmnfcenmg; 

the charm, the grace, tie tfnnmtb ; 
the demeanour, the manners, tog SBenefymen ; 

thin (slender), fd)fattf; 

fascinating (engaging), einnefiment ; 

ravish ingly, gum (SntgMen ; 

uncommonly well, gong t)Ortreff(td) ; 

perfectly well, DoUfommen. 
Her look inspires respect and 3t)r ftnbticf pofit (Sf)rfutd)t unt S3e- 
admiration. rcuntctung em. 

Allow me, my lady, to introduce (Srfaufcen ©te, gnottge grou, top 
to you Mr. G., an old friend id) Sftnen £etrn Doit ©. ol$ etnen 
of our family. often $teunt metncS £oufeS t>ot* 

ftette. 

1 am delighted to become ae- 3d) freue mid) ferjt, mein Jg>cvr, Sfjrc 
quainted with you. 23efctnntfd)aft $u mad)en. 

I shall do all in my power tc 3d) nxrte oileS £Rb'gltd)e tfyun, urn 
deserve your good opinion. mid) Sfifcr ©eroogcnfyett rotittig 

^u mod)cn. 

Allow me, ladies, to introduce to (Stloufcen @U/ metne ©omen, tog 
you Mr. B., whose brother has id) Sfinen £ertn t)cn 23. tJodtcfle, 
rendered such eminent ser- teffen SBrutet Sftrem SBettet |b 
vices to your cousin. grope Dienfte getetftet fiat. 

How happy we are to see you at 2&te fefjt ftnt n>tr crfteut, ®tc bet 
our house ! unS gu fefyen ! 

exercises. 242. 

Why do you hide yourself? — I am obliged to hide myself, for it 
is all over with me if my father hears that I have taken to flight ; but 
there was no other means (fcin entered Sffitttet tibttg oter nicbt onterS 
tncgltd) fetn*) to avoid death, with which I was threatened. — You 
have been very wrong in leaving (ttettaffen*) your regiment, and 
your father will be very angry (fcfir bofe cter gernig fetn*) when he 
hears of it, I warrant you. — But must one not be a foo- to remain 
in a place bombarded by Hungarians ] — The deuce take the Hun- 
garians, who give no quarter ! — They have beaten and robbed (autf* 
fctuntern) me, and (never) in my life have I done them any harm. • 



355 

So goes the world, the innocent very often suffer for the guilty.-* 
Did you know Mr. Zweifel 1 — I did know him, for he often worked 
for our house. — One of my friends has just told me that he has 
drowned himself, and that his wife has blown oat her brains with 
a pistol (Lesson XCV.). — I can hardly believe it; for the man 
whom you are speaking- of was always a jovial companion, and 
good companions do not drown themselves. — His wife is even said 
to have written on the table before she killed herself: " Who haz- 
ards gains ; I have nothing more to lose, having lost my good hus- 
band. I am disgusted with this world, where there is nothing 
constant (bcpanttg) except (ci(S) inconstancy (t>tc Unbeftant>tcj!cit)." 

243. 

Will you be my guest 1 ? — I thank you ; a friend of mine has in- 
vited me to dinner : he has ordered my favourite dish. — W^hat dish 
is it i — It is milk- food. — As for me (J&a$ micf) anbc(cmgt), I do not 
like milk-food : there is nothing like a good piece of roast beef or 
veal (Sfetnbtfs efcer ilalbsbraton). — What has become of your young- 
est brother 1 — He has suffered shipwreck in going to America.— 
You must give me an account of that ((Stolen <Ste mic t)od)t)ci$). — 
Very willingly. Being on the open sea, a great storm arose. The 
lightning struck the ship and set it on fire. The crew jumped into 
the sea to save themselves by swimming. My brother knew not 
what to do, having never learnt to swim. He reflected in vain; 
he found no means to save his life. He was struck with fright 
when he saw that the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated 
no longer, and jumped into the sea. — Well (9?un), what has be- 
come of him ] — I do not know, having not heard of him yet. — But 
who told you all that 1 — My nephew, who was there, and who saved 
himself. — As you are talking of your nephew (£)a (gie cjcratc ocrt 
3f)tem 9fjeffen fprccfym), where is he at present"? — He is in Italy. — 
Is it long since you heard from him 1 — I have received a letter from 
him to-day. — W T hat does he write to you 1 ? — He writes to me that 
he is going to marry a young woman who brings ($ubttngen*) him 
a hundred thousand crowns. — Is she handsome?— Handsome as 
an angel ; she is a master-piece of nature. Her physiognomy is 
mild and full of expression ; her eyes are the finest in (t)0n) the 
world, and her mouth is charming (allerltebft). She is neither too 
tall nor too short : her shape is slender; all her actions are full of 
grace, and her manners very engaging. Her look inspires respect 
and admiration. She has also a great deal of wit (bcr 33erftcmt)) ; 
she speaks several languages, dances uncommonly well, and sings 
ravishingly. My nephew finds in her but one defect (fcer -JcfjU't). — 
And what is that defect] — She is affected (mad)t 2(n[ptud)e). — There 
is nothing perfect in the world. How happy you are ( s JBie gtfidftid) 
fint) ©it) ! you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a 
fine house, and all you wish (/or). — Not all, my friend. —-What do 
you desire more ] — Contentment ; for you know that he only is 
happy who is contented. (See end of Lesson XXXIV.) 



356 



HUNDRED AND THIRD LESSON. — Qtmhttt VMd 
britte Section. 

GENERAL REMARKS ON GERMAN CONSTRUCTION. 

The fundamental principle of German Construction 
is this : the word which, after the subject, expresses 
the principal idea, is always placed after those words 
which only express accessory ideas. It has the advan- 
tage of attracting and of keeping up and increasing 
the attention to the end of the phrase. 

The word which least defines the subject is placed 
at the beginning of the sentence, then come those 
words which define it in a higher degree, so that the 
word which most determines the meaning of the 
phrase is at the end. 

According to this we place the words in the follow- 
ing order: 

1st, The adverb of negation mcfyt, when it relates 
to the verb of the subject. Ex. Setn SSater beanttt>ortet 

1 
meinen S3rtef rttcfyt, his father does not answer my letter. 

2d, The other adverbs relating to the verb of the 

1 2 
subject. Ex. ©te fcfyretben Sfyren SSrtef tticfyt gut, you do 
not write your letter well. 

3d, The preposition with the case it governs, or in 
its stead the adverbs of place : ba y t)ter, and their com- 
pounds : bafyer, bafyttt, as well as the demonstrative ad 
verbs compounded of ba and fyier, as: bamit, bat>0tt, 

1 
fyterttott, barauf, bariiber, &c. Ex. dv antttwtete md)t 

2 3 
fyofltd) auf tnemen 33rtef, he did not answer my letter 

1 2 3 

politely. @r atttttwtete mcfyt fcfynetl barauf, he did not 
answer it quickly. 

Obs. When the verb of the subject has several ca- 
ses with their prepositions, that which defines it the 
most exactly follows all the others, the determination 
of time always preceding that of place. Ex. & tvat 



357 

ftegen femer Unfcfyulb nttt fropdjem ©ejTcfyte fcor ba3 ©ertcfyi 
(which defines most exactly), on account of his inno- 
cence he appeared before his judges with a joyful 
countenance. £er ©efitfytfofe blieb an biefem £age (time), 
auf *ber fd}6njl:en glur (place), bet alter Scfyonfyett ber retgen* 
ben 9tatur (place) bennorf) ofyne atfe (Smpftnbung (which de- 
fines most exactly), the insensible man, remained on 
that day without the least emotion, though in the most 
beautiful field and surrounded by all the beauty of 
charming nature. 1 

4th, The predicate of the subject. Ex. 3cf) bin Utcfyt 

2 3 4 

tmnter mit feuter Sfntttort jufneben, I am not always 
satisfied with his answer. 

5th, The separable particles of compound verbs, as 
well as all those words which are considered as separ- 
able particles, inasmuch as they complete the sense of 
the verb (Obs. A, Lesson LXVIL), as: au£tt)enbtg 
(enten, to learn by heart; in 2Id)t nebnten*, to take 
care ; ju ^fflittag effen*, to dine, &c. Ex. SEarum gur 

12 3 5 

er tttdht efter nut Sfyuen au$ ? why did he not go out wit! 
you oftener 1 

6th, The verb in the infinitive. Ex. (Sr fatttt Sfynett 
12 2 3 6 

ntrf)t tmnter fcfyteft anf 2#ren SSrtef antnwrten, he cannot 
always answer your letter quickly. 

7th, The past participle or the infinitive, when th3) 
form with the auxiliary a compound tense of the verb, 

12 2 3 7 

Ex. @r bat mix nid)t tmnter fyofltcf) barauf geantroortet, he 
has not always answered it politely. (§r tturb 2>l)Uett 

12 2 3 7 

md)t tmnter fo t)ofIid£> auf Sfyren S3rtef antroorten. 

* # # These remarks apply to the natural order of 
ideas; but the German language is so much subject to 
inversions, that we must sometimes deviate from them, 
according to the stress which we w r ish to put on cer- 
tain words, or the strength and importance we wish 
to give them in the sentence. See the following 



358 

RECAPITULATION OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX 
OR CONSTRUCTION. 

1st, When the adjective which precedes the noun 
is accompanied by some words that relate to, or define 
it, they are placed immediately before it. Ex. ©ite 
gegen 3cbermamt fyofltcfye grew, a woman polite towards 
everybody. 3fyr ©te fyerjltrf) ttebenbeg Mint), your child 
that loves you from all his heart. (Lesson XCIII.) 

2d, Personal pronouns, when not in the nomina 
tive, as well as reflexive pronouns (Lesson LXX ) are 
placed after the verb. Ex. 3rf) tfebe Sid), I love thee. 
dv ttebt tnict), he loves me. 3d) nmnfcfye 3bnett emert guten 
Sftorgeit, I wish you a good morning. SKeme ©d)tt>efler 
beftnbet fid) toofy, my sister is well. 

Obs. A. When the accusative is a personal pro- 
noun, it precedes the dative, if not, it follows it. Ex. 
©eben ©te tnetnem Sruber ba$ S3ucfy? do you 
give the book to my brother ? 3d) gebe e^ t^m, I do 
give it to him. SWacfyen ©te 3fy?er gran ©emafylmn meine 
'Stttpfefytmtg, present my compliments to your lady. 3d) 
gab e$ bem> SSater, I gave it to the father. (Lesson 
XXVIII.) But if we wish to put a particular stress on 
the dative, we must put it after the accusative. Ex. 
@r erjafylte bte ganje ©efefytcfyte fetner grew, he told his wife 
the whole history. Here the whole strength of the 
sentence falls on the words fetner grew* 

Obs. B. When the case of the verb is a genitive 
it is always preceded by the accusative, whether a per- 
sonal pronoun or not. Ex. 3d) fcerjTdjere ©te metnet 
ipocfyacfytung, I assure you of my esteem. 9D?mt fyat ben 
©efangenen be$ 23erbred)en3 itbemuefett, the prisoner has 
been convicted of the crime. (Lesson LXIV.) 

3d, The infinitive and past participle are always 
preceded by their cases, or in other words, the infini- 
tive and past participle always stand at the end of the 
sentence. Ex. 3d) tt>erbe morgen cmf£ ?anb gefyen, I shall 
go into the country to-morrow, (gr tji gefiern baf)tn ge* 
gangen, he went thither yesterday. 3d) tt>erbe 3t)*ten baa 
23ud) gebett, I shall give you the book. @r fyctt e3 mix ge* 
fagt, he has told it to me. (Lessons XXIV. and XLII.) 



359 

Obs. A. When two or several infinitives, two past 
participles, or a past participle and an infinitive de- 
pend on each other, the first in English becomes the 

1 2 

last in German. Ex. ©ie fowtett tfytt fpredjett fyorett, you 

2 1 12 

may hear him speak ; id) tterbe tyute nid)t fpa^xerett gefyen 

3 3 2 1 

fomten, I shall not be able to go a walking to-day ; fein 

12 2*1 

S>a\x$ ift Derfauft ttwrben, his house has been sold. 
(Lesson LXXI.) 

Obs. B. The two infinitives or participles, &c, not 
depending on each other, follow the English construc- 

1 2 

tion. Ex. yjlan ma# @ott Itefeen unb tterefyren, we must 

1 2 

love and honour God ; ffe ttrirb getiebt ttnb gelobt, she is 

1 2 

loved and praised. (Lesson LXXI.) 

4th, The verb of the subject (in compound tenses 
the auxiliary) is removed to the end when the phrase 
begins, (a) with a conjunction, as : al$, ba, ob, ba$, 
tt>eil, tt>emt, a &c. (6) with a relative pronoun, as : ber, 
tt)dd)ev, tt>er, meaning he who, and toa$, that which ; (c) 
after the relative adverb, tt>0, and all the prepositions 
combined with it, as : tt>oburd), WOOttUt, tt>0D0tt, &c. Ex. 
Site id) ffe jum erften 9Kale fat), when 1 saw her for the 
first time. 3d) ttmrtfcfyte, ba$ er mttgmge, I wish he would 
go with us. dv tiebt ©ie tticfyt, mil ©ie ifytt befeibigt fya* 
ben, he does not love you, because you have offended 
him. 3Barten ©te, bi$ id) mem ©elb befomme, wait till I 
receive my money. Sfilenn id) e3 gemu$t b&tte, had I 
known that. 2efett ©te bct£ SSucf), n>efd)e£ id) 3hnen gelie* 
ben babe? do you read the book which I have lent 
you ? SDBtffen ©te nidjt, xoo er gewefen tjl ? do you not 
know where he has been ? $omten ©te mir tticfyt fagett, 
toa$ au3 it)m geworben ift ? can you not tell me what 

tt For conjunctions which do not remove *he verb to the end. of the phnwa 
■ce Lesson LXL 



360 

has become of him ? Sag tjl eg etett, tooburcfy er etnen 
fo grogen @rf)aben ertttten l)at, tt>ofc)on er jTcf) fdt)n>erlidf) n>teber 
erbolen tturb, it is precisely that, by which he has sus- 
tained such a loss, as he will find it difficult to recover 
from. (Lesson XL VII ) 

. Obs. A. When a proposition in which the verb is 
required at the end of the sentence, contains one of 
the auxiliaries fettt and tt)erben, or one of the verbs * 
biirfen, fomten, lafiett, mitjfen, follen, ttotten, joined to an 
infinitive, these take their place immediately after the 
infinitive. Ex. SOBenn ©te bag *Pferb faufen wotfen, if you 
wish to buy the horse. (Lesson LXIX.) But when 
not governed by a conjunctive word, they stand before 
the infinitive and its case. Ex. SBoften ©te bag ^>ferb 
faufen ? Do you wish to buy the horse ? 

Obs. B. Incidental or explanatory propositions are 
placed immediately after the word which they define, 
or at the end of the principal proposition. Ex. (§g ift 
fd)tt>er, etnen getnb, toelcfyer tt>ad)fam tft, ju itberfaflen, or : 
eg tft fcf)tt>er, etnen getnb jn uberfallen, ttelcfyer tt>ad)fam ift< 
(Lesson LX.) 

Obs. C. When there are at the end of a sentence 
two infinitives, two past participles, or an infinitive 
and a past participle, the verb which the conjunction 
requires at the end, may stand either before or after 
them. Ex. ^enn ©te 3t)re Section merben fhtbtrt fyaben, 
or: fhtbtrt fyaben werben, fo n>erbe id) 3bnen fagen, x»a$ ©te 
JU tfyim fyaben, when you have studied your lesson, I 
shall tell you what you have to do. (Lesson LXXXII.) 

ON THE TRANSPOSITION OF THE SUBJECT AFTER ITS VERB. 

5th, Whenever a sentence begins with any other 
word than the subject or nominative, its order is in- 
verted, and in all inversions the subject stands after 
the verb in simple, and after the auxiliary in compound 
tenses (Lesson LVIIL). From this rule must be e A 
cepted conjunctive words which serve to uni % .mten- 
ces. They leave the subject in its place and remove 
the verb to the end of the sentence (Lesson XLVIL 
and Rule 4th above). 



361 

A German sentence may begin with an adverb, a 
preposition and its case, a case, an adjective, a parti- 
ciple or an infinitive. Ex. £ente g e h e id) nid)t CMS, 
I do not go out to-day ; morgen tt> e r b e i rf> @te befudjen, 
to-morrow I shall come to see you ; itn Slnfange fcfyuf 
@ott pummel' unb (Srbe, in the beginning God made 
heaven and earth. 23 o n feinen $tin bern fpr ad) 
e r, he spoke of his children. 33et 3l)ttett \j ab e id) 
mem 93ud) ttergeflen, I forgot my book at your house. -Den 
9J?enfrf)en macfyt fein SDBttfe gro$ unb Hetn (©duller), his will 
makes a man great and little. D?eirf) xfi er nicfyt, aber 
gelebrt, he is not rich, but learned, ©etiebt ttnrb er nid)i 
aber gefitrrfjtef, he is not loved, but feared. ©dwben fattn 
3cber, aber nit&en fcfttn nur ber SOBeife unb ®nte, any man 
can do injury, but the wise and good only can be use- 
ful. (Lesson LVIII.) 

6th, The subject is placed after the verb in an in- 
version of propositions, that is, when that which ought 
to stand first, is placed after, and forms, as it were, 
the complement of the other. In other words : the 
subject is placed after its verb in the second membe7 
of a compound phrase (Lesson LXXVIL). An inver- 
sion of propositions takes place, when the first propo- 
sition begins with a conjunction. Ex. £a$ er ©ie liebt, 
ft) e t $ id) (for: id) tt>etg, bag er ©te liebt), I know that 
he loves you. 3e fletfnger em ©cfyufer ifi, befto fcfyttettere 
gcrtfrfjritte m a d) t ev, the more studious a pupil is, the 
more progress he makes. 2Benn id) vtid) tt)dre, fo I) a 1 1 e 
i d) ^reunbe, I should have friends, if I were rich. Wad)* 
bem mv bit ©tabt fcertafien batten, jog ber geinb in 
btefefbe tin, when we had left the town, the enemy en- 
tered it (Lesson LXXXL). 

Obs. In transposing the phrase there is no inversion 
of propositions. Ex. ©er %einb jog in bt'e ©tabt tin, 
Itacfybem ttnr biefelbe tterlaffen fatten, the enemy entered 
f he town, after we had left it (Lesson LXXVIL). 

7th. The subject also follows its verb, when in an 

invert i of propositions, the conjunction tt) e n n is left 

out in the first. Ex. 3ft ba$ ^Better gitufttg (for. 

&enn bag ^Better gunftig ift), fo toerbe id) biefe Dteife 'in acfel 

16 



362 

Za$en cmtretett, if the weather is favourable I shall jet 
out in a weeK (Lesson LXXXL). 

The same is the case with the conjunctioi« ob, 
whether. Ex. 3d) tt>ex^ md)t, f d) I af e ober tt> a d) t id) 
(for: 06 td) fd)fafe ober n>ad)e), I do not know whether I 
am asleep or awake ; and all compound conjunctions, 
such as : obgletd), obfdjon, tt>enn gfetd), n>enn fdjon, though. 
Ex. 33 tn t d) g(etd) (fd)on) ntcbt retd) (for : ob or tt>enn tcf) 
gletd) tttd)t retrf) bin), fo bin tri) bod) jufrteben, though I am 
not rich, I am nevertheless contented. 

Obs. Adverbs of comparison, such as : ttne, as ; gtetcfy* 
ttne, the same as ; tttrf)t ttltr — fbttbew attrf),not only — but 
also, &c, make the nominative of the second member 
go after the verb, but not that of the first (this ob- 
servation is included in Rule 6. above). Ex. 2Bte (or 
gletdjnne) bag 9Keer fcom SOBtnbe ben>egt nrirb, alfo it) t r b 
e t n 9tt a n n t>on fetnen ?etbenfd)aften beroegt, as the sea 
is agitated by the winds, so a man is agitated by his 
passions. 

8th, Some conjunctions, when beginning a sentence, 
make the nominative go after its verb,*as : borf), how- 
ever ; bemtod), nevertheless ; gtetcfyroobf, notwithstand- 
ing ; beflfen ungeadjtet, for all that ; md)t$ bejlo ipemger, 
nevertheless ; fytngegett, im ©egetttfyetf, on the contrary. 
(This rule is included in Rule 5.) Ex. beflfen wtgead)* 
tet fy a b e n © i e memate memett SCBmtfd) erfitllen tt>otten, 
for all that you were never willing to accomplish my 
desire ; borf) f d) r t e b e r, er fottttte tttcfyt fommen, however 
he wrote that he could not come. 

9th, The subject follows its verb when the phrase is 
interrogative or ejaculatory. Ex. Semen 3 f) r e 
ijerren 23 ruber beutfd) ? do your brothers learn 
German? ®te gliicfttd) ftttb ©te! or 28te finb ©te 
fo glttdlid) ! how happy you are ! (Lesson XXXII. and 
LXXXVIIL) 

Obs. When the subject is a personal or an interro- 
gative pronoun, the construction of the interrogative 
sentence is the same as in English. Ex. 3ft er jU 
£cwfe ? is he at home ? ©mb 3fyre grdulem ©d)tt>eftem 
in bent ©arten ? are your sisters in the garden ? SEBer 
i(l ia ? who is there ? 2Ba3 baben ©te getfyan ? what 



363 

nave you done ? SKMcfjer Stndbe fyat btefe 33itcf)et gefcmft; 
nnb tt)em bat er ffe fcerebrt ? which boy has bought those 
books, and to whom has he given them ? 9S?a3 fur et* 
(ten 5£agen baben Ste gefauft ? what carriage have you 
bought ? 

10th, The subject not only stands after the verb, but 
also after all the words relating to it, when the sen- 
tence begins with the indefinite pronoun e$. Ex. @$ 
lebrt -urn? bte (Jrfctfyruitg, experience teaches us. 
"@S tfl nid)t atte Zaye eine fo QUtc ©elegenfyett, there is not 
every day such good opportunity. 

11th, In inversions where the subject stands after 
its verb, it may take its place either after or before 
the other cases, if they are personal pronouns, and if 
the subject is a substantive. Ex. fteute gt&t mein ?ebrer 
mtr etn 25ucf), or beutegtbt tntr tnetn ?ebrer em 35ttrf), to-day 
my master will give me a book. ©ejTern gab mem ?et)* 
rer e6 mtr, or geflertt ga6 e3 mtr mem ?et)rer, my master 
gave it to me yesterday. £)b er g(eidt) gan$ entftettt mar, 
erfannte tfyn bod) fern ©ofyn, or erfannte fern ©obn xt)tt bod?, 
though he was quite disfigured, nevertheless his son 
recognized him. 

12th, But if the subject is likewise a personal pro- 
noun, or if the other cases are substantives, it must 
precede. Ex. ©eftern gab er es mir (not eg mtr er), yes- 
terday he gave it to me. Xtafyer liebt ber ©cfyuter ben 2ef)* 
rer (not Itebt ben ?efyrer ber ©df)it(er), therefore the pupil 
loves his master. Sefien nngeacfytet erfannte ber ©ofyn ben 
SSater (not ben SSater ber ©obn), nevertheless the son re- 
cognised his father. 

EXERCISES. 244. 

A stranger having- sold some false jewels (ber fctlfcftc (Sbetftetn) to 
a Roman empress (Me romifefte ^cufertnn), she asked (ferbcrn t>on) 
her husband (to make) a signal example (of him) (Me auffallcnbe 
©enucjtbuuna,). The emperor, a most excellent and clement prince 
(ber etn febr ana'Mger unb milbcr Jfurft rvar), rinding it impossible to 
pacify (berubtqen) her, condemned the jeweller to be thrown to the 
wild beasts ($um .ftcmipfe mtt ben nnlben Sbteren). The empress re- 
solved to be present (3euo,e) with her whole court (ber Jbefftoat) at 
the punishment of the unfortunate mai (fetnes Sobes). As he wai 
led into the arena (auf ben £ampfp(a§ cjefubrt murbe), he expected to 
die (f cb auf ben Sob gefafft madden) ; but instead (jiatt governs the 



364 

genitive) of a wild beast a lamb (ba$ Sctmm) came up to nim and 
caressed him (nx'tcrjcS trnn ttcbfofete). The empress, furious (auj}etf[ 
aufgcbrad)t) at the deception (fid) $um SBcftcn Qebalten $u fcrjen), com- 
plained bitterly of it (fid) bitter 6efwcg.cn beHaa/n) to (bet) the em- 
peror. He answered : " I punished the criminal (bet 93crbred)Ct) 
according (nad)) to the law of retaliation (bci6 &£tebctt>eta>ftung6tcd)t). 
He deceived (bettiigen*) you, and he has been deceived in his turn 
(uuebet)." 

245. 

The bakers of Lyons, having gone to Mr. Dugas ($u Semanbem 
fommen*), the provost (bet (Stabtttd)tet), to ask his permission (3cs 
ntanben urn (Stfaubntfi bttten # ) to raise the price of bread (nut t>em 
SBtebe auf3Ufcf)tagcn), he answered that he would take their petition 
into consideration (er tucUe ben ©egenftanb itfeez SSttte untetfuctyen). 
As they took leave (n>egcjcr)cn*), they contrived to slip (ttepen fie un* 
bemerft) a purse containing (nut) two hundred Louis d'ors (bet Souths 
fc'or) on. the table. — When they returned, in the full conviction (md)t 
gnxtfe(n) that the purse had been a powerful advocate in their favour 
(nurffam ftir cine @acf)C fptecfyen*), the provost said to them : " Gen- 
tlemen, i have weighed (abrcagen) your reasons (bet ©runt) in the 
scale of justice (bte 2Bacjfcba(e t)cr (25 c r eel) 1 1 gfc i t) , and I have found 
them wanting (ntcf)t ttollrtucbttq). I have not thought it expedient 
(3d) fctett ntd)t bafur) by a fictitious raising of price (untcr ctner ungc^ 
gtiinbeten Sfyeutunq) to* make the public (ia$ 5)ubltftim) suffer : I 
have, however (librtgen?), distributed (ttcrtbet(en) your money to (uvu 
tcr with accus.) the two hospitals of the town, for I concluded (id) 
g(aubte) you could not intend it for any other purpose (t)er ©ebrcuid)). 
Meanwhile (3d) fyabe cingcfef)cn) as you are able to give such alms 
(fc(d)e 2ttmefen $u ejeben), it is evident you are no losers (tjetlteten*) 
by your trade (bae ©emetbe)." 

p 246. 

THE PHYSICIAN TAKEN IN (bettCfjCn). 

A physician of (in) Dublin, who was rather old (rt)etd)ct fcfyon 
fliemttd) bejafytt roar), but who was very rich and in extensive prac- 
tice (in groBem 9?ufe ftefjen*), went one day to receive a considerable 
($tcmUd) gto£) sum of money in bank notes and in gold. As he was . 
returning home with (belabcn nut) this sum, he was stopped (anfyaU 
ten*) by a man who appeared out of breath (aufcet 2ftr)cm), owing to 
the speed with which he had run (n>et( ct $u fc&ncll getaufen roar). 
This man asked him (Unfc) bet trjn bat) to come to see his wife, 
whom a violent diarrhoea retained in bed dangerously ill (an etnem 
fyefttcjen $(uffe qefa'brttd) ftanf batnicbet (teqen*) ; he added that it was 
urgent she should have immediate advice (bo0 fcbleuntqc $tlfe fe-ftr 
notbiuenbtg mate), and at the same time promised the physican his 
guinea fee (cine ©utnee fiit ctnen iBcfucb). 

The physician, who was very avaricious (a>H$t,q), was pleased at 
tlie prospect of gaining his guinea (etlte fie $ii ttetbtenen) ; he direc- 



385 

Jed (faqen $u) the man to lead the way (Semanbem ben SBeg setgctt)^ 
and promised to follow. He was led to a house situated (fteben*) 
in a remote (ent(ecjen) street, and made to ascend to the third story 
(in bat brttte (Stocfivctf), where he was admitted into a room, the 
door of which was immediately (a(fobci(t>) locked (wrfdbtiejjcn*). 
The guide (Dcr gltbrcr) then presenting (barreicben*) a pistol with 
one hand, and with the other an empty (leer) purse, which was 
open, spoke as follows (bierauf rettete bcr gu(jm ben erfebrccfenen Ttvfi 
fbfgenbermaflen an, tnbcm, &c). 

" Here is my wife : yesterday she was seized with a violent 
diarrhoea (an ctnem befticjen ^aucbftuffe (etben*), which has reduced 
her to the state (in ben Sujtanb tfcrfef en) in which you (now) see 
her; you are one of our most eminent (ejefebteft) physicians, and 1 
know you are better able than any one to cure her. I am besides 
(utu'tbteS) aware that you possess the best remedy for her ; haste 
then to employ (antuenben) it, unless you prefer swallowing (sets 
febfurfen) the two leaden pills (Me ^pille) contained in this instru- 
ment." The doctor made a horrible face (ba* abfebeuttebe @efict)t), 
but obeyed. He had several bank notes and a hundred and twen- 
ty-five guineas rolled up (in Snellen) ; he placed the latter (Me fe"gs 
tern) into the purse, as he had been desired (cjebulfctcj), hoping thus 
to save his bank notes. 

But the thief (t>et (Maimer) was up to this, and was perfectly 
aware of his having them in his" pocket (rxnifite, ba$ cr fie in ber &a- 
febe f)atte). "Wait," said he, "it would not be fair (btlitg) that 
you should have performed (oerrtcbten) so miraculous a cure (£te 
5lur) without remuneration (sergeben*) ; I promised you a guinea 
for your visit, I am a man of honour (ber 9ftann t>cn (Sfjrc), and 
here it is ; but I know that you carry about your person (bet fief) 
babert) several little recipes (bag Sftccept, plur. e) most efficacious 
(febr rotrrVam) as preventives against the return (bte SHiicffefyt) of the 
disorder (ba$ Uebet) you have just removed (bet(en) ; you must be 
so kind as to leave them with me." The bank-notes immediately 
took the same road as the guineas had done. The thief, then 
keeping his pistol concealed beneath his cloak (ber 9)<ante(), ac- 
companied the doctor into the street (bierauf fttfjrte ber ©aimer, tn^ 
bem — ttriebet $uvikt) requesting him to make no noise. He stopped 
him (ftcfjen taffen*) at the corner (an ber (Scle) of a street, and for- 
bidding (Dertueten*) him to follow, suddenly (p(o£ltcb) disappeared, 
to seek, in a distant part of the town (pat entU'fjene ©tabttuertet), 
another habitation (bte SOBof) tiling). 

247. DIALOGUE (bte Unterrefcung) 

BETWEEN A FATHER AND MOTHER ON THE HAPPINESS (bd$ 
28ofy() 0F THEIR CHILDREN. 

Countess. Forgive me for having disturbed (roetfen laffen*) 
you so early ; but I wanted to speak to you on matters of im. 
por,ance. 



366 

Count You alarm (beimrufyt^en) me .... I see that you 
have, been crying; what has happened, my dear (tfyetter)? 

Countess. I own I am a little agitated (unrufytq) ; but I have 
nothing unpleasant (UnangenefymeS) to communicate (wuttfyetten) ; 
on the contrary. 

Count. From your emotion (bte SJeroecjung), I should guess 
Emily to be the cause of it (ba§ tton — bte 3?ebe tfr). 

Countess. It is true .... My sister came this morning 
with a proposal (etne Qeivatf »orfd)lacjen*) for her. - 

Count. Well 1 

Countess. The gentleman who asks her (in marriage) is en- 
dowed with (befi|en*) all the advantages (ber 2Soqug) of birth 
(bte @eburt) and fortune (bct3 ©liaf). His merit is acknowl- 
edged (anerfemten) by all. He is thirty; his person agreeable ; 
he loves Emily, and: even refuses the fortune (bte 2hi3jteuer) 
which we should give her, stating his affection to be secured by 
her only (serlangt nttr fie). 

Count. Bat how comes it that you are not overjoyed at this 
(auger fid) »or graibe fetrt*)? I am very anxious (oor 23egter* 
be brennen) to learn his name. 

Countess. You know him ; he often comes here, and you 
like him exceedingly (febr). 

Count. Pray gratify (befrtebujen) my curiosity. 

Countess. It is the Count of Moncalde .... 

Count. The Count of Moncalde ! a foreigner ; but he prob- 
ably (roaf)rfd)etn(td)) intends to settle (fid) meberlafien*) in 
France ? . . . 

Countess. Alas ! he has declared that he can promise no- 
thing (feme QSerpfltctytungetn^efyen*) onthatsco-e (bte £)tnfid)t) ; 
this is informing us (erflaren) clearly (beutltd)) enough, that he 
intends to return to his own country. 

Count. And you would nevertheless accept him for your 
daughter ? 

Countess. I have known him (Umqang mft Semanbem f)a* 
ben*) for four years. I am thoroughly acquainted with his 
disposition (ber Sfyaracter). There cannot be a more virtuous 
(tuqenbbaft) or estimable (fd)d§en3roertfy) man. He is very 
clever and agreeable (ooll ©etft tmb ?(mtel)m(td)fett fetn*), has 
much good feeling (qefttbloofl), is well informed (unterrtd)tet), 
and perfectly devoid of affectation (unaffecttrt). He is a passion- 
ate admirer of talent (etnen letbenfd)aftltd)en ©efcfymacf fur la* 
lente babcn*) ; in short (mit etnem 28orte) he possesses every 
quality (bte Stgenfdjaft) that can answer my daughter's happi. 
ness Cq(itcfltd) macfyen). How can I reject him (fie tfym *>erfa* 



367 

gen)? Surely, my love (mem $reunb), you do not think uie so 
selfish (eirteS folcfyen SgotSntu* fdbtg batten*). 

Count (taking her hand) (fie bet ber £)anb faffenb). But 
can I consent to a sacrifice (ba£ Opfer) that would make you for 
ever (auf trnmer) unhappy ? Besides (UeberbteS) I never could 
bring myself to part from Emily. — She is my daughter ; more 
than that even, her amiable disposition is your work. In Emi- 
ly I find your sense (ber ©et)r) and your virtues. No, I cannot 
part (fid) trennen) from her. I am looking forward with so much 
delight (fid) etne fo fitge- QSorflettung »on bem 93ergniigen macfyen) 
to her entrance into the world (fie in bte SQBett etngefufyrt gu fe* 
fyen) ! I am in much hopes of her shining in it (tfyreS guten @r* 
folgS barm gu gem'egen).— How gratifying (rote tbeuer) to me 
will be the praise (bctS Sob) bestowed (ertbet(en) on her! — for 
I am convinced (ba id) ba§> SSettnigrfem babe), that to your care 
of her (bte, ©orgfa(t) alone, my love, she will be indebted for 
whatever success she may obtain. After having devoted (rotb* 
men) the best years of your life to her education, can you now 
give her up, and see her torn from (entreigen* with dative) your 
arms and her country ; can you consent thus to lose in one mo- 
ment the fruit of (son) fifteen years of anxiety (SOciibe unb Strbett) 1 

Countess. I have laboured for her happiness, and (have) not 
(sought) to educate (brtngen*) a victim to my own vanity. I 
beseech you, consider (bebenfen*) also the great and unhoped 
for advantages of the match (bte 33erbtnbung) now in agitation 
(roelcfye man nnS anbtetet). Think of the smallness (ck s SlitteU 
m&gtgfetr) of her fortune. Consider the excellence and amiable 
disposition, the high birth and immense (nnermegltd)) fortune of 
her future husband ! — It is true, I shall be separated from 
Emily, but she will never forget me . . . this thought will be 
my consolation, and without fear for her future life (fiber ba§> 
©d)t<ffa( (£mt(ten$ berufytgt). I shall be able to bear any other 
trial (atfeS errragen). 

Count. Bat will Emily herself be able to bring herself to 
leave you ? 

Countess. She has always been accustomed to obey the dic- 
tates of reason (bte QSernunft »ermag atteS iiber fie). I am wil- 
ling to believe this will cost her some effort (bte 3(njfrengung 
totrb tbr fd)«)er fatten) ; but if she does not dislike (3emanbem 
mtgfatten*) the temper and person of Mr. de Moncalde, I can 
answer (aitf fid) net) men*) for her compliance (fie 311 beroegen), 
however painful (fd)txnertg) the sacrifice (gu fctefem Opfer). In 
short I entreat (befd)tt5Dre) you to entrust entirely to (fid) ganj 
oertafifen* auf) me the care (roegen ber ©orge) of her happiness 



368 

Count. Well (2Bot)tan), since you wish k, I will give my 
consent. You have indeed, my dear, earned (erwerben*) for 
yourself a right (ba£ 3ied)t) to dispose of your daughter (iiber ityx 
©djtcffctl gu entfdjetben), which I will not dispute (jTretttg macfyen)* 
I know you will sacrifice (aufcpfern) yourself for the sake of 
one so dear to you (fur btefen fo tfyeuern ©egenffcmb). — I fore- 
see ($orau£fet)en*) that I shall not have your fortitude (ber SOiittb), 
but I admire, and can no longer withstand (nnberffefyen*) (your 
argument). — Still (3ebcd)) think, what sorrow (nuemel Summer) 
you are preparing for yourself (fid) beretten) ; ho w shall I my- 
self support your grief and my own, your tears and those of 
Emily? 

Countess. Do not fear (befi'trcfyten) that I should cloud (beun* 
rufctgen) your life by useless (uberflufftg) repinings (bte $lctge). 
How could I give myself up to sorrow when my greatest con- 
solation will be the hope of alleviating (mtlbern) your grief? 

Count. Ah, you alone are every thing to me ! You know 
it we/.l .... friendship, admiration, and gratitude are the ties 
(bte 33anbe, plur.) that bind (feffeln) me to you. The influence 
©te £)errfd)aft) you have acquired (etlctngen) over my mind 
titter ntd)) is so thoroughly justified (red)tferttqen) by your vir- 
tues, that far from denying (oer(dugnen), I glory in it (fetnert 
9?uf)m barm fegen, fie anuterfennen). — It is to you I owe every 
thing : my reason, my sentiments (£>&$> ©efttbD, my principles 
(ber ©mnbfct£) and my happiness. In you I find the most ami- 
able as well as the most indulgent (nad)ficf)ttg) of friends, the 
wisest (rcetfe) and most useful adviser (bte nu|lid)jl:e 9tcttt)Cjebe* 
rinn). Be then the arbiter of my children's destiny (bte ©d)teb$* 
rtdjterinn iiber bav ©cfyuffal) as you are that of my own. But 
at any rate (memgftemS) let us attempt (a(le£ tterfttcfyen) to per- 
suade the Count of Moncalde to settle (fid) ntebertaffen) in 
France. . . . He seemed so struck (geritfyrt) by your affection 
(bte 3avtlid)hit') for Emily, and to feel for you such sincere 
attachment (9(nf)dnc}u'd)fett) that I cannot yet believe his inten- 
tion (bte 2(bfid)t) to be to separate you from your child. I can- 
not think his decision (ber (2ntfct)lug) unalterable (unt>eranber* 
ltd)). 

Countess. No,- do not let us flatter ourselves. He is a firm 
and decided character (fern — tft fefl unh erttfd)(oj]en). He has 
positively (befh'mmt) told my sister that it would be vain to at- 
tempt to exact from him a promise (ttim bte 23e tnqunq vvviiv 
fcfyretben) of residing in France. His resolution is irrevocably 
(umtnbemtfltd)) taken to return to Portugal. 

Count. You grieve (betriiben) me . . . . But I repeat to 






369 

you, the fate of Emily . s in your hands. Whatever it may cost 
me, you shall be absolute mistress (bte umimfcfyrdnfte ©ebtete* 
riim) of it. I shall consent to whatever you decide on (befcfylte* 
gen*). Do you intend speaking to-day (nod) t)eute) (on the 
subject) to Emily 1 

Countess. After dinner .... But it. is late; it is time to 
dress .... I have not yet seen my sons to-day ; let us go and 
see them. 

Count. I wanted to consult (um Stati) fragen) you on (meg en) 
something connected with (angefyen*) them. I am dissatisfied 
with their tutor (ber £ofmetjter). Another has been proposed 
(ocrfcfylagen*) me, I should wish you to speak to him ; I am told 
he speaks English perfectly ; I cannot judge myself of the latter. 

Countess. I will tell you if he really understands it well . . 

Count. How ? . . . But you have never learnt English . . 

Countess. I beg your pardon. I have been studying it for 
the last year, to be able to teach Henrietta, who had asked me 
to give her (3emcmben um etroaS erfucfyen) an English master. 
In general (Jm Surdjfcfymtt) masters teach so carelessly (mtt fo 
steler Kadjlaffigf ett) that, however excellent they may be, two 
years of their lessons (ber Unterrtcfyt) are not worth three 
months (ba£ QStertefjafyr") of those (j>cn bem) given by a mother. 

Count. What a (wonderful) woman you are ! . . , . Thus 
till yoar children's education is completed, you will spend part 
of your life with masters. Half of it (£)te etne £)dffte) you devote 
(cmroenben) to study (ftrf) 511 untemcfyten), and the other half in 
teaching what you have learnt .... Yet in spite of such nu- 
merous occupations, whilst you thus multiply (serstetfdlttgen) 
your duties, you spare time to devote (nnfcmen) to your friends 
and to the world (bte ©efeHfcfyaft). How do you manage (e£ 
anfangen) ? 

Countess. It is always possible to find time for the fulfilment 
of duties that are pleasing to us (bte un$ tfceuer ftnb). 

Count. You always surprise me (beftdnbtg m Srjraunen fe* 
$ en), I own .... Ah! if your children do not make you hap- 
py, what mother could ever expect from hers a reward of her 
affection ! . . . . And our dear Emily may be for ever lost to 
you ! . . . I cannot bear (ertragen*) the thought of it ! — Shall 
you see your sister again to-day ? Shall you give her your an. 
swer for the Count of Moncalde ? 

Countess. He requested a prompt decision (etne fcfyneffe unb 
fcefHmmte) .... I shall accordingly give (ertfyet(en) hfrn the 
answer, since you allow it, as soon as I have questioned Emily 
on the subject (©mtltertS ©efinmmgen prftfen). 
16* 



870 

Count. I am certain, Emily will refuse' (anSfcfylagen*) him. 

Countess. I think as you do, but it is not enough (fytnretcfyenb 
fein*) that she has no aversion (abgenetgt fetn*) to the Count ot 
Moncalde, and that she feels (fyegen) for him the esteem he so 
justly deserves 

Count. Well, I see, we must submit (fief) entfcfyltegen*) to 
this sacrifice (bte 2(iifopferung) .... Speak to your daughter 

Speak to her alone, I should never have courage to 

support (cw^Mten*) suc h an interview (bte Unterrebung) . . . 
I feel I should only spoil all your work. 

248. DIALOGUE, 

EMILY. AGATHA. 

Agatha. I was looking for you .... But, dear Emily, 
what is the matter? 

Emily. Have you seen mamma (bte 9Q?utter) ? 

Agatha. No, she is gone out ; she is gone to my aunt's. 

Emily. And my father ? 

Agatha. He has shut himself up (fid) etnfcfyltegen*) in his 
study (ba3 ^abtnett) .... But surely, Emily, they are think- 
ing of your marriage (bte SKerfyetratfyung) ; I guess (erratfyen*) 
as much (e$) from your agitation (an Seiner 2}entummg). 

Emily. Ah, dearest sister, you little dream (me rotrft ©u 
ben Dtfctmen be^jentgen erratfyen) who is my intended (bem man 
mtcf) bejrtmmt) ! .... Agatha, dearest Agatha, how much 1 
pity you, if you love me as well as I love you ! 

Agatha. Good heavens (© erect) ter |)tmmeD • Explain 
(SrHdren) yourself more clearly (bentltcf)). 

Emily. I am desired (9J?an beftefylt mtr) to marry the 
Count of Moncalde, and he is to take (mtt fief) fiifyren) me to 
Portugal. 

Agatha. And you intend to obey ? . . . . Could you leave 
us ? .... Is it possible my mother even should consent ? 

Emily. Alas ! (Setber) dear Agatha, it is but too true. 

Agatha. No, I never can believe it .... it is impossible 
you ever can (Du barfjt md)t) obey. 

Emily. What are you saying? Do you think I should 
oppose my mother's wishes (fann id) metner SEftutter ttuber* 
jtefren) ? 

Agatha. But do you think she herself will ever consent to 
such a separation ? 

Emily. She only considers (in 23etracf)tung jtefyen*) what 



371 

she calls my interest (ber QSortfyetD ; she entirely forgets her 
self. Alas ! she also forgets that I could enjoy (gemegen*) na 
happiness she did not witness (befifen fie ntcfyt 3 eil 9 e ware) • 

Agatha. Dear sister, refuse your consent (md)t etnnntltgen) ! 

Emily. T have given my word. 

Agatha. Retract (guriicfnebmen*) it . . . out of affection to 
my mother herself; your unfortunate obedience (ber ©efyorfam) 
would be (sorberetten) a constant source of regret (bte erotge 
9?ene) to us all. 

Emily. Agatha, you do not know my mother's fortitude. 
Her sensibility (3fyr gefiifyfootteS £erg), though mastered (gelet* 
Ut) by her superior mind (bte iibertegene 93ernunft), can, it is 
true, sometimes make her suffer, but will never be strong 
enough to betray her even into showing a momentary weak- 
ness (me tmrb eS emeu 3(agenbluf ©cfyrodcfye tn tfyr fyersorbrin* 
gen) .... She is incapable (unfafytg) of ever regretting 
(bereuen) she has fulfilled a duty. 

Agatha. Emily ! dearest sister, if you go, I shall not sur- 
vive (ettt)a$ iiberleben) such a misfortune ! 

Emily. Ah, if you love me, conceal (from) me the excess 
fbct$. itebermag) of your grief. It can only unfit me for the 
task I have to perform (roelcfyer nur gu fefer bagu geetgnet tjt, 
mid) nod) fcfyroaefyer gu macfyen). — Do not further rend (ntdjt 
ttotfenbS gerretgen*) a heart already torn by the conflict of (baS 
fcfyon fo getfyetlt ffl smtfc^en) duty, affection and reason. 

Agatha. Do not expect me to confirm (Std) gu befejrtgen 
tn) this cruel resolution. I can only weep and lament my own 
hard fate. 

Emily. I hear some one .... Dear Agatha, let us dry 
our eyes. 

249. 

On the liability to error (2Bte febr man ftd) trren fann) 
of our judgments (tn fetnem Urtfyette), or the injury 
(ber ©cfyaben) repaid (erfegen). 

An English stage-coach (bte Sanbftttfcfye), full of travellers 
(ber 9?etfenbe), was proceeding (fafyren*) to York. Conversa- 
tion fell on (3ftar fpradf) tuel son) the highwaymen and robbers 
that infested (bte man ofterS auf— antreffe) those parts (ber 
SBeg), and on the way of concealing one's money. Each 
person had his secret, but no one thought (fetnem pel e$ etn) 
of telling it (oflfenbaren). One young lady (ba§> SWdbcfyen) only 
of eighteen, was less prudent than the rest (ntcfyt fo f lug few*)* 



372 

Imagining, no doubt, (Ofcne 3^etfel til ber SKetmmg) that she 
was thereby giving a proof (ber 35ert)et$) of her cleverness 
(ber QSerftanb), she said with great self-satisfaction (gcm$ offen^ 
ber$tg) that she had a draft (ber 2Bed)felbrtef) for two hundred 
pounds, which was (beftefyen*) her whole fortune, but that the 
thieves would be very clever (Itjtig) if they thought of seeking 
for (roentt fie — fucfyen fellten) this booty (ber £?taub) in her shoe, 
or rather (ja fogar) under the sole of her foot ; to find it they 
would be obliged to (e£ miifite tbnen mtr eutfatten) rob her oi 
stockings. 

The coach was soon after (balb barcutf) stopped (cmfyalten*) 
by a gang of thieves (bte 9?cutberbcmbe), who called upon (*uif> 
forbern) the affrighted and trembling travellers to deliver up 
(bercjeben*) their money. They accordingly all pulled out 
(bercuiSgtefyen*) their purses, fully aware (fid) sorjMen) that 
resistance (ber 2BtberjTcmb) would be perfectly useless, and 
might prove dangerous (ober gar gefdbrltd)). The sum (thus 
produced) appearing too small to these gentlemen (of the road 
they threatened (brcben) to search (burd)fitd)en) all the luggage 
(bte (Sffecten), if a hundred pounds were not immediately given 
them. 

" You will easily ( let d)t) find double that sum (ba& Soppel* 
te)," said an old gentleman from the corner of the coach (rtef 
t^nen — btntett cui3 bem 2Bagert 31O, " if you examine (burd)- 
fit d)en) the shoes and stockings of that lady." The advice was 
very well taken (aufrtet)men*), and the shoes and stockings being 
pulled off, the promised treasure (ber oerH'mbtgfe ©cfyag) was 
discovered (getgt fid)). The robbers humbly (bofltd)) thanked 
the lady, paid (mad) en) sundry compliments on the beauty of 
her foot, and without waiting for an answer, they made ofl with 
their prize, leaving the coach to proceed on its journey (wetter 
fabren*). Hardly were the robbers gone, when the consterna- 
tion (bte 95ejliirgiui v q) of the travellers was changed (fid) t»er roam 
fceln) into indignation (bte SB lit I))- Words could not express 
(fid) irdjr mtt s iBorten auSbriidfen lajfen*) the sorrow of the pooi 
woman, nor the resentment (ber 3 0rn ) expressed by (emporen) 
the whole party against the betrayer (ber SSerrdtfeer). 

The strongest, and even the most insulting epithets of disgust 
(Die ungltmpfltcbften unb befd)impfenbjren Seinamen) were lav. 
ished on him by all (fid) cui3 aller 9)frtnbe l)6ren lajfen*), and 
many went even so far as to call him a rascal (ber 3S6fennd)t) 
and the accomplice of the thieves (ber 3?diibergene§j. To 
these marks (bte Sleugerung) of the general indignation (be§ all* 
gemettien UttnnffensO (his conduct had excited) was added (&er* 



373 

btnben*) the threat (bte DrefyuncO of giving the informer (ber 
Slngebev) a sound beating, and of throwing him out of the window 
(gum 23agen fytnatiS), and of instituting legal proceedings against 
him Oemcmfcen gertd)tltd) belangen). In short (Surg), all seemed 
to concur (fttf) erfd)6pfen) in forming schemes (fcet Sntnutrf ) 
for taking exemplary vengeance on the offender (an bem ©traf* 
baren erne aitffattenbe 3?ad)e), The latter remained perfectly 
unmoved (fid) gang ftttt serbalten*), and only remarked once in 
extenuation (f(cb mtt ber 3(eugerunq entfcfyulbtgen), that a man 
could have nothing dearer to him than himself (3eber fet ftd) 
felbft ber Stebfte) ; and when the coach reached the end of its 
journey (al3 man am Qiete ber SRetfe war)? he suddenly (unoer* 
feben6) disappeared (oerfdjtDtnben*), before his fellow-travellers 
could accomplish (tn$ 2Bevf fe§en) anyone (erne etngtge).of 
their intended measures (bte b ea b ft cfjttg ten 5)cagrege(n) against 
him. -r 

As to the unfortunate young lady, it is easy to imagine (ftd) 
scrftetten) that she passed a sad and sleepless night (bte $lad)t 
f)6d)ft trcuirtg nnb fd)lafle3 gubrtngen*). To her joy and aston- 
ishment (Da$ (Srftaunen), she received the next day the follow- 
ing letter : 

" Madam, — You must yesterday have hated ($erabfd)euen) 
as an informer the man who now sends you, besides the sum 
you then advanced him (oorfcfytegen*), an equal (g(etd)) sum, as 
interest thereof (ate 3* n f en barauf), and a trinket (ba3 Suwef) 
of at least the same value (ber 2Bertb) for your hair (gu 3>brem 
£>aarfd)mucfe). I hope this will be sufficient .(btnretcfyen) to si- 
lence (mt(bern) your grief, and I will now explain (fagen) in a 
few words what must appear mysterious in my conduct {ten ge* 
fyetmen ©rttnb metneS SetragenS). After having spent (ftd) auf* 
fatten*) ten years in India (3nbten), where I amassed (jufarn* 
menbrtngen*) a hundred thousand pounds, I was on my way 
home with letters on my bankers (ber 28ed)felbrtef) to that 
amount (ftir bte ganje Stimme), when we w T ere attacked (ange; 
fatten roerben*) yesterday by the highwaymen. All my savings 
(bte retd)ttd)en (Srfparmjte) must have inevitably been sacrificed 
(e3 war gefd)ef)en urn), had the shabbiness (bte Slargbett) of our 
fellow-travellers (ber 3?etfegef&brte) exposed us to a search from 
(t)on ©etten) these unprincipled spoilers (ber 2(ngtet'fer). Judge 
(Urtbetlen) for yourself, if the idea of returning to India thorough- 
ly empty handed (mtt ttbtttg leeren £>dnben), could be support- 
able (errragltd)) to me. Forgive me, if this consideration (Dte 
9Setrad)timg) led (oermogen*) me to betray your confidence 
(ba$> 3utrauen servatfeen*) and to sacrifice (aufopfern) a smal] 



374 

(magtg) sum, though not my own, to save my whole fortune, I 
am under the greatest obligation 4o you. I shall be happy to 
testify (SSewetfe gebert t>on) my gratitude in any way in my 
power, and I request you to consider (recfynen) these trifles (fur 
md)t$) as only the expressions (bte gertngen 3eid)eri) of my 
readiness (tuxd) tt>elcfye id) mid) beetfere) to serve vou." 



SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 

OF THE 

IFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 

THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 



\r G, J. ADLEE 



SYSTEMATIC OUTLINE 



OF THE 



DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH, 

THEIR INFLECTION AND USE. 



PARTS OF SPEECH. 

§ 1. The German language has ten parts of speech : 
— The Article, Substantive or Noun, Adjective, Numeral, 
Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and 
Interjection. 

Of these six are declinable ; namely, the Article, the 
Noun, the Adjective, the Numeral, the Pronoun, and 
the Verb. 

The remaining parts of speech are indeclinable and 
are called Particles. 

The declinable parts of speech have two numbers, 
the Singular and the Plural. 

To substantives, and to all the other declinable parts 
of speech, except the verb, belong three genders, Mas- 
culine, Feminine, and Neuter. 

§ 2. They have also four cases: — Nominative, 
Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, which in general cor- 
respond to those of the same name in the Classical 
Languages. 

1st, The nominative is employed as the subject of a proposition, 
in answer to the question "who?" or "what?" e. g. 835 cr 
fommt? bet SSciter, Die gutter unt> bag .fttnb fommen ; who comes ] 
the father, the mother and the child are coming. 

2d, The genitive denotes the relation of origin, possession, mu- 
tual connection, and many others, which in English are expressed by 
the possessive case, or by the preposition of. It answers to the 
question "whose?" e. g. SQBeffen $><m$ ift bag ? ©gift beg Jloiuq* ; 
beg £aufmann£ ; whose house is this] It is the king's; the mer- 
chant's. 



378 



3d, The dative is the case of the remote object, from which any 
thing is taken, to or for which any thing is done. It answers to 
the question "to ivhom?" "for what?" e.g. SQBem bringft iDu 
ba? SSucb ? £)t'ui fcehtet ; bent .ftnabcn ; for whom do you bring that 
book ? For the teacher ; the boy. 

4th, The accusative indicates the immediate object of an active 
transitive verb, in answer to the question "whom?" or " what?" 
e. g. 2£a$ r)aft Du ? (Sine gcbet ; ctn SDttjfer ; what hast thou ] A 
pen ; a knife. 






ARTICLES. 

§ 3. An article is a word which serves to restrict 
or individualize the meaning of substantives. 

There are in German as in English two articles ; 
the definite ber, bte, ba$, the ; and the indefinite tin, erne, 
em, an or a. 

In German both articles are declined, i. e. they indi- 
cate by a change of termination the gender, the num- 
ber, and the case of the substantive to which they be- 
long. 

DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 





Singular. 






Plural. 




Masc 


Fern. 


Neut. 




For all genders. 


Nom. 


bet, 


bte, 


ba3, 


the. 


bte, the. 


Gen. 


beg, 


ber, 


be$, 


of the. 


ber, of the. 


Dat. 


bem, 


ber, 


bem, 


to the. 


ben, to the. 


Ace. 


ben, 


bie, 


ba$, 


the. 


bte, the. 




DECLENSION OF THE INDEFINITE 


ARTICLE. 






Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 






Nom. 


em. 


etne, 


em, 


a, an. 




Gen. 


etneS, 


enter, 


etneS, 


of a, an. 




Dat 


etnem, 


etner, 


etnem, 


to a, an. 




Ace. 


etnen, 


etne, 


em, 


a, an. 








OBSERVATIONS. 





§ 4. Obs. 1. The meaning of substantives without the 
article is expressed in the most general manner. The office 
of the article is to point out either definitely or indefinitely an 
individual of the genus or species denoted by the substantive 
e. g> ber 5Rann, the man ; eine SSlume, a flower. 



379 

Obs. 2. Hence common nouns only, which under one term 
comprehend many individuals, can, strictly speaking, assume 
the article, The remaining classes of nouns must from the 
nature of their signification commonly reject it ; viz : 1st, 
proper names, which already contain the notion of individuali- 
ty ; as, Goethe, Walter Scott, &c. ; 2d, abstract substantives 
and names of materials, the meaning of which is so general, 
that no individual is distinguished ; as, virtue, water, gold. 

Obs. 3. The article, however, is employed in various rela- 
tions before all classes of substantives, even more frequently 
in German than in English. 

ARTICLE BEFORE PROPER NAMES. 

§ 5. The article is used before proper names in the 
foJlowing instances : — 

1st, When the name of a person assumes the signification of 
a common noun. This is the case, when the same name is com- 
mon to several individuals ; as, bie <Stuort% Me ©atone, the Stuarts, 
the Catos, or when it is employed to express some quality or 
characteristic ; as, er iff etn ^roetter 5>(ato, he is a second Plato ; bet 
(Sdfot unferer 3eit, the Caesar of our age. 

2d, If the name of a person is preceded by an adjective ; as, 
ber betitqe spetruS, ber groge griebrtd), St. Peter, Frederick the Great. 

3d, When the name of an author is put instead of his works ; 
as, tef) (cfe ben (Ecbaffpeare, I am reading Shakspeare; ftaben @te 
ben £cffinj) ned) ntct)t ? have you not yet purchased Lessing's 
works ] 

4th, To denote familiarity or inferiority ; as, tcb mag'g unb 
ratlin ntcbt afaubcn, bag mid) ber Wax uerfaffen bat (@d)tfler), I cannot 
possibly believe that (friend) Max has deserted me; ber $ttg fell 
gefcbrmnb foinmen, let Frederick (servant) make haste to come. In 
this connection the article may often be rendered into English by a 
possessive pronoun; e. g. roo tjt ber $ater? wh#re is your father? 
bie gutter iffc ausqeoangen, my (our) mother has gone out. 

5th, To distinguish the gender of names of countries and places, 
such as are not of the neuter gender ; as, bte ©cfyroetj/ ber S3ret$* 
gau k. 

6th, The article serves often simply to point out the case of the 
name ; as, ber Jelb^uo, b e$ (£r>rue, the expedition of Cyrus ; ber £e& 
t» e 6 ©ocrateS, the death of Socrates. 

ARTICLE BEFORE . ABSTRACT SUBSTANTIVES AND NAMES OF 
MATERIALS. 

§ 6. Before abstract substantives and names of 
materials the article is employed, 



380 

1st, To express the distinction of case, when the noun is of th# 
feminine fender and therefore indeclinable in the singular (§ 30) 7 
e. g. t)cr Sag t> c r SKadK tfit c^fcmnKn, the day of vengeance if 
come; in fc> e r jfrnbeit bctpqem <2>d)u($, under the sacred protection 
of liberty ; t c r £>ii(fe berjurfen, to stand in need of help. 

2d, When their meaning is restricted to some particular in- 
stance ; as, t>a£ SBaffVr t)cr (Slbe, the waters of the Elbe; t>et 
Jlctp £>e6 (ScljirterS, the diligence of the scholar. 

ARTICLE BEFORE COMMON NOUNS. 

§ 7. Common nouns are usually connected either 
with the definite or indefinite article. Its omission, 
however, becomes necessary in the following cases : — 

1st, When the common noun expresses some quality or condi- 
tion; as, cr ift jtaufmann, &ontg, ®ott)at geroetben, he has become 
a merchant, king, a soldier. 

2d, In titles, superscriptions, &c, as in English ; e. g. Sector 
Cutler; £err, grau £>tctrtcb, Mr., Mrs. Dietrich; fccutfd) - cno.ttfcrjcS 
SBb'vterbud), German-English Dictionary. 

3d, When the common noun, in connection with a preposition, 
constitutes an adverbial expression, or when several common nouns 
are united by a copulative conjunction and form one complex no- 
tion ; e. g. $u Jujje, liber £ant>, $u (Sd)tffe retjert, to travel on foot, by 
land, by sea ; ?PM unt> fetter febnoben, unt> .jties unt) Junfcn fteben 
(53ur$cr), both horse and horseman were panting,- and pebbles 
and sparks were flying ; nut ©ut unb 2Mut, with property and 
life, 

4th, Common nouns in the plural, denoting several individuals 
in an indeterminate manner, and corresponding to the singular with 
the indefinite article etn, cine, etn, do not admit of the article ; as, id) 
fjabe c t n e n 93 r t e f ctbalten, I have received a letter ; plur. id) babe 
SB 1 1 e f c erbalten, I have received letters. g>fcrt)c jtnt) niigttd)C Sfjtcre, 
horses are useful animals. 

5th, The omissiSn of the article often gives a partitive significa- 
tion to the substantive, especially, if it be the name of a material 
substance. In this case we suppjy the English some (the French 
du).; e. g. gib tym 23tct>, 9JUld), s IBcin, give him some bread, milk, 
wine, &c. 

IDIOMATIC USE OF THE ARTICLE. 

§ 8. In a manner peculiar to the German, the definite ar- 
ticle is often put before a common noun, to indicate that the en- 
tire species is meant ; e. g. b e r Wenfcf) tft fterbltd), man (all 
men, every man) is mortal. So also before abstract substan- 
tives and names of materials, when their meaning is to be taken 
to its full extent ; e. g. unb b t e lucjenb, fie tjl fetn teerer 



381 

©cfyaft, and virtue, it is no empty sound ; ba§ ©fen ijT: ein SSKe^ 
tad, iron (all iron) is a metal. 

The Germans employ the definite article also before the names 
of seasons, months, days, and in many other cases, where the 
English idiom does not admit of it ; e. g. ber Seng, ber ©ommer, 
ber 2(benb, spring, summer, evening ; bctS Sfyriftentfyum, Christi- 
anity, bte Stye, matrimony, &c. 



THE ARTICLE IN SENTENCES. 

§ 9. When in the same proposition several substantives of 
the same gender and number follow each other, the article is 
expressed with the first only ; but if they differ in gender or in 
number, or are otherwise opposed to each other, it must be 
expressed with each ; e. g. bte 23errr3anbten unb greunbe bte* 
fe$ 5)?artne$ ftnb alle tobt, the relations and friends of this man 
are all dead ; ber 93ater, bte SWutter unb bte Stnber ftnb in 
£)aufe, the father, the mother and the children are at home. 

When a substantive in the genitive case limits the meaning 
of another, the article is always omitted before the limited sub- 
stantive, if the genitive precedes it ; e. g. metneS QSruberS 
93ud)— ba$ 33itd) metneS. SSruberS/my brother's book ; auf fet- 
ne$ 8eben$ erftem ©ancje, on the first journey of his life. 

§.10. If the definite article is preceded by one of the pre- 
positions an, auf, bet, burd), fiir, tn, son, »or, iiber, gu, both are 
frequently contracted into one word. 

The following is a list of the principal contractions thug 
formed : — 

r. am $enfter, at the window ; 
an$ lifer, to the shore ; 
aufs gelt), into the field; 
&etm Std)te> near the light ; 
burd)S $euet, through the fire ; 
fiir$ SBaterlanb, for one's country 
tm £cmfe, in the house ; 
tn$ SBajfer, into the water ; 
ttom £umtiu'(, from (the) heaven ; 
ttor* 2Cngeftcbt, before the face ; 
ubetm (Srbenleben, above this earth 

ly life ; 
libera Sfflect, over the sea ; 
unterm 23aume, under the tree 
$u\\ ®tucf, fortunately ; 
gur greube to the joy. 



tfm, ins 


tead of an bem, e. 


an$, ' 


6 an ba^, ' 


auf$, 4 


4 auf ba?, ' 


beim, 4 


4 bet bem, ' 


fcurcljl, ' 


1 burcb ba$, ' 


f%&&, 4 


4 fiir t>a$, " 


tm, * 


4 in bem, " 


tn$, 4 


4 in ba5, " 


com, ' 


4 son bem, " 


»or$, ' 


6 r»cr bat, " 


fibcrm, ' 


4 iiber bem, 44 


libera, ' 


4 iiber bas, 44 


unterm, 4 


' uriter bem, ' 4 


gum, « 


4 gu bem, " 


jut, « 


4 gu ber, 44 



382 

SUBSTANTIVES OR NOUNS. 

§ 11. A substantive or noun is the name of any 
person or thing. 

Substantives are divided into three principal clas- 
ses : Proper, Common, and Abstract. 

A proper noun is the name of an individual person 
or object ; as, jpetnrid), Seutfcfylanb, Henry, Germany. 

A common noun is a general term comprehending 
a plurality of individuals or parts, and applicable to 
each of them ; e. g. SERenfrfj, S3aum, spferb, man, tree, 
iorse, &c. 

Among- common nouns may also be included names of materials ; 
as, (Stfen, iron ; 9)Wd), milk, md collective nouns, which are singu- 
lar in form, but plural in signification ; as, 33ot6, people ; ©ebitge, 
range of mountains. 

An abstract noun is one which serves to denote 
either a quality, an activity, or mode of being, to which 
the mind attributes an independent existence ; e. g. 
gretfyett, liberty ; 2auf, course ; ©ebacfytni^, memory, &c. 

In German the initial of substantives and words 
used substantively is always a capital letter. 

We shall consider the substantive in a fourfold 
point of view ; namely, as to its Gender, its Number 
its Inflection, and lastly its Government. 



I. GENDER. 

§ 12. The grammatical gender of names of per- 
sons and animals generally corresponds to their natu- 
ral sex, i. e. the names of all male beings, including 
that of the Divinity and other superior beings regard- 
ed as males, are masculine ; those of all females are 
feminine ; e. g. ber ^ann, the man ; ber ©ott, God ; ber 
©etft, the spirit ; bie ©ottinn, the goddess ; bte Sautter, 
the mother. 

Exceptions. Diminutives in d) e n and ( e i n ; as, fcctS 90?abcben, 
the maid ; t>aS SftdnnUun, the mannikin ; also, t>a$ 2Bctb, the woman, 
and certain compounds ; as, fcte SftannSpafon, the male; t>as 2Betb$* 
&Ut>, grauenatmmer, the female, woman. 



383 

Appellations, comprehending an entire species of living 
beings without reference to any distinction of sex, are some- 
times masculine, sometimes feminine, and sometimes neuter, 
e. g. ber 3D?enfd), man (homo) ; bte 2Bad)tel, the quail ; ba3 
spferb, the horse. 

§ 13. With respect to substantives in general, their 
gender, as far as it is reducible to rules, may be deter- 
mined either by their signification* or by their termi- 
nation. 

GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
SIGNIFICATION. 

I. Masculines. The name of winds, seasons, months, and 
days are masculine ; also the points of compass ; as, fcer 9lotb, 
£iib, ©ft, 233 eft) the north, south, east, west. 

II. Feminines. Most names of rivers are feminine ; e. g 
Ote Ifyemfe, £)onau, ffiefer, the Thames, Danube, Weser. Ex 
cept ber 9tyein, 3Raut, skfyone, 9itl :c. 

§ 14. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong : 

1st, The names of letters, bct£ % 25, S IC. 

2d, All infinitives and other words, which properly are no 
substantives, but are used as such ; e. g. ba£ ©efyert, £)oren, 
the seeing, hearing ; ba$ (&ute, ©cfyone, the good, beautiful ; 
t>a$ 2Bemt, ba£ 2lb.er, the if, the but. 

3d, Names of countries and places ; as, Seutfcfykmb, $rcm?s 
veid), fietp^ig, $retburg, Germany. France, Leipzig, Freiburg. 

Except the following : tie $rimm, Crimea ; bte £auft|, Lusitania; 
bte Sflnrf, Mark; tie s pfa^, Palatinate; tie <3d)ttKt$, Switzerland; 
all those ending in e t ; as, tie StirM, 2Batad)et *c v Turkey, Wala- 
chia ; and all those compounded with an or q a u ; e. g. bet JBtetSs 
gnu, Me SQBettctcm u. 

4th, Mua: collective nouns and names of materials ; as, bct3 
SBfrtf, the people ; QStet), cattle ; glei'fd), flesh ; £aar, the hair. 

5th, Names of metals ; as, ba3 @tfen, ©cJlb, ©tlber, 3 tnn / tne 
iron, gold, silver, tin. 

Except: bet .fteMt, cobalt ; bte ^(attna, platina ; bet @tat)l, steel; 
bet Sombacf/ tombac ; t)cx Sinf, zink. 

GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES DISTINGUISHED BY THEIR 
TERMINATION. 

§ 15. I. Masculines. To the masculine gender be* 
long : 



384 

1st, Primary derivatives* of one syllable ; as, bet %tiiQ, &d)l<x$ t 
©prud), 2cwf> %lu$f the flight, beat, sentence, course, river. 

2d, Most derivatives, both primary and secondary, terminating 
inef, er, en, tng, 1 1 n 3 ; e.g. ber ©tpfel, top; ©cfynabel, 
beak; Summer, sorrow; hunger, hunger; ©arten, garden; 
SBagert, waggon; faring, herring ; ^bfJtng, courtier; ©iinjb 
ling, favourite. 

To these there are many exceptions : — 

Exc. 1. Substantives, the gender of which is otherwise de- 
termined by their signification; e. g. tie gutter, mother; &od)tct, 
daughter; bie £ftffcl, Dbet (rivers); tag (Stlber, silver; ^effing, 
brass. 

Exc. 2. Most names of animals in el, and many names ot 
things are feminine, e. g. bie 2lmfel, blackbird ; £)rcffel, thrush ; 
£>ummel, bumble-bee ; 2£ad)tel, quail ; 2Cd)jel, shoulder ; S3ucfel, boss ; 
(Stcbcl, acorn; QbcUt, fork ; 9?abel, needle; (g'cbacbtet, box; 8ci)inbel, 
shingle ; Safel, table ; Srcmmel, drum ; £But$el, root, &c. 

§ 16. Exc, 3. Words in el, of Latin origin, which formerly 
ended in la are feminine; as, btc Jormel, formula; Snfcl (insuZa), 
island, &c. ; but those which originally ended in lum are neuter, 
e. g. bag (Srt'rnpel (exempZwm), the example ; (Sapttel, chapter; Dra? 
fc( (oracu/wm), oracle. So also, bag S3(inbel, bundle ; ^fttttel, means ; 
(Stegcl, seal, and others. 

Z?#c. 4. The following in ct are feminine : — 

2(ber, vein. JUcfet, pine. 

2(ufter, oyster. Slammer, cramp. 

flatter, blister. flapper, clapper. 

S3uttet, butter. £e(>et, liver. 

(Sifter, magpie. Setter, ladder. 

$afet, fibre. 97?afer, speck, 

geber, pen. Matter, adder. 

•Slitter, tinsel. Dtter, viper, 

getter, torture. SKutfet, elm. 

£atftet, halter. @ci)(euber, sling. 

jammer, chamber. (Scbulter, shoulder, 

better, wine-press. ££tmper, eye-lash. 

Exc. 5. The following in e t are neuter : — 
2tttet, age. (guter, udder. 

©iter, pas. gubet, load. 

* Substantives formed from primitive verbs by a simple change of the 
radical vowel, are called primary derivatives ; as, £3rttcf), breach, from bre-- 
djett, to break ; 3w& march, from ^iebett, to march. Commonly they add no 
other termination to the root of the verb. But sometimes they assume e r, 
e I, e it, and also b, e, t, ft. Secondary derivatives are formed either from 
verbs, from adjectives, or from other nouns, by means of certain affixes, 
such as ei, et fee it feit, u'lrg, fdjaft jc. 



385 



gutter, fodder. 

staffer, fathom. 
2agor, couch. 
Gaffer, vice. 
CcKt, leather. 
£upcr, carrion. 



goffer, knife. 
5Q?tecer, bodice. 
Sftuftcr, pattern. 
Spelfter, cushion. 
£Kut>cr, oar. 
lifer, bank. 
SBetter, weather, 
hunter, wonder. 



sffiaittv, a measure of corn. 3tmmer, room. 
t xc. 6. Of those terminating in e n, the following are neutet — 
t«t &edin, basin ; JUffcrt, cushion; QaUn, sheet; SSSappen, escutch- 
eon t St'tdjcn^ sign. 

§17, IL Feminizes. To the feminine gender belong : 

1st, All substantives having the termination t n n (also writ- 
ten t it), which affix is joined to masculine names of persona 
and animals, to form corresponding terms for females ; e. g. 
©ott, @6rtmn; Come, fioanmt, lion, lioness; £)eti>, £eti>crm> 
hero, heroine, &c. 

2d, Primary derivatives in be, e, t, ft; e. g. bte ©cfyfonge, 
snake ; 5\unt>e, knowledge ; 93erminft, reason ; 5?unft, art. 

Ezc. 1. The following are masculine : — 



*8ajt, bast. 
SBeoacbt/ reflection. 
S3ctracr)t, consideration. 
S)ad)t, wick. 
£>tcnjt, service. 
;Draf)t, wire. 
jDunft, vapour. 
£>urft, thirst. 
@rnjr, earnestness. 
$erft, forest. 
g ; rcft / frost, 
©tfebt, yest. 
(Sh'ttrinnjr, gain. 
$ed)t, pike. 
»£>ctbfT, autumn. 
SKtjt, dung. 



9EKonb, moon. 

93?oncit, month. 

SKcjr, must. 

IKejt, rust. 

(Sd)acbt, shaft (in mines). 

©d>aft, shaft! 

©chuff, rascal. 

<§cit>, pay. 

©ttft, tag. 

grejt, comfort. 

SSetfcacbt, suspicion. 

SSerlujt, loss. 

SBanjt, paunch. 

£Btcbt, wight. 

SQ&ujt, filth. 



Swijt, dispute. 

Exc. 2. The following are neuter : — ca$ (SJefpenfr, spectre ; dfe# 
ffebt, face; £>aupt, head; JUnt), child; illeinot), jewel; 2td)t, -ight; 
©ttft, (ecclesiastical) foundation. 

§ 18. ^d, Secondary derivatives, formed by the affixes e t, 
e, t)ett, fett, ung, f df) aft, atfy, titty; as, bte £eucr)elei, 
hypocrisy; ©torfe, strength; £iibnfyett, boldness; gttelfett, 
vanity; gefhmg, fortress; Canfcfcfyaft, landscape; £eimatfr, 
home ; Sftmutfy, poverty. 
17 



386 



Exceptions. Many of those in e are masculine ; as, ber #ctfe 
the hare; SRctbc, crow; S\a\c, cheese, &c, and some are nejter; 
as, ba$ Uu§e, the eye ; Qtibc, inheritance ; (£nK', end, &c. — 3teratt) # 
ornament, is masculine, and §)etfd)aft, seal, is neuter. 

§19. III. Neuters. To the neuter gender belong :— 

1st, All diminutives ending in d)en and letn; as, fc>a$ 
Z&iiimdjen, the floweret ; ©ofyncfjen, little son ; aSucfylem, little 
book ; Jrauietn, young lady, miss. 

2d, Collective and frequentative substantives formed by the 
prefix g e ; as, bao ©efinbe, domestics ; ©etofe, noise ; ©e* 
fHrn, constellation; — ba$ (Serebe, talk; ©e'aufe, frequent 
walking, &c. 

3d, Most secondary derivatives formed by the affixes f c \, 
fat, tfyum, nt§; as, ba$ Ueberb(ebfe(, remainder ; 3?ati)fet, 
riddle , Srartgfal, distress ; ©cfytcffal, fete ; (SbrijTentfyum, Chris- 
tianity; ^eraogtfcum, dukedom; SSunfcmfj, alliance; aSerfydlt* 
tttjj, relation. 

.Eac. 1. CK *hose in tfyum, three are masculine: — ber 3>tr* 
tr)um, error ; 9ietd>tr)unt/ riches ; SBadbfitnum, growth. Of those in 
fa f, Stfibfal, affliction, is feminine; (Btopfel, stopper, is masculine. 

Exc. 2. The following in n t p are feminine : — 

SBebrangnip, grievance. (Stlautmtp, permission. 

SBctrubnip, affliction. $aulnt§, putrefaction. 

93crummerntp, sorrow. §tn)1erni£, darkness. 

SBefonuitj}/ apprehension. Jtenntmp, knowledge. 



SBcroanbrnp, condition. 
(Smpfangmp, conception. 
(Srfparmp, savings. 



SScrbanmimQ, damnation. 
SBUbtup, wilderness. 



GENDER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 20. Compound substantives generally adopt the gender 
of the second component, which contains the emphatic idea ; 
as, ber fttrdf) t) d f, the church-yard ; ba3 9?att) fy a it S, the town- 
hall ; bte 2Binb m ii t) I e, the windmill. 

Exc* 1. Names of places are always neuter, though their prin- 
cipal component may be masculine or feminine ; e. g. (c-cte) grd* 
b u r 9 (b i e SSurcj), |>am burg, SBitten c t g (b e t ^erc;), &c. 

Exc. 2. A number of substantives compounded with be? 
ZH u 1 1) are feminine : — 



TTrmmtf), grace. 
£)emutf), humility, 
©rofmuitfj, generosity. 
Cangmutf), forbearanee. 



©cmftmutrj, meekness, 
©cbroermutf), melancholy 
aBetjmutf), sadness. 



387 * 

Exc> 3. The following likewise deviate from the general rule* 
<jer 2(b j cb e u (b 1 1 Scbeu), abhorrence ; tic Stfcun a u 9 e, lamprey ; the 
following compounls of Sbeit, part: — bos ©egentbctl, the reverse; 
£tntertbeU, hind part; &erbertt)i'il, fore part ; also, b c r $ftittn?ocr;, 
Wednesday, which, however, sometimes is t> i c £ftttttt>cd). 



GENDER OF FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 21. Those foreign substantives which have preserved their 
original form, retain also the gender which they have in the lan- 
guage from which they are adopted ; e. g. ber Sector, ©nrtbt* 
cu£ ; bte Sr;ntaxt3, Da3 Sonctltum. 

But those, whose form has become assimilated to German 
words, frequently assume another gender ; e. g. ber SUtar 
(altare), the altar ; ber Sorper (corpus), the body ; ber Siuin 
(ruina), the ruin ; ba§> Sonfulat (consulatus), the consulship, &c. 

Some substantives have two genders, and are generally also em- 
ployed in different significations. The following list exhibits the 
most important of them : — 



£)cr 23cmb, the volume ; 
£)er ^auer, the peasant ; 
£)er 9$unb, the alliance ; 
2)er (£ber, the choir ; 
£)ic (Srienntntjj, knowledge 
£)ct (Srbe, the heir ; 
£)et (5$eba(t, the contents ; 
3)er (Skufet, the hostage ; 
£>et £etbe, the pagan ; 
*Det jtunbe, the customer ; 
iDcr sjtfenfd), man ; 
£>et SKeiS, rice ; 
£>er @d)tl&, the shield ; 
3)et See, the lake ; 
£>et @ttft> the peg ; 
£)et &bet(, the part ; 
£)er Shot, the fool ; 
£)et gkrbienjt, earnings ; 



bciS 23cmb, the ribbon. 

bas £>auet, the cage. 

to? SBunb, the bundle. 

bciS (Sber, the chorus. 

ba* (Srfenntmp, decision (judicial). 

ba$ (SrOe, the inheritance. 

ba$ ©ebalt, the salary. 

bte ©ctjK'f, the whip. 

bte £etbe, the heath. 

bie .ftunbe, knowledge. 

tat sJHcnfd)/ the wench. 

bo^ SKetS, the twig. 

bag <Sd)ilb, sign (of a house). 

bte (See, the sea. 

ba$ Sttft, charitable foundation 

ba$ Sfyett, the share. 

la$ £t)or, the door. 

bo^ $etbtenJT, the merit. 



II NUMBER. 

§ 22 In German, as in English, substantives have 
two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. 

With respect to the termination of the singular no 
definite rules can be given. 



388 

The nominative plural is formed from the nomina« 
tive singular according to one of the following Rules:—* 

Rule L The nominative plural frequently does not 
differ from the nominative singular by any additional 
letter or syllable, especially in masculine and neuter 
substantives ending el, er, en, and diminutives in 
tf) e n and I e i n ♦ 

It is then either the same as the singular, or is distinguished 
from it by the modification of its radical vowel ;* e. g. ber Srt* 
get, the angel, pi. bte (£ngel; ber ftatfer, emperor, pi. bte 
Staffer ; ba3 $enfter, window, pi. bte $enjter ; — ber 93ater, fa- 
ther, pi. bte 2)dter; ber ©fen, stove, pi. bte Defenj ber 93ru* 
ber, brother, pi. bte SBriiber. 

There are only two feminine substantives belonging to this 
class: SOiutter, mother; 'Xocfyter, daughter, pi. Splitter, locfy* 
ter. The change of the radical vowel is restricted to mascu- 
line nouns ; of neuters, only Softer, monastery, has Stlojler in 
the plural ; — but, ba$ 2Bafi*er, water, pi. bte SBafier ; ba3 9?u* 
ber, oar, pi. bte JWu&er. 

§ 23. Rule II. In all other cases the nominative 
plural is formed from the nominative singular by an- 
nexing one of the terminations e, er, en (it); e. g. bet 
$reimb, the friend, pi. bte $reunb e ; ber Sinabe, the boy 
pi. bte Slnahen ; ba$ $ud), the book, pi. bte 23ud) er* 

Obs. 1. The termination e belongs chiefly to masculine substan- 
tives. It is, however, also added to feminines and neuters ; e. g. 
ber Sag, the day, pi. tie %aof, ber £epf, the head, pi. bte Jtopfe; 
bie £unjT, an, pi. bte jttmfte ; bag 2Bort, the word, pi. bte £Botte* 

Ofo. 2. The termination er properly belongs to nouns of the 
neuter gender only. Masculines assume it only by way of excep- 
tion ; e. g. bat 33ttb, the picture, pi. bte 93iloer ; bas Jttnb, the 
child, pi. bte .fttnber ; ber ®etjt, the spirit, pi. bte ©etfter. 

Obs. 3. The termination e n (n) is assumed principally by femi- 
nines, also by masculines, and a few neuters ; e. g. bte ©dnttc, the 
school, pi. bte (Scbufcn ; bte 9?abet, the needle, pi. bte 9?aMn ; ber 
$a\c, the hare, pi. bte £afcn ; ia$ £>fyr, the ear, pi. bte £)l)ren. 

§ 24. Obs. 4. Substantives which form their plural in e X 

* That pert of the substantive which is never affected by the changes of in- 
flection is called its root. When it contains one of the vowels a, o, U, or tha 
diphthong cm, they are frequently changed into a, 5, w, (iu in the plural and are 
then said to be modified. 



389 

alimys modify the vowels of the root (a, D, u, cut) ; and those 
which form their plural in e n, never modify it. With respect 
to plurals in e, the modification always takes place when the 
substantive is* feminine, and usually too when it is masculine, 
but rarely when it is neuter. 

Rule III. Masculine and neuter nouns adopted from modern 
languages frequently form their plural in g; as, ©emVS, 8orb&, 
©olo'S ; so also German words, the termination of which is not 
susceptible of inflection ; as, bic IT&, bte 2% bte ty ap a ' $♦ 

Rule IV. Nouns compounded with 9Jtcmn usually take 
£ elite instead of 30? d n n e r (the regular pi. of SDlann) in 
the plural ; e. g. ber $auf m a n n, the merchant, pi. $cmf I elite; 
ber £of m an n, the courtier, pi. tie £)of I eute. 

§ 25. Common nouns alone are by their significa- 
tion entitled to a plural number. 

The following classes of substantives want the plu- 
ral: — 

1st, Proper names, except when they assume the signification 
of common nouns (§ 45) ; as, $ar(, grtebrtdf), JRom. 

2d, Names of materials, except when different species of the 
same genus are to be denoted ; as, ba§ Stfen, ©tlber, @olb, 
iron, silver, gold ; — but bte (Srben, the earths (different kinds) ; 
tie Sftmcralroaffer, mineral waters. 

3d, Many collectives ; as, ba$ ©eftnbe, the domestics ; tai 
Q3tel)/ cattle, &c. 

4th, All infinitives and neuter adjectives used substantively ; 
as, ba3 3Betg, white (the colour) ; ba£ £agttd)e, the ugly ; fca§ 
gmfommen, the income ; fca3 SBtflfen, knowledge. 

5th, Most abstract substantives, especially such as denote 
qualities, powers or affections of the mind, &c. ; as, hex %\ei%, 
diligence ; tie ^ii^ent, youth ; tie QSernunft, reason ; tie i$uvd)t, 
fear. Sometimes, however, they become concrete, expressing 
different kinds of the "same quality, &c, and then they are em- 
ployed in the plural ; as, lugenben, virtues ,• ©cfyonfyetten, beau- 
ties. 

§ 26. 6th, Substantives denoting number, measure, weighty 
when preceded by a numeral, are put in the singular, even 
though in other connections they may form a plural ; as, groet 
g u g btett, two feet wide fed)3 ^ f u n t 23utter, six pounds 
of butter ; cm JRegtment son tcmfenb 9J? a tt tt (not banner, pl.)j 
a regiment of thousand men* 



390 



Exceptions. Feminine substantives in e, and such as express a 
measure of time ; as, ^roct ©lien (fct e (SUc) £ud), two ells of cloth; 
fiinf 3 a fyte tang, for five years; moreover, all names of coins; 
as, greet ©rofcben, $wb'lf .£ reiser, two groshes, twelve kreuzers, — are 
put in the plural as in English. 

§ 27. Some substantives are employed in the plur- 
al number only : — 



trousers. 



Stfynert, ancestors. 
5(ettern, parents. 
2Upen, alps. 
SSetnfleiber, ) 
£ofen, ) 

S3rieffd)aften, papers. 
Sinfiinfte, revenue, 
^aften, Lent, 
gerten, vacation. 
©efafte, rents, 
©liebmagen, limbs. 
Soften, expenses. 
Seute, people. 



measles. 



rSftctferrt, 
9?6ti)eln, r 
90? elf en, whey. 
Dfterrt, Easter, 
spftngjlen, Whitsuntide 
Stdrtfe, tricks, 
©porteln, fees. 
Iraber, husks. 
Iriimmer, ruins. 
Irnppen, troops. 
SBetfynacfyten, Christmas. 
3ettldufte, junctures. 
3tnfen, interest of money. 



§ 28. There are a number of substantives which 
have two forms for the plural, partly as a simple dia- 
lectic variety, but most commonly with different sig- 
nifications : — 



Singular. 
3)er 93cmb, the volume ; 
£)a$ 23anb, the ribbon ; 
2)aS 93anb, the bond ; 
Ste 23anf, the bench ; 
£>ie 95anf, the bank ; 
£)er 93 cuter, the peasant ; 
2)a§ SSauer, the cage ; 

Set £)ow> the thorn ; 

Sa$ Stttg, the thing ; 
SaS Dtng, little creature 
£>a£ ©eftcfyt, the face ; 
£)a§ ©eftcfyt, the vision ; 
£)a$ £orn> the horn ; 



Plus a l 

bte 95dnbe. 
tie 23dnber> 
bte 23anbe. 
bte QSdnfe. 
bte aSanfem 
bte 53auern. 
bte 95auer. 
Somen. 
Sorner. 
bte Dt'nge. 
bte Dinger. 
tk ©eftcfyter. 
tie ©eftcfyte. 

bie Werner; but $i>rne, dif- 
ferent sorts of horn. 



391 



Ser Sabett, the shutter ; 
Der i ? aben, the shop ; 

S)er ©rt, the place ; 

Der Scfyttb, the shield ; 
Da3 Scfytlb, the sign ; 
£)a£ ©nicf, the piece ; 
SaS ©tucf, the fragment ; 
£)er Ifecr, the fool ; 
£)a3 Ifyor, the door; 
S)a3 28ort, the word ; 



tie Cafeen. 

bte £dben. 
< Orte. 
I Oerter. 

bte Scfyttfce. 

bxe ©cfyttfcer. 

tie ©tmfe. 

bie Stitcfen. 

fcte %i}Oxgn. 

bte Ifyere. 

bteffibrter; but ffiorte, word* 
in connected discourse. 



III. INFLECTION. 

§ 29. For the purposes of declension we divide 
German substantives into two classes, which differ es- 
sentially in their mode of inflection ; viz : 1st, Common 
and Abstract Nouns ; 2d, Proper Names. 

DECLENSION OF COMMON AND ABSTRACT NOUNS. 

§ SO. Common and abstract nouns have two prin 
cipal forms of inflection, denominated the earlier and 
the later declensions. The characteristic distinction of 
each is the termination of its genitive singular, which 
in the earlier declension is 3 or e $, and in the later 
n or e it. 

All feminine substantives are invariable in the sin- 
gular ; hence their mode of declension is determined 
by the nominative plural. 

The nominative, genitive and accusative plural are 
always alike, and their difference is pointed out by 
the article only. 

The dative plural always assumes tt, unless its nom- 
inative already ends in that letter. 



EARLIER DECLENSION 



§31. The earlier declension comprises nouns of all 
genders, and may be distinguished by the termination 



392 

of its genitive singular, which (feminine nouns ex 
cepted) is always $ or e $♦ 

The nominative plural is either the same as the 
nominative singular, or it assumes one of the termina- 
tions e, e x r e tt or n. 

In the plural the radical vowels a, 0, U, and the diph- 
thong an, are»generally modified into a, b, tt, an* 

Hence to inflect a word of this declension, not only 
the genitive singular, but also its nominative plural 
must be given ; e. g. ber SSruber, the brother, gen. be£ 
Sruberg, nom. pi. bte SSrttber ; bte grucfyt, fruit, nom. pi. 
bte griidtfe ; ba$ Me\t>, the garment, gen. beg $Ieibeg, 
nom. pi. bte $fetber. 



TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OP THE EARLIER 







DECLENSION. 








Singular. 


Plural. 






I. II. 


III. 


W. 


Nom. 


given. 


like the sing. 


e. 


er. 


en, n. 


Gen. 


eS, & (en$, n$). 


(6 


e. 


er. 


en, «. 


Dat. 


e, or like the nom. 


tt. 


en. 


ern. 


en, «♦ 


Ace. 


like the nom. 


like the nom. 


e. 


er. 


en, *♦ 



§32. PARADIGMS. 



I. a. £)er 23ater, the father. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber 93ctter, the father ; bte 93dter, the fathers. 

Gen. be$ 93ater$, of the father ; ber 93&ter, of the fathers. 

Dat. bem 93a ter, to the father ; ben 93d tern, to the fathers. 

Ace. ben 93ater, the father ; bte 93dter, the fathers. 

I. b. £)te StRutter, the mother. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. bte Wtitter, the mother; bte SEftfitter, the mothers. 

Gen. ber Wutter, of the mother ; ber SOWttter, of the mothers. 

Dat. ber 5ftutter, to the mother; ben 5)titttern, to the mothers 

Ace. bte 9Dtittter, the mother ; bte Sftiitter, the mother* 



393 





II a. ©er aSaum, the tree. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


ber aSaum, the tree ; 
be3 aSctitmeS, of the tree ; 
bem aSattme, to the tree ; 
ben aScutm, the tree ; 


bte aSdttme, the trees, 
ber a3dttme, of the trees, 
ben aSdumen, to the trees, 
bte 53dume, the trees. 




II. b. £te £ 


anb, the hand. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom, 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


bte £anb, the hand ; 
ber £)ctnb, of the hand ; 
ber £>anb, to the hand ; 
bte £>cmb, the hand ; 


bte £dnbe, the hands, 
ber |)dnbe, of the hands, 
ben |)dnben, to the hands, 
bte f)dnbe, the hands. 



III. a. £aS 2teb, the song. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ba§ Cteb, the song ; bte Steber, the songs. 

Gen. be3 2tebe3, of the song ; ber £teber, of the songs. 

Dat. bem Stebe, to the song ; ben Ctebern, to the songs. 

Ace. ba§ Steb, the song ; bte Sieber, the songs. 

III. b. Ser ©etft, the spirit. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber $etjr, the spirit ; bte ©etfter, the spirits. 

Gen. be3 ©etfteS, of the spirit; ber ©etjler, of the spirits. 

Dat. bem ©etfte, to the spirit ; ben ©etftern, to the spirits. 

Ace. ben ©etft, the spirit ; bte ©etfter, the spirits. 

IV. a. £)er ©tral)l, the ray. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ber Straff, the ray ; bte ©trafyten, the rays 

Gen. be3 ©tral)le3, of the ray; ber <Strat)(en, of the rays. 

Dat. bem ©trable, to the ray ; ben ©trafeten, to the rays. 

Ace. ben ©trafyl, the ray ; bte ©trafy(et» ; the rays. 

IV. b. SaS 2(uge, the eye. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. ba£ 2(nge, the eye ; bte Sfngen, the eyes. 

Gen. be$ 2luge$, of the eye ; ber Sdtgen, of the eyes. 

Dat. bem SCuge, to the eye ; ben 3(ugen, to the eyes. 

Ace. ba£ SUige, the eye ; bte 2lugen, the eyes. 
17* 



394 

Vi £)er Iftame, the name. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. bet SKame, the name ; bte Sftamen, the names. 

Gen. be$ 9? curt en 3, of the name; ber Xiamen, of the names. 

Dat. bem 9iamen,to the name; ben 9iamen, to the names. 

Ace. ben Seamen, the name ; bte SKamert, the names. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

The laws of euphony alone can decide, whether the termi- 
nation of the genitive singular is to be $ or e3, and whether 
the dative is to be like the nominative or to have e* Gener- 
ally, however, nouns ending in b, b, t, ft, d), g, f, 3, fd), p, j 
form their genitive in e 3, and their dative in e ; those ending 
in a n b, at, e n b, t d) t, t g, t rt g, It n g, r t cf), f a (, 1 1) u m 
have a in the genitive, and the dative like the nominative. 

§ 33. Like SSater (I. a.) are inflected all masculine 
and neuter substantives terminating in e I, e r or e n $ 
diminutives in cf) e tt and I e i n ; and neuters in e, which 
have the prefix g e ; as, ©erebe, ©etofe, talk, noise, &c. 
Examples : — 

£>et 2fpfel, apple ; bag gcnJTCt, window ; 

bet (£nfe(, grandchild ; bctS ©erottter, thunderstorm ; 

bet sBeget, bird ; bet Degen, sword ; 

bat (Skqet, seal; bet ©atten, garden; * 

bet 2(blet, eagle ; bet SHtagen, waggon ; 

bet 33tut>et, brother ; bat ^ecfen, basin ; 

bet 9)feifUt, master ; bat Betcften, signal. 

SOlabc&en, girl, maiden ; S3ud)(ein, little book ; 

33eild)en, violet; S3tum(etn, floweret. 

Sffluttet and Secfytet, daughter, are the only feminine substantives 
which retain in the plural the termination of the nominative sin- 
gular. 

§ 34. Like bet S3cutm (II. a.) are inflected the follow- 
ing :— 

1st, Masculines and neuters terminating in the affixes attb, 
at, tcfjt, tg, trig, Itng, tier); e. g. £eilanb, saviour; SOfonat, 
month ; Sdftg, cage ; £cutptttng, chieftain, &c. 

2d, Many foreign substantives, such as, bet 2(br, 5((tar, 95 i* 
fcfjof, Satbuial, ^afaft; the abbot, alter, bishop, cardinal, pal- 
ace, &c. 



395 

3d, All substantives ending in the affixes ntg and fat; 
wi We gutftenrig, darkness ; fiennttug, knowledge ; fcaS ©d)trf* 
fax fate ; Drangfat, calamity, &c. 

74ke fete ijanb (II. b.) are declined the following fem- 
inizes :— 

ICncjft, anguish. £ufr, air. 

2(u*fhtd)t, evasion. £uft, delight. 

2(yt, axe. S!32ad)f, power. 

S*ant\ bench. SR'agff/ maid-servant. 

SBraut, bride. 93tau*, mouse. 

SBruft, breast. Sftacbt, night. 

$au)T, fist. $laht, seam, 

gcucbt, fruit. 9?etb, distress. 

<&<m&, goose* Stfu&, nut. 

©tffctouljt, swelling <Sau, sow. 

©ntft, tomb. ©cbnur, string. 

£cutt, ikin. ©taDt, city. 

Jtlufr, ^ulf. 2Bant>, wall. 

$raft, force. SQ^utft, tumour. 

Jtub, row. ££urJT, sausage. 

$unji, a/%. 3unft, guild. 
SOUS, 1-6 a» 

To these are to be added the compounds of the words jtunft and 
Sauft, which are never employed oeparately ; as, bte Sufcmtmen* 
runft, the meeting ? (Siufiupe, pi., revenues ; 3ettlaufU', pi., junctures 
(§ 27). 

Remark. Masculines of this form generally modify the 
radical vowel in the plural ; feminines always ; of neuters only 
the following three : — baS (£f)or, the chorus ; ba$ glo0/ the 
rail ; fcaS 3?ot)r, the reed ; pi. (Sfyore, v gloge, JRofyre. 

§ 35. Substantives declined like bct£ £ieb (III.) are gen- 
erallj of the neuter gender, and masculine only by 
way of exception. They always modify the vowel 
of the root. Examples : — 

2Cmt, office. , £amm, lamb. 

2*ucb, book. £?tjl, nest. 

£)erf, village. 9tut>, wheel. 

(SklD, money. &d)te$, castle, 

©rab, grave. 830(6, nation, 

^raut, herb. SBeib, woman. 

So also all nouns ending in t^um; as, 9? I'tcjtfimn, riches ; &et* 
gOQtbum, dukedom, and a few foreign words ; ad, spavtament, Sicgi* 
mint, @pita(. 



396 



The masculines declined likp o;.s 

S«b, body; sofo,, man ; w ^ e . ,,f ' f !P" lt (HI. b.) ; @ ott God 
*«^ ardian; SBa^fH^^a at . border; 

of th^^^lr" ^ «** (IV.) are 
Jw in numbe/and ^ve r to r dl ^ erS - ^ but 
Ae plural. They are :-! fy the radlcal v ^wel in 

also ^eor, which im^iffe^^ a»«W r *i 
■ ^a, foreign words which «,m v, 

termination f „ m , as g™ h , fj ^ve or once had the Latin 
3|um, pi. geflw lectures ; %Kf D f^«'f di ^>- SoUe> 
also those ending in ti » «« « ■ v • ' £ 3rboer ken, adverbs : 
gating i„ £ or ^ ?^M»«* *£ . those' 
^ 9 a( te „- 5^ pL ^ . ^ » "» the plural, as, fWegof, pi 

3* The following masculine substantives - 
«£&£**'*> ^n,s P u, 

©mttcr g od-father Iff k ^ 

Serbccr, laurel. ST f V boot ' 

5K< mast ® fwu & ostrich. 

gMfcr, neighbour. Sj?% cousin - 

3>fcu, peacock. WfWert&an, subject. 

m, sea. Blitatt), finery. 

mie h „li J e ° s jgf? m ^ * ***** the following /or< ^ 

G*nfuf, consul. ~ ..- , 

S^mcn, demon. f r T ct ' P refe ^t. 

2>»anwnt, diamond I m ' psalrn - 

f*», pheasant 2?** rub y- 

Smpcft, impost. f ' aar ' state - 

aKutel, muscle. ~ rCn ' thron *- 

^nntcffcO slipper. Srartat, treaty. 

5th, The following neuter words •_ 
Jfogc, eye. <* r * . 

SBert, bed. Jnfert, insect. 

<£nfce, end. SJwnem, pronoun. 

&mt>, shirt. ©tatut, statute. 

* o^ T ., ® CVb ' verb - 

{ • L ' te »~ < V -> « -feted , he f„,w ing 



39 1 ? 

masculines: — ber 23udf)fta6e, letter ; gel$, rock ; ft'rtebe, 
peace ; gunfe, spark ; ©ebcmfe, thought ; ©(aube, faith 
£aufe, heap ; Same, seed ; (Ecfyabe, detriment ; 2i$itfe, 
will. These substantives, however, frequently assume 
an n in the nominative ; e. g. ber gunfen, ©ebanfen, 
and then they follow the inflection of the first form 

(Warn). 

Remark. The word $ erg, heart, has en 3 in the genitive, 
and retains the e n in the dative singular and in all the cases 
of the plural, thus : — 

Singular. Plural. 

bk £er$cn, 
ter .jc>cr$ett, 



Nom. t>a$ £cr$, 
*Gen. fccg ^er.^nS, 
Dat. fcnit ^)cqcn, 
Ace. baS £er$ ; 



ben ^cr^cn, 
tic Jpcqen. 



The word @chmer$, pain, has either c n $ or e g in the genitive, 
and in the dative en or e. Nom. ber <Scbnier$, Gen. be? <Scbmer$enS 
or (Scbmeqef, Dat. bem Sfdbmerjen or ©cbmeqc ; Nom. pi. bic 
.©cbmcr$cn. The word @d)tccf, terror, is also irregular : Nom. bet 
(Scbrccf or ©cbrecfen, Gen. t>e$ (ScbrecfcnS or ©cbrecfe*, Dat. bem 
©cbrctf or ©djtctfm, Ace. ben @d)tecf or 8d)rec!en ; Nom, pi. bie 
©cfyrccfen. 



LATER DECLENSION. 

§ 38. Substantives of this declension are either 
masculine or feminine. 

Masculines form their genitive in n or ett, and re- 
tain that termination in all the remaining cases sin- 
gular and plural. 

Feminines being indeclinable in the singular, as- 
sume the n or e n in the plural only. 

No nouns of this declension ever modify the radica. 
vowels a, 0, U, or the diphthong au in the plural (§ 24). 

TABULAR VIEW OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE LATER 





DECLENSION 






Singular. 


Plural. 




Masculine. 


Masc. and Fem. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 


given, 
en, n, 
en, tt, 


en, n, 
en, n, 
en, n, 


Ace. 1 


en, n. 


en, n. 



393 



§39 PARADIGMS 



I. 

Singular. 
Nom. ber ©raf, the count ; 

Gen. be$ ©rafen, of the count; 
Dat. bem ©rafen, to the count ; 
Ace. £>m ©rafen, the count ; 



Ser ©raf, the count. 

Plural. 
bte ©rafen, the counts 
ber ©rafen, of the counts 
Den ©rafen, to the counts 
bte ©rafen, the counts. 



II. £)er Srbe, the heir. 



Singular. 
Nom. tier (Srbe, the heir ; 

Gen. be3 CSrben, of the heir ; 
Dat. fcem Srben, to the heir ; 
Ace. ben Srfceu, the heir ; 



Plural. 

bte (£rben, tta> heirs; 

ber (£rben, of the heirs ; 

ten (£rben, to the heirs ; 

bte (£rben, the heirs. 



III. 

Singular. 
Nom. bte $rau, the woman ; 
Gen. ber 3 ran, of the woman ; 
Dat. ber Shu*/ to the woman ; 
Ace. bte Sran, the woman ; 



Ste gran, the woman. 

Plural. 
bte $ranen, tne women ; 
ber grauen, of the women ; 
ben grauen, to the women ; 
bte grauen, the women. 



IV. Die $ebet, the pen. 



Singular. 
Nom. bte ^eber, the pen ; 

Gen. ber $ebet, of the pen ; 
Dat. ber geber, to the pen ; 
Ace. bte geber, the pen ; 



Plural 

bte $ebem, 
ber gebern, 
ben §ebern, 
bte gebern, 



the pens , 
of the pens ; 
to the pens 

the pens. 



observations. 

Ohs. 1. When the nominative singular ends in e, or in 
one of the unaccented affixes el, e r, a r, the genitive and re- 
maining cases assume n only ; as, ber 26n>e, the lion, gen. be$ 
Comen; bte Mangel, the pulpit, pi. bte ^angeln; ber 95aiu 
er, the farmer, gen. be$ SSauern ; otherwise e n becomes ne- 
cessary; e. g. ber£>elb, the hero, gen. beS £)etben; ber ©efett, 
the companion, gen. be$ ©efetten; ber ^oet, the poet, gen. be3 
*Poeten; bte $rait, plur. bte granen. 

Obs. 2. Feminine substantives were formerly declined in 
the singular number also; this practice, however, has been 



399 

retained only in certain adverbial expressions, in wh'eh the 
substantive is connected with a preposition; e. g. auf Srben, 
on earth; mtt $miben, with joy, joyfully; son Setten be3 
KontgS, from the part of the king; in ©naben, graciously; 
mtt (£l)ren fierben, to die an honourable death ; $u ©cfyanber 
Herbert, to be put to shame, &c. ; sometimes en seems to be 
annexed simply for the sake of euphony ; as, fetner grail i ** 
23ater, his wife's father. 

§ 40. To this declension belong the following clas- 
ses of nouns : — 

1st, Masculines of one syllable ; as, 33ar, ^ear ; $tecf, spot j 
giirft prince; ©raf, count; £elb, hero; £)crr (has £)errn in 
the gen. and dat. sing., but Qcvvetl in the plur.), master; 
SRenfdj, man ; 9?arr, fool ; *Dfau, peacock ; ^3rtng, prince ; 
Htyov, simpleton. 

2d, Masculines terminating in e unaccented ; e. g. 

2CfiV/ f he ape. $nappe, squire. 

£5art>c, bard. Sttacbfemmc, descendant. 

SBiirge. surety. Stfcffc, nephew. 

£)racbc, dragon. $}atbc, sponsor. 

gaffe, hawk. ERiefe, giant, 

©cbutfc, assistant. (Sclat>c, slave. 

©e£c, idol. 3euCjC, witness. 
£>trtc, shepherd. 

3d, Names of nations, such as are not derived from 
the name of the country. They generally end also in 
e; e. g. 

bcr 3kter, the Bavarian. bcr Sfflaure, the Moor, 

bcr SBobmc, the Bohemian. ber $pole, the Pole, 

bcr 93rttte, the Britain. bcr Sprcugc, the Prussian. 

bcr Vulgar, the Bulgarian. bcr 9^uflTc y the Russian, 

bcr £)anc, the Dane. bcr ©acbfe, the Saxon, 

bcr 2)cutfcbc, the German. bcr ©cbroafrc, the Swabian. 

bcr £ran$ofc, the Frenchman bcr Scbnxbc, the Swede. 

bcr ©rtcebe, the Greek. bcr Scirtar, the T«artar. 

bcr £cffc, the Hessian. bcr Surfr, the Turk, 

bcr 3ubc, the Jew. bcr Ungar, the Hungarian. 

§ 41. 4th, Masculine substantives of foreign origin, termi- 
nating in ant, ard), at, ent, if, tft, et, it, ot, 03, opb, 
cm it ] e. g. ber ^rotejlant, 5)?ertarcr/, ganbtbat, ^rdtat, &t\x* 
bent, ^rafibent, JfatboKf, Otterbcbtft, Shrift tyoet, hornet, @re* 
mtt, Sefutt, Sbtot, Ibeelog, fpbtloleg, ^btlefopb, Wronom jc. 

5th, All the feminine nouns in the language, except 



400 

those mentioned above (§ 33 and § 34). They are 
either monosyllables, as Sabtt, path ; ^Pfltcfyt, duty, or 
polysyllables, chiefly ending in e, el, er, atl^. ti, eni t 
\}t\t, tun, fcfyaft, ung. The following muy aesve as 
examples : — 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

2Crt, kind. (Boat, seed. 

*But(}, citadel. ©cblacbt, battle, 

glur, plain. €Spuv, trace. 

Stagt), chase. Shot, deed. 

Sajl, burden. 3a W/ number. 
£Xual, torment. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

Uvbtit, labour. Sftatur, nature. 

(Snte, duck. £)bmnad)t, impotw** 

germel, formula. SpoeftC/ poetry. 

@c$ent>, region. SHcltgton, reJigioii. 

4banNung, action. ©cbtiffct, plate. 

Sttfigfcr, maiden. Scuibe, dove. 

.Rontjjtnn, queen. ltmr>crfitat, univar#3% 

flefrcnfcbaft, passion. S5ktf)rbctt, truth. 

Sftad)rict)t, news. 3unge, tongue. 

FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 42. 1st, With respect to substantives of foreign origin, wm 
have already under each declension, noticed such as have ac 
commodated their termination to the analogy of German words 
There are some, however, which still appear in their original 
form unaltered ; as, ber 5ftebtcug, the physician ; ber Safug, the 
case ; £)ct3 factum, the fact ; bag Ifeema, the theme, &c. These 
are cither indeclinable in the singular ; as, ber Slew 3, the 
clergy, gen. t)e^ Slewg, dat. bem Slewg, &c., or they as- 
sume g in the genitive ; as, bag factum, Snbimbuum, the fact, 
individual, gen. beg gactumg, Snbtmbmtmg. 

2d, In the plural, foreign nouns either assume en (§ 36); 
as, 33erbum, verb, pi. Herbert; ©rubutm, study, pi. ©rubten; 
or they retain in all cases the original termination of the nomi 
native plural ; as, 5ftebtct, 9Ruftct, Safug, facta, tfyemata. 

3d, Masculine and neuter substantives, adopted from the 
French or English, generally take g in the genitive singular, 
and retain it in all the cases of the plural ; ber Corb, gen. beS 
Corbg, pi. bte Sorbg ; ber Sfyef, the chieftain, gen. beg SJjefg, 
pi. bte Sbefg; bag ©erne, the genius, gen. be£ @eme% pL bit 
©cme% &c. (§ 24. Rule III.) 



401 



DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 

§ 43. Proper nouns are either names of Persons, or 
names of Countries and Places. 

Names of persons are declined either with or without 
the article. 

I. When preceded by either of the articles (em or ber), 
names of persons are not varied in the singular, the 
different cases being sufficiently indicated by the in- 
flection of the article ; as, ber @d)ttter, gen. beg ©duller, 
dat. bem Scatter, ace. ben ©emitter; etn gutter, gen* einetf 
fiutfyer, dat. eutem Sutfyer, ace. einett 2utl)er* 

Exception. If the genitive of the name of a male limiting the 
meaning of another word is connected with an adjective, and placed 
before the governing word, it assumes the termination 6 ; as, tk*6 Qto* 
pen .& a n t ' 5 SBerfe, the works of the great Kant ; tie* beriifymten 
3) ti r e x * $ ©emcilfce, the paintings of the celebrated Dtirer. 

§ 44. II. When not connected with the article, mas- 
culine names ending in 3, $, fct), r, $, and feminines end- 
ing in e, form their genitive in e n $ ; all other names, 
both masculine and feminine, including also diminu- 
tives in cfyert, form their genitive in '3 simply; e. g. 
SSftar, gen. $)lax e n g ; 33o$, gen. S3o$ e n g ; Souife, gen. 
?outfe n g ; but Hermann, gen. 5?ermann'3 ; Sari, gen. 
(Sari '$ ; ^dngefyen (Jonny), gen. £dn£d}en g ; ^Ibelfyetb, gen. 
Sfoetyefo' *♦ 

Remark 1. In the dative and accusative singular it has been 
customary to annex the termination c n. It is better, however, to 
leave those cases like the nominative, and to prefix the article, 
when ambiguity would otherwise arise; e. g. nom. C effing, gen. 
£effin$% dat. (t>em) Seffing (better than Ccffingen), ace. (t>cn; Cefftncj. 

Rem. 2. Names of Latin or Greek origin were formerly 
inflected after the manner of Latin nouns ; e. g. nom. *pcuihi$, 
gen. <Pault, dat. ^ctulo, ace. ^cuilum ; ^latomS ©efprdcfye, 
Plato's dialogues ; ©ceromS 9?eben, Cicero's orations, &c. 
Now, however, they follow the analogy of German nouns, and 
the ancient mode of inflection is only retained in a few expres- 
sions, as, Sfyrtftt ©eburt, &c; e. g. ^(ato'S ©efprdcfye ; g{* 
cero'S JReben ; ^bdbruS' gabeln nr bte gabeln be$ <Pbdbru$, the 
fables of Phiedrus ; ber 3teid)tl>um be3 SrofuS, the wealth oi 
Croesus, 



402 



PLURAL CF PROPER NAMES. 



§ 45. The plural of proper names is only employed when 
the same name is common to several individuals ; as, bte 
©cfylegel, bte §)ermanne, persons of the name of (£d)legel, £>er? 
mann ; or when they are converted into common nouns 
(§5.); as, bte 9ieutone unferer ^eit, tne Newtons of our 
age, &c. 

Rules. The inflection of proper names in the plural 
number is not influenced by the article, and the radi- 
cal vowels (<V0, U, an) are never modified. 

When the names are masculine, terminating in a, e, 
t, a I, e (, t f, e r, e n or d) e n, the plural remains unaltered. 

All other masculine names of German origin, and 
foreign names ending in a m, it, form their plural by 
adding e to the nom. sing. ; but those ending in o, add 
tte. Examples : — 



Sing. 


Plur. 


Sing. 




Plur 


Gotta, 


(bte) Gotta. 


2Cbolp&, 


(tic) 


tfbotpbe. 


(Sampc, 


„ (Sampe. 


£aget>orn, 


ft 


£aget>erne. 


£>anntba(, 


„ £anntOat. 


&m. 


// 


£)MDc. 


Sfflctct, 


„ SKcier. 


SJMancfytfjon, 


// 


£Eetand)tfjonc 


$Ko$ci)en, 


„ $Ko6d)en. 


(Sato, 


// 


©atone. 



The dative plural always assumes the termination 
It, unless the nominative already ends in that letter ; 
as, ben Sutler n, SWefoncfytljone n, &c, to the Luthers, 
Melanchthons, &c. 

Names of females invariably add e tt or it in every 
case of the plural? as, glora, pi. %ioxa% Sttife, ?mfett, 
£ebn% pi. ^ebttugem 



§ 46. 


PARADIGMS. 




Masculines. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. Sutler, 
Gen. Cntfyer'S, 
Dat (bem) Sutler, 
Ace. (ben) Sutler ; 




Nom. (bte) Cntfyer, 
Gen. ber* Cutler, 
Dat. (ten) £utf?ent, 
Ace. (bte) Cutler. 



* In the genitive plural the article is necessary to point out the ease (§ 3. 6th 



403 



SINGULAR. 

Nom. Setbmfc, 
Gen. getbmgenS, 
Dat. (bem) Cetbmi3, 
Ace. (ben) getbmg; 

Singular. 

Nom. Hermann, 

Gen. £>ermann% 

D lt. (bem) Hermann, 

Ace. (ben) Hermann; 

Singular. 

Nom. ©otbe, 
Gen. ©otbe'3, 
Dat. (bem) ©otbe, 
Ace. (ben) Obt^e; 



Plural. 

Nom. (bte) Cetbmge, 

Gen. ber Setbnt^e, 

Dat. (ben) £etbnt§en, 

Ace. (bte) Cetbmge. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) £>ermanne. 
Gen. ber £)ermanne, 
Dat. (ben) £>ermanneit, 
Ace. (bte) |)ermanne. 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) ©otfye, 

Gen. ber ©otfye, 

Dat. (ben) ®btier\, 

Ace. (bte) ©btbe. 



Feminines. 



Singular. 

Nom. SBertba, 
Gen. *Bertba% 
Dat. (ber) 23ertba, 
Ace. (bte) 93ertfya; 

Singular. 

Nom. ©ertraub, 

Gen. ©ertraub'3, 

Dat. (ber) ©ertraub 

Ace. (bte) ©ertraub 

Singular. 
Nom. gmfe, 
Gen. SutfenS, 
Dat. (ber) gm'fe, 
Ace. (bte) Sutfe ; 

Singular. 
Nom. Suite, 
Gen. SultenS, 
Dat. (ber) Suite, 
Ace. (bte) Suite; 



Plural. 



Nom. (bte) 23ertf)a'n, 

Gen. ber SSertfya'n, 

Dat. (ben) 23ertba'n, 

Ace. (bte) 25ertfya'm 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) ©ertraubett. 
Gen. ber ©ertraiiben, 
Dat. (ben) ©ertrauben, 
Ace. (bte) ©ertraubem 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) Cm'fen, 
Gen. ber gutfen, 
Dat. (ben) ?utfen, 
Ace. (bte) Cutfem 

Plural. 

Nom. (bte) SuKen, 
Gen. ber 'xidien, 
Dat. (ben) 3ulten, 
Ace. (bte) %ulien» 



404 



OBSERVATIONS. 



Ols. 1. The termination en$ of the genitive singular belongs 
particularly to feminine names in e. With respect to masculines 
in s, !>', |"cr), X, I, the practice of substituting \ or a simple apostrophe, 
instead of en*, is becoming more frequent ; e. g. 6nbiU&?£ >pi,>ttc|0pt)ie, 
the philosophy of Leibnitz ; ^ftcriJ5 iHc^eb's Umrijjc 3U ^clHUcr'g L'it'o 
x>ou Ocr (SHocK', Retzscn's Illustrations to Schiller's Song of the Bell. 

§ 47. Obs. 2. When a family name is preceded by one 
or more christian names, or common nouns without- an article, 
the family name alone is inflected ; e. g. 3°^ nn £)etrmd) 
OS of fen 3 (or simply aSoj^) Ueberfegnngen, John Henry 
Voss's translations ; Jtbmg % v i e b r i d) ' 3 ^eben, the life of 
King Frederick. 

Obs. 3d, But if the article precedes, in connection with the 
word £)ctr, or a common noun designating some title or office, 
the proper name is not inflected ; as, ba3 £)au3 be3 *)errn SDi u U 
lex, the house of Mr. Mailer ; bte Ifyaten be$> RatferS Sari 
be£ giinften, the exploits of the Emperor Charles V. ; bct3 ©tanb* 
btlD be$ gtcgen £)tcr;ter£ @ i) 1 1) e, the statue of the great poet 
Goethe. 

NAMES OF COUNTRIES AND PLACES. 

§ 48. 1. Names of countries, places, rivers, mountains, &c. 
which are of the masculine or feminine gender, are generally ac- 
companied by the article (§ 5), and declined like common nouns ; 
as, bte ©cfymets, gen. bet ©dfjroetg, dat. ber ©comets, acc - &te 
©cr)tt>et$ ; bee s i3ret%cui, gen. be3 SSret&jcut'S, &c. ; ber 9tyetn, 
gen. be$ 3ft)etne3, &c. ; bte Tfyemfe, gen. ber tfyemfe, &c. 

2. Neuter names of countries and places, not terminating 
in 3, $ or )C/ have the sign $ in the genitive and remain unal- 
tered in all the other cases ; e. g. bte Unwerfitdten Dentfd)* 
icmbS, the Universities of Germany ; JRuglanbS %bel, ths no- 
bility of Russia ; er fommt son 33ertm (dat.), he comes from 
Berlin , nad) Cetpgtg .(acc), to Leipzig, dec. 

3. Since names of places which end in $, g, x do not admit 
of an additional $ in the genitive, for the sake of euphony, it is 
customary to put them in apposition with the genitive of some 
word like ©tab t. Dor f, $ e ft u n g (town, village, fort), or to 
prefix the preposition von] e. g. bte ©tnroofyner ber <&tabt 
^JariS (or son ^ariS) the inhabitants of the city of Paris ; bte 
Cage son 5ftain$, the situation of Mentz * 



405 



IV. GOVERNMENT 



§ 49. 1st, When a substantive is the subject of a proposi« 
tion, it is always in the nominative case, and governs the verb 
in number and person. $3er reif't? Der 93ater, ber $rennb 
uniD tie Sobne vetfen. Who travel? The father, the friend, 
and the sons are travelling. 

2d, In the oblique cases, i. e. in the genitive, dative, and 
accusative, nouns are governed either by other nouns, or by 
adjectives, verbs, prepositions, &c. ; e. g. bte SDhittcr b e 3 
£cutfe$, the mother of the house; ber ©trafe nmrby, 
worthy of punishment; etnen 93 r t e f fcfyretben, to write a 
letter ; cmf D e m S a n b e, in the country. We shall here 
only consider the relation which one substantive may sustain 
to another. 

§ 50. Substantives which stand in the relation of equality 
to each other, are put in the same case. They may be thus 
related : — 

1st, When one is added to another, for the sake of explana- 
tion, or is put in apposition with it; e. g. SBtlbelm b er ©to* 
b e r e r, William, the Conqueror ; 3fyr tetinet tfytt, ben © d) 6 * 
p f e v fiibner £)eere, ye know him, the creator of bold armies ; 
ttjm, meinem 2B o b ( t b a t e r, to him, my benefactor. 

2d, When one constitutes the predicate to the other ; as, 
fetn 93ater tft S\6ntg geroorben, his father has become king; 
er tft m e t n g r e u n b, he is my friend. 

3d, When one is compared with another ; as, ber 'Xburm tft 
bobet ctlS ber 93 a u m, the tower is higher than the tree. 

4th, When several substantives constitute a compound sub- 
ject to one verb; e. g. (5d)bnbett nnb 3«9^nb treten in t'bre 
sotte 9ied)ie nneber etn, Beauty and Youth are fully reinstated 
to their former rights. 

§ 51. 1st, A substantive which stands in the relation of 
cause , origin, possession, mutual connection, dec, to another, is 
put in the genitive; e. g. ber ©efang ber 936 gel, the sing- 
ing of birds ; ber ©cbepfer ber 2B e 1 1, the creator of the 
world; ba3 £au3 be$ ftaufmannS, the house of the mer- 
2hant; bee ©cfyroefter b e$ 2}ater§, the sister of the father. 

2d, The genitive is often employed adverbially to express 
the relation of time, locality or manner; be§ 2D? org en 3, be$ 
9Rtttacjd, be3 2(benb§, in the morning, at noon, in the evening ; 
bteftgen DrteS, of this place ; gnteS s Duitbe$ fetn, to be of good 
cheer ; unserrteffteter ©acfye, without accomplishing one's pur- 
pose. 



406 

3d, A substantive which has a partitive signification is fol 
lowed by a genitive of the whole ; e. g. bte 35ciiime etneS ©ar* 
ten§, the trees of a garden ; ba3 Sad) be3 £>aufe3, the roof of 
the house. 

4th, If, however, the partitive substantive points out a num* 
ber, measure or weight, the name of the material numbered, 
measured, &c, is more frequently put in apposition with it 
than in the genitive ; as, etne -JO'fenge Sinter, a number of 
children; mtt fiinf Silent) Stern, with five dozen of eggs ; 
em *pactr 2> 1 1 e f e I, a pair of boots. But when the thing 
measured has an adjective or other declinable word connected 
with it, the genitive is required; as, $met ^lafcfyen f 6 jit id) e it 
2Betrte£, two bottles of superior wine; em ^pfunb frifcfyer 
93utter, a pound of fresh butter. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§ 52. An adjective is a word which limits the 
meaning of substantives. 

Every adjective may generally be employed in two 
different relations, viz : 

1st, The quality expressed by it may be conceived as inde- 
pendent of the subject, and be asserted of it by a formal act 
of judgment ; as, ba§> £)cw£ i\\ qvo % the house is large ; bte 
Stofe tft rotfy, the rose is red. The adjective thus used is 
called predicative^ and is never inflected in German. 

2d, The quality expressed by it may be so intimately con- 
nected with the substantive as to form one complex idea with 
it, and then the adjective is termed attributive ; as, ba£ g r D % t 
Spau§, the large house ; bte r otfy e 3?ofe, the red rose. 

Remark, The predicative adjective stands usually after the 
verbs f e i n, to be ; tx> c t £> e n, to become, and b U t b e n / to remain ; 
sometimes also after certain transitive verbs ; e. g. bet £tmmel roar 
b i a u, the sky was blue ; bte 9?ad)t rotrb b u n t e I, the night b> 
comes dark; t>a$ £(etb bletbt fauber, the dress remains clean; 
£ I u 9 macfyen, to make wise ; 9 r It n farben, to die green, &c. 

§ 53. Some adjectives can only be employed in the 
predicative sense, as : — 

abt)e(b, disaffected ; brad), fallow ; 

anojt, distressed, afraid ; ' etnqcbcnf, remembering; 

bereft, ready ; fctnb, hostile ; 



407 

gor, dons j neth, needful ; 

gang unfc flcftc, current; mi£, useful ; 

gcbay, hating ; quer, diagonal, cross; 

getreft, of good cheer; quirt, free from ; 

gram, bearing a grudge; ttn'tlhafr, partaking of; 

irre, stray; unpaj}, indisposed, ill; 

Cunt), known; Wttufttj}, losing. 
Uit, sorry ; 

§ 54. Others again can only be used as attribu- 
tives : — 

1st, Those terminating in etrt, en, and indicating the :Actterial 
of which anything is made; e. g. oer (cfcerne &anty"d)ub, the leather 
glove ; fccig fetberie &atgtucfy, the silk cravat;— but, Der \g>ant»fcbuf) tft 
n c n 2 e D c r, t)cr 9?tn$ tft » o n © o t £>, the glove is (made) of 
leather, the ring is (made) of gold. 

2d, All superlatives, ordinal numerals, and certain adjectives- 
formed from adverbs of time and locality ; e. g. fcer qro£te, t>et 
groettc, btv brttte K., the tallest, the second, the third, &c. ; — t>otttcj, 
fyeuttq, t)ti'fig, Qcftrtg, moment), from tort, there ; fyeute, to-day ; fyter, 
in this place ; geftern, yesterday ; morgen, to-morrow. 

3d, Many derivatives ending in tfcf) and ltd), including also 
adjective names of nations ; as, tnebtfd), thievish ; nerotfcb, northern; 
roortl'tcb, literal ; cmfanqUd), original ; fceutfd), German ; franjoftfdf), 
French ; cngltfd), English, &c. 

We are to consider, 1st, the inflection, 2d, the comparison^ . 
and 3d, the use and government of adjectives. 



I. INFLECTION, 

§ 55. When an adjective is used in the attributive 
relation, certain terminations are added to it, indica- 
tive of the gender, the number, and the case of the sub- 
stantive to which it is united; e. g. guter SSet'tt, good 
wine ; euter fcfyotten Sfunte, of a fair flower ; ba$ Hem e 
23ttdv the small book. 

All attributive adjectives of every degree of com- 
parison are susceptible of three different modes of in- 
flection, denominated the first, second, and third declen- 
sions. 



408 



fhb following table exhibits the terminations op thb 
three declensions. 

Singular. 
First Declension* Second Declension* Third Declension 

\ a . 4 * « t A. fc 



NoM. 

Gen. 

Dat. 
A-cc. 



Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


cr 


e 


e$ 


e 


e 


e 


er 


e 


ii, en 


er 


c$, en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


cm 


et 


em 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


en 


e 


eg 


en 


e 


e 


en 


e 



Neut. 

en 
en 
eg 



Plural. 

For all genders. 

1st 2d 3d 

Decl. DecL Decl. 

Nom. 1 e m tn 

Gen. et en en 

Dat. en en en 

Ace. e en en 



• Remark. The first declension of adjectives corresponds to the 
earlier declension of substantives, and presents the greatest varie- 
ty of terminations ; so also the second possesses the characteris- 
tics of the later declension of substantives (the e n in the genitive 
and remaining cases). The third declension is composite, partak- 
ing of the character of both. 



FIRST DECLENSION. 



§ 56. When an adjective is preceded by no other 
limiting word, or by one which is indeclinable, it as- 
sumes the terminations of the definite article* in all 
its cases singular and plural, and is said to be inflected 
according to the first declension, thus : — 



* With this difference, that in the nom. and ace. neuter singular tiid a4 
*ective has e S instead of a S. 



409 



Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. filter, gute, gute§, 

Dat. gutem, guter, gutem, 
Ace. guten, gate, guteS; 

PARADIGMS. 

I. Masculine 
Singular. 

rotfyer 333cm, red wine, 

rD ^ Jffieute8,ofredwine, 
rotfyen $ 

rctfyem SBetne, to red wine, 

rotten SSBetn, red wine ; 

II. Feminine, 
Singular. 

fiige grucf)t, sweet fruit, 
Gen. fuger $rucr)t, of sweet fruit, 
Dat. fiiger $rud)t, to sweet fruit, 
Ace. fiige grucfyt, sweet fruit ; 

III. Neuter. 
Singular. 
©elb, good money, 

©etbe$, of good money, 

©efbe, to good money, 
(Belb, good money ; 



Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 
Ace. 



Nom. 



Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. gute, good, 

Gen. guter, of good, 

Dat. guten, to good, 
Ace, gute, good. 



Plural. 

rotfye SBetne, 

rotfyer SBetne, 

rotten JBetnett, 
rotfye 2Betne. 

Plural. 

fiige griirf)te, 
fitger $rucr)te, 
fugen $rucf)tety 
fJige griicfyte. 



Nom, 
Gen, 



Dat 
Ace. 



Plural. 

gate ©elber, 

guter ©etber, 

guten ©etbern, 
gute @e(ber. 



guteS 
gute& ) 
guten $ 
gutem 
guteS 

Ofo. 1st, The following are some of the indeclinable words 
which may precede the adjective without affecting its termination * 
c t tva $, some; genug, enough; a (let let, of various sorts; mcfjt, 
more ; Diet, much ; rc> e n t g, little ; in the plural the numerals 
$ n> e t, b r e t, &c. e. g. g e n u g retfjer 2Bctn A enough red wine ; a (^ 
(cr tc t fupe grucfyt, a variety of sweet fruit ; ro e n t g guteS SBreb, 
little good bread. 

Obs. 2d. We are to regard e g as the regular termination of the 
genitive singular masculine and neuter, though en most always 
takes its pLace for the sake of euphony, when the noun itself has 
eg in the genitive ; e. g. gut en SBctncs, falte n BBaflcttf, of cold wa- 
ter ; baat e n (Mbe$, of ready money. 



13 



410 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

§ 57. An adjective belongs to the second declen- 
sion, when it is preceded either by the definite article 
fcer, bie, ba3, by a demonstrative or relative pronoun, or 
an indefinite numeral. It then assumes the termination 
ein the nominative singular for all genders, and in the 
accusative singular feminine and neuter, and the ter- 
mination en in all the remaining cases singular and 
plural. 

The pronouns and indefinite numerals are : — 

btefer, btcfe, btcfeS, this ; 
jencr, jene, jeneS, that, yonder; 
berfelbe, btefelbe, bciffetbe, the same ; 
berjcntge, fciqentgc, tmsjentge, that ; 
tt>cld)cr, ttH'Id)e, roelcfycS, who, which ; 
[etcher, [elchcyfokheS, such; 
tefcer, Jefce, jebeS, \ , 

icglidbcr, -ec/tche, jegttche^, 5 
atlcr, die, alleS, all ; 

cinder, etntge, ctnigcS, ) seV eral- 

etltchcr, etliche, et(td>eg, \ some ' several * 
manner, memche, mancheS, many a, &c. 

§ 58. PARADIGMS. 
Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 



N. bet gute, bte gute, ba3 gute, 
G. be$ guten, ber guten, be£ guten, 
D. bem guten, ber guten, bem guten, 
A. ben guten, bte gute, %>a§> gute ; 



bte guten, the good, 
ber guten, of the good, 
t>m guten, to the good, 
bte guten, the good 



I. £)tefer wetfe Sftann, this wise man. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. btefer roetfe 9JJann, 
Gen. btefeS roetfen 90?anne$, 
Dat. bt'efem roetfen 3)?anne, 
Ace. btefen roetfen 2D?ann ; 



bfefe met fen banner, 
btefer nmfen 9D?cmner, 
btefen wetfen SOWnnern, 
btefe roetfen Scanner. 



II. 3ebe fcfyone 23lume, each fair flower. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom, jebe fcfybne 23lume, 

Gen. jeber fcfyonen SSlume, 

Dat. jeber fcfyonen SSlume, rcelchen fd)6nen SSlumen? 

4cc jebe fd)t>ne 2Mume* roeld)e fc^cnen 93 lumen? 



roefefye fcfyonen 93(umen? 
tt>e(d)er fdjonen 95lumen? 



mm 



411 



III. 3 erte $ grime $elb, yonder green :ield. 



Singular. 

Nom. jeneS grime %ett> f 
Gen. jeneS crimen $elbe£, 
Dat. jenem grim en 'ftelke, 
Ace. jeneS grime gelb ; 



Plural. 

jene grimen gelber, 
jener grimen $elber, 
jenen grimen gefoern, 
jene grimen gelber* 



So decline : berjct&e totfje SBctn, the same red wine ; bie beffert 
grud)t (pi. grftd)te), the better fruit ; rcetcfyes ncufte JUetb (pi. JUetber) ? 
which newest garment 1 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1st, According to the usage of many writers the adjective rejects 
the n in the nom. and ace. plural, when it is preceded by one of 
the words e t n i 9 e, some ; e 1 1 i cf) e, nu'firt' or m e h v c t c, seve- 
ral ; m a n dh e, t> t c t e, many ; a U e, all ; as, alio fktjnge debater, all 
diligent scholars ; mete ebU 9J2enjcf)en, many noble men, &c. [t is 
not necessary, however, to make this exception to the general rule. 

2d, When the definite article, being preceded by a preposition, 
coalesces with it into one word (§ 10), the inflection of the adjec- 
tive is not thereby altered ; e. g. b u r cf) 6 9 r u n e gc(b, through the 
green field ; i m Q r |j e n £cwfe, in the great house. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 

§ 59. An adjective is inflected according to the 
third declension, when it is preceded either by the in- 
definite article, by a personal or possessive pronoun, or by 
the singular of the indefinite numeral f e I it, no, none. 
It assumes the terminations of the first declension in 
the nominative singular of all genders (er, e, e$), and in 
the accusative singular feminine and neuter (e, e£) 
and the terminations of the second declension in all 
the remaining cases. 

The pronouns are : personal, tcf), bu, er, fte, e£, voir, ii)V, fte, 
I, thou, he, she, it, we, you, they ; possessive, mem, bem, fcttt, 
imfer, euer, tf?r, my, thy, his, our, your, her (their). 



Nom. 



PARADIGMS. 
Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut, 

em guter, erne gute, em gute§, 



Gen. emeS guten, etner guten, emeS guten, 
Dat. etnem guten, enter guten,, etnem guten, 
Ace. emen guten, eme gate, em guteS; 



Plural. 

For all genders 

feme guten, 

fetner guten, 

femen guten, 

feme ^xiten. 



NoM. 

Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 



412 



$ftem guter SSruber, m Y good brother. 



Singular. 

mem g titer 53 ruber, 
metneS guten 95ruber3, 
metnem guten ^Sruber, 
metnen guten -SSruber ; 



Plural. 

metne guten 93rubet> 
metner guten SSriiber, 
meinen guten 23ritbern, 
mefne guten SSriiber* 



II. 3^re jungle ©cfymejter, her youngest sister. 



Singular. 

tfyre jitngjre ©cfyroefrer, 
tfyrer jungften ©cfymefler, 
t'ferer jitngften ©cfyroefter, 
tfyre jtingfte ©cfymefter ; 



Plural. 

tfyre jiingjren ©cfymejrew, 
tfyrer jiingften ©cfyroeftern, 
t^ren jiingften ©cfyroeftern, 
tfere jiingjten ©cfyroejrew. 



III. Unfer grogeS $au%, our large house. 



Singular. 

unfer grogeS £>au£, 
unfreS gro£en £>aufe$, 
unferm grogen £>aufe, 
unfer grogeS $au§> 5 



Plural. 

unfre grogen £>attfer, 
unfrer grcgen Sjdufer, 
unfern grogen £>dufew, 
unfre grogen £>aufer. 



So decline : fetn fcfyonerer lag (gen. lageS), no finer day, 
feme cmgenefyme 9?etfe (pi. 9?etfen), his pleasant journey ; betn 
guteS Sltnb (gen. $tnbe£, pi. ^tnber), thy good child. 

Remark. The adjective is declined in the same manner when 
it follows one of the personal pronouns let)/ 1 ; bu, thou ; tutr, we ; 
tfyr (@te), you ; except in the genitive case, where the definite ar- 
ticle must be supplied ; e. g. id) armcr S0?ann, 1 poor man ; gen. 
m e t n e r, b e $ armen Cannes, of me, the poor man ; dat. nut ars 
men 2Q?anne, to me poor man ; ace. mid) armen 20?ann, me poor man. 
So also, fcm gute gutter, thou good mother ; gen. b e i n e r, b e t gu* 
ten Gutter, &c. ; tfyt guten £eute, you good people ; dat. eud) guten 
£euten ; ace. eud) guten £eute, &c. 



observations on the three declensions. 

§ 60. Obs. 1st. When adjectives, terminating in cl, er, en, are 
inflected, they frequently drop the e of those terminations for the 
sake of euphony ; as, etn cbter (instead of cbc(er) @of)n, a mag 
nanimons son ; ber eb n c (for ej6 e n c) 2Beg, the smooth road ; bte 6tt= 
t r e (instead of tutt ere) $rucbt, the bitter fruit. Sometimes this e is 
retained, and that of the syllable of inflection is rejected in its stead, 
especially in the dative case; as, etn rjettrer £tmmc(, clear sky, gen. 
ttncS fyettren £tmmet$, dat. ctnem fyeit etn (not belt e r e n or fjett r e n) 



413 

£tmmet, &c. ; t>cn eb e I n, f>ett e r n £er$en, to the generous, cheerful 
hearts. 

Obs. 2d. The attributive adjective is frequently left 
uninflected like the predicative. This is the case : — 

1st, When it is placed after its substantive, as the predicate of 
an abridged proposition ; as, bte JUtppe, f d) 1 f f unb ft e t \, the cliff, 
rough and steep ; tic Wide, fret unb f effeUoS crgcf)cn fid) in uns 
gemejmen SRaumen' (<Scf)tttcr), the eyes, free and unshackled, roam 
through the measureless abyss of space. 

2d, In poetry and conversational German, the e $ is often dropped 
in the ace. neut. sing, of the first and third declensions ; as, g u t (for 
gute £) <8rob, good bread ; a 1 1 (Stfen, old iron ; cm uvatt SBort, an 
ancient saying, &c. 

3d, When the adjective is used adverbially, to limit the meaning 
of another adjective ; as, etn gan$ neueS £>au£, a house entirely 
new; bie uncrroartet frofye 9?acbrtcl)t, intelligence cheering be- 
yond expectation ; ein n c u etngctmnbcneS SSud), a newly bound 
book. 

If in these cases the adjective is inflected, the sense is entirely al- 
tered : — etn gcm$e$, neueS Jpau6, an entire, new house ; bte unetwattete, 
fror)c 9?ad)ttd)t, the unexpected, cheering intelligence ; etn neueS, cut* 
gebunbenes SBucf), a new book, bound. 

§ 61. Obs. 3d. If a substantive in the genitive limits the mean- 
ing of another substantive, and is placed before it, so that the lat- 
ter loses its article (§ 9), the adjective connected with the latter 
substantive must be inflected according to the first declension ; e. g, 
fctncS SSctrcrS jangjlet (^ofyn, instead of: bet jungft e @of)ti fetne$ 
93atet*v his father's youngest son ; unfteS £cmfe6 propter ©ciufe, in- 
stead of : bet gropt e n (Saule unfete<> £aufe6, to the greatest pillar 
of our house. 

Obs. 4th. When two or more adjectives are con- 
nected with the same substantive, they all follow the 
same rules of inflection : — 

I. ©uter, rotter, ta utter 2Betn, good, red, pure wine. 
Nom. guter, rotljcr, (autrcr 2Betn, 

G£N 'l guten, terpen, lautren j ^"^ 
Dat. gutem, rotfjem, fouterm £8ctne, 
Ace. guten, rotten, tautet* 2£etn. 

11. Die wife, fcfyone, gute $tud)t, the ripe, fair, good fruit. 

Nom. bte tetfe, fefrone, gute gtucfyr, 
Gen. bet tetfen, fefyonen, guten gtucfyt, tfc 



414 

III. Unfer fcfyoneS, gritneS <$xa$, our fine, green grae" 

Nom. unfer fcboncS, grimes ®ra$, 
Gen. unfre£ fd)onen, grunen ©rafeS, ic 

With respevt to case I, however, usage is not decidedly estab- 
lished, as the last adjective frequently follows the inflection of the 
1st declension in the nom. sing, and plur. only, and that of the 
2d declension in all the remaining cases : roarme, frifefye 93ZUcb, warm, 
fresh milk, gen. and dat. warmer, frifd) e n SQUld); guteg, roetjks *8reb, 
good white bread, gen. gute», ruetjn' n £5tobe6, dat. gutem; roetjj e n 
S3robe, pi. gute, roetpe S3rcbe, gen. gutet roetpen S3robe, u 



II. COMPARISON. 



§ 62. In German, as in English, there are two 
modes of comparing adjectives, called the terminational 
and the compound comparisons. 

The former makes the comparative and superlative 
by adding certain terminations to the simple form of 
the positive ; the latter by prefixing to it the adverbs 
of comparison : m e I) x, more ; am m e t(l en or f) 6 d) % 
most. 

Rule I. The terminational comparative is formed by ad- 
ding e x, and the terminational superlative by adding ft or e ft 
to the root of the positive ; e. g. frot), comp. frof) e r, superl. fro* 
() e ft, glad, glader, gladest ; retcf), retd) e r, retcf) ft, rich, richer, 
richest ; fcfyon, fcfyon e r, fd)6n ft, beautiful, more beautiful, most 
beautiful. 

Rule II. Adjectives, containing the vowels a, t>, u, gener- 
ally modify them in the comparative and superlative degrees ; 
e. g. a-t, alter, attejT, old, older, oldest ; $rog, gtoger, grogt, 
g^eat, greater, greatest. 

§ 63. The vowels of the root, however, are not 
modified in the following instances : — 

1st, In all participles which have become susceptible of com- 
parison, by assuming the signification of adjectives ; as, rafenb, 
mad ; fcty^rttv decisive; oerfebtagen, cunning; Dcrroorfen, abandoned, 
&c. ; e g. rafenb, comp. rafenb er, superl. rafent) jr. 

2d, All adjectives containing the diphthong an; as, rcmlj 
rough, comp. ranker, superl. rauljejt; so: grau,grey; taub, deaf ; 
tout, loud, &c. 

3d, Derivative adjectives terminating in e t, e r, e n, e, or in one 



415 



of the affixes b a r, f a ro, b a f t, i g, x d) t, 1 1 cb *c, e. g. tmnM, dark * 
trocfen, dry ; backer, slender ; furcbtbar, formidable ; ratbfcmi, advisa- 
ble ; beebaft, malicious ; rccilfctg, woody ; grafidjt, grass-like ; tfjuns 
lid), feasible, &c. 

4th, In the following : 

S3fa9, pale ; ffar, clear ; fanft, gentle ; 

bunt, variegated ; friapp, tight ; fatt, satisfied ; 

fcity, fallow ; Uifym, lame; fcMaff, slack ; 

fcitfd), false ; lc$, loose; fcblcmf, slender ; 

freb, joyful ; matt, wearied ; ftart, numb ; 

gerate, straight ; morfcb, brittle ; ffcc($, \ roud ; 

Qefunt), healthy ; nacft, naked; ffraff, stiff; 

gtatt, smooth ; platt, flat ; ftumm, dumb ; 

p'oljfc hollow ; plump, clumsy ; toll, mad ; 

bell)/ kind ; rob, raw ; cell, full ; 

f ctr)f, bald ; tunt>, round ; Safym, tame, 
f org, stingy ; 

§ 64. When the adjective ends either in t>, t, ft, £, £, fd) or $, 
the e before the (1 of the superlatives becomes essential for the 
sake of euphony. In all other cases it is commonly rejected ; e. 
g. morfeb, brittle, superl. merfeb eft ;• ftet^ proud, superl. ftdgeft K. ; 
but, ftar, clear, superl. f(ar ft ; tapfcr, valiant, superl. tapferft; 
fcbulfcig, culpable, superl. fcbulfetgft n. 

Polysyllables terminating in el, e c or en, generally reject 
the e of this termination in the comparative, but resume it again in 
the superlative; e. g. ct>e(, comp. et>tcr (instead of efceler), superl. 
et> c ( ft ; better, cheerful, comp. bett t c r, superl. belt e r ft ; ergeben, de- 
voted, comp. ergcb net, superl. etgeb e n ft. 

§ 65. Comparatives and superlatives are inflected 
like positive adjectives; thus:— 

1. Better wine 2. fairer flower, 3. greener field. 

N beffet e r 3£ein, feboner e SSlume, grittier e 3 $elb, 
G befter e n aBetneS, feboner er 23lume, gruneren ^etoc^ k. 

So : ber beft e £8ctn, the best wine, gen. t>e£ beft e n SSetneS vu§ t.U 
fcbSnft 33lume, gen. fc>er fd)8nft e n SBlume k. 



§ 66. 
parison : 

Posit. 

nabe, 
siet, 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 

The following adjectives are irregular in their com. 



Comp. 

befifer, 
fyober, 
rtdber, 

mefyr, 



Superl. 

fc&dfjfc 

rtdcr)fl> 

5 metft, 



good, 
high, 
near, 



f metrfl, $ n,Jch ' 



I 



better, 
higher, 
nearer, 



best ; 
highest ; 
nearest ; 



more, most. 



416 

Also the adverbs : — 
gent, Kefcer, am ttebften, gladly, more gladly, most gladly 
(roemcj), mtnber, am mtnkejTen, little, less, least. 

§ 67. There are a number of adjectives, derived from ad- 
verbs of place, which under a comparative form have a posi- 
tive signification, and hence their comparative is wanting : — 





Posit. 


Superl. 






ber, bte, 


ba$ dugere, 


augerjte, 


outer, 


extreme, uttermost 


i it 


ft fytntere, 


fytnterjre, 


hind, 


hindermost ; 


tt tt 


tt tnnere, 


tnrterfte, 


inner, 


innermost ; 


ft ft 


tt mtttlere, 


mtttelfte, 


middle, 


middlemost ; 


ft ft 


it mebere, 


m'eberjre, 


lower, 


lowermost ; 


ft ft 


n obere, 


oberjre, 


upper, 


uppermost ; 


ft It 


it tintere, 


* unterjre, 


under, 


undermost ; 


It ft 


1, ttotbere, 


sorberjre, 


fore, 


foremost. 



COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

§ 68. Adverbs of manner, the form of which is generally 
the sa*ne with that of adjectives, are likewise susceptible of 
compaiison; as, gefcfyrctnb, gefcfyromber, fcfyon, fcfyoner, swiftly, 
more swiftly, beautifully, more beautifully. They express the 
superlative, however, by prefixing to it am (a contraction for 
an bem, § 10); as, am gefcfyttnnbjren, am fcfyonjren, most 
swiftly, most beautifully. 

But when no comparison, but simply eminence is to be denoted 
Dy the superlative, a u f $, a contraction of the preposition auf with 
the accusative of the article (t>ci6), is prefixed, or $um, a contraction 
of the preposition $u with the dative of the article (bem) ; e. g. auf g 
freunoltcbjfa, £um fcbonflcn, most kindly, most beautifully; er empftng 
mid) a u f $ b o f 1 1 cb ft i, he received me most courteously. The ad- 
verbial superlative of eminence, which is also called the absolute 
superlative, may likewise be expressed by the simple form of tha 
degree, or by the termination ens; as, QttUQJT, most kindly ; tru 
tugfl, most cordially ; t)<)d)fU'n$, at the most; IcinctfUng, at the longest. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

§ 69. Obs. 1. The plural of the comparative merjt, more, is 
m e f) r e or m c r) r c r e, which is used as an indefinite numeral in 
the sense of the English several. 

Obs. 2. The two numerals, fcet erfre, the first, bet fefete, the last, 
though superlatives in sense, give rise to new comparatives t)cr 
e r ft e r e and t>et ( e % t e r e, which correspond to the English the 
former — the latter. 

Obs. 3. The compound comparative becomes necessary wh#^ 



417 • 

*Wc adjectives, denoting qualities of different degrees, are predl« 
cated of the same person or thing ; e. g. er tft m e t) r fait a{$ warm, 
ri-e is rather cold than warm; £>u btjt m C f) t Qc(er)rt a(g t{\x§, thou 
art more learned than prudent. 

Obs. 4. The compound superlative becomes necessary when 
the indefinite article precedes ; e. g. cm f)b'd)ft Qtaufamet 5Kenfd), 
a most cruel man; cine f> o cl) ft Qcfat)rltd)e JRcife a most dangerous 
journey. 

Obs. 5. There are a number of particles (adverbs) which are 
frequently placed before adjectives of every degree of comparison 
to render their meaning intensive. They are : — 1st, With the posi- 
tive, a u £ c r ft, extremely ; f) o d) ft, highly ; f e f) r, very, &c. 2d, 
With the comparative, t> t c (, much ; w e t 1 or b e t tt) e t 1 e m, by far ; 
n c cr), yet, &c. 3d, With the superlative, bet rt> e i t e m, by far ; 
and the prefix a {[ e r ; e.g. f e f) r f d) 6 n, very pretty ; n> e 1 1 proper, 
by far greater ; a (( e rfdfjonft, most beautiful of all. 

Obs. 6. In comparisons, a ( § corresponds to the English than, 
and nne to the English as; e. g. (Ste finb alter alg id)/ you are 
older than I ; er tft fo c^rop tt> i e fetn SSater, he is as tall as his 
father. 

III. USE AND GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 

§ 70. 1. Adjectives of every degree of comparison may 
be employed substantively ; but they even then retain the in- 
flection of adjectives ; e. g. ber 2Betf e, the wise (man), sage ; 
em 2Betf e r, a sage ; fcte ©cfyorte, the fair woman ; fca3 ©rfya* 
bene, the sublime. 

2. With respect to adjectives which are used substantively 
in the neater gender, it is necessary to distinguish :— 

1st, Those which assume no termination, and which designate 
either some abstract quality, or some material named after that 
quality ; e. g. DaS 9? e d) t, justice ; er fpticf)t etn reined 3) e u tf cf), 
he speaks pnre German ; bag 33(et vo e t g, white lead ; SBerltnct 
23 1 a u, Prussian blue, &c. These are inflected like substantives 
of the earlier declension, and are used in the singular only ; as, 
tag SBtau, beg 23taug &c. 

2d, Those which assume the terminations of the attributive adjec- 
tive and are inflected like it; e. g. bag ©ute, the good (2d decl.) ; 
etroag ©utcg, something good (1st decl.) ; bag ©rune, the green; 
rin (Stating, a whole. 

§ 71. With respect to their signification, adjectives are di- 
vided into two classes, viz : 1st, such as make complete sense 
of themselves without the addition of any other word ; as, cjut, 
good ; grog, great, &c. 2d, Those which of themselves can- 
not express an entire idea, but require the addition of some 
18* 



418 

eomplernental notion ; as, bet&u$t, conscious of; I o 3, free 
from, &c. The former maybe termed absolute, the latter re> 
lative. 

The complement of a relative adjective may either be the 
oblique case (§ 49. 2d.) of a substantive (including all words used 
its such), or a verb in the infinitive with $u. 



ADJECTIVES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 

§ 72. Adjectives signifying 'possibility, duty, necessity, easi- 
ness, difficulty, and the like, are followed by an infinitive with 
I u ; as, e$ iff mtr mcfyt m 6 g 1 1 d) g u 9 e fy e n, it is not possible 
for me to go ; er tfl: 9 e n 6 1 f) 1 9 1 3 u a r b e 1 1 e rt, he is obliged 
lo work ; berett $u fdmpfen, ready to contend. In this connec- 
tion the infinitive, though active in form, is often passive in signi- 
fication ; letcfyt gu mctcfyen, easy to be done; fcfyreer su ^(auben, 
hard to be believed, &c. 

ADJECTIVES GOVERNING THE OBLIQUE CASES OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 73. When relative adjectives are followed by a 
substantive, it is put either in the genitive, the dative 
or the accusative. 

I. The adjectives governing the genitive sue : — 

frebttrfttg, in want of; fcinbuj, acquainted with 3 

fcefttffen, diligent in ; macbttg, master of; 

befuqt, authorized ; miifce, tired of; 

benotfngt, in need of; fd)utt>ig, guilty of; 

fteroupt, conscious of; tbcilbaft, partaker of ; 

etngcfcenf, remembering; i)ctt)ad)ttg, suspected oi*; 

fabtg, capable of ; ttcrtufttq, losing; 

fret), happy in; t>oll, full of; 

gcroflrttg, in expectation of; tvfirfcig, worthy of. 
gcrut^/ certain of ; 

Examples. (Jinct ©pracfie m a cf) 1 1 g fein, to be master of a lan- 
guage ; cities 93erbred)en$ fcfeultug, guilty of a crime; bet (Strafe 
tt> ix X t> t g, worthy of punishment. 

§ 74. II. The adjectives which govern the dative 
case are : — 

1st, Such as are derived from verbs which govern the dative; 
as, gchorfam, obedient ta ; fctertftbat, bound in service to; ttcrbutu 
ten obliged to, &c. 



msmm 



419 



2d. The following : 

Sbnttdb, resembling; 
angcmcffcn, suited to; 
angcnefym, agreeable ; 
anjtogtg, offensive ; 
bcfannt, known ; 
bcqucm, convenient ; 
fcerou&t, known ; 
t)ten(td), serviceable ; 
eigcn, own ; 
fremtv strange ; 
frounMicb, friendly ; 
gegenroarttg, present to ; 
golem jig, fluent ; 
gcmctfj, suited to ; 
gonotgt, inclined ; 
geroogon, kind ; 
geroacfyfen, equal to ; 
glotd), like ; 
gncibtg, gracious ; 
jjetffam, salutary ; 



fyotb, kind ; 

lafttg, troublesome ; 

ttob, dear, agreeable ; 

nad)tf)oUtg, hurtful ; 

nal)e, near ; 

nu$(td), useful ; 

fcWMid)/ injurious ; 

fcbulMg, indebted ; 

ttcu, true, faithful ; 

tiborlogcn, superior ; 

unscrgojKtcb, ever memorable to; 

trorMcbttg, suspected by; 

tterfcetbltcb/ destructive to ; 

t>orba§t, odious to ; 

ttotroanfct, related ; 

wrtbctlbaft, advantageous ; 

rottrtg, loathsome ; 

rotll!cmmen, welcome ; 

augctfyan, addicted to. 



Examples : tcr ^ofyn tft fctnem SSatct a f) n 1 1 cfj, the son resembles 
nis father; er tjt fctncm 33orufe md)t g e ro a d) f c n / he is not equal to 
his calling; es tjl ttjm h e t ( fam, it is salutary to him ; rote t>icC bin 
id) Sbncn f d) u ( t) i g ? how much do I owe you ] cr tjl hitr t> e r \) a p t 
he is odious to me, &c. 

III. Adjectives denoting the measure, weight, or worth of a 
thing; also age or duration of time, govern the accusative ; 
as, $roo(f spfunt) fcfyroer, twelve pounds in weight; ctncn ginger 
b r c 1 1, of the breadth of a finger ; einen Sfjaler ro e 1 1 f), worth a 
crown ; or tft $cF)ti Safyr a(t, he is ten years old ; ftinf Safyre I a n g, 
for five years, &c. 



NUMERALS, 



§ 75. Numerals are either definite or indefinite ; as, 
fcner, $ e f) n, four, ten ; a tef, a lie, many, all. 

Definite numerals are divided into two classes : — 
Cardinal and Ordinal. 

Cardinal numerals are such as express simply the number 
of persons or things in answer to the question " how many ? " 
biet, three; merjtg, forty. 

Ordinal numerals designate the rank of a person or thing fa 
a series ; as, ber erjte, the first ; ber jroblfre, the twelfth. 



420 

Ordinals are formed from cardinals by annexing the tenm 
nation fte, when the cardinal ends in g, and the termination 
t e in all other cases ; as, fcer gwangtg jl e, met t e, the twen. 
tieth, fourth. 

Exceptions. The ordinal of etn, one, is irregular: bet e r ft: * 
(instead of bet e t n t e), the first. Instead of X)cv $ \v c t 1 e, the 
oecond, it was formerly customary to say bet a n b c t e. 

§ 76. The following is a list of cardinal and ordinal 
numerals: — 





Cardinal. 


I. 


etn, nn$, one ; 


2. 


3tt>ct, two ; 


3. 


bret, three ; 


4. 


tner, four ; 


5. 


fiinf, five : 


6. 


fed)*, six ; 


7. 


fteben, seven ; 


8. 


acbt, eight ; 


9. 


ncun, nine ;, 


10. 


$ebn, ten ; 


11. 


elf, eleven ; 


12. 


grob'tf, twelve, &c. 


13. 


bteqebn ; 


14. 


tneqebn ; 


15. 


funftef)it ; 


16. 


feebjebn ; 


17. 


fteben^cfyn or ftefyefyn 


18. 


acbt$eijn ; 


19. 


wun^ebn ; 


20. 


Srcan^tg ; 


21. 


etn unb gwan^tg ; 


22. 


$»et unb $rcanatg, h. 


.30. 


brctptQ ; 


31. 


etn unb btetjHgwc. 


40. 


meqtg ; 


50. 


funfttg; 


60, 


feebs^d ? 


70. 


fteben$tg or ftefyig 


80. 


ocbtjig ; 


90. 


ncun^tg ; 


100. 


bunbett ; 


101. 


bunbert unb eing ; 


102. 


bunbert unb jroct ; 


103 


fyunbett unb btet k. 


200 


gnxtbunbett ; 


300 


btetfyunbett ; 



t>er, t)te,ba5 



Ordinal. 

etfte, the first. 

ippnit) " seconds 

brttte, " third. 

tuerte, " fourth. 

fitnfte, " fifth. 

feebfre, " sixth. 

ftcbente, " seventh. 

acbte, " eighth 1 . 

neunte, " ninth. 

Sefjntc, " tenth. 

etfte, " eleventh. 

jrooffte, " twelfth, &g 

bteqebnte. 

tricqefynte. 

funftebnte* 

jecfyefynte. 

ftct>cn^cf)ntc or ftet>$ef)ttte 

ad)t$cbnte. 

neun$cf)nte. 

3rt>an*t$fte* 

etn unb $n>ctn$tgfte. 

gwet unb $roan$tgj!e, xu 

btetjngjre. 

etn unb btctfitgfte it* 

meqtqfte. 

fttnfotgjre. 

fecb^tgfte. 

ficbcn^tgfte or fiefytgfffc 

CKbfytgjte. 

neun$igfte. 

bunbettfte. 

bunbert unb etfte. 

bunbert unb jroctte* 

bunbert unb btttteift 

$nxtbunbertfie« 

btetfyunbettfte* 



42l 





Cardinal 




Ordinal. 


400. 


r-terfyunbert ; 


Ut/^t^8tfJ 


werbunbertfte. 


500. 


fiinfhunbert ; 


// // // 


funffounbertfte. 


600. 


fecbSbunbert ; 


// // // 


fecbsbunbertjle. 


700. 


fiebenbunbcrt; 


// // // 


fiebenbunbertfU 


800. 


ocbtbunbert ; 


// // » 


acbtbunbertfie. 


900. 


ncunbunbert; 


// // // 


neunbunbertjfo 


3000. 


tau fen b ; 


// // // 


taufenbfte. 




2000. 


$rceitaufenb. 






3000. 


brettaufenb. 






100,000. 


bunberttaufenb. 






1,000,000. 


cine Stilton. 






2,000,000. 


$roet 93UUtcncn 






OBSERVATIONS. 





§ 77. Obs. 1. When ettt stands in connection with ounei 
numerals, it is indeclinable ; as, etn ttnb $ter$tg, forty one 
etn taufenb acfytbunbert fiinf ttnb totergtg, 1845. In other ca 
ses it is always inflected. This may be done in four different 
ways : — 

1st, If the numeral c t tt, either ale t or with an adjective, limits 
the meaning of a substantive, and is not preceded by any other de~ 
clinable word, it follows the inflection of the indefinite article etn, 
etne, ei n, and differs from it only by a "greater stress of accentua- 
tion; e. g. etn (cutter) 30?ann, one (good) man; etne (gute) grew, 
one (good) woman; cin (cutteS) jttnb, one (good) child. 

2d, When it stands entirely alone, either in an absolute sense or 
relating to some substantive understood, it is inflected like an ad- 
jective of the first declension — etner, etne, ctncS, &c. ; e. g. 
aud) ntd)t (S t n e t wax ba, not one even was there ; (St n e n son un£ 
ttrirb t>a$ £oe$ treffen, the lot will fall on one of us ; etne metnec 
©cf)tveftern, one of my sisters, &c, 

3d, But if it is preceded either by the definite article ber, bte, ba£, 
or any other word having the characteristic terminations of the ar m 
tide (§ 57), it is declined like an adjective of the second declen- 
sion ; e. g. ber etne 9D?ann,~bte etne grail, ba$ etne jltnb, the 
mis man, one woman, one child, &c. 

4th, The numeral et n follows, finally, the inflection of the third 
declension of adjectives, when it is preceded by a possessive pronoun^ 
me t n, bctn, fetn, &c. ; e. g. metn etner SSrubet, my one bro- 
ther ; [etne etne (Scfyrceffet, his one sister; (Suet e t n e $ $>fetb, youi 
one horfce, &c. 

§ 78. Obs. 2. The numerals $ m e t and b r e t are in- 
flected only when they are not preceded by the article or some 
other declinable word ; thus : — 



42? 

Nom. $tt)ct, btet ; 
Gen. $ipeter, brctet ; 
V it. jphritt, bteten ; 

ACC. gtDCt/ t>tct. 

Examples : am $ tt> c t e t ober t) r e i e r 3eu$en 93?unb, from th« 
I2iv.ath of two or three witnesses ; frige es bod) j en e n btet (no 
b\ ti en) greunben, pray tell those three friends. 

Obs. 3. The remaining cardinal numerals are indeclinable 
except that they assume e n in the dative case, when they are 
used substantively ; e. g. mtt © e d) f e n fasten, to ride in a 
coach with six (horses); atif alien 33teren fried) en, to crawl 
on hand and foot. But, mtt fed) 3 Sftann, with six men; mtt 
»ier ©ofynen, with four sons. 

Obs. 4. Instead of gn> e t, 6 e i b e, both, is frequently used, and 
is innecttrd like an adjective in the plural : nom. b ei b e, gen. b e is 
be r, &c. ; b i e b ei b e n, gen. bet b etben, &c. ; fetne be i ben, 
gen. f e i n e r b e i b e n, &c. ; e. g. fetne b e t b c n ^Btiioer ftnb tvant, 
both his brothers are sick ; bte bctben greunbe roaren bri, both friends 
were there. The neuter singular, bctbcS, refers to two differeni 
things, but is nevex applied to persons. It corresponds to the Eng- 
lish : both the unt and the other; as, fyabcw .@te $rob ober SBetn? 
3d) babe b e t b ee. Have you bread or wine 1 I have both the one 
and the other. 

§ 79. Obs. 5. Most cardinal numerals are adjectives, 
which, however, like all other adjectives, may be used substan- 
tively. The words .f) u n b e r t and X a n f e n b are employed 
as collective nouns of the neuter gender, and are inflected as 
such: nom. ba3 £>nnbert, gen. be3 $nnbert$, pi. bte £)nnDerte ; 
e - g« 5« ^un bert en, by hundreds ; $ it Ian fen ben, by 
thousands, gtne 50? 1 1 1 1 o n is a noun of the feminine gen- 
der, and occurs only in connection with an article. 

Obs. 6. When numerals serve simply to denote cyphers, 
or the abstract notion of number, they are substantives of the 
feminine gender, the word 3 * M being understood ; as, bte 
(3 a ^0 2) r e t, the number three ; bte 25 t e r $ 1 3, the number 
forty. 

Ofo. 7. By means of the affixes er and Ung, masculine sub- 
stantives of various significations are formed from cardinal num* 
bers ; e. g. etn £> r e t e r, etn <& e cb f e r, coins of three and six 
kreuzers ; etn li cb t $ 1 g e r, a man of eighty ; 3 n> e t unb $ rc ci n $ t * 
get, wine grown in 1822 ; 3 to 1 1 ( t n g, twin ; 3) r t 1 ( t n g, triplet. 

Qfo. 8 Ordinal numerals are regularly declined after the 



428 

manner of adjectives. When used substantively, their initia. 
fetter must be a capital, if a person is referred to : as, bte 
Srflten roerber bte Cegten fetn, the first shall be last. 

§ 80. To the preceding classes of numerals may be added 
the following compounds, formed partly from cardinals, partly 
from ordinals, and partly from indefinite numerals : — 

T. COMPOUNDS FORMED FROM CARDINAL AND INDEFINITE 
NUMERALS. 

1st, Distributives ; formed by prefixing the adverb je; as, 
j e ft e b e rt, by seven ; j e g e fy n, ten at a time, or as in Eng- 
lish, i h> e t it n b i m e t, two and two. 

2d, Iteratives ; formed by adding the substantive 50? a I, 
time, etnmaf, once; fiinfmal, five times; jebe^mal, each 
time ; melmal, many times, &c. Sometimes 3ft a I is separat- 
ed and declined like a substantive; as, em 50? a I, once; gu 
gefyrt 5)? a I e n, ten times. This is always the case when it is 
preceded by an ordinal : ba$ erfte, swette Stftaf, the first, second 
time. 

3d, Multiplicatives ; formed by annexing the affix fad), or 
the obsolete fdlttg, fold; e. g. etnfadf), aroetfacfy, $efynfad), 
simple, twofold, tenfold ; x> X e I f a d), manyfold ; fyunbertfal*- 
ttcj, an hundredfold, &c. 

4th, Variatives ; which are indeclinable, and formed 
by adding the obsolete substantive let (meaning kind, 
manner), and inserting er for the sake of euphony; as, et* 
n e r t e t, of one kind, all the same ; b r e t e r ( e t, of three 
kinds ; mancfyertet, meterlet, of various, of many kinds, &c 

II. COMPOUND NUMERALS FORMED FROM ORDINALS. 

§ 81. 1st, Dimidiatives ; indeclinable adjectives formed by 
annexing ft a I b, half, to the ordinal ; as, b r 1 1 1 e t) a ( b, two 
and a half (literally third-half, meaning two whole and one half 
of a third) ; fitnftefycttb, four and a half, &c. Instead of 
groettefyctlb, a n b e r th a I b is used, from the obsolete word ber 
anbete, the second (§ 75. Exc.). 

2d, Ordinal adverbs in en§; as, e r ft e n $, 3 ttt e 1 1 e tt 3, 
\ e !) n t e n 3, firstly, secondly, tenthly, &c. 

3d, Partitives ; masculine substantives formed by means of 
the affix tel (from Tt)et(, part); e. g. ber Drtttel, 93ter* 
tel, 3ebntet, ^unbertjTel, the third, fourth, tenth, hun- 
dredth part. 



424 



INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 

The indefinite numerals are as follows .v— 

md)t$, nothing ; 
etmge, i 
etltcfye, ^ 



$ 82 

atte, all ; 

gefammt, ) complete 
fdmmtltd), $ entire ; 
gan$, all, whole ; 

? e * er ' >each, 
!*»?*'( every; 

f etn, no, no one ; 



some, 

Z' t^any; 
manege, ) J 

t>tel, much, many ; 

mefyr, more ; 

cjenug, enough ; 

ettt>a§, some, a little. 



OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. The indefinite numerals serve either to express num< 
ber, as, etntge, etltcfye, mancfye, jeber or jegltcfyer; oi 
quantity, as,etma£, gan&; or both, as, all, gefammt, et* 
ntge£, etntge, fetn, »tel, metir, roentg, genug. 

055. 2. Those which may indicate quantity and number 
both, are generally inflected only when they imply number, 
e.g. tttele 9D?enfd)en, many men ; etntge $ebetn, severa, 
pens; but x> t e I 2Bem, much wine; mefyr 3Srob, more bread. 

§ 83. INDEFINITE NUMERALS DENOTING NUMBER ONLY. 

1st, 3 e b c x, [ e t> e, { e b e 6 (of which jegltdbct and jebroebet are 
antiquated forms), is disjunctive, corresponding- to the English 
each, every ; e. g. jeber (Stcmb fyat fetne £$efd)tt>etben, every condi- 
tion has its troubles. It is inflected like adjectives, and is often 
preceded by the article etn; as, etn iebet, eine i e b e, etn 
i e b e g. 

2d, (£" t n t g c t, etntge, e t n i g c g, some, a few, when applied 
to number, is used in the plural only, and is synonymous with 
etftdbe. In the singular, however, it has reference to quantity; 
as, e t n t g e 6 Sffiefyt, some flour ; etntge 3ctt, some time. 

3d, 9Tcand)er, mancfye, man d) eg, in the singular, answers 
to the English many a ; as, m a n tf) e t a(te $reunb, many an old 
friend; m a n d) e fojt(td)e ®abe, many a precious gift. In the 
plural it is to be rendered by many 

§ 84. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING QUANTITY ONLY. 

1st, (Stro a 6, some, is indeclinable, and usually connected with 
collective nouns or names of materials ; e. g. e t rt> a $ (55e(b, some 
money; e t rc> a $ frifcl)C$ Staffer, some fresh water. When, as a 
•ubstantive, it corresponds to something, it is an indefinite pronoun 
(i 92\ 



425 

2d, ®on| Indicates the completeness of an object and Is opposed 
to half, part, &c. ; t>er, tie, t>a$ (55 a n g e, the entire, whole ; etn 9 a n* 
£ e $ 3abt, a whole year. It is inflected like adjectives ; but beforf 
neuter names of places and countries it is always indeclinable ; as 
9 a n 1 Ttnm'tta, 2ont>on, all America, London. 

§ 85. INDEFINITE NUMERALS IMPLYING NUMBER AND 
QUANTITY BOTH. 

1st, II II c t, a 1 1 e, a I I e S, all, in the plural implies number, an 
in the singular quantity; e.g. allet £Betn, ail the wine; all t 
9J2 U d), all the milk ; and often without any termination .(§ 8 , 
Obs. 2.); all fcriefer 2£etn, all this wine; all t>a$ 33to&, all tie 
bread ; a 1 1 e trie 28af)ter, trie ftcbcn ((Scatter), all the electors, seven 
in number. Its signification does not admit of its being preceded 
by the article, and hence its inflection is not affected when another 
word, declined like the article, precedes ; e. g. tuetdf)e$alle$ 
(not a 1 1 e, § 57), all which ; bet t> t e f e m a 1 1 e m, in all this, &c. 
The neuter singular sometimes designates number in the most inde- 
finite manner; e. g. a I le $ rennet, rettct, flud)tet, all are running, sa- 
ving, rescuing. When the English all is equivalent to the whole, 
it is rendered by the German 9 a n$; as, all the hour, all the day, 
trie 9 a n 3 e <Stunt>e, t>en 9 a n 3 e n Sag. 

2d, Si e i ft, f et n c, f et n, no, none, is declined like the indefinite 
article etn, cine, etn, when it stands in connection with a substan- 
tive ; and like an adjective of the first declension, f et n e r, f e t n e, 
ti\tot$, when the substantive is not expressed ; as, f c i n ^ftenfcf), 
no man ; fyaft £>u cm 23 ud) ? 3d) fjabe ! c i n e $ ; hast thou a book ? I 
have none; et r)at 6 e i n e $teunt>e, he has no friends. 

3d, (Sa'mmtltcbet, fam mtlid) e, fammtltd) e$, bet ge? 
f a m m t e, t> t e 9 e f a m m t e, b a $ 9 e f a m m t e, are nearly synony- 
mous with a 1 I, «//, entire, the complete* They are regularly de- 
clined like adjectives; as, fctne fanmitttd)en £Bet£e, his complete 
works ; £)etne fammtltcfyen (gefammten) gteunue, all thy friends. 

4th, 93 t e I and rc> e n t 9, when they imply quantity, or number con- 
sidered as a mass, are invariable (§ 82. Obs. 2). 23 1 el S3rot>, t>t el dk'lt), 
much bread, much money ; Diet 9)?enfcben, a large mass of men 
But if they refer to a number of individuals or things regarded as 
distinct, they follow the inflection of adjectives : x> t e I e r, tti e I c, 
t> t e I e $, roentgen, rt> e n t 9 e, ro e n i 9 e $, &c. ; e. g. e$ fonnen fid) 
nut £B e n 1 9 c tegtcren, but Yew can govern themselves ; id) effe ntd)t 
t> t e I e Jrucbt, I do not eat many kinds of fruit. When an article 
or pronoun precedes, met and roentg must be inflected, even if they 
refer to quantity ; e. g. trie t e I e n SBortc, the many words ; fetn 
roentgen ®clt>, his little money, &c. 

5th, The comparatives m c h r, more, and it) e n 1 9 c r, less, are noi 
generally inflected, except m c br er e, the plural of nicfyr, when it 
assumes the signification of several (§ 69). 



426 



§ 86. OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS. 

Obs. 1 If numerals stand in connection with substantives 
which express a definite number, measure, or weight, the Ger- 
man idiom requires the substantive to be put into the singular 
(§ 26) ; as, ^roolf *p f ii n b, twelve pounds ; arcet © t ii tf, two 
pieces. 

Obs. 2. Numerals which denote a part of a greater num- 
ber or multitude of objects, are followed by a genitive of the 
whole, or by the dative with the preposition a u 3, from among ; 
. u n t e r, among ; & d n, of ; e. g. fc r e t f e t n e r Stnber, three 
of his children; ber erfte »on metnert $reunben, the first 
of my friends ; SBtele unter tfynen, many among them. 

Obs. 3. When the genitive of the whole is a personal pro- 
noun, it always precedes the numeral ; as, e3 finb u n f e K 
8 » a n j t g, there are twenty of us ; e3 roerben 1 1) r e r mdfji 
©tele fern, there will not be many of them. 

Obs. 4. When a definite number is to be stated approxi- 
mately, or with uncertainty, the adverbs and prepositions em- 
ployed in German for that purpose are : e t tt) a, something 
like ; ungefdfyr, about ; betnctfye, f a ft, almost ; f a u m, 
scarcely; gegen, bet, an b t e, nearly, about ; e. g. ba£ 
*Pferb tft ungefafyr fyunbert ^fyater roertfy, the horse is worth 
about a hundred crowns ; er tft b e t n a fy e or an b t e fiinfttg 
3a^r alt. he is nearly fifty years of age. 

Ohs. 5. The word h t g (till, to) is used when a number can be 
stated only as fluctuating between two given numbers ; as, t> i e r 
6 t $ fun f taufeno SOxcmn, from four to five thousand men ; $wan$tg 
bli bmfftg Shalcr, afot^ twenty or thirty crowns. 

Obs. 6. The English upward is rendered by u n b C 1 1 1 d) e or 
unb e t n t g e ; as, DaS £aus tft ti e u n $ t g unt> e t ( t d> e Jug beef), 
the house is upward of ninety feet high, or in conversational Ger- 
man often, c t ( t cl) c n e u n $ i g. 

Ofo. 7. The English either and neither have no corresponding 
words in German, and are rendered by e t n e r t) n b e 1 1) e n, one 
of the two, and fetnet Don Oeiben, none of the two. 

§ 87. Obs. 8. Numerals are sometimes employed elliptic 
cally without a substantive, when a point of time is expressed; 
e. g. tft e3 nod) mcfyt jwolf? is it not twelve yet? (£$ bat ebert 
b r e t gefcfylagen, it has just struck three. In these cases the 
word Ubr or an ber Ufyr, o'clock, is to be supplied. In 
the same manner ordinal numerals are used, when the day of 
the month is to be denoted ; e g. ben tt> t e t> t e I ft e it fyaben 



427 

mir ? what day of the month is it ? 2Btr fyaben ben 3 tt> a it 
g t g ft e n (Tag be3 SfftonatS), it is the twentieth. 

When in connection with a date the name of the month is given, 
the preposition of is never expressed in German; as, t)cn funften 
9J2ai, the fifth 0/ May ; am Written 2C u Q u ft, on the third oj 
August, &c. 

PRONOUNS. 

§ 88. Pronouns are words which serve as the sub- 
stitutes of nouns. 

Pronouns are divided into Personal, Possessive, De- 
monstrative, Determinative, Relative, and Interrogative. 

I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

§ 89. A personal pronoun is one which simply indicates 
the relation of personality ; i. e. whether the substantive rep- 
resented be the person speaking {i d), tt)i r, I, we), or spoken 
to (b u, t i) r, thou, ye), or spoken of (e x, ft e, e $, ft e, he* she, 
it, they). 

Personal pronouns are declined as follows : — 

first person (for all genders). 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. id), I, 

Gen. metrter (mem), of me, 
Dat. mtr, to me, 

Ace mtd), me ; 



Nom. rotr, we, 
Gen. unfer, of us, 
Dat. un$, to us, 
Ace. un£, us. 



SECOND PERSON (FOR ALL GENDERS). 

Singular. Plural. 



Nom. bu, thou, 

Gen. fcetner (b em), of thee, 
Dat. fctr, to thee, 

Ace. bid), thee; 



Nom. (fyr, ye or you, 

Gen. etter, of you, 

Dat. end), to you, 

Ace. cud), ye or you. 



THIRD PERSON 

Singular. 

Masculine, Feminine. Neuter. 

Nom. er, he, fie, she, I e3, it, 

Gen. fetner (fet'n), of him, tyrer, of her, fetner (fetn), of it, 
Dat. i\)m ) - , to him, j tyr ) c < to her, 1 tfcm I r4% to it, 
Aloc. il )n \ ™> him ; j fie \ ft *' her ; | e3 } ff * it 



428 

Plural 

For all genders 

Nom. fte, they; 

Gen. tfyrer, of them; 

Dat. tl)nen ) r , to them ; 

Ace. fte $ ] them « 

§ 90. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1 . The genitives m e i n c r, b e t n e r, f e t n e t, now gsner- 
ally take the place of the earliei forms m e i n, b ctn, f e i n, which 
are found only in poetry, and in certain familiar expressions ; as, 
t>erqt$ metn ntcbt, forget me not; §cben6e metn, remember me. 

Obs. 2. When the prepositions I) a I fc e n, ro e C] c n, on account 
of, and u m — ro i U e n, for the sake of, are compounded with the geni- 
tives m c i n, b c t n, f e t n, i f) r, the syllable c t is inserted for the 
sake of euphony; e. g. metnet*, telnet? , feinet?, if) ret* 
r) o ( fc c n (tuecjen), on my, thy, his, her account. The genitives 
u n f c r and e u e r take t simply : urn u n f e r t n> t ( ( e n, for our 
saKe ; curctruegen, on your account • 

Dbs. 3. The word fid) (sifo, se) is tne reflexive pronoun fcr the 
gen. and dat. of the third person, both singular and plural. It is 
used in propositions, in which the action of the verb terminates in 
the subject itself, from whence it proceeded. The oblique cases 
of the first and second persons, as well as the gen. of the third 
(fetner, tfjrcr), do not possess a separate form of the reflexive, and 
hence they are themselves employed in a reflexive sense ; e. g. id) 
fdbame m i d), .1 am ashamed (lit. I shame myself) ; bu toOcft b i d), 
thou praisest thyself. In these instances, however, the indeclina- 
ble word f e ( fc ft or fc ( b e r is added, whenever, emphasis or per- 
spicuity raquire it ; e. g. fe t n e t f e ( 6 ft md)t fefyenen, not to spare 
one's self; mtr fetfcet, to myself; bid) fetfcft, thyself. When 
joined to the nominative of the first, second or third persons, felbft 
or felfcet is intensive ; as, tcb f e ( b c r farm fie retten, I myself can 
rescue her ; &u f e I fc ft rnupt rtcrjten, thou thyself must be the judge ; 
ber jlontcj fe (fcft erfebten, the king appeared in person. 

Obs* 4. There is one reciprocal pronoun in German — e t n a n b e t 
(contracted for c t n e r ben a n b e r n), one another, each other. 
Instead of this, however, the reflexive pronouns are often employed 
in a reciprocal sense in the plural ; as, wit Cennen u n $, or etna ns 
b e r, we know each other ; fte %ax\Un fi d) or mi t e t n a n b e r, they 
are quarrelling with each other. 

§91. Obs. 5. In poetry, and when addressing the Supreme Being, 
their intimate friends or families, the Germans employ the second 
person singular, £)u. In polite conversation, however, they al- 
ways address each other in the third person plural, ® t c, gen. 3 fys 
v cr, dat. 3 hn e n, ace. © t e ; e. g. tcb bonle 3 r) n e n, I thank you ; 
tDO gefyen (Sic f)tn ? where are you going? It is also customary 
for superiors to address their dependants and others of inferio* 
tank in the second person plural (3 f) r, (S u cr), you, to you), or h 



429 

the third person singular (S"t, <Su, he, she) ; e. g. wag F)at (St ge* 
bradbt ? what have you brought ] In writing", both the personal 
and possessive pronouns relating to the person addressed, must al- 
ways begin with a capital letter ; e. g. id) tutte Sic (£)tcb, @ud), 
3()n) urn 3()t (Detn, (Sucr) SBud), I beg you to give me your book. 

Obs. 6. The neuter pronoun c ^ is never used in the genitive 
and dative cases (f e t n e r, if) in), except when it relates to a per- 
son. When a thing is referred to, the expressions of it, of them, 
to it, with it, are either rendered by the demonstrative pronouns 
b c f f e n, b e r c n, or by an adverbial pronoun, b a $ u, b a mi t, 
b a r a n &c. ; e. g. have you much of it? fyaben ©i* beffen met ? 
what do you wish with it? roaS roollen ©te bam it (see pages 29 
and 142)? 

Obs. 7. The pronoun e£ has often a very indefinite significa- 
tion, sometimes corresponding to the English " it", sometimes to 
the unaccented " there," but frequently it is expletive, ana cannot 
be rendered at all. It is employed : — 

1st, As the subject of impersonal verbs, or such as appear to be 
used impersonally ; as, e 8 bonnet t,e$&tij5t, it thunders, it 
lightens ; e $» f r e u t m i d), I am glad ; e $ g 1 t Scute, there are 
men. ^ 

2d, It simply stands as the representative of the subject of a 
proposition, when its order is inverted and the predicate comes 
first ; as, c 6 fullt fid) b c r <S p ' c t d) c t, e $ befynt fid) b a g p a u 5 
(expletive), the granary is replenished, the house expands ; e $ finb 
ntd)t eben f d) ( c d) t e banner, they are by no means worthless 
men. 

The e of the eg is often elided ; as, b ring's nvtt, bring it to 
me ; cr f) a t ' $ getrjan, he has done it. 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

§ 9£. Among personal pronouns are properly included the 
following, which, however, represent the third person only, and 
in the most indefinite manner : — %emanb, (£in ev, some 
one, some body ; Sherman n, every one, every body ; 
$1 i e m a n b, ^ e t n e r, no one, nobody ; man, one, they, 
people (corresponding to the French on). To these may be 
added cttt>a§, something, and n t cr) t S, nothing. 

30?cm, etrnvt^ and md)t3 are indeclinable. 3emcmb, Sfttemcmb 
and 3^bermann are declined as follows :— 

Nom. 3emcmb, Ktemcmb, Sebermcmn, 

Gen j SemanbeS, SRtemanbeS, 5 3 e6ermann *' 

r> A r« $ Semanb, Ktemanb, ? ft v 

Dat * bemanbem, Ktcmanbem, $ 3ebermatm ' 

Ann $ Semanb, SRtemanb, ? o. s 

Acc> I Semanftw, Memanbcn, 5 Sherman*. 



430 



The declension of (Sin ex and 5? e t rr e x has already been 
noticed among the indefinite numerals (§ 77 and § 85), between 
which and the indefinite pronouns it is difficult to fix the line 
of distinction. A few examples may illustrate their inflection 
and use : — £aft £)u erne gefcer, em 9Sud) ? Hast thou a pen, a 
book? 3^) fccxbe etne, etn e3, I have one ; id) tyabe fetne, 
f e t n e $, I have none ; e3 tft @ t n e r fcraugen, some one is 
out of doors ; Reiner w>ei$ atfeS, no one knows every thing. 

II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
§ 93. A possessive pronoun is one which repre- 
sents the object to which it relates, as belonging ei- 
ther to the speaker (mine), the person spoken to (thine) 
or the person or thing spoken of (his). 

Possessive pronouns are formed from the genitive of personal 
pronouns. They are : — 

1st Person. 2d Person. 3d Person. 

m e t n, my, mine ; b e t n, thy, thine ; f e t n, his, its ; 
u n f e x f our, ours ; euer, your, yours ; t i) r, her, hers, their. 

§ 94. When a possessive pronoun stands in connection 
with a noun, it is called conjunctive, and is declined like the in- 
definite article in the singular, and like the definite article in 
the plural. Thus : — 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fem. NeuL For all genders. 

Nom. mem, metne, mem, my, metne, my, 

Gen. meme£, memer, metneS, of my, memer, of my, 

Dat memem, metner, memem, to my, memen, to my, 

Ace memen, metne, mem, my; metne, my. 

Singular. 

Fem. 

( unfere, 
I unfre, 

S tmferer, 
i ttnfrer, 



Nom. 



Gen. 



Dat. 



Ace. 



Masc. 

unfer, 

unfere$, 

tmfreS, 

unferS, 

unferem, 

unfrem,, 

unferm, 

tmferen, 

unfren, 

unfern, 



our, 



1 tmferer, 
unfrer, 

unfere 
unfre, 



Neut. 

J unfer, 

C tmfereS, 

< unfreS, of our, 
( unferS, 

C unferem, 

< unfrem, to our, 
( unferm, 



^ 4nfer, 



OUIV 



431 

Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom unfere, unfre, our, 

Gen. unferer, unfrer, of our, 

Dat. nnferen, unfren, to our, 

Ace. unfere, unfre, our. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. Of the remaining pronouns of this class, an ct, youi 
is declined like u n fc v, and the others like m e t n. It will he per- 
ceived that the remark made respecting euphonic changes in ad* 
jectives ending in e.l, er, en, unaccented (§ 60. Obs. 1st.), is also 
applicable in the case of u nf er* 

Obs. 2. The word e t 9 e n, own, is often joined to possessive 
pronouns to make the notion of possession more prominent ; as 
metn e i 9 n e r SKecf, my own coat ; unfer c i q n e g Mint, our own 
child. 

Obs. 3. It will he perceived, that for the third person singular 
there are two forms of the possessive, viz : f e in, when the gender 
of the possessor is masculine or neuter, and t f) r, when it is femi- 
nine. Each of these again indicates, by means of its terminations, 
the gender of the object possessed, with which possessive pronouns, 
iike all other adjectives, must agree in gender, number and case ; 
v,. g. \c\n (ibr) i&atix, f e t n e (U)te) Gutter, f e t n (tbr) 23ud), his 
(her) father, his (her) mother, his (her) book. 

Obs. 4. When a possessive pronoun constitutes the predicate 
to a substantive, or to a pronoun denoting a determinate object, it re- 
mains like adjectives, uninnected ; as, fcaS 93ud) t|t fetn, the book 
is his ; roe& ifi t>er 9Suf)m ? 9?ur £) e t n, nur £) c i n ! Whose is the 
glory ? Thine, only thine! (§ 52, 1st.) 

Obs. 5. In addressing persons of rank, it was formerly custom- 
ary to use 3 f) r instead of the third person feminine 3 f) r e, her, 
and also in place of (§ ti e r, your ; e. g. 3 f) r (now 3 b r e) sj^ojes 
jlat tie ^ontqtnn, her Majesty the queen; 3 b re (Sure) 3RaKJTat 
rjafcen nur bcfof)(en, your Majesty has commanded me. In written 
communications the pronouns (Sure, your, (Seine, his, and ©eimy, 
to his, are- commonly contracted into (S w., © e., and © r. ; e. g 
(£tt>. Durct)(aud)t, your Highness ; (Sr. DDZajeftat, to his Majesty. 

§ 95. Possessive pronouns are called absolute when they 
aie not immediately connected with a substantive, but related 
to one already mentioned or understood. 

Absolute possessive pronouns with Jhe article are inflected 
like adjectives of the second declension, and without it, like ad- 
jectives of the first. 

When connected with the article, they frequently change the 
termination e into t g e ; as, fcer m e t n e, m e t n t g e ■ fcer f e u 
tte> fetntge. 



432 

The following list exhibits the absolute possessive pronouns 
of both declensions in the nominative singular. 

First Declension. Second Declension. 

metner, metne, metne3, ber, bte, ba$ metne or metntge, mine, 
b enter, betne, beme£, u * » » betne " betmge, thine, 
f enter, feme, fetne$, » n u feme " fetntge, his, 
tf/ter, tfyre, tfyreS, u » » tfyre " tfertge, hers, 
tmferer, unfere, unfete§, ti » » unfre " tmfrtge, ours, 
eurer, eure, ' eureS, u h » eure " eurige, yours, 
tfyret, tfyre, tfyreS, i? » n tfyre " tfyrige, theirs, 
3t>rer, 3^>re, 3^re^, (in polite conversation) 3fyre or3l)ri« 

ge, yours. 

§ 9G. The inflection of possessive pronouns, both absolute an4 
onjunctive, may be illustrated by the following examples : — 

I. My brother and his. 
Singular. 

Nom. metn SBtubet unb fetnet, bet feintqe ; 

Gen. nietncS 23rubcrS unt) fetneS, be£ fetntgen ; 

Dat. meinem 93rut>ct unb fetnem,bem fetntgen; 

Ace. metnen SSrubcr unb fetnen, ben fetntgen. 

Plural. 

Nom. metne SBrubet unb fetne, bte fetntgen ; 
Gen. metner SBrtibet unb fetnct, bet fetntgen ; 
Dat. metnen SBrubetn unb fetnen, ben fetntgen; 
Ace. metne SBttibet unb fetne, bte fetntgen. 

II. Her sister and mine. 

Nom. tfyte (Scfyroeftct unb metne, bte metntge ; 
Gen. ifytet ©'cbroeftet unb metner, bet metntgen ; 
Dat. xi)th <Sd)roeftet unb metner, bet metntgen Hi 

III. Our house and theirs. 

Nom. unfet £>au<> unb tfjreS, bat ifjttge ; 
Gen. unfreS #ctufe$ unb i&reS, beS tfyrtgen ; 
Dat. unfetm £aufe unb tfytem, bem ttyttgen it? 

Examples. 3ft ba£ 3^ Jftegenfcfytrm (masc.), 3fyre %xxAt 
fern.), 3fyr Metb (neut.) ? 3ct, e£ tft m e t n e r, b e r metne, 
ber metntge — metne, bte metne, bte metntge — met* 
ne$, b a 3 metne, b a 3 metntge; is this your umbrella 
your ink, your garment 1 Yes, it is mine (i. e. my umbrella, m 
ink, my garment). 

Remark. The absolute possessive pronouns are sometimes 
ployed substantively, ip which case their initial must always be a 



433 

capital letter (§ 11); as, ba$ 9)2 c t n 1 g c, £) c t n t g e, © e t n t g e, 
my own (my property), thy own, his own; e. g. ,pabe id) ntcftt 
$Rad)t, 311 tbun, was id) will/ nut bcui*932 c t n i g c n ? Is it not lawful 
for me to do what I will with mine own ] So also in the plural, 
tic 9)2 ci n i g c n, 5) c t n t g c. n, @ c t n t g e n, 3 I) r i g e n, my, thy, 
his, their (your) friends, relatives, family. 

III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 97. A demonstrative pronoun serve* to point out 
the locality of the person or thing with which it is 
connected. 

The German language has three demonstrative pronouns 
viz : b t e f e r, b f e f e, b t e f e 3, this ; j e n e r, j e n e, } e n e 3 A 
that, and b e r, bte, b a S, this, that. 

Stefer and jener are declined like adjectives of the first de 
elension, thus : — 

Singular. Plural. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 



Nom. btefer, btefe, btefe* (bte§), this, 

Gen. btefeS, btefer, btefeS, of this, 

Dat. btefem, btefer, btefem, to this, 

Ace. bfefen, btefe, btefeS (bte$), thi: 



btefe, these, 
btefer, of these, 
btefen, to these, 
btefe, these. 



§ 98. The demonstrative pronoun b e r, b f e, bct§ may 
supply the place of either btefer or jener. When it stands in 
connection with a substantive, or any word used as such, it is 
inflected like the definite article (§ 3), and differs from it 
only by a stronger accentuation. But when it is used abso- 
lutely, it deviates from the inflection of the article in the gen* 
itiv» singular, and in the genitive and dative plural, thus :— 

Singular. 

Fern. Neut. 

bk, ba§>, this, that, 

ber, bem, to this, that ; 
bie, bct3, this, that; 

Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. bte, these, those ; 

Gen. beren, of these, those; 

Dat. benen, to these, those ; 

Ace. bte, these, those. 
19 




434 

§ 99. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. £)tefer implies proximity either of space or time to 
the person speaking, and hence* it is frequently equivalent to the 
English the latter, 3 c n c r, on the other hand, refers to some- 
thing well-known (the Latin ille), already mentioned, or remote, 
and hence it is often rendered by the former. 

Obs. 2. The neuter pronouns fc> t e 6 and t> a g are, like the in- 
definite c^ (§ 91. Obs. 7), often employed to represent the subject 
of a proposition in the most general and indefinite manner, ^me- 
times even without any distinction of gender or number ; e. g. bag 
tfr cm gran^ofe, that is a Frenchman ; b t c g ft n b metne (^Itern, 
these are m^ parents ; b a £ ftnb JRelfcn, those are pinks. 

Obs. 3. 3)cfJ is the more ancient form of the genitive singular 
masculine and neuter, now only used in the more elevated style o* 
poetry and in composition ; as, b e p \) a 1 6, b c g vu t g c n, on tnat ac- 
count ; b Cp frcue ftcf) ba$ (Srbrctd), let the earth rejoice in it. 

IV. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 100. Determinative pronouns serve to make 
prominent the person or object which is the antece- 
dent of a subsequent relative clause. 

They are : — ber, bte, ba§, that ; betjemge, btejentge, bctSjem* 
gc, he, she, it, that person (who) ; berfelbe, btefelbe, baSfelbe, 
the same; the obsolete felbtger, felbtge, felbtgeS, the same ; and 
folcfyer, folcfye, foldjeS (talis), such. 

2)er, bie, ba$, when standing w r ith a substantive, is inflected 
like the article (§ 3), and when used absolutely, like the de- 
monstrative pronoun ber, bte, bet 3, except that in the genitive 
plural it has berer instead of ber en ; e. g. ba§> ©cfyteffal 
berer tjt ^art, fcte fid) felbft gu ernal)ren mcfyt tm ©tanbe ftnb, 
the fate of those is hard, who are not able to support them- 
selves. 

§101. © o I d) e r, when used without the article, follows the 
inflection of the first declension of adjectives, but when prece- 
ded by the indefinite article em, erne, etn, it is inflected like an 
adjective of the third declension, thus : — 

Nom. foldjer, fotdfre, foldjeS, 

Gen $ fold)e ^ I tolAer $ fct( * e ^ 
****• I folcfren, J fDlcl}er ' $ foldjett, &c. 

Nom. ein fotcf>er r etrte fofcfye, etn fotcfyeS, 
Gen. efneS folc^en, enter folcfyen, etneS foldjen, &c. 

© e r j e n i g e and berfelbe are compounds, of which 



435 



following the in* 
and f e I b e that 



Plural, 

For all genders. 

Nom. btejemgert, 

Gen. berjemgen, 

Dat. benjemgen, 

Ace. biejemgen* 



Doth components are declined; ber, bte, ba$ 
flection of the definite article, and j e n t g e 
of the second declension of adjectives : — 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. berjemge, btejemge, ba^jem'ge, 

Gen. benjemgen, berjemgen, beSjemgen, 

Dat. bemjemgen, berjemgen, bemjemgen, 

Ace. benjemgen, btejemge, baSjemge; 

§ 102. observations. 

Obs. 1. Determinative pronouns can always be distinguished 
from demonstratives by the relative clause by which they are gen- 
erally followed. Examples: berjenige, roetcbet bte S&tfs 
f c n f d) a f t c n ( t c b t, rbctp fetne 932u£c auf etne angenefyme 2£rt $u be? 
nufcen, he who is fond of the sciences, is never at a loss how to 
improve his leisure hours pleasantly; et fyat benfelben gefrlet 
gemaebt, wctd)en icb gemaebt babe, he has made the same mistake, 
which I have made ; traue b e n e n nte, b i e £>tt fd)meid)eln, never put 
confidence in those, who flatter you. 

Obs. 2. The determinative pronouns may be employed either 
adjectively or substantively. SDetjcntge serves simply to point out 
emphatically the antecedent without any other modification ; betfelbe 
adds to it the notion of identity, which is often made intensive by 
the particle e b e n ; as, e b e n fcerjelbe, the very same, ©debet im- 
plies a reference to the kind or constitution of persons or things; 
o. g. f c Ub e J-rucbt, such fruit ; e t n f o ( d) e t $atet, such a father. 
When fdeber, in conformity with the English idiom, is followed by 
the indefinite article, it is not inflected, — f o ( cb e i n 93Zann, such a 
man ; fdeb cittern <8cl)ne, to such h. son. Sometimes the syllable of 
inflection is likewise dropped, when it is accompanied by an adjec- 
tive ; as, fdeb grope SSefcbetbenfyeit, such great modesty. 

Obs. 3. £)et and berfclbe often stand simply as the repre- 
sentatives of the personal pronouns e t, ft e, c $, or of the posses- 
sives fetn, U)r, his, hers, when two persons mentioned in the 
same or in a previous sentence are to be clearly distinguished from 
each other; e. g. cr fanb ben SSoter unb beffen (Sobn gu £aufe, he 
found the father and his (i. e. the father's) son at home ; ber Sung' 
ling febrteb fetnem greunbe ttbet bat bet>otftel)enbe (Sd)tcffat beffelben, 
the young man wrote to his friend concerning his (the friend's) fu- 
ture destiny ; btejer SDlann tljut alles fiir fatten &rubct, abet berfcU 
be ruetp ibm 6etnen Dan! bafitt, this man does every thing for his 
brother, but he (the brother) is not grateful for it. 

V. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 103. A relative pronoun is one which serves to 
connect a limiting or explanatory clause to a preceding 



436 

noun, to which it relates, and which is called its ante- 
cedent. 

The German language has four relative pronouns, viz :- — t>et> 
bte, £)a3, and melcfyer, mefcfye, meld)e3, who, which ; mer, mctS, 
who, what, and the obsolete and indeclinable f o. 

§ 104. 2Betcf)er is the only pronoun of this class which may stand 
adjectively in connection with a substantive. It is declined 
xike an adjective of the first declension, thus : — 

Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. metcfyer, melcfye, melcfyeS, who, which, 

Gen. melcfyeS, melcfyer, melcbeS, whose, of which, 

Dat. melcfyem, metcfyet, melcfyem, to whom, to which, 

Ace, melcfyen, metcfye, melcfye£, whom, which. 
Plural. 

For all genders. 

Nom. metcfye, who, which, 
Gen. metcfyer, whose, of which, 
Dat. melcfyen, to whom, to which, 
Ace. melcfye, whom, which. 

The relative t) e r is inflected like the demonstrative fcet> 
bte, fcaS (§ 98). 

The plural of m e t and m a 3 is wanting ; in the singular 
they are thus declined : — 

Masc. and Fern. Neut. 

Nom. mer, who, he who, she who, 

Gen. me f en ' I whose, of whom, 

Dat. mem, to> whom, 
Ace. wen, whom; 



ma$, which, what, 

meg, of which, of what, 

meat, to which, to what, 

mas, which, what. 



§ 105. observations. 

Obs. 1 The pronouns met and to a 6 never relate to an indi- 
vidual or determinate object, but to such only as are of the most 
general and indefinite character. Hence they are commonly em- 
ployed after the neuter demonstrative t> a $, or the indefinite numer- 
als a 1 1 e g, all, c t to a $, something, m a n d) e 6, many a (thing), 
1 c I, much, m c n i Q, little, n i d) t 6, nothing; eu g. t a *, m a $ td> 
F)abc, gebe id) £>tr, that which I have, I give thee ; a It e $, tt> a $ mtf 
tfycucr ift, all that is dear to me. But, t> t cfer jtnafoe (definite), 
metcbet tn tie <Sd)ule gefjt, this boy who goes to school ; tic iHcfc, 
ID c t d) e bluf)t, the rose which blossoms. 

Obs. 2. The forms mer, weffen,roc m, men relate to persons 
only, of either sex ; m a 8 and the genitive m c p only to things and 



437 

abstract terms. £& e (5 is also used in the compounds roeflwegctt 
and tr e 9 I) a ( (> c n, wherefore, on which account. 

Obs. 3. On account of this indefinite signification cf it) e t and 
tt) a S, their antecedent is frequently omitted, and they become equi- 
valent to b e r i e n t g e w c 1 cb e r, b i e i e n i cj e ir> e I cb e, t) a J j[ e n fe 
g e n> eld) e £, he who, she who, that which ; e. g..iue t etnfam ft|t 
in fetner hammer unb fcbtuere, tuttre Sbtanen it>etnt (9toalt$), Ae w^o 
sits in his lonely chamber, shedding the heavy, bitter tear; it>a$ 
fein mufj, cjefcbebe ! That which must needs be, let it come to pass ! 
Sometimes, however, to give emphasis to the expression, the de- 
terminative bet, bte, $a$ is added to the main proposition, which 
in this construction always follows the relative clause; e. g. tt>et 
nicbt arbciten will, t) c r foil aucl) ntctjt effen, he who is not willing to 
labour, neither shall he eat. 

Obs. 4. The compound relatives whoever, whatever, ivhosoever, 
&c, are rendered in German by annexing aud) or immcr to 
tt>er or nxig ; e. g. it> e r a u cb (i m m e r), m a g aud) (i m m c r), &c. 

06s. 5. After personal pronouns of the first and second persons, 
the relative it) e I cb e r is never used, but always t> c r ; e. g. t cb/ b e t: 
(not rt>cld)cr) id) ttor Dtr ftebe, I who am standing before thee ; j© u, 
6 e r £)u mem etcjener 53rubet tuft, thou who art mine own brother. 

It will be perceived from these examples, that in German the 
personal pronouns (tcb, b u) are repeated after the relative; when- 
ever this is the case, the verb of the relative clause must agree in 
person with the personal pronoun ; otherwise it is put in the third 
person, and agrees with the relative ; e. g. Unfer &>ater, b e r 3) u b t ft 
intern J^tmratl, our father who art in heaven; <D u, bet fo triel 
It e P t unb fo lucma, b e n i t, thou, who readest so much and thinkest 
so little. 

Obs. 6. Instead of it> e t d) e $, ro c ( cb c r, pi. it) c ( cb c r, the gen- 
itives of the relative nxlcber, the Germans regularly substitute b e f s 
[en, b e r e n, pi. b e r e n ; the genitives of rcetcbet being only used 
when the relative is employed adjectively (§ 104); e. g. ber OJfrmn, 
t> e f f e n (not tt> e I cb e s) (Sobn icb ferine, the man whose son I am ac- 
quainted with; bte Wa'ume, fcer en (not roclcber) i^ltitben abcjefallcn 
finb, the trees, the blossoms of which have perished. But, teuton, 
tt>etcbe£ spbtlcfopben ^)rtncipta icb gelefen fyabe, Newton, the Princi- 
pia of which philosopher I have read. 

Obs. 7. The use of the relative f o, instead of it) e I d) e r and bet, 
fe antiquated. It occurs only occasionally in poetry, as, 3?o£cben 
fchtummert, fo ber gutter Sreubc, fo ber @to($ be£ £)orfe$ wax, Rosetta 
sleeps (in death), who once was the joy of her mother, the pride 
of the place. 

VI. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

§ 106. Interrogative pronouns are employed in 
asking questions. 

They are : — 1st, rser ? was? who? what? which are al 



438 

ways used substantively ; 2d, ro e i d) e r, w e I d) e, we I d) e § ? 
which, what? used substantively and adjectively both; and 3d, 
tt> a 3 f ii r etn, etne, etn? what sort of ? 

The plural of roer, uoa% is wanting; the singular is declined 
thus : — 

Masc. and Fern. Neut. 

Nom. tt>er, who? roa^, what? 

Gen. roeffen or xot% whose? (re eg), of what? 
Dat. rcem, to whom ? . roe^u,* to what ? 

Ace. men, whom ? j roae, what ? 

The interrogative roetcfyer is inflected precisely like the re. 
lative (§ 104). 

§ 107. When ttta$ fiir etn stands in immediate connection 
with a substantive, the e t n, which is the only declinable part, 
follows the inflection of the indefinite article in the singular 
number. In the plural the pronoun is simply xo a § f ii r. 

What sort of a tree, a flower, a book ? 
Singular. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. roa§ fiir etn SSaum, etne SSUtme, etn 33nd)? 
Gen. roaS fiir etneS 83aitme3, etner SSlume, etne§ 93ud)e3V 
Dat. roa$ fiir etnem 33aume, etner QSlume, etnem 93ud)e? 
Ace. roa$ fiir etnen SBaum, etne 95lume, etn S3ud) ? 

What sort of trees, flowers, books ? 
Plural. 
Nom. n>ct§ fiir SSattme, 93 him en, 93iidr)er ? 

Gen. son roaS fiir 23dumen, 23himen, SSiictyern? 
Dat. roaS fiir SSdumen, 23lumen, 93iid)ern? 

Ace. wa3 fiir 25dume, ©lumen, SSiicfyer? 

But If the substantive, to which n)a§ fiir etn relates, is not 
expressed, it is declined in the singular only, like an adjective 
rf the first declension, thus : — 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

Nom. n)a§ fiir etner, etne, etneS, 

Gen. roaS fiir etne3, etner, eineS, 

Dat. ma3 fiir etnem, etner, etnem, 

Ace. roaS fiir etnen, etne, etneS. 

* With respect to the pronominal adverbs, which supply the place of the 
oblique cases of demonstrative, relative and interrogative pronouns, see the 
remarks on Adverbs, below. 



430 

§ 108. OBSERVATIONS. 

Obs. 1. The genitive roeffcn, and the dative roem, are gener« 
ally applicable to persons only, and not to things, except the ab* 
breviated form n?c9 in composition; as, rocSbfltfc, rr> c jht> e Q e n, 
wherefore, on what account ; e. g. mffictffc tuft £)u gcfcmmcn ? 
wherefore hast thou come] nx^nxgen nxtnt fte? why does she 
weep 1 

Obs. 2. The pronouns xva 6 f u r c i n and ro c I d), the uninfected 
form cf ruetcbcr, are sometimes used in exclamations of surprise; 
e. g. ££ a g fur c t n S^autn ! What a tree ! (Sefjt, rc> c I d) c i n 
93?cnfd) ! Lo, what a man ! 3£ e I cl) ©tiicf be* ^immdS fjab ii) rccgs 
gcfd)t«lt)ert ! What heaven-sent fortune I have cast away ! 

Obs. 3. ££ e r and tv a £ are employed when inquiry is made 
after a person or thing in the most general and indefinite manner. 
2Bc(d)cr is more definite, including the notion of the quality or 
condition of the individual object inquired after. It is the correlative 
of folcnet (§ 102. Obs. 2), and corresponds to the Latin qualis. SLB a ^ 
fur ctn indicates the species or kind, to which the person or thing 
belongs ; e. g. 2S c r tft ta ? Sin Sttann. 2£ a 6 fur cincr? 
©in .ftcmfmann cms &ani(nirg. ££e(d)er £aufmann? jgn'rr 9?. 
Who is there? A man. What sort of oriel A merchant of Ham- 
burg. What merchant? Mr. N. 2£a$ rjaft £)u? (Sine ©(u me, 
8©Qb fur cine 93(umc? (Sine 3?efe. SOSctftc? Ote retbc What 
have you ] A flower. What sort of a flower 1 A rose. Which 
rose 1 The red rose. 

Obs. 4. The e t n, of roaS fur ctn, is omitted before names of ma- 
terials, or before substantives of the plural number. ££a* fur 
fflBein? Wliat kind of wine! 2£as flUBEcute? What sort of 
people? ^w 

Obs. 5. The interrogative tt> a $ is sometimes employed in the 
sense of w a r u m ; e .g. 2B a * &etrubjt £)u £>td) ? Why art thou cast 
town ! SB a $ roetnen 6te ? W T hy do you weep ? 



VERBS, 



§ 109. 1st, A verb is a word by which either an ac- 
tivity, a passivity, or a simple mode of existence is predi- 
cated of a person or thing called its subject ; e. g. id) 
fcfyretfre, I write ; £m ttrirfi gefdjfaqett, thou art beaten ; 
Die Diofe fclitbt, the rose blooms. 

2d, Verbs are divided into two principal classes — 
Transitive and Intransitive. 

3d, Transitive verbs are active verbs, the sense of which is 
not complete without the addition of an object in the accusa- 
tive case ; e. g. id) fcfyretbe etnert 33rtef, I am writing a letter. 



440 

§ 110. Intransitive verbs are of two kinds:— 
1st, Neuter verbs ■, which denote either a quiescent state (sim. 
pie mode of existence) ; as, id) rufye, ftge, fcfylafe, I am resting, 
sitting, sleeping, or such an activity as does not terminate in 
any object ; e. g. id) Icuife, fcimpfe, gefye, I am running, strug- 
gling, going. 

2d, Those active verbs, the object of which is either in the 
genitive or dative ; e. g. id) fcfyone, sercjeffe, ertnnere mid) fet* 
net, I spare, forget, remember him ; id) gefyorcfye, trdtie, banfe 
i t) m, I obey, trust, thank him. 

§ 111. Transitive verbs have two forms, called the 
active and the passive voices. 

If the subject is represented as the agent acting upon an- 
other person or thing {object in the accusative), the verb is said 
to be in the active voice ; e. g. id) v u f e, He be, nenne 
1 1) n, I love, call, name him. 

B t if the subject of the verb is the object of the action ex- 
pressed by it, the verb is said to be in the passive voice ; e. g. 
id) roetbe gerufen, geltebt, cjencmnt, I am called, loved, named. 

§ 112. 1st, Intransitive verbs do, from the nature of their 
signification, not admit of a passive voice, but have the active 
form only ; as, id) retfe, ftefye, I am travelling, standing. 

2d, When, however, the active subject cannot be named, or 
is designedly left in^jferminate, intransitive verbs may be used 
impersonally in the mird person singular of the passive voice ; 
e. g. e£ rotrb getangt, gefptelt, getrunfen, there 
is dancing, playing, drinking going on. 

§ 113. The class of intransitive verbs comprehends also 
reflexive verbs. Of these there are two kinds : — 

1st, Such as are employed in the reflexive form only; as, 
ftrf) fceftnnen, fid) fefynen, ftd) freuen, to reflect, to 
long, to rejoice. 

2d, Such as are formed from transitive verbs by the addition 
of the reflexive pronouns m t d), nn§, b t d), end), fi d) (§ 90. 
Obs. 3) ; e. g. er anjett ft d), he is vexed ; id) lege mid), I lie 
down ; fyiire Du £) t d) ! beware ! from argern, legert, 
I) U ten, to vex, to lay down, to guard. 

This form of verbs is of extensive use in German, and cor- 
responds to the deponent verbs in Latin and to the middle voice 
in Greek. 

§ 114. 1st, Impersonal verbs are employed in the third 
person singular only. Their subject is quite indeterminate, and 



441 

is always expressed by the indefinite pronoun e$ (§ 90. Obs. 7)^ 
as, e £ r e g n e t, e $ b o n n e r t, e £ b It § t, it rains, it thun- 
ders, it lightens ; e3 fyetgt, ^ * s sa id » e$ gtbt 2eute, there are 
men. • 

2d, Many verbs have an impersonal form in German, which 
are not used as such in English ; e. g. e$ fcitngert mid), I am 
hungry ; e$ bitrftet mtd), I am thirsty ; e§> frtert mid), I am 
cold ; e3 Idgt fief) ntd>t gut fingen, it is not easy to sing, &c. 

§ 115. Of auxiliary verbs there are two classes in Ger- 
man : — 

1st, Auxiliary verbs of tenses, of w T hich there are three : 
f) a b e n, to have ; f e t n, to be ; and n> e r b e n, to become (shall, 
will). 

2d, Auxiliary verbs of mood, not absolutely necessary to the 
conjugation of the verb. They are seven in number : b it v* 
f e n, to be permitted ; f d n n e n, to be able (can) ; m 6 g e n, to 
be allowed (may) ; m it f f e n, to be obliged (must) ; f 1 1 e rt, to 
be under obligation (ought) ; xo 1 1 e n, to be willing (to intend) ; 
taff en, to let (permit). 

§ 116. In the conjugation of the German verb, we 
distinguish, as in English, the relations of Number, 
Person, Mood, and Tense. 

§117. Verbs have two numbers, Singular and Plural; 
and three persons, each of which may be distinguished by its 
characteristic termination. 

The following scheme exhibits the terminations of verbs as as- 
sumed by the three persons, singular and plural : — 

Singular. Plural. 



1st Person — e or given, 

2d Person — eft, <f, 

3d Person — e t, t, or like the first person ; 

examples : 
.Singular. Plural. 



en, 
em 



id) rec e, I speak, 

bit lobejr, thou praisest, 

er fptel t, he plays ; 



ttnr (efen, we read, 
t'br fefyet, ye see, 
fte fucf) e n, they seek. 



§ 1 18. German verbs have four moods, viz : — the Indica* 
live, Subjunctive, Imperative, and the Infinitive; the significa- 
tion of which in general corresponds to that of moods of the 
19* 



442 jm 

same name in English ; e. g. fie r e b e n, they speak (in . 
die); id) b&tte gerebet, I should have spoken (subj.) ; 
r e b e X) it ! speak thou (imper.) ! 



?i 



119. They have, moreover, six tenses : — the Present, 
Imperfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Simple Future, and Future 
Perfect. Of these the present and imperfect of the indicative 
and subjunctive active are simple tenses ; the remaining ten- 
ses of the active voice, as well as all the tenses of the passive, 
are periphrastic, i. e. formed by means of the perfect partici- 
ple or infinitive, and the auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115) ; e. g. 
pres. id) b 6 v e, I hear ; imperf id) 1)6 r te, I heard ; perf id) 
babe g e b 6 r t, I have heard ; pres. passive,- tcfy w e r b e g e * 
t) 6 r t, I am heard, &c. 

§ 120. There are four forms of the infinitive : — the present 
and perfect infinitives active ; as, i o b e n, to praise ; g e I o b t 
b a b e n, to have praised ; and the present and perfect intinitives 
passive ; e. g. g e t b t tt> e r b e n, to be praised ; g e ( b t 
tt) D r b e n fetn, to have been praised. The present infinitive 
active always ends in n or e tt, and is often preceded by the pre- 
position i u ; as, au l>e£f e rt, to help ; $u tabel it, to blame, 

§ 121. The German verb has three Participles : the 
present, perfect, and future. 

1st, The present participle is formed from the present infini- 
tive, by adding b to it ; as, (cben b, l)i>ren ft, praising, hearing. 
It is always active in its signification, and is less extensively 
employed than the English participle in ing. 

2d, The perfect participle generally assumes the prefix g e, 
and ends either in e t or t in regular verbs ; as, g e lob e t, 
praised ; g e leb e t, lived ; or in e n (it) in irregular verbs ; as, 
g e feb e rt, seen ; g e geff e tt, eaten. When belonging to tran- 
sitive verbs, it has a passive signification (except in the cam- 
pound tenses of the active voice), but when formed from in- 
transitive verbs, it is active (§ 112), differing from the present 
participle only in the relation of time. 

3d, The future participle is formed from the infinitive with 
lit, by annexing the letter b ; as, gu loben, to praise ; 
SU loben b, to be praised; 311 serebren b, to be venerated, 
verable. Like the Latin participle in dus (amandus, veneran- 
dus), it always has a passive signification, involving at the same 
time the notion of necessity, propriety, or possibility. It is, 
however, employed only as an adjective in the attributive rela- 



443 

tion (§52); as, fcer }u lob en be ©dji/ier, the- scholar wh* 
is to be (ought, may, must be) praised. But not : ber ©cbiiler 
tft 5 u I o b e n b ] in the latter case the infinitive with gu is used 
instead of the participle: — ber ©djuler tft git I b e n, the 
scholar is to be praised, is worthy of praise. 

§ 122. With respect to the perfect participle, it is to be re- 
marked, that it does not assume the prefix g e ha the following 
instances : — 

1st, In the verb m e r b e n, when, as an auxiliary r , it stands 
in connection with another verb ; as, er *'$ gefrctgt n) r b e U 
(not geroovben), he has been asked. 

2d, In all German verbs compounded with the inseparable 
and unaccented prefixes be, be tin, emp, enr, er, $ e, set, 
$ e r a b, o e r it n and ger; as, b e t e b r t, entfaltet, 
e r 1 1) e 1 1 1, sergeffen, gerrtffen, instructed, unfolded, 
imparted, forgotten, torn ; not g e belebrt, 9 e entfaltet, &c. 

4th, In all verbs derived from foreign languages, which 
have the accented termination trenorieren; e. g. a b f ( 
»t rt, ftubtrt, barbtert, from abfefotren, to absolve; 
fhifc i x e n, to study ; barb t e r e n, to shave. 

5th, In verbs compounded with the particles burd), b t n t e r, 
iiber, urn, unter, soil and roteber, when they are in- 
separable, in which case the accent rests not on the particle, 
but on the verb; e.g. x> 1 1 b r a dr) t, b tnterg ang en, un* 
terfefyrteben, from t>ollbringen, to consummate, finish ; 
fytntergeben, to deceive, and unterfefyretben, to sign. 

AUXILIARY VERBS. 

§ 123. To the full conjugation of German verbs, three 
auxiliaries are necessary, and only three, namely, the 
auxiliary verbs of tenses (§ 115): fyabett, to have; 
f e i n, to be, and to e r b e it, to become. 

1st, ,£> a b C n is used in forming" the perfect infinitive (and 
lenses derived from it), the perfect and pluperfect, both indi- 
cative and subjunctive, of all transitive and of many intransitive 
verbs; as, gelie&t &aben, to have loved; perf id) fyabc geltebt, I 
have loved ; pluperf td| f) a 1 1 c geftcbt, 1 had loved ; future perf 
id) roerfcc 3 e 1 1 c b t fy a b e n, I shall have loved, &c. 

2d, © c i n serves to form the same tenses of all verbs in the 
passive voice and of many intransitive verbs in the active ; e. g. 
perf id) b t n gettcbt ruotfccn, I Aawe been loved ; future perf fcu nntft 
aeliebt roerben ^fctn, thou shalt have been loved; id) bin ftcreifX I 
have travelled. 



444 

3d, 2B e r t> c n is used in the formation of the future tenses, 
when it corresponds to the English shall or will, and also in the 
formation of all the tenses of the passive voice, when it corresponds 
to the English verb to be ; e. g. id) \v c r t) c (tebcn, I shall love; 
fcu ro t r jt geltcOt fyaben, thou wilt have loved ; cr ro t r t> gelteOt, he is 
loved, &c. 

§ 124. The simple tenses of the auxiliary verbs are irre- 
gular as in English. The compound tenses are regularly 
formed, as in all other verbs, according to the following 

RULES FOR THE FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 

Rule I. The perfect tense of any verb is formed by annex- 
ing its perfect participle to the present indicative of either b a * 
benorfetn;td)l)abe gebabt, geliebr, gefungen, I have had, 
loved, sung ; tc^ bin geroefen, gegcmgen, geretft, I have been, 
gone, travelled. 

Rule II. The pluperfect is made by joining the perfect par- 
ticiple of the verb to the imperfect tense of either I) a b e n or 
f e t n ; as, id) b a 1 1 e gebabr, geltebt, gefungen, I had had, 
loved, sung ; id) to a v gewefen, gegangen, geretf t, I had been, 
gone, travelled. 

Rule III. The first or simple future is formed by annexing 
the .present infinitive of the verb to the present indicative of 
the auxiliary noerbert; as, id) roerbe baben, (teben, retfen, 
few, I shall have, love, travel, be. 

Rule IV. The future perfect is made by joining the perfect 
infinitive of the verb to the present of the auxiliary vo e r fc) e n ; 
e. g. id) tt> e r fc e gebabt baben, geltebt baben, geretf t baben, I 
shall have had, loved, travelled. 

Remark, The corresponding tenses of the subjunctive mood 
are formed in a similai manner. 

§ 125. From these rules it will be seen, that in order to 
form all the compound tenses of a verb, three principal parts 
must necessarily be given, viz : the present infinitive, the per- 
fect participle, and the perfect infinitive (which also contains 
the auxiliary which the verb employs). 

§ 126. Instead of the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive 
(id) batte, id) batte gebabt, I might have, I might have had), 
when they are conditional, i. e. when they denote a possibility 
not conceived as really existing, the imperfect subjunctive of 
tt> e x fc e n (id) roi'trfce), in connection with the present and per- 



445 

ect infinitive, is often used ; e. g. id) ro it r b e b <* b en, It e* 
b e n, I should have, love ; id) woiirbe gebabt, $eliebt fyabett, I 
should have had, have loved. 

These compound forms of the verb have commonly had a 
place among the other tenses, under the name of first and 
second conditionals* 

§ 127. PARADIGMS 
TO THE CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 

I. £> a b e n, to have, 

C Pres. Infin. fyabert, to have. 
Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gebabt, had. 

( Perf. Infin. cjebabt fyaben, to have had. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) babe, I have, am having, do td) babe, I may have, be hav- 

have, ing, 

fcu bafl, thou hast, &c. bit babcft, thou may st have, &c. 

er (fie, e£) bat/ he (she, it) has, er (fie, e3) babe, he (she, it) 

&c. may have, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

tt)tr baben, we have, &c. mv baben, we may have, &c. 

xbr babet (babt), ye or you xtyv babet, ye or you may have, 

have, &c. &c. 

fie baben, they have, &c. fie baben, they may have, &c. 

Imperfect, 

Singular. Singular. 

id) batte, I had, was having, id) batte, I might have, be hav- 

did have, ing, 

fcu batteft, thou hadst, <kc. bit bdtteft, thou mightst have 

&c. 
er batte, he had, &c. er fedtte, he might have, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

ttrir batten, we had, &c. toiv batten, we might have, &c. 

tbr battet, ye or you had, &c. tbr bartet, ye or jou might 

have, &c. 
Re batten, they had, &c. fie batten, they might have, &c 



446 

PERFECT. 

Singular. Singular, 

vt) t)ct ( ee gebabt, I have had, id) babe gebabt, I may have 

been having, had, been having, 

bit baft gebabt, thou hast had, bu babeft gebabt, thou mayst 

&c, have had, &c. 

ft bat gebabt, he has had, &c. er babe gebabt, he may have 

had, &c. 

Plural. Plural, 

voiv baben gebabt, we have had, nnr baben ge^abt, we may have 

&c. had, &c. 

tbr babet(babt) getjabt, you have t^r babet gebabt, you may have 

had, &c. had, &c. 

fie baben gebabt, they have had, fie baben gebabt, they may have 

&c. had, &c. 
Pluperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) bcttte gebabt, I had had, been id) batte gebabt, I might have 

having, had, been having, 

in battejT gebabt, thou hadst fcu featteft gebabt, thou mightst 

had, &c. have had, &c. 

er batte gebabt, he had had, &c. er batte gebabt, he might have 

had, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr batten gebabt, we had had, tmr batten gebabt, we might 

&c. have had, &c. 

tbr battct gebabt, you had had, t'br bdttet gebabt, you might 

&c. have had, &c. 

fte batten Qet)aht f they had had, fie batten gebabt, they might 

&c. have had, &c. 
FiasT Future, 

Singular. Singular, 

id) taerbe baben, I shall have, tcf> tserbe baben, I shall have, 

be having, be having, 

bit wtrjt baben, thou wilt have, bit werbeft baben, thou wilt 

&c. have, &c. 

er tmrb baben, he will have, er werbe baben, he will have, 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
ttnr roerben baben, we shall have, dec. 
tbr roerbet baben, you will have, &c. 
fte roerben baben, they will have, &c. 



447 

Future Perfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) roerbe gebabt baben, I shall id) roerbe gebabt baben, I shall 

have had, been having, have had, been having, 

bit nwjT cjebabt baben, thou wilt bit roerbejt gebabt baben, thou 

have had, &c. wilt have had, &c. 

er rotrb gebabt baben, he will er noerbe gefyabt baben, he will 

have had, &c. have had, &c. 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 

toiv roerben gebabt baben, we shall have had, &c. 
t'br roerbet gebabt baben, you will have had, &c. 
fte roerben gebabt baben, they will have had, &c. 

Conditionals, 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

Singular. Singular. 

td) ttjiirbe fyaben, I should have, id) rourbe gebabt baben, I should 

have had, 
bit roiirbeft fyaben, thou wouidst bu nmrbefl: gebabt baben, thou 

have, wouidst have had, 

er roiirbe fyaben, he would have; er roiirbe gebabt i)ahen f he 

would have had ; 

Plural. Plural. 

*mr roiirben fjaben, we should ttur nntrben gebabt fyaben, w r e 

have, should have had, 

tfyr roirbet baben, you would t^r miirbet gebabt fyaben, you 

have, would have had, 

fte roiirben Jjaben, they would fte nutrben gebabt fyaben, they 

have- would have had. 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

baben ttnr, let us have, 
Ijabe (bit), have (\hou), do thou babetorbabt(t'br), ) have ye, da 

have, baben ©te, $ ye Lave, 

l)abe er (fte, e$), let him (her, baben fte, let them have, 
it) have ; 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. baben, to have, Pres. babenb, having, 

Pcrf. gefyabt baben, to have had. Perf. gebabt, had. 






448 






§ 128. II. © e t n, to be. 

C Pres. Infin. fetn, to be. 
Principal parts. < Perf. Part, gewefen, been. 

( Perf. Infijn. gewefen fetn, to have been. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Present. 

Singular. Singular, 

id) btn, I am, id) fet, I may be, 

bit btft, thou art, bit fetefr (fetjr),thou mayst be, 

er (jie, e3) tjl, he (she, it) er fet, he may be ; 
is; 

Plural. Plural. 

Wtr ftnb, we are, wtr feten (fetn), vve may be, 

tbr fetet, you may be, 
fie feten (fetn), they may be. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. 



tbr fetb, you are, 
fte ftnb, they are. 



Singular, 
id) war, I was, 
bu warejl (warjl), thou wast, 



er war, he was ; 

Plural. 
rotr waren, we were, 
tbr waret (wart), you were, 
fte waren, they were. 



id) ware, I might be, 

fcu warejl (warjl), thou might* 

be, 
er ware, he might be ; 

Plural. 
wir waren, we might be, 
tbr wdret (wart), you might be, 
fte waren, they might be. 

Perfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) bin gewefen, I have been, id) fet gewefen, I may have 

been, 
bit btjlgewefen, thou hast been, bu fetjl gewefen, thou mayst 

have been, 
er tjl gewefen, be has been ; er fet gewefen, he may have 

been; 
Plural. Plural. 

wtr ftnb gewefen, we have been, wtr feten gewefen, we may have 

been, 
tbr fetb gewefen, you have been, tbr fetet gewefen, you may hav8 

been, 
fte ftnb gewefen, they have been, fte feten gewefen, they may have 

been. 



449 

Pluperfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) war gewefen, I had been, id) ware gewefen, I might nave 

been, 
&u warjl gewefen, thou hadst bu wdreft gewefen, thou mightst 

been, have been, 

er war gewefen, he had been ; er ware gewefen, he might 

have been ; 

Plural. Plural. 

wtr waren gewefen, we had wtr wdren gewefen, we might 

been, ' have been, 

xfyr waret gewefen, you had xfyr wdret gewefen, you migk* 

been, have been, 

fie waren gewefen, they had fte wdren gewefen, they might 

been. have been. 

First Future. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) werbe fetn, I shall be, id) werbe fetn, I shall be, 

bu wtrjl fein, thou wilt be, bit werbeft fetn, thou wilt be, 

er wirb fetn, he will be ; er werbe fetn, he will be ; 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive* 

wtr werben fetn, we shall be, 
xfyr werbet fetn, you will be, 
fte werben fetn, they will be. 

Future Perfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id) werbe gewefen fetn, I shall id) werbe gewefen fetn, 1 shall 

have been, have been, 

bit wtrjl gewefen fetn, thou wilt bu werbejl gewefen fetn, thou 

have been, wilt have been, 

cr wtrb gewefen fetn, he will er werbe gewefen fetn, he will 

have been ; have been ; 

Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 

Wtr werben gewefen fetn, we shall have been, 
tl)r werbet gewefen fetn, you will have been, 
fte werben gewefen fetn, they will have been. 



450 

Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

Singular, Singular, 

id) roitrbe fetn, I should be, id) ttnirbegeroefen fetn, I should 

have been, 
bu nmrbeft fetn, thou wouldst bit roiirbeji gemefen fetn, thou 

be, wouldst have been, 

er mttrbe fetn, he would be ; _ er roiirbe gemefen fetn, he would 

have been ; 

Plural. Plural. 

anr roiirben fetn, we should be, tmr rottrben gercefen fetn, we 

should have been, 

tfyr ttmrbet fetn, you would be, tfyr nnirbet geroefen fetn, you 

would have been, 

fte nutrben fetn, they would be. fie wtirben geroefen fetn, they 

would have been. 

Imperative. 
Singular. Plural. 

feten ttnr, let us be, 
fet (kit), be thou, do be, fetb (t'fyr), ) be ye, 

feten ©te, $ do ye be, 
fet er (fte, e3), let him (her, it) feten fte, let them be. 
be ; 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. fetn, to be, Pres. fetenb (wefenb), being, 

Perf. geroefen fetn, to have been. Perf. gerx>efen, been. 

§ 129. III. SBerben, to become (shall, will). 

(Pres, Infin. roerben, to become. 

Pekf. Part. fl e»orten, become. 

Perf. Infin. geroorben fetn, to have 
I. become. 

INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) werbe, I become, am be- id) roerbe, I may become, be 

coming, do become, becoming, 

in rotrft, thou becomest, &c. bit roerbejl:, thou mayst be* 

come, &c. 
er tmrb, he becomes, &c. er roerbe, he may become, &c 






451 

Plural, Plural, 

tcti roerben, we become, &c. tmr roerben, we may become, 

&c. 
tfyr werbet, you become, &c. t^r werbet, you may become, 

&c. 
fie roerben, they become, &c. fie rcerben, they may become, 

&c. 

Impeefect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) rourbe (roarb), I became, id) roitrbe, I might become, be 

was becoming, did become, becoming, 

bu tmtrbeft (roarbjl), thou be- bu roiirbeft thou mightst be- 

camest, &c. come, &c. 

er ttwrbe (roarb), he became, er roiirbe, he might become, 

&c. &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr rcurbert, we became, &c. rotr miirben, we might be 

come, &c. 

{{)r rourbet, you became, &c. tt)r ttntrbet, you might be- 
come, &c. 

fie ttmrben, they became, &c. fte rourben, they might be- 
come, &c. 

Perfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

id) btn geroorben (roorben), I id) fet geroorben (roorben), I 

have become, been becom- may have become, been be- 

ing, coming, 

bit tuft geroorben (worben), thou bu fetft gewerben (roerben), 

hast become, &c. thou mayst have become, 

&c. 

er tft geroorben (worben), he er fet geroerben (roorben), he 

has become, &c. may have become, &c. 

Plural. Plural. 

ttnr finb gcroerben (roorben), rot'r feten geroorben (roorben), 

we have become, &c. we may have become, <kc. 

itjr fetb gerocrben (roerben), tfyr fetet geroorben (roerben), 

you have become, &c. you may have become, &c. 

fte finb geroerben (roerben), fte feten geroerben (roerben), 

they have become, &c. they may have become, &c« » 



452 



Pluperfect. 



Singular. 

id) war geworben (werben), I 
had become, been becom- 
ing* 

feu warfl: geworben (worben), 
thou hadst become, &c. 

er war geworben (worben), he 
had become, &c. 

Plural. 

wtr waren geworben (worben), 
we had become, &c. 

tfyr waret geworben (worben), 
you had become, &c. 

fte waren geworben (worben), 
they had become, &c. 



Singular. 

id) ware geworben (worben), I 

might have become, been 

becoming, 
bu mdreft geworben (worben), 

thou mightst have become, 

&c. 
er ware geworben (worben), 

he might have become, &c. 

Plural. 

wtr wdren gtworben (worben), 

we might have become, &c. 
xbr wdret geworbert (worben), 

you might have become, &c. 
fte wdren geworben (worben), 

they might have become, 

&c. 



First Future. 



Singular. 

,cn werbe werben, I shall be- 
come, be becoming, 

bit wtrft werben, thou wilt be- 
come, &c. 

er wtrb werben, he will be- 
come, &c. 



Singular, 
id) werbe werben, I shall be- 

come, be becoming, 
bu werfeeft werben, thou shalt 

become, &c. 
er werbe wfcrben, he shall be- 

come, &c. 



Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
Wtr werben werben, we shall become, &c. 
tfyr werbet werben, you will become, &c. 
fte werben werben, they will become, &c. 



>i 



Future 



Singular. 

id) werbe geworben (worben) 

fctn, I shall have become, 

been becoming, 
bu wirft geworben (worben) 

fetn, thou wilt have become, 

&c. 
er wtrb geworben (worben) fefn, 

he will have become, &c. 



Perfect. 

Singular. 

id) werbe gewort^en (worben) 
fetn, I shall have become, 
been becoming, 

t)U werbeft geworben (worben) 
fetn, thou wilt have become, 

er werbe geworben (worben) 
fetn, he will have become, 
&c. 



453 



Plural, Indicative and Subjunctive. 
ttnr roerben geroorben (roorben) fetn, we shall have become, &c. 
i\)X roerbet geroorben (roorfcen) fetn, you will have become, &c, 
fie roerben gercorben (roorben) fetn, they will have become, &c. 

Conditional. 



First Conditional. 
Singular. 

tcf) ttntrbt werben, I should be 
come, be becoming, 



tn nntrbeft roerben, 
wouldst become, &c. 



thou 



er roiirbe roerben, he would 
become, &c. 

PZwraZ. 
ttJtv roiirben roerben, we should 
become, &c. 

tfyr roiirbet roerben, you would 
become, &c. 

f e ttmrben roerben, they would 
become, &c. 



Singular. 



toerbe (bit), become thou, do 

become, 
tt>erbe er (fte, e3), let him (her, 

it) become ; 

Infinitives. 
Pres. werben, to become, 
Perf. geroorben fetn, to have 
become. 



Second Conditional. 
Singular. 

id) ttmrbe geroorben (worben) 
fetn, I should have become, 

* been becoming, 

bu tmtrDeft gerocrben (worben) 
fetn, thou wouldst have be- 
come, &c. 

er roiirbe geworben jrcorben) 
fetn, he would have become, 
&c. 

Plural. 

wtr nmrben geroorben (morben) 
fetn, we should have be- 
come, &c. 

tfyr txntvbet geworben (worben) 
fetn, you would have be- 
come, &c. 

fie roiirben geworben (roorben) 
fetn, they would have be- 
come, &c. 

Imperative. 

Plural. 
noerben wotr, let us become, 



roerbet (tbr), ) become ye, 
roerben <Ste, $ do become, 
werben fte, let them become. 



Participles. 
Pres. roerbenb, becoming, 
Perf. geroorben, become. 



§ 130. It has been remarked (§ 123) that the compound 
tenses of some intransitive verbs are made by means of the 
auxiliary fy a b e n, and of others by means of f e t n. The sig- 



454 

rrfication of the verb generally decides which auxiliary is to 
be employed. 

§ 131. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE 

auxiliary I) a ben* 

1st, Impersonal and reflexive verbs; as, e$ I) at geregnet, 
gebcnnert, it has rained, thundered ; id) I) a b e mid) gefreut, 1 
have rejoiced ; er b a t ftd) gedrgert, he has been vexed. 

2d, All the auxiliary verbs of mood (§ 115) 5 as, id) b a t e 
gemugt, I nave Deen obliged ; er b <* * mcfjt feromen fonnen, he 
has not been able to come. 

3d, All intransitive verbs which are followed ty an object 
in the genitive or dative, or by a preposition ; as, er I) at met* 
ner gebacfyt, he has remembered me ; tcf) t) ab e tt)m gebtent, I 
have served him; er bat fiber £)ttf) gefpottet, he has derided 
you. 

Except : fregegncn, to meet ; fefgcn, to follow, and roetcfjcn, to 
yield to, which govern the dative, and take fetn. 

4th, Verbs denoting a permanent state or such an activity, 
by means of which an impression on the outward senses is 
produced ; e. g. id) l)ab e gelegen, gefdfjlafen, geftcmben, ge* 
mobnt, I have lain, slept, stood, lived ; er bat gebrctufet, ge* 
brfitlt, gebuftet, geglan$t, gero djen, gefd)tenen, geroetnt, he has 
bellowed, roared, exhaled fragrance, glittered, smelled, ap. 
peared, wept, &c. 

§ 132. INTRANSITIVE VERBS WHICH ASSUME THE 
AUXILIARY fetJU 

1st, The verb fern itself; as, id) bin geraefert, I have been, 
id) war geroefen, I had been. 

2d, Verbs which imply motion either in general, or to some j 
definite place or object ; moreover, such as denote a transition 1 
from one state to another, especially verbs compounded with 
the prefixes er, *>er, exit, or with the particles an, cuif, *ud, | 
etrt, &c. The following list exhibits most of them : — 

aufroacben, to awake ; erftauncn, to be astonished, antf | 

auSarten, to degenerate ; other compounds with e t ; 

bcqcgncn, to meet; fafyrert, to move ; 

berften, to burst ; fauten, to become putrefied ; 

6rcd>en, to break ; fliegen, to fly ; 

fcringen, to press ; fltcjjcn, to flow ; 

ettcn, to hasten ; frieren, to freeze ; 

crgrimmen, to grow angry ; gcfjen, to go ; 



grfangen, to get, to arrive ; 
genefert, to recover ; 
getatben, to fall into ; 
geunncR, to coagulate ; 
gcjcbebcn, to come to pass ; 
(Ktkrj, to heal ; 
iac\cn, to run in haste; 

«*"**' I to climb; 

Fommcn, to come ; 
frtccbcn, to creep ; 
(cmt>en, to land ; 
.taufen, to run ; 
(judlen, to well forth ; 
ret fen, to ripen; 
reifen, to travel ; 
tetren, to ride ; 
rennen, to run ; 
rtnnen, to flow; 
turf en, to move ; 
febctfocn, to part ; 
fcrjtcji'eu, to dart forth ; 
febtffen, to sail ; 
fefyeicben, to sneak ; 
febtiipfen, to slip ; 



455 

febm et$en, to melt \ * 

febretton, to stride ; 

fdjro'cliciVi to swell; 

fcbroiumtcn, to swim 

f&rmnfccri, to vanish ; 

fcv}ctn, to sail ; 

fin fen, to sink ; 

fprtefcen, to sprout; 

fpringen, to leap ; 

jieto/n, to rise ; 

fierben, to die; 

jiojjcn, to pu&h ; 

ftranDen / to strand ; 

jircmcbeln, to trip ; 

jircicbt'n, to ramble ; 

ftiiqen, to plunge ; 

treten,, to step ; 

traben, to trot ; 

Sctarmcn, to grow poor ; 

tKrnx'fcn, to decay, -and many othel 

verbs compounded with 9 e t ; 
roanfcctn, to wander ; 
roaten, to wade ; 
nuueben, to yield ; 
Steven, to pass. 



§ 133. Some verbs employ fyctben in one signification, and 
fettt in another. With baben they generally imply an activity, 
and with fetn & state or condition: — 

(£v bat ba3 $amm auSgebrarmt, he has burnt out the chim- 
ney ; ba3 geuer tjr au%ebranrtt, the fire has done burning ; id) 
ijabe fortgefabren in lefen, I have continued to read ; id) btn 
fortgefabrert, I drove oft; tie 3?6bre fyat gefleffen, the pipe has 
leaked; fca? 28afifer tjl gefloffen, the water has flowed ; id) babe 
geftorert, I have been cold ; bte Wild) tjt gefroren, the milk is 
frozen; id) fyabe mid) mtoe gegangett, I have become fatigued with 
walking ; id) bin nad) £aufe gegangett, I have gone home ; id) 
l)abe gejagt, I have hunted ; id) bin gejagt, I have run in haste ; 
id) babe em ^3ferb gerttten, I have ridden a horse ; id) btn au&* 
gerttten, I have taken a ride. 



CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

§ 134. It has already been observed (§ 119) that only 
two tenses of the German verb are simple tenses, namely, the 
present and imperfect of the active voice. Besides these the 
present infinitive active (baben, roerben), two participles (pres. 



456 

ftabenb, perf. geftabt)? and the imperative mood, are also simple 
forms of the verb. All other parts are 'periphrastic or com- 
pound, and formed by means of the infinitive or perfect parti- 
ciple, and one of the auxiliary verbs of tenses. 

§ 135. In the compound tenses the auxiliary alone is in- 
flected. Hence it follows, that when the inflection of the aux- 
iliaries is known, and the principal parts of any verb are given, 
all the tenses of the same may be easily formed according to 
the rules given above (§ 124). 

§ 136. The inflection of the compound tenses being uniform 
in all German verbs (with this variation only, that some take 
fyaben and others fetn for their auxiliary), all the differences and 
irregularities of conjugation must be sought for in the simple 
forms. 

§ 137. With respect to their simple forms, verbs 
follow two different modes of inflection : — 

1st, Without changing the radical vowel, they form the im- 
perfect simply by adding the termination e t e or e t to the root ; and 
the perfect participle, by adding the termination e t or t ; e. g 
pres. infin. bb e n, to praise, imperf. id) lob t e, perf. part, c^e* 
lob e t (ge(obt). Verbs thus conjugated are usually calied 
regular verbs. 

2d, The vowel of the root is changed in the imperfect tense 
and in the perfect participle, which latter then always ends in 
en or n, and the first and third persons of the imperfect indica- 
tive remain without any termination ; e. g. pres. infin. b e * 
f el) I en, to command, imperf. id), -er befafyl, I, he com- 
manded, perf. part. befot)ten; pres. infin. I e f c n, to read, 
imperf. id) I a 3, perf. part. $ e I e f e n. 

Verbs of this form of conjugation have heretofore passed under 
the name of irregular verbs. As, however, they are very numer- 
ous, comprehending nearly all the primitive verbs of the language, 
this name is now generally discarded, and various attempts have 
been made to reduce them to a number of regular conjugations. 

Note. The classification of the irregular verbs (which name we 
retain for the sake of convenience), and an alphabetical list of them 
will be found below. 

Sixteen verbs are partly regular and irregular, in the forma 
ion of their simple forms. They will be found in the table 
of irregular verbs below. 



457 



§ 138. The personal terminations of th« simple tenses 
are essentially the same in both kinds of verbs, except in the 
first and third persons singular of the imperfect indicative, in 
which irregular verbs assume no termination. The first and 
ih ird persons plural end always in e n, and the second person 
rlural in e t throughout all the moods and tenses. 

§ 139. When the root of an irregular verb contains one of 
ttLfi vowels a, o or it, it is generally modified into a, b, ii in the 
second and third persons of the present indicative, and also in 
the impeifect subjunctive ; e. g. id) fyalte, k" fyaltjT, er fyalt, I hold, 
thou holdest, he holds ; id) fanfc), subj. id) fanfce, I found, I might 
find. In like manner the radical e is changed into t or t e in 
the second and third persons of the present indicative, and in 
the singular of the imperative; e. g. id) $ebe, bit gt'bft er Q\bt, 
gtb bu, I give, thou givest, he gives, give thou ; id) fefye, bu 
fiefyft er fiefyt, fief) fc>u, I see, thou seest, he sees, see thou. 

§ 140. The following table presents a comparative view 
of the terminations of the simple forms of verbs, both regular 
and irregular. 



I 3 . 

«8 , 



I 3 



1st Pers. 
2d Pers. 
3d Pers. 



Present of 


all Verbs. 


Indicat. Subjunct. 


Indicat. 


e, 


e, 


*§ C 1st Pers. en,n, 


eft ft 


eft 


§ < 2d Pers. et, t, 


er, t 


e. 


SJ ( 3d Pers. en,n. 



Imperffct of Regular Verbs. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

1st Pers. te, ete, ete, te, 

2d Pers. teft eteft eteft teft 

3d Pers, te, ete, ete, te, 



Subjunct 

en, 
er, 
em 

Imperat. of Reg. Verbs. 



1st Pers. 
2d Pers. 
3d Pers. 



ten, eten, 
tet, etet, 
ten, eten. 

Participles. 



2d Pers. sing, e, 
1st Pers. pi. en, 
2d Pers. pi. et,t 

Infinitive. 



en, n. 



eten, ten, 
etet, tet, 
eten, ten. 

Pres. enb, nb. 
Per f> 9 — et, t 
Imperfect of Irregular Verbs. Imperat. of Ir. Verbs 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 



IF. 



1st Pers. 

2d Pers. 

3d Pers. 

20 



ft eft 



e, 

eft ft 
e. 



2d Pers. sing. — ,e, 
1st Pers.pl. en, 
2d Pers. pi. et, t 



458 



Imperfbcst of Irregular Verbs 



J st Pers. 
2d Pers. 
3d Pers. 



Indicative. 

en, 

tt,t, 

en. 

Participles. 



Subjunctive. 

en, 
et, r, 
en. 

Pres. enb. 
Perf. ge — en. 



iNFrUTIV* 

em 



§ 141. REMARKS ON TEI TABLE. 

Remark 1. In the present tense, all German verbs ar* regu 
larly formed by adding the above terminations to the root of th* 
present infinitive. 

Remark 2. In the imperfect of regular verbs, the t and the c t in 
dicate the tense, and the remaining part of the termination the 
different persons. The imperfect of irregular verbs, on the othe? 
hand, has terminations for the person only, the tense being suffi 
ciently distinguished by the change of the radical vowel. 

Remark 3. With respect to the e preceding the terminations ft, 
t e, &c, it is to be observed, that it is always retained in the sub 
junctive mood, but in the indicative it may either be retained oi 
omitted, as euphony may require ; e. g. subjunctive, id) lobe, I may 
praise, fcu lob e ft, thou mayst praise, id) lob e t c, I might praise ; 
indicative, t>u lob eft or lob ft, thou praisest; tcfytobete orlobte, J 
was praising. 

Remark 4. Verbs ending e I tt or e r n, reject the e of the termi- 
nation of inflection throughout, before ft, t or n. But in the first 
person of the present indicative, and in the imperative singular, the 
e of the original termination is rejected in its stead ; e. g. fammeln, 
to collect; pres. indie, id) fammle (instead of fammelc), I collect, 
t)u fammclft, ct fammelt, thou collectest, he collects, fammle £)u, 
do thou collect ; e6 fcauct t, it lasts, from t>aue r n, &c. The sub- 
junctive, however, either retains the e in both cases, or rejects the 
first only ; e. g. tch tat) e ( e or tat) I e, I may blame, fie tat) e I e n or 
afc I e n, they may blame, &c. 

§ 142. The tenses of the passive voice are all periphrastic, 
and are formed by combining the perfect participle of the verb 
with the different moods and tenses of the auxiliary werben; 
as, pres. indie, id) roerfce g e lie b t, I am loved ; imperf. indie. 
id) nuirfce g e 1 1 e b t, I was loved ; perf. indie, id) bin a, e 1 1 e b t 
roorfcen, I have been loved, &c. In this connection the perfect 
participle of werben always loses its prefix g e. (§ 122. 1st.) 



459 

PARADIGMS 

TO THE CONJUGATION OF GERMAN VERBS. 

§ 143. I. TRANSITIVE VERBS. 

8 o b e n, to praise, regular. 
3t it f e n , to call, irregular. 

{Pres. Infin. lob en, rufen, 
Imperf. Indic. id) lofce, rtef. 
Perf. Part, gelobt, cjerufen, 
Perf. Infin. gelobt, gerufen tyaben* 

ACTIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Present. 

Singular. Singular. 

I praise, call, am praising, I may praise, call, be prais 

calling, do praise, call. ing, calling. 

id) lobe, rufe, id) lobe, rufe, 

fcu lobeft (lobft), rufeft (rufft), bu lobefl, rufejl:, 
er lobet (lobt), rufet (ruft) ; er lobe, rufe; 

Plural. Plural, 

toiv loben, rufen, toiv loben, rufen, 

ttjr lobet (lobt), rufet (ruft), it)v lobet, rufet, 
fie toben, rufen* fie loben, rufen. 

Imperfect. 

Singular. Singular. 

I praised, called, was prais- I might praise, call, be praifiM 

ing, calling, did praise, call. ing, calling. 

id) lobte, rtef, id) lobete, rtefe, 

bu lobteft, rtefeft (rtefft), bit lobeteft, rtefeft, 

er lobte, rtef ; er lobete, rtefe; 

Plural. Plural, 

toiv (obten, rtefen, toiv lobeten, rt'efen, 

tyr lobtet, rtefet (rteft), H)v lobetet, rt'efet, 

fie lobten, rtefen. fte lobeten, rtefen* 

Perfect. 

I have praised, called, been I may have praised, carted, 

praising, calling, &c. been praising, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) fyabe, fc>u fyaft, er (rai Sing, id) babe, bu babe)?, er 

gelobt, gerufen ; tyabe gelobt, &erufen ; 



46© 



Plur. tmr fyaben, tfyr fyabt, fie 
bctben getobt, gerufen. 



Plur. rotr fyaben, tfyr fyabet, fie 
fyaben gelobt, gerufen. 



Pluperfect. 



I had praised, called, been 
praising, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) fyatte, bu fyatteft, er 
fyatte gelobt, gerufen; 

P/wr. wtr fatten, i\)v ^attet, fie 
fatten gelobt, gerufen. 



I might have praised, called, 
been praising, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) fydtte, bu fyatteft, er 
fyatte getobt, geuifen; 

PZwr. mtr fatten, tt>r fyattet, fie 
fatten gelobt, gerufen. 



First Future. 



I shall praise, call, be prais- 
K ing, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu nnrft, er 
nurb loben, rufen ; 

Plur. nur roerben, ii>v roerbet, 
fie roerben loben, rufen. 



I shall praise, call, be prais- 
ing, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu roerbeft, 
er roerbe, loben, ntfen ; 

Plur. rotr werben, tfyr werbet, 
fie roerben loben, rufen. 



I shall have praised, called, 
been praising, calling, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu ttnrjT", er 
tturb gelobt, .gerufen fyaben; 



Future Perfect 
I 



shall have praised, called 
been praising, calling, &c 

Sing, id) roerbe, bit merbefl, et 
roerbe gelobt, gerufen fyaben \ 



Plur. tt>iv roerben, tfyr roerbet, Plur. mtr roerben, tfyr rcerbet. 
fte roerben gelobt, gerufen fya* fte roerben gelobt, gerufer; 
ben. t)<xbetu 

Conditionals. 



First Conditional. 

I should praise, call, be prais- 
ing, calling. 

Sing, id) ttutrbe, bu wjfirbejl, 
er roitrbe loben, rufen ; 

Plur. nnr rourben, t^r nmrbet, 
(te rciirben loben, rufen. 



Second Conditional. 

I should have praised, called, 
been praising calling. 

Sing, id) rcitrbe, bu roiirbeft, 
er roiirbe gelobt, gerufen fya* 
ben; 

Plur. toiv roiirben, tfyr mivbex, 
fie miirben gelobt, gerufen 
fcaben. 



461 

Imperative Mood. 
Singular. Plural. 

(oben rotr, let us praise, be 
praising, 
(o^e (bit), praise thou, do (obet, lobt (tfyr), ) praise ye, 

praise, loben Ste, $ do ye praise, 

lobe er (fte, e£), let him (her, loben fie, let them praise. 
it) praise, be praising ; 

Singular. Plural. 

ritfen nnr, let us call, be call- 
ing, 
rufe (bli), call thou, do call, rnfet, raft (tfyr), ) call ye, do 

rufen Ste, j ye call, 

cufe er (fte, e3), let him (her, rufen fte, let them call, be 
it) call, be calling ; calling. 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. [oben, rufen, to praise, Pres. lobenb, rufenb, praising 
to call. calling. 

Perf. gelobt, gerufen bctben, to Perf. gelobf, gerufen, praised, 
have praised, called. called. 

PASSIVE VOICE. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

I am praised, called, &c. I may be praised, called, &c. 

Sing, id) roerbe, bu nn'rft, er Sing, id) roerfce, bit roerbeft, er 
rotrb gelobt, gerufen ; roerbe gelobt, gerufen ; 

Plur. nnr roerben, tt>r roerbet, Plur. rotr roerben, tbr roerbet, 
fte roerben gelobt, gerufen. fte roerben gelobt, gerufen. 

Imperfect. 
I was praised, called, &c. , I might be praised, called, &c. 

Sing, id) rourbe, bit murbeft, Sing, id) roiirbe, bit roitrbeft, er 
er nmrbe gelobt, gerufen; roiirbe gelobt, gerufen; 

Plur. mv rourben, tfyr ttntrbet, Plur. anr roiirben, tt>r nmrbet, 
fte trurben gelobt, gerufen. fte ttmrben gelobt, gerufen. 



462 



Perfect. 

I have been praised, called, I may have been prai&ed, 

&c. called, &c. 

Sing, id) bin, bu btft, er tjl ge* Sing, id) fet, bu feteft, ei fef 

lobt, gerufen roorben; gelobt, gerufen rcorben ; 

Plur. xoix ftnb, tfyr fetb, fie P/wr. rotr feten, tyr fetet, fte 

finb gelobt, gerufen rcorbem feten gelobt, gerufen roorben. 

Pluperfect. 

I had been praised, called, I might have been, praised, 

&c. called, &c 

Sing, id) mar, bu roarft, er tt>ai Smg*. tcf/rcdre, bit wdreft, er 

gelobt, gerufen worben ; ware gelobt, gerufen roorben ; 

Plur. rotr roaren, tfyr roaret, fte PZwr. rotr mdren, tf)r nearer, 

maren gelobt, gerufen ^or* fte rodren gelobt, gerufen 

ben. worben. 

First Future. 
I shall be praised, called, &c. I shall be praised, called, &c. 
Sing, id) roerbe, bu nnrft, er Sing, id) merbe, bu werbeft, er 
wnrb gelobt, gerufen voexbin ; merbe gelobt, gerufen toer* 

ben; 
Plur. tmr roerben, tfyr roerbet, PZwr. totr werben, tfyr roerbet, 
fte roerben gelobt, gerufen fte toerben gelobt, gerufen 
merben. werben. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have been praised, 

called, &c. 
Sing, id) roerbe, bu ttnrft, er 



rotrb gelobt, gerufen toorben 
fetn; 



I shall have been praised, 

called, &c. 
Sing, id) roerbe, bu wevbefr, et 

werbe gelobt, gerufen loorben 

fetn; 



Plur. tt>tr werben, tfjr merbet, Plur. tmr werben, tbr roerbet, 
fie toerben gelobt, gerufen fte werben gelobt, gerufen 
n>orben fetn. rcorben fetn. 

Conditionals. 

Second Conditional. 

I should have been praised> 
called, &c. 



First Conditional. 

I should be praised, called, 

&c. 
Sing, id) ttuirbe, bu toitrbejT, 

er nutrbe gelobt, gerufen 

roerben 5 



Sing, id) witrbe, bu roiirbeft, er 
mttrbe gelobt, gerufen wor* 
ben fetn ; 



463 



** J ur. xcix wiirben, tfyr rourbet, Plur. mx wiirben, t'fyr wurbet 
fie roiirben gelobt, gerufen fte roiirben gelobt, gerufen 
roerben. roorben fern* 



Imperative Mood. 



Singular. 



Hoerbe (bu) gelobt, gerufen, be 
(thou) praised, called, 

werbe er (fte, e3) gelobt, geru* 
fen, let him (her, it) be 
praised, called ; 

Infinitives. 

Pres. gelobt, gerufen roerben, to 
be praised, called. 

Perf. gelobt, gerufen worben 
fetn, to have been praised, 
called. 



Plural. 
werben rotr gelobt, gerufen, let 

us be praised, called, 
roerbet (tfyr) gelobt, gerufen, ) 
werben Sue gelobt, gerufen, $ 

be ye (you) praised, called, 
werben fie gelobt, gerufen, let 

them be praised, called. 



Participles. 

Perf, gelobt, gerufen, praised, 

called. 
Fut. gu (obenb, $u rufenb, to be 

praised, called. 



§ 144. II. REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
©tcf) freuen, to rejoice. 



Principal pa?'ts. 



"Pres. Infin. ftdf) freuen. 

Imperf. Indic. id) freute mid). 

Perf. Part, fid) gefreuet or gefreut 
^Perf. Infin. fid) gefreut fyaben. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

I rejoice, am rejoicing, do re- I may rejoice, be rejoicing, 

joice, &c. &c. 

Sing, id) freue mid), hit freueft Sing, id) freue mid), bu freueft 

(freujt) bid), er freuet (freut) btcf), er freue fid) ; 
ft*; 

Plur. tmr freuen un£, t'fyr freu* Plur. xoix freuen un§, tfyr freu* 

et (freut) end), fie freuen ft*. et end), fte freuen ft*. 

Imperfect. 

I rejoiced, &e, I might rejoice, &c. 

Sing, id) freute mi*, bu freu* Sing, id) freuete nu*, bu freu* 

tejt bt*, &c. etejt bt*, &c. 



464 

Plur. tmr freuten unS, t'br Plur. xoix freueten un$, &c. 

freutef eud), &e. 

Perfect. 
I have rejoiced, &c. I may have rejoiced, &c. 

Sircg-. id) babe mid) gefreut, bit Sing, id) babe mid) gefreut, feu 

baft t5td) gefreut, &c. babejr bid) gefreut, &c. 

PZwr. vow fyaben un^ gefreut, PZwr. xoiv baben un3 gefreut; 

<fec. &c. 

Pluperfect. 
I had rejoiced, &c. I might have rejoiced, &c. 

S'zVi^. id} fyatte mid) gefreut, Sing, id) fydtte mid) gefreut 

&c. &C. 

First Future. 

I shall rejoice, &c. I shall rejoice, &c. 

Smg. id) roerfee mid) freuen, Sing, id) roerfee mid) freuen, 

feu rotrft tid) &c. tu roerfceft Did) &c. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have rejoiced, &c. I shall have rejoiced, &c. 
Sing, id) roeifce mid) gefreut Sing, id) werfce mid) gefreut 

l)ab it, iDu nnrft bid) &e. baben, tu merDeft &c. 

Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

i should rejoice, &c. I should have rejoiced, &c. 

Sing, id) nnitDe mid) freuen, feu 6V/^. id) roitrfce mid) gefieui 
tx>urt>ejr &c. bet ben, In nmr&ejl: &c. 

Imperative Mood. 
rejoice thou, &c. 

PZwr. freuen nnr un§, 
&in#. freue tid), freuet (ibr) eu^, 

freue er (fte e3) fid) ; freuen fie fid)* 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. fid) freuen, to rejoice. fid) freuenfe, rejoicing. 

Perf. fid) gefreut fyaben, to fid) gefreut, rejoiced, 
have rejoiced. 

§ 145. III. INTRANSITIVE VERBS. 

& e b e n, to go, takes f e i n for its auxiliary. 

(Pres. Infin. geben, to go. 
Imperf. Indic. id) qinq, I went. 
Pekf. Pakt. gegangert, gone. 
Perf. Infin. gegangen fein, to have gon© 



465 

INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
1 ^o, am going, do go, &c. I may go, be going, &c. 

Sing, id) gefye, bu gefyejt (gefyft), £mg. id? gefye, bit gefyeft, el 

erge&t; gefye; 

PZwr. wtr gefyen, tfyr gefyei PZwr. wtr gefyen, tfyr ge^et, fte 

(gefct), fie getyen (gefyn). ge&em 

Imperfect. 
I went, was going, cud go, &c. I might go, be gvAng, &c. 
Sinsfi id) gtng, bit gtngft, er $iwg\ id) gtnge, bit gtngeft, er 

gtng; gtnge; 

Plur. voir gtngen, tfyr ginget, Plur. xoix gtngen, tfyr gtnget, 

fe gtngen, fie gtngen. 

Perfect. 

I have gone, been going, &c. I may have gone, been going, 

&c. 
Sing. \d) bin, bit btjt, er tft ge* Smg. id) fet, bu fetefl, er fet 

gangen ; gegangen ; 

Plur. nur finb, tfyr fetb, fte ftnb Plur. nnr feten, tfyr fetet, fie 

gegangen. feten gegangen. 

Pluperfect. 
I had gone, been going, &c. I might have gone, been going, 

&c. 
Sing, id) war, bit raarfl:, er war Sing, id) mare, bit wareft er 

gegangen ; ware gegangen ; 

Plur. wtr waren, it)r waret, fte Plur. wtr wdren, tfyr wdret, fie 
waren gegangen. wdren gegangen. 

First Future. 
I shall g% be going, &c. I shall go, be going, &c. 

Sing, id) werbe, bit wtrft er Sing, id) werbe, bu werbeft, er 

voixt get)en ; werbe gefyen ; 

Plur. wtr roerben, tfyr roerbet, PZwr. wtr werben, tfyr werbet, 

fte werben gefyen. fte werben gefyen. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall have gone, been going, I shall have gone, been going, 

&c. &c. 

Sing, id) werbe, bit tmrjt, er Sing, id) werbe, bn werbeft, er 

tmrb gegangen fetn; werbe gegangen fetn; 

Plur. wtr roerben, ti)r werbet, Plur. ratr werben, tfyr werbet, 

fte werben gegangen fetn. fie werben gegangen fetn. 
20 # 



466 

Conditionals. 
First Conditional. Second Conditional. 

I should go, be going, &c. I should have gone, been go- 

ing, &c. 
Sing, id) miivbe, bu routbeft, Sing, id) rtmrbe, bit wiirbeft, 

er wiirbe gefyen ; er nmrbe gegcutgen fetn ; 

P/wr. nnr nmrbert, tl>r miirbet, PZwr. voiv ttmrbert, tfyr wiirbet, 
fie ttnirben gefyeru fie roiivben gegangen fern. 

Imperative Mood. # 

PZwr. gefyen rmr, let us go, be 
going, 
£in#. gefye (bit), go thou, do gefyet or gefyf (tfyr), gefyen ©te, 

go, go ye (you), do go, 

gefye er Cfte, e$), let him (her, gefyen or gefyn fie, let them go. 
it) go ; 

Infinitive Mood. Participles. 

Pres. gefyett, to go. Pres. gefyenb, going. 

Perf. gegangen fein, to have Perf. gegangen, gone, 
gone. 

IV. IMPERSONAL VERBS.* 

§ 146. Impersonal verbs are conjugated like other verbs in 
all the moods and tenses, but only in the third person singular 
(§114). 

They want the passive voice, and generally employ the auxi- 
liaryl)aben(§131). 

&l c g n e n, to rain. 
Pres. Ind. cS regnct, it rains. Subj. e$ tegne, it may rain. 

Imperf Ind. e$ regnete, it rained. Subj. c$ regnete, it might rain. 
Perf. Ind. c$ f)at geregnet, it has Subj. e$ f>abe geregnet, itmayhavr 

rained. rained. 

Pluperf. Ind. e£ fyatte geregnet, it Subj. e$ batte geregnet, it might 

had rained. have rained. 

First Fut. e< tmtb tegncn, it will Subj. e$ rocrbe rcgncn, it will rain. 

rain. 
Future Perf. e$ rotrb gcregnct r)cu Subj. e£ roerbe gcrcgnet fjafcen, it 

ben, it will have rained. will have rained. 

Conditionals. 
First Cond. eS tvittbe tcgnen, it Second Cond. e$ nrtirbe* yrcgnd 

would rain. fyabcn, it would have rained. 

Imperat. cS tegne ! let it rain ! 

Pres. Infin. tegncn, to rain. p ... . , ( fcgncnb, raining, 

Perf Infin. gcregnct t)aben, to ha v>3 rartlcl P Les - \ gcrcgnet, rained. 

rained. 

* For exercises on the impersonal verbs see Lesson LVI. 



467 

§ 147. Some impersonal verbs have a reflexive form ; as, 
e3 fragt ftd), it is a question ; e£ atemt fid), it is becoming, &c. 
Others again are active, and are followed by an object in the 
accusative or dative, which may be either a substantive or a 
personal pronoun ; e. g. e3 bungert mid), bid), 1 t) it, I am, 
thou art, he is hungry ; e§ biirftet, frtert, fdjaubert m t d), I am 
thirsty, cold, shuddering ; e3 gelutgt m t r, I succeed ; e§ grauet 
t fy m, he dreads. The accusative or dative is sometimes placed 
first, and then the e $ is omitted ; as. m i d) fyungert, m i d) bur* 
(let, m i r grauet, <&c. 

V. COMPOUND VERBS. 

§ 148. 1st, Compound verbs are either separable or inse- 
parable. 

2d, In compounds of the first class, the constituent pkrts are 
separated, and the first component is placed after the verb, in 
all the simple forms of the verb which are susceptible of in- 
flection, viz : — in the imperative active, and in the present and 
imperfect, both mdicative and subjunctive ; e. g. an fang en, to 
begin, pres. indie, id) fattge a tt, I begin, imperf. id) ftng an, I 
begun, imperat. fange 3u a n, begin thou. Moreover, in the per- 
fect participle, the augment g e is inserted between the separable 
particle and the verb ; e. g. att^ge^fangen, au^ge^gangen, ab^ge* 
retft, # from anfangen, to commence ; auSgefyen, to go out; ab* 
retfen, to set out on a journey. 

Remark. In subordinate propositions, however, which are in- 
troduced by a conjunction or conjunctive word, such as — a ( s, t> a, in? 
b e m, luenn, ro c i I, t> a p, &c, or by a relative pronoun, this separa- 
tion of the component parts does not take place; e. g. a{$ eben 
bic <Scnnc aufging (from aufgefyen), just as the sun was rising; 
to e n n et nut a n f & m e (from anfommen) ! would that he might ar- 
rive ! 3 n t> c m id) am £aufe t>orbetgtng, as I was passing by the 
house. Die Sfyiire, to c I d) e fid) a u f 1 I) a t, the door which opened, 

§ 149. In compounds of the second class, the constituent 
parts remain inseparably connected throughout the entire con 
jugation of the verb, and the perfect participle does not assume 
the augment g e, if the first component is one of those insepa 
rable particles mentioned above (§ 122) ; but if it is a noun or 
an adjective, the augment is prefixed to the entire compound ; 
e. g. id) oerttere, I lose, id) serlor, I lost, part, *>er(oren, lost. 
But, friifyftitdfen, to breakfast (compounded with the adjective 
frut), early), perf. part, g e frtifyfHhft ; redjtferttgen, to justify (from 
red)t,just), perf. part, g e redjtferttgt, &c. 



468 

§ 150. \erbs compounded with substantives or adjectives 
are generally inseparable, when they so coalesce in sense as 
to form one complex conception ; but when their union is so 
slight, that they may be regarded as distinct words, they are se- 
parable ; e. g. ©tatt ftnben, to take place ; fyod) acfyten, to 
esteem highly ; lc§ fprecfyen, to acquit ; perf. parts, ©tatt <je* 
fiinben, fyod) geacfytet, lo$ gefprocfyen. 

§ 151. When the verb is compounded with a particle (i. 
e. with an adverb, a preposition, or a simple prefix), the accent 
determines to which of the two classes the compound belongs. 
If the particle is accented, the compound is separable ; but if 
the principal accent falls on the verb itself, the compound is in- 
separable. 

A list of inseparable prefixes has already been given above 
(§ 122. 2d). 

§ 152. Verbs compounded with the following adverbs and 
prepositions are separable : — a b, an, a n f, a it 3, b e t, fc a r, 
e i n, fort, b e r, t> t n, and the compounds of ber and btn : — 
fyerctb, btnetn, &c. ; nad), tu e C e r, o b, *> o r, n> e 9, 3 u, 
3 u r ii it* 

EXAMPLES. 

anfemmen, to arrive, part, nnqcfcmmen ; 

cm file ben, to rise, " cmfgcftctnfceit ; 

fcarbrtna.cn, to offer, " bor^chracbt ; 

fcrtfabrcn, to continue, " fertqefahrcn ; • 

mecjrwrftat, to throw away, " ire^gervcrfert ; 
aubringcn, to spend, " gugebrctcbt. 

§ 1 .53. (Compounds with fc u r rf), b t n t e r, ii b e r, it m, u tt* 
t e r, dc(I and wieber are separable, when the accent rests 
*>n the particle ; they are inseparable, wtie*i ii rests on the verb 
itself (? 122. 5th). 

It is frequeritlj the case, that in one apd th«» 8^ tc* compound this 
difference of accentuation has given rise to different sighriiea*tf«wis; 

v:s \ M PI K^ 

'{.li.u.h t r 1 n 9 c u (ins. p .r ible), to penetrate, par*, bttrcfe b rt? no-**t£ 
t u c cb fcrtngvn (separable), to press through a crowds pair 

i) u v cb qcTt ngcn : 
buttbrf i fv n (insep.), lb travel over, /"//•/. burcb 1 e'if v ti 
t u rch retjVfl (se.p*)< *' tr « v< - ! fhrou :h. ;;ar/. r u r cb gcretptf 
tibet r ii b re n (insep. , to convince, pari, ubet f ii br t; 
ft b cr fiibrvn (Sep.), to convey over, ;?ar*. it b e r gefiihn ; 

■ 

* Compare also the table of separable and inseparable verbs on pages 53 
*n<J 53. 



469 

tinter fjoltcn (insep.), to entertain, part, untcr fatten; 
u n t e r batten (sep.j, to hold under, part, u n t e r ge(ja(ten ; 
DCll e n t) e n (insep.), to finish, ^arf. cell e n c e t ; 
Ugtf fieri (sep.), to fill by pouring into, part. t> 1 ( gegeffciu 

Remark. Compounds with the preposition rotoer (which 
should be carefully distinguished from the adverb ro t e t> e r) are 
always inseparable, the accent being invariably assumed by the verb 
itself; as, rotter ( e <j~e n, to confute, part, rotter t e $ t ; rotterjle^cn, to 
withstand, part. totfcerfkmben. The adverbial prefix mi 9 cannot be 
reduced to any definite rule, as the accent does not in all instances 
decide whether it is separable or inseparable. 

§ 154. With respect to the infinitive of compound verbs, 
it is to be remarked, that the particle $u (§ 120) is placed be- 
fore it, if the verb is inseparable; if separable, it is inserted be- 
tween the two components, and constitutes one word with 
them; e.g. gu entroetfyen, to desecrate; ju aerfcttten, to fall 
into pieces ; but, an^iufctncjen, to begin ; roecHi^roerfert, to 
throw away ; juritcf^iutretbeiT, to drive back, &c. 

§ 155. Compounds generally follow the conjugation of 
their simple verbs. The following is a specimen of the simple 
forms of a separable compound : — 

2C b r e t f e n , to set out on a journey. 
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 
Singular, Singular. 

id) reife ab, cu retfeft ab, cc rcifet ttf) reife ab, cu retfeft ab, er retfet 
(retft) oi; ab ; 

Plural. Plural. 

toir retfen ab hr retfet (retf't) ab, totr retfen o6> ir)t rcrfct ab, fie retfen 
ftc retfea ab ab. 

Imperfect. 
Singular. Singular. 

id .mptc ab,tu retf'tefl a(>, er retpte idj reifetc ab, cu reifeteft ab, er rci 
ab ; fete ab ; 

Plural. Plural. 

ttrir reif'ten ab, thr rciptct ab, fte totr retfeten ab, tfjr retfetet ab, fit 
utften ab. retfeten ab. 

Imperative. 

Singular. Plural. 

retfe (cu) ab, reife er ab ; retfen rotr ab, retfet (re? ft) if>r ab, 

retfen fte ab. 



470 

Infinitives. Participles. 

Pres. abretfen or afyumfen. Pres. Part, ctbtetfcnb. 

Perf. abgeretft fcin. Perf. Part, abgcretft. 

SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 

I. AGREEMENT. 

§ 156. The verb agrees with its subject nominative in 
number and person. In German the subject cannot be 
omitted as in the Classical languages, in which the termina- 
tion of the verb is sufficient to indicate the difference of per- 
son and number ; except in the second person of the impera- 
tive singular, when fcu, like the English thou, is expressed only 
for the sake of emphasis ; e. g. t cf) lefe, I read ; b u rebeffr, 
thou speakest ; ber (Sturm fyat au^etobt, the storm has ceased 
to rage ; bte Srtctben fptelert, the boys are playing. But, inu 
per at. re be! lefe! read, speak (thou) ! ©ptele, $tnb, cuif 
ber SEftutter <2d)Oo£ ! Play, my child, on thy mother's lap ! 
(Schiller.) 

Exception 1. When several verbs constitute a compound predi- 
cate to one subject, it is only expressed with the first. 3)u arbcttcft 
met, r t cf) t c ft after wentCj au$, thou labourest much, but aceomplish- 
est little ; unb er tort's mit ftummem #arme, r c t p t fid) btutenD te$, 
pr egt fie befttg in tie 2Crme, fd> to i n 9 1 fidb ouf fein <Ko|j (Scatter), 
and with mute grief he hears it, tears himself bleeding away, ea- 
gerly folds her to his breast, springs upon his steed. 

Excep. 2. The neuter personal pronoun e 6 and the demonstra- 
tives ties and t>a$ are followed by a verb in the plural, when 
the substantive after the verb which they represent is plural ; btc$ 
ft n b metne •Srtiber, these are my brothers ; eg ft n b efytltctye banner, 
they are honest men. 

Excep, 3. In reciting the multiplication table, the Germans use 
the singular where the plural would seem proper ; tner mat funf iff 
jtvan^tg, four times five are twenty, &c. 

Excep. 4. When the subject of a verb is a pronoun of the first 
or second person, it is sometimes omitted by poetical license; as, 
£ a e nun, ad) ! $)f)t(ofopf)tc, Surtfteret unb SRebmn burcbauS ftubtrr, 
I have now, alas ! completely mastered philosophy, the jurist's craft, 
anl medicine (Goethe's Faust). 

§ 157. When the verb refers to several subjects equally 
related to it, it must be put in the plural ; as, ytad)t unb 'Xag 
ftrttten mtt etnember urn ben 93orgucj r night and day were 
contending with each other for the preference. When, how- 
ever, the subjects are connected by disjunctive conjunctions, 
or when they are regarded as one complex notion, the verb is 



471 

in the singular; e. g. meter ber QSctter nod) fetn ©cfyn tft ba 
cjeroefen, neither the father nor his son has been here ; 5Ber< 
ratty unb 2(rgmcfyn ( a u f d) t tn alien (£cfen, treason and suspi- 
cion (combined) lurch at every corner ; fyier t ft ^Jfeffer unb 
2>a(s, here is pepper and salt. 

§ 158. After several subjects of different persons, the verb 
in the plural agrees with the first person in preference to the 
second^ and with the second in preference to the third ; e. g. id) 
unb ©u (ttur) ftnb 3Sruber, I and thou are brothers ; ©it unb 
ber SBater Qfyr) fetb etnanber dfynltcr;, you and your father 
resemble each other. Sometimes, however, the verb agrees 
with the nearer nominative; id) bavf reben, tlid)t ©it, / am per- 
mitted to speak, not thou. 

II. TENSES. 

§ 159. It will be perceived from the paradigms, that the 
German verb has no separate forms to express the distinctions 
observed in English between I praise, and I am praising, do 
praise, I praised, and I was praising, did praise, &c, all of 
which are implied in the one form id) lobe, id) lobte (see page 
279). 

§ 160. In German, as in English, the present is often em- 
ployed instead of the imperfect, to give greater animation to 
historical narration (see page 342). 

§ 161. The present is used in place of the future, espe 
cially if the event is regarded as certain ; as, moreen f 6 m m t 
er nneber, to-morrow he will come again ; fitnfttge SBecfye ret" 
fe id) narf) gertbon, next week I am going to London ; oerlag 
£)xd) brauf, id) laffe fed)tenb fyter baS Seben, ober fiifere fie 
attS ^tlfen, depend upon it, I shall either fighting lose my life 
here, or lead them out of Pilsen (Schiller). (See page 342). 

§ 162. So also, on the other hand, the first future is used 
instead of the present, and the future perfect instead of the 
perfect, to give an air of probability to the expression ; e. g. 
er tt> tr b roofyl nidjt 311 £aufe fetn, he is not likely to be at 
home, er rotrb auSgegan^en fetn, he has in all probability 
gone out (literally, he will have gone out) ; ©it n>trft ©id) ge* 
t'rrtfyaben, you must have made (have probably made) a mis- 
take. 

§ 163. The imperfect, the perfect, and the pluperfect cor 
respond on the whole to the tenses of the same name in Eng. 



472 

lish, with this exception, that when simply a division of tvme % 
and not another event is referred to, the Germans sometimes 
employ the perfect, when the English idiom requires the im 
perfect; e. g. gejrern ftnb 3bre 23iid)er angefcmmen, yes- 
terday your books arrived ; er t ft le§te JBecfye g e fto r b en, he 
died last week. On the meaning and use of these tenses, and 
on the omission of the auxiliary, see pages 343, 344, and Les 
son LVII. 

§ 164. As to the moods of the German verb, the Indica 
tive, the Subjunctive, as well as the Conditionals and the Im- 
perative, have been treated at large and illustrated with numer- 
ous examples in the former part of the book, so that a further 
analysis of them in this place would be superfluous. On the 
Subjunctive and Conditionals see Lessons XC. and XCL, and 
on the Imperative, page 305. 

III. THE INFINITIVE. 

§ 165. Besides serving to form the compound tenses of 
the verb (§ 134), the infinitive mood is used in various other 
relations, either with or without the preposition 311. 

§ 166. All infinitives may be regarded as abstract verbal 
substantives of the neuter gender, and are frequently employed 
as such in every case, generally in connection with the arti- 
cle ; e. g. ba£ @t§en tjT t'bm fcbabltd), sitting is injurious to 
him ; id) bin b e3 ScfyretbenS miibe, I am tired of writing ; 
5 it m 9t e t f e n btft Du mcb/t gefdjtcft, you are not fit for travel- 
ling. 

§ 167. The infinitive is employed without ju in the follow- 
ing instances : — 

1st, When it stands as the subject of a proposition ; as, 
geben ijr feltcjer ctlS nefymen, it*is more blessed to give 
than to receive ; frerben tft md)t$, aber leben unD mcf)t feben, 
ba$ tft etn Uiigtiicf (2d)t(ler), to die is nothing, but to live and 
not to see, that is a wretched lot indeed. 

2d, In connection with the auxiliary verbs of mood — btir* 
fen, fon n en, la f fen, m 6 a, e n, muffen, fcllen, mcU 
(en (§ 115. 2d), and in particular expressions, also with t> a b en 
and t b u n ; e. g. er I a g t ei'n £>au$ b a it e n, he orders a 
house to be built; id) barf fptelen, I am permitted to play; 
Sit f 1 1 ft md)t ft e b I e n, thou shalt not steal ; tag \k cjebert; 
let them go ; Su baft cutt reben, it is easy for you to speak 
fte tbut md)t$ aid xo etn en, she does nothing but weep. 



473 

Remark. When the auxiliary (affen, in the sense of to order 
is followed by an infinitive, the latter, though active in German, 
must generally be rendered by the passive in English ; as, cr t a p t 
ctu &ntd) c t n b i n t> c n, he orders a book to be bound, &c. 

3d, In connection with the verbs b e t § e tt, to order ; b e t g e n 
and nennen,to call ; t) e t f e n, to help ; 1 e 1} r e n, to tea ch ; 
I e r n e n, to learn, and m a d) e n, to make ; e. g. betg fl?n ge* 
ben ! tell him to go ! 

4th, When joined to certain verbs denoting an exercise of 
the senses ; as, f e b e n, to see ; b o r e n, to hear ; f ii I) I e n, 
to feel ; ft n ben, to find; as, id) febe tbn fommen, lefen, getd)* 
nen, I see him coming, reading, drawing, &c. ; id) bore tbn 
fingeii, fpielen, I hear him singing, playing; id) fanb tbn fcfylafen, 
fit$en, I found him sleeping, sitting. In this connection the in- 
finitive has the signification of the present participle. 

5th, The infinitive is employed without gu in connection with 
the following verbs: — b I e i b e n, to remain; get) en, to go; 
f a b r e u, to ride in a carriage ; r e 1 1 e n, to ride on horseback ; 
e. g. btetben Sue figen, keep your seat; er gebt betteln, he goes 
a begging ; fie fabren fpajteren, they take an airing, a ride in 
a carriage ; er rettet fpctgteren, he takes a ride on horseback. 

§ 168. By an idiom, peculiar to the German, the auxiliary 
verbs of mood — biirfen, fonnen, mogen, miifien, fetten, m.Uen, 
taflfen, and also the verbs betgen, l)elfen, boren, feben, lenten, 
lebren, assume the form of the infinitive, instead of the perfect 
participle, when they stand in connection with another infini- 
tive ; e. g. er bat fid) nid)t riibren biirfen (instead of geburff), 
he has not been permitted to stir; £)u bdtteft fommen f o 1 1 en 
(instead of gefettt), you ought to have come; 3b** babt bte $etnbe 
Snglanb'3 fennen lernen, ye have learnt to know the enemies 
of England. It is now customary, however, regularly to employ 
the participle of the verbs ternen and tebren instead of the in- 
finitive ; as, er bat tbn fennen g e I e r n t, he has become ac- 
quainted with him; id) ^abe tbn setcfynen gelebrt, I have 
taught him drawing. 

THE INFINITIVE WITH JU* 

§ 169. The infinitive with in is sometimes employed in- 
stead of the simple infinitive, as the subject of a proposition, 
especially when in an inverted proposition it comes after its 
predicate; e. g. e£ ge^temt bem Sftcmne, tbattg ju fetn, it 
behoves man to be diligent, &c. 



474 

§ 170. When the infinitive with $u is not the subject of a 
proposition, at is equivalent to a verbal substantive in an 
oblique case, corresponding either to the Latin supine (ama- 
turn, amatu), or to the gerund (amandi — do — dura — do). It is 
thus used : — 

1st, After substantives, especially such as signify an inclina- 
tion or affection of the mind, opportunity, time, <fyc. ; as, Jftet* 
gang, inclination ; (£ntfd)lu.g, resolution ; (Jtfer, zeal ; SSRurf), 
courage ; guft, desire ; 3?tt, time ; ©etegenbett, opportunity ; 
er bat Cuft ju ret fen, in effen, &c, he has a mind to 
travel, to eat, or he is desirous of travelling, of eating, &c. : e£ 
tfl &it s u a r b e t t e n, s u f d) I a f e n, it is time to work, to 
sleep. 

2d, After adjectives — signifying possibility, duty, necessity, 
easinejs, difficulty, and the like ; as, mbgltd), tmmogltd), tter* 
pflid)tet, genbtbtgt, (etcfyt, fcfyrcer, &art, &c. £te 33iirt)e tft fd)roer 
gu tragen, the burden is hard to be. borne ; e$ tft mtr unmbgltd) 
in fommert, it is impossible for me to come, &c. 

3d, After verbs, generally as the object to which an activity, 
a desire, or emotion of the mind implied by them, is directed ,* 
e. g. fid) freuen, to rejoice ; fid) bemiifyen, to strive ; fyoffen, to 
hope ; gebenfen, to intend ; nbtbtgert, snnrtgen, to necessitate, 
compel; »etgeflTen, to forget ; serbteten, to forbid, &c. ; e£ freut 
mid), ©te in feben, I am glad to see you ; er bemttbte fid}, tbn 
emsuMen, he strove to overtake him ; id) ratlje Sir, in fdjroet* 
gen, I advise you to be silent. 

§ 171. 4th, After many verbs which serve to designate the 
time or mode of an action ; as, artfangen, to begin ; aufborett, 
to cease ; fortfafyren, to continue ; etlert, to hasten ; pflegen, to 
be wont ; sermbgen, to be able ; brcmcfyen, to need ; fcfyetneMo 
appear; miff en, to know; e. g. er fcmgt an in fingen, in target!, 
he begins to sing, to dance ; er sermag mcfyt in fprecfyett, he is 
not able to speak ; £)u fcbetnft eS ntd)t in wtflfen, you appear not 
to know it, &c. 

5th, The infinitive with in is sometimes employed as the 
predicate of a proposition in connection with the copula f e t tt, 
to express the possibility or necessity of an action. The infin- 
itive, in this connection, though active, has generally a passive 
signification ; as, e$ tft feme 3ett in serlterett, there is no time 
to be lost ; fetn ©terrtbtlb tft in fefyen, no star is to be seen; er 
tft mrgenbS angutreffen, he is nowhere to be found. It occurs 
also in the same signification with babett ; er bat bter md)t3 in 
fcujen, he has nothing to say here ; waS fyaft T)n in tl)iin? what 



475 

have you to do ? It is liis construction of the infinitive, which 
has given rise to the future participle (§ 121. 3d). 

6th, The infinitive with $u serves sometimes to denote 
the purpose or design of an action or state expressed by a 
previous verb, in which case the particle urn usually is pre- 
fixed to add emphasis to the expression ; e. g. id) f omme, u m 
Sir SSucfyer gu brtngen, I come for the purpose of bringing you 
books; er gefyt trt bte ©tabt, unT nut etnem $reunbe aufanv 
men su f ommen, he goes into town in order to meet a friend. 

IV, PARTICIPLES. 

§ 172. Participles are declined like adjectives, and follow 
the same rules of inflection, ©er Itebente SSctter, the 
affectionate father ; em geh'ebteS $tnb, a beloved child. So 
also substantively :-— ber ©enefene, one who has recovered from 
sickness ; bte ©terbenbe, the dying woman ; bctS SBertangte, 
that which was wished for, &c. 

§ 173. The present and perfect participles are frequently 
used as adverbs of manner ; e. g. ©te fprecfyen fl t e g e n b, 
you speak fluently ; errbtfyenb fotgt er tbren ©puren, 
blushing he follows her steps. This is especially the case 
with perfect participles, in connection with the verb f d m m en, 
to come ; betilenb f ommt ber ©tttrm $ e fl o g e n, ber bte $lam* 
me braufenb fudjt (©emitter), howling the blast comes flying, 
and roaring seeks the flame ; er fommt gelaufen, cjertttert, he 
comes running, riding, &c. 

§ 174. Participles, like adjectives, serve either to form 
the predicate of a proposition, or they are joined to a noun in 
an attributive sense (§ 52) ; e. g. ber 9)camt tft 3 e I e b r t, 
the man is learned, and ber 9 e I e b ? 1 e 5Rcmn, the learned 
man ; bte 9lacfyt tjl s> e r fl o f f e n, the night is past, and bte 
tterfloffene 9?ad)t, the past night; ba$ JQaflfer tjl fte* 
b e n b, the water is boiling, and bct$ ft e b e n b e 2Baflf et V the boil- 
ing water ; bte \!anbfd)aft tjt e n t s ii cf e n b, the landscape is 
charming, and bte e n t $ ii cf e n b e Sanbfcfyaft, the charming 
landscape. 

The present participle, however, is not generally used in the 
predicative sense, unless it has entirely assumed the signification 
of an adjective; thus we cannot say : — id) binrufcnb,Ucbcnb, febcrtb. 
1 am calling, loving, seeing; but : — id) rufc, lube, fcfyc. (§ 159 ) 

§ 175. In connection with another verb, the present par. 
ticiple, either alone or qualified by other words, frequently 



476 

stands as the abridged form of a subordinate proposition, sen 
ing to express the time* manner, cause, or condition of the ac 
tion denoted by the verb ; as, bteS bet mtr b e n f e n b, fcfyltef id) 
ein {time)) revolving these things with myself, I fell asleep, in- 
stead of, intern id) bteS bet mtr felbft bacfyte, &c, whilst I was 
revolving, &c. ; tym bte £)&nt>e b r ii cf e n t>, nabm er 2lbfd)teb 
{manner), shaking his hands he took leave ; fetn Slbbtlb bill* 
bet fte, atfetn ba3 forperiofe 2Bort serefyren b ; i. e. mei( fie 
attetn ba$ fbtperlofe ^Bort t>ereb;rt (cause) (Scatter), she tole- 
rates no image, adoring the incorporeal word alone. 

This construction, however, is not as extensive in German 
as in English, and entirely inadmissible, when the subject of 
the participle is different from that of the verb, or when in 
English we employ the compound participle. Thus we cannot 
say, ihe sun being risen, I set out on my journey, but when the 
sun had arisen, &c, a ( # bte 2>onne anfqeqangen roar, retf te id) 
ab ; after having breakfasted, he read his paper, nacfybem er 
gefriibfliicft batte (after he had breakfasted), la3 er fetne 3 e ^ 
fcfyrtft (see page 279). 

§ 176. In certain expressions only, both the present and 
the perfect participle are used absolutely in the accusative 
case ; e, g. baS QSuci) feftet, ben Stnbanb abgereebnet, 
greet Tbaler, the book costs two crowns, exclusive of the bind- 
ing ; \\e feufget binauS tn bte fmftere 9iad)t, b a $> 2( n q e cent 
28 e t n e n 9 e t r it bet (S>d)t(ler), she sighs out into the murky 
night, her eyes bedimmed by the gushing tears ; er trat tn ba% 
3tmmer, ben £)ut cutf bem ftopfe, ben ©tocf tn ber £>cmb, he en- 
tered the room, with the hat on his head, and cane in his hand. 
In this last example the participle fyctbenb, having, may be sup- 
plied, t ) link the expression to the subject of the proposition. 

$ 177. The perfect participle, when formed from transitive 
verbs, has always a passive signification, and is therefore used ad- 
jectively only by way of exception. When formed from reflexive 
or impersonal verbs, it is employed neither in an attributive nor in 
a predicative sense, but serves simply to form the compound ten- 
ses; as, id) bcibe mid) qefreut, qcarqert, qefebamt, I have 
rejoiced, been vexed, ashamed ; e£ fat g e r c q n c t, q c f cb n c 1 1, it 
has rained, snowed ; but not, ber qcfreutv, qcfcbamte 5ftann; nor, tcv 
SHann tft qefreut, qefcbatnt, &c. Of intransitive verbs those only, 
which take the auxiliary fe t n, may be used in the attributive re- 
lation, as well as in the predicative; e. g. bas £a~Ug ift obqe* 
b r n n t, the house is burnt down, and bat a b q e b r a n n t e £ati£, 
the house which lias burnt down ; ber <?reunb i ft a n q e Fo m m c n, 
Ihe friend has arrived, and t) e v onqe!omnune g r ^ un ^/ tn e friend 



477 

who has arrived. Some participles have assumed the signification 
of adjectives, and may even be compared. (See § 63. 1st.) 

Note. The government of verbs is treated of at the close of the 
table of irregular verbs below. 



ADVERBS. 

§ 178, An Adverb is a word which limits the 
meaning of verbs, of adjectives, and of other adverbs. 
Adverbs correspond to the questions where ? when ? 
how ? to what degree ? &c. 

_ 

EXAMPLES. 

£B o ift bag 5) fcrb ? Where is the horse « 

(St tft nip g enjM gu ftnfcen. He is nowhere to be fa and. 

Aemmen ©te herein! Walk in I 

SB a n n tjt cr augcEcmnien ? WAerc did he arrive ] 

£r tjt geftc rn gefierbcn. He died yesterday. 

3)cr Jftnobc febrcibt fd)Q n, after cr The boy writes beautifully, but 

Heft f d) I c d) t. reads poorly* 

£)ct &$atcr i|l fcf)t fcctrft&t. The father is very sad. 
Die $oje tjt au^ndjment The rose is exceedingly beauti- 

fcf)6tu ful. 

§ 179. With respect to their signification, adverbs 
may be divided into six classes : — 

1st, Adverbs of Place. These may either designate rest in a 
place, in answer to the question where ? as, iiberatl, aQentf)a(* 
ben, every where ; trgenbwe, any where ; mrgenb$, nowhere ; 
fyter, ba, bort, here, there ; roo, where ; augert, without ; fatten, 
within ; obert, above ; unten, below ; fyfaten, behind ; com, be- 
fore ; red)t£, on the right hand ; (faf3, on the left hand ; and 
the compounds : broken (bar^oben), there above ; brtmten (bar* 
urtten), below ; braugen, out of doors ; fytemebert, here below ; 
bteflfettS, on this side ; jenfett$, on that side ; — or, motion or 
direction towards a place, in answer to the question whither ? 
baber, along ; t)tert)er, hither ; bat)fa, thither ; berab, down 
{towards the speaker) ; fytnab, down (away from the speaker) ; 
bergcuif, up hill ; bergab, down hill ; »Drrodrr§, forward ; tftefc 
tttdrtS, backwards ; b;tmmelrodrt$, toward heaven, &c. 

2d, Adverbs of Time. These denote either a point or pe* 



478 

riod of time, in answer to the questions when ? how long 
since ? by what time ? as, barm, then ; warm, when ; bamal$, 
at that time ; nun, jefct, now ; etnjT, once ; nod), still ; fd)on r 
berettS, already; ttormafe, fonft, heretofore, formerly; bafo, 
soon ; fiinfitg, hereafter ; neultd), jttngjl:, recently ; anfang£, at 
first ; beS SEftorgenS, be3 StbenbS, in the morning, in the eve. 
ning; geftern, yesterday; fyeute, to-day; morgen, to-morrow; 
je, j em a IS, ever ; rue, never, &c. ; — or a duration of time ; as, 
attest, at all times ; t'mmer, jretS, always ; lange, long. 

3d, Adverbs of Modality, which are either affirmative, nega* 
tive, potential, optative, interrogative, or imperative ; as, jet, yes ; 
bod), however; fret ltd), 3 mar, though, however; fiirroafyr, roafyr* 
ltd), mtrfltd), verily, truly, actually, in very deed ; ficfyerttcf), 
surely ; — netrt, no ; md)t, not ; fetneSroegS, by no means ; — 
metletcfyt, perhaps; roafyrfcfyetnltd), probably; ttvoa, mofyt/ per- 
haps, indeed; — roemt bod), bag bod), would that ;—ob, if; etr 
ma, mofyt, perhaps, perchance; nun, now; benrt, then ;— fcurd). 
a\\$>, allerbtngS, fd)led)tert>tng$, by all means, absolutely, &c. 

4th, Adverbs of Quantity, derived from numerals, and an- 
swering to the questions how much ? how many ? e. g. etroa$, 
somewhat ; gart^, entirely ; gemtg, sufficiently ; met, much ; 
roem'g, little ; tfyettS, partly ; metftertS, metftentfjettS, mostly, for 
the most part; erflenS, firstly ; amettertS, secondly, &c. ; ferner, 
further, moreover ; tegtenS, lastly ; jmetmat, twice, &c. • etn* 
fad), simple ; m'etfad), .many fold, &c. (§ 80.) 

5th, Adverbs of Quality or Manner, which answer co the 
question how? as, gtiicHtd), fortunately; fcfyort, beautifully; 
fd)ted)t, badly; fletgtg, diligently, &c. ; fo, so, thus; rote, as, 
how; eben fo, just so, &c. Many of this class are originally 
adjectives or participles. 

6th, Adverbs of Intensity ; as, *fef)r, very ; gar, quite ; fo* 
gar, even ; dttgerft, r)6d)ft ungemetn, extremely, highly, uncom- 
monly; gan^ltd), sotttg, entirely, fully; betnafye, fafl, almost, 
nearly; nur only; faum, scarcely; t)bd)jten3, at the most; 
memgftenS, at least ; wetr, bet roettem, by far, &c. 

§180. OBSERVATIONS ON THE ADVERBS. 

Obs. 1. Beginners should carefully mark the distinction be- 
tween the adverbs f) i n and I) e r, for which there are no correspond- 
ing terms in English ; f) i n denotes motion away from, and f) e t 
approximation towards the person speaking. These words have 
given rise to a number of compounds, all of which participate in 
thi* original signification. Examples : — 



479 



Away from, 


towards 


the 


speaker. 


t)tnat>, 


fyvab, 




down ; 


rjtnauf, 


fyerauf, 




up; 


btnaus, 


fyerauS, 




out; 


fjtnetn, 


herein, 




m; 


fytnuOet, 


rjeriiOcr, 




across. 



»So also — b Q fy x n, thither, to that place ; b a r) e r, thence, from tha* 
p race • b o r t f) t n, to yonder place ; b o r 1 1) e t , from yonder place ; 
to o f) i n, whither ; to o 1) e t, whence, &c. 

0/>5. 2. To adverbs of intensity may be added the compound 
proportionals \ e — j e, or { c — b e ft o, or }e — u m f o, the — the ; as, 
j c grower, b e ft o fceffct, the greater, the better ; j e (anger er febt, u m f 
fd)(cd)tcr itnrb er, the longer- he lives, the worse he becomes. 

Obs. 3. The adverb of place, b a, is derived from the demonstra- 
tive pronoun b e r, and is an abbreviated expression for an btefem £)rte, 
in this place. So the adverb too, the correlative of t)ci, is derived 
from the relative pronoun to e r, and stands instead of an nxkbcm 
£)rtc, in which place. Both fca and toe, therefore, are termed pro- 
nominal adverbs. As adverbs of place they are combined with f) i n 
and t) c r, and form the compounds barjtn, bafjer, roofyin, roofyer. 

Obs. 4. Besides serving as adverbs of place, t>a (bar), and too 
(rocr), are often compounded with prepositions, to supply the place 
of the dative and accusative neuter of the demonstrative b c r, and 
of the relative or interrogative to e t, to e I d) e r ♦ Thus the Ger- 
mans regularly say : — 



bafret, therewith, 

toobci, wherewith, 

banut, thereby, 

roomtt, whereby, 

baburcb, through, by it, 

rocburd), through, by which, 

bafitr, for that, 

roefttr, for which, 

baran, thereon, 

roeran, whereon, 

bar-on, thereof, 

n?or<en, whereof, 

ba$u, thereto, 

roeju, whereto, 



instead of fcet bem ; 

— bet nxkrjcm ; 

— nut bem ; 
nut nxlcrjem ; 
burd) oat ; 
burdf) rocldjcS ; 
fur oat ; 
fur n>etdr)c$ ; 
an bem ; 
an roelcrjcm ; 
tton bem ; 
son rwldjcm ; 
$u bem ; 
3U roetcfyem. 



Ohs. 5. Some adverbs are compared like adjectives. 
Their mode of comparison has already been explained (§ 68). 

Obs. 6. On the position which the negative nid)t and 
adverbs generally are to occupy in sentences, see Lesson C. 



480 
PREPOSITIONS, 



§ 181. A preposition is a word which is joined to 
nouns or pronouns, to point out their relation to some 
other word in the sentence. 

§ 182. The following is a list of the German pre- 
positions : — 



on, on, by, near ; 

*]i„stead; 

ouf, on, upon ; 

ou$, out, out of; 

cm&er, ) without, on the 

ou£erf)atb, ) outside ; 

bet, near, with, by ; 

binnen, within ; 

bieffeit, on this side ; 

turd)/ through ; 

entgeqen, over against ; 

fitt, for, in favour of ; 

9 c 9* n ' c towards, against ; 



acf)ft, I 
xnad)% S 



next to ; 



f)o(bcn, >. 
hotber, J 



on account of; 



fytnter, behind ; 

in, in, into ; 

. r. ,, ) on the inside, 
tnncrfidb, J wUhin . 

tenfett, beyond ; 

f reft, by virtue of; 

longs, along; 

lout, according to; 

nut, with ; 

nuttc(jr, ) , ■ ,. 

JwmirtW, T y meaM of ; 

nod), after ; 



nacojl, 

neben, beside ; 
nebft, together with ; 
cberfyolb, above ; 

fommt, together with ; 
fcit, since, from ; 
trc§, in spite of; 

j*k ' > above, over ; 

um, about, round ; 

urn — rmlkn, for the sake of; 

uno/od)tct, notwithstanding; 

, , « "> below, on the lowei 
«nt«6ott, j side ' of; 

Dcrniogo, by virtue of; 

tten, from, by, of; 

t>cr, before ; 

rcabrent, during; 

nxgen, on account of; 

nnfcer, against ; 

%w, to ; 

$u felqe, in consequence of ; 

giittHfcer, against; 

anufefyen, between, betwixt. 



§ 183. Prepositions require the substantives, with which 
they are connected, to be put either in the Genitive, the Dative, 
or the Accusative. Some few require the dative in one signi- 
fication, and the accusative in another. 

I. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 

§ 184. The prepositions which govern the genitive case, 
are: — anjtatt or ftatt, balben or fyalber, augerfyalb/ tmterbalb, 



481 

oterljalb, imterljalb, btefifeit, jenfett, fvaft, Uut, mtttefjT: or *er« 
mittelfr, ungeacfytet, unrcett or unfent, sermoge, roabreub, roegett, 
urn — widen, and IcingS, aufotge, tvoi} (see § 188). 

EXAMPLES. 

2( n ft n 1 1 fetneg 23ater$, instead of his father ; bet S*brc b a 1 b e tt, 
for the sake of honour ; autu'tfyalb ber <2tatt, without the city ; 
jenfett t>e5 ©rabe*, beyond the grave; Craft mctneS 2(mte$, by 
virtue of my office ; (au t be$ JBrtefeS, according to the letter; u n^ 
\v c 1 1 bc£ jUrcbbof*, not far from the church-yard ; m a \) r e n b t>e$ 
&riegee, during the war ; u m be* grtebcnS widen, for the sake of 
jeace ; t r o g fetnee £)2ad)t, in spite of his power. 

II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE DATIVE ONLY. 

§ 185. Prepositions which govern the dative case alone, 
are : — an3, auger, bet, Mmten, entgegen, gegeniiber, gemag, nut, 
nad), nacfyft, junadjjl, nebft, fammt, fett, son, in, siumber, and oh 
when it is equivalent to vo e g e it, on account of. 

EXAMPLES. 

(5r Fommt au$ ber Jttrdje, he comes from church; auficr £)tt 
roaren 2(lle t)a, all were present except you ; er wcr)nt b e t m £3ctctet, 
he lives with the baker; b inn en (always refers to time) #oti 
SBocbcn, within two weeks; er gebt tfym entgegen, he goes to 
meet him ; m it mctner gutter, with my mother ; n a d) bent £aufe, 
to the heuse ; n e b ft fctnem greunbe, together with his friend ; f e it 
tern Sage, since that day ; i u tec £Xuelie, to the spring. 

III. PREPOSITIONS WHICH GOVERN THE ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 

§ 186. The following prepositions require the accusative 
only : — buret), fur, gegen, ofytte or fouber, urn, and anker. 

EXAMPLES. 

<5t rctpt b u t d) $ gan$e £anb, he travels through the entire 
country ; b u t d) ir)n bin id) gludltcb, by him I am made happy ; et 
bclobnt mid) f it r metne Sfttibe, he rewards me for my trouble ; bet 
SSater fcrgt fitr feme jttnber, the father provides for his children; 
Sftann f tir gr^ann, man by man; id) balte t>a£ f tit ©cbmctcbdet, 1 re- 
gard this as flattery ; gegen t>en (Strom, against the stream ; g e- 
gen einanber, towards each other; ot)ne 3roetfc(, without doubt; 
o n b e t ®lctd)cn, without an equal ; u m ctn Ut)t, at one o'clock ; 
urn ben £omg, about the king; id) faufte e$ urn gtvoif jlreujcr, I 
bought it for twelve kreuzers ; rot ber feinen greunb, against hi§ 
friend. 

21 



482 



IV, PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING BOTH THE DATIVE AND 
ACCUSATIVE. 

§ 187. The following prepositions are sometimes connect 
ed with the dative, and sometimes with the accusative :— 
an, ctuf, fymter, trt, when, iiber, unter, »or, and jtmfdjen. 

With respect to all the prepositions of this class it is to be ob- 
served, that when they imply rest or motion in a place, they are 
followed by the dative, in answer to the question where ? but when 
they imply a tendency or motion from one place to another, they 
are followed by the accusative, in answer to the question whither ? 

EXAMPLES. 

(St rcofynt an b e m 9J?eete, he lives near the sea ; er gefjt a n b a 6 
ilfer, he goes towards the shore ; er fcfytetbt a n fetnen -gteunb, he 
writes to his friend ; a n bet ©ra'n$c, at the frontiers ; er arbettet 
a u f bem SelDe, he labours in the field ; a u f ber (Scbule, at school ; 
ct $tef)t a u f bag Cant), he moves into the country ; a u f ben 2tbenb, 
for the evening ; f)t titer bem £>aufe, behind the house; cr fe£t jtcf) 
I) t n t e r ben Dfen, he takes his seat behind the stove ; cr tft in ber 
Stabt, he is in the city; ten gefie in fete (Stabt, 1 am going into the 
city; t m Some, in anger; in tie #anb nefymen, to take into the 
hand; er ftcl}t neb en mtr, he is standing by my side; td) fegte 
mid) n e b en tfyn, I seated myself by his side ; u b e r ben (Bternen, 
above the stars ; u b e t ben g(u& gefyen, to go across the river ; u n* 
ter freiem jptmmeO under the open sky; unter fetnen JBuibern, 
among his brothers; »or tftm, before him; er ftellt fid) Dor tm 
(Spiegel, he takes his position before the looking-glass ; 3 n> i f cr> e » 
nur unb tfym, between me and him, &c. 

§ 188. Of those prepositions which govern the genitive 
(§ 184), the following three may also be connected with the 
dative : — I d n g 3 ; as, lan§& be3 UferS, or (dnc^ bem lifer, along 
the shore ; — 3 u \ o 1 9 e, which with the genitive precedes, and 
with the dative follows the noun; as, gufolge be£ 23ertcr)te$, or 
bem 95erid)te Sttfolge, according to the report ; — and t r g ; as, 
trog fetnem fyerben ©cfytdffale, in spite of his hard fate ; tro§ ber 
©efafyr, in spite of the danger. 

§ 189. When prepositions precede the definite article, thej 
often coalesce with it into one word, as, t m, for in bem, &c. t 
list of these contractions has been given above (§ 10} 



483 

CONJUNCTIONS 

§ 1-90 A conjunction is a word by which two sLuple 
sentences are united into one compound sentence* 

§ 191. Conjunctions have been variously classified accord* 
ing to their different significations. They are : — 

1st, Copulative; unb, and ; aiid), also ; foroofyl ct(§, as well 
as ; gubem, moreover ; cuigerbem, besides ; roeber — nod), nei- 
ther — nor ; nid)t nur or md)t alletn — fonbern and), not only — 
but also ; fewer, furthermore ; nigletd), at the same tune. 

2d, Disjunctive; entroeber — ober, either — or; e. g. ent* 
tt> e b e r grog ober fletn, either large or small. 

3d, Adversative ; aber, adetn, but ; fonbern (used only 
after a negative), but ; bod), jebod), yet ; bennod), nevertheless ; 
fonji, else ; melmefyr, rather ; fytngegen, on the contrary ; nidjt 
fott)d)l — al3 tnelmefyr, not so much — as rather. 

4th, Conditional; wernt, fo, tt)0, roofew, if; fattS or tm 
$att, in case ; roo md)t, if not ; e. g. tt) e rt n id) nur etn 5)Jtttet 
txmgte, ben ©djaben nueber §ut $u madden! if I only knew some 
means of repairing the damage ! In German the conjunction 
toenn is often omitted, and then the verb (if the tense is simple) 
or the auxiliary (if the tense is compound) takes the place of 
the conjunction ; m & r e ft Su fyier gewefen, mem 93wber ware 
nid)t cjeftorben, for toenn 5Du fyter $euoe\en roarejt, &c, if 
thou hadst been present, my brother would not have died. 

5th, Concessive ; $mar, to be sure, indeed, true ; tmeroofyf, 
obroobl, obfcfyon, obgletd), woenn gletcfy, though, although ; e. g. 
d b ro o t) I ba3 ^Better fd)6n tft, fo famt er bod) m'd)t au3get;<m, 
though the weather is fine, he is nevertheless unable to go out. 
Compare also page 296. 

6th, Causal ; benn, for ; bet, reet(, mm, since ; e. g. id) gefye 
mit Dtr, tt) e 1 1 ©a ben red)ten ?Beg md)t f ennfi:, I go with you, 
because you do not know the right way ; sorroartS mugt ©u, 
benn rihfro&rtS fannjt ©u md)t mefyr, you must go onward, 
for back you can no longer go. 

7th, Illative ; alfo, bautm, therefore ; bafyer, hence ; beg* 
Ijalb, begroegen, urn begrottten, on that account; folgltd), conse- 
quently ; e. g. er tft fremf, f o I g 1 1 d) mng er git ^oufe bletben, 
he is sick, consequently he must remam at home ; e$ geftel 
tfym md)t mebr nnter hen 50?enfd)en, beg meg en gcg er ftd) in bte 
Stnfctmfett utwcf, he was no longer pleased ancong men, there* 
fore he retired into solitude. 



484 

8th, Final ; bag, that ; cmf ba£, bamtt, in order that ; um 
$11, in order to ; rotr jrtafen tfyrt, b a m 1 1 er fid) befifere, we punish 
him in order that he may reform ; etlen ©te, bamtt Sue mcfyt 
SU fpdt fommen, make haste, lest you come too late. 

9th, Comparative ; at£, ttn'e, gtetcfynue, as, just as ; fo, so, 
thus; a(^ tt>erm, al^ ob, as when, as if; gletd) ate ob, just as 
if; er fiircfytete fid), a 13 ob er afletn mare, he was afraid, as if 
he were alone ; er ftellte fid), aU fcfyltefe er, he adted as if he 
were asleep. 

10th, Conjunctions expressing a relation of time : — bamate, 
bann, at that time, then ; tnbeffen, meanwhile ; sorter, uiuor, 
eber, before, sooner ; barauf, thereupon ; pentad), afterward ; 
feitbem, since ; ate, t)^ when ; warm, when ; rodbrenb, whilst ; 
tnbem, tnbejfen, in that, during which time ; bte, until, &c. 

§ 192. For those conjunctions which require the verb to 
be put at the end of the sentence, see page 180. On com- 
pound conjunctions, entweber — ober, &c, see page 332. 



INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 193. Interjections are words or articulate sounds 
expressive of sudden emotion. 

The most important interjections used in German, are :— 

a§ ! alas ! ah , I)clla ! holla ! 

cb ! ah ! but ! hurrah ! quick ! 

ouf ! up ! bufeb ! hush ! 

brat) ! bravo ! fnacfS ! crack ! snap ! 

et ! why ! eigh ! teit>er ! alas ! 

frtfd) ! brisk ! quick ! cb ! o ! oh ! 

fort! away! paff! puff! purl! 

©(tic! $u ! success to you ! pfiri ! fy ! 

f)a ! ha ! pojstaufcnfc ! 'zounds ! 

*)a,f)a,f)a!> ha h . pjt! ) 

i)\U ! S ' a ' ft ! > hush ! silence ! 

be ! X)i ba ! soho ! ho there ! febt ! ) 

batt ! hold ! topp ! agreed ! 

^ t! . hail * f\\ . | lo, behold! 

bcifa ! ^ ficb ba ! 3 

[uebbctfa ! £ huzza ! hey-day ! rocb ! ? wo , alas , 
f)tlf, £tmmel ! heaven help ! roobtan ! well then ! 



485 

Remark 1. As interjections express no thought, but simply out* 
breaks of feeling, they neither govern other words, nor are they 
governed by any. 

Rem. 2. They stand in connection with every case, but more 
particularly with the nominative, grtfd) ! ©cfellen, frit) $ur £cmt> ! 
Brisk ! my workmen, be at hand ! £) bem £f)oren ftefdjtefyt c$ ted)t ! 
the fool deserves it ! 

Rem. 3. The use of tuof)f, wer)e, $et(, is elliptical, fei being 
understood. They always require the dative which depends on 
the omitted verb ; e. g. nx'bc (fei) ifym ! wo be to him ! Jpett (fei) 
£)tr ! Lail thou ! The interjections 0, • a d), and p f u t are frequent- 
ly put with the genitive; e. g. pfiu bet <Sd)cmbe! for shame! ad) 
beg ©Tehbel ! alas, the misery ! 

Note. For the general principles of Construction and a 
recapitulation of the Rules of Syntax, which are scattered 
through the book, see Lesson 103, pages 356 — 363. 



486 

TASLE OF CLASSIFICATION 

OF THE 

IRREGULAR VERBS. 

JR^mark. — Frcn this taMe must be excepted the sixteen irreg-u 
iat vexbs, which in our list form the first class.* 



to 

w 

Z* ® 

5 


1 

i 


£ 

a, 

i 




Infinitive. 


CD 

ft. 

S 


Past 
Participle. 


i 


e 


a 
a 
a 


e 


©cfycn, to see, 


fab, 


gefefjen. 


ii 


e 

i 


c 

u 


£e(fen, to help, 
©inncn, to reflect, 


fann, 


gefjelfen. 
gcfonncn. 


in 


i 


Srtnfen, to drink, 


tranf, 


getrunfen. 


IV 





*te 


a 


fallen, to fall, 


Per, 


gefattcn. 


V 


ci 


te 
i 


te 
t 


<§tf)mhn, to write, 
SBcipcti/ to bite, 


febrieb, 

tip, 


gcfd)tte&cm 
getnffen. 


VI 


6', au / 
e, t, te, 


c 





©djtepcn, to shoot, 


m, 


gefdjoflciu 


fll 


a 


u 


a 


©cbfagcn, to beat, 


f*lug, 


gefcMagcn. 



The 5th and 6th classes include the greater part of the irregular verbs. 



487 



EXPLANATORY REMARKS. 

I. The first class changes the radical vowel e into a in the 
imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. ©eben, to 
give ; imperfect gab ; past part, gegeben. To this class must 
be added : bitten, to entreat (beg), which changes the radical 
vowel t in the same manner, as : imperfect bat > past part, 
gebeten. 

II. The second class changes the radical vowel e or t into 
a in the imperfect, and in the past participle into 0. Ex. 9Jety* 
men, to take ; imperf. nafym ; past part, genommen ; geitnnnen, 
to win ; imperf. gercann ; past part, gewomten. To these must 
be added, gebdren, produce (to give birth to), which has d in- 
stead of t m the root, as : imperf. gebar ; past pail, geboren. 

III. The third class changes the radical vowel \ into a in 
the imperfect, and in the past part, into tu Ex. ©cfyHngen, to 
sling ; imperf. ftf)(ang, past part. gefcfyUmgcn ; except btngen, 
to hire; imperf. bung; past part, gebungen ; fcfytnben, to flay; 
imperf. fcfyunb; past part, gefcfyunben; and tfyun, to do ; imperf. 
tfyat; past part, gettyan* 

IV. The fourth class changes the radical vowel a into te in 
the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. $£>aU 
ten, to hold; imperf. fytelt; past part, gefyalten ; except fangen, 
to catch ; imperf. ftng ; past part, gefangen. The following 
conform to the principle of the rule, resuming in the past part, 
the radical vowel or diphthong of the present : laufen, to run ; 
imperf. lief ; past part, gefanfen ; geben, to go ; imperf. gtng ; 
past part, gegangen ; betgeu, to order ; imperf. l>xeg ; past part, 
gebeigen ; rufen, to call ; imperf. rtef ; past part, gerufen ; fbgen, 
to push ; imperf. ftfej$ 5 past part, gejbgen. 

V. The fifth class changes the radical vowel et into te in 
the imperf. and in the past part, or before a double consonant 
into t. Ex. 95letben, to remain ; imperf. blteb ; past part. 
gebiteben; fcfynetben, to cut; imperf. fdjmtt; past part. ge* 
fcfymtten. 



488 

VI. The sixth class changes the radical vowels : a, au, t, i, 
it, i>, ii, into d in the imperf. and past participle. Ex. ©djrod* 
ren, to fester ; imperf. fcfyroor ; past part, gefcfyworert ; fctugen, 
to suck ; imperf. fog ; past part, gefogen ; faufen, to drink to 
excess; imperf. (off; past part, gefoffen ; fyeben, to lift ; imperf. 
fyob ; past part, gefyoben ; sermtrren, to embroil (to confuse) ; 
imperf. »erroorr ; past part, serrootren ; bteten, to offer ; imperf. 
bet; past part, geboten; fdjrooreri, to swear, imperf. fcfyroor 
fcfyrour); past part. gefcfyrcoren ; lilgen, to lie; imperf. log ; 
past part, gelogen. 

VII. The seventh class changes the radical vowel a into u 
in the imperfect, and resumes it in the past participle. Ex. 
2Bad)fen, to grow ; imperf. roudjS; past part, geroacfyfen ; fteljert, 
to stand, has ftctnb in the imperfect (formerly, however, ftunfc) 
and '-i the past part, gejicmfccn. 



489 












^5 to 




v a« 




^ © 








co t3 




© _ 




>T3 =3 




° *M 




S to 








e 3 




•^ be 




c © 




Xi »- 


•\ 


^ g 


go 


O rf 


P3 


*-• — < 


P3 


J. 2 


B 

P3 


«-. — t 

© £ 

•S 2 as 


^ 


2 o^3 

t 22 


^ 


{=> 


G -y •"• 


O 


-g ^ o 


P=3 


§ £•* 


« 




P3 


© _ ^ 


HH 


PS § 


P3 


1 !•• 


W 


S«2- 


EH 






•*■* ~r © 


^ 


GO © S 


O 


go 

GO 


© ZH »H 


o 


ve in 
dical 
pie ai 




to cd *rt 


FH 


_-« ti o 


GO 

P3 


.3 "5 



F*l 



s ° 
>-G 
a .2 

,-C CO 

be o> 
5 > 

g bo 



21* 



Imperative. 

2d person of tho 

singular. 


111 |||# 111 ||| 




*• • 

CT) CT) aS GO oS Gl Gl GO GO G} eft 05 ZS3 O) 


J 


© 

o 
3 

d 
1/2 


*g *S -8 *5" *B *§ "S *S >g *S *S *S" *&& 


a? 

•3 

u 

(3 


1st siiilf §1§ i |fi 

^S" "S *S" *S" ^8 *S "S" *S* ^5 *S" *S" 'S' *S"*S" 


•t-> .«-• 


Present 

of the indicative, 2d and 3d persons of 

the singular. 


. . . tr • § g^cs. • • • • !^-d 
^ « ^ n s fe a a 

^a> »*:B-s « a a 

• • • ^tr^ • 5 <&'■&- • • • ^ • cjx>_> 

a»sc« «wcc £_ aa 


a 

"2 




^3 S fl rd 

£ 0n £-& -y ^ 
s -n g.S -§ g £ If g g g <gj fe^ 



490 



in * 



^ 



<£S^ 





© 










js3 




















l*J 




















S-S s 










© 5 ao 


*J 






& *" •£ 




*! . »*=> 






| o.™ 




*S ^ 


i 


1 


-.73 




cs ' u> 


CM 




>£> sO 






© 










[3, 




♦ • 
* JS 




g 


"m O 




c ^» c 


e 




55 '.3 




--> cp j^> 


.<*» 


c 


^ £5 




*tt 5 iE> 


ls= 


JS 


p* 






» *!*■ 


o 

CT) 








«ji 


Q> 






cn^ J> 


>*a 


>£> 




- 








v 






o 


t,C-& 




5-i <l* 








. <?«*> 




SO c 


















15* 


S £ £ £ 1 












N-^ V 




s»«/ 


a 




go 


*e*e *e 


"""^s* 


s 


09 






••?* **~* **■* 














ft, 












S 




4) 


* * 

* JO J 3 rt 

»2 -^ /» <2- 












OX 


JS 






*3 


3 „o 3> ^> 


«> 


^* 






•1 


*° e^° 


sO 


sO 








^^ *& 


^e 


s 






.<-» ..-. ...» 






(m 










o 










a 










o 










8 










a 




• 


• 


• 


T3 










CS . 














^ 






£ rt s 
8 -a 3> 
«> cn .5 












»« JS 






S? ® 




3-> % 






C3 




** S" 








13 iri- 


« 


• 


© 




ses <£T 










*£> <kO 




















J* » 






o 




JO j» 












j>v 








oT tJ 


'Ei 








t2 c 


a* 








g a 


o 


g 






a) ^ g 




"So 

CD 


3? 




^ «> £ 


■°v 


^5 


"3 
<8 






c 
US*. 


O 


a 




%> JS 


S-s 


S 

9* 






C* cr> -2* 


<rf> CO 


JS 






S JS *S^ 




S3 






CJ ** n* 

3S& 83 




8R 






1 


t^ ci ©5 


»« 


ci 



491 






I I I I 



O 



l« 



£ en ti=L 



ItcS^C-S;? 



«? « e 



S ^ r- ** 



3l £ S 2 2 



St c 

u O C 
__ J- j_, J., 



ISSS-l-I 




••O 10 : <3 'C w w 'i W p i- V* 



# en v* d=L ~ 






cn*i c *_5 ^> 22 ^3 *» a 
00a a \S ;£J ~ »-> j-> : 



• ,e ^-^sg-^g-^ '0-6' *& 



S 






• en d=L 



5 » 



"3 



bo 






• en 









a> 

is 



C<3 •» 



09 



m 



s§ 3 

e 5 C 5 

w w m o 
00 

IO ©1 C* 






s 

"3 5 

CD O 

iC- o >-« 

£L ** .2 o 



o 









±? £ *J H 



3 a 

60 ■ 



C CD 

c S 

US. CD 



*n;=n 
•3 ■ 



T3 iT-O 



« »S 



2-° 

2?oS 



eg 



8S 






^5? 



^o^o o^OMH^oo^iyj 



c S 



hD 

C3 



<55 2 



: 03 



.5 3 

o fl 

O P»» 

a * 



c^ 



492 




i i 



^ » 



& 



S3 J-> 



CO 3 S Hff 



c S 



r 






*•* m 


■t> • 






CD 

O 

C3 




£*o &.aa £ 


tSgfC 


sg=gf 


• *> 


to 




»cs 


*3 p -p u *S3 


n c 


2 c »-» 


t- w 




=3 


y=> 


>=> >a j£ /a /=► 


«> o 






o 


w 


*S" 


*e^ w ^s^ 


-E*e^ 


*e-e •& 


^e-e 


*R 








T* 


**■■* •*■* **■* 


•** **■* 


*•"* 


> 
o 

«3 


<3 


3 U P W 3 


s?^ 
& 2- 


c c n ^ 
» i* p *£» 

s H ^ ^ 


J- i- 


o 


C3 


iO 


JZ. /& £ JO £> 


«> «^ 


o ^* J- -i> 


^» O 


o 


i 


3 


S^ SM 


sg^g 


Jf^ % f 


.*§.*? 


>§ 




^r © 



.22 
"S O 

.5 -a 
IS 

© Oh 



<zn 


,♦ 








>S5> 


x+- 




£+ 


tCL 


s 


@t 


o 


S3 






J-> 




Q» 


J-> 




«> 




?~ 






ce 


t& 


» 


&f 






n 




«-» 


«* 


a 


3 


/=> J& 




1 

s 


03 


o 


t> 


o 




0) 


CD 


N 



C3 






5 o 2 



C3 

o 
bO 

o 









CO 

© g 



00 



o 

CO 



S3 



o o CO 2 



5 r^ ° 
** 5 +* 

coQ 



reflet •"r-'-rtr-'-^-ci •— ' 



III 



© 






493 



tit 



•o 



. - U * -2 => 

*• £ ° ° ° ■ «- 6> 

I I l|l.-§^?Ht I I §r 

If 
J4r 



.^ 

t 

C C ? S ^ r* e C C « * 

o c?:-^ /^> „g i^-sJjg ^: l^r J-» St f 



a a = ^ ^ 



o c* o^ an ah an ah ah an an an an 



*S « «S . «2 <S ^* ♦ • • 1 • • t, 

^T Ga tS ~ a ^ Jr -° -° io ro V 5? *g so 

*& *8-e >e >s -s *s -e *e -6 *e -s -s ^ ^ >& 



'& 




«« 


o 




#0 . 


*S< 




M 


£ a 




^w 


« © 




rt 


s a 






Si 













— — '—— — — — -~-~ -~ -~ -~ *- -~ -~ -~ -~ r; — ^L S5 ^ 2 ^g 

. >e = = g* -2 

g 5 ? t Kg- *£■§* 

*£ .• 



d. **~_e - = ?S C C5 






x j£> 



rti. t* ^s_» S 3 3 ^ w w 

S » x i^ ^lii^'S- cti^T- • • c-?h ^««> 

>fr • £L u &■ <8&sr • ,22- «-. v, v- cr,^ . . ^ si ~ -t g « 

J-» tax «.<3 »c3 *o ^5 >I* j-» *-> 

» a 3 a as a???ss «.£ = - 



C s S a H 



co ^.JL *>*-.? 



o ja- — ?a. 



*£. . .* 8-3 § = ? 






^T^Cta: « t c c ? 5 * J - -^ -^ S p "73 S Ic3 



J3 


Oft 


13 


t_ 


-a 





4) «- 
x © 




a 

X 

c 


33 

I 




-a .a 






ed 


©h 


<! 


i, 


o 


» 


•w V 




■3 


^2 



404 









en 










en 








f 


a £ 3 














S-4 

°c5 






| 


en 

o 


a. •- a 




<i* 


V—' 


3 




■ i 




1 . 3 








s ■ 


s &.» 




nS 


^> bD 


O 


I 


I | 


*2 


£x>c 


1 1 




| 


SP 


•73 






'3^ ^ 










Qi ** 








CD 


©* 




en 


en Ui 








en 


M 








M 


08 




3 


*= 3 




S3 




c 




pi 




3 




£ 




o 


O O 






eJ § 

en ,5 


"o 


O o 


'a ^ 






o ^ 




•>o 


en^> 




/^> 


en 


c e 






B 


er. en 








r-» -> 




o 


«- o 




«rf »> 






o 








en 


en en 




cn 


en en 


en 


en en 


en en 




en 


en en 




r 














^ 
















© 




«-► 




sp- 


t> <n 


en 


4^ 






3 
•.G 

a 








3 


id 


5? ? 




*jO 


en 3 
5 tS 


s> 






<n 








2" 

3 




*c3 i> 




<-«* 




en 














en 


en en 




en 


"^en 


en en 


^en 






^enen 


ts 




W 


*e 


*e*e 




>e 


>S -*> 


s 


>e-& 


*& >s> 




S 


^^•0 


«s 




















.«-> <i> 








!' 


























































© 
> 










ens 
3 ,5* 


*z 


G O 






3 
C 

a 


ci^ 








Q* 


c: «> 








^C3 


e> v» 


<> ^rr 




^^ 


€> .J^ 






<3 


en 


en en 




en 


'^•U 


en 


encn 


^en 




en 


en en 




I 




^e 


^•s* 




g 


*S" "»» 


r? 


^e>e 


^0 li> 




^ 


55 


«*-4 
















i\ 










o 

as 






/-"N *2 










en 










e 






■S ss 


















«*-+ 


o 






i <5> ^* 


















CtL 


a 






.Si ,o 

en ^> 


















3 


Pi 




# 


v-/ en 




• 


• • 










• 


en • 


t3 




s* 


4- J-> 




• 


• • 




•iti 






• 


w • 


















Ck* 








o 






"£* 


*^cl^ 










ISO. 

3 


JSs 






*> 






en 


fcL en 

^> 3 








*en 


3 
o 
en 

3 
JO 


en 






3 
en 

3 


rt 
o 




* 
w 


*en*=» 


















•• • 


.3 




*5 






• 


• • 


^ 


: 8 ^ § e 




• 


s • 


1 




en 

3 


3 CD 








*en 

3 




^en 

3 ^ 






hi) 
CD 


*S 




J© 


io S 








JO 


M 


JO ^ 






N 






V 


-tS 




•> 


o 


© 




o 












o 


s 




-3 


•f» 


-o 




>m 












^3 


a 




3 


,,^-N 


o 




io 






3 


1 
*3 




"J3 

<u 

*EjD 

o 


a 

o 

- o 

.6 c 
fat** 


e 


o 

O 


O ^ 
hX) 


m 

o 
o 

o 


c *" 


.S £ » 

- ^ £ 


o 


s 

O 

P-O 


>—< 




3 


o ^ 

§5.3 

■a -£> >^> 


CD 


3 






^ 3 
fig 


o 






1 ^* 


2^*^ 






O ^* v 


o '-^ 


1©® 


o -^» 


Q- 










© 


2 ©© 




,® 


^®© 


CO w 




tl 


©© 








1 c* 


fH cp 




O 


xH PO 


<N 


i-4 CD 


^' P-J 




d 


CD kft 



495 



' 



I I il II 



I I 



















S3 • 




c 5 

C-» S3 

'3i ? 


c; .'tir 


CJ 


^ <3\) 

*3 5 


c c « 




S3 


+3 

S3 
S3 


S3 1 S 

^ 5 c 
s 




^ ^ 


cr en 


*£> 


vC ^O 


vC »£3 sO 


>E- 


vu-» 


'«-> 


**- b «_» 




trf ^» 


<V <i* 


o 


t^ TS> 






«> 


«> 


«> %> -^> 




^CT 


«5 cn 


en 


<T)<S0 


<3") en <30 


CS^ 


<Si 


en 


<30 CTi C^5 












<^v 
o 


^H 










# 








sO 








#* 




<^ 








• i:5 


s.^ 






Q> 




."t^ to 


§.# 


U2- 


is en 

c> S3 






** 

;£ 


S3 


• S3 «J 




*ch<r> 




g&iS- 


sS^O^ 


>o^ 


i*-» 




■^3 ^_» 'CS 
«-» «- JjJ 




^e-e 


ff 


vg- 


;g jr 


.^e-g-e 


^e ,iL 


*& 


^e 


^6*6"^ 


g 


**"" """ 




* , ~ > 






"■* 


'** 


.«-• 


.*-» .•-» ^* 


1 

"2 


*^ 
















«■* 


#* H 




C5 


*2 ch 




*s 


** 
fe 




H 



• S3 <33 

£5 § 




"c^ ch 


<S5*» 


sO 


wS-^c* 


vC^ 1 x^-c* 


co> 


«*3 


vw 


*** **^ S3 


•42 
© 

03 


€€ 


HEFe 


*e 


€€ 


sss 


^e 


*e 


^8" 


*s«s<*> 


»«-> .♦-► 


.*- .«-» 


**■* 






.— 


**■* 


.«-► 


T" -** Crf 


BQ 




















•8 




















g 




















^ 


• • 


• 






• • • 




• 


• 


• • • 


^ 


• • 


• 
*3 


*5 




• • • 








• • • 


S3 

3 








SB 
















^ 


^Cr 


o 




«> 








£a 


• : 


S- : 

*<3 


<3 


§1 


: : : 


g 


• 


• 


: : : 


as 4) 




cn 


£> 




Ic- 










S3 
JO 


5 


s S3 




ys> 








#1 

II 


dr 




•t-» 


© 


o 


i 


1 


■*.» 




© 


© 
2 


09 

S-t 


o 


•4-> 


© 

S3 
03 


S3 


03 


C 

S3 


cr© 


=3 s 

J£ O 

o . 
F 


he J* 
•»!£ i2 • © 

^ c c p 

i_ w w E 


'tf rs ^3 

bo © ^ o 
►fl ^ © + 

5 " "2 2 o 2 

** c "12 •* * * 

J2 G <3 05 <3 eg S 


^ ^ bJD o 

"0.22 © w 

© 03 ^3 w 

§ rt ♦-§2 

© . "2 

w s «^> -T O 
J2 ^ © *,JCJ g 


O 

© a ■* 
a ^ c 

° ~ 

O 4-> 

S3 SS S3 
-IBS) 

S S -S .5 


II 

CDS 

11 

el 



*o fc$ ^ ^£ CO 



496 





1 














ch 






















3 








i^i 














*• 








rt53 

a:2 


*+^- i 










o 


l 




^T3 




ii 


1 1 




1 




or 

CD 


1 




|n 




«-^ 










J-i 








» 


























♦ a 

a §* 

#1 






>B 


a c S - c ♦ ^ 

^fc3 S -g" £L «) 

sS w >s«3 ^ w >st 


n 


a 


ft* 








"a a 


~ a 




o 

«*4 




G 


s 








<t> ^ 


•rf ~* 






^ r^ "^J 't> ^ ^> "ft* 


ft* 




«> 








CO 0") CO CO 




CO 


<J3 OH! O0 Cfi CD GO <33 


en 


CO 


en 






r 


(0 
> 


♦ #■* 












g 










a 

3 


a c 


;2 S3 

a c 
*g to 




*o 

KM 


^ ,S? ^ ftt ^ .! 4 

*a .^ .£» ^ -^ *a -^ 


crj 


O 

<D 


ft* 


o 






C/2 


•e-e 


*b*b 




& 


^ ^ ^-^^ ^ jg- 


-B 


S «B 


03 

ft 

s 


i 






"^ •* - 


.— .** 






._► .^. .^- .^- ..- .— .^- 


*'-* 


M 


*** 


















S 




►—I 






43 

s 


*B-B*B*B 




>B 

o 

*-» 
w-* 


^B -B >B -B *B -B ^B 


^B 


. g.8 

CD *B 








.♦- .«-> 


.«- .«-* 






.*- .y- .,- .^- .^- .— .«- 


• r-» 


M 


* 




O 










•a 












2 










>e 












o 

CO 

H 

CD 
ft 

t3 




• : 






55 

ft* 


• • • *5 * 

• • • Cm— * 


*2 

CO 
S 

ft* 


• 


i 




CO 






I* 




ft* 




V* 








. »4 






ft* 








ft* 








« §3 






«£ 




>B 


J- 

o 


*£ 








® — be 






e 




ft* 


*^& s. 


en 

a 








*- „ so 

P-l 43 <« 






S 
%*•* 




**> 


w^l *^ 


w 




















68 8 


JO 












• • 


! c 




M 


:i^ : :# : 


H 


• 


• 










s 




o 


te^ » l sr 


O 








43 






G 






vG wG .^ 










A 






^ 






» SJ » 


0) 








^ 








£ 


iO iO y=> 


N 














•s 




«v 


0) 
















/"-N 




Ph 


CD pO 
















£ 




© 


^ ^ 
















C3 




CD 


S ° 














a 


O 




. M 


tS n3 **■* 
















v-/ 




a 


fin S fl 




-- 










'Sa 


oT co 




*a 








rs 




43 

i 

(3 




o 


2 * 
2^ 
s= o 


K 

o 


^ o 

ft* 
0) 


c o B B B Z B ** 


o 


bo 

o 

■** 

a 


o 

g 

o 








a a ° ^ 


03 

CO 


£ 2 be 

tow G 


j? a g » e ,c2 

GGG«>oft*.— *-» 


CO 

cx> 


G 

6 


JO 










=o 






















tfs o cm ©5 




U3 «£> 


J> rf Tt< O lO ^ »-< 


CO 


r- 


fcO 



497 



*•■ 



I I I 



I I s 



Site 5 -6* jS 

5 5 3 5 s 

^»> O «- 5> 

■J CD S CO 



en en : 



<-0 



If 



be 



CO 



* S5 -J 



to :<3 - ~ : 

5 5 5 5 






sg-g 

C S3 



feed '£ 



«- »& 



o 2 .tx o 

HcHH 


S 


5 e 
a cs 




*&^*S*& 


>e 


>e>s* 


-e^e 






•e ^e 



»e >e 



> 

•43 



I 



W c g 



C g u cs 

*> S ~ s 

on 






» 3 



53 33 =3 i 
AAA. 



5 

A 

3 



S 5 5 5 
:2£ « 



SI- 
'S 



en n--' 

$•« s 

CD 



CD 



73 



CD 






CO 



» «^ .^ JS W S3" CD 



,1 

♦ Is s 

- ^ sr o S 
2 ~ 



CD 
•^ CO 



CO 

be 



09 



CD 



ho 

C 



< 'en 



s S « 

en co fc= £> 

l O »-H *3 v^X 



c o 52 

J3 _5 



CO CD 

rr cd 

^fST O -m E^ O W ^W CvJ 

o 



53 

O 



C3 



Vi_ CT}-£ U±. 

^gc?» 

ir* c© «i 



S3 
CO 



a5 



&!>& 



\a 



o 

.i 

o 



s 

1 



S3 <33 

i- ll 

.g x» u g 

^ ? 1 rt 

&S -2 

c- •£ 3 t 

^ 35 . S3 

.•S > e £j 



40S 



Imperative. 

2d person of the 

singular 


- 

#1 ' 1 1 1 ! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 


13, 
to o 


. . . • c c . c g g 

g s s 1 « S ' • ■ g ; ■ g ' | g £: ~ g 

}_ W w w J-> W w iH-i2L «S-0=i_ 1 »i±. u=L 
Ot^«i> «>^> o «> <^ o t-»^>*^> c> 
<n coi co COCO CD CT5 COCO COCO CO CO 


o 

1 


o 

e 

;S3 

IS* 

s 


so 

W 

f-Bss *s : 2 s g~-S ,1: ffi?sSa a 


6 
> 

I 

■■3 


. C • CO C . VfrZ-cj** g 
^tj f= g t fc: cn£§;£. A 


Pro sent 

of the indicative, 2d and 3d persons of 

the singular. 


.... , 

• •• «• • • • ••.. 

it— 

w> 

*•-.>' Vrf 

... •• • • • V*— • • • • • 


< 

j 

'! 
j 


3 


03 •* • • • Jf .•"" 

03 ® «» X '53 _S £ 

.r H "3 ■ g . . * § 2 g 

03 .^ c 5 £ „r 2 13 . ^ ^ ctf as £> *^ 

** w Cj W ^ ^3 okl J" & ^OO 

_ d - o o -tl o (SI ^ o a o i» p 

- 2 » c ^ § c c " M c d b«SS S 

Cr^sScSS r> O g.S -Sj^w/i, C 

* i b ^ •§ g^ « § |- ^i^j f i| -| ^-| § 

»ft »ri 8S »oq « ^ © ^5 toi>co»r5 m> 



499 



S 



*5 £ I 



hio^l 






Si 



e? ••♦♦♦ C c 

li /^ S ^ ^ ^ ■^ <^j t« — 

*-^- e **— eTj-4? fcr fc: "5= C •♦-» 

^ -^ ^ Jg ,£• .g .g ,g *g* sg* 



cncr:<j)cn<^cn<x<3) 



en 



en 



i« £? *o 'O *o ;» ;£ 2 -^ Ci S i2 5 C C 

vg- , ^^vg~ sg *g .g »g >g »g »g »g- »g* *g- tg* 



^S^ S^Sf^^ J 



«*■ w J 



^ ^"S *B •€ 45 -8 4? 41 45 -S5 *8" *S* *S" 



ie fe 






^ 






I a 




& <s 




- ;j 2 




2-5.2 




St- 




12 "d 






h. * % 


3 

sir 


P g g 


CD 



4? 



vg ig" 









o 


o 


-cT 














CD 


3 




o 


4J 






4-» 


CO 


O 






O 












CD 


.£* 




SS 


> 
O 




C *-» 






® 


pi 


o 



*e-e 



bD.45 



CD 

*-» ^ -T CD $ "C3 

8 6»|-=S"igrf 



CO " 



CO CC 



co 



3 o © o o 



o ~ o o o 



,^ >c< ^ cT^-' ""* — '""^ '"^ 



O 

>• 
CD 
T3 



beco co 2 



is 



o3 

+j CO 
CO 



en bf.-~ 



; S cd 
i 45 > 



;®9 



ti M ^ h O O O ^' 00 O 



o . S c 



J3 O -C 

5) <i a ' 



«= w S a 
'a ^ ^^"^ 
bJD c5 Jj ^ 

- ao o O 

a 2 *- t 

-T e? -P *» 



*• 



-3 ©(^(^^(5) 



500 



£** . 

♦Sow 

cd _ -3 

a; o m. 

g 85 go 

»-« Q, 

CM 



W> 



S 



I I 



1 *R 



c3 u 


** 

S3 


o 


C c S c 




o 3 


enn 

5 ^ 


e J_ 


H<~ 


ss 


e i- j-» ^-> 


t2B8 


2 2 


2 a 


Ph 


sC- 


j€t 







SLfi 


^^: 


§.2 












o 3 




•> ^> 




cd 


en 


cr. en en en 


cd cd en cd 


CD CD 


cd en 


CD CD 







*" 


** 


• ** -j . 


• o cD>2i 


H y^ 






a 


iO 


to 


"c V U £ 


S ro •§ '© 

■c 2 2 a 


IC3 -CI 

2 a 


*C .£* . .J 




2* 


iS 


ig 


-s -s s 


*6 


gje 


£3 


ca 


S 


S 


<£$■ 


^§sss 


f§"£ 


SS^S.I-f 


P, 

s 


p 




#* 




*C 2 2 2 


n c 
a cs 

2 2 


CDS • 

2 p ^£ 




-3 


t£ 


Si 


*S *B ~S *S" 


£&§<;£?££ 


00 


^€T sS c cx_ » 




1-1 


10 


% 


^B^BSB' 


*S *«3 *?3 £* 


-S-S* 


>e^^>e^ 






'*- 




•*-* *** ••** **■* 




**"' **■* 





?=2 

2 



£3. 

'2 






§C.g 











O 




« O tT 










m 
















o 


*d 


tf 






„ CD ^T G Oh 


ho ~ 






■«-i 




O 
&, 


pa 

cut, 

screw 

write, 

cry 






.a s 

03 !> 




'3 


e 




^v 


« S C v 




w o o s r 2 

- cgcBsS 


O 

♦* O 
v ■♦-» 


<D ^ 
CO CD 




vo 

3 






]£ * ^ C 




S S cD^i ^ ^ 
£i ^ .w j i=i © s c r 


CDS 


** o 




CJ 

e 




'c 


"5 <3 « *S 
C >- J-» i- 


a 

CTl 


B B 2 2 S '§ 2 "g 


.^- SO 

2 2 


!«? 




>e 




v£^~ 


^e-s-e-e 


Qj 


-s^^e-e g^e^'S 


^8€ 






te> 




® 


©©©© 


O 
OS 


^)®©©J©© g 


^)(S) 


^)^ 




to 




«3 


irj^vrjirj 




O tO o «o <NM 


CO CO 


fH »• 



501 



I I I 



II If &TI 



SI its. 



8 £ J 1 

tr c c e 

• «» .~ .3 .«* 



ch cr, ch c-.oci 



o I cs 
«3 Cfl 



/» £» 



2.^ > i - 



£ -cs -cs 
,«-c!=l£3- 



•g--^- >g~ «g^ 



^e^e^-e-s^ ^e^^e-es^ 



C3L 



C *- c c — 



>e *e*e-e-e 



e 
ss 
c: 






I *g-*g- 



8'S 



^>g-^^ 






i 

1 






"S3. *=> 



«-» S3 



(D 



^ 






*S 2 ' 

o o 



- 8 






.if o 






' 5- 



d ^ C S3 



"S SS S3 S3 » <Oi > 



s* s^- 



55 £5 



CD CO CO G* 



~® 



=* CO 02 



CO 



O O 






o 3 

r C N S? 

r* <^> '-^ 
p.s>s». 



bo 









<3i 



S3 



« SS S3 



.3 



cS _ 



.A 

«» £ 3 * 

.£3 aT =£ £ © 

73, — — m 

> " ITS § 

*r V -a rf . 



o 2 



08 03 



!« 



•35 r> ^" 'Si -^ 

S ? 3 2 2 

S O £5 «> SI 

. ^ ■ » d 



803 





*<*£ 






















"J3 " « 






















«! S's 






















CN 


HP 




• j- W 

if* jS* 




1 


1*1 




«s 


l«=1 

j- 


M 

O 

w a? 

X- w. 




g 




F 5 

^ w 








S 


cs 


= = i 


*• 
c S 


Ah 


d=L 










3 O w 




w w w 


w w 


























cn 




cd en 




en 


en en en 


cn 


en en en en 


en en 




r 


■=> 




<j 


















6 
> 

a 


a. 




w 
•■o 




iCS .^ W 

dr. <£i Si- 


*w 


.e 


:r?"=eJ .22 
w w w 


. ** 

ic: to 

w w 


3 


C/3 


*& 




*B-S 




# 


's *S*S* 


"S 


*s 


-S *S *S" 


^e-s* 


\i 




'"" 




"**■ •*-* 




"** 


••f* "~* •— ' 


■*■* 


*~ 


.,_ ,- ._ 


•*■* ".r* 




sZ, 





















CJ 


g>* 


o 


e: .^ w 


*w 


*e 


*e>e 


•e 


*s*s*& 


*© 



+2 cnu^Ng ^ ft 

e: s a .;2 c o 

sO WWW WW 

yg^ J& ^ ^ >£ ^jg" 



Si- 
rs 



€3?4 *i 



e 



~ *-> v> 



its. 
3 



O CD 



0) 

C3 



o o o o 



^4 - 



Q 
-w 

03 






C3 . 



w 






.3°w 



® ^)© 



§©£)© 



o w 

5$ 



„ o o ^ 

^ C « g 



^* /^ 

Iti •'• 

»t: o 

w B 

» CD 

>o w 

^'^ & 
g-O 9 

oo trJ 

c c 5 S 



W^w'w »-5 ^o t» 



503 



! "fill | I Mil! 





o o 

*0 sO 




JO 




o 
*-► 

JO 




^-» C r- «> 








fc* J-> 


v* 


i-> 




J-» 


J-> 


$_, i_ ^ ^ 


$-> 


J-» 




«-» ^> 


















cr. CT3 


» o 


» 


» 




£> 


» 


» » r> » 


» 


A 




«i» 


















C 

k 5 s 2 






JO 




iCS 

en 


** 

yg ,2 =o 

*- j-» j-> 

<s> o -^ 


to 

a 






» » 


» 




o 


£> 


s> 


■ £>£>£> 


.» 


» 


.U W ? 


.1?^"M? 


s 


s 


s-^ 


"V> 


3 


.IfSM? 


!§" 


*s* 




CT) 


















■M 


*-> 


















c 


O 














o 

a 








5* 


•>o 
*-» 

CJ 
JO 




o 

w 

JO 




* 

I » » » 




•g^S 


!f w S 


s 


3 




1*> 


sg- 


• ^0*0^ 


!§ 


s 



& \ ' s* # ^ -^ • • : : s 

» ^ » g » S «J 

^) «» ^ S. ^ ^- «8 



O 



5^ 
^O 



.3 






»-T r° 






S o »*l «^ .^.©^ c ^§oo- o o 2 

<•* +* w p" .> rtcD e Q n !: v S y « . ^ hd r ~ «. 






^ •«-» 1 <— » *-* ^* m s_k hn ^^ »Ii ^iv *~ 



en 



•^ ■—• _c — — ^ ** 



W 



<© d « »ft C^ «5 «m k« S^ rji CO CO <d IQ 



M 



604 



.1 




























®«« M 




























| o « 




























a a s 




























£ =» fac 




























el£ « 




i^* 












, 












J £' S 








1 


i r i 


1 1 






1. 






I 1 1 


-a 




2 












*2 








"5 




to 5 




,ft* 




ft> 

en 




>g 


'T7 C 


g 

sO 




s 

ft* 

JO 

*-> 




e 

t ft> 

*-> 


en c »-> 


rt 




G 




o 


a o 




£ g 


o 




ft* 




o 


O C3 O 


P-i 




2 




a 


2 2 


2 


2 2 


2 




2 




2 


2-2 2 
















C* ft* 


«-• 








ft* 








en 




en 


en en en en en 


en 




en 




en 


en en en 




- 
















ft* 








^ 








> 








#* . 




ft* 


Jet 


. 


# 




*- 


• 






o 
a 

P 


*§" 




en 


Si* 

5S3 to 


ft* 


.ft* /O 


2 








O /^^ • «> ft* 
Eft* ft* A> j_» 

*tr enn w 

.5 ;o ^G 'O 






IS? 
S3 


2 




2 


2 2 2 


2 2 




2 


2 




2 


2 2 2 


CU 




w 


§ 




>g 


>p »p >p >p~ >£> 


kg- 




^ 




S'r 


'££}£ 






















t* 








a 
















. 






sj 












© 








# 




# 






2 












"8 






*4 


* 

Si 


*B 


€-1 












.^1 












o 


53 o 




.~ g 


CJ 




a 




a 


O G O 






5 


a 




2 


2 2 


g 


2 2 


2 




2 


^2 


2 2 2 








*& 




^g 


*g >g *g >»g >g» 


>0 




jf 


<o 


.Hf 


*§£S 


§ 

o 

CO 

ft 




























"3 




























W 










*^ 






















«-G 






5 s 

5« 






Co 








<sl 








2 






E 






J-> 




y^> 

*-* 




w 




© © 
















2 




2 




2 




> J3 
















i* 








i-* 




o 




Si 






e£ 






ft* 




j-» 




ft* 




o 

.s 




^e 




• 


s : 


• 


! 1 


el 

J-* 










• mm 






>G 






iCJ 


















© 




2 






2 






2 




'2 




2 








=3 






3 






« 




a 




ss 




o 




/=» 






JO 






^> 




JC* 




^> 




K 




S 






fl r *° 


c 




© 

© 




^ 


Of C rt 






cd 




O 

o 






*3 © 


© 




CO 

© 




-♦-3 

CO 




bD - ^ 






£ 






,xT © 




*»$ 


'3 




o 




^ 


© CO rrt 


© 




o 

M 

♦ bjo 




'© 

o 


CO f> 

© > © 
a o ^ 

(3 "^ 


13 

o 


O 


© 
H 

O 




© 
o 


b 

M 

^3 


<U JH c CO 

fefs.f® 


d 






© 

CO 

© 


en 


*8 c"*t 




-^ o 

t^r c co v* 




o 

© 




5 g e" ° B 

ft* X ft» fl -> ft* 






g 


M 


«-G 


© a ^?> 


"ft* 


Cj ft* 


05 ft* 






bjo^ 






i ; ; 




3 


CO ft* 


|8 


CO 


i 


SS9|{ 








i> 




to 


t^ %0 iT5 VT5 cS 


c$ 




c* 




cJ 


to to 



505 



2 



I I 









« a 



53 

a 



d£ 



a 




a 










S3 




«i 










JO 




o 










c£ 




tj 




• 


.' 


















a 




a 










4? 




^=r 
























% 




_•- 




H-pis ■ ■< 




1 

o 
o 


r-i 




ad 

'5 




O CO 




o: 








-r &* S 






0) 




fan 




©cm 

CO H ^ 




© 


K^ 




c 




53 •- M 




o 


£ 




S 


•— N 


o 


p3 


d 


o 






03 

O 


O 


o 


o 

♦J 


o 

CO v 
G3 ** 


CO 


CD 






a'S 


& 


O 


o 


CO 


OQ ^e^-^tS 



.1 





CO 


Od 


s- 






1) 


*D 


> 


§ 




<U 


kJ 



«*.3 



II 



@ 



22 



506 



OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 

The subject of the verb is always in the nominative ; the di 
rect or immediate object is put in the accusative. Ex. : Sari 
fcfyretbt etnert 33rtef, Charles writes a letter. Sari is the sub. 
ject or nominative, etnen 93rief is the immediate object or accu 
sative. 

I. VERBS WHICH ARE FOLLOWED BY THE NOMINA HVE. 

The following verbs take after them only the nominative ii 
they have an attribute, it is in like manner put in the nomi. 
native : — 

© c t n, to be. ©cm SStubet war eitt gtopct £ctt>, his brother was 
a great hero. 

28 c r t) c n, to become. (St ttmtfce ctn tctcbct $ttann, he became a 
**ich man. 

&M e t b e n, to remain. (St fyftcfc (lets metn gettcuct gtcunt), he al 
ways remained my faithful friend. 

£ c 1 9 c n, to call (be called). $fltin tfltefiet S3tut>et (jetpt (Sari, 
my eldest brother is called Charles. 

© d> e t n c n, to appear. £>ct Sag fdjten nut cine ©tunbe, tag 3ab* 
cm Sag, the day appeared to me an hour, the year a day. 

With some passive verbs, such as genannt roerfeen, to be 
called, named. Ex. : (£t f ann em braoer 9JZamt genannt Herbert, 
he can (may) be called a good man; gefcfyolten roerben, to be 
chided. 

II. VERBS WHICH GOVERN THE GENITIVE. 

a) The following verbs, besides the direct object in the accu 
sative, have an indirect object in the genitive : — 

2(nf(agcn, to accuse. 9)Zan ffogte tr)n b.cS £)tebftab($ an, they 
accused him of theft. 

23 e ( c b t e n, to instruct. (St bat nucb ctncS SBcffctn Mcfjrt, he has 
instructed me in something better (put me right). 

& c r a u b e n, to deprive, rob. Wlcm bat tbn JcincS aSetmogenS be* 
taubr, they have deprived (robbed) him of his fortune. 

5*efcb u-tt) tgen, to charge. Sftan bat ibn bc$ £ecb&ettatb$ 6c? 
fcbulMgt, they have charged him with high treason. 

(£ n t ( c t> i g c n, to exempt, dispense. 9)?an fyat ibn fcineS 2Cmtc* 
entfc^t, they have dismissed him from his office. 

il c b c r f it b t c n, u c r \v c i f c n / to convict. #Kan bat ibn cU 
n.c6 93ctbtccf)cn$ ubetfiibtt (ubcm>icfcn), they have convicted him of a 
cri ne. 

Ucbetbcben*, to exempt. Semonbcm etnet ©acbc ubetbcbcn/ to 
e sempt a person from any thing (or trouble). 



507 

Ucfcet^eugen, to persuade, convince. <5t \)dt mtdj bcffcn* 
ftbcrjeugt, he has convinced me of it. 

£> c r ft cb e t n (see Obs. Lesson 64), to assure. 3$ tterft'cbere 
<Ste ntcincr Jpcd)ad)tung unb mcincr £tebe, I assure you of my esteem 
and affection. 

&> er tvctfen *, to banish, (Etnen be£ Ccmbe$ b wrroetfen, to 
banish a person from his country. 

£B u r b t 9 c n, to honour, estimate. (£r rr-titbtgt nud) feincS SScr* 
tremens, he honours me with his confidence. 

b) A considerable number of reflexive verbs require an in- 
direct object in the genitive, as :— 

(S t cb ctnnebnten*, to interest one's self. (5r nafym ftd) beg $tn* 
be$ an, he interested himself in (for) the child. 

(S t cb tu'bicncn, to avail one's self. 3cb bebiene mid) t>tcfcr 
febonen (SJcfegenbeit, I avail myself of this good opportunity. 

<Stcb bcflctgc n* or b c f( etg tg c n, to apply, attach one's 
self. Skfktjjtge £>tcb ber Sugcnb, attach yourself to virtue. 

(St cb f e t n e $ U m t c $, (c t n e r g c r b c r u no b c 9 e b e n *, to 
resign one's office, to desist from, renounce one's claim, pretension. 

<S t cb be m a cb 1 1 9 e n, ft cb c m e t ft e r n, to possess one's self, 
to make one's self master. 9)?cm bcmacbttqte fid) be$ jDtebcS, they pos- 
sessed themselves of (captured) the thief. 

<S t cb etne* £) r t e $ be ft n n c n *, to remember a place. 

<S t cb beg SB e t n c $ entbalten*, to abstain from wine. 

<Stcb etner <Sad)e entfcljUgen*, to divest one's self of 
(give up) any thing. 

<S t cb ber 2(rmen erbctrmen*, to take upon one's self the 
cause of the poor. 

(Stcb eineg 23erfprecben$ (or anfetnSBerfptedjen) 
eritinern (Obs. D. Lesson 71), to remember a promise. 

(S t cb f e t n e $ 3 r n c $ crroebren/to check one's anger. 

(S t cb etner ttnttuortgetroften, to console one's self with 
an answer (await a reply in confidence). 

<S t cb f e i n e g 2ft e t cb t b u m $ rtl b m e n, to boast of one's riches. 

(Stcb et ner febtecbten £anbtung febtfmen, to blush 
(feel ashamed ) at a bad action. 

©id) etner ©a A e unterfangen* (ober unterftefyen), to 
venture upon (undertake) any thing. 

(Stcb etneS fold) e n ©Iftcts »e tmut&en, to anticipate 
(calculate upon) such good fortune. 

<S t cb etner (S a cb e t> c r f e b e n, to be aware of (prepared for) 
any thing. 

(Sid) e t n e r <S a dj e to e t 9 e r n, to hesitate upon (refuse) any 
thing. 

a Tin's verb is used also with ttott, as: %3) Bin ttOtt 3f)Ver ^reuttbfcljaff ubet* 
jeit^t, I am convinced of your friendship. 

b This may also take after it the preposition ait 8, as i Semattbett auS bent 
Xante sertoetfen, to banish a person from his country. 




508 

c) Many verbs are used indifferently with the genitive 01 
accusative ; but with the genitive they mark a sense more gen. 
eral and more absolute than with the accusative, as : — 

2( d) t e n, esteem. 3d) cid)te feiner (ober tfjn), I esteem him. 

83-c b fir f e tt> to be in need. 2Btr beburfen Sfyrcr (ober Sfyrc) jg>UU 
fe, we are in need of your aid. 

(5 n t b c b r e n, to spare, do without. 3cf) femn fctner (ober tfyn) md)t 
entberjren, I cannot spare (do without) him. 

@ r id q r; n c n, to mention, make mention. (5r enuafynte 3f)tet 
(cbet ©te), he mentioned (made mention of) you. 

©cntepen, to enjoy, .©etuefie be$ ScbenS (obcr ba£ fccben), on- 
ioy life. 

5> f ( e g e n, to take care. (Sc pftegte fetnet (obcr feinc) ©efunbfjett, 
he took care of his health. 

@cf) on e n, to spare (take care of), £Ran mup fcincr (obcr tfjn) 
fdjoncn, they must spare him. 

d) The verb few, to be, requires the genitive in the following 
exj /essions : — 

® c to o f) n t f c t n, to be accustomed, (5*t tji beffen mdjt gewofynt, 
ne is not accustomed to it. 

£> t r Sfil c t n u n q f c t n, to be of opinion. 

(55 u ten 9)2 u t f) e $/ gutcr Nunc f e i n, to have courage, 
to be in a good humour, in spirits. 

SB U I e n $ f c t n, to have the intention. 

£> e S &obe£ f e t n, to die, be dead. (St tjr bc$ SobeS, he is 
a dead man. 

©liter £offnung fetn, to be with child. 

Rem. — Yerbs always require after them the same case as 
the past participles used adjectively. (See the government of 
adjectives, Lesson 93.) 

e) Yerbs referring to time, require in like manner the geni- 
tives, although not followed by a preposition, as : — 

£)c6 201 o t $ e n $ , be$ 2C b e n b $ f p a $ t e r e n gefjen, to 
take a walk in the morning, in the evening. 

£>e$ 9Ud)t$ c (bet 9fcad)t or bie 3fcad)t J)tnbutd)) 
a r b c t 1 e n , to work at (all) night. 

<DeS 9Sormtttag$ a b r e i f e n , to depart (start, set out) 
in the morning, forenoon. 

£>e$ 9Ud)mttta g£ fpa$teten tetten, to ride out (on 
horseback) in the afternoon. 

£> e 6 & a $ $ (bet ober a m & a 3 e ) arbeitcn, to work 
by day, in the day time. 

€ Custom requires that the word Sflafyt, althcugh feminine, takes here an & 
in the genitve. 



509 

©enntags unb 9}? o n t a q $ g.e I) t t> i c $) o ft a ft, the mail 
weaves on (every) Sunday and Monday. 

Sttl c t n J r c u n t> t o mm t f e d) 8 m a t b c $ 3 a fj r $ (o b c t 
im 3 a b r e), ^einul t> e 6 9}? o n a t $ (c t> e r i m 93? o n a t), 
et n m a ( tic S3? c ct) c (accusative), my friend comes six times a 
(in ihe) year, twice a month, once a week. (See Lessons 31 and 54, 
Obs. B.) 

III. VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 

Besides the direct object in the accusative, verbs often have 
an indirect one, which is put in the dative. Ex. : — 

3 c m a n b c m etn>a$"ge&en/ to give something to some- 
body. 

3 e m a n b c m f a g c n, m e I b c n, f cfj r e t t> c n, a n t ro r« 
te n, to say to, mention to, write to, reply to somebody. 

The verbs which require the dative are : — 

a) Most neuter verbs which do not admit of a direct object 
in the Accusative, as : — 

' 3 c m a n b e m angcfyoten, to belong to somebody. 
3 e in a n b c m ouetcci d) e n *, to avoid somebody. 
© c f a I 1 c n, to please. G£t gcfallt mir fcf)r / he pleases me much. 
3 c m a n b c m g e f) t cb e n, to obey somehody. 
3 c m a n b e m 9 I c t d) c n *, to resemble someboay. 

b) The following reflexive verbs : — 

© t d) e t n t I b e it, to imagine to one's self. £)u bUbeft 2)tt 
etn, you imagine to yourself. 

©id) e r f) e b c n *, to yield, surrender. (§r ergt&t ftdr> bet £us 
genb, he yields to virtue. 

(Sid) n a f) e rn (0 b e r ft cr) it a f) e n), to approach. Stfabern 
Ste fid) tern Jcuer, approach the lire, (5t nafyet fid) mir, he approaches 
me. 

©tcb D r jt e U e n, to represent to one's self, to imagine. 3$ 
(Idle mir r>er, I represent to myself. 

©id) ro t b m e n, to devote (consecrate, dedicate) oneself. (St 
ttribmet fid) ben ®efd)aftcn, he devotes himself to business. 

c) Certain impersonal verbs. See page 158, Obs. A. 

(5 $ t ft mir a n 9 ft, I am afraid. 

(£ $ f d) e t n t 5) i r, it appears to you (thee). 

2B e n n e $ 3 b n e n b c 1 1 e b t, if you please, like. 

6 $ & a t m i t g e 1 1 a u m t, I dreamt, &c. 

IV. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE, 
a) All active and transitive verbs are followed by the accu 
•ative of the direct object, which in the passive voice becomes 
the subject nominative, as : — 



510 



PASSIVE. 



3d) f d) &' £ e meinen $ r e u n b, $filc\n gfteunb rcitb sen nut flcfd)3£t 

I esteem, appreciate my friend. 
3d) efyte btesffiatyrfyeit,! «Dte SQBa^rFjctt wttb turn nut geefytt. 

honour the truth. 
(5 1 ti c bt bat .ft t n b, he loves £)ag fttnb rcttb t)on ifym gelte&t. 

the child. 

b) Most of those reflexive verbs, which ought to be consid- 
ered as active, expressing an action which terminates in the 
agent himself (see Lesson 70), as : — 

3d) f r c u e mid), I rejoice. 

£) u f d) a' m ft £> t d), you are (thou art) ashamed. 

23 e m it r) e n @ i e ft d) n i d) t, do not trouble yourself. 

c) Certain impersonal verbs. (See page 158, Ohs* A.), as : 

(S 3 Mngcrt mid), I am hungry. 
@ 6 f r i e r t t f) n, he is cold. 

d) The following verbs govern two accusatives, the one of 
the person, and the other of the thing : — 

$ e 1 6 e n *,' to call, be called, order. S*t fyctjjt mid) einen Barrett; 
he calls me a fool. SQBcr f)at £>td) bag gefyctpen ? who ordered you to 
do that] 

3? e n n e n *, to name, call. 3dj nenne tfjn meinen greunb, I call 
him my friend. 

© d) e 1 1 c n*, f d) i m p f e n, d to abuse. (St fcfycift (fcfytmpfte) 
mid) einen barren, he called me a fool by way of reproach. 

d It must not be forgotten that the verbs ^etjktt, nemtett fc^eltett, and fc$tat* 
Dfctt have two nominatives in the passive. 



D. Appleton & Co.\$ Educational Publications. 

a i m i i-ii " i ■ ■ ii i ' :n 

OLLENDORFF. 

New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and 

Sjpeah the German Language, To which is added, a Systematic Outline 
of the different Parts of Speech, their Inflection and Use, with full 
Paradigms, and a complete List of the Irregular Verbs. By George J. 
Adler, A. B., Professor of German in the University of the City of 
New- York. One volume 12mo. $1. 
l=W A Key to the Exercises, in a separate volume. 75 cents. 

w We have no hesitation in stating that the Grammar before us is the best work oi 
the kind published, in any language. Certainly, in comparison with other German 
grammars, it has a vast superiority. The plan is admirable, commencing with princi- 
piss, and advancing by slow gradations to the most abstruse and complex parts, all ad- 
mirably exemplified, and having appropriate exercises appended to each rule. 

"Ollendorff's Grammar has superseded every other work of the kind throughout Eu- 
rope, and it is in extensively increasing demand in all parts of the United States. As a 
book of instruction it presents facilities which in all similar books are either entirely- 
wanting or but imperfectly afforded. We earnestly beg all engaged in teaching or learn- 
Ing the^German language, to use this Grammar, for it will save them an immensity oi 
time and labor." 

" Beginning with the simplest phrases, Ollendorff gradually introduces every princi- 
ple of Grammar; and he does it by interblending the rules with such copious exercises 
and idiomatic expressions, that by a few months' diligent application, and. under the 
guidance of a skilful instructor, any one may acquire every thing that is essential to 
enable him to read, to write, and to converse in the language. A more complete ana- 
lytieal system is not to be found in any department of science. Each subject of infor- 
mation, from the more simple to the most difficult principles of the language, is clearly 
presented throughout the whole Grammar and its supplement — the key to the exer- 
cises. 

"The idioms and peculiarities of the German are taught in the same natural manner 
h& they would be by a vernacular use of the language. This feature of the Ollendorff 
By stem is sufficient to give it preference over every other." 



OLLENDORFF. 

New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and 

iSpea~k the English Language, through the Medium of the German : ar- 
ranged and adapted for Schools and Private Instruction, by P. G-ands. 
12mo. $1. 
151P A Key to the Exercises, in a separate volume. 12mo. 75 cts. 

"My compilation of the French Grammar after the sj^stem of Ollendorff, has made 
the German public so thoroughly acquainted with this highly practical system of in- 
struction, that it will not be necessary to add any further recommendation in this place. 
It was so universally acknowledged and adopted, that I was induced to compile a simi- 
lar Grammar for Germans to learn English ; and I did this the more willingly because I 
was urged to do so by many from all quarters. 

"In carrying out the plan, I endeavored to introduce exercises in questions and 
answers suited to familiar and social conversation, so as to do away with the antiquated 
Phrase-books still in use. The frequent application and repetition of the rules set forth 
Sh this book, I have sought to make as free from dull monotony as possible, by giving 
the sentences a new turn, and by arranging them in different order, so as not to repeat 
- 8 same over and over again. 

"A practical routine of instruction carried on for many years, has taught me the 
v ants of the student; I feel therefore perfectly confident in bringing this book before 
f t<5 public," — Extract from Preface. 

r This work will be found by' Germans to be an easy, simple, and expeditious mods 
of acquiring a knowledge of the English language. The system of the great linguist is. 
very popular with all who have made themselves acquainted with it, and as applied Us 
the various languages in use." 
25 



D. Appleton & Co?s Educational Publications. 
PROP. CHARLES EICHHORN 

The Practical German Grammar ; 

Or, a Natural Method of Learning to Eead, Write, and Speak the Gut 

man Language. 12mo. $1. 

"The plan of this work consists in teaching the pupil by what Is called the natural 
mode, in opposition to the Grammatical method. A child is taught to speak its native 
tongue by learning the words and the construction of sentences, without the assistance 
of rules. We have seen Grammars in other languages formed on this system, but this 
is the first systematic attempt to introduce the plan into the study of the German. We 
have no doubt the author has succeeded in producing an excellent text-book. 0n3 of 
the features which deserves praise, is the arrangement and construction of the sentences 
or examples in such a way as to take advantage of the analogies between -the English 
and German, and thus facilitate the progress of the student. The new and poetic .selec 
tions at the end of the Grammar, are intended as an introduction to the works of the 
best German authors." — Prot. Churdvnian. 



PROP. G. J. ABLER. 

A Progressive German Header ; 

Prepared with reference to Ollendorff's German Grammar. With co'j iou* 
Notes and a Vocabulary. 12mo. $1. 

The favorable reception which Ollendorff's German Grammar has received from the 
American public, has induced the Publishers and the Editor to comply with the very 
general demand for a German Reader. 

The plan of this Reader is as follows, viz. : 

1. The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best authors, and are so 
arranged as to present sufficient variety to keep alive the interest of the scholar. 

2. It is progressive in its nature, the pieces being at first very short and easy, and 
increasing in difficulty and length as the learner advances. 

3. At the bottom of the page constant references to the Grammar are made, and the 
difficult passages explained and rendered. To encourage the first attempt of the learner 
as much as possible, the twenty-one pieces of the first section are analyzed, and all the 
necessary words given at the bottom of the page. The notes, which at first are ver\ 
abundant, diminish as the learner advances. 

4. It contains five sections. The first contains easy pieces, chiefly in prose, with all 
the words necessary for translating them ; the Second, short pieces in prose and poetry 
alternately, with copious notes and renderings; the third, short popular tales of Grimm 
end others; the fourth, select ballads and other poems from Buerger, Goethe, Schil 
ler, Uhland, Sciiwer, Cha.misso, &c. ; the fifth, prose extracts from the first classics. 

5. At the end is added a Vocabulary of all the words occurring in the book* 



PROP. OEHLSCHLAGER. 

A Pronouncing German Reader ; 

To which is added, Method of Learning to Eead and Tj.idersWnd the 
German Language, with or without a Teacher. 12mo. $1. 

- -The study of the German for the purposes equally of literature, art, science, and. 
commerce, is making rapid advances in the United States. It would not be surprising 
u the German were eventually more studied in this country than the French. It ii 
therefore important to note with some emphasis all improvements in the mode of teach- 
ing the language. ^ Among these we have seen none — not excepting Ollendorff's — thai 
lifters more facilities for both teacher and learner, or that shows more practical wisdom, 
than Oehlsch lager's German Reader, just quoted. The author has been for many years 
is successful teacher of the German, his native tongue, in Philadelphia, and he has given 
In this book the fruits of an intelligent experience. The time has come when the old, 
humdrum method of learning languages— living languages certainly—should be aban- 
doned, once and for ever. A living language should be learned by foreigners, .just as it 
Is by children. Pronunciation comes by imitation, phrases and idioms by example and 
repetition. The logic of language is an afterthought, something to b* applied after ti'* 
langaage is learned, not as a means of learning it.'* — ZZ S. Gazette. 
26 



D. Appleton & CoSs Educational Publications. 
PROP. G. J. ADLER. 

A Dictionary of the German and English Lan* 

guages ; indicating the Accentuation of every German Word, contain- 
ing several Hundred German Synonyms, together with a Classification 
and Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, and a Dictionary of Ger- 
man Abbreviations. Compiled from the Works of Hilpert, Flxjgev 
Greib, Heyse, and others. In two Parts : I. German and English — II. 
English and German. One large vol. 8vo., of over 1400 pages. Price $5, 

u In preparing this volume, our principal aim was to offer to the American student 
of the German a work which would embody all the valuable results of the most recent 
invest isrations in German Lexicography, and which might thus become not only a relia- 
ble guide for the practical acquisition of that language, but one which would not forsake 
him in the higher walks of his pursuit, to which its literary and scientific treasures 
should naturally invite him. The conviction that such a work was a desideratum, and 
one which claimed immediate attention, was first occasioned by the steadily increasing 
interest, manifested in the study of the German by such among us as covet a highef 
intellectual culture, as well as those who are ambitious to be abreast with the times in 
all that concerns the interestsjof Learning, Science, Art, and Philosophy. 

" In comparing the different German-English Dictionaries, it was found that all of 
them were deficient in their vocabulary of foreign words, which now acts so important 
a part not only in scientific works, but also in the best classics, in the reviews, journals, 
newspapers, and even in conversational language of ordinary life. Plence we have en- 
deavored to supply the desired words required in Chemistry, Mineralogy, Practical Art, 
Commerce, Navigation, Rhetoric, Grammar, Mythology, both ancient and modern. The 
accentuation of the German words, first introduced by Hernsius, and not a little im- 
proved by Hilpert and his coadjutors, has also been adopted, and will be regarded as a 
most desirable and invaluable aid to the student. Another, and it is hoped not the least, 
valuable addition to the volume, are the synonymes, which we have generally given in 
9-ii abridged and not unfrequently in a new form, from Hilpert, who was the" first that 
offered to the English student a selection from the rich stores of Eberhard, Maas, and 
Gruber. Nearly all the Dictionaries published in Germany having been prepared with 
special reference to the German student of the English, and being on that account in- 
complete in the German-English part, it was evidently our vocation to reverse the ordei 
for this side of the Atlantic, and to give the utmost possible completeness and perfection 
to the German part. This was the proper sphere of our labor." — Extract from 
Preface. 

PROF. Gk J. ADLER. 

A Dictionary of the German and English Lan- 

gvages Abridged from the Author's larger Work, for the use of 
Learners.. In two Parts: L German and English — II. English and oil- 
man One vol. 12mo., of over 800 pages. $1 75. 

' The larger work of Adler, of which this is an abridgment, has become an authority 
;>n the German language. It is now well known and in extensive use among German 
scholars. In making this abridgment, the author has gone over the entire ground of 
the larger work again ; revising, condensing, or adding, as the case might require. AU 
provincialism, synonymes, and strictly scientific terms, have been excluded from these 
pages, and every thing that might prove unnecessary, or embarrassing to beginners, or 
to travellers and others, for whom a smaller volume is better adapted. Some othe? 
e anges have also been made, which were deemed important to render the work still 
w ire acceptable for educational purposes. It can hardly fail to become as universally 
? proved in the sphere for which it. is designed, as the larger work has been by more 

. ahced German scholars." — Courier' & Enquirer. 

"Professor Adler, who fills the department of the German Language and Literature 
in the University of this city, is an accomplished scholar, and has done vast service to 
the cause of spreading a knowledge of the Teutonic language in this country. His larger 
vork, of which this is an abridgment, is the very best extant for advanced students. 
The work before us is abridged and simplified in several respects, to adapt it to tha 
•rants and capacities of beginners. "—Christian Intelligencer. 
21 



D. Appleton & CoSs Educational Publication*. 
OLLENDORFF. 

New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and 

Speak tlie Italian Language* With Additions and Corrections, by Felix 
Foresti. 12mo. $1 50, 

%W A Key to the Exercises, in a separate volume. Price 75 cents, 

" At no period have we had facilities for acquiring a knowledge equal to those we 
asw have, by means of Ollendorff's method. Indeed, no set of books has ever appeared, 
letter adapted for the object they have in view than are his ; and we hail with peculiar 
pleasure the appearance of the above-mentioned work, which puts it into the power 
of any one to make himself master of that beautiful language, the Italian, in the course 
of a few months. 

5 We have no doubt it will find its way quickly into. our schools and colleges."— 
National. 

" Die system of learning and teaching the livkig languages by Ollendorff, Is so su- 
perior to all other modes, that in England and on the continent of Europe, scarcely 
any other is in use, in well-directed Academies and other Institutions of learning. To 
those who feel disposed to cultivate an acquaintance with Italian literature, this work 
will prove invaluable, abridging, by an immense deal, the period commonly employed 
In studying the language." 



PROF. E. F. FORESTI 

Crestomazia Italiana : 

A Collection of Selected Pieces in Italian Prose. Designed as a Class 
Beading-Book for Beginners in the Study of the Italian Language. 
12mo. $1. 

"The Italian Eeadep., compiled by Mr. Foresti, is designed to follow the study of 
Ollendorff's Italian Grammar, on which work many correct judges have pronounced 
that no important improvement can well be made. In making selections for the book 
before us, Mr. Foresti has preferred modern Italian writers to the old school of novel- 
ists, historians, and poets. In this he has done a good thing. 

" The selections in the Italian Beader are from popular authors, such as Botta, Man- 
Eoni. Machiavelli, Villani, and others. They are so made as not to constitute mere ex- 
ercises, but contain distinct relations so complete as to gratify the reader and engage bis 
attention while they instruct. This is a marked improvement on that old system which 
exacted much labor without enlisting the sympathies of the student. The selections 
from Manzoni, for example, are from the " PromexH Spoil," one of the noblest works 
0>f fiction ev< r issued from the press — a work so popular as to have gone through an in- 
credible number of editions in Italy, while it has been translated into every language of 
Europe. There have been, we believe, no less than three distinct English translations 
tnade, two of which were done in this country. The Reader contains six extracts from 
ihis novel, among which are the beautiful episodes of Father Cristoforo and the Nu.i of 
Monza, and a description of the famine and plague of Milan in the year 1630. The ac- 
count of the plague rivals the celebrated one of Boccacio in his Decameron. The idioms 
that occur in the selections are explained by a glossary appended to each. The Italian 
Reader can with confidence be recommended to students in the language as » safe and 
Bure guide. After mastering it, the Italian poets and other classicists may be approached 
with confidence."— Savannah Republican,. 

28 



D. Appleton & Cols Educational Publications. 
OLLENDORFF, 

New Method of Learning to Bead, Write,, and 

Speak the Spanish Language. With an Appendix, contair..n^ a brief, 
but comprehensive Kecapitulation of the Rules as well as of all ths 
Verbs, both Regular and Irregular, so as to render their use easy and 
familiar to the most ordinary capacity. Together with Practical Rules 
for Spanish Pronunciation, and Models of Social and Commercial Cor- 
respondence. The whole designed for Young Learners and Persons 
whc are their own Instructors. By M. Velazquez and T. SmoNNE, Pro- 
feasor.* of the Spanish and French Languages. One volume 12mo., ol 
560 pages. Price %\ 50. 

" It contains the best rules we have ever yet seen, for learning a living language*. 
From the outset, the elements of the language are communicated, with the grand object 
of serving for oral effect; to teach how to articulate, to speak, to communicate in Span- 
ish. This is the chief aim of all Ollendorff's elementary works on languages, and consti- 
tutes their well deserved claim on the respect of all who are engaged in tht business of 
teaching. In most of the colleges and large seminaries of learning in Europe and Amer- 
ica, the system of this profoundly thinking German scholar has displaced all others, so 
far as the acquirement of language is concerned. 

"It leads the student on, by almost imperceptible steps, from the simplest principles 
to the most recondite and complex combinations of grammatical constructions; and the 
parts are so arranged, as we maintained before, as to render every thing subservient to 
that which should be the chief point of view, the great object of ambition, viz., use, 
speech, conversation. Every part of speech, every simple and compound sentence, is so 
analyzed, so illustrated by explanatory dialogues, that it is impossible to open the book, 
at any pa§e, without acquiring some valuable information, capable of advancing the stu- 
dent in his progress as a linguist — a practical, that is, a talking, not a theoretic scholar. 
We warmly commend it to all our fellow-citizens." — Republic. 

" This method of learning Spanish is even more widely useful, especially in this 
country, than those which have preceded it, since recent events have rendered a know- 
ledge of Spanish more than usually important to all classes of our people. The editors 
of tiie work are widely known as accomplished scholars and distinguished teachers, and 
the book derives still higher authority from their connection with it. We commend it 
ffith great confidence to all who desire to become acquainted with the Castilian tongue." 
— New- York Courier & Enquirer. 



OLLENDORFF'S METHOD FOR SPANIARDS TO 
LEARN ENGLISH. 

Metodo Para Aprender a Leer, Escriber y 

Hallar El Ingles, segun el Sistema de Ollendorff: con un tratado de 
pronunciation al principia y un apendice importante al fin, que serve 
de. Complemento a la obra, por Kamon Valanzuela y Juan de la C. 
Carkeno. 12mo. $2. 

Key to the Exercises, in a separate volume, 75 cents. 

* This Grammar contains the system of Ollendorff applied to the English, for th* 
aae of those with whom the Spanish is the native tongue. The excellence of this system 
Is well known, and the present volume is the first application of it to our language 
which has been offered to the citizens of Spain, Cuba, Mexico, or South America. It if 
prepared In a manner highly creditable to its authors, and can scarcely fail of meeting a 
Irign appreciation with those who have already begun t .» encounter the difficulties of our 
language." — Journal of Commerce. 

" This is a work for the use of Spaniards learning English. The author? have availed 
themselves of the method of Ollendorff, to present to the learner successively the 
various inflections, terms, idioms, and other peculiarities of the English language. A 
treatise on the pronunciation of English accompanies the work, prepared evidently with 
great care," — Evening Post 
99 



D. Appleton & Ooh Educational Publications. 
OLLENDORFF. 

New Method of Learning to Read, Write, and 

Speak the French Language: with an Appendix, containing the Cardinal 
and Ordinal Numbers, and full Paradigms of the Kegular and Irregu* 
lar, Auxiliary, Benective, arid Impersonal Verbs. By J. L. Jewett* 
One volume 12mo. $1. 

A Key to the Exercises,, in a separate volume. 75 cents. 



44 New Method op Learning- the French Language. — This Grammar must sn> 
f^rsede all others now used for instruction in the French language. Its conception and 
srrangement are admirable, — the work evidently of a mind familiar with the deficiencies 
©f the systems, the place of which it is designed to supply. In all the works of the kind 
that have fallen under our notice, there has been so much left unexplained or obscure, 
and so many things have been omitted — trifles, perhaps, in the estimation oi the author, 
but the cause of great embarrassment to the learner — that they have been comparatively 
valueless as self-instructors. The student, deceived by their' specious pretensions, has 
not proceeded far before he has felt himself in a condition similar to that of a mariner 
who should put out to sea without a compass to direct him'. He has encountered diffi- 
culty after difficulty, to which his Grammar afforded no clue; when, disappointed and 
discouraged, he has f either abandoned the study in disgust, or if his means permitted, 
has resorted to a teacher to accomplish what it was not in his power to effect by the aid 
of his ' self-instructor.' 

"Ollendorff has passed his roller over the whole field of French instruction, and the 
rugged inequalities formerly to be encountered, no longer discourage the learner. What 
were the difficulties of the language, are here mastered in succession ; and the only sur- 
prise of the student, as he passes from lesson to lesson, is, that he meets none of these 
'lions in the way.' 

"The value of the work has been greatly enhanced by a careful revision, and the 
addition of an appendix containing matter essential to its completeness either as a book 
for the use of teachers or for self-instruction." — New- York Commercial Advertiser. 



OLLENDORFF. 

Neiv Method of Learning to Read, Write, and 

Speafc tlie French Language : with the Lessons divided into Sections of 
a Proper Length for Daily Tasks, and numerous Corrections, Additions, 
and Improvements, suitable for this country, by V. Value ; to which is 
added Value's System of French Pronunciation ; his Grammatical Sy- 
nopsis ; a New Index, and Short Models of Commercial Correspond- 
ence. One volume 12mo. Price $1. 
fl^P" A Key to the Exekcises, in a separate volume. ¥5 cents. 

"Mr. Value has taught practically Ollendorff's system for many years, and has be- 
stowed much thought and labor on the improvement of this edition. The longer les- 
sons have been judiciously subdivided ; much attention has been bestowed upon the 
arrangement of the exercises relating to the subjunctive mood: besides the system o! 
pronunciation, we have an excellent grammatical synopsis, which appears to us, on a 
brief examination, very happily constructed and of great value. In his preface the au- 
thor mentions several minute corrections made in this edition, which show the care and 
accuracy bestowed upon it." — Churchman. 
"Messrs. D. Appleton & Co.: — 
" Gentlemen, 

"I have carefully perused your new edition of Ollendorff by Mr. Value, and find 
U contains all the improvements the original work so much required It is evidently 
the result of long research, time, and latibr, founded upon experience and a thorough 
knowledge of the system, and in my estimation far superior %o any work of the kind 
which I have yet met with. I intend adopting the use of it in my classes. 
•' Yours, respectfully, 

"J. KOEMER, 
" Professor of the French Language in tlie, JV". T. Free Academy? 



4 



1 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process.; 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Nov. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



